PROCEEDINGS 


OF THE 


ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES 


OF 


PHILADELPHIA. 


1896. 


COMMITTEE ON PUBLICATION: 
CHARLES E. Situ, 


THomMAs MEEHAN, 
GeEorGE H. Hory, M. D., 


Epwarp J. Nouan, M. D., 
Henry Skinner, M. D. 


Epiror: EDWARD J. NOLAN, M. D. 


(2Ay 
\ 3 
Rove 
Bias. 
Se NEF 
a 
A 


PHILADELPHIA : 
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES, 
LOGAN SQUARE. 
1897. 


ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 
February 4, 1897. 
I hereby certify that printed copies of the Proceedings of the 
Academy for 1896 have been presented to the meetings of the Academy 
as follows :— 


Pages 9to 24 February 25, 1896. 
‘« 25 to 104 March 17, 1896. 
‘¢ 105 to 168 April 14, 1896. 
‘* 169 to 200 April 21, 1896. 
s¢ 6-201 to 216 May 12, 1896. 
‘¢ 6217 to 264 May 26, 1896. 
eG onto OU June 16, 1896. 
‘© 981 to 812 July 21, 1896. 
‘¢ 3138 to 376 August 4, 1896. 
‘¢ 377 to 892 August 11, 1896. 
** 393 to 456 September 15, 1896. 
‘« 457 to 466 September 22, 1896. 
“467 to 482 October 27, 1896. 
‘« 483 to 546 December 8, 1896. 
‘« 547 to 562 December 15, 1896. 
‘¢ 563 to 594 February 2, 1897. 


EDWARD J. NOLAN, 
Recording Secretary. 


THE EDWARDS & DOCKER CO, PRINTERS, PHILA 


LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS. 


With reference to the several articles contributed by each. 


For Verbal Communications see General Index. 


Allen, Harrison, M.D. A biographical sketch of Jobn Adams 
Ryder : 

Note on a uniform Sian 6 econ he human aici 
Brown, Amos P. The crystallization of Molybdenite fe 
Cockerell, T. D. A. The Bees of the Genus Perdita F. Smith . 
‘Cook, 0. F. Summary of the new Liberian Polydesmoidea 
Cope, Edward D. The Mesenteries of the Sauria 

New and little-known Mammalia from the Port Rennes 

Bone Deposit F 
On the Hemipenes of ‘lie Sule : : 
Dall, William Healey. Insular landshell ns, especiallsy as 
illustrated by the data obtained by Dr. G. Baur in the 
Galapagos Islands (Plates XV, XVI, XVII) : 
Dolley, Charles S., M.D. The Planktonokrit, a centrifugal ap- 
paratus for the volumetric estimation of the erie 
of oysters and other aquatic animals 
Fox, William J. Contributions to a knowledge of the Tvs men- 
optera of Brazil. No.1, Scoliidae. . : 
The Hymenoptera collected by A. Monaleon Sunith in 
Northeastern Africa 
Harris, Gilbert D. New and interesting SmaCenG Molluscs coun 
the Gulf States (Plates XVIII, XIX, XX, XXI, XXII, 
EORCLLT), : =e 
Henry, Fredk. P., M. D. Ber on Tei 
Keller, Ida A. The coloring matter of the Aril of elastrus 
scandens 
Pilsbry, Henry A. New species oF one icici Geand Poly gyra 
(Plates II and IIT) : 
Description of new species of Mollusks 
A remarkable Central American Melanian 


bo bo | b> 
orb & NT bo 
ST Oes 


New species of fresh water Mollusks from South America 
(Plates XX VI and XXVII) 
Geology of the mussel-bearing 8 of Fish- Ree’ Ny 
Jersey a 
Pilsbry, Henry A. aad ‘Sacinal N. Bhonde: Contributions to the 
Zoology of Tennessee. No. 4, Mollusks :% 
Pilsbry, Henry A. and E. G. Vanatta. Catalogue of the species 
of Cerion, with descriptions of new forms (Plate XI) 
Revision of the North American Slugs: Ariolimax and 
Aphallarion (Plates XII, XIII, XIV) 
Rhoads, Samuel N. Contributions to the Zoology of Tannese 
No. 3, Mammals 
Synopsis of the Polar ies o North: Uenee (Plates Vv I, 
WIE VIEL, LX,. 2) a 
Mammals collected by Dr. A. Donaldson Siaith Beane ia 
expedition to Lake Rudolf, Africa (Plate XXV) .... 
Shufeldt, R. W., M.D. Fossil birds and Mammals from Grotto 
Pietro Tamponi and Grive-St. Alban (Plate XXTV) 
Stone, Witmer. The molting of birds, with special reference to 
the plumage of the smaller land birds of Eastern North 
America (Plates IV and V) 


561 


567 


487 


815 


350 


108 


Eh OCHH DINGS 


OF THE 


ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES 


OF 


RATEADE DP iA 


1896. 


JANUARY 7. 
The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 


One hundred and forty-three persons present. 

The deaths of R. B. Haines and A. C. Gorgas, M. D., members, 
were announced. 

The Council reported that the following Standing Committees 
have been appointed to serve during the current year :— 

On Liprary.—Arthur Erwin Brown, Harrison Allen, M. D., 
Henry C. Chapman, M. D., Chas. P. Perot and Henry A. Pilsbry. 

On Pusriications.—Thomas Meehan, Charles E. Smith, George 
H. Horn, M. D., Edward J. Nolan, M. D. and Henry Skinner, M.D. 

On InsrrRucTION AND LeEctrures.—Harrison Allen, M. D., 
Benjamin Sharp, M. D., George Vaux, Jr., C. Newlin Peirce, 
D. D.S. and Uselma C. Smith. 

SranpinG CommirrEE oF Councit on By-Laws.—lIsaac J. 
Wistar, Theodore D. Rand, William Sellers and Benjamin Tilgh- 


man. 
2 


10 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


The following minute was unanimously adopted : 

In view of the fact that GenERAL Isaac J. WisTAR has served 
four consecutive years, the limit defined by the By-Laws, as Presi- 
dent of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, his 
fellow members desire to indicate their esteem and affection by a 
cordial endorsement of the minute of recognition adopted by the 
Council and to express the hope that the Academy may long profit 
by the clearness of judgment, the knowledge of affairs and the 
courtesy of personal intercourse which have been the characteristics 
of his administration. 

Dr. BensAMIN SHARP made a second communication on his 
ethnological studies in Alaska and Siberia. (No abstract). 


JANUARY 14. 
The President, SamuEt G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 


Thirty-four persons present. 
The death of Samuel G. Lewis, a member, was announced. 


A paper entitled ‘“‘ New Species of the Helicoid Genus Polygyra,” 
by H. A. Pilsbry, was presented for publication. 


Pleurotomaria crotaloides Morton in the New Jersey Cretaceous.— 
Me. H. A. Pruspry exhibited a fossil Plewrotomaria from Mullica 
Hill, New Jersey, found by Henry L. Balderston when on a excur- 
sion of the geological class of Westtown School, and submitted to 
the speaker by Lewis Woolman. 

The specimen is an internal cast and has lost the earlier whorls. 
Enough remains, however, to distinguish it as a strongly marked 
species, apparently identical with Cirrus crotaloides Morton’, des- 
eribed from Erie, Alabama. 

The species has not been noticed since its original publication in 
1834, and as Morton’s description is very brief (less than three 
lines long) and involves a grave inaccuracy, and his figure is 
decidedly uncharacteristic, a more detailed description of the spec- 
imen discovered by Mr. Balderston is here given, followed by notes 
on Morton’s type specimen. It may be described as follows: 
PLEUROTOMARIA CROTALOIDEs Morton. (Plate I). 

Shell (cast) rather discoidal, the spire low-conic, base flattened 
and very broadly umbilicated. Whorls slowly increasing, very 
convex, separated by deep sutures; the last whorl strongly convex 
on the upper surface, thence sloping outward to the periphery, which 
is quite convex again, and near the base of the whorl. Base dis- 


1 Synopsis of the Organic Remains of the Cretaceous Group of the U.S. 
p. 49, pl. 19, fig. 5. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 11 


tinctly flattened, though convex. Umbilicus somewhat exceeding 
one-third the total diameter, broad, deep and perspective, the sutures 
within it strongly impressed. 

Diameter 7 em.; width of last whorl at aperture (measured below) 
26 mm.; alt. of same about 19 mm. 

The surface of the cast is smooth, not showing the impression of 
the anal fasciole. The sinus was probably short, at least in compar- 
ison with the large recent species; but as the latter third of the 
specimen is largely concealed by a hard arenaceous matrix, no im- 
pression of the anal sinus can be made out. The unremoved matrix 
shows clear impressions (external moulds) of the characteristic Lower 
and Middle Marl bed species Plicatula urticosa Mort. and Ostrea 
larva Lam. 

In Pleurotomaria perlata Conr., the periphery is more strongly 
keeled and the umbilicus narrower than in this species. In Pleuro- 
trema solariformis Whitt. the whorls are flatter both outside and 
within the umbilicus, and the slit is said to be bridged at intervals, 
though this last feature is excessively obscure if present in the type 
specimen. 

The specimen described above is the property of Henry L. Bal- 
derston and has for the present been deposited in the museum of 
the Academy. 

The type of Cirrus crotaloides Morton is a much smaller shell, 
alt. 18, diam. 39 mm. It is an internal east of whitish alent 
material (“rotten limestone”). The last whorl has been broken 
above near the aperture, and the whorls of spire are slightly distorted 
on one side by pressure, and have lost considerable material by ero- 
sion. The umbilicus is filled to its verge with a calcareo-arenaceous 
matrix, harder than the cast itself, and a narrowly conic protuber- 
ance of the same material projects over the apex. This has been 
mistaken by Morton for the true spire, which accounts for his words 
“the two first whorls [sic] suddenly produced.” In reality the true 
apex of the shell is concealed by this bit of hard matrix, about three 
whorls being visible. The contour of the last whorl is practically 
identical with that shown in the middle figure of the plate illustrat- 
ing the Mullica Hill specimen. No impression of the anal sinus or 
fasciole is visible on the cast. 

Erie, the locality where Conrad collected the type of crotaloides, 
is on the Black Warrior River, in the Selma Chalk or “ Rotten © 
Limestone ” member of the Alabama Cretaceous. 


JANUARY 21. 
The President, Samurt G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 


Fifty-two persons present. 
Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :— 


12 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


“Descriptions of New Species of Mollusks,” by H. A. Pilsbry. 
“The Molting of Birds with special reference to the Plumage 
of the Smaller Birds of Eastern North America,’ by Witmer 


Stone. 
The deaths of George Edward Dobson and Don Antonio del 


Castillo, correspondents, were announced. 


JANUARY 28. 
The President, SAMUEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 


Thirteen persons present. 

A paper entitled “Contributions to the Zoology of Tennessee, 
No. 8, Mammals,” by Samuel N. Rhoads, was presented for publica- 
tion. 

A resolution having been adopted at the preceding meeting pro- 
viding for an inquiry as to the best method of exterminating the 
Tussock Moth, Orgyia leucostigma, with which the city squares and 
trees are infested, the subject was referred to the Entomological 
Section, a committee of which reported as follows :— 


We would recommend for the destruction and extermination of 
the Tussock Moth, Orgyia leucostigma, that as soon as possible all 
the egg masses be hand-picked from the trees and destroyed. To be 
effective, this must be done before the first day of April. The 
trunk of each tree should be encircled about five feet from the 
ground by a band of “ Raupenleim” or Dendroline, four inches 
wide and a quarter of an inch thick ; this band should be renewed 
once a month during the summer season. All eggs, cocoons and 
caterpillars segregated below the band should be gathered and 
burned ; or they may be killed by steam or by the flame apparatus 
used by house painters. 

The committee is confident that the above method, if properly 
carried out, will exterminate the species in a given locality in two 
or three seasons, and put them under control the first summer. _ The 
committee has never seen this method properly carried out. Failure 
in the past has been due to the integrity of the band not being 
maintained and to the fact that a few segregated insects and eggs 
were simply brushed to the ground where the eggs hatched and the 
caterpillars reascended the trees. The life-history of the species 
will show why the methods described must prove successful, and we 
append an account of the transformations of this defoliator of our 
shade trees :— 

“These caterpillars are first noticed on the trees in May, quite 
small, feeding on the leaves, and somewhat indifferently on either 


1896. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 13 


the upper or under side. When suddenly disturbed they drop from 
their perch, suspending themselves by a silken thread, which is at- 
tached to the leaf from which they started. They retain this habit 
until they are nearly full-grown, which occurs about the middle or 
toward the end of June. They then begin to wander, leaving the 
trees on which they have fed, often crawling to others, and some- 
times travelling several hundred feet from the starting point before 
deciding to pupate. When they are ready for the change they spin 
their whitish cocoon in any convenient place; in the angles of 
wooden tree boxes, under the rails of fences, in the interstices of bark 
of the trees themselves, and in fact in any likely or unlikely place 
except a perfectly flat, smooth surface. The caterpillar has a very 
small supply of silk only, and to eke this out uses its own hair 
which it breaks off close to the body and forms the cocoon by a sort 
of felting process, the silk serving to give form and holding together 
the hair. In the cocoon the larve change to dirty yellowish or 
gray pup, the male much smaller than the female and showing 
rudiments of the future wings, while the female is nearly double the 
size and is grub or slug-likein form. Less than two weeks there- 
after the final change takes place and the adults emerge—the sexes 
strikingly dissimilar in appearance. The male has two pairs of | 
broad dusty gray wings, the anteriors crossed by narrow black 
lines, and with a more or less prominent white spot toward the 
lower outer angle. The feelers or antenne are broadly feathered 
and prominent, while the fore-legs are plumed and tufted, stretched 
straight forward when the moth is at rest, so as to be the most 
conspicuous feature of the insect. The female, on the other hand, is 
entirely without wings, and somewhat slug-like, consisting princi- 
pally of an abdomen, which is enormously distended with eggs. 
When she emerges from the pupa, she crawls upon the cocoon to 
which she clings, almost motionless for the balance of her life. 
Egg-laying begins soon after impregnation, the eggs being laid upon 
the old cocoon and covered with a frothy mass, which soon be- 
comes hard and brittle and is snowy-white. As the eggs are laid, 
the female diminishes in size, eventually shrinking almost into 
nothingness and finally drops off dead. Neither male nor female 
takes food in this stage, their adult existence is devoted merely to 
reproduction. From the egg-masses above described, a second 
brood of larve hatches in July and the same life cycle is repeated, 
the adults of this brood appearing in September. The eggs laid at 
this time of life remain unhatched during the winter.” 

It will be readily seen from this life history that the females 
being wingless the species can only be distributed by the crawling 
propensity of the caterpillar; this, together with the fact that the 
eggs are all laid in a mass, gives the key to the method of destroy- 
ing them. Each egg-mass destroyed means the death of about three 


1 Rept. Ent. Dep., N. J. Agric. Col. Exp. Station, 1894. 


14 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


hundred and fifty caterpillars. It takes a little experience to find the 
egg-masses in the winter, and very few would escape, to hatch out, if 
they were intelligently sought for. It must be remembered that 
they go through their metamorphoses almost in an automatic way 
and human endeavor to check them must proceed after the same 
plan, an old Latin phrase not being forgotten: ‘ Nihil sine labore.’ 
Generally no attention is paid to pests of this kind until they 
become so bad as to attract the attention of the general public. 
Respectfully submitted by 


HENRY SKINNER, : a fs 
Wu. J. Fox, f Committee of the Entomological Section. 


The following were elected members: Henry Trimble, Charles 
E. Hite, C. Howard Colket, George de Schweinitz, M. D., James 
C. Corry, D. Calvin Mensch, Edward Gideon, I. Norris de Haven, 
Ruth Clement, M. D., and Sarah Y. Stevenson. 


The following were ordered to be printed :— 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 15 


NEW SPECIES OF THE HELICOID GENUS POLYGYRA. 
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY. 


At the request of Mr. John Ponsonby of London, the determina- 
tion of a series of Polygyras of unknown or doubtful specific 
identity, from his collection, was undertaken by the writer. In the 
course of this work, the Mexican species of the genus were reviewed, 
the identification of the Academy’s material verified, and several 
specific forms, hitherto nameless or under incorrect names, were 
studied. 

The following communication relates to species of that character- 
istic ‘‘ Lower Sonoran ” group of Polygyra, of which P. plagioglossa 
and P. ventrosula represent approximately the extremes in the 
cycle of form changes. 

The types of P. latispira, matermontana and euglypta are in the 
collection of the Academy. The types of P. Ponsonbyi are in the 
same collection and that of Mr. Ponsonby; and the type of P. 
albicostulata is in Ponsonby’s collection. 

These five species, with P. Mearnsii and P. chiricahuana Dall 
(Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., 1895), and P. solidens and P. triangularis 
Mabille (Bull. Soc. Philomath. de Paris, 1895) complete the list of 
Polygyras given in the Guide to the Study of Helices, pp. 73, 74. 
P. latispira n. sp. Pl. ITI, figs. 13, 14, 15, 16. 

Shell depressed, with convex spire, rounded but noticeably shoul- 
dered periphery and convex base; umbilicated, the umbilicus 
within deep and cylindrical, about *8 mm. diam., at the last whorl 
rapidly enlarging, 2°3 mm. diam., or contained about five times in 
the diameter of the shell, conspicuously grooved inside. Surface 
very closely and regularly rib-striate, moderately shining. Light 
yellow or buff in color. Whorls 52, closely coiled, slowly widening, 
rather convex, having an oblique impression behind the outer, and 
an excavation behind the basallip. Suture well impressed, descend- 
ing only a trifle at the aperture. 

Aperture quite oblique, roundly lunate, the lip forming two-thirds 
of a circle, rather narrowly reflexed ; outer lip bearing an inwardly 
projecting pointed tooth ; basal lip with a slightly keeled face along 


16 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


its outer half, the inner part bearing a rather long, low, callous 
tooth with the summit a trifle flanged outwardly. Deep within the 
aperture a lobe-like tooth may be seen on the columella. Parietal 
tooth small, V-shaped, the outer ridge of the V extremely short. 

Alt. 6, greater diam. 113, lesser 103 mm. 

The specimens serving as types were collected some years ago 
(about 1880) by Dr. Horatio C. Wood in western Texas, either in 
the “Great Bend” of the Rio Grande or near El Paso, exact 
locality not noted. 

The species is somewhat allied to P. plagioglossa, having about 
the same general contour and agreeing in the proportions of the 
parietal lamella; but the armature of the basal lip is conspicuously 
different, and there is a deep-seated lamella on the columella, such 
as well developed examples of P. Mooreana show, but apparently 
united by a low ridge with the inner end of the basal tooth. This 
lamella corresponds to the groove within the umbilicus, and is not 
visible in the drawings. 

P. matermontana n. sp. PI. ITI, figs. 10, 11, 12. 

Shell depressed, with low, convex spire, rounded periphery and 
convex base; umbilicated, the axial perforation small and deep, at 
the last whorl rapidly enlarging to about one-fifth the diameter of 
shell. Surface shining, faintly wrinkled by growth-lines and show- 
ing under the lens superficial close spirals in some places; light 
horn colored. Whorls 53, quite convex, the inner slowly increas- 
ing, narrow, the last decidedly wider, notably convex above, with 
the periphery above the middle; deeply and narrowly constricted 
behind the lip. Suture well impressed, abruptly deflexed in front. 

Aperture quite oblique, rounded oval, the lip forming over two- 
thirds of the circumference; outer lip broadly expanded, flaring, 
bearing a concave lamella with a denticle at the lower end on its 
inner edge; basal lip reflexed, with a compressed, slightly entering 
tooth. Parietal callus a translucent film, bearing a V-shaped lam- 
ella not connected with the peristome, the outer branch of the V 
very short. 

Alt. 5°2, greater diam. 9°5, lesser 8 mm. 

Colima, Sierra Madre Mts., Mexico. 

Besides the types from above locality, there is one specimen in 
the collection of the Academy labelled “ Mexico” differing in size, 
alt. 6:1, greater diam. 11 mm., and having 6 whorls. It agrees in 
‘all other characters and is doubtless the same specifically. Two 
other specimens labelled “Texas” are altogether like the types. 


1896. ]} NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. ily 


P. matermontana is like texasiana in the notch between the two 
lip-teeth, but the outer tooth is a more pronounced and shorter 
lamella, the parietal “ V”’ is less developed, and the upper surface 
is not costulate, The parietal lamella is much alike in matermon- 
tana and latispira, the outer branch being much less developed than 
in Richardsoni, ventrosula or bicruris. The umbilicus is like that of 
latispira, being slightly more ample than in texasiana, and with 
the central well, or perforation decidedly larger. 

This species and the three following have nearly the same 
form of aperture teeth and are very similar to other species group- 
ing immediately around P. ventrosula in this respect. The compar- 
ative width of umbilicus, the sculpture, and to a less extent, the 
contour, differ in the several forms. The inverted T shaped tooth 
upon the outer lip, formed by a lamella parallel to the lip-edge with 
a shorter one at its lower end, transverse to it, is characteristic of 
the group. 

P. Ponsonbyin.sp. Pl. II, figs. 1, 2, 3. 

Shell globose-depressed, with low conoid-conyex spire, rounded 
periphery and convex base. Umbilicus one-sixth the diameter of 
shell, with flattened, nearly vertical walls, narrowing to a perfora- 
tion beyond the last whorl. Surface shining, smooth except for 
extremely faint growth-wrinkles ; corneous-brown, with a chestnut- 
brown super-peripheral band on the body-whorl, appearing on the 
spire as a narrow sutural margination. Whorls 53, convex, slowly 
widening, the last decidedly wider, tumid on the latter half of the 
base, deeply and narrowly constricted behind the outer and basal 
lips. Suture well and evenly impressed, abruptly and deeply 
deflexed in front. 

Aperture very oblique, rounded-oval, the lip forming three-fourths 
of the circumference. Outer lip broadly flaring, its inner edge bear- 
ing a short concave lamella, with a projecting compressed tooth at 
its lower end; basal lip reflexed, with a similar compressed tooth. 
Parietal wall bearing a short, erect, straight lamina parallel with 
the basal lip, and having a veryshort V-branch at the outer end; 
the inner termination not extending to the columella insertion. 

Alt. 5, greatest diam. 8°2, lesser 7°2 mm. 

Types from Mexico, exact locality not known, in the collections 
of John Ponsonby and the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philad. 

Like ventrosula and Richardsoni in the teeth of the lip, but more 
globose than either, parietal tooth with only a trace of the outer 


18 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


branch of the V, base more tumid, and umbilicus of last whor! more 
well-like. 


P. euglyptan. sp. PI. II, figs. 7, 8, 9. _ 


Shell obese, with low conic spire, rounded-angular periphery 
near the top of last whorl, sloping outer wall and convex, tumid 
base. Umbilicated, a central perforation expanding at last whorl 
to form an umbilicus about one-sixth the diam. of shell, and with 
the wall rising almost vertically from its suture. Surface of outer 
13 whorls sculptured with sharp, strong and regular thread-like sig- 
moid riblets, subobsolete and more numerous by intercalation in the 
immediate vicinity of the umbilicus; the inner whorls of spire 
smooth. Whorls 44-4}, the inner slowly increasing, last whorl 
much wider, very deeply constricted and excavated behind the outer 
and basal lips. Suture impressed, deeply descending in front. 

Aperture extremely oblique, transversely oval, the lip forming 
three-fourths of the circumference, upper and basal margins sub- 
parallel. Outer lip broadly flaring, with a short lamella on its 
inner edge, formed of a compressed, slightly entering portion joined 
T-like to a short lamella parallel to the inner lip-edge; basal lip 
reflexed, bearing a compressed, entering tooth similar to the lower 
portion of the T on outer lip. Parietal tooth like a narrow, slanting 
V, the two branches united with the ends of the lip. 

Alt. 5°3, greater diam. 9°5, lesser 8-2 mill. 

Alt. 4°38, greater diam. 7°5, lesser 6°4 mill. 

Cinaloa (larger form) and Mazatlan (smaller form). 

A member of the P. ventrosula group, distinguished from ventro- 
sula, Hindsi, Richardsoni and bicruris by the very strong, sharp rib- 
striation of the last 14 whorls. 


P. albicostulata n. sp. PI. II, figs. 4, 5, 6. 


Shell obese, with convex spire, periphery much above middle of 
body-whorl, and tumid base. Umbilicated, the umbilicus narrow 
and deep, with vertical walls, not much enlarging at last whorl, 
where it measures about one-ninth the diameter of the shell; within 
the umbilicus the last whorl has a deep spiral furrow, obliquely 
passing into the groove behind the basal lip. Surface shining, the 
latter two whorls sculptured with coarse whitish riblets with corneous 
brown spaces ; inner whorls nearly smooth, corneous brown. Whorls 
54, weakly convex, the last very obtusely angular at its origin, 
becoming rounded and tumid on the latter half, deeply and narrowly 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 19 


constricted behind the outer and basal lips. Suture slightly im- 
pressed, rather abruptly and deeply deflexed in front. 

Aperture oblique, oblong, the upper and basal margins subparal- 
lel; outer lip reflexed, its inner edge bearing a concave lamina 
ending below in a denticle; basal lip reflexed, impinging on the 
umbilicus, with a compressed tooth separated from the lamella on 
outer lip by a deep squarish sinus, a gentle swelling to the left of it. 
Parietal wall glazed with a translucent film, and bearing a long V- 
shaped tooth, the outer branch of which is short and not connected 
with the upper insertion of outer lip. 

Alt. 5°5, greatest diam. 8:5, lesser 7°5 mm. 

Type in collection of Mr. John Ponsonby of London. It is said 
to be from Mexico, and has the appearance of a northern Mexican 
shell. 

The strong, whitish rib-strie, narrow and nearly regular umbilicus 
with spiral groove within on the last whorl, and the aperture much 
as in euglypta, Richardsoni and ventrosula, are a combination of 
characters amply sufficient to distinguish this species from other 
forms now known; and while I am opposed on principle to the 
description of species without exact locality record, it seems best in 
some cases to depart from thissalutary rule. I do not think any one 
will have difficulty in recognizing the species, as no other Polygyra 
having the apertural characters of this one, presents a similar um- 
bilicus or sculpture. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES II and III. 


Fig. 1. Polygyra Ponsonbyi n. sp., seen from below. 

Fig. 2. Polygyra Ponsonbyi n. sp., anterior view. 

Fig. 38. Polygyra Ponsonbyi n. sp., aperture, the plane of peri- 
stome at aright angle to line of vision. 

Fig. 4. Polygyra albicostulata n. sp., from below. 

Fig. 5. Polygyra albicostulata n. sp., anterior view. 

Fig. 6. Polygyra albicostulata n. sp., aperture, the plane of peri- 
stome at a right angle to line of vision. 

Fig. 7. Polygyra euglypta n. sp., aperture, the plane of peristome 
at right angle to line of vision. 

Fig. 8. Polygyra euglypta n.sp., seen from below. 

Fig. 9. Polygyra euglypta n. sp., anterior view. 

Fig. 10. Polygyra matermontana n. sp., anterior view. 

Fig. 11. Polygyra matermontana n. sp., seen from above. 


20 


Fig. 
Fig. 
Fig. 
Fig. 
Fig. 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1896. 


Polygyra matermontana n. sp., seen from below. 

Polygyra latispira n. sp., anterior view. 

Polygyra latispira n. sp., seen from below. 

Polygyra latispira n.sp., seen from above. 

Polygyra latispira n. sp., aperture, the plane of peristome 
at a right angle to line of vision. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 21 


DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES OF MOLLUSKS. 
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY. 


Marginella Veliei n. sp. 

Shell oblong, the body-whorl tapering (somewhat Conus-like) from 
the rounded shoulder to the base, spire conic. Surface brilliant, 
enamelled over the sutures and throughout, pale 
olivaceous-buff, slightly bluish around the middle of 
body-whorl, the outer lip white. Whorls about 5, 
nearly flat, the last convex above, rather flattened 
in the middle. Aperture about four-fifths the length 
of shell, its upper half narrow, lower half about 
twice as wide; pale buff inside; outer lip slightly re- 
tracted at the two ends, smooth within, thickened by 
a moderate white callus outside, which is not pro- 
M. Velici<2, duced upward to the preceding suture. Columella 

bearing four plaits, the lower three subequal, upper 
one slightly smaller and more deeply inserted. 

Alt. 15, diam. 7:1; alt. of aperture 12 mm. 

Alt. 14°6, diam. 7°5; alt. of aperture 11°38 mm. 

Boca Ciega Bay, Florida (Dr. J. W. Velie!). 

This species resembles M. Hindsi Petit in outline, but the callous 
rib of the outer lip is not continued upward as in that species. It 
is notable for the rather slender and tapering form of the body- 
whorl and slight inward bend of the outer lip. It is somewhat re- 
markable that so large a Marginella as this has until now escaped 
notice on our Florida coast. 


Siphonalia semiplicata n. sp. 

Shell fusiform, tapering about an equal distance above and below, 
solid and strong, gray with some indistinct brownish patches. Whorls 
about 8, nucleus smooth (partly lacking by erosion); 53 later 
whorls sculptured with cord-like spirals about equal to their inter- 
vals in width, about 11 in number on penultimate and three preced- 
ing whorls; last 13 whorls having short, sometimes indistinct, sub- 
vertical waves at the shoulder, the preceding whorls merely convex, 
with no vertical folds. Last whorl contracted and produced at base 


22 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


as usual, the siphon nearly straight, a little recurved. Aperture 
livid brown within, contained 1:8 times in length of shell; outer lip 
regularly arched, multilirate within, the lirse extending to within 
about 13 mm. of lip-edge; columella concave above, straight, verti- 
cal and more heavily ealloused in the middle, slanting to the left 
below. Alt. 47, diam. 24 mm. 

Yokohama, Japan. 

Allied to S. fusoides, fuscolineata, etc., but in this species the ver- 
tical waves of the shoulder are entirely absent on the spire; the 
canal is nearly straight. 

In this connection it may be well to call attention to the fact, 
kindly communicated to me by Mr. J. Cosmo Melvill, that Siphon- 
alia Stearnsti Pilsbry is identical with S. pseudobuccinum Melv. and 
S. hyperodon Pils. is the same as S. Mikado Mely. Mr. Melvill’s 
names were proposed in the Journal of Conchology (Leeds), V, p. 348. 


Ischnochiton aspidaulax n. sp. 

Shell oblong, slightly narrower in front, moderately elevated, 
carinated, the side slopes nearly straight. Surface somewhat shin- 
ing, and (a) dark olive at the sides, a light olive band dappled with 
darker spots along the ridge, or (6) light dull bluish dappled with 
yellowish at the apices of valves. 

Median valves not beaked, the sutures concave. Lateral areas 
well defined, but only a trifle raised, sculptured with numerous dis- 
tinct, unequal radial grooves, not extending to the apex, and parted by 
unequal spaces, densely sculptured with oblique or V-shaped scale- 
like granules, the apices of the V’s directed toward the beaks. Central 
areas very densely and minutely sculptured with longitudinal irreg- 
ular wrinkles, somewhat converging, becoming finer toward the 
ridge, coarser in front of the diagonal line. Posterior valve with 
the mucro slightly projecting, somewhat in front of the middle, pos- 
terior slope somewhat concave. 

Interior bluish, with olive stains behind the valve-callus. Sinus 
rather narrow, straight and smooth, angular at the sides. Valve i 
with 10, valves ii to vii with 1-1, valve viii with 10 slits. Teeth 
rather long, sharp and smooth, Eaves narrow, deeply grooved 
above the teeth. 

Girdle covered with compactly, irregularly imbricated glossy 
scales, very weakly striated, and measuring °3 to ‘25 mm. in width ; 
each scale olive-blackish with a broad outer border of white. In a 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 23 


general view, the girdle appears light olive with an ill-defined dusky 
bar opposite each valve. 

Length 18, breadth 9 mm. (exclusive of girdle). Angle of di- 
vergence 119°. 

Panamic region, exact locality not known. 

Specimens of this elaborately sculptured IJschnochiton were re- 
ceived from Mr. W. J. Raymond some years ago. Mr. E. R. Sykes, 
of London, has kindly compared it with the type of I. dispar Sowb., 
and informs me that it is quite distinct, confirming the opinion I 
had already formed from a study of the description and figures of 
that species. From other West American species it is readily dis- 
tinguished by the peculiar sculpture, dorsal keel and the coloration 
of the girdle scales. 

Sagda (?) Gabbi n. sp. 

Shell depressed, with low, conoid-convex spire, round periphery 
and somewhat flattened, convex base, rather deeply indented around 
the minute umbilical perforation ; solid though rather thin ; whitish 
corneous or faintly buff; the surface rather dull though shining, 
smooth except for irregular, very faint growth-marks. Whorls 
about 54, convex, slowly widening, the last decidedly wider, not 
descending in front. Suture impressed and narrowly translucent- 
margined below. Aperture subvertical, a little oblique, lunate ; 
peristome evenly curved, sharp-edged, the columellar margin lined 
with white callus inside, and reflexed in the vicinity of the umbilical 
perforation, nearly concealing it. 

Alt. 7, greater diam. 11, lesser diam. 10 mm. (Type). 

Alt. 8, greater diam. 12, lesser diam. 10°8 mm. (specimen in Pon- 
sonby Coll.). 

San Domingo (W. M. Gabb!). 

Compared with Helix effusa Pfr. (Monographia, V, p. 105, Tryon, 
Manual II, p. 163), of which part of the original lot collected by 
Smith are before me, this species is more solid, with smaller perfor- 
ation, smoother surface and fewer, more rapidly widening whorls ; 
but it is especially distinguished by the different form of the peris- 
tome. In effusa the basal lip (in a ventral view of the shell) is seen 
to bend forward in a broad convex lobe, the outer point of the curve 
extending as far forward as the insertion of the outer lip ; and upon 
the base the usual direction of the arcuate growth-lines is reversed. 
In the new species, while there is a slight bend, no such effuse con- 
dition of the basal lip is developed. 


24 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


This species is described from four specimens collected by Gabb 
(the types), and one in the collection of Mr. John Ponsonby, of 
London. The latter is slightly larger, and, at first glance, seems to 
have the aperture more vertical, but this is caused by the breaking 
away of the upper portion of the lip-edge. 

The columellar callus becomes a little heavier, slightly convex, 
toward the lower end of columella. Upon breaking a specimen a 
minute embryonic shell was found. The species is therefore prob- 
ably viviparous, as I have shown some other species of Thysanophora 
and Sagda to be. The callous lining of the interior in the columellar 
region is conspicuous in this species but absent in H. effusa Pfr. 
Both species seem to me referable to Sagda rather than to Thysano- 
phora; but the two genera are intimately allied. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 


bo 
uo 


THE BEES OF THE GENUS PERDITA F. Smith. 
BY T. D. A. COCKERELL. 


In attempting to teach entomology to the students of the New 
Mexico Agricultural College, the difficulty was early felt, that there 
existed no work treating in an adequate manner of any group of 
insects obtainable in the vicinity. While it was possible to indicate 
the outlines of the subject without any very profound knowledge of 
the insects which were collected and studied, it appeared to the writer 
that this superficial method of work could not lead to the best 
results. It is quite true that an ordinary student has not time to 
master even the families of insects; but the writer has long felt 
persuaded that the plan of teaching the elements without entering 
into detail is essentially a vicious one, calculated in extreme cases, 
even to convey a totally false impression of the true lessons of 
biology. 

In the first place, the main purpose of biological study in educa- 
tion is not so much to load the mind with information, as to prompt 
a habit of observation and deduction. Owing to the unfortunate 
trend of the present educational system, the students almost inva- 
riably come to the entomology class prepared to learn by heart any 
lessons that may be assigned to them, but very ill-prepared to 
notice what has not been actually pointed out. It is, perhaps, not 
an exaggeration to say that the average junior or senior student in a 
college possesses less inclination and ability to notice and compare 
than a child of from five to ten years of age. 

The entomological studies, if successful, should tend to break 
down this acquired mental habit, and restore in some measure the 
inquisitiveness of childhood. Therefore, nothing can be worse than 
limiting the student’s knowledge by what may be written in a text- 
book, and checking his budding interest in every direction by “I 
don’t know,” with the implication that it is no use trying to find 
out. The idea that some facts are to be regarded by the student, 
and all others ignored, is an entire perversion of the proper spirit of 
biological inquiry. 

38 


26 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Another consideration is, that after all the cell, the individual 
and the species are the three natural units in biology, without a just 
conception of which, all reasoning must be futile. The orders, fami- 
lies, genera and other higher groups do not stand at all on the same 
plane, being essentially artificial arrangements for convenience in 
classification. Consequently a student who might be thoroughly 
acquainted with the higher groups and ignorant of species, would 
be very little prepared to form just conceptions of the phenomena 
of life. 

When these ideas dawned upon the writer, he was somewhat dis- 
concerted to reflect that in the whole range of zoology he possessed 
an intimate acquaintance with only two series, the slugs in Mollusca 
and the Coccide in Insecta. Of the former, which might have been 
used in zoological studies, there is but one species in New Mexico, 
and that not found in the neighborhood of the college; of the lat- 
ter, the species are more numerous, but very unsuited for the pur- 
pose required, since they are exceptions to almost every ordinary 
entomological rule. 

It is perfectly true, that there already exist many very admirable 
monographs of North American insects of different groups; but 
there are two reasons why even the best of these do not entirely 
serve our purpose. The first is, that comparatively little collecting 
has been done in southern New Mexico, so that many of our very 
common species are even unknown to science, and, therefore, not to 
be found in the monographs; the second, that very few of the pub- 
lished writings contain anything like a careful account of the habits 
of the species. One of the very first lessons that the student has to 
learn is that structure is as intimately related to environment, as 
lock to key, and a work which practically ignores one side of this 
question cannot be entirely satisfactory. 

The nearest approximation to what is wanted is found among the 
higher lepidoptera, which are illustrated by such admirable works 
as those of Scudder and W. H. Edwards. Yet these insects are not 
very easily studied by a beginner, except in a superficial way, nor is 
their classification yet upon a perfectly sound basis. So finally, it 
was concluded to take up the bees and endeavor to work them up 
in such a manner that they might be used as desired. They are 
good typical insects, their principal structural characters are easily 
observed, their habits are most interesting, and they abound in New 
Mexico. Moreover, the bee-studies go very nicely hand-in-hand 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 27 


with flower-studies undertaken in botany, the relations between bees 
and flowers being among the most fascinating phenomena in natural 
history. 

The present essay on Perdita is the first step toward the realiza- 
tion of the above mentioned ideal. Imperfect as it undoultedly is, 
it has grown like a mushroom under the hands of the writer ; so 
that the probability of finishing the whole series of bee-genera seems 
remote indeed, if each is to increase in asimilarfashion. Seventeen 
North American species of Perdita were known before the writer 
began to study them; of these, two are not considered valid, but 55 
have been added, bringing the list up toseventy! Thus, in number 
of species described, Perdita becomes at a bound the largest of North 
American bee genera. 


MATERIAL EXAMINED. 


By far the greater part of the material studied has been collected 
by the writer in New Mexico. With great kindness, Mr. W. J. Fox 
loaned a series of specimens containing his Lower Californian types, 
and all the species of Cresson except cephalotes, as well as several 
herein described asnew. In various other ways, such as comparing 
types, Mr. Fox has throughout the whole investigation given 
invaluable assistance. Mr. C. F. Baker was so good as to send me 
the specimens he and his wife had collected in Colorado, which 
included some new forms. Mr. C. Robertson has given some 
very valuable information regarding the habits of the two eastern 
species. Some interesting species have been found by students of 
the college, Miss Mae Gilmore, Miss J. E. Casad, Mr. Alfred Holt 
and Mr. C. Rhodes, as duly indicated below. My botanical col- 
league, Professor Wooton, found one new species. 

The writer has seen all the species treated of, except cephalotes, 
halictulus and bicolor. Of the 70 species, 26 are known in both 
sexes, 26 only in the $, 18 only inthe 9. 28 are at present only 
known from uniques. The flower-visiting habits of 50 species are 
known. The nesting habits are as yet unknown. 


CHARACTERS USED. 


It is hoped that those who may have occasion hereafter to describe 
species of Perdita will read this section, as a study of the published 
descriptions shows that some important characters are almost always 
omitted. ; 


28 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


The coloration of the head and thorax is black, green or blue; 
frequently the parts are not colored alike, the metathorax especially 
being usually bluer than the mesothorax and scutellum. The 
metallic color does not extend on to the abdomen, except toa slight 
extent in interrupta. The sculpture of the metallic portions differs, 
and a good character is found in the smoothness or otherwise of the 
mesothorax ; in some it is very smooth and shining, in others gran- 
ular or striatulate and comparatively dull. The dulness or other- 
wise of the front, and the punctation of the area close to the ocelli, 
may also be used. 

The pale markings may be absent; when developed they are 
from pure white to deep yellow, never red, though the yellow of 
many males may be reddened by cyanide. The reddest color ob- 
served is in the bright orange-rufous of the latter end of the abdomen 
in crotonis, and the orange-rufous legs of foxi. The abdomen, as in 
latior, may be bright ferruginous. These colors are entirely differ- 
ent from the scarlet induced by cyanide. In some species which 
live on yellow flowers (/uteola, beata, larree) the whole body-color 
is deep yellow, the dark markings being reduced to a minimum. 
No species is known similarly white, nor is any species all rufous 
like some forms of Nomada. 

The head may be comparatively small, round, or broader than 
long or longer than broad; in some species it is very large and sub- 
quadrate. The males may or may not have a conspicuous tooth or 
spire on the cheeks beneath; this character appears to be a valid 
specific one, but appears in species which are not closely allied, (e. 
g., larree and pulchrior), while it distinguishes certain forms from 
their closest allies, as pulchrior from pallidior, the latter having un- 
armed cheeks. It is to be observed that in the Mutillid genus 
Spherophthalma a similar state of affairs occurs, only it is the 
females that possess the armed cheeks. Thus S. montivaga is ex- 
tremely like S. megacantha, but lacks the spine on the cheeks. 8. 
toumeyi also differs from its allies by its spinose head. The charac- 
ter is, therefore, one of those which has been termed “ kaleido- 
scopic.” 

The mandibles may be bifid at the tip (latior, texana), or may be 
notched within (spheralecee 9) or even present a distinct tooth on 
the inner side (eneifrons). They are, however, usually simple, and 
more slender in the males. In the females of the albipennis group 
they are very stout and strongly elbowed, quite different from the 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 29 


males. There is also a marked sexual difference in the mandibles 
of ventralis. The tongue differs in length and in the degree of 
development of the hairs. As will be seen below, the tongue has on 
two or three occasions proved useful in distinguishing allied forms 
(as affinis and senecionis), but it has not been studied throughout 
the series. In one instance, a useful distinction was found in the 
relative lengths of the joints uf the maxillary palpi. 

The form of the clypeus differs very much both between the spe- 
cies and the sexes of the same species (e. g., ventralis). For conven- 
ience I have compared the shapes noted to the outlines of different 
kinds of hats. 

The degrees of hairiness of the face and cheeks, as also of the 
thorax (especially of the mesothorax) offer useful characters. The 
hairs are usually white, but may in part be grayish or brownish, or 
even, in a yellow species (beata), yellow. They are very rarely 
(albovittata) dense enough on the face to obscure the markings. 

The antenne present different grades of color (usually paler be- 
neath) from yellow and orange to black. In the albipennis group 
the color of the flagellum has served to distinguish the males of 
allied forms. 

The face markings at first seem complicated and hard to describe, 
but are easily reduced to a simplesystem. The face may be wholly 
dark, but if the pale marks are much reduced they are generally 
seen to linger last upon the clypeus. An exception to this is found 
however in semicerulea, with its shining yellow mark on each side 
of a perfectly dark clypeus. The clypeus may be wholly light, 
usually retaining a black dot on each side near the margin. The 
celypeal dark markings appear frequently in the form of two longi- 
tudinal black bars, as in numerata. 

The lateral light markings of the face are commonly triangular, 
the inner angle being about opposite the dot on the clypeus, and the 
upper angle usually on a level with the antennal socket on the 
orbital margin. Sometimes the lateral mark extends up along the 
margin of the orbit much further; and it may terminate variously, 
being either pointed or truncate. The shapes of the lateral face 
marks afford excellent specific characters. 

Above the clypeus, between its upper border and the level of the 
antenne, is the supraclypeal mark, which differs very much in its 
degree of development, and even in its shape in some allied species. 
It may be produced upward in the median line to an enlarged yel- 


30 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


low mark on the front, the frontal mark, but this is not very com- 
mon. 

Finally, just below each antenna may be a small subtriangular 
mark, which I have ealled the dog-ear mark, because of its resem- 
blance to the ear of a hound, first observed inthe ¢ form described 
as canina. 

In the males the face is frequently all yellow or white up to the level 
of the antennee; and then good characters are found in the degree of its 
further upward extension, and in the form of its upper limit. 

The face markings are nearly always conspicuously different in 
the sexes, but not so in albovittata and the albipennis group, nor in 
luteola, nor the texana group. 

The pale markings of the thorax are confined to different degrees 
of yellow on the prothorax, often affording good characters, and 
occasional very characteristic yellow patches on the pleura, except. 
in mexicanorum, which has a yellow postscutellum, and luteiceps, 
which has a little yellow on mesothorax and scutellum. Two spe- 
cles, punctosignata and cephalotes, have the thorax yellow with black 
markings; marcialis has it yellow with green markings, the meso- 
thorax being green with yellow lateral margins. 

The wings may be simply hyaline or milky-hyaline, or slightly 
smoky; never really dark and never spotted or banded. The 
nervures and stigma may be dark brown, light brown, yellowish or 
colorless ; the stigma is usually hyaline centrally. In the texana 
group the stigma is hardly developed. 

Very good characters are found in the venation. The marginal 
cell differs greatly in size and length, but I never saw one so 
long as to suggest the condition of Calliopsis. It may be obliquely 
or squarely truncate. It may have the portion below the stigma 
(substigmatal) longer than that beyond ( poststigmatal), but usually 
they are about equal or the latter islonger. There are but two sub- 
marginal cells ; and the shape of the second, whether triangular or 
how much narrowed to the marginal, should in each case be noted. 
The so-called second submarginal is morphologically the third, the 
true second of genera with three submarginals being absent. On 
one side of the type ? of obscurata, the true second submarginal 
actually appears, small, triangular and petiolate, much as in the 
Larrid genus Plenoculus. 

The third diseoidal cell may be very weak or even entirely want- 
ing, according to the development of the second recurrent nervure. 


9 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 31 


The legs may be dark or yellow, or variously marked with these 
colors, and the proportions of dark and light, though variable, 
afford good characters within reasonable limits. The anterior tibize 
are usually yellow in front at least. 

The abdomen differs somewhat in shape, and may be either wholly 
dark or variously banded or’spotted. In every case it should be 
carefully described, and the color of the ventral surface should also 
be mentioned. 

The ¢ genitalia differ in one or two species I have examined, but 
I have not studied them sufficiently to be able to introduce them 
into the classification. 

In addition to the above structural and colorational characters, 
too much stress cannot be laid on the importance of noting the 
exact localities and the flowers visited. Without the assistance 
derived from such information, it would have been impossible to 
unravel the mentzelie series, or satisfactorily arrange the forms 
allied to affinis. Further, facts of this kind are invaluable in the 
difficult task of correctly associating the sexes. 

The time of flight should also be carefully noted. Some species 
are vernal, others (the great majority) fly in late summer and 
autumn. 


GEOGRAPHICAL AND VERTICAL DISTRIBUTION. 


The species of Perdita are characteristic of the arid region of 
North America. Of the 70 species, 49 are found in New Mexico, 
and of these, no less than 34 are in the Mesilla Valley, in the Middle 
Sonoran (= lower part of Upper Sonoran) zone, at 3,800 feet. 
Ascending the Valley of the Rio Grande, four species were taken 
at San Marcial, one at Socorro and nine at Albuquerque, but at none 
of these places was more than a few day’s collecting done. One 
species was found at San Augustine, on the east side of the Organ 
Mountains, but has since been observed in the Mesilla Valley. 
There can be no doubt that Perdita abounds throughout the Upper 
Sonoran zone in New Mexico. 

At Santa Fé, 7,000 feet, in the transition zone of New Mexico, a 
good deal of collecting was done in two seasons, but the species of 
Perdita do not appear to be so numerous as in the Upper Sonoran. 
Only seven species were taken, although one or two were very 
numerous in individuals. In the mid-alpine zone no species were 
seen, either in New Mexico or in the three years residence in Colo- 
rado. 


32 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


In Colorado, species of Perdita have been found at La Junta, 
Fort Collins, Estes Park and Glenwood Springs. On August 12, 
1887, I found a species at Cottonwood Creek, Pleasant Valley, Fre- 
mont County, Colorado ; it was sent to Mr. Ashmead, but the species 
was not determined. In my note-book I recorded that it was3} mm. 
long, head black, thorax gray, abdomen red-brown; surely it was a 
new species, different from any herein described. A few species of 
Perdita have been found in other parts of the west—three in Lower 
California, three in California, three in Nevada. Two are known 
from Texas, one from the State of Chihuahua, Mexico. Two 
vaguely from Mexico. 

In the Eastern States, Perdita is represented by only two species, 
octomaculata of the northern region, from Illinois to New Hamp- 
shire; and obscurata in the south, Georgia and Florida. One of 
the Rocky Mountain species, albipennis, extends northeastward to 
South Dakota. 

As regards vertical distribution, one species, sphwralcee, extends 
from the Mesilla Valley to Santa Fé, but the Santa Fé form is an 
easily distinguishable race. P. lepachidis extends unaltered from 
Socorro to Santa Fé; and zebrata and chamesarache extend from 
Albuquerque to Santa Fé. P. austini and bigelovie extend from 
the Mesilla Valley to Albuquerque. 


THE FLOWERS VISITED. 


It may be laid down as a general rule that each species of Perdita 
visits normally but one species of flower, but occasional speci- 
mens may be found on flowers to which they do not normally belong. 
The exceptions to this rule are found in P. octomaculata visiting 
Solidago, Coreopsis and Aster; P. cladothricis visiting various 
Composite as well as Cladothriz ; P. pectidis visiting Pectis, Tribulus 
and Wedelia; P. fallax visiting Bigelovia, Verbesina and Pectis ; 
P. phymate visiting Bigelovia and Gutierrezia; and P. semicrocea 
visiting Solidago, Bigelovia and Gutierrezia. 

In the case of several uniques, it is not certain that they normally 
belong to the flowers on which they were found. Thus a single P. 
pulchrior was found on Bigelovia at Las Cruces, and it would have 
gone in as a Bigelovia species but for its previous discovery on 
Mentzelia at Albuquerque. In the Mesilla Valley, toward and at 
the base of the Organ Mountains, are many species of flowers which 
should by all analogy have their species of Perdita. But the oppor- 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 33 


tunity has not offered to make excursions to determine this at the 
right season, and we can only surmise that some of the uniques 
taken on Verbesina, Bigelovia, etc., will be hereafter found abun- 
dantly attached to some other plant in the neighborhood. 

The flowers visited are cited in their systematic order, following 
the arrangement of Engler and Prantl, as recently adopted in the 
A. A. A.S. list. The number of known Perdita flowers is 25, of 
which 13, more than half, are Composite. ‘Twelve species of flow- 
ers have furnished more than one Perdita species, the greatest num- 
ber (12) being from Bigelovia wrightii. 

It is to be explained in reference to the names used for the flow- 
ers, that the writer is in favor of using the earliest generic name in 
every case, when not preoccupied by a valid homonym; and also 
the earliest specific name when not preoccupied by a valid homonym 
in the same genus. But he is entirely opposed to the practice of 
displacing names because antedated by synonyms, which are not 
and never were deserving of recognition; and he does not consider 
a varietal name invalid because previously used for a different spe- 
cies, or a variety of a different species, in the same genus. He thus 
objects to the substitution of Chondrophora for Bigelovia (or Bige- 
lowia), or of Covillea for Larrea. Likewise of var. pilosus for var. 
villosus of Aster ericoides. 


SALICACEZ. 


(1). Saurx. The willow-frequenting bees at Las Cruces in May 
are Perdita salicis, P. numerata, Andrena salicinella Ckll., 
Andrena n. sp., Halictus sp., and Prosopis sp.  P. salicis 
abounds, but of nwmerata only one was taken. 


AMARANTHACEZ. 


(2). CLADOTHRIX CRYPTANTHAS.Watson. P. cladothricis abounds 
on this; it was rather surprising to find so simple a flower so 
abundantly visited by a particular species of bee. The genus 
Cladothrix has cited in the Index Kewensis only two species, 
both from Western North America. 


NYCTAGINACEA. 


(8). Wepbeia incarnata (L.) Kuntze. Visited by P. pectidis. 
The Boerhaavia, common at Las Cruces, is not visited by Per- 
dita; while the large purple mirabilis is, of course, a moth 

\ flower, and is visited by Deilephila lineata. 


34 


(4). 


(5). 


(8). 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 
CAPPARIDACE, 


CLEOME SERRULATA Pursh. This is not found growing wild 
at Las Cruces, but it abounds from Albuquerque to Santa Fé 
and northward into Colorado, being visited in great numbers 
by Perdita zebrata. There is a not uncommon white-flowered 
form (C. albiflora) which I observed at Watrous, N. M., and 
other places. 

While P. zebrata is the only Perdita of the Cleome, it has to 
compete with numerous bees of other genera. At Santa Fé, 
on August 2d, I noted that Nomia punctata was in full force on 
the Cleome, its hind legs loaded with the green pollen. Other 
Cleome bees at Santa Fé are Melecta miranda, Anthophora, 
Megachile, Melissodes and Bombus. At Albuquerque a Cal- 
liopsis is common on the Cleome; and I saw at this locality 
on August 16th, a humming-bird visiting it. 


LEGUMINOSZ. 


PROSOPIS JULIFLORA var. GLANDULOSA (Torrey). The mes- 
uite furnishes Perdita exclamans and P. punctosignata. Mr. 
Alfred Holt has also taken an Anthidium on mesquite at Las 
Cruces. 
It will be noted that the generic name of this plant is the 
same as that of a genusof bees. This inconvenience might be 
avoided by spelling the bee-genus Prosapis, as has already 
been done by Mr. Ashmead (Hym. Colo., p. 31). The botan- 
ical genus has priority. The mesquite extends in modified 
form to sea-level in the neotropical region ; it is, in fact, essen- 
tially a neotropical type. 


ZYGOPHYLLACEZ. 


TRIBULUS MAxIMuS L. Visited by P. pectidis. The plant 
cannot be other than maximus, but it does not agree in detail 
with published descriptions. I have found the plant (though 
not the bee) as far north as La Junta, Colorado. 


LARREA DIVARICATA Var. TRIDENTATA (DC.). AtSan Mar- 
cial were found on this P. marcialis, P. larree, P. larrearum 
and P. semicerulea. The P. larree is colored yellow like the 
flowers of the plant. The genus Larrea consists of four or 
five species, confined to the Mexican region and the Argen- 
tine Republic. Our species is a variety of one of the Argen- 
tine ones. 


EUPHORBIACEZ. 


Croron TEXENSIs (Klotzch) Muell. Arg. At Albuquerque 
I found numbers of P. crotonis on this. The same plant is 


1896.] 


(9). 


(10). 


(11). 


(12). 


(13). 


(14). 


NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 30 


common at Santa Fé, but yields no Perdita. The constancy 
of Perdita spp. to their proper flowers was well illustrated at 
Albuquerque, where on the Croton was only P. crotonis, while 
on the Cleome only 8 paces distant was only P. zebrata. At 
Las Cruces, Croton neomexicanus is common, but I found on 
it no Perdita, or even bees, only Larride and especially Phil- 
anthide, including Aphilanthops taurulus. This was on Sep- 
tember 25th, and only staminate flowers were to be found. 
Croton is a very large genus, with many neotropical species, 
but also found in the tropics of the Old World. 


MALVACESA. 


SPH #RALCEA ANGUSTIFOLIA Spach. Abundant and variable 
from Las Cruces to Santa Fé, in the former locality furnish- 
ing P. latior and P. spheralcee ; in the latter a distinct race 
of spheralcee. At Santa Fé the Spheralcea is visited also by 
Epeolus, Bombus, Colletes, Melissodes, etc. At Las Cruces it 
is principally visited by Diadasia. 


LOASACE. 


MENTZELIA NUDA (Pursh) Torr.andGray. Visited at Santa 
Fé by P. mentzelie, and at Albuquerque by P. pallidior and 
pulchrior. It is a favorite Bombus flower. The genus goes 
south to Chili. 


UMBELLIFERZA. 


HYDROCOTYLE UMBELLATA L. Mr. Robertson reports P. 
obscurata from this. I have never myself found any Perdita 
on an Umbellifer. 


SOLANACES. 


CHAMSARACHA CORONOPUS (Dunal) A. Gray. P. chame- 
sarache abounds on this at Albuquerque, and was also taken 
on it at Santa Fé. The genus is a small one, the Index 
Kewensis cites 1 Texas, Mexico, 2 California (here including 
our coronopus), 1 Mexico, and 1 Japan. Thus it is not ap- 
parently of neotropical origin. 


COMPOSIT A. 


GUTIERREZIA SAROTHK# (Pursh) Britt. and Rusby. At 
Albuquerque were found on this, one each of P. austini, 
gutierrezie and pallidior—the last doubtless accidental. 


GUTIERREZIA SAROTHR# var. MICROCEPHALA (Gray) Coul- 
ter. This is common at Las Cruces, and has furnished P. 
austint, semicrocea, luteola, phymate, tarda and eladothricis. 
On September 25th, a single 9 verbesine was also taken on 


36 


(15). 


(16). 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896 


it, but this was undoubtedly accidental, as verbesine was 
extremely numerous on Verbesina close by, and if it had 
anything to gain by visiting Gutierrezia, it would be seen 
there more than once. 

The genus Gutierrezia goes south to the Magellan Strait 
region. It ismoderately numerous in species in the Mexican 
(Sonoran) region and arid region of the U. S., and again in 
in the southern part of the neotropical region, as far north 
as Chili. 


SoLIDAGO CANADENSIS L. Fig 1. This common Golden-rod 
has a wide range over the continent, and 
extends from Las Cruces to Santa Fé, 

being usually seen on or about the ace- 

quia banks. Mr. Robertson records it as 

one of the plants visited by P. octomacu- 

lata in Illinois; in Colorado Mr. Baker 

has taken from it baker, affinis, sexmac- 

ulata var. and rectangulata. At Las 

Cruces it furnished fair numbers of semi- 

erocea, and a single grandiceps. It is 

worthy of note that it is not at all visited 

by luteola, or indeed any of the Bigelovia 


species except semicrocea. 
Fic. 1. 


BIGELOVIA WRIGHTII Gray. Fig. 2. This is the very abund- 
ant Bigelovia of comparatively dry sandy ground between the 
river bottoms and the benches at Las Cruces and Albuquer- 
que, N. M. Hitherto it had been confounded by us with B. 
rusbyi, owing to a specimen, apparently quite identical with 
our plant, having been so named at the California Academy 

of Sciences. As I was somewhat 

uneasy about this determination, 

Professor Wooton at my request 

sent aspecimen to Columbia Col- 

lege, and word comes back that 

it is assuredly wrightii and not 

rusbyt. This explanation is need- 
ed, because I have sent out 
= various insects labelled as from 
, B. rusbyi. 

Besides being most prolific in 
Perdita species, this plant is won- 
derfully attractive to many kinds 
of insects. At Albuquerque I 
got from it P. bigelovie, and 
among other things the ant, Tap- 
Fic. 2. inoma anale André, and quanti- 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 37 


ties of a pretty Chalcidid, Orasema viridis Ashmead (Det. 
Dep. Agric.). The latter is new to the U.S. Fauna, having 
been only lately described from a specimen found at Tepic, 
Mexico (Proc. Cal. Ac. Sci., 1895, p. 553). 

At Las Cruces I found on B. wrightii plenty of P. luteola 
especially, accompanied by semicrocea, cenetfrons, phymate, 
fallax, bigelovie, nitidella, austini, while cladothricis, pulch- 
rior, maculipes and pellucida were occasional. Here the 
flowers are peopled by the same species of ant, Tapinoma 
anale André (det. Ernest André) as was found on them at 
Albuquerque ; its color is such as to render it inconspicuous. 
Three species of beetles are particularly noticed on the flow- 
ers, Chauliognathus scutellaris Lec., Crossidius pulchellus 
Lee., and Clerus abruptus Lec. (det. Wickham), of which 
the first two are yellow like the flowers, with some black ; 
and the last (appearing in October) is beautifully marked 
with red, resembling at a glance Spherophthalma heterochroa, 
which is found in the same vicinity, though never on flow- 
ers. Sundry Coccinellide, Chrysomelide and Bruchidz also 
frequent the flowers. Some Heteropterous insects found on 
the flowers are colored yellow to escape observation ; one of 
these, Phymata fasciata, is predaceous, and a seriousenemy of 
the bees. So there are also yellow or yellowish Thomiside, 
and certain Bombyliidz and Trypetide among the Diptera 
which visit the Bigelovia flowers are more or less strongly 
yellow—more especially the beautiful little Phthiria sulphu- 
rea Loew (see Psyche, January, 1895, p. 188). Among 
Hymenoptera, besides various bees, are found several Phil- 
anthids, Scoliide, Eumenide, Chalcidide, Chrysidide, ete., 
some of the species being new or rare in collections, for ex- 
ample, Aphilanthops taurulus Ckll., A. quadrinotatus Ashm. 
(heretofore only known from a specimen found at Denver, 
Colo.), Acanthochaleis nigricans Cam., and Chrysis mesille 
Ckll. The genus Bigelovia belongs especially to the arid 
region, but there are two species in Ecuador. 


(17). CHrysopsts viLLosa (Pursh) Nutt. This is properly a 
mountain plant (abundant, for example, in the mid-alpine 
of Colorado), but several vigorous plants are growing in a 
dry watercourse near the N. M. Agricultural College, the 
seeds having doubtless been washed from the Organ Mount- 
ains. On one of these I caught the unique of P. vespertilio. 
At Santa Fé I watched some Chrysopsis villosa, but only got 
one specimen of an Anthophora. 


(18). AsTER ERICOIDES var. vILLosus (Michx.) Torr. and Gray. 
Mr. Robertson reports this as visited by P. octomaculata. 


38 
(19). 


(20). 


(21). 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


ASTER CANESCENS var. viscosus (Nutt.) Gray. Fig. 3. At 


Fie. 3. 


Las Cruces this is freely visited by P. 
asteris. Two species of Aster which are 
common at Las Cruces, A. spinosus and A. 
hesperius, have produced no Perdita. The 
former is a weed of waste grounds, the 
latter occurs on the acequia banks, so 
they may not be natives of the immediate 
region. It has occurred to me that by 
watching the bees on a flower, some evi- 
dence might be obtained as to the length 
of time the flower has grown in the local- 
ity. Thus, to take an extreme class of 
cases, garden exotics are visited by com- 
paratively few bees, and of course have 
none peculiar to them, as P. asteris to 
Aster canescens var. 


LEpacHys TAGETES (James)Gray. 
Visited by P. lepachidis ; also, at 
Santa Fé, by Melissodes, Agaposte- 
mon, Halictus and Bembex. 


HeLiaAntuvus AnNuus L. Fig. 4. 
The sunflower is the flower of P. 
albipennis ; very rarely a verbesine 
may also be found upon it. Other 
sunflower bees are Panurgus, Melis- 
sodes and Andrena, all at Las 
Cruces. Phymata fasciata also 
occurs on the sunflower heads. 
It is to be noted that the Andrena 
found on sunflowers at Las Cruces 
is not the sameas Mr. Robertson’s 
Illinois A. heliantht. 


VERBESINA ENCELIOIDES (Cay.) 
Gray. Fig. 5. At Las Cruces 
this produces commonly P. ver- 
besine, rarely beata, perpulchra 


Fie. 4. 


and albovittata, and occasionally or accidentally albipennis, 
var. vagans, laticeps and fallax. In October I noticed Apis 
mellifica visiting the flowers in numbers ; the honey-bee flies 
longer and visits more species of flowers than any wild bee 
I know, and must surely prove rather a serious competitor 
of the wild species. The competition would be most severely 
felt, of course, in those years when, owing to unfavor- 
able weather, the flowers were less numerous than ordinary. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 39 


The yellow bug Phymata fasciata Gray, 
abounds on the Verbesina ; on September 28th, 
I found one which had caught a P. verbesine. 
This Phymata not only preys on bees, but the 
butterfly, Lycena exilis, the house fly, Musca 
domestica, and doubtless many other insects. 
Another enemy of bees which is found on Ver- 
besina is a Thomisid spider; on September 
22d, I found one of these had caught a P. 
ver besine. 

There are various other Verbesina bees, in- 
cluding the pretty Agapostemon melliventris, 
which also appears in the spring, then visiting 
Sisymbrium and Streptanthus. 


(23). BipEns aristosA (Michx) Britt., (= Core- 
OPSIS ARISTOSA Michx). Mr. Robertson cites 
this as visited by P. octomaculata. Vic, 5. 


(24). Senecio poueiastt DC. On this Professor Wooton found 
P. senecionis, as also an Andrena and other bees. 


(25). Prcris papposa Gray. This is visited by P. pectidis, but 
cladothricis, fallax and biparticeps have also been taken on it, 
while once only a duteola was seen in the net after sweeping 
Pectis. The flowers are frequented by an ant, Dorymyrmex 
pyramicus Rog. (det. André). One also finds upon them 
Panurgus (commonly) and Epeolus (rarely), as well as sun- 
dry Philanthide and Bombyliide, ete. 

The genus Pectis has many neotropical species, extending 
even south to the Argentine Republic. It has also West 
Indian representatives in Cuba, San Domingo and Curagoa. 


In reviewing the above list of plants, it will be readily seen that 
Perdita does not usually frequent the boreal types of flowers, but 
rather those which extend northward from the neotropical region. 
This, taken with the known distribution of the genus, strongly sug- 
gests that in the main we have to do with an austral series of types, 
which have spread northward and become largely differentiated 
into species since the glacial epoch. PP. octomaculata, however, 
must be looked upon as a survival from preglacial times; and 
here it is especially significant that afinis and senecionis, which 
more especially represent octomaculata in the west, are the very ones 
which visit boreal flowers, Solidago and Senecio to wit. Further, 
bakere which does indeed visit Solidago also, shows every indication 
of being a recent derivative from the Cleome type zebrata; an in- 


40 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


stance, in fact, of the neotropical immigrants adapting themselves 
through modification to subboreal conditions. 

Another thing that deserves notice is the relationship between the 
size of the bees, the length of their tongues, and the kinds of flowers. 
It would appear that a longer tongue is not always developed inde- 
pendently to meet requirements, but that the total size of the bee 
may be increased, and with it the tongue. Or conversely, the size 
of the bee may be reduced. Speculations of this kind are, perhaps, 
not very profitable, but it will be advantageous to give the facts 
which suggest them. 

Close to the N. M. Agricultural College Verbesina encelioides and 
Bigelovia wrightii grow in the utmost profusion. In September col- 
lections were made off both, the plants being but a few yards from 
one another, with the following results :— 

VeERBESINA :—Perdita, Calliopsis, Panurgus, Melissodes, Celioxys, 
Andrena, Epeolus ; but on October 5th when the Bigelovia was getting 
over, Halictus ligatus, H. pectoraloides and Agapostemon melliven- 
tris. 

BiGceLovia :—Perdita, Agapostemon, Anthophora (small species), 
Megachile (one), Colletes, Halictus ¢, Halictus stultus 2 , Prosopis, 
Nomia nevadensis. 

Thus it will be seen that the bees of these two plants were almost 
entirely of different genera in September, those on the Verbesina 
being Apidse with few exceptions, those on the Bigelovia largely 
Andrenidz. But as the Bigelovia began to be over, the large 
Andrenide visited the Verbesina, which had given a second crop 
of flowers. Now although Perdita appears equally in both lists, the 
species are different, and if we except unique specimens, as we justly 
may, those on the Verbesina are of larger size, those on the Bigelo- 
via comparatively small. The abundant larger verbesine is never 
seen on Bigelovia, nor the not less abundant smaller /uteola on Ver- 
besina. 

And when we come to look at the Perdita spp. of the Gutierrezia, 
they average still smaller than those of the Bigelovia. 

I am fortunate in being able to present some figures of the flow- 
ers of some of the Perdita Composit, drawn by Miss Mae Gilmore 
under the supervision of Professor E.O. Wooton. As they are all on 
the same scale, (diam. x 5) the reader will be able to form his own 
conclusions by studying them in connection with the facts above cited. 
“The honey . . . in Composite is secreted by a ring surrounding 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 41 


the style at the base of a narrow tubular corolla, and as it accu- 
mulates it rises up into the wider part of the corolla where it is ac- 
cessible to the most short-lipped insects, and where the anthers 
shelter it from rain.’—(Hermann Miiller). In the Bigelovia, Aster 
and Solidago the tube is seen to be narrow, permitting the rapid 
rise of the nectar, and probably preventing the insertion of the 
tongue of large bees. Hence, these flowers are visited only by the 
smaller species of Perdita, with other small Apidz and Andrenide. 
In Verbesina and Helianthus the tube is wider, doubtless permitting 
the larger bees to readily insert their tongues; but it it is narrower 
at the neck than Bigelovia or Solidago, preventing small insects 
from so readily thrusting their heads inward to stretch for the 
nectar. ‘The wider tube also may prevent the nectar from rising so 
far, while in Helianthus there is a large bulb to contain it. 

Solidago canadensis is commonly cultivated in gardens in Europe 
and there H. Miiller mentions only flies as visiting it (Fertilization 
of Flowers, p. 321), though he gives a further reference to a paper 
which I have not seen. With us, as has been shown, it is native 
and visited by several bees. 


THE NATURE OF SPECIFIC DIFFERENCES. 


It is a commonplace observation that specific characters are of 
all kinds, and may be either strongly marked or difficult to discern. 
A very small amount of study teaches us that there is no essential 
difference between those characters called specific and those called 
varietal; in fact, the very same kind of difference which marks 
Species in one group, may only mark varieties or mutations in 
another. Thus we come to see that the essential distinctions 
between species are physiological, the morphological ones being 
only valid for diagnostic purposes just so far as they happen to 
coincide with the physiological. 

There are even what I have termed “ physiological species,” i. e., 
species separated only by habit; not at all, so far as we can judge, 
by structure, or if at all,in only a very slight degree. I have else- 
where cited examples of this kind in Coccide, but in Hymenoptera 
we find many instancesin which the tangible characters are reduced 
to aminimum. Thus, Schmiedeknecht cites the case of Bombus 
silvarum var. & nigrescens Perez, a submelanic mountain form, 
which is only to be separated from B. pratorwm by an examination 
of the genitalia. Among the European Sphecodes also, a study of 


- 


42 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


microscopical characters has led to a remarkable increase in the 
number of recognized species. Only the other day, I received a new 
part of Marshall’s Monograph of British Braconide, in which the 
following paragraph is sufficiently significant :-— 

“Nearly a dozen species [of Aspilota] have been indicated or 
described ; their inconstant characters render precise definition ex- 
tremely difficult, and tabulation almost impossible.. . . Accident 
has brought to light some facts relative to one species, nervosa Hal., 
from which it appears that the varieties mentioned by that author 
[ Haliday] belong almost certainly to several distinct species. The 
fuscicornis Hal., requires to be elucidated in a similar way, for the 
capture and examination of isolated examples of unknown ori- 
gin, lead to very uncertain results.” (Tr. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1895, 
p. 375). 

Now in Perdita precisely the same state of affairs occurs, and it 
will thus be found that while certain species (e. g., crotonis, luteola) 
are very easily recognized, some others (e. g., bakere, verbesine) are 
almost as well to be called races or varieties as species. In the 
opinion of the writer, we have indeed the process of evolution going 
on under our eyes, the puzzling forms being those which have only 
lately segregated themselves, and have not yet developed striking 
peculiarities. 

Take for example bakere, the closest ally of the Cleome species 
zebrata. It does not appear to differ more from zebrata than the 
mutations of the latter do from one another, and in the female is 
practically identical with it so far as outward signs go. But the ¢ 
bakere: has a slight but constant difference in its wider supraclypeal 
mark, and it also differs in its genitalia. These differences would 
never have been noticed, in all probability, had not bakere been 
observed to differ in its habits from zebrata, to frequent not the 
Cleome, but Golden-rod. In fact, the similarity is so great that Mr. 
Fox, after seeing specimens, expressed the opinion that baker was 
a synonym of zebrata. 

Another case, not less perplexing, is found in the albipennis-ver- 
besine-lepachidis series. The males of this series, placed in a row, 
readily separate into those which have narrow yellow bands on the 
abdomen and those which have not. Those with the bands separate 
into a series with the flagellum orange, and one with it blackish, and 
it is seen that the former are from Verbesina, the latter from Helian- 
thus. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 43 


Now the females of thisseries (that of /epachidis being unknown) 
separate at once into those with broad distinct yellow abdominal 
bands, and those with the abdomen only spotted. |The former are 
from Helianthus (rarely from Verbesina), the latter very abundant 
on Verbesina. But now we find, to our surprise, that some of the 
males with yellow on the abdomen belong to the spotted females, 
and come from Verbesina; while others (with the dark flagellum) 
belong to the well banded Helianthus females. Further than this, 
other males without the yellow belong to other well banded Helian- 
thus females from a different locality. Thus among the Helianthus 
forms (albipennis) the females from two localities (La Junta and 
Las Cruces) are hardly at all different, while their males are 
decidedly different; and the male of the Las Cruces form more 
resembles the ¢ of verbesine, which is common on Verbesina in 
the same locality. But the Las Cruces males differ from verbesine 
in the color of the flagellum; while the La Junta males, differing 
from verbesine in the abdomen, resemble it in the antenne! The 
difficulty is still further increased by the occurrence of individual 
varieties presenting other combinations of the “specific” characters. 
In such a case as this we should be hopelessly adrift without bio- 
logical observations. There is no apparent reason why the varia- 
tions in clypeal markings should not be just as “ specific” as those 
in the color of the flagellum, or (as in lepachidis) in the color of 
the head and thorax. Mr. Fox, after examining a series, concludes 
that we do not know the ¢ of albipennis, and that my albipennis 
$, verbesine and lepachidis are all varieties of hyalina. But all 
this is contradicted by actual observation of the insects on the flow- 
ers. The characters which I have used occur uniformly in series 
from the same flowers, except in the case of widely separated local- 
ities, where they are still uniform for a given flower in a given locality. 
There will be very rarely an individual proper to one flower found 
on another, as one or two helianthi on Verbesina, but such excep- 
tions do not vitiate the general rule. Some characters, as the differ- 
ence in clypeal markings, belong especially to no one of these series, 
and hence have no specific value. 

If, as believed, evolution is in*progress among the species of Per- 
dita, we are naturally led to seek for evidence of natural selection. 
In some cases, as of the yellow Juteola, beata and mareialis, all on 
yellow flowers, we note at once the utility of the peculiarity; and 
when we see the yellow predaceous bug Phymata also on the flow- 


44 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


ers, the whole matter seemsclear. Yet it must be confessed that on 
Verbesina the yellow beata is extremely rare, while the dark verbe- 
sine abounds. 

The face-markings, so distinctive of species, differ greatly as a 
rule in the sexes, and in most species are very constant. There is 
every probability that they serve as recognition marks; and it is 
here significant that when they are very variable, as in 9 zebrata, 
there is no other species of Perdita on the same flowers that could 
be confused with the varying one. 

The species appear to be all single brooded, but the great resem- 
blance between the vernal numerata and the late summer bigelovie, 
suggested the possibility of double-brooded seasonally dimorphic 
species. The strongest fact, however, that militates against this 
idea is that there are so many more late summer and autumn spe- 
cies than vernal ones, while the eastern octomaculata is represented 
by no congener at all in the spring. 

Another question arose as to the possibility of dimorphism in the 
males of some species; references to this matter, which deserves 
further study, will be found under the species concerned. | 

It will be observed that the grouping of the species is arbitary, 
those being associated which the student is likely to meet with on 
the same flowers, or in the same part of the country. This was done 
because it was felt that no natural arrangement could yet be arrived 
at, and a purely artificial one, based solely on considerations of con- 
venience, was better than one which might give a false idea of rela- 
tionships. The difficulty arises in many cases from the so-called 
“ kaleidoscopic” characters, the possession of which by two species 
does not necessarily imply descent from an ancestor exhibiting them. 
Thus luteola and beata are colored alike in almost every detail 
(except the black on the pleura of beata), and are extremely differ- 
ent from any other Perdita. But beata in its size and hairy meso- 
thorax approaches the albipennis group and departs widely from 
luteola. The character of armed cheeks has already been referred 
to, and several others might be cited. How strangely the several 
“specific” characters may appear or disappear, is shown well in the 
series of albipennis and verbesine. * 

There is, however, one natural group, that of terana and Jatior, 
which is very distinct and may ultimately be regarded as forming 
a distinct genus. F. Smith’s generic name Macrotera has been used 
for texana, but perhaps incorrectly. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 45 


Summing up, the writer has to express the opinion that variations 
in Perdita certainly do not occur indefinitely in all directions, but 
that they do occur independently, so that the several species differ 
from one another hardly so much in absolute characters, as in the 
various combinations presented of similar or identical characters 
Furthermore, it is apparent that the earliest distinctions between 
species are at least often of a very subtle character, so that the work- 
ings of natural selection during the actual process of segregation 
are anything but easy to observe. And this need not surprise us 
when we reflect that among ourselves constitutional characters, not 
easily identified by any coincident structural features, play so large 
a part in determining our ability to reach manhood and beget off- 
spring. 

ARTIFICIAL KEY. 

(Note-—The numbers before the specific names coincide with the 

numbers of the same in the descriptive portion.) 


Entirely yellow, with no conspicuous markings . 1 
Yellow or orange, with dark markings . 3 
Head and thorax dark . 5 


1. 8 mm. long, mesothorax pubescent, nlegra th a hiack 
NCC Ae 2 ns ead i0, beata? 9 
About 4mm. long, ere very fenees pies armed 15 larree ¢ 

Over 5 mm. long, head ordinary, cheeks unarmed, meso- 
thorax not pubescent ... . ‘cueee 
2. Antenne dark above, a black line botore the eyes, ee oe Q 
Antenne not dark, a black dot before the eyes . 55 luteola $ 

3. Extremely small, cheeks armed, mesothorax mostly green, 
16 marcialis 3 

Not so small, vertex with a black band from eye to eye, 


thorax with black markings . . . 4 

4. Size 6 mm., head very large, aygomen Gathaut ae aaci 
Pandse) ci... ite, spevotueephalotes 6 

Size 43 mm., head com very ate abdomen with distinct 
Ree we Mr. wc + 00 Muneongnala ¢ 

5. Abdomen orange, or orange-brown, or aon not 
banded, unless at base. . . . | eet 
Abdomen dark brown, or black, or gnotied! or Panded sie AS 


6. Head large, abdomen short and broad, ferruginous, mar- 
ginal cell obliquely truncate, mandibles bidentate 
ieee A ck a el Sale betas. S 


46 


10. 


1g. 


12. 


13. 


14. 


1G. 


16. 


WE 


18. 


Cheeks unarmed 


. Face all dark 


Face partly pale . ee 
Nervures colorless, abdomen orange. . . . D4 semicrocea 
Nervures fuscous, abdomen dark testaceous, 32 halictoides 
Nervures ferruginous, abdomen ferruginous . . 33 bicolor 
The pale color confined to oe and triangular marks at 
side. of. face‘y.. Sia o 20” chamesartene 
Face all light below antenne; length 33 mm . 
Area between eyes and ocelli smooth and shining like meso- 
thorax, 2d segment of abdomen with a dark band, vertex 
and mesothorax not blue. . . . . . . 54 semicrocea 
Area between eyes and ocelli distinctly granular, much 
duller than the shining mesothorax, 2d segment of abdo- 
men without a band, vertex and mesothorax dark blue, 
20 chamesarache 
Clypeus entirely dark . 
Clypeus not entirely dark =. | te 
Abdomen piceous with yellow spots or ane On with yellow 
markings ' 
Abdomen not enuted : 
Length about 6 mm., aidomed ae ae 4 pis ae 
26 var. punctata 
Length about 5 mm., abdomen with 6 pale yellow spots or 
blotches . . . . . . 26 sexmaculata 
Abdomen black fit pe alae panic 
Abdomen not banded . car ; 
Abdomen dark brown, with a short ae pends on 2d seg- 


ment; size very small, less than 4 mm. . 41 cladothricis 
Abdomen testaceous with suffused bands, mesothorax 
smooth, shiny ... . . . . . « 6 ventralis 


Stigma brownish, engine — size larger, 7 mm. or 
over 

Stigma entirely polka ei practically nade size 

smaller, not over 6 mm. . 

Nervures almost colorless. ....... 29 

Nervures dark brown 2 


peer leew 
2 v.alticola 


3 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 
. Head brown, thorax black ........ . 1 texana 
Head and thorax dark green ....... =. 2 latior 
. Cheeks toothed beneath, legs entirely yellow” 14 pulchrior 


16 


20 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 


19. Anterior femora mostly black, abdomen with heavy dark 
Damas 25/001) Baw i) ayo ben mentzelice 
Anterior femora entirely rales phdamen with evanescent 
bands\s. 4...) Taian en Lo pallidior 
20. Head and thorax piceous, poansingl cell obliquely truncate, 
abdomen ovate, size rather large . . . . . . 1 texana 
Thorax black except the green metathorax ; head green, 
front seneous . . . . . . 008 eneifrons 
Thorax black except the blue retatliorase head blue; a 
yellow spot on each sideof clypeus . . . 18 semicerulea 
Head and thorax green 
21. Females . a fhe 
Males, size small, nervures iid stigma suEeeIne cou: foie ape 
yellow in front... . wees sat arcuate 
22. Abdomen broad, mentiples Bidentate marginal cell ob- 
BME NWAEEUMGALC eee etek ks ee 02. Catior 
Not so ars atts Meet as Ag: 
23. Small, about a5 mm. fone: nervures een . . 02 phymate 
Larger, nervures nearly colorless . . . . . 68 v. nigrior 
24. Face below level of antennz all yellow or white, except 
clypeal dots in some. Males . 
Face below level of antennze not all pale . 
25. Face below antennz white . 
Face below antennz yellow 
26. Last three segments of abdomen ae the cee panned 
19 crotonis. 
Abdomen yellowish-white, banded, face below antennze pel- 
lucid white, first 4 legs all dull white except a dark streak 
on middle tibie. .... oye OU pelluctaa. 
Abdomen dark brown with ne markings BYLs 
27. Abdomen with about 6 white marks, or fewer eollowich 


28. 


CO te ee pectidis. 

Abdomen with me more or es developed white bands, 

41 cladothricis. 

Legs black with a little yellowish. . . . . . 25 affinis. 

Anterior and middle femora marked with black, cheeks 
unarmed 


Anterior femora all ee fhe 4 anterior abies not all le 


low . 


First 4 legs all yellow, or at least not marked with black or 


brown . 


47 


+O 


+() 


oy 


ol. 


32. 


9 
o. 


34. 


40. 


41. 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


fuNenvures;pallid .’.::-0.5, 53 Ceeaen eae) 22 ee 


Nervures dark . 


. Face and disc of Heaters peat “ae be pele anten- 


ne bright yellow 
Face and disc of mesothorax ee 
Very small, abdomen yellow with pale pofiaeed eae 


batidsy ny <2. e .. . . . 43 biparticeps. 
Larger, abdomen ae sith one cut gies light 
amids) G.0e °. . . . 27 rectangulata. 


Head broader chan Tone cal bane on 2d abdominal seg- 
ment broadly continued to lateral margin, dog-ear marks 
with more or less of a dark border below . 22 v. alticola. 

Head round, distal band of 2d abdominal segment failing 


some distance before lateral margin . . . . 38 hirsuta. 
Face all yellow ae the anteorbital spots) up to middle 
ocellus si me 5 ~Gungic huene: laereene: 
Face not all yellow up to pao ocellus. . 49 maculipes. 
Legs entirely orange-rufous, abdomen black, nervures 
brow 2a. ie ihe) eee 


Legs not pehapeenatiien ‘dha oment baited t 


. The yellow extending above antennz in median line . 


The yellow not extending above antennz in median line . 


. The yellow extending above across the face . 


The yellow extending above only at sides and middle Geet 


. Larger, about 5 mm. 3S face-markings resembling gutier- 


neste & (ews oo: gh 2 = oh SR Deaton 
Smaller, akanteibe mm. eee -4 sha: ale eee 
. Face yellow up to anterior ocellus . . . . . 37 martini. 
Face not yellow up to anterior ocellus. . . 45 gutierrezie. 


. Upward extension of yellow in median line narrow, shaped 


like a spear-head, abdomen above with only 3 or 4 bands, 
40 salicis. 

Upward extension of yellow in median line broader 
Incursion of blue downward terminating at a right angle ; 


ploure ‘dark. <) "notated 4 fh) +. «SE ie 
Incursion of blue terminating at an acute angle; pleura 
largely yellow... . . . . . . 36 exclamans. 
Cheeks armed, abdomen eee banded . . 12 mentzelie. 


Cheeks unarmed 


30 


38 


40 


42 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 


42. 


43. 
44, 
45, 
46. 
47. 
48. 
49. 
50. 
Ol. 


Ola Pale face-marks reduced to a spot on clypeus; nervures 


2. 


53. 


54, 


55. 


56. 


Abdomen not heavily marked. . . . . . . 13 pallidior. 
Abdomen piceous with ill-defined yellowish bands . 

10 obscurata. 
The pale color confined to clypeus and sides of face . 
The pale color not confined to clypeus and sides of face . 
Abdomen dark, not banded, or the bands discontinuous . 
Abdomen with continuous bands 


Larger species, length over 6 mm. . 

Smaller species, 6 mm. or less . 

Mesothorax practically nude . 

Mesothorax hairy . cc en eee 

Abdomen dark brown Githout ale meee . . 06 nuda 

Abdomen with pale marks, clypeus pale with two black bars, 
Abdominal markings yellow . . . . . . 11 octomaculata 
Abdominal markings creamy white . . . . 58 senecionis. 

Female ; abdomen more or less spotted . . 68 verbesine. 

Males . : MRSC 40 A octarn? SEA! 

Head and thorax eee greens /%) 5 +sv.8 10) lepachidis. 

Head and thorax rather bluish-green . . . 69 albipennis. 


Abdomen without distinct light markings . 
Abdomen with yellow or white markings . 


brown... eat. Tali-Daephymate var. 
Pale face-marks ane so anceds lateral marks present . 
Nervures brown, Californian species . 
Nervures pallid 


Lateral face-marks with seis upper Panel aight fale 


3 californica 8 var. 

Lateral face-marks with their upper angle a very acute 
aneders 0.1.0 1%. we tLe 2SE tristgnate 
Clypeus with two iene tae patches on hind margin, up- 
per angle of lateral face-marks a very acute angle, meso- 


thorax very hairy .. . oom + BOM Masteris 


Clypeus pale except the Gauad anos 
Anterior tibize black in front; face extremely Rate 


65 albovittata 


Anterior tibize yellow or rufotestaceous in front . 
Marginal cell with the substigmatal portion very much 
longer than the poststigmatal, size very small . 
17 larrearum 
Marginal cell ordinary 


49 


“1 
oO w 


orm 


He Ol fe 
“Te & Ww 


— 
10 & 


48 
2 


50 


57. 


58. 


59. 


60. 


op) 
js) 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Larger (43 mm.), face less hairy, lateral face-marks shaped 
like the main-sail of aschooner . . . . . . 66 vagans 

Smaller (4 mm.), face more hairy, lateral face-marks tri- 
angular .. . . Dieu ©... 09svespertaie 

Abdomen with 6 or 8 wee ee ' 

Abdomen with yellowish markings 

Mesothorax shiny; clypeus dark with a okt ava daeed 


markings white ... . . . 42 pectidis 
Mesothorax dull; clypeus light aah ae spots or bars; 
face-markings yellowish ........ . 51 fallax 


Face-markings white, lst segment of abdomen largely blue, 
5 interrupta 
Face-markings yellowish or yellow 


. Postscutellum yellow... .... =. . 7 mexicanorum 


Postscutellum not yellow . 


. Nervures dark brown, lateral face- Seay truncate knees 


clypeus light marked with dark, mesothorax dullish, ab- 
dominal marks very pale . . . ... . . . 28 affinis 
Nervures colorless, lateral face-marks pointed above, cly- 
peus dark marked with light, mesothorax shining, ab- 
dominal marks yellower . . . . . . . . 10 obscurata 


. Larger species, length over 6 mm. . 


Smaller species, 6 mm. or less . 


. Males, abdominal bands narrow, inconspicuous, dull yelling 


emarginate at sides . 
Females, bands conspicuous 


65. Front comparatively shining, Bacedien awe 
69 var. helianthi 
Front dull, flagellum orange . . . . . . . 68 verbesine 
66. Abdomen white with black bands, clypeus white with two 
black-dots #0) - . . . . 64 perpulehra 
Abdomen dark with abe et : . ie 
G7.. Nenyuresidark <2 ave. © Soe. sete. ie 
Nervures colorless... < . .... .. «69 alétpennw 
68. Clypeus hairy, legs black, ete markings ae abdominal 
bands white ee SS . 65 albovittata 
Not so 
69. Yellow at sides ar ace tea, ieee ies a of insertion vat 


antenne: size very small. . . . .. . . . 44 austini 
Yellow or whitish at sides of face only extending to level 
of insertion of antennze ; size not so small 


61 


62 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 


70. 


y's 


72. 


73. 


74. 


75. 


76. 


(ie 


78. 


79. 


80. 


81. 


82. 


Abdomen dark with light bands. . . . . . 48 bigelovie 
Abdomen light with dark bands . Pera tates ey. 
Mesothorax very shiny, dark blue-green . . . 47 nitidella 
Mesothorax dull, hairy, brassy-green. . . . . 28 snowii 
Dog-ear marks absent . : 
Dog-ear marks present, or at least Poresdntedl iy aye : 


Abdomen with the last two segments bright rufous, the 
others white with black bands. . . . . . . 19 crotonis 
Not so . 


Bands of abdomen a ease mactly. entire . 

Bands of abdomen all interrupted . 

Abdomen dark without bands . 

Stigma solid dark brown or black, clypeus a two mired 
black bars, lateral pale areas of face pinkish, 39 numerata 

Stigma hyaline, at least centrally . 

Anterior legs entirely yellow, mesothorax dull! ales i fare 
broadly yellow up to level of antenne, then for a short 
way suddenly very narrowly . . . . . 27 gee 

Anterior legs partly black . 

The black bands of abdomen not fined on paleeceal margin, 
anterior tibiz all yellow, lateral pale triangle of face 
coming to a point above, face-markings lemon-yellow . 

8 zonalis 

The black bands of abdomen more or less united on lateral 
margin, anterior tibize with a black mark behind . 

Lateral triangle of face obliquely truncate above ; a bluer 
species. oak se. 48 (Oigelome > var. 

Lateral triangle se ee coming to a point above, but nar- 
rower than in zonalis, face-markings eth ; a greener spe- 
ies = ti Ae le 

Supraclypeal ick Reoadl rotched: in fide: . 24 bakere 

Supraclypeal mark narrower, or reduced to two spots . 

23 zebrata 

Female, flagellum only pale testaceous beneath rat 

25 affinis 2 var. 
Males . 


Flagellum ee ; Species aes neat U. S.. 11 octomaculata. 


Flagellum mostly yellow; species of Lower California . 
67 sparsa. 
Head large, quadrate, face very hairy . . . . 62 laticeps 


~] 
“I 


52 


83. 


84. 


86. 


90. 


91. 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 
Head ordinary, face not so hairy . . . 57 asteris 9 var. 


Abdomen black or dark brown, without pale marks 

Abdomen not banded, but with yellow marks . 

Abdomen distinctly banded 

Cheeks armed, head large, clypeus athe a narrow cle 
line and broad anterior border yellow, two yellow spots 
above clypeus . . . . Stele lz ~ . 60 grindaeeps 

Cheeks unarmed, clypeus all ale except the usual dots . 


. Lateral corners of clypeus reaching base of mandibles, mar- 


ginal cell shorter . . . . _. +... . 3 californica 
Lateral corners of clypeus stot ae base of mandibles, 
marginal cell longer. . . . ... . . . 61 crassiceps 
The yellow abdominal marks oblique, “pe marks rep- 
resented by dotsonly ....... . . 9 nevadensis 
The yellow abdominal marks small and straight . 46 tarda 

. Males . 
Females . : ere er: 
: Cheeksrarmed ) 4. 6.07) is 2 ee iar = se Wa ene 


Cheeks unarmed 


. Mesothorax granular, ppaviieaall peas aieoee Titel 


bulgings on proximal margin, face-markings deep yellow, 


22 spheralcee var. 
Mesothorax smooth and shining . 


Middle and posterior femora yellow, ee hist nates 
abdominal bands regular, though with sublateral bulg- 
ings on proximal margins, marginal cell longer, 30 dubia 

Middle and posterior femora with black spots or patches, 
marginal cell shorter . 

Supraclypeal mark very little agile tas ious 23 ena 

Supraclypeal mark nearly twice as broad as long . : 

24 bakere 


2. Nervures colorless; pale stripe along anterior orbits not 


extending to level of middle ocellus . . . . 40 salicis. 
Nervures dark ; pale stripe along anterior orbits extending 
to level of middle ocellus. . . . . . . 36 exclamans. 


90 


91 


Species of Texas and Mexico, with the mandibles bifid at tips, the 


head large, the stigma subobsolete, the abdomen broad, rufous in the 
3, black or piceous in the Q. 


1. Perdita texana (Cr.) Cr., Cat. Hym., 1887, p. 296. 


Q Macrotera texana Cr., Tr. Am. Ent, Soe., 1878, p. 70. (Hab., Texas). 
¢ Macrotera megacephala Cr., 1. ¢., p. 71. (Hab., Texas). 


This species was discovered by Mr. L. Heiligbrodt, who took three 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 53 


of each sex. I know of no other specimens, and nothing is known 
of the exact locality or habits. The dark chocolate-brown head and 
black thorax at once separate this species from P. Jatior. In both 
species the marginal cell is obliquely truncate. 
2. Perdita latior n.sp. Fig. 6, (part of wing). 
$ 9, length 53-6 mm., broad, head large, broader than long ; 
head, thorax, legs and tip of abdomen with pubescence consisting of 
dull white erect hairs; punctuation of vertex, mesothorax and 
seutellum very fine and close; upper surface of meta- 
— thorax bare, shining, minutely granular; dorsum of 
abdomen very minutely punctured, the punctures on 

Fic.6. first segment very sparse. Tegule pale testaceous; 
wings hyaline, nervures pale brown, stigma little developed, 3d 
discoidal present, marginal about as long as 1st submarginal, 2d sub- 
marginal narrowed more than half to marginal. 

$ .—Clypeus prominent, with a minute tooth on each side. Head 
and thorax dark green, metathorax strongly tinged bluish. Mandi- 
bles except their dark tips, clypeus, lower corner of face, and a broad 
transverse band between antenne, dull testaceous. The punctua- 
tion, which is close before the ocelli, becomes sparse behind them. 
Antennz dull testaceous, more or less suffused with blackish. Legs 
dark piceous, the front of the anterior tibiz and all the tibial spurs, 
dull testaceous. Abdomen shining, ferruginous ; first segment more 
or less suffused with blackish. 

@ —Head and thorax dark green, face almost black, dorsum of 
mesothorax and scutellum purplish, dorsum of metathorax bluish. 

Antenne dark brown, the last 7 joints of flagellum beneath be- 
coming dull testaceous or ferruginous. Mandibles yellowish-ferru- 
ginous, dark at tips. Legs colored as in ¢. Abdomen brown- 
black, the margins of the segments subtestaceous. 

Hab.—Las Cruces, N. M., middle of August, 1895, on flowers of 
Spheralcea angustifolia, 3$,39. (CkIl., 4,806, 4,809, 4,814, ete.) 
It was associated with Diadasia and Halictus. 

Obs.. P. areuata Fox, the description of which reads rather like 
latior, is of a different group, viz. that of californica, ete. 


Species of California and Mexico, with the clypeus in the ¢ 
narrowly produced at the sides to the bases of the mandibles, resemb- 
ling in shape a panama hat. 

8. Perdita californica (Cr.) Cr., Cat. Hym., 1887, p. 296. 
$ Macrotera californica Cr.,Tr. Am. Ent. Soc., 1878, p. 71. (Hab., California). 


Three specimens are known, collected by Edwards and Crotch. 


54 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Nothing is known of exact locality or habits. The following notes 
were made from one of the types. 

Clypeus panama-hat-shaped, as in interrupta. Cheeks unarmed. 
Dog-ear marks distinct, but supraclypeal mark wanting. Head 
quite large. Mandibles simple. 

The lateral face-marks have their upper angle a right angle, and 
are so placed as to be exactly level with top of clypeus, the dog-ear 
marks projecting a little above the same level. 

The mesothorax is tolerably shiny, but quite closely and strongly 
punctured. The stigma and veins are brown, not very dark; mar- 
ginal long, obliquely truncate, appendiculate, poststigmatal portion 
considerably longer than substigmatal. Stigma small. 2d sub- 
marginal large, narrowed fully one-half to marginal. 3d discoidal 
distinct but rather weak. 

The following tables separate californica from two species present- 
ing a certain superficial resemblance to it. 


A. (1). Upper margin of face-marks forming nearly a straight line. 
Head larger. Marginal cell appendiculate. Margins of 
abdominal segments very distinctly reddish-testaceous, 

californica 3. 

(2). Upper margin of face-marks forming a broad W. Head 
smaller. Marginal cell not appendiculate. Margins of 
abdominal segments not reddish-testaceous, —=asteris 2. 

B. (1). Larger. Supraclypeal mark absent. Lateral face-marks 
not reaching level of insertion of antennz. Clypeus shaped 
like a panama hat, . ' : 4 =californica 3. 

(2). Smaller. Supraclypeal mark present. Lateral face-marks 

going above level of insertion of antennz. Clypeus shaped 
like a rather low cork helmet, ; . =tarda ¢. 

4. Perdita arcuata Fox, Proc. Cala. Acad., 1893, p. 18. @ (Hab., Calmalli 

Mines, L. Cala., in April). 

Two specimens known, found by Mr. Haines. From one of these I 
noted as follows: Mandibles simple; cheeks unarmed. Differs 
from semicerulea, phymate and latior in having margins of abdom- 
inal segments broadly rufotestaceous, exactly as in californica. In 
the shape of the head, and general structure, it precisely agrees with 
californica; but differs from that by its entirely dark face, the labrum 
and the base of the mandibles only being yellowish. The vertex is 
well punctate, and it and the mesthorax are quite dull. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 55 


5. Perdita interrupta Cr., Tr. Am. Ent. Soc., 1878, p. 70. ¢ (Hab., California). 

Three specimens were found by Crotch; we have no information 
as to exact locality or habits. From one of the types I noted the 
following : 

Cheeks unarmed, quite densely (for a Perdita) white pubescent. 
Face more hairy than usual. Clypeus with two black dots. Lateral 
pale patches of face forming nearly right-angled triangles, the upper 
angle being the right angle. Mesothorax granular, dull. Wings 
distinctly smoky, nervures dark brown. Marginal rather long, sub- 
stigmatal portion equal to poststigmatal. Second submarginal nar- 
rowed about or hardly one-half to marginal. Third discoidal dis- 
tinct. First segment of abdomen, except its distal margin, blue, 
granular, in strong contrast with the piceous remaining segments. 
P. fallax, which presents a certain superficial resemblance to inter- 
rupta, differs as follows: 

(1). Its clypeus is shaped like a felt hat, not like a panama hat as 
in interrupta. 

(2). The upper angle of lateral face-marks is a very acute angle. 

(3). The poststigmatal portion of marginal cell is distinctly longer 
than the substigmatal. 

(4). The head and thorax are green, whereas they are blue in 
interrupta. 

6. Perdita ventralis Fox, Proc. Cala. Acad., 1893, p.17.  ¢ (as 2 ex.err.); Proce. 
Cala. Acad., 1894, p. 116 9. 

The original types, three specimens, were found by Mr. Haines on 
Margarita Island, L. Cala., in March. Later, the same collector 
obtained numerous examples including females, on Magdalena 
Island, also in March. These islands are close together, a little south 
of the 25th parallel of latitude. 

The ¢ hasthe cheeks armed, and the clypeus panama-hat shaped. 
In the 9 the cheeks are unarmed, and the clypeus differently 
shaped. In the ¢ the mandibles are very slender, pointed; in the 
@ stout, notched within. In view of these differences, it is at first 
hard to believe that they are sexes of one species, for all that they 
agree in the abdomen with its suffused banding, in the mesothorax, 
etc. 

P. ventralis is smaller than menizelie and pallidior, and differs by 
the suffused banding of abdomen. P. mentzelie and pallidior have 
the mesothorax microscopically tessellate, with distinct sparse 
punctures ; ventralis has it very shiny, smooth, hairless except the 


56 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


anterior third, which is sparsely hairy and punctured. The thorax 
shines distinctly blue in ventralis 3, but in the 9 it hardly goes off 
a pure black. The 3 resembles californica in its face-markings, 
but is so much smaller, and the dog-ear marks are much more 
prominent. The vertex is minutely roughened in the same way in 
é and 9. 

The face in the 9 is all dark, not sointhe ¢. The ¢ has the 
lateral face-marks much broader than long, the dog-ear marks well- 
developed, but the supraclypeal mark represented only by a dot 
adjacent to each dog-ear mark. 

It is to be regretted that ventralis is the only undoubted member 
of the californica group of which we know the 9. The sexual dif- 
ferences in Perdita are very unequal in the different species, whether 
occurring as face-markings or as structural characters. In the un- 
doubted sexes of P. verbesine, the clypeal differences are not so great 
as in ventralis, but the difference in the mandibles is actually much 
greater. 


7. Perdita mexicanorum n. sp. 

.—Length about 54 mm. Head and thorax dark blue. Head 
rather large, cheeks unarmed, clypeus panama-hat shaped, glossa 
very long and unusually hairy. Cheeks and face very sparsely bairy 
with short hairs. Vertex strongly granular, and with rather close 
but shallow punctures. Antenne entirely sepia-brown, the same 
color above as below. Mandibles yellowish, subtestaceous, dark at 
tips, simple, not particularly slender. Face-markings sulphur-yellow; 
clypeus yellow with the usual two black dots very small and near 
the edge, and its proximal margin (the crown of the panama-hat) 
broadly dark, the edge of the yellow somewhat irregular and medi- 
ally emarginate. Supraclypeal and dog-ear marks absent. Sides of 
face with large squarish yellowish patches, their upper margins 
truncate and rather irregular, about level with the top of the clypeus. 
Inwardly, these patches do not join the clypeal margin, but leave a 
thin wedge of dark color between. 

Thorax dark blue, the mesothorax slightly inclined to greenish. 
Prothorax and tubercles entirely dark; postscutellum sulphur- 
yellow. Mesothorax moderately shining, but distinctly granular 
and punctuate, median groove distinct. Metathorax shining but 
very distinctly granular. 

Tegule testaceous; wings slightly smoky, nervures and stigma 
dull brownish-ochreous, stigma not centrally hyaline. Marginal 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 57 


cell rather long, very distinctly appendiculate, poststigmatal portion 
a little longer than substigmatal. Second submarginal rather large, 
narrowed hardly one-half to marginal, the narrowing more proximal 
than distal. Third discoidal distinct. Cubital and subdiscoidal 
nervures produced almost to wing-margin. 

Legs sepia-brown ; anterior tibize in front, and a stripe on middle 
tibize, yellow. 

Abdomen shining, sepia-brown, darker toward the apex; venter 
nearly the same. There are well-defined yellow marks at sides of 
segments 2-5, partly passing over to the venter. 

Hab.—Mexico, one example sent by Mr. Fox. Unhappily we 
know nothing of the exact locality or habits of this interesting species. 
It is the only Perdite I know with a yellow postscutellum. 


Two species from Nevada, known only in the @ ; exact locality and 
habits unknown. 


8. Perdita zonalis Cr., Tr. Am. Ent. Soc., 1879, p. 202. 9 (Hab., Nevada). 

Ten specimens were collected by Morrison. From one of these I 
have noted as follows: 

Clypeus low cork-helmet type, reaching base of mandibles. 
Mesothorax excessively shiny, dark brassy-green, very sparsely but 
distinctly punctured. Face markings pale yellow. Upper margin 
of clypeus medially truncate, not rounded. Clypeus all yellow 
except two dark dots. Supraclypeal patch well-developed, broad, 
but not twice as broad as long. No dog-ear marks. Sockets of 
antennz narrowly ringed with yellow. Lateral face marks trian- 
gular, rather broad, coming to a point at level of insertion of 
antenne. Upper margin of face marks not forming a W but V V. 
Stigma and nervures pale testaceous, stigma large, marginal cell with 
poststigmatal portion longer than substigmatal. Second submarginal 
large, narrowed one-half to marginal. Third discoidal distinct. 

Abdomen above yellow with four black bands, and a black mark 
on each side of first segment. The abdomen is peculiar for the 
black bands being very distinct, neither notched nor interrupted in 
the middle, and narrower than the yellow between them. 

From zebrata and bakere it may be known by the black bands of 
abdomen not being united on lateral margin, the anterior tibiz all 
yellow, the lateral triangle of face broader and the face markings 
lemon-yellow. From salicis 9 it is distinguished at once by the 
very much broader lateral face-marks. 


9) 


58 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


9. Perdita nevadensis n. sp. 

9.—Length almost 6 mm. Head so dark green as to seem 
black; thorax pitch black, with the metathorax green. In certain 
lights the prothorax and anterior part of the mesothorax present a 
greenish lustre. Head moderately large, broader than long, de- 
pressed on vertex; clypeus shaped like a rather low cocked-hat, 
flattened at the top, the teeth of anterior margin dark and rather 
long. Vertex dull, rugulose. Face and cheeks with sparse incon- 
spicuous hairs. Antenne dark brown; the flagellum paler, inclin- 
ing to yellow beneath. Face-markings pale dull yellowish; clypeus 
pale with two broad divergent black bars and a black dot distad of 
each, supraclypeal mark represented by two round or suboval spots ; 
dog-ear marks represented by obscure small spots, not alike on both 
sides ; lateral pale patches triangular, the upper angle an acute one 
and level with the insertion of the antenne, the shortest side of the 
triangle at least two-thirds the length of the longest. Mesothorax 
shiny, hardly granular, sparsely hairy and punctate. Thorax all 
dark, except the tubercles, which are pale yellow. Metathorax 
granular. 

Tegule pale testaceous. Wings hyaline, faintly smoky, nervures 
and stigma pale brown, stigma centrally subhyaline. Marginal 
cell moderately long, obliquely truncate, poststigmatal portion a 
very little longer than substigmatal. Second submarginal large, 
narrowed on its distal side one-half to marginal. Third discoidal 
distinct. Legs dark brown, anterior knees, anterior tibiz in front 
and stripe on middle tibiz, yellow. 

Abdomen rather broad, above and below piceous, segments 2-4 
above with distinct oblique lateral yellow marks. The mark on the 
2d segment is on one side broken into two. 

Hab.—Nevada, one specimen sent by Mr. Fox. 

The following tables will separate nevadensis from some species 
which it superficially resembles. 

A. (1). Lateral marks of face triangular, terminating in a point, 

—nevadensis 2. 
(2). Latera] marks of face truncate at end and notched within, 


—=affinis 9. 
B. (1). Face-markings whitish, lateral marks narrower, abdom- 
inal marks white, . : . fallax 9. 


(2). Face-markings yellow, frteral: mar ks broader, abdominal 
marks yellow, : ‘ é P =nevadensis 2. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 59 


C. (1). Larger, clypeus higher, supraclypeal mark absent, lateral 


marks notched within, . : F octomaculata 2. 
(2). Smaller, clypeus lower, supraclypeal mark present, lateral 
marks not notched within, . : —=nevadensis 9. 


Species found east of the 95th meridian. 
10. Perdita obscurata Cr., Tr. Am. Ent. Soc., 1878, p. 70. ¢9 (Hab., Georgia). 

One male and one female were found by Morrison. I have made 
the following description from the female ; the student will observe 
that in some points it disagrees with that of Cresson, notwithstand- 
ing that it is from the same specimen. 

? .—Head and thorax dark bluish-green. Clypeus broad, not 
much attenuate at sides, reaching base of mandibles. Face-mark- 
ings pale yellow, lateral marks very narrow, inversely club-shaped, 
reaching as far as level of insertion of antenne. Clypeus without 
marks, except a very distinct central one, shaped like an inverted 
egg-cup with the egg in it, the base at posterior clypeal border, the 
apex not reaching anterior border of clypeus. Mandibles except 
tips pale yellow. Mesothorax shiny. Tubercles rather pale brown- 
ish. Hind margin of prothorax with two small yellow spots. Wings 
hyaline, stigma very large, pale yellowish, veins colorless. Mar- 
ginal cell with the substigmatal portion a little longer than the post- 
stigmatal. First submarginal very long, longer than marginal. 
Second submarginal short, suboval and high, narrowed about one- 
half to marginal. On one side there is a small petiolate submarginal 
cell between normal 1st and 2d submarginals, it receives the first 
recurrent nervure, and is approximately an equilateral triangle. 
Third discoidal distinct. The broadly interrupted narrow fasciz 
on abdomen are not obscure or suffused, but clean-cut and distinct. 
It differs from the 9 of affinis by the lateral face-marks being 
pointed above, the clypeus dark marked with light, the mesothorax 
shiny, the nervures colorless, and the abdominal marks yellowish. 

The ¢ I have not seen; Mr. Fox has kindly sent me a sketch of 
the face-markings, showing the face entirely yellow below the level 
of the antennz, the yellow not extending upward at all in the 
median line, but obliquely extending upward at the sides from the 
antennal socket to the orbital margin, where it ends at an angle of 
about 50°. The cheeks, Mr. Fox informs me, are not armed. 

Mr. Charles Robertson tells me that at Orlando, Florida, on March 
16th, he captured a ¢ obscurata on flowers of Hydrocotyle wmbellata. 


60 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


11. Perdita octomaculata (Say). Cr., Cat. Apide, 1879, p. 216. 
Panurgus 8-maculatus Say, Long’s 2d. Exped., ii, p. 350, 1824. ¢9 (Hab., U- 
Sn: 

I have a 9 from New York State, sent by Dr. Skinner, and a 2 
from southern Illinois, sent by Mr. Roberston. Mr. Fox informs me 
that he has seen specimens from the White Mts., N. H., collected by 
Mrs. Slosson, New York, New Jersey and Virginia. He has taken it in 
southern New Jersey, but sparingly. Prof. J. B. Smith reports it 
from Westville, N. J.,on Cresson’s authority. Of its habits, nothing 
has been recorded, but Mr. C. Robertson informs me that he has 
taken it from Aug. 13th to Sept. 20th, on flowers of Solidago canad- 
ensis, Coreopsis aristosa and Aster ericoides var. villosus. 


Three allied species found on Mentzelia in New Mexico. 


12. Perdita mentzelie n. sp. 

$.—About 53 mm. long. Head rather large, quadrate, broader 
than thorax, mandibles simple, cheeks beneath with a prominent 
tooth, lower margin of clypeus nearly straight; vertex finely 
rugulose, with sparse feeble punctures between the ocelli and the 
antenn ; eyes narrow. Color very dark blue-green, with the whole 
of the face beneath the antennz, and the lower half of the cheeks, 
including the spines, orange-yellow. On each side of the face the 
yellow extends upward, narrowing to a point on the orbital margin 
about two-thirds the length of the scape above the level of the 
insertion of the antenne. Mandibles yellow with ferruginous tips. 
Antenne yellow, becoming deep orange toward their tips; the 
flagellum slightly marked with blackish above. 

Thorax shiny, very dark blue-green, becoming black on the 
scutellum and hind part of mesothorax, metathorax tinged with 
blue. Collar, tubercles, under side and part of hind border of pro- 
thorax orange-yellow. Mesothorax with only a few scattered indis- 
tinct punctures. Metathorax minutely granular. Pleura, anterior 
border of mesothorax and sides of metathorax with scattered white 
hairs. 

Tegule hyaline; wings hyaline, nervures very pale yellowish. 
Marginal cell about or hardly as long as stigma. Second sub- 
marginal not narrowed one-half to marginal. Third discoidal 
hardly perceptible. 

Legs orange; posterior femora with a brown patch behind ; poste- 
rior tibis and tarsi mostly brown. Abdomen orange-yellow, first 
segment almost all black, segments 2,3 and 4 with broad suffused 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 61 


black bands. Venter orange, immaculate. Quite as often, perhaps 
more frequently, the abdomen is shining black above, except the 
terminal segment which is testaceous, and the more or less obviously 
testaceous distal margins of the other segments. 

@ .—Somewhat larger ; head rounder, not broader than thorax. 
Punctures of mesothorax distinct but scattered. The pale markings 
all yellowish-white instead of yellow. Face dark, clypeus black 
contrasting with the green upper part of face. An irregularly 
triangular yellowish-white patch on each lower corner of face 
between clypeus and orbit. Coxe black, their ends whitish. Femora 
black, their tips whitish. Tibiz whitish, middle and hind tibie 
largely suffused with black. Dorsum of abdomen with the black 
nearly covering the segments, leaving transverse white areas or 
bands, not continued to lateral margin, on segments 2-4. Venter 
whitish, not banded. 

Hab.—Santa Fé, N. M., close tothe Denver & Rio Grande depot, 
at flowers of Menzelia nuda, Aug. 3, 1895, many specimens. They 
were associated with Bombus (abundant) and Andrena (rare). 


13. Perdita pallidior n. sp. 

$.—Resembles the ¢ of mentzelie, but differs in the cheeks being 
unarmed beneath, in the smaller head, the second submarginal cell 
more narrowed above, the legs entirely yellow, the abdomen above 
orange-yellow, with the first segment nearly all dark brown or 
black, and a dark brown band on segments 2 and 3, that on 3d fail- 
ing some distance before the lateral margin. 

9? .—Resembles the 9 of mentzelie, but differs in the legs being 
all yellowish-white, except a dusky shade on inside of anterior 
femora, and outside of middle and posterior tibiz. The white sub- 
triangular marks on sides of face are rather more produced upward 
along the orbital margin. The abdomen above is yellowish-white, 
the first segment with a broad brown-black ring, the second and 
third segments with dark bands, the fourth segment with a pair of 
dark spots, suffused in outline. 

Hab.—Albuquerque, N. M., close to Prof. Hadley’s house, abun- 
dant on flowers of Mentzelia nuda, Aug. 15, 1895. A single Q was 
also swept from Gutierrezia sarothre (det. E. O. Wooton) at the 
same time and place. No other bees were then found upon the 
Mentzelia, except Perdita pulehrior. On the Gutierrezia were found 
also Perdita gutierrezie and P. austini, one each. 


62 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


14. Perdita pulchrior n. sp. Fig. 7, (part of wing). 
$ .—Resembles the 3 of pallidior, but rather larger and stoutly 
built, with the cheeks armed below with a prominent spine. Head 
large and subquadrate. Second submarginal not so much narrowed 
me above. Legsentirely yellow. Abdomen above shiny 
>=, pale orange-yellow, the first segment mostly black, second 
with a pair of dark spots; nodark bands. The second 

Fic.7. segment may have its lateral margins also dark, and the 
third segment may show spots. 

Hab.—Albuquerque, N. M., on Mentzelia nuda,same time and place 
as pallidior, two males (CkIl., 4,537, 4,558). On Sept. 12th, I was 
surprised to take another example, also a male, on Bigelovia wrightti 
close to the Agricultural College, Las Cruces, N. M. This species 
may possibly represent a dimorphic 3 of pailidior ; the 9 is either 
unknown, or not to be separated from those presumably referable to 
pallidior. 


Four species found on Larrea in New Mexico. 


15. Perdita larree n.sp. Fig. 8. (stigma ete). 

é.—Hardly 4 mm. long, bright orange-yellow, smooth and shiny ; 

pubescence consisting of sparse white hairs on vertex, cheeks beneath, 

mesothorax, pleura, tibiz, tarsi, apex and venter of 

aw abdomen. Head very large, considerably larger than 

the small thorax, subquadrate ; clypeus produced into 

Fic. 8. a spine at each lower corner, cheeks with a stout spine 
beneath, eyes rather small and narrow. 

Wings small, hyaline, nervures white, stigma hyaline in middle. 

Marginal cell narrow but hardly produced beyond stigma, not 
quite as long as first submarginal, appendiculate. Second submar- 
ginal very small, triangular, coming to a point at its junction with 
marginal. First recurrent joining, first transverse cubital. Third 
discoidal cell wanting. 

The mandibles are elongate, simple, dark at tips. The ocelli are 
more or less dark, with some dark marbling about them. Tongue 
about as long as head. 

Hab.—San Marcial, N. M., close to Mr. Shope’s house, at flowers 
of Larrea divaricata var. tridentata, June 28,1895, Five specimens. 


16. Perdita marcialis n. sp. 


$ .—Size and form of P. larree. Anterior margin of clypeus not 
so broad, with the spines longer and parallel; whereas in larree 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 63 


they are divergent. Wings as in larree, but the marginal cell 
rather more produced beyond stigma. A keel between antenne, 
giving place to a groove running upward to middle ocellus. Color 
deep orange, with dark markings. <A black spot before the upper 
part of each anterior orbital margin; a large green-metallic patch 
on vertex, enclosing the two posterior ocelli, but just escaping the 
anterior one or only partly enclosing it ; mesothorax shiny metallic 
olive-green, except rather broad yellow lateral margins; dorsum of 
metathorax dark green; a large round dark patch on sides of thorax 
beneath. Abdomen above more or less suffused with brown, which 
is dark at base of first and apex of second segments, and becomes 
reddish on last two segments. Hind legs tinged with brown. 
Mandibles simple as in larree. 

Hab.—San Marcial, N. M., on Larrea at the same time and place 
as P. larree. One specimen. 
17. Perdita larrearum n. sp. 

@.—4 mm. long. Head dark brassy-green, thorax black, pleura 
and metathorax bluish, abdomen dark sepia-brown. Head rounded, 
rather large, vertex conspicuously roughened, cheeks and occiput 
with a rather dense fringe of white hairs, clypeus and sides of face 
very narrowly pale yellowish-ferruginous, the pale color continuing 
along orbital margin some distance above level of antenne, but so 
thin that its termination is diffiult to trace. 

Antennz blackish above, yellowish beneath. 

Tubercles and hind border of prothorax narrowly, yellowish. 
Anterior portion of mesothorax curiously ornamented with appressed 
pure white hairs. Mesothorax appearing granular, microscopically 
reticulate, with very sparse shallow punctures. 

Legs brown, anterior tibize and tarsi dull yellow. Tegule yellow- 
ish-hyaline. Wings hyaline, nervures white or colorless. Marginal 
cell with its substigmatal portion fully twice as long as the post- 
stigmatal. Second submarginal triangular, bulging without, nar- 
rowing to a point at marginal. Third discoidal distinct. 

Abdomen above sepia-brown, the proximal ends of the first two 
segments slightly yellowish. Venter dull brownish-yellow. 

Hab.—San Marcial, N. M., on Larrea at the same time and place 
as P. larree. Three specimens. 

There are three possibilities regarding the last three species : 

(1). That they are three distinct species. 

(2). That the males represent two valid species, and larrearum 

the 9 of one of them. 


64 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


(3). That there is only one species, larree, marcialis being the 
dimorphic ¢ and darrearum the normal 9 of the same. 

While I incline to one of the latter suppositions, the difference 

between the three forms is very great, so that ia the absence of 
further evidence they must be provisionally regarded as species. 


18. Perdita semicerulea n. sp. 

9.—Length 6mm. Unusually hairy, the pubescence erect and 
white. Head of ordinary size, dark greenish-blue, bluer at sides of 
face, more brassy-green between antennz. Vertex finely rugulose, 
punctured. Clypeus high, pitch-black, smooth with large moder- 
ately close punctures. The only face-markings consist of a shining, 
hairless, bright sulphur-yellow oval patch on each side of the clypeus, 
separated from the eye margin by a distance at least equal to its 
own diameter. 

Antenne dark-brown, scape black, last joint of flagellum becom- 
ing pale. The antenne are rather conspicuously enlarged toward 
their ends. 

Mesothorax and scutellum smooth and shining, but with deep, 
large and rather close punctures. Thorax all black, except the 
metathorax which is blue. Pleura with quite long white hairs. 

Tegule hyaline. Wings milky-hyaline, stigma very pale yellow, 
hyaline in middle, nervures colorless, costal nervure black. Marginal 
cell rather short, appendiculate, poststigmatal portion hardly longer 
than substigmatal. Second submarginal large, narrowed about one- 
half to marginal. Third discoidal distinct. 

Legs brown-black, a little yellow on anterior tibie and knees. 

Abdomen shining, brown-black above and beneath. Sides of 
first segment, and in a less degree those of the others, with tufts of 
white hairs. Dorsum of last three segments more or less hairy, that 
of the last one considerably so. 

Hab.—San Marcial, N. M., on Larrea, at the same time and place 
as P. larree. One specimen. (CkIl., 3,077). This species is easily 
recognized by the dark clypeus, with a shining, smooth, yellow spot 
on each side of it. It is not nearly related to P. /arree, but rather 
to P. phymate, which, however, has not the yellow spots. 


A species with the end of the abdomen rufous, found on Croton. 


19. Perdita crotonis n. sp. 
@.—About 5 mm. long. Head rather broad, shining, dark blue 
or greenish-blue; clypeus except two black dots, a transversely 


1896 |] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 65 


elongate mark adjacent to hind border of clypeus, narrowing medi- 
ally, and a triangular patch on each side of face, not quite reaching 
to level of insertion of antennz, white. Mandibles white with rufous 
tips. Cheeks rather densely white-hairy. Antennz with the scape 
black above, white beneath; funicle and flagellum black or very 
dark brown, last joint of latter pale at tip. Thorax shiny, rather 
densely pubescent for a Perdita, mesothorax very dark bottle-green, 
median groove very distinct. Tubercles and posterior median border 
of prothorax white. Tegulz brownish, with a white spot on ante- 
rior half. Scutellum quite brassy-green. Metathorax dark blue, 
distinctly rugulose. Pleura smooth, dark blue. 

Legs white; with the femora except ends, most of hind cox, a 
patch behind each of the four anterior tibiz, the hind tibize except 
basal third, and the hind tarsi, black. Wings hyaline, nervures 
fuscous, stigma margined with fuscous. Marginal cell with the post- 
stigmatal portion about or hardly as long as the substigmatal ; 
second submarginal narrowed about one-half to marginal; third 
discoidal distinct. 

Abdomen above and below with the last two segments entirely 
rufous, without markings. Segments 1-3 above white, with black 
bands at proximal and distal margins of segments, those on proximal 
margins of segments 2 and 3 very narrow, and that on distal mar- 
gin of 3d represented only by a line of mottling. (CkIl., 3,262, etc.) 

Mut. 9 .—Clypeus with two longitudinal black lines or bands in 
addition to the marks above described. (CkII., 3,259). 

$ —The whole of the face beneath the level of the antennz white, 
except the two black dots on clypeus. Along the orbits the white 
is further produced a short distance, rapidly narrowing to a point. 
Second submarginal narrowed distinctly more than half to marginal. 
Last three segments of abdomen rufous. Cheeksunarmed. (CkIl., 
3,261). 

Hab.—Albuquerque, N. M., June 30, 1895, in numbers at flowers 
of Croton texensis. In August, Miss Myrtle Boyle found a single 
specimen at La Tenaja, near Santa Fé. I looked for it at Santa Fé, 
but failed to find it, though the Croton is abundant. 


A small species with orange or orange-rufous abdomen found on 
Chamesaracha. 


20. Perdita chamesarache n. sp. 
$.—d% mm. long. Head and thorax shining dark blue, abdomen 


66 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


brownish-orange. Vertex granular. Head rounded. Face below 
antennze yellowish-white, the upper border of the pale color coinci- 
dent with the lower level of the insertion of the antennz, except 
that on each side of the dog-ear plate there is a notch formed by an 
incursion of the dark color. Clypeus with a small black spot on 
each side. Mandibles rufous at tips. Antenne dark above, below 
dirty yellowish, the scape whiter. Sides of face with appressed white 
hairs. Cheeks unarmed, rather densely clothed beneath with erect 
white hairs. Sides of metathorax, and postscutellum, with similar 
hairs. 'Tubercles yellowish-white, tegule hyaline. Wings hyaline, 
nervures very pale straw-yellow, third discoidal very weak, second 
submarginal narrowing about one-half to marginal. Legs pale 
yellow, a dark patch on anterior femora, and middle and posterior 
femora and tibiz largely dark. Abdomen above bandless, first 
segment dark at base. Venter entirely orange. (CkIl., 4,568, ete.). 

9 .—Closely similar, but the dog-ear marks and pale mark above 
clypeus wanting, i. e., the pale color on face is confined to the clypeus 
and triangular marks at sides of face. (CkIl., 4,573). 

Hab.—Al|buquerque, N. M., in the old town at flowers of Chame- 
saracha coronopus, Aug. 16, 1895, abundant. Also at Santa Fé, in 
the capitol grounds, on flowers of C. coronopus, Aug. 2, 1895, two 
specimens. At Santa Fé it was associated on the flowers with Halic- 
tus & and Colletes. This species resembles P. semicrocea, but that 
has the face dark in the 9°. 


A species from the transition zone in New Mexico, habits unknown. 
21. Perdita foxi Ckll. Proc. Phila. Acad., 1895, p.18. ¢@ (Hab., Santa Fé, N. M.) 
The unique type, taken on June 25th, is only known. The species 


may be known by its orange-rufous legs, and black unbanded 
abdomen. 


A species found on Spheralcea, very different in the sexes, ranging 
in modified form over 3,200 feet altitude. 
22. Perdita spheralcee n. sp. 

9 .—Length 7} mm. Head and thorax dark greenish, abdomen 
black with three light bands. Head rather small, rounded, some- 
what broader than long, vertex and occiput dark olive-green, gran- 
ular; a shining brassy prominence between the antennz; clypeus 
black, shining, sparsely punctured toward the sides. No pale 
marks on face, except a small yellow spot on extreme lower corner. 
Mandibles brownish, ferruginous at apex, sharply and squarely 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 67 


notched on inner side near end, but not actually bifid. Cheeks quite 
densely hairy. Antennz dark brown, almost black above. 

Tubercles, and hind border of prothorax more or less, very pale 
yellowish. Mesothorax bulging in front, not very shiny, dark brassy, 
hardly green, quite pubescent with erect whitish hairs. Sides of 
metathorax with tufts of hairs, but postscutellum not conspicuously 
hairy. 

Tegule hyaline. Wings hyaline, nervures very pale yellowish, 
almost colorless, stigma margined with brown. Marginal cell rather 
long, poststigmatal portion distinctly longer than substigmatal. First 
submarginal not nearly so large as first discoidal. Second sub- 
marginal large, narrowing hardly one-half to marginal. Third dis- 
coidal quite distinct. 

Legs black ; anterior knees, anterior tibiz in front, middle tibize 
at tip behind, dull yellow. Abdomen rather narrow, black ; second, 
third and fourth segments at base with a broad pale yellowish band, 
slightly notched in middle behind. Venter dark brown. The 
abdominal bands have a slightly greenish tint, so that when the 
insect is alive on the flowers it rather suggests a miniature Nomia 
similar to WV. punctata. 

$.—Length 6mm. Cheeks unarmed. Light markingsall deep 
saffron-yellow, instead of pale greenish-yellow. Mandibles simple, 
yellow with ferruginous tips. Face beneath antennz all yellow, 
except two black dots on clypeus, the yellow moreover extending 
upward at sides of face, coming to a point at an angle of about 50°, 
not quite so far up as the length of the scape above level of insertion 
of antenne. Antenne yellow; funicle, flagellum and end of scape 
above, dark brown. 

Yellow hind margin of prothorax connecting with yellow tuber- 
cles. Legs yellow; part of middle coxe, posterior coxe except ends 
and a spot behind, a large patch on anterior and middle femora 
behind, a patch on both sides of hind femora, a large patch on 
middle tibiz, and outer side of hind tibiz and tarsi, black. Pleura 
with a round yellow patch, not very conspicuous, in front. 

Abdomen above shining, dark brown, with rather broad yellow 
bands at proximal margins of segments 2-5, that on 4 narrowest, 
that on 5 broadest, and notched behind medially. Sixth segment 
dull rufous with a brown rather suffused band. Venter dull orange. 

Hab.—Las Cruces, N. M., common at flowers of Spheralcea an- 
gustifolia, middle of August to middle of September, 1895. 


68 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


P. spheralcee, race alticola. 

Q9.—Nervures dark brown. A light spot on each side of 5th 
abdominal segment. (CkIl.,3,850). Thespots on 5th segment may 
be absent as in the type. 

$ .—Nervures dark, as in the 9. The dog-ear marks have more 
or less of a dark border below. 

Mut. surrusA. ¢.—Abdomen above suffused with brown, only 
the yellow bands on segments 2 and 3 remaining. Dog-ear marks 
reduced, their lower half often wanting. 

Mut. 9 —Only 6 mm. long. Abdominal bands narrow, that on 
segment 5th present though interrupted in the middle. (Ckil., 3,849). 
This may be the proper 9 of mut. suffusa. 

Hab.—Santa Fé, N. M., common at flowers of Spheralcea angus- 
tifolia; the males much more frequent than the females. The 
species was first taken in Mr. Boyle’s garden on July 25, 1895; 2 
normal ¢ alticola, 2 $ suffusa. On July 27th were taken several 
males, about equally divided between alticola proper and suffusa, 
and also two females. The latest date I have is Aug. 8th,a 9 taken 
by Miss Myrtle Boyle. The ¢ differs from zebrata 3 by its very 
dark (not bluish) thorax, much yellower light markings, darker 
stigma, and rather differently shaped face-markings. 


A species found on Cleome serrulata (C. integrifolia). 
23. Perdita zebrata Cr., Tr. Am. Ent. Soc., 1878, p. 69. Q (Hab., Colorado). 
& Perdita canina Ckll., Proc. Phila. Acad., 1895, p.17. (Hab., Santa Fé, N. M.). 
Figs. 9, 10, (face-marks and ¢ genitalia). 

Originally described from seven specimens taken by Ridings and 
Morrison. The ¢ was not known until described by me as canina. 
My No. 1,270 (1. c., p. 18) proves to have been the true 9, and is 

identical with at least some of Cresson’s types 


of zebrata, though it is possible that under 
nya this name more than one species was in- 
( cluded. The matter is complicated from the 


variability of 9 zebrata on the one hand, 
and the discovery of 2. bakere on the other, 


M, the latter species being easily distinguished 
4 in the ¢, but only with ex- 


; dy 
treme difficulty in the 9. cae 
Mr. Fox has sent mea Q ae 
eA of zebrata from the Magdalena —‘F'S. 9. 
Mts., N. M., Aug., 1894, collected by Snow. Mr. C. F. Baker sends 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 69 


it from Fort Collins, Colorado, where it was collected in August ; 
this is the most northern locality known for it. The most southern 
locality is Alma, Socorro Co., N. M., where it was found by Mr. 
Alfred Holt. I have myself collected it as follows: 

(1). Albuquerque, June 30th and Aug. 16,1895. (2). Lamy, N. 
M., July 2d and July 13th. (8). Santa Fé, N. M., July 5th to 
Aug. 3d. (4). Watrous, N. M., July 13th. (5). Las Vegas, N. 
M., July. (6). La Junta, Colo., July. 

Everywhere it is found in great abundance on flowers of Cleome 
serrulata, and on nothing else; whereas the closely allied P. bakere 
is found on Solidago. On July 12th, at Santa Fé, I saw them settle 
on the stamens of the Cleome, climb to the top, and collect the pollen. 
At Watrous I saw one inserting its tongue in the base of the flower, 
running down the inner surface of the petals. 

In the és the face-markings are very constant, but frequently the 
light bands of the abdomen will be interrupted on segments 3 and 4. 
The 9s vary much in the clypeal marks, from no marks on the 
clypeus but the usual pair of dots, to two black bars or even an 
almost wholly black clypeus. These variations do not seem to have 
any reference to the environment. 

Mr. Fox has examined for me all Cresson’s type specimens of 
zebrata (9) and reports that they have the supraclypeal spot 
notched above, except one, which has it divided in two. This last 
was the one Cresson actually had in hand when describing, as may 
be seen from his description. The clypeus in four specimens is bi- 
spotted with black, in one entirely yellow. 

A species very like P. zebrata, found on Solidago in Colorado. 

24. Perdita bakere n. sp. or race. Figs. 11, 12, (head and ¢ genitalia). 

8 .—Like the ¢ of P. zebrata, but seems to average smaller, the 
pale bands of the abdomen are small and interrupted, at least on 
the third and fourth segments, and the supraclypeal mark is nearly 
twice as broad as long. Sometimes the abdominal bands are entire, 
but the supraclypeal mark still affords a distinguishing character. 

9 .—Seems to differ only from 9 zebrata in its broader supra- 
clypeal mark, notched in the middle. 

Hab.—Fort Collins, Colorado, 12 3, 3 9, sent by Mr. C. F. 
Baker. They were collected as follows: (1). On Solidago canad- 
ensis, Aug. 8, 1895, both sexes. (2). On Solidago canadensis, Aug. 
15,1895,a ¢. (8). Onsticky flower-buds of Helianthus annwus, 
Aug. 20, 1895, two és. 


70 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


When Mr. Baker sent me this species, with the statement that it 
was found on Solidago, I could hardly believe there had not been 
some mistake, as it so nearly resembled P. zebrata, which I have 


Joes 1G) Imes aul 


found always on Cleome, never on Solidago. Mr. Baker, however, 
assures me that there has been no mistake; and on re-examining the 
series I find that it differs from zebrata, in the males at least, by the 
average greater reduction of the pale bands of the abdomen, and 
constantly in the broader supraclypeal mark. We thus appear to 
have a species in the early stages of differentiation, perhaps hardly 
to be regarded as more than a race of zebrata. I have taken the 
liberty of naming it after Mrs. Baker, who has collected part of the 
material received from Fort Collins. 

Since the above was written, I have examined the ¢ genitalia of 
canina (zebrata) and bakere, and find apparently good distinctions. 
See fig. 12. 


Three species found on Solidago in Colorado, one being also found 
at Sunta Fe, N. M. 

25. Perdita affinis Cr., Tr. Am. Ent. Soc., 1878, p. 69. @@Q (Hab., Colorado). 

Five specimens were collected by Ridings; I have examined one 
of the types. Mr. Baker sends me two 9s taken at Fort Collins, 
Colo., one on Aug. 8th, the other on Aug. 15, 1895. The latter was 
on Solidago canadensis. 

Cresson’s description is not entirely satisfactory. , The nervures 
and stigma (except the hyaline centre) are dark. The clypeus in 
Mr. Baker’s examples has two black bars; in the type specimen 
examined these bars are present, though not so much developed. 

The vertex and mesothorax are dark green, granular, dull. The 
clypeus is not hairy. The wings are slightly smoky; the marginal 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 71 


cell has the poststigmatal portion appreciably longer than the sub- 
stigmatal, the third discoidal is distinct. 

From P. pectidis, it differs thus: 

(1). Larger, mesothorax dull, granulated, markings of face and 


abdomen yellowish, . ; : —=affinis . 
(2). Smaller, mesothorax smooth, very Elin, markings of face 
and abdomen white, . : b —peciats 9D. 


In its face-markings, dull esciorak ahd dark nervures P. 
afinis 2 agrees precisely with octomaculata 9, but it differs thus: 
(1). Larger, markings of abdomen chrome-yellow, wings tinged 


smoky or yellowish, . ; .  =octomaculata 2. 
(2). Smaller, markings of abdomen erent or yellowish-white, 
wings clear or nearly so, . =affinis 9. 


I have not seen the ¢ of affinis. Mr. Fox zindlly sends me a 
sketch of the face-markings, showing the face all yellow below the 
level of the antennz, the yellow extending above in the median line 
as a small rounded projection, and at the sides obliquely from the 
antennal sockets to the orbital margin, where it ends at an angle 
of about 50°. Thus the face-markings of affinis $ differ at once 
from those of octomaculata $, which has the yellow confined to 
clypeus and sides of face, except a couple of small spots or streaks 
in the place of the supraclypeal mark. 

26. Perdita sexmaculata Ckll., Proc. Phila. Acad., 1895, p. 12. 9 (Hab.,, Santa Fé, 
N. M.). 

The unique type was taken on July 25th ; it could hardly have been 
on Solidago, which would not, I think, be in flower at Santa Fé at 
that time. I have a notein my diary that on Aug. 2, 1895, Solid- 
ago canadensis was only beginning to flower, and was visited by a 
few Halictus. The form found on Solidago in Colorado represents 
a variety, as follows: 

Var. punctata 9. 

Length about 6 mm.; abdomen with only 4 pale dots, on segments 
3and 4. As it is possible that this will prove to be a distinct 
species when a good series is collected, the following additional 
particulars are offered : 

Head and thorax greenish-black, metathorax blue-black. Man- 
dibles yellowish with rufous tips. Face and mesothorax very little 
hairy. Vertex and mesothorax granular, quite distinctly dark 
greenish. Clypeus black, minutely granular, sparsely and irregu- 
larly punctate. Scutellum with the granulations becoming obsolete 


72 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


on the shining disc. Wings slightly smoky, nervures and stigma 
dark brown, stigma not hyaline in middle. Marginal cell short, 
distinctly appendiculate, the poststigmatal portion shorter than the 
substigmatal. Recurrent and transverse cubital nervures broken by 
hyaline dots. Third discoidal distinct. Cubital and subdiscoidal 
nervures produced far beyond the cells, the latter to the margin of 
the wing. Four middle tarsi rufotestaceous, as also the anterior 
knees, and anterior tibize before. The light dots on abdomen are 
inconspicuous, so that it appears at first sight immaculate brown- 
black. 

Hab.—Fort Collins, Colorado, Aug. 8, 1895, on Solidago canaden- 
sis; one example, sent by Mr. Baker. The head is shorter than in 
affinis, and the pale face-marks are wanting; the marginal cell is 
also shorter. 

27. Perdita rectangulata n.sp. Fig. 13, (face-marks). 

9g —About 54 mm. long. Head and thorax dark brassy-green, 
granular, dull; metathorax bluish. Head of ordinary shape and 
size. Clypeus, supraclypeal mark, lateral face-marks, and spot mid- 
way between antennz and middle ocellus, lemon-yellow. Between 
the supraclypeal mark and the frontal spot, the usual facial keel is 
well-developed, slightly intruding into the spot. The supraclypeal 
mark is approximately rectangular, clear cut, about twice as broad 
as long. ‘The dots on the clypeus are obscure. The lateral face- 

marks are broad at base, reaching the point on the cly- 
: peus next to the dot, gradually narrowing upward, un- 
hey til at a point about level with the upper edge of the 
antennal sockets they are squarely truncate nearly to 
the orbital margin, but still are continued upward along 
the latter as a narrow stripe a little longer than the 
width at the truncation. The clypeus is rather of the Panama-hat 
type, with the lateral narrow prolongation to the base of the mandi- 
bles, but the central portion (crown of the hat) is higher. The face 
is nearly hairless. Mandibles stout, simple, curved, pale yellow 
with dark tips. 

Antenne with the scape entirely yellow; funicle and flagellum 
dark brown above, yellow below. 

Mesothorax moderately hairy for a Perdita. Collar, hind border 
of prothorax and tubercles connecting with it, yellow. Tegule 
yellowish-hyaline. Wings hyaline, nervures and stigma pale yel- 
low ; marginal cell with the poststigmatal portion longest ; 3d sub- 


Fic. 13. 


ee eee ee s—“‘ y””~m~m)~™mwWwWmWmWmrmrmWmWm 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 73 


marginal large, narrowed more than half to the marginal ; 3d dis- 
coidal distinct. Legs yellow, tarsi pale testaceous; spot on middle 
femora and tibiz, a large blotch cn hind femora, and hind tibiz 
except basal third, black. 

Abdomen above lemon-yellow, the last segment slightly orange. 
First segment with two black spots; rather broad black bands at 
hind margins of segments 1-4, intruding a little, especially at sides, 
on the base of the segment following, not at all notched, nor joined 
together. Venter yellow without bands. 

$ .—Differs as follows: Scape with a small black stripe above. 
Face below antenne all yellow, owing to the space beneath the 
antenne being filled in by well-developed dog-ear marks, and to the 
supraclypeal mark being higher. The lateral face-marks are rather 
obliquely (not squarely) truncate, and are scarcely at all produced 
along the orbital margin above the truncation. The frontal pale 
spot is wanting. The collar is not yellow, and the yellow border of 
prothorax is reduced to two marks, the tubercles also remaining 
yellow. The nervures and stigma are dark brown, the marginal 
cell is longer, and the second submarginal less narrowed above. 
Legs black, with the knees and anterior femora and tibie in front, 
yellow. The abdomen is black, with orange or yellow clean-cut 
interrupted bands on segments 1-4. Venterdark. The cheeks are 
unarmed. 

Hab.—Fort Collins, Colorado, Aug. 15, 1895, on Solidago cana- 
densis; one 9, one ¢,sent by Mr. Baker. The ¢ is so different 
from the 9, that it may be a distinct species ; but the face-markings 
are exactly such as might belong to the sexes of a species, and there 
are several points of similarity in structure. In a case of this sort, 
one decides partly by the circumstances of the capture, the two sexes 
having been taken from the same flowers on the same day. 


Three other species from Colorado, habits unknown. 
28. Perdita snowii n. sp. 


@.—Length 5} mm. Head and thorax dark brassy-green, dull 
and granular, metathorax bluish and more shining. Head fairly 
large, approximately round; face very little hairy, although the 
mesothorax and other parts of thorax are quite hairy, the hairs 
being of a pale brownish color, dirty white on the under parts. 
Mandibles stout, simple, yellowish with rufous ends. Antenne dark 
brown, scape pale beneath. Clypeus, and sides of face rather nar- 


6 


74 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


rowly up to level of antennz, dull pale yellowish. The face-marks 
at sides are abruptly truncate at their upper end, the truncation a 
little oblique. Supraclypeal and dog-ear marks wanting. Tuber- 
cles and two spots on hind border of prothorax, pale yellowish or 
subtestaceous. Wings dull hyaline, iridescent, nervures and stigma 
rather dark yellowish-brown, stigma centrally subhyaline. Mar- 
ginal cell large, appendiculate, poststigmatal portion longest. Second 
submarginal large, narrowed more than one-half to marginal ; 3d 
discoidal distinct. Tegule hyaline. 

Legs brown-black, hairy; anterior femora at ends, and anterior 
tibie, except a patch behind, yellow; anterior tarsi, middle and 
hind knees, and much of middle tibize, yellowish testaceous. Hind 
tibise in the type specimen with a mass of dull orange pollen. 

Abdomen above dull brownish-white ; first segment black at base ; 
segments 1-4 with broad brown-black bands on their hind halves, 
these bands not at all interrupted, those on segments 2-3 conspicu- 
ously thickest in the middle, those on 1-2 joined laterally by a 
longitudinal line; 5th segment hairy, with a rudimentary band. 
Venter brown. 

Hab.—¥stes Park, Colorado, August, 1892 (F. H. Snow, No. 
210). One specimen, sent by Mr. Fox. The abdomen may have 
been more brightly colored in life. P. snowii differs from nitidella 
Q at once by its dull hairy mesothorax ; from bigelovie 9° it differs 
in shape of lateral marks of face, as well as in abdomen. 


29. Perdita luteiceps n. sp. 

$.—Length about 5mm. Cheeks unarmed. Head moderately 
large, rounded, somewhat broader than long, deep yellow with dark 
green markings. There is a spot close to each anterior orbital mar- 
gin above the level of the antenne (as in punctosignata), the ocelli 
are situated on an irregular transverse dark patch, and the occiput 
is dark, from it also coming a narrow dark stripe toward, but not 
reaching, the upper end of the eye. Labrum and mandibles yellow. 

Antenne yellow, funicle with a black patch above, joints of 
flagellum slightly darkened above. 

Thorax dark bronzy-green, very granular, moderately dull, meta- 
thorax a bluer green. Prothorax yellow except a transverse dark 
stripe. A transverse yellow patch near hind border of mesothorax, 
and a little yellow along hind border of scutellum. Pleura hairy, 
dark with a moderately small yellow patch. Mesothorax hairy in 
front, nearly hairless behind. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 75 


Tegulz yellowish hyaline. Wings hyaline, nervures and stigma 
(except its hyaline centre) very pale yellow. Marginal cell rather 
long, substigmatal portion about as long as poststigmatal ; a linear 
appendiculate nervure longer than the marginal itself; 2d sub- 
marginal rather large, narrowed a little more than half to marginal ; 
3d discoidal distinct. 

Legs yellow; a blackish patch on middle femora and tibize be- 
behind, hind legs blackish except knees. 

Abdomen above yellow; first segment narrowly dark at base; at 
the sutures of all the segments is a narrow black band, which takes 
the form of two transversely elongate spots on the hind margin of 
each segment, adjacent to a narrow entire band on anterior margin 
of the next. None of the bands are united laterally. The yellow 
is much more developed in proportion to the black than in martini. 
Venter yellow, immaculate. 

Hab.—Glenwood Springs, Colorado, Aug. 24, 1894. Collected by 
Prof. Gillette ; sent to me by Mr. Fox. The unique specimen is 
unfortunately reddened by cyanide. P. luteiceps is very near martini, 
but differs by the brassy-green (not blue) thorax, the vertex with a 
transverse yellow band above the ocelli, and in the greater develop- 
ment of yellow on the abdomen. It is to be added that martini is a 
spring species, while Juteiceps was caught in late summer. It is 
curious that among the numerous late summer species of Perdita at 
Las Cruces, the locality of martini, none resemble it so closely as 
luteiceps. 

30. Perdita dubia n. sp. 

6.—About or slightly over 5 mm. long, Very like the ¢ of 
bakere or zebrata, resembling them in the shining mesothorax, color 
of head and thorax, face-markings, ete. The mesothorax is a rather 
yellower-green. The supraclypeal mark is heart-shaped with the 
apex cut off, thus differently shaped from that of bakere or zebrata, 
but nearest to zebrata. The dog-ear marks are a little reduced, 
leaving a perceptible amount of dark color between them and the 
clypeus. The lateral face-mark, formed as in zebrata, presents an 
obscure dark streak on its upper portion. The sides of the face are 
more hairy than in zebrata or bakerw. The cheeks are very hairy. 
The labrum presents a conspicuous pit. The thorax is rather more 
hairy than in bakere or zebrata. The posterior and middle femora 
are entirely yellow, except for the slightest indication of black on 
the posterior ones; otherwise the legs resemble those of bakere, 


76 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Wings hyaline, nervures sepia-brown, stigma hyaline in middle. 
The marginal cell is distinctly longer than in bakere or zebrata, and 
has the poststigmatal portion longest. Second submarginal large, 
narrowed one-half to marginal; 3d discoidal absent. 

Abdomen above with nearly equally broad bands of yellow and 
black. First segment all black; then follow four black bands at 
the junction of the segments, none interrupted, nor joined at the 
middle or the sides. Tip blackish. Venter yellow, with a little 
black along the sutures. 

Hab.—Glenwood Springs, Colorado, Aug. 24, 1894. Collected by 
Prof. Gillette, sent by Mr. Fox. Like the last, taken at the same 
time, it is reddened by cyanide. It is unfortunate that we know 
nothing about the habits of this species, and have only a single 
specimen. It will be recognized by the regular entire abdominal 
bands, the coloration of the legs, ete. 


A species from California, habitat unknown, 3 unknown. 


$1. Perdita trisignata n. sp. Fig. 14, (face-marks). 

9 .—Length about 5 mm. Head and thorax blue-black or 
greenish-black, the tint difficult to define. Head of ordinary size, 
nearly round, somewhat depressed on vertex; face very sparsely 
hairy, cheeks not so hairy as in many species. Vertex dull and 
very distinctly granulose. Middle ocellus in a distinct depression. 
Mandibles stout, yellowish, with rufous tips and bases. Clypeus 
brown-black, contrasting with the distinctly green face above it; in 
shape high, something like a cocked-hat. Face-markings pale lemon- 
yellow, consisting of a longitudinal median stripe on clypeus, start- 
ing from its hind-border but not reaching its anterior border; and 
the lateral marks, elongate-pyriform, with the upper end pointed 
and level with the sockets of the antennz. The clypeal 
mark suggests that of obscurata. Antenne dark brown. 
Mesothorax only sparsely hairy, distinctly granular 
and punctured, the punctures sparse but distinct. 
Metathorax granular, very dull, duller than scutellum 
and postscutellum. Pleura hairy, with white hairs. 
Tubercles and two spots on hind margin of prothorax yellow. 
Tegule testaceous, subhyaline. 

Wings rather small, yellowish-hyaline, nervures and stigma tes- 
taceous. Stigma small and narrow; marginal cell very large, post- 
stigmatal portion noticeably longest. Second submarginal large, 
narrowed more than one-half to marginal ; 3d discoidal distinct. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 77 
Legs dark brown with the tarsi testaceous ; anterior and middle 
tibiz in front, and corresponding knees, dull yellow. Abdomen 
above and below dark reddish-brown, without markings. 
Hab.—California, collector and exact locality unknown ; sent by 
Mr. Fox. One specimen, known by the yellowish wings, abdomen 
without markings, ete. 


Two species described by F. Smith, exact locality and habits unknown. 


32. Perdita halictoides Sm., Br. Mus. Cat., Vol. I, p. 128, (1853). 9 (Hab. North 

America). 

The description indicates that this species is similar to P. semicro- 
cea, but differs in having the nervures fuscous (in semicrocea they 
are colorless), the abdomen dark testaceous, and the legs rufotesta- 
ceous with the tarsi pale. 

33. Perdita bicolor (Sm.). 

Macrotera bicolor Sm., Br. Mus. Cat., Vol. I, p. 130, (1853). “9” (Hab. Mexico). 

The description shows that this species is twice as large as the 
last, the head and thorax black and the abdomen ferruginous, more 
or less fuscous at base. It might, perhaps, be confused with M. texana, 
but the abdomen is elongate-ovate and the mandibles are rounded at 
their apex, simple. The wing-nervures are ferruginous. P. texana 
has a ferruginous abdomen only in the ¢. 

As the description of this insect did not enable me to ascertain 
definitely whether it belonged to the group (or genus) of P. texana 
= megacephala and P. latior, I applied to Mr. E. A. Smith, of the 
British Museum, asking him to kindly examine his father’s type, 
and report on certain points specified. He handed my letter to Lt. 
Col. Bingham, who very kindly examined the typical specimen, and 
reported as follows: 

“1. The typeisag,nota @. It has the two basal segments fus- 
cous, the 3d and following segments ferruginous, with the apical one, 
which is very small and somewhat hidden by the fimbria of pale 
hairs on the posterior margin of the 6th segment, black. 

“2. The mandibles are deeply grooved on the outside from near 
the base to the apex, which, however, does not appear to be bifid. 

“3. The figure of the marginal cell given in Part 1, pl. V,8f. 22, 
of Smith’s Catalogue, is fairly good, the cell may be a little more 
obliquely truncate at apex, perhaps. 

“4, From Cresson’s description of M. megacephala &, Smith’s 
type of bicolor differs as noted above in the basal segments of the 


78 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


abdomen being fuscous, and in the posterior tibiee being clothed with 
a ‘a thin scopa’ of pale yellow pubescence, as Smith described, 
which has now faded to a dirty white.” 

While I am not yet certain, I am decidedly inclined to suppose 
that we may after all recognize Macrotera as a valid genus, with 
these species, M. bicolor Sm., M. texana Cr., and M. latior (Ckll.). 


A species from Nevada, yellow with black markings, habits unknown, 
Q unknown. 
34. Perdita cephalotes (Cr.) Cr., Cat. Hym., 1887, p. 296. 

Macrotera cephalotes Cr., Tr. Am. Ent. Soc., 1878, p. 71. ¢ (Hab. Nevada). 

Described from a single specimen, collected by Mr. Hy. Edwards. 
It has a very large head, after the manner of grandiceps and eraasi- 
ceps, but the markings are very like those of punctosignata. 

Two specimens were obtained by the Death Valley Expedition in 
the Panamint Mountains. (N. Amer. Fauna, No. 7, 1893, p. 246). 


Two species found on mesquite in New Mexico. 


35. Perdita punctosignata Ckll., Suppt. to Psyche, Sept., 1895, p. 6. ¢. (Hab. Las 

Cruces, N. M.). 

Two specimens are known, both from mesquite; one taken by 
Miss J. Casad, the other by Mr. Alfred M. Holt. The latter speci- 
men has a large yellow patch on dorsum of metathorax, instead of 
two spots. The eyes are pale coffee-color with a purplish tint. 

36. Perdita exclamans (CkIl.). 

Perdita nitidella yar. exclamans Ckll., Suppl. to Psyche, Sept., 1895, p.5. ¢. (Hab. 

Las Cruces, N. M.). 

This and the last are spring species, found in May. P. nitidedla, 
which frequents Bigelovia in the late summer and early autumn, is 
unquestionably distinct from exelamans. Of the latter we know 
four specimens, 3 6,19. Prof. Townsend took a ¢ some years 
ago; this is the specimen formerly reported in error as nttidedla. 
Miss Casad found the type specimen, and the other two were ob- 
tained at the same locality by Mr. A. M. Holt in 1895,a ¢ ona 
young cottonwood tree, not in flower, and near some mesquite 
bushes, May 9th, and a @ on mesquite, May 13th. 

The ° may be described as follows: 

9 .—Larger, about 6 mm. long. Antenne dark brown above, 
yellow beneath. Clypeus cocked-hat shape, flattened above, very 
pale yellowish with the usual two dark dots. Supraclypeal yellow 
mark well-developed, produced above into a narrow stripe widening 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 79 


into a large frontal patch, so that the whole has the shape of an 
hour-glass. The frontal patch is separated by a moderately wide 
interval from the anterior ocellus. Dog-ear marks present but 
small, their tips about level with the top of the clypeus. Lateral 
face-marks receding from the clypeus close to the dark dots, leaving 
a wide band of dark color between them and the upper part of the 
clypeus, etc. ; at the level of the antennal sockets they are suddenly 
narrowed, ascending the orbital margin as a thin band, rather sud- 
denly widening opposite the middle of the frontal patch, and termi- 
nating roundly and abruptly at the level of the hind margin of the 
anterior ocellus. Lower part of cheeks pale yellow. 

Prothorax and narrow lateral borders of mesothorax yellow. 
Pleura entirely dark. Metathorax blue, rugulose, contrasting with 
the scutellum, postscutellum and mesothorax, which are brassy- 
greenish, very smooth, shining, polished, the scutellum with distinct 
sparse punctures. The vertex is green, but rugulose and punctured. 
Legs asin ¢, but hind tibia and tarsus all brown. Wings with 3d 
discoidal cell distinct; 2d submarginal narrowed less than half to 
marginal. 

Abdomen above yellow ; markings dark sepia, first segment dark — 
at base, connecting with a blotch on each side, hind margins of seg- 
ments 1-4 with dark bands, connecting laterally with a spot on 
proximal margins of 3 and 4, but these spots lacking on fifth seg- 
ment, while the bands on 1 and 2 are broadly confluent along lateral 
margin. Vertex yellow, immaculate. 

This is very different from the 9 of nitidella. 


Two species found in spring in the Mesilla Valley, N. M., habits 
unknown, 2 unknown. 


37. Perdita martini CkJ]., Proc. Phila. Acad., 1895, p. 14. 4. (Hab. Las Cruces, 
N. M.). 


The unique specimen was taken on April 26th. 

38. Perdita hirsuta n. sp. 

- $—Length about 5 mm. Head and thorax blue, granular, 
unusually hairy with white hairs, but the disc of metathorax, and 
yellow face below antennz, bare. Head of ordinary size, rounded, 
a little broader than long; cheeks unarmed. Face just above the 
level of the antenne conspicuously hairy, the hairs arranged so as to 
appear to radiate from the antenne. Antenne black above, yellow 
beneath, the scape with only a black blotch above. Mandibles very 


80 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


straight, very pale vellowish with rufescent tips. Clypeus rather 
cocked-hat shape, flattened above, with the sides very rapidly de- 
scending and the prolongation to the base of mandibles very nar- 
row. Face below antenne all lemon-yellow, except the usual cly- 
peal dots. Above the antennz the yellow extends only as a small 
projection in the median line, and a little along the orbits, so that 
the upper angle of the yellow with the orbital margin is about 
50° instead of a right angle. Lower half of the cheeks with a yel- 
low band along orbital margin. 

Collar and hind margin of prothorax connecting with tubercles 
but failing in the middle line, yellow. Tegule hyaline. Wings 
hyaline, nervures sepia-brown, stigma margined with brown. Mar- 
ginal cell moderately long, appendiculate, the poststigmatal portion 
about as long as substigmatal. Second submarginal not narrowing 
quite one-half to marginal; 3d discoidal fairly distinct. Legs yel- 
low, anterior and middle femora and tibize with a black patch be- 
hind, hind femora and tibiz black with a yellow stripe in front, hind 
tarsi blackish. 

Abdomen above with about equally broad bands of black and 
yellow. First segment basally black. The five dark bands are not 
interrupted, nor joined medially or laterally. Sixth segment with 
three dark spots. Venter yellow, immaculate. 

Hab.—tLas Cruces, N. M., on the College Farm, May 2d, 1895. 
One specimen collected by A. M. Holt. 


Two species found on willow in the Mesilla Valley, N. M. 
39. Perdita numerata Ckll., Tr. Am. Ent. Soc., 1895, p. 296. 9. (Hab. Las Cruces, 

N. M.). 

One specimen is known, taken on May 2d, associated with P. 
salicis. It resembles most the 2 of bigelovie, but the stigma is 
entirely dark and the clypeus has two broad black bars. ‘The mar- 
ginal cell is short, appendiculate ; the 2d submarginal is large, very 
broad below, narrowed considerably more than half to marginal. 


40. Perdita salicis n. sp. 

9 .—Length 5 mm. Head and thorax shining dark green ; head 
bluish-green, mesothorax and scutellum brassy-green, metathorax 
dark blue. Head rounded, of ordinary size; vertex minutely 
roughened, cheeks only sparsely hairy ; clypeus except two black 
dots, the area between clypeus and antenne, and sides of face nar- 
rowly terminating in an acute point about half the length of the 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 81 


scape above the level of insertion of antennz, dull pale yellow. In 
the median line the pale color is sometimes carried upward as a 
narrow stripe about two-thirds of the distance between insertion of 
antenne and middle ocellus. Mandibles simple, unusually stout, 
blunt at tips, dull pale yellowish with rufous ends. Mouth parts 
only moderately elongated. Antenne black above, yellow beneath, 
the yellow predominating on scape, the black on flagellum. 

Mesothorax very shiny, sparsely punctured. Prothorax inelud- 
ing tubercles either entirely yellow, or the anterior and posterior 
borders broadly yellow, leaving a narrow transverse dark band. 
Legs entirely yellow, except hind tibiz and tarsi, which are brown- 
ish. The middle tibiz sometimes show a brown patch. 

Tegule yellowish hyaline. Wings hyaline, costal nervure and 
margin of stigma dark brown, the other nervures practically color- 
less. Marginal cell rather obliquely truncate, the substigmatal 
portion about as long as poststigmatal; 2d submarginal not or 
hardly narrowed one-half to marginal, the degree of narrowing 
variable; 3d discoidal distinct. Abdomen above black, with five 
very regular yellow bands, the first slightly interrupted. The black 
and yellow are nearly of equal width, so that the abdomen might be 
said to be alternately black and yellow-banded. Venter entirely 
yellow with an orange tinge. 

$.—Length 4mm. Cheeksunarmed. More pubescent, antenne 
more yellow. Mandibles pointed but not slender, the shining 
rufous tips very distinctly separated from the yellowish portion. 

Face all pale yellow up to level of antennz, the yellow extending 
further upward, in the median line as a narrow mark of the shape 
of a spear-head, scarcely the length of the scape, and at the sides 
about the length of the scape along orbital margin, but very obliquely 
truncate, and notched on its inner side below the truncation. Pro- 
thorax with more black. Mesothorax and scutellum bluer. Hind 
femora with a dark brown patch near the end. Nervures brown ; 
3d discoidal very indistinct. 

Abdomen above with only four bands; these narrower, and 
divided or deeply notched in middle. Sometimes the abdomen has 
only three bands. 

Hab.—ULas Cruces, N. M., in the town, numerous at flowers of 
narrow-leaved willow and another species of willow, May 2, May 3, 
May 5, 1895. They are associated on the willows with Halictus, 
Andrena and Prosopis. 


82 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896, 
The small species of the Pectis and Cladothriz. 


41. Perdita cladothricis n. sp. 


Q.—Length 34-33 mm. Head and thorax shining, very dark 
ceneous, face entirely dark, clypeus and metathorax black. Abdo- 
men dark sepia-brown, with a transversely elongate mark or band 
of white at base of second segment. Legs dark brown, the anterior 
knees and the tarsi, pale or whitish. Antenne dark brown. Vertex 
very minutely sculptured. The usual pale hairs are very little de- 
veloped anywhere, except at sides of end of abdomen; the post- 
seutellum and the sides of the metathorax are bare and shining. 
Wings hyaline, beautifully iridescent, nervures fuscous, stigma pale 
brown, 3d discoidal cell distinct, marginal with the substigmatal 
portion longer than the poststigmatal, Ist submarginal broad, 2d 
submarginal small and triangular, narrowing to a point at junction 
with marginal. 

8 .—Length 23-3 mm. Cheeks unarmed. ' Differs from the female 
at once by the face, which (with the mandibles except their reddish 
tips) is entirely ivory-white below level of antennz, the white more- 
over extending a short distance above the antennz, in the form of a 
narrow line between them, and a broad prolongation on each side 
between the antenne and the orbits, not quite as long as the scape, 
and ending in an abrupt truncation. The antennz are mainly white 
beneath. The tubercles, and the border of prothorax adjacent and 
in front, and a portion of the anterior part of the pleura, are white. 
The coxe, a considerable portion of the anterior and middle femora, 
and part of the anterior tarsi, are white. 

The abdomen, in addition to the white band of the 92, usually 
shows a longer and narrower white band at base of 3d segment. 
Venter dirty whitish, becoming brown at base and apex. 

Hab.—Las Cruces, N. M., very abundant on Cladothrix eryptan- 
tha (det. E. O. Wooton), Sept. 15, 1895. On this occasion I took 6 
$,12 9; I do not think the males were really less numerous, but 
owing to their small size and incessant activity they were less easily 
caught than the females. The earliest date I have for this species 
isa ¢ taken on Cladothriz, associated with a new Oxybelus, in the 
beginning of September. Stray examples will be found at times on 
other plants. On September 17th, four 2 were obtained by sweeping 
from Pectis papposa, but Cladothrix was growing within a few feet 
of the Pectis. On September 23d, a 2 was obtained from Bigelovia 


€ 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 83 


wrightii. On September 25th, a few 9 were caught on Gutierrezia 
sarothre vy. microcep hala. 
42. Perdita pectidis n. sp. 

 .—Head and thorax black, vertex greenish. Head of moderate 
size, rounded, somewhat depressed on vertex. Sides of clypeus and 
sides of face adjacent to orbital margin with sparse but large and 
deep punctures. Vertex minutely rugulose, with sparse small punc- 
tures. Cheeks less hairy than usual. Mandibles rufescent, whitish 
at base, with dark tips. Clypeus with three rather large white 
marks, the central one longitudinally oval. Sides of face with an 
irregularly subtriangular white patch, narrowing to a point above, 
about the upper level of the sockets of the antenne. Antennee with 
the scape black, the flagellum sepia-brown. 

Mesothorax smooth, sparsely punctured, very shiny. Metathorax 
blue-black. Collar, tubercles, and a couple of small spots on hind 
border of prothorax, white. Tegule hyaline subtestaceous. Femora 
black, knees whitish. Tibi and tarsi brown; anterior tibiz in front, 
and a stripe on middle tibiz pale yellow. 

Wings smoky, nervures and stigma sepia-brown. Poststigmatal 
portion of marginal cell hardly as long as substigmatal ; 2d submar- 
ginal narrowed more than half to marginal; 3d discoidal distinct. 

Abdomen above very dark brown, segments 1-4 each with an 
oblique white stripe on each side. Pygidial area dark subrufescent. 
Venter dark brown. 

$ .—Wings clear. Metathorax quite blue. Mandibles white with 
rufescent tips. White markings of face as in cladothricis $. Pale 
marks of abdomen reduced, sometimes to 4 or 5 small spots, which 
are then pale yellowish. 

Hab.—Las Cruces, N. M.,in numbers on Pectis papposa, Sept. 17, 
1895. It is closely allied to cladothricis, but differs at once by the 
face of the 9 not being all dark, and the different abdominal mark- 
ings. 

On September 20th, I took four 9 P. pectidis from flowers of Tri- 
bulus maximus, and two, also 9, from flowers of Wedelia incarnata. 

With the P. pectidis on Pectis papposa were a few P. fallax, 2 
which I at first supposed to bea variety of it. P. fallax is, however, 
distinguished by its greenish head and thorax (or at least the meso- 
thorax more or less greenish), scape pale yellowish below or with a 
yellow stripe, face-markings tinged distinctly yellowish, clypeus pale, 
sometimes with two black bars, diverging below, and the usual black 


84 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


dots, wings clear, abdominal markings inclined to be smaller, or 
wanting on 4th segment. 


43. Perdita biparticeps n. sp. 

6 .—Length 33 mm. Head and thorax very dark blue; thorax 
practically black, except the metathorax. Head large in compari- 
son with the small thorax, rounded, somewhat broader than long, 
cheeks unarmed. Face below antennez, labrum and mandibles ex- 
cept their slightly rufescent tips, lemon-yellow. The yellow extends 
above the antenne a short distance (and equally) in the median line 
and at the sides, almost exactly as in the ¢ of affinis, the limit of the 
lateral extension marked by a small pit close to the ocular margin, 
where the yellow forms an angle of about 55°. Cheeks yellow below, 
the yellow extending furthest upward along the orbital margin. 
Antenne sepia above, yellow below, the scape all yellow except end 
above. Vertex granular. Mandibles simple. Mesothorax shining 
but noticeably sculptured, the surface lineolate rather than granu- 
lar. The mesothorax, as also the face, is very free from hairs; and 
even on the pleura and sides of metathorax there are comparatively 
few. The upper part of the cheeks, however, exhibits conspicuous 
white hairs. 

Tegule hyaline; wings slightly smoky, nervures and stigma sepia- 
brown, the latter pallid in middle. Marginal cell rather large, 
appendiculate, substigmatal portion about as long as poststigmatal ; 
2d submarginal rather large, narrowed one-half to marginal; 3d 
discoidal distinct. 

Legs yellow, anterior and middle femora and tibize with a dark 
brown patch behind; posterior femora brown with yellow ends and 
an obscure yellow stripe in front, posterior tibis brown with the 
proximal fourth pallid, tarsi whitish. 

Abdomen above pale sepia-brown, shining, with rather obscure 
and suffused yellow markings, namely a patch on disc of 1st segment, 
and bands at bases of segments 2-4, the last two of these shorter and 
emarginate posteriorly. Venter dull yellow, brownish toward tip. 

Hab.—tLas Cruces, N. M., on Pectis papposa, Sept. 17, 1895, one 
example. 

Differs from rectangulata by its small size and shiny mesothorax, 
as well as the markings of the abdomen. The pleura has not the 
yellow patch seen in maculipes. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 85 


Small species found on Gutierrezia, Q unknown. 


44, Perdita austini Ckll., Proc. Phila. Acad., 1895, p. 13. ¢. (Hab., Las Cruces, 

N. M.). 

The type was taken in September. The cheeks are unarmed, the 
mandibles simple, the clypeus of the Panama-hat type, with the 
crown higher, more like a Puritan’s hat. The mesothorax is shiny, 
it and the face nearly bare; but the cheeks and pleura, as well as 
the thorax beneath generally, with conspicuous white hairs. The 
marginal cell is rather long, but the substigmatal portion is notice- 
ably longer than the poststigmatal; the second submarginal is nar- 
rowed nearly to a point above. 

I took one specimen at Albuquerque, N. M., on Gutierrezia saro- 
thre, Aug.15,1895. At Las Cruces it is quite rare so far as observed. 
Mr. C. Rhodes took one on Bigelovia wrightii, toward the end of 
September. I took it on Gutierrezia sarothre var. microcephala on 
Sept. 25th. The ? is unknown. 

45. Perdita gutierrezie n. sp. or variety. 

$.—About 4 mm. long, size and appearance of nitidella ¢. 
Cheeks unarmed, but projecting at base of mandibles so as to simu- 
late a small tooth. Face entirely yellow up to nearly the length of 
scape above level of insertion of antenne, the yellow enclosing a 
black spot on each side at its extreme upper border close to margin 
of eye. On each side, midway between the eye and the median line, 
the yellow is depressed by a slight invasion of the blue, which forms 
thereat an angle considerably greater than a right angle. Lower 
half of cheeks broadly yellow, pleura with a yellow patch, which is 
wanting in nitidella; 2d submarginal cell more narrowed above 
than in nitidella; 3d discoidal distinct. Veins dark brown. The 
rest much as in nitidella. 

Hab.—Albuquerque, N. M., one specimen on Gutierrezia saro- 
thre, August 15th. This is certainly distinct from nitidedla, but it 
may be only a variety of bigelovie ; see below under maculipes. 


46. Perdita tarda n.sp. 

$.—Length 42 mm. Head and thorax dark blue. Head mod- 
erately large, distinctly broader than long, cheeks unarmed, vertex 
rugulose and punctured. Face very free from hairs, except sides 
near antennze, where they are rather conspicuous; cheeks thickly 
clothed with long white hairs. Antenne dark brown above, yel- 
lowish beneath, the scape all yellow beneath and at base above. 


86 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Mandibles very little curved, yellow, rufescent at ends. Clypeus 
approximately cocked-hat shaped, the lateral prolongations broad. 
Face below antennz all lemon-yellow except a notch of the dark 
color distad of each dog-ear mark, and not quite so large as it. The 
supraclypeal mark is roundly emarginate above. The clypeus has 
the usual two dark dots. Along the orbital margins the yellow 
ascends about half the length of the scape above the level of the an- 
tenn, and ends in an oblique truncation ; this upward band of yel- 
low is a little wider than the scape. The cheeks are entirely dark. 
Mesothorax smooth and shining, though minutely lineolately sculp- 
tured, nearly black; mesothorax finely sculptured, very distinctly 
blue. Pleura all dark. Tubercles yellowish. 

Tegule pale brown; wings slightly smoky, nervures and stigma 
sepia-brown, the latter pale in middle. Marginal cell large, appendi- 
culate, poststigmatal portion longest ; 2d submarginal narrowed less 
than half to marginal; 3d discoidal distinct. Transverse cubital 
nervures more or less broken by hyaline dots. Legs black, all the 
knees, anterior and middle tibiz in front, and base of hind tibiz» 
yellow ; tarsi pale brownish, the anterior ones yellowish. 

Abdomen above piceous, with narrow whitish bands, interrupted 
in the middle, rather obscurely indicated on disc of 1st segment, and 
at base of segments 2 and 3. The markings are in the form of nar- 
row straight stripes, not oblique ones as in some species. Venter 
dark brown. 

Hab.—Las Cruces, N. M., one specimen on Gutierrezia sarothre 
var. microcephala, Sept. 23, 1895. Allied to P. biparticeps, from 
which it differs at once in the face-markings, the abdomen, ete. 
From austini it differs radically in the face-markings. 


Small species found on Bigelovia wrightii, having the abdomen 


banded. 


47. Perdita nitidella Ckll., Proc. Phila. Acad., 1895, p. 16. ¢. (Hab., Las Cruces, 
N. M.). 
On Bigelovia wrightii at Las Cruces, several males on September 
2d, one 2 on September 11,1895. The latter is herewith described : 
9 .—Length 5mm. Face-markings creamy-white. Clypeus white 
with two black dots, the anterior margin narrowly brown, and traces 
of the two longitudinal bars in brown. Sides of face with an irregu- 
larly subtriangular white mark, the upper obliquely truncate end of 
which is level with the insertion of the antenne. Cheeks quite 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 87 


densely white-hairy. Prothorax with less pale marking, the tuber- 
cles not connected with yellow of margin of prothorax. Nervures 
dark brown; 3d discoidal distinct. Legs about as in austini, but 
anterior femora partly black in front, and middle femora with less 
black. Abdomen banded as in ¢, but the banding yellowish-white. 


48. Perdita bigelovie n. sp. 

$.—About 5 mm. long. Resembles nitidella $, but larger; 
face-markings as in gutierrezie &, but the black spots close to eyes 
above are not enclosed, but only produce a notch in the yellow; and 
the yellow is in the middle-line rather more produced upward, not 
reaching the ocellus, but terminating some distance before it in an 
emarginate truncation. Venation as in nitidedla, with 3d discoidal 
cell very indistinct. Pleura largely yellow, the amount of yellow 
on it variable. Legs and abdomen asin nitidella. Cheeks unarmed. 
(7 8s examined.) 

@.—Length 6mm. Similar to nitidella 2, the pale marks of 
face rather inclining to pinkish-brown ; and the marks of sides of 
face distinctly notched on inner side, and sometimes also at end. 
Sometimes there are two pale spots above the clypeus; 3d discoidal 
cell distinct. Abdomen brown-black, with creamy-white bands on 
segments 1-4, that on 1 interrupted ; 5 with a rudimentary linear 
broken band, or frequently with a distinct broad band. 

Hab.—Albuquerque, N. M., several of both sexes between the 
old and new towns, on Bigelovia wrightii, Aug. 16,1895. The males 
of this lot were unfortunately reddened by the cyanide; but the 
females, collected in the same bottle at the same time, were not so 
affected. On September 11th, a specimen of each sex was taken on 
Bigelovia wrightii close to the Agricultural College at Las Cruces. 
The 9 is very similar to that of P. nwmerata. 


49, Perdita maculipes n. sp., or variety. 

é.—A small form, 4 mm. long, similar to nitidel/a, anterior and 
middle femora all yellow, anterior and middle tibix each with a black 
patch. 

From nitidella it is readily separated, thus: 

(1). Median and lateral upward extensions of yellow on face ir- 
regularly truncate ; anterior and middle tibiz with a black 
patch; pleura with a large yellow patch; bands of abdo- 
men united at sides; lower part of cheeks broadly yellow, 

== maculipes $. 


88 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


(2). Median and lateral upward extensions of yellow on face not 
truncate, or lateral ones notched and subtruncate; anterior 
and middle tibiz all yellow; pleura without a large yellow 
patch; bands of abdomen not united (or only the first two 
or three united) at sides; lower part of cheeks very nar- 
rowly yellow ~ 22), 29s 41. «0-9. . ><) ===neee ee 

From biparticeps it is thus distinguished : 

(1). Size smaller, abdomen suffused ; pleura without yellow patch, 

= biparticeps 3. 

(2). Size larger, abdomen not suffused ; pleura with a large yellow 
patch ; median face-marks more developed above antenne, 

== maculipes ¢. 

It is very much like gutierrezie, but differs from that in its longer 
marginal cell, the abdominal bands joined laterally, and the upper 
margin of the yellow of face much more distinctly trifid, besides the 
marks on the tibie. It resembles gutierrezie in the broadly yellow 
lower part of cheeks, and the yellow blotch on pleura. 

From small examples of % bigelovie it is distinguished by the 
abdominal bands being united at the sides, the face-markings as 
already mentioned, and the tibiz with darls marks—though the 
middle tibize of bigelovie sometimes show a small spot. The mar- 
ginal cell is as in bigelovie. 

Hab.—ULas Cruces, N. M., one example on Biglovia wrig htii, Sept. 
5, 1895. (A.M. Holt.) The above form allies itself very closely 
with bigelovie and gutierreziv, which have the cheeks more or less 
broadly yellow and the yellow patch on the pleura. The more one 
studies these forms the more apparent does it become that nitidedla, 
with its dark pleura and narrow yellow line only on the cheeks, is 
distinct ; while bigelovie, gutierrezie and maculipes run each other so 
close that they seem to be varieties of one species. Yet I leave them 
as they stand, not because I think that they are what would be called 
good species, but rather to draw attention to the divergence which 
may represent an early stage in species-formation. It will be noted 
that maculipes, while retaining the essential characters of bigelovie, 
departs in its face-markings toward the condition of nitided/a. 


50. Perdita pellucida n. sp. 

é.—Length about 5mm. Head very dark blue, thorax black 
except the dark blue metathorax. Head of ordinary size, rounded, 
broader than long; cheeks unarmed, mandibles moderately stout, 
simple. Vertex granular. Face with rather conspicuous but very 


_ tts a 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 89 


scattered hairs, a tuft of erect hairs behind the ocelli being most 
noticeable. Cheeks with long white hairs. Face below antenne 
semitransparent dull white, the clypeus prominent and shining. 
The upper margin of the white is not very clearly defined, but it 
ends abruptly in the median line at the lower level of the antennal 
sockets, while at the sides of the face it ascends rather broadly not 
quite the length of the scape above the level of the antennee. Thus 
the pale color of the face is distributed as in obscurata 3, except 
that it perhaps ascends a little higher at the sides. (In bigelovie 
and nitidella it ascends above the level of the antennz in the median 
Jine). Clypeus narrowly produced at sides to bases of mandibles, 
but higher than in the Panama-hat type. Mandibles white with 
rufous tips. Antenne pale testaceous; flagellum, funicle and end 
of scape becoming dark brown above. Lower half of cheeks nar- 
rowly white along orbital margin, thus recalling the cheek-marking 
of nitidella. 

Thorax with sparse but rather conspicuous hairs. Mesothorax 
shining, appearing slightly bluish in some lights, very finely lineo- 
lately sculptured, median groove distinct. Metathorax microscopic- 
ally reticulate. Part of collar,and whole hind margin of prothorax, 
connecting with tubercles, but very narrowly interrupted in median 
line, white. The margin of the prothorax below the tubercles is 
broadly white. Pleura hairy, dark except a white spot about as big 
as a tubercle, anteriorly. Tegule hyaline. Wings hyaline; costal 
nervure, margin of stigma, and marginal nervure, sepia-brown, the 
other nervures colorless. Marginal cell unusually long, poststig- 
matal portion considerably the longest, minutely appendiculate. 
(In nitidella and bigelovie the marginal is conspicuously shorter.) 
Second submarginal narrowed more than one-half to marginal; 3d 
discoidal very weak. 

Four anterior legs yellowish-white, tarsi becoming testaceous, 
middle tibize with a dark brown line behind. Hind legs with the 
basal two-thirds of cox above, most of distal half of femora above 
and behind, and tibis except anterior margin, dark brown; the 
tarsi brownish. 

Abdomen above with nearly equally broad bands of dull white 
(becoming pale brownish toward tip) and dark sepia-brown ; these 
bands not interrupted, nor united at sides or in the middle, nor 
notched. First segment all brown-black except the hind margin 
narrowly. The dark bands are four in number, the sixth segment 


fi 


90 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


having no band. Venter pale yellowish, slightly orange toward 
the tip. 

Hab.—Las Cruces, N. M., one specimen on Bigelovia wrightii, 
close to the Agricultural College, Sept. 12, 1895. (CkIl. 5,100). The 
type specimen may be a little immature, but it is clearly distinct. 


Small species found on Bigelovia wrightii, the abdomen not banded. 


51. Perdita fallax n.sp., or race. | 

9.—5 mm. long. Head and thorax dark green, dullish, rather 
hairy but the hairs short, face below antennze bare and shining. 
Head of ordinary size, rounded, not broader than long, occiput and 
cheeks well fringed with short hairs, vertex granular. Clypeus 
moderately high, flat above, with the sides very narrowly produced. 
Face-markings yellowish-white; clypeus all pale except the two 
usual dots, and two dots near the upper margin, representing the 
ends of the bars seen in some species, or the bars may be even 
fairly well-developed. Supraclypeal mark absent, though there 
may be a pair of scarcely perceptible pale specks close to upper 
border of clypeus. Dog-ear marks absent. Pale lateral marks at 
first rapidly narrowing, and then gradually, ending in a narrow 
truncation at the level of the antenns. Cheeks dark, mandibles 
rufous at tips. Antenne dark brown, yellow beneath, the sutures 
of the flagellar joints dark. 

Mesothorax minutely lineolately sculptured. Pleura all dark. 
Tubercles and two spots on hind border of prothorax white. Tegulze 
hyaline subtestaceous. Wings hyaline, nervures and margin of 
stigma sepia-brown. Marginal cell appendiculate, poststigmatal 
portion a little the longest. Second submarginal large, narrowed a 
little more than one-half to marginal ; 3d discoidal distinct. Legs 
brown-black ; anterior knees and anterior tibiz in front pale prim- 
rose-yellow. Middle and hind knees whitish. 

Abdomen rather broad and flat ; above piceous, with an oblique 
white mark on each side of segments 1-3, those on 1 very narrow 
and closely approximating in the median line. Tip orange, or to 
be more precise, the pygidium is orange with the border colorless 
and hyaline, the tip emarginate, as is also the case in afinis. Ven- 
ter piceous. 

Hab.—ULas Cruces, N. M., on Bigelovia wiightii, Sept. 23, 1895, 
two specimens (CkIl.). This is, in all respects, very closely allied to 
P. afiinis, but it is smaller, the abdominal markings are white and 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 91 


the abdomen is not so conspicuously marked. Yet in all essential 
particulars it agrees so nearly with affinis that it might well be 
deemed a southern race of it. The clypeal markings vary as in 
afinis. On Sept. 20th, I took one example of P. fallax on flowers 
of Verbesina encelioides, and on Sept. 17th, three on Pectis papposa. 
52. Perdita phymate CkIl., Proc. Phila. Acad., 1895, p. 12. 9. (Hab., Las Cruces 

N. M.). 

In the original description the legs are described as dark brown 
without markings, but in the normal form of the species the knees 
are all pallid and the anterior tibiz are yellow in front, as in fallax. 
The original type specimen, now in Coll. Am. Ent. Soc., was ex- 
amined for me by Mr. Fox, who reports that the yellow is repre- 
sented by pale testaceous. . 

The mesothorax is minutely sculptured, though shining. The 
second submarginal cell is large, and narrows more than half to 
marginal; 3d discoidal distinct. The clypeus is strongly punctured, 
and frequently presents a small yellow median spot. Glossa not 
hairy. 

This species was common on Bigelovia wrightii at Las Cruces, 
Sept. 23, 1895, but the ¢ has not been-observed. It was also taken 
on B. wrightti on Sept. 2d, together with P. nitidella, P. luteola, 
Halictus stultus and Prosopis. On Sept. 25th, it was taken on Gutier- 
rezia sarothre var. microcephala, together with P. semicrocea, ete. 
53. Perdita eneifrons n. sp. 

@.—Length 5mm. Head dark green with the front very dis- 
tinctly brassy, and the clypeus black ; thorax pitch black, with the 
metathorax dark green. Abdomen black, shiny, without bands or 
spots, veuter dark subolivaceous brown. 

Head rounded, of ordinary size, not broader than long, vertex 
minutely rugulose and very sparsely punctured. Clypeus shining, 
prominent, high, but not produced laterally to bases of mandibles, 
very sparsely punctured on its lower portion. Mandibles pale yel- 
low at base, rufescent otherwise, with a distinct tooth on inner side. 
Face all dark, medially free from hairs, laterally with short hairs. 
Cheeks moderately hairy. Antenne dark brown. 

Mesothorax shining, perfectly smooth, bare ; except its anterior 
border, which presents short hairs and is very feebly sculptured, and 
even presents in some lights a vague greenish tinge. Scutellum 
bare, postscutellum with a thin fringe of white hairs. 

Metathorax granular. Prothorax, even including tubercules, 


92 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


wholly dark. (In phymate the tubercles are more or less pallid.) 
Tegule hyaline. Wings milky hyaline, nervures and stigma al- 
most colorless, the latter yellowish. (In its pallid wings it resem- 
bles semicrocea.) Stigma large; marginal cell short, substigmatal 
portion longest, 2d submarginal narrowed about one-half to mar- 
ginal ; 3d discoidal distinct. 

Legs black, knees pallid, anterior tibize in front, anterior tarsi 
and an obscure stripe on middle tibiz, yellow. Tip of abdomen 
- rounded or subtruncate, not emarginate. (It is emarginate in fal- 
lax.) 

Hab.—Las Cruces, N. M., on Bigelovia wrightii, Sept. 23, 1895, 
in some numbers with P. phymate. Its superficial resemblance to 
phymate is such that when catching the specimens I thought I had 
only one species, but a careful examination shows striking differ- 
ences in the head, thorax and wings. The ¢ was not found. 

54. Perdita semicrocea Ckll., Proc. Phila. Acad., 1895, p. 13. 9. (Hab., Las 

Cruces, N. M.). 

In 1895 this species has been taken commonly at Las Cruces; on 
Bigelovia wrighiii, Sept. 2d and Sept. 12th ; on Solidago canadensis, 
Sept. 3d; on Gutierrezia sarothre var microcephala, Sept. 25th. The 
original specimen was taken in October. P. semicrocea is less 
strictly limited to one flower than most of the genus, being taken 
rather freely on all the plants mentioned—perhaps most freely on the 
Solidago. ‘The ¢ differs in having the face below the level of the 
antenne entirely yellowish-white, except the clypeal dots. The 
pale color does not extend further upward, but is slightly notched 
on each side of the antennze, the outer margin of the notch being a 
little higher than the termination of the pale color on the orbital 
margin. The cheeks are unarmed. The narrow tip of the abdo- 
men is very narrowly truncate, not emarginate. The anterior and 
middle legs are yellow, except a dark patch on the femora behind. 
55. Perdita luteola Ckll., Ent. News, 1894, p. 328. @. (Hab., Las Cruces, N. M.). 

Very abundant on Bigelovia wrightti, Sept. 2d, ete. On Sept. 23d, 
I caught several on Gutierrezia sarothre var. microcephala. I have 
found them on no other flowers, except that once I saw one in the 
net after sweeping over Pectis papposa. 

The ¢ differs in having a black line in place of a black spot be- 
fore the eyes, being really the groove usually seen in that situation, 
wholly black; a similar black line placed longitudinally on each 
side of the anterior half of the second segment of the abdomen ; and 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 93 


the antenne brown-black or dark brown above. The ¢ has the 
cheeks unarmed, 

When left too long in a damp cyanide bottle the ¢ turns a bril- 
liant crimson all over. 


A species found in New Mexico, habits and exact locality unknown. 


56. Perdita nuda n. sp. 

@.—Length 7mm. Head and thorax green, legs and abdomen 
dark chocolate-brown. The body in general is remarkably free 
from hairs; the face is bare but the occiput and cheeks present 
scattered short hairs ; the thorax is practically bare, even including 
the pleura and sides of metathorax ; the tip of the abdomen has a 
fairly dense fringe of hairs; the tibize and tarsi are quite hairy, the 
hairs of a dull whitish color. 

Head of ordinary size, a little broader than long, dark green, the 
face very flat, vertex granular, clypeus punctured. There are no 
face-markings except an oblong dull yellow spot on the elypeus. 
Basal portion of mandibles yellow with a large dark spot. Glossa 
not hairy. Antenne brown-black; flagellum whitish, scape and 
funicle testaceous beneath. 

Thorax dark olive-green, metathorax bluish; the whole rather 
dull and finely sculptured. The pleura is quite shiny, but still 
sculptured. There are no pale marks on the thorax, but the tuber- 
cles, quite prominent, are dark brown. 

Tegulz hyaline with an opaque spot in front. Wings milky-hy- 
aline, nervures and stigma dark brown, the latter pallid in middle. 
Marginal cell with the poststigmatal portion as long ora little longer 
than the substigmatal. Second submarginal large, narrowed more 
than one-half to marginal. Third discoidal distinct. Anterior 
knees, and anterior tibiz in front, pale yellow. Abdomen above 
and below dark brown, without any pale markings. Tip emargi- 
nate. 

Hab.—New Mexico, one specimen sent by Mr. Fox. Locality, 
etc., unknown. It resembles P. phymate, but is much larger than 
that or asteris. P. asteris has a hairy mesothorax ; phymate has a 
nude mesothorax, but is much more shiny as well as being so much 
smaller. P. semicerulea has a hairy mesothorax. 


A species found on Aster canescens. 


57. Perdita asteris n. sp. 


2 .—Length about or hardly 6 mm. Head very dark blue, 


94 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


thorax very dark green, metathorax dark blue. Both head and 
thorax are very hairy, with short hairs; the disc of metathorax 
bare, and the dise of clypeus seeming bare, but seen, when side- 
ways, to have a fine down. Head rather large, rounded, about as 
broad as long. Vertex very finely granular, punctate; sides of 
clypeus punctate. Mandibles with the basal two-thirds very broad, 
whitish, becoming rufescent ; the terminal third black, compara- 
tively slender, coming to a point. Antenne dark brown above, 
yellowish beneath. Pale markings of face yellowish-white, restricted 
to clypeus and sides of face. Clypeus high, pale with the usual dots, 
but with a dark blotch on each side above, so that the yellowish- 
white color rapidly narrows, but instead of coming to a point, 
broadens a little to an abrupt truncation on the upper clypeal mar- 
gin. Lateral marks of face broadly triangular, the inner angle of 
the triangle being opposite to the point on the clypeus where the 
pale color suddenly narrows, and the upper angle (of about 30°) on 
a level with the antennal sockets. 

Thorax with a very narrow yellow line on hind border of pro- 
thorax, and a very small yellow stripe on tubercles. Mesothorax 
dullish, granular. 

Tegule pale, testaceous; wings milky-hyaline, nervures and 
stigma very pale yellow, nearly colorless, the latter centrally hya- 
line. Marginal cell moderately long and narrow, with its poststig- 
matal portion a little the longer. Second submarginal rather large, 
narrowed more than half to marginal, being not far from an equi- 
lateral triangle. Third discoidal distinct. 

Legs pubescent, black; the tarsi all white with a testaceous or 
yellowish tinge; hind margin of first joint of hind tarsi blackish, 
anterior knees and anterior tibiz in front pale yellow. Abdomen 
above shining piceous without markings, the hind margins of the 
segments a little rufescent. Venter dark brown. 

Mut. 9 .—Clypeus all yellowish-white except the usual dots and 
two ill-defined brown spots above. A semilunar dull yellowish su- 
praclypeal mark. One specimen. 

Hab.—Las Cruces, N. M., Sept. 19, 1895, four specimens on 
flowers of Aster canescens var. viscosus. Prof. E. O. Wooton took 
one on the same flowers as late as the middle of October. 


A species found on Senecio douglasii. 
58. Perdita senecionis n. sp. 
Q@.—Length about 7 mm. Head and thorax dark, dull olive- 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 95 


green, even including the metathorax ; conspicuously granular, 
Head a little longer than broad; face practically hairless, cheeks 
and occiput with short whitish hairs. Vertex depressed between 
ocelli and orbits. Mandibles stout, simple, gradually tapering, 
blunt at tips, pale yellowish with the apical half rufescent. Anten- 
ne very dark brown, dull pale yellowish beneath. Face-markings 
cream color, very distinct, restricted to clypeus and sides of face. 
Clypeus high, flattened above, prominent, cream color with broad 
black bars. Supraclypeal region dark, elevated, convex. Lateral 
face-marks club-shaped, rapidly narrowing and continuing upward. 
to a subtruncate termination on a level with the antennal sockets. 

Thorax nearly hairless, as in P. nuda; the greater part of tuber- 
cles, and a broadly triangular patch on each side of hind margin 
of prothorax, shining pale yellow. (In nuda these pale markings 
are lacking.) Tegule hyaline, with a kidney-shaped pale yellow 
opaque patch. Wings slightly smoky, nervures and stigma dark 
brown, the latter pallid in center. Marginal cell rather long, ap- 
pendiculate, its poststigmatal portion a little the longest. Second 
submarginal large, subtriangular, narrowed more than half to mar- 
ginal. Third discoidal distinct. Legs black, knees pallid, anterior 
tarsi testaceous, anterior tibize yellow in front, middle tibize with a 
yellow stripe in front. 

Abdomen above black, with eight creamy-white marks, just like 
those of affinis. Venter piceous. 

Mut. 9 .—The abdominal pale marks reduced to six, the last two 
failing, one specimen. 

Hab.—-Las Cruces, N. M., six examples on flowers of Senecio 
douglasii, collected by Prof. E. O. Wooton, Oct. 9, 1895. 

This interesting species is extremely close to affinis, and would be 
taken for it upon superficial examination. It differs, however, by 
the somewhat longer head, the narrower lateral face-marks, the 
larger size, and especially by the glosza presenting only a small 
patch of hairs near its tip, whereas in affinis it is strongly hairy for 
a considerable distance. P. octomaculata has the glossa also more 
hairy than in senecionis. 


A small species found on Chrysopsis villosa. 
59. Perdita vespertilio n. sp. 


$.—Length about 4 mm. Head and thorax shining black. 
Cheeks unarmed. Head rather large, especially in comparison with 


96 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


the small thorax, when seen from the front almost precisely circu- 
lar. Front quite hairy, with white hairs; cheeks hairy. Antenne 
dark brown above, pale yellowish beneath. Clypeus rather cocked- 
hat-shaped. Pale markings of face cream color, confined to clypeus 
and sides of face, with, of course, the labrum and basal portion of 
mandibles. Seen all together, they suggest the head of one of the 
long-eared bats, whence the specific name. The darkened upper 
portion of the labrum represents the bat’s mouth. Clypeus cream- 
color, with the usual dots obscure. Lateral face-marks broadly tri- 
angular, the inner angle opposite the clypeal dots, the upper one 
(of about 45°) on a level with the antennal sockets. Thorax shin- 
ing, smooth, tolerably hairy. Prothorax, including tubercles, dark, 
the tubercles brownish. Tegule hyaline; wings hyaline, irides- 
cent, nervures colorless, stigma margined with very pale yellowish. 
Marginal cell fairly long and narrow, the poststigmatal portion a 
little the longer. Second submarginal subtriangular, narrowed a 
little more than half to marginal. ‘Third discoidal absent. 

Legs dark brown with the tarsi brownish-white ; anterior tibiz 
yellowish except a suffused brownish patch behind, middle tibiz pal- 
lid in front. 

Abdomen short and broad, above dark brown without pale mark- 
ings, but the distal margins of the segments more or less pale. 
Venter brown. 

Hab.—tLas Cruces, N. M., Oct. 5, 1895, one specimen on Chry- 
sopsis villosa. No more could be seen. The locality is about a mile 
southeast of the Agricultural College. This little species has some 
resemblance to californica and its allies, but a glance at the face 
will distinguish it. 


Three species with large heads, from New Mexico, found on Composite. 
60. Perdita grandiceps n. sp. 

$.—Length about 5 mm. Form stout; head quadrate, ex- 
tremely large, larger than the thorax, eyes narrow, cheeks armed 
with blunt teeth. Face flattened, very sparsely and inconspicuously 
hirsute, cheeks hairy beneath. Color of head very dark bottle- 
green; vertex granular, it and front looking almost silky, cheeks 
much more shiny. Mandibles stout, curved, scimitar-shaped, base 
pale yellowish, end rufescent, blackish on inner side. Antenne 
blackish above, yellowish-brown beneath ; scape piceous, with a 
light yellowish spot at base in front. Clypeus rather low, anterior 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 97 


margin not produced into spines. Face-markings dull sulphur-yel- 
low. Clypeus with a yellow longitudinal band, uniting with the 
broadly yellow anterior portion—or one might say, clypeus yellow 
with a pair of large triangular dark patches, the triangles having 
one side coincident with the hind margin. The extreme anterior 
edge of the clypeus is bordered with a black line. The supracly- 
peal mark is represented by a pair of squarish yellow patches; the 
dog-ear marks, on each side of these, are not much larger. The 
lateral yellow face-marks would form nearly equilateral triangles, 
but that the innermost angle is narrowly produced. ‘The upper 
angle scarcely reaches the level of the antennal sockets. 

Thorax not very shiny, the surface granular. No pale markings. 
Prothorax with prominent shoulders. Color of thorax black with a 
slight metallic tinge, becoming distinctly brassy-green on anterior 
half of mesothorax; metathorax blue-black. Pleura and sides of 
metathorax with white hairs; mesothorax with sparse hairs. Teg- 
ulze hyaline subtestaceous. Wings milky-hyaline, nervures (except 
the dark costal nervure) practically colorless ; stigma very pale yel- 
lowish. Marginal cell obliquely truncate, substigmatal portion a lit- 
tle the longer. Second submarginal narrowed hardly one-half to 
marginal, third discoidal excessively weak. 

Legs shining black, with white hairs. Anterior coxe with a very 
noticeable tuft of white hairs. Tarsi becoming brownish. Ante- 
rior knees, and anterior tibiz in front, yellow. 

Abdomen oval, shining piceous without light markings. Mar- 
gins of the segments a little rufescent. Venter brown. 

Hab.—lLas Cruces, N. M., on Solidago canadensis, Sept. 3, 1895, 
one specimen (CkIl., 4,746). It was associated on the flowers with 
Melecta maculata, Anthophora maculifrons, Perdita semicrocea, Col- 
letes, Heriades, Prosopis 2 spp., Oxybelus 2 spp., Philanthus and 
Odynerus. 

61. Perdita crassiceps n. sp. Fig. 15 (head.) 

é.—6 mm. long. Smooth and shiny; head and thorax so dark 
green as to seem black, metathorax very dark blue. Head quad- 
rate, extremely large, eyes comparatively small and narrow. Ver- 
tex minutely granular, but nevertheless shining, with a transverse 
ridge behind the ocelli. The punctuation is sparse. Cheeks un- 
armed; mandibles rather long, scimitar-shaped, blunt at tips, 
pale yellowish becoming rufescent distally, the tips blackish. An- 
tenn dark brown above, yellow beneath. Clypeus wholly pale 


98 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


yellowish, except the usual black dots, and a pair of obscure suf- 
fused brownish spots adjacent to hind margin. Supraclypeal mark 
wanting. Dog-ear marks present. Lateral face-marks white, 
broad, subquadrate, the lower border occupied by a black line, the 
upper border passing somewhat obliquely from the point on orbital 
margin opposite the antennal sockets, to slightly below the upper 
end of the dog-ear marks, 

Thorax smooth and shining, mesothorax sparsely punctured ; 
hairs on thorax above sparse, brownish, those on pleura white. No 
light markings except that the tubercles are pale 
yellow with a dark spot, and the collar shows a lit- 
tle yellow. 

Tegulze pale testaceous ; wings hyaline, nervures 

Fic. 15. practically colorless, stigma very pale yellowish. 
Marginal cell rather long and narrow, its poststigmatal and substig- 
matal portions about equal. Second submarginal subtriangular, 
narrowed more than half to marginal. Third discoidal very weak. 

Legs black with the knees and tarsi testaceous; anterior and 
middle tibize testaceous in front. Abdomen above shining dark 
brown, the hind margins of the segments a little pale; no light 
marks. Venter light brown. 

Hab.— Albuquerque, N. M., June 30, 1895, one specimen on a 
yellow-flowered species of Composite not identified. (CkIl., 3,253.) 


62. Perdita laticeps n. sp. 

é.—54 mm.long. This greatly resembles crassiceps, in fact I had 
regarded them as the same until a close examination was made when 
writing the description of the latter. P. laticeps differs from crassi- 
ceps as follows: 

The head is a little larger, the face is much more hairy, the sides 
of the cheeks are covered with short hairs (whereas in crassiceps 
they are bare and shining), the clypeus is distinctly panama-hat- 
shaped, the supraclypeal mark is represented by a narrow trans- 
verse line, adjacent to the upper border of the clypeus, the dog-ear 
marks are absent, the antennze are dark brown above and below, 
the mandibles are stouter, the anterior and middle tibie are not 
testaceous in front, the hind tibiz are more hairy, the abdomen is 
considerably shorter and broader, with the hind margins of the seg- 
ments broadly hyaline. ‘The tip of the abdomen is.narrowly but 
abruptly truncate. There is no transverse ridge behind the ocelli, 
but this area shows strong punctures, which are wanting in crassi- 
ceps. The wings are as in crassiceps. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 99 


Hab.—tLas Cruces, N. M., one collected by Mr. A. M. Holt on 
Verbesina encelioides, Sept., 1895. This species is allied to inter- 
rupta and californica. 


Species found on Verbesina encelioides in the Mesilla Valley, N. M. 
63. Perdita beata n. sp. 

2 .—Length 8-83 mm. Entirely bright canary-yellow ; except 
the flagellum blackish above, the usual clypeal dots, an obscure 
black line round the lower part of the dog-ear marks, especially on 
the inner side; a black band, not quite as long as the scape, before 
each orbit ; ashort black line on each side of second abdominal seg- 
ment ; a dark shining pit on the hind part of the metathorax ; and 
the lower (ventral) half of the pleura black. Wings hyaline, nerv- 
ures and stigma very pale yellow. Marginal cell large, poststig- 
matal portion longest. Second submarginal narrowing hardly one- 
half to marginal. Third discoidal distinct. Hind tibize and tarsi 
very hairy. Mesothorax, scutellum and postscutellum with short 
dense erect yellow hairs. Ocelli dark. Ends of mandibles dark, 
the mandibles being quite abrupgly bent before the dark portion. 
Terminal portion of glossa not hairy. 

Hab.—Las Cruces, N. M., on flowers of Verbesina encelioides. 
The first was taken in September, 1895, by Mr. A. M. Holt. On 
Sept. 20th I took one, and again another on Sept. 28th. 

This lovely insect is a sort of gigantic P. Juteola; but the meso- 
thorax of Juteola is bare, while that of beata is very bristly ; luteola 
also does not show the black on under part of pleura. 


64. Perdita perpulchra n. sp. 

2 .—Length 83-9 mm. Head and thorax bronzy-green, densely 
covered (except the smooth dise of metathorax and middle of face) 
with short erect pale yellowish hairs, which become longer on the 
the pleura and cheeks beneath, and sparse on the vertex. Head of 
ordinary size, subtriangular or broadly subcordiform ; vertex dull- 
ish, granular ; clypeus approximately cocked-hat-shaped. The con- 
spicuous white hairs on face are arranged so as to seem to radiate 
from the antennz ; but the disc of the clypeus, and the area above 
it and between the antennez, are bare. Mandibles abruptly bent 
before their dark ends. End of glossa with a conspicuous brush of 
hairs. Antenne yellow; flagellum, funicle and end of scape black 
above. Clypeus (except the usual pair of dots) and lateral face-— 
marks yellowish-white. No supraclypeal or dog-ear marks. Liat- 


100 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


eral pale marks subtriangular, the inner angle next to clypeal dot, 
the upper one (of about 30°) on a level with the antennal sockets. 
Mesothorax dullish, finely punctured as well as very bristly. Dise 
of metathorax bare and shining, with very fine striatulate sculpture. 
Prothorax (including tubercles) yellowish-white, except a transverse 
dark line widening centrally into a large dark patch. 

Tegule hyaline. Wings hyaline, nervures and stigma very pale 
yellowish. | 

Stigma small; marginal cell long, its poststiymatal part much 
the longest. Second submarginal large, subtriangular, narrowed 
considerably more than half to marginal. Third discoidal distinct. 
Legs yellowish-white, posterior tibise very hairy; anterior femora 
below, except at distal end, a patch on anterior tibie behind, mid- 
dle femora below, a patch on middle tibiz behind, hind femora 
with a band above and an oblique streak near base within, hind 
tibize, except proximal fourth and middle and hind tarsi, black. 

Abdomen above white with black bands. First segment with two 
black spots in front, and a large broad black triangle, having for 
its base the whole distal margin of the segment. Segments 2-4 
each with a distal black band, which is swollen in front subliterally, 
and behind laterally, the swelling or patch in the latter case being 
on the next segment. Tip of abdomen dark brown, the pygidial 
area smooth and shining, though microscopically subpunctate, ex- 
treme tip rather broadly truncate, subemarginate. Venter mostly 
black, with a white spot on hind margin of each segment, and the 
sides largely whitish. 

Mut. 9 .—The dark triangle on first abdominal segment with a 
small central light triangle. Abdominal bands broader, and con- 
tinuously invading at segment following. 

Hab.—Las Cruces, N. M., on flowers of Verbesina encelioides, one 
taken by Mr. A. M. Holt j in the fall of 1895, and one by myself on 
Oct. 5th. A very beautiful and distinct species. It differs at once 
from albovittata by its larger size, non-hairy clypeus, lateral face- 
markings narrowing above, etc. 

65. Perdita albovittata Ckll., Proc. Phila. Acad., 1895, p. 15. 9. (Hab., San 

Augustine, N. M.). 

The two specimens taken at San Augustine on Aug. 29th are both 
females, not ¢ and 9, as formerly stated. Miss Mae Gilmore took 
‘a Qin the Mesilla Valley, close to the Agricultural College, Sept. 
23d, on Verbesina encelioides. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 101 


On Oct. 4th, at the same locality, Mr. C. Rhodes was so fortunate 
as to find a ¢ on Verbesina encelioides. The glossa of the 9 shows 
two brushes of hairs, separated by an interval; that of the 2 is 
bare. 

The ¢ is only about 43 mm. long (? 53), and differs at once by 
the abdomen, which is short and broad, black, with the margins of 
the segments appearing broadly whitish because hyaline. The sides 
of the first three segments show obscure whitish marks—all that is 
left of the bands of the 9. The venter resembles the upper surface. 
The tip is rufous, produced, narrowly truncate. 

The face-markings, differently from most species, are as in the 9. 
The antenne are entirely brown-black. Cheeks unarmed. 

There is a singularly close resemblance between the ¢ of albovit- 
tata and Jaticeps, so that the idea suggests itself that laticeps may be 
a dimorphic large-headed % of albovittata. But this could not be 
taken as proven without positive evidence, or at least some analo- 
gous case in the genus to guide us. Cresson has referred to a 3 
specimen of texana (megacephala) in which the head was unusually 
large, but it may have been a different species. 

66. Perdita vagans n. sp. 

$ .—Length 43 mm. Head and thorax shining, blue-black, with 
sparse hairs which are quite long behind the ocelli. Head moder- 
ately large, rather broader than long, cheeks unarmed, vertex shiny 
though feebly microscopically granular; clypeus panama-hat- 
shaped, with the crown rather high. Cheeks wholly dark; labrum 
and mandibles pale yellowish. Clypeus pale yellow with the usual 
black dots. Dog-ear and supraclypeal marks wanting, though the 
former are represented by hardly noticeable pallid specks. Lateral 
pale yellow face-marks subquadrate, nearly the shape of the main- 
sail of a schooner, though shorter, the upper outer angle (of about 

50°) about on a level with the antennal sockets. Antenne sepia- 
brown above, yellowish beneath. Thorax smooth and shining. 
Tubercles, and a couple of small spots on hind margin of prothorax 
pale yellow. Pleura not very hairy. Tegule hyaline. Wings 
hyaline; stigma pale yellow, nervures colorless. Marginal cell 
rather long, its poststigmatal portion a little the longest. Second 
submarginal nearly triangular, narrowed more than half to mar- 
ginal. Third discoidal absent. 

All the femora, and the hind tibiz, black with the ends subtesta- 
ceous yellowish. Anterior and middle tibize yellowish with a dark 
patch behind. Tarsi all pale yellowish testaceous. 


102 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Abdomen rather broad, dark sepia-brown, without light mark- 
ings, the distal margins of the segments more or less pallid. Ven- 
ter pale brown. ‘Tip pale testaceous. 

Hab.—Las Cruces, N. M., one on Verbesina encelioides, Sept. 28, 
1895. 

I had considered the possibility that this might be the 2 of as- 
teris, but it differs too much from it for this to be likely, I think. 


Group of P. albipennis. 
67. Perdita sparsa Fox, Proc. Cal. Ac. Sci., 1893, p. 16. ¢@9 (Hab., Margarita 
and Magdalena Islands, L. Cal.) 

Collected by Mr. Haines in March, being, therefore, distinct from 
the other members of the group by its vernal appearance. I have 
examined a ? from Magdalena I., March, 1889, one of the types. 
It is very near to albipennis, and the difference of punctuation, 
mentioned by Mr. Fox, is not a very satisfactory character. It is, 
however, readily distinguished thus : 


P. sparsa 9. P. albipennis °. 
| 
Nervures dark. | Nervures colorless. 
Stigma margined with brown. Stigma not so margined. 
Size a little smaller. Median mark broadening above 
Median mark of clypeus broad, to a T-shape. 


lance-head-shaped, going to a 
point above. 

Three yellow bands on abdomen, 
first entire, the other two with 
a linear interruption. 


68. Perdita verbesine n. sp. 

9.—Length 7mm. Head and thorax green, abdomen black, 
wings milky-hyaline. Head rounded, moderately small, unusually 
pubescent, especially on occiput and cheeks, the hairs on occiput 
pale fulvous, those on face and cheeks white. Face and vertex 
brassy-green, vertex rather strongly rugulose, and sparsely pune- 
tured. Mandibles rufescent, yellowish at base, simple but strongly 
elbowed ; clypeus black, punctured, with a longitudinal central yel- 
low line, not always produced to the margins, and a more or less 
developed yellow patch on each side at anterior margin. Sides of 
face below, adjacent to clypeus, with a yellow patch. These face- 
markings are of essentially the same pattern as those of albipennis. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 103 


Antenne blackish, a yellowish spot at base of scape beneath, and 
flagellum yellowish below. Mouth-parts much elongated, glossa al- 
most naked, or with the terminal half hairy. 

Thorax shining brassy-green, pubescent as in albipennis, and with 
the yellow also more or less developed on collar and hind border of 
prothorax, but not on tubercles, except in the form of a very small 
spot, which may be absent. Metathorax dark green, sometimes a 
little bluish. 

Legs dark, pubescent, the hairs on posterior tibize especially long 
and dense, as in albipennis; tips of anterior femora, upper two- 
thirds of anterior tibiz in front, yellow. Tegul yellowish-hyaline. 
Stigma very pale yellowish, nervures almost colorless, the portion of 
marginal cell beyond stigma conspicuously longer than that below 
it; second submarginal narrowed about one-half to marginal, third 
discoidal distinct. 

Abdomen above black, nearly naked, except the last segment, 
which is densely fringed with white hairs. Fourth segment with 
two yellow spots, absent in specimens lacking the face-markings 
(mut. nigrior). Pygidial area conspicuously rufous. Venter dark. 

Mut. 9, nigrior—Stigma colorless, pale marks of head and 
thorax absent, pubescence of mesothorax white instead of yellowish, 
vertex a slightly bluer green, metathorax tinged with blue above, 
last joint of antennz with a slight hook, abdomen without yellow 
spots. (CkIL., 4,908.) 

Mut. 9°, intermedia.—Stigma pale yellow; vertex rather more 
brassy, lateral pale marks of clypeus absent. Abdomen with seg- 
ments 2—4 each with a pair of yellow marks, those on 2 and 3 trans- 
versely elongate, those on 4 larger and rounder. First taken by C. 
Rhodes on Verbesina. Sometimes the spots on segment 2 are lack- 
ing. The lateral pale marks of clypeus may also be more or less 
developed. 

$ .—Head larger and broader, cheeks strongly bulging below, 
but not spined ; antennze with the scape and funicle black above 
and yellow beneath, flagellum orange with the first two joints black 
or blackish above. Lower corners of face, and clypeus, yellow, the 
clypeus with two longitudinal black marks, and a black dot on the 
outside of each, after the manner of P. numerata. In some exam- 
ples the clypeus is black with a median longitudinal yellow line, 
and the lower corners broadly yellow, the yellow sometimes enclos- 
ing a black spot near its upper limit. (CkIl., 4,906, 5,054.) Pro- 


104 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


thorax without any yellow, except on collar above. Tarsi mostly 
pale, in addition to the pale leg-markings of the 9. Ends of mid- 
dle tibize also pale. 

Abdomen without the two spots of the 2, but the distal margins 
of the segments hyaline, with narrow dull yellowish bands, broadly 
emarginate on each side proximally. 

Mut. ¢, maculata.—Hind margin of prothorax with two small 
yellow marks. (One on Verbesina encelioides, Sept. 28th.) 

Mut. 3, cyanella.—Size small. Metathorax blue. (One on Hel- 
ianthus annuus, Sept. 21st). This agrees with true 3 verbesine in 
the dull front, orange flagellum, absence of spots on hind border of 
prothorax, ete. 

Hab.—WLas Cruces, N. M., abundant on flowers of Verbesina en- 
celioides, Sept. 11th to 20th of October. On Sept. 28th, after wet 
weather, they were freely copulating on the flowers. One had been 
caught by a Phymata. On Sept. 21st,a 9 of mut. intermedia and 
the g mut. cyanella were taken on Helianthus annuus. 

69. Perdita albipennis Cr., Tr. Am. Ent. Soc., 1868, p. 386. 2 (Hab., New 

Mexico, Colorado). 

3. Perdita hyalina Cr., Tr. Am. Ent. Soc., 1878, p. 68. (Hab., Colorado). 

The original type of albipennis was taken in 1867 by Dr. Samuel 
Lewis, on a journey from Fort Wallace, Colo., to Fort Craig, N. M. 
The types of hyalina were taken by Messrs. Ridings and Morrison. 
In the latter part of July, 1895, I took the typical form, in both 
sexes, on flowers of Helianthus annwus at La Junta, Colorado. The 
males have the flagellum mostly orange, spots on hind margin of 
prothorax, front shiny. P. hyalina is apparently a slight variety. 
Var. helianthi. 

3 .—Differs from verbesine ¢ by its comparatively shining 
front, blackish flagellum, and two spots on hind border of prothorax. 
Differs from albipennis ¢ by having the yellow marking on abdo- 
men as in verbesine, and the dark flagellum. 

@ .—Abdomen striped as in albipennis, from which it is hardly 
to be distinguished. In helianthi the stigma, when well colored, is 
lemon-yellow, while in albipennis it becomes pale orange, and is 
quite large. From verbesine, the Q helianthi differs by its well- 
striped abdomen, and the head is a little larger. 

The var. helianthi is occasionally taken (at least the 9s) on Ver- 
besina encelioides (Oct. 5th, ete.), at Las Cruces, N. M., but it is the 
usual form in that locality on Helianthus annuus (Sept. 22d, ete.). 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 105 


Of 46 Qsfrom Verbesina, 43 are verbesine and 3 helianthi. The 
The earliest date for helianthi is July 29, 1893. (CkIl., 339, a ¢.) 
On Aug. 26, 1893, I took both sexes at Juarez, Mexico; these were 
recorded as albipennis and hyalina in Ann. Mag. N. Hist., Feb., 
1895, p. 206. 

Mut. 3, pasonis—Length 82 mm. Resembles verbesine in its 

dull front and the absence of spots on hind margin of prothorax. 
Resembles typical albipennis by the absence of yellow on the abdo- 
men. Resembles helianthi by the dark flagellum which is black 
above, dull testaceous below. Maxillary palpi with the last four 
joints practically equal. Front and mesothorax olive-green, cheeks 
and metathorax greenish-blue or prussian-green, in strong contrast. 
Tip of abdomen unusually broad. Marginal cell somewhat longer 
than usual. 

I took one specimen of this at El Paso, Texas, Aug. 25, 1893. I 
was a little perplexed whether to refer it to verbesine or albipennis. 
Mr. Fox named it hyalina Cr., and indeed it must come very near 
the form so named by Cresson, which had the dark flagellum, 
though the head and thorax were bluish-green. 

Var. 9 lingualis. 

Length about 10mm. Abdomen above with yellow bands on 
segments 2-4, the first two narrowly interrupted in the middle, the 
last two failing some distance before the lateral margin. Metatho- 
rax dark blue, head dark blue-green, mesothorax and scutellum 
dark olive-green. Front moderately shiny. Hind border of pro- 
thorax marked with yellow. Stigma inclining to pale orange. Sec- 
ond submarginal cell not narrowed half to marginal. Flagellum 
dark. Clypeus yellow with two black blotches above, sufficient 
to mark out the yellow T. 

The above characters are probably, in part, individual ones, but 
the glossa is very conspicuously hairy all along, thus differing from 
that of helianthi, albipennis type, and verbesine, in which it is com- 
paratively naked, except the terminal half in some examples of ver- 
besine. When using a compound microscope to more accurately 
determine the character of the glossa, I was surprised to find also a 
difference in the maxillary palpi. In lingualis the last two joints 
of these palpi are short and of equal length, while the two before 
them are long and also equal. In helianthi the last joint is long, 
the two before it short and equal, and the two before them long and 
equal to one another and to the last. 

The var. lingualis is founded on a single 9 from Fort Collins, 
Colorado, Aug. 8, 1895. (Baker.) 8 


106 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


The known range of P. albipennis is greatly extended by a ? 
sent to me by Mr. Fox, caught in Nowlin Co., South Dakota. The 
name of the collector does not appear on the label. The clypeus is 
marked practically as in lingualis, but the glossa is not hairy. 
Stigma pale orange. Second submarginal cell narrowed fully one- 
half to marginal. 

Since the above was written, Mr. Fox has examined for me Cres- 
son’s types of hyalina (2), and reports that one has the abdominal 
marks as in verdesine and helianthi ; but the other must be held to 
be the true type, as Cresson does not mention the marks. The form 
above, described as pasonis, has only a very small clypeal mark, so 
it is in all respects very similar to what we must call a/bipennis var. 
hyalina (Cr.). 

Many years ago, P. albipennis was taken by Belfrage in Bosque 
Co., Texas. (Cresson, Tr. Am. Ent. Soc., 1872, p. 261.) This is 
a little east of the 98th meridian. 


70. Perdita lepachidis n. sp., or race. 

$.—Length about 6 mm. Resembles the 2 of albipennis, but 
head and thorax brassy-green, not at all bluish-green. Vertex 
quite densely and deeply punctured. Clypeal markings reduced to 
a yellow median line and yellow lower corners, occasionally the 
whole anterior margin of clypeus yellow, connecting with the longi- 
tudinal line. Mandibles simple. Metathorax rather inclined to 
bluish. Wings and abdomen asin ¢ albipennis. 

The flagellum is orange, the two spots on the hind margin of pro- 
thorax are feebly developed, the front is fairly shiny, not nearly so 
dull as in verbesine. 

Hab.—On flowers of Lepachys tagetes (James), Santa Fé, N. M., 
July 30, 1895, and Socorro, N. M., June29th. I do not know how 
late it flies, but the Zepachys is over sooner than the Verbesina or 
Helianthus. The characters of this species or race are slight, but 
constant in the specimens examined. The 9 is unfortunately un- 
known. 


Appendix: Species received since the above paper was written. 
Perdita utahensis n. sp. 

Q.—Length8mm. Head dark blue-green, thorax brassy-green ; 
Metathorax green, not blue, but so dark as to be almost black. 
Head of ordinary size, about as broad as long; face and cheeks 
hairy, the hairs dull white, those on occiput gray. Front strongly 
granular, with moderately close punctures ; facial ridge with a median 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 107 


linear groove, extending down on the ridge as far as the level of the 
antennal sockets. Clypeus cocked-hat-shaped, but rounded and 
broad above, and unusually high, entirely pale yellow except the 
usual two dots. Lateral pale yellow face-marks triangular, the in- 
ner angle opposite the clypeal dot, the upper angle (of about 40°) 
level with the antennal sockets, on the orbital margin. The inner 
side of the triangle is straight or nearly so, not notched as in bige- 
lovie. Supraclypeal and dog-ear marks absent. Mandibles simple, 
with the basal three-fifths very broad and pale yellowish; and the 
terminal two-fifths strongly bent inward, dark rufous-brown, 
slender, coming to a point. Antenne with the scape ail yellow, fun- 
icle yellow with a brown blotch above; flagellum brown, dark 
above, pale below, first joint all yellow below. 

Thorax, including mesothorax and pleura, quite hairy, disc of 
metathorax bare. ‘The abundant short bristles on the mesothorax 
have a yellowish tinge. Pleura all dark. Collar and hind border 
of prothorax broadly, connecting with tubercles, pale yellow. The pro- 
thorax is thus practically all yellow except a large wedge-shaped 
portion on each side. Mesothorax shiny. 

Tegule hyaline, with a yellowish opaque subreniform mark. 
Wings hyaline, nervures and stigma pale brown, the latter not cen- 
trally hyaline. Marginal cell long and rather narrow, squarely 
truncate, its poststigmatal portion much the longest. Second sub- 
marginal large, not narrowed half to marginal. Third discoidal 
distinct, rather narrower below than is usual. Legs hairy ; femora 
yellow, middle femora with a little brown at base below. Tibi 
and tarsi pale brown; anterior tibize yellow in front and with a yel- 
low streak behind. 

Abdomen above with about equally broad dull yellow and black 
bands, the latter five in number, but the last not so well-defined. 
First segment with an oblique black mark on each side before the 
band. The first band touches on each side a black longitudinal 
groove such as is seen on the side of the second segment in /uteola 
Q. The second and third bands present a small lobe on each side 
below. The fourth band below has a median projecting tongue. 
Venter pale dull yellow, broadly mottled with brown medially. 

Hab.—Southwest Utah, collected by Mr. Palm, sent by Mr. C. 
F. Baker, one specimen. Type in coll. Baker. 

This, the first Perdita recorded from Utah, belongs near albipen- 
nis, etc., but will be readily recognized by the characters I have 
italicized. 


108 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


THE MOLTING OF BIRDS WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO THE 
PLUMAGES OF THE SMALLER LAND BIRDS OF EASTERN 
NORTH AMERICA. 


BY WITMER STONE. 


The lack of definite information regarding the seasonal plumages 
of our birds which characterizes most of the works on North Amer- 
ican ornithology, as well as the scarcity of recorded facts relative to 
the methods by which the plumages are assumed, must have im- 
pressed all who have had occasion to seek for information upon 
these subjects. This is unquestionably due, in a great measure, to 
the scarcity, in collections, of molting specimens and adults in fall 
or winter plumage. Molting specimens are only to be obtained dur- 
ing July and August in this latitude, and collecting at this season 
is not only difficult on account of the retiring habits of the birds 
during the period of molt, but also exceedingly unpleasant, being 
the height of our hot season. Furthermore. professional collectors 
have not been encouraged to collect molting birds since the most 
marketable specimens are full-plumaged spring birds. To this 
cause, too, is probably due the great scarcity of North American 
birds from the tropics, showing the progress and nature of the early 
spring molt, since collectors visiting these regions have paid more 
attention to securing fine specimens of the native species. 

In view of the state of our knowledge of molts and seasonal plum- 
ages and the scattered nature of the literature bearing upon the 
subject, I have prepared the following pages, more with the hope 
of attracting attention to this branch of ornithological investigation, 
than of assuming to present a finished treatise. 

For some years past I have been paying special attention to the 
acquisition of a series of molting specimens of our eastern North 
America birds and my own collection, together with that of the 
Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, furnishes a consider- 
able amount of such material. I have also examined a large 
number of specimens in the United States National Museum, and 
additional series have been kindly loaned by Mr. Robert Ridgway 
of the above institution, Mr. Wm. Brewster, of Cambridge, Mass., 
and Dr. J. A. Allen of the American Museum of Natural History. 

In spite of this, however, I have frequently been confronted with 
questions which can only be settled by the acquisition of additional 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 109 


material. Owing to this lack of specimens, I have no doubt that 
alterations will have to be made in my accounts of the molt in 
several species, in the light of future investigation. I nevertheless 
think it desirable to publish, at once, such information as I have 
collected, as a basis for future work. 

In the first part of this paper will be found a general account of the 
methods of plumage change, based upon my studies, and all state- 
ments will be understood to refer only to the groups here under con- 
sideration. As no general paper on molting has appeared recently, 
it seemed best to treat the subject at some length in this connection ; 
but it must be understood that I do not claim originality for all the 
statements given below as many of the facts have long been known. 
I have, however, made no statements that have not seemed to be 
verified by my own investigations. The second part consists of brief 
accounts of the molts and seasonal plumages of most of the smaller 
land birds of eastern North America, from the Cuckoos through 
the Passeres in the order of the American Ornithologists’ Union 
Check List. The Raptores, Columb, Gallinz and all the Water 
Birds have been omitted for want of sufficient material for their 
proper study, though they will probably exhibit still more interest- 
ing facts than those furnished by the groups here under consideration. 

The difficulties that present themselves in a study of this nature 
are many. Chief among them is the impossibility of telling the age 
of most of the specimens upon which we must base our investigation. 
The study of live birds is, of course, out of the question, and even 
were it possible the results would not prove satisfactory, as it has 
been shown that plumage changes in captive birds are often abnor- 
mal. 

Thrown back upon a study of prepared skins, our only method of 
telling what year in the life of the bird a certain plumage represents, 
is by having a sufficient series of specimens, taken while actually in 
the molt, to connect the various known plumages. Such series are 
at present very hard to obtain, as has already been stated, and we 
are, therefore, often forced to judge from comparison of series taken 
before and after the molts, which is of course much less satisfactory. 
Many specimens, however, which are apparently not molting, often 
show traces of an old plumage which has just been lost or a new one 
just appearing, when the feathers are carefully raised on various 
parts of the body; and much of my information has been gained 
from such specimens. 


110 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


It is generally considered, and in many cases actually proven, 
that the most perfect and brilliantly plumaged individuals of a 
species are the oldest, or at least are birds of several years of age, 
and I have followed this idea in treating of the species in the latter 
part of the present paper. It is, however, quite likely that certain 
individuals, whether from excessive vitality or some other cause, 
assume the adult dress at an earlier period in their life than others 
and that certain other individuals never attain the highest develop- 
ment of plumage coloration exhibited by the species. 

The scarcity of adult birds in winter plumage (7. e. the dress 
assumed at the end of the breeding season) has already been men- 
tioned. The fact that the number of these birds taken in September 
and October is often so remarkably small as compared with the 
birds of the year, seems to me good evidence that they not only start 
on their southward migration sooner than the young, but that they 
make a more continuous journey with fewer and shorter stops. 

The difference in the numbers of these birds taken by autumn col- 
lectors is real and not imaginary. Mr. C. W. Beckham in 1887 called 
especial attention to it’, giving the above explanation. He stated 
that between Sept. 1 and Noy. 22, 1886, he collected 367 birds of 
which 348 were birds of the year, the determination of age being 
based upon examination of the skeleton. In the fall series that I have 
examined, where the difference between the bird of the year and 
adult was clearly indicated by the plumage, I find the proportion 
of old birds very small; but I think that careful collecting carried 
on through August will result in the discovery of a large number 
of adult birds present at that time, which leave before the usual fall 
collecting begins. 

As a result of the studies given in detail farther on, the following 
generalizations may be made: 

I. The annual molt at the close of the breeding season is a physio- 

logical necessity and is common to all birds. 

II. The spring molt and striking changes of plumage effected by 
abrasion are not physiological necessities and their extent is de- 
pendent upon the height of development of coloration in 
the adult plumage, and does not necessarily bear any relation 
to the systematic relationships of the species. 

It naturally follows that closely related species may differ 
materially in the number and extent of their molts, and that 


1 Auk, 1887, p. 79. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. iQ! 


males and females of the same species differ greatly in this 
respect when the nuptial plumage of the adult male is highly 
developed as compared with that of the female or with its own 
winter plumage. 

III. The amount of change effected in the plumage at any partic- 
ular molt varies considerably in different individuals of the 
same species and sex. 

IV. Some species which have a well marked spring molt in their 
first and second years may discontinue it afterwards, when the 
adult plumage has once been acquired. And, on the other 
hand, some individuals may continue to molt in the spring, 
while others of the same species cease to do so. 

V. The remiges are molted less frequently than any other part of 
the plumage. Asa rule. they are only renewed at the annual 
molt (exception Dolichonyx). 

VI. Variability in the order of molt in the remiges and presence or 
absence of molt in the flight feathers at the end of the first 
summer are generally family charactersi.e., Ceryle differs from 
any other species treated of in this paper in the order of molt in 
the primaries. All Picidz and all Icteride except Icterus, (and 
Dolichonyx ?) molt the flight feathers with the rest of the first 
plumage. None of the Oscines-except Icteridze (as above), some 
(all?) Hirundinide, Otocoris and Cardinalis molt the flight 
feathers at this time. 


Some other exceptions to the above statements no doubt occur, 
but they cover the vast majority of cases. 

In connection with the second statement attention should be called 
to Ammodramus sandwichensis savanna which has practically the same 
plumage at all seasons, but which has an extensive molt of the body 
plumage in spring. Melospiza fasciata, which closely resembles it in 
plumage at all seasons, has scarcely a trace of spring molt. Amimo- 
dramus caudacutus is the only other species that shows any consider- 
able spring molt, and in which the sexes are not strikingly different. 

As stated above, the number and extent of the molts do not of 
necessity bear any relation to the systematic position of the species. 
The Fringillidz include species which exhibit the simplest series of 
molts as well as some examples of the most complicated molting 
known among the Passeres. The species of certain families do show 
practical uniformity in their molts, but in such cases there is also 
uniformity in the relative development of plumage of the sexes. 


12 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


The Icteridze exhibit the greatest number of exceptions to the 
general rules of molting and are more complicated in their molts 
than any other family. In most families complicated molting is 
the exception, in the Icteride it is the rule. 


ORDER OF MOLT. 


The molt is occasioned by the growth of new feathers from the 
old papillze, each new feather forcing out the old one onits tip. The 
point of attachment, however, is so brittle that the old feather is 
almost immediately broken off, but in young birds molting from the 
first plumage into their winter plumage, the old feathers are not 
infrequently found still attached to the tips of the new ones. A young 
Meadow Lark, Sturnella magna, in my collection shows this very 
nicely, and Mr. William Palmer’ mentions a young Hooded Warbler, 
Sylvania mitrata, in which the down of the nestling was to be seen 
at the tip of the first-plumage feather while it was in turn attached 
to the new feather of the winter plumage (PI. IV, figs. 5, 6). 

The feathers are, of course, not all shed at once, but the new 
feathers on certain parts of the body have nearly completed their 
growth before those on the other parts make their appearance. 

The first body-feathers to appear, in our passerine birds at least, 
are those of the abdominal tracts, forming a conspicuous V-shaped 
patch against the old plumage of the rest of the lower surface. 
Almost coincident with these appear the feathers of the inter- 
scapulary region and shortly afterward those of the throat and 
crown ; there is, however, a good deal of variation in the order of 
appearance of the other body feathers (in fact, of all, after the 
development of the abdominal tracts) in different species and also, 
I think, a good deal of individual variation. This will be seen in the 
table on page 115. 

In the molting of the wings, the feathers are shed one or two at a 
time, and symmetrically from the two wings. The first of the quill 
feathers to molt are the two innermost primaries which are probably 
shed at almost the same time, as they are at nearly all stages of about 
the same size (Pl. IV, figs. 1,2 and 3). Following these the prim- 
aries are shed at short intervals, one at a time, finishing with the 
outermost. The only exceptions that I have noticed to this order 
are in the Belted Kingfisher, Ceryle aleyon, and the Snow Bunting, 
Plectrophenax nivalis. 


*The Auk, 1894, p. 287. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 113 


The Kingfisher is strikingly different from any other bird exam- 
ined, in that the first wing feather molted is the fourth primary 
followed successively by the third, second and first (PI. V, fig. 3). 
Three specimens taken at Sicamous, British Columbia, July 18, 1892, 
show precisely the same order of molt and are in almost the same 
stage. How the molt proceeds after the first primary is shed, I am 
unable to say, though the fifth is probably the next to be renewed, 
followed by the others in regular order inward. 

One male Piranga erythromelas shows the 7th and 8th primaries 
molted first, followed by the 6th; while the 9th was shed simultane- 
ously with the 5th. This, however, seems to have been an individ- 
ual exception. 

In the Snow Buntings two molting females (Disko, Greenland, 
Aug. 11th) show that the innermost primary is lost first, followed 
by the next four almost simultaneously and then the othersin rapid 
succession. The loss of all these feathers occurs so nearly at the 
same time, that all but two of the old primaries are shed before any 
of the new ones have grown as long as the secondaries (Pl. V, fig. 4). 

The first secondary feather to be molted is the outermost, followed 
by the others in regular order. The secondaries, however, do not 
begin to molt until the primaries have nearly all been renewed, the 
first new secondary appearing simultaneously with the 4th or 5th 
primary—i. e. when only three or four of the old primaries remain 
ePIC Vs figs 5): 

The first tertial generally appears a little before the first secondary. 

The primaries and secondaries seem to be the most persistent of 
the bird’s feathers, and when they are shed, there is always, so far 
as I have been able to ascertain, a complete molt. 

The tertials on the other hand are frequently renewed independ- 
ently of the other wing feathers during the spring, when there is a 
partial molt in some species. 

As regards the molt of the tail, it has generally been stated that 
the feathers are shed symmetrically and successively a pair at a time 
while this may be true it is nevertheless a fact that in many, prob- 
ably most, of our smaller land birds, the molts of the successive pairs 
occur in such rapid succession that the bird is for a brief time prac- 
tically tail-less, and the half grown feathers appear to be all of nearly 
the same size as in the case of the first tail of the nestling, when 
partly grown. In other words the first pair of new tail-feathers does 
not reach a functional length before the last pair of old feathers is 
shed. 


114 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1896. 


In cases where there is an appreciable difference in the time of 
shedding the different pairs of tail-feathers, it is the general rule 
that the outermost pair is the last to be shed, and birds are not 
infrequently found with the new central pair of tail-feathers half- 
grown, while the old outermost pair is still retained (PI. V, fig. 2). 
The swallows are especially good examples of this, as the molt of 
the tail in this group seems to be very gradual (Pl. IV, fig. 4). 

In Quiscalus and some other birds the central pair is the last to 
be molted, all the others having nearly completed their growth 
before the old middle feathers are shed. 

In the Woodpeckers the molt begins with the pair next to the 
middle® and extends outward while the central pair is the last to 
be shed (PI. V, fig. 1). 

In this family the tail has a particular function,—i. e. in climb- 
ing; hence the slow molt, as the birds would be at a great disadvan- 
tage if the whole tail was lost at once. The central pair of feathers 
are of particular importance, and the old ones are, therefore, 
retained until the new quills of the next pair have become suffi- 
ciently developed to temporarily take their place during their own 
renewal, 

The tail-feathers generally correspond with the primaries and 
secondaries in the number of molts which they undergo during the 
year, but in some cases where there is a spring molt of the body 
feathers, together with the tertials, there is also a complete molt of 
the tail, while the primaries and secondaries are not renewed. This 
takes place—in certain individuals at least—in the Sharp-tailed 
Finch, Ammodramus caudacutus. 

Another peculiarity of the tail-feathers is their renewal at times 
other than those of regular molt, when they have been lost through 
accident. This does not occur in the wing feathers so far as ] am 
aware. Perhaps owing to the fact that the wing feathers are so 
much more firmly rooted than any of the other feathers, they are 
rarely if ever lost through accident, and hence the necessity for 
renewal does not arise; while the tail-feathers on other hand are 
the most frequently lost of any of the feathers, for, owing to their 
position, they are often caught and pulled out by beasts or birds 
of prey. 

Having considered the order of the molt in the body-feathers, wing 
and tail separately, it remains to consider the relative time of molt 


’In one specimen of Dryobates pubescens examined, this pair and the next 
outer pair were shed simultaneously. 


age 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 115 


in the three. So far as I can judge from the material that I have, 
the first two or three primaries are generally shed before the feathers 
of the abdominal tracts are expanded and the outermost primary 
is lost at about the time that the body-plumage is completely renewed, 
while the tail in the majority of species is shed just previous to 
this—7. e. when one or two of the old primaries still remain. 

A knowledge of these relations is very valuable in determining 
whether early fall specimens are adults or birds of the year. In the 
former the outer primary will be found not quite completely grown, 
or at least with remains of the embryonic sheath at its base, while in 
the birds of the year no trace of recent growth or immaturity will 
be found in the wing or tail feathers, except in a few species which 
molt the remiges and rectrices of the first plumage in the fall.* 

As regards species in which the molt of the tail occurs gradually the 
first tail feathers are shed about the same time as the sixth primary, 
while the last are shed simultaneously with the last or next to last 
primary. 

In the Tyrannide, the body feathers begin to molt sometimes 
before the first flight feather is shed, and in young Sphyrapicus 
much of the first plumage is retained till long after the flight feath- 
ers have been renewed. 

The following tables show the relative molting of the feathers in 
some of the specimens examined, and referred to above :— 


I, RELATIVE MOLT OF BODY PLUMAGE. 


| New Plumage 


anraasts Interscapulum. Top of Head. Throat. 


Piranga Sl aa | 
just appearing. | just appearing.| half renewed. | just sprouting. 


.. nearly complete. complete. half renewed. | no molt. 


dees complete. sprouting. just appearing. | just appearing. 


nearly complete.| just appearing. no molt. no molt. 
} | 


eiebopienar nivalis, 
2G ORT As INS: . essence complete. half renewed. just appearing. | just appearing. 
Dolichonyx ee eNeTuS, | 


32,783, A. M. N. H..... complete. | complete. complete. center of abdo- 
men not molted. 


NUMBER AND TIME OF MOLTS. 


When the young bird emerges from the egg, it is enveloped in a 
more or less complete covering of down; in ptilopzedic birds the cover- 


* In any case, a specimen showing molt or evidence of recent molt in the 
body-feathers, while the rectrices and remiges present no signs of molt, may 
be regarded with certainty as a bird of the year. 


116 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


IL. SHOWING RELATIVE MOLT OF RECTRICES. 


é A a 
Adults in Annual Molt. eke ee) ae: | 
Dryobates villosus, 26,644, A. N.S......sccccsccsssecceereene | Old. : Old. | Old. | ——— 
. Dryobates pubescens, 30, 750, ae ee Seen | Old. | 2.5 | 2.5 | Old. | Old. a 
Dryobates villosus, 26,646, A. N. S.....sse.s0- | Old. | 2.0 | 2.0 | Old. | Old. | F.G. 
Colaptes auratus, 26, 694, A. WY ¥.G.| F.G.) 15 15 | FG: 
Colaptes auratus, 26,693, A. a | F.G.|F.G. | F.G. 2 1/E-G: 
Dryobates pubescens, 26,651, A. F.G.| F.G. | ¥F.G.| F. G.| F.G. 
| | | 
Tachycineta bicolor, 28,595, A. N. S........cccescscsesseenes |}_ «7 | Old. Old. | Old. | Old. | Old. 
Tachycineta bicolor, 1,660, W.S E.G.) .3.) 133 | Old) Old iaide 
Tachycineta bicolor, 1,921, W.S | F.G. ¥F.G. F.G.|F.G. 2 | £0 
] | 
Cyanocitta stelleri, 30,923, A. N. S..sccssssssssssssesseesnse | 3.2 | 3.5 | Old. | Old. | Old. | Old. 
Spizella pusilla, 1,170, W. S............ 2 th Ail gh cael) | 8 1.5 1.7 | Old. 
Plectrophenax nivalis, 26,987, A. N. S.........02+sccssssss 2.0 | 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.5 
Passerina cyanea, 28,516, A. N.S °........2..-----2-ssssessers 1.5 |} 15 1.5 1.5 1.5 pb 
Myiarchus cinerascens, 29,456, A. N.S.........s0ree-.-000- TG). 3 5 | 10 | 15 | 22 
banins lodovicianus) 1,429) Wi. .csc.0...0seeecvevneoessncenee F.G.| 5 By fo | Bikes 2.2 2.5 
Seiurus aurocapillus, 1,138, Me Sscckcoe eet a ae ee A a 5 
Icterus galbula, 28,096, A. Pantesns soeseircora eerie BAG. | PoG, | POG-4 0 of 2 6 
Melospiza fasciata, 1,667, W. 3. Soe Be stds sas euneteeopesseiee ees ¥.G.|F.G.| PG; |/E. Gi Ge 2 
Ammodramus caudacutus, S155; DWV o wisseee ede teseee esate | F.G. | FG. LF, GG. E.G. 1 Gee 
{ / / 
Quiscalus quiscula, 28,117, A. N.S...-sssssscsssecssessseeee old. | 36 | 20 | 19 | 12 | 10 


The four divisions represent four styles of molting. 


Numerals denote the amount in inches that the new feathers lack of their full wth. 
“«h. G.”’ denotes ‘‘ Full Grown.’ Dashes show that the old feather has been shed but the 
new one has not yet appeared. 


Til, SHOWING RELATIVE MOLT OF WING FEATHERS. 


Last ‘ i Molt in Molt in 
Primary = age 2 = ni Greater Lesser 
Shed. | Secondaries. | Tertials. Coverts. Coverts. 
Molothrus ater, 28,028, 
ING INI TS ky Sate aces eanaecence 6 none. | none. complete. | nearly comp. 
Agelaius Oar | 
MD O a Wictectessrrenecensss 6 none. none. | complete. just begun. 
Dalishonse. RORY AAN OE, le oe } 
28,000, A. N.S........ 5 none. half grown. half grown. none. 
Piranga erythro, | } 
L908" WSs aks. ceaoes 5 | none. mid.shed. none. just begun. 
Colaptes Mapes | 
WW tiGisance-trecectseneatrecness 5 first 44 gr. \4 grown. | complete. complete. 
Quibcatas quiscula, 1,900, | 
Wiis hectcscenenced e 5 first sprouted. sprouted. complete. | nearly comp. 
uiseains quiscula, 4 Bal, | 
MES oS eee 4 first % gr. sprouted. complete. | nearly comp. 
Sturnella magna, 1,191, | 
Winns. 4 none. ‘innerspr’t’'d) complete. nearly comp. 
Chaetura: pelagica, re 521, | 
Waits wcuscueccases. cates 4 \% gr. sprouted. partly molted. partly molted. 
Plectrophenax _ nivalis, 
26;987, A. AN; scape ezxses 3 none. complete. complete. partly molted. 
Dolichonyx EB. | 
32,783, A. M. N. H., fF. 2 1st and 6th. | complete. complete. complete. 
Melospiza fasciata, 1,667, 
oe aban tatee uammeneee it nearly comp. | complete. complete. complete. 
fence bicolor, 
WO2D SWS. cea ceavcstees 1 nearly comp. | complete. complete. complete. 


* Molt from first plumage. + Spring molt. 
All others are adults in annual molt. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 117 


ing is complete, while in psilopdic birds it is but very slightly 
developed. In precocial species the downy dress is retained for a 
considerable time before the first feathers appear, but in altricial 
birds it is soon replaced by what is known as the “ first plumage.” 
The remiges and rectrices of the first plumage are usually the same 
as those of the adult, but the body feathers, while of the ordinary 
structure, are much more plumulaceous than the covering of the 
adult. 

This first plumage is retained for some time (three or four 
months) in some species, but in others it is very soon replaced by a 
more permanent winter plumage in which all the feathers are of the 
same structure as those of the adult. The entire body plumage is 
molted at this time as well as most of the wing coverts; but the 
rectrices, remiges and the primary coverts are, in the great majority 
of our smaller land birds, retained until the next annual molt. 

The species in which a// the first plumage feathers are molted are 
the following: Ofocoris alpestris, Cardinalis cardinalis, Agelaius 
pheniceus, Quiscalus quiscula, Molothrus ater, Sturnella magna, Scole- 
cophagus carolinus, Tachycineta bicolor and all the Woodpeckers. 
Of Ceryle, Trochilus, Chetura and a few Oscines I have been unable 
to examine sufficient specimens to speak with certainty on this point. 

In early spring, probably about the time of revival of sexual 
activity and immediately preceding the vernal migration, there is in 
the vast majority of birds a more or less complete molt. Some- 
times, as in the case of the Bobolink, the change is absolutely com- 
plete, but as a rule the remiges and rectrices are not renewed, 
while in other species the molt may only amount to the acquisition 
of a few new feathers on the throat or sides of the head. The 
tertials are often renewed at this time and seem to correspond more 
with the body feathers than with those of the wing as regards their 
molting. It is at this season that many birds acquire marks of 
maturity which are lacking during the first winter of their life, as for 
instance, the yellow superciliary and loral stripes of certain finches, 
while markings characteristic of the breeding season as opposed to 
the winter, also appear at the time of spring molt. 

In studying the species of our smaller land birds which molt in 
the spring it will be noticed that of necessity, species which differ 
radically in their spring and fall plumage, have the most complete 
spring molt; while, asa rule, in those in which the plumage is nearly 
the same throughout the year, the spring molt is least marked. The 


118 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Savanna Sparrow and Sharp-tailed Finch are interesting exceptions 
to the latter statement. 

The annual molt which occurs at the close of the breeding season, 
in late summer or early fall, is common to all birds, and is genérally 
coincident with the molt of the first plumage of the young birds of 
the first broods, varying, however, in this respect in different species. 
The annual molt is always complete, and when the new feathers 
are assumed, the plumage is richer in color and fuller than at any 
other time. In the breeding plumage, the colors may be in stronger 
contrast, but this is generally due to the wearing away of the blend- 
ing colors of the tips of the feathers’ which necessarily makes the 
plumage rougher. 


CHANGE OF COLOR BY ABRASION. 


During the time intervening between two molts, the feathers 
undergo a certain amount of abrasion. In such birds, specimens taken 
just before the annual molt, present a very dilapidated appearance, 
and the abrasion, combined with bleaching, has generally altered the 
appearance of the plumage very materially from that of the preced- 
ing fall. 

While this effect of abrasion is seen in the plumage of all birds 
just before the annual molt, the feathers of some are so constructed 
as to render possible a complete change in the color of the exposed 
plumage by abrasion, long before the time when the effects of the 
general wear and tear above described are apparent. These feathers 
have their terminal portion differently colored from the basal, so that 
when the plumage is in its normal “shingled” position, only the 
terminal part of each feather is exposed, and the general color of 
the plumage is the same as this portion of the feather. By the loss 
of this terminal portion, the differently colored base of the feather 
comes into view and the general color of the plumage is thus com- 
pletely changed (PI. IV, fig. 7). This result is attained by general 
wear and tear and also, doubtless, by the agency of the bird itself in 
preening its feathers. 

The differently colored tips to these feathers wear off very 
rapidly, and generally disappear entirely before any perceptible 
wear is noticeable on other parts of the plumage which are uniform 
in color. This would indicate that the terminal portions of these 
feathers are more brittle than the basal part, especially as the breadth 


® Except when a complete spring molt occurs. 


et eS « a= = 


NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 119 


1896.] 


of the terminal portion varies on different feathers, while the abra- 
sion always takes place exactly to the line of demarcation of the 
colors. 

In the body feathers, the terminal part is less perfectly pennaceous 
in structure than the base, and many of the barbs are entirely free 
at their tips, which naturally makes them more liable to rapid 
abrasion down to the point where the strongly pennaceous structure 
This is particularly well seen in the Snow Bunting. A 


} 


begins.° 


Wi) 
\W/ ,  N 
\ \ YY \\y) 


7; WY, WiGZ 
A/a Y WG 


l \Y 1, \ 
—NIYAN 
KS NY; Jy Y \\ 
‘>. VAENG 
ZieN GEN . 
LaN Fae’N GoaN: 
A soeeNy Zon Been 
ZEN EEN ZEEN 
ZEN ES ZeN 
BAN EEN ZEN 
ON ZaS! ZEON 
ZEN BN ZEN 
WN ZN. 


o 


NY 
anne 
LLL 
\\ 
WN 
Uff 


LA 


GY, 
NV 
y 
\ 
OS, 


Fig. 2. Same, further enlarged, with 
the barbs undisturbed showing the in- 
terlocking of the barbules in the black 
area. Somewhat diagrammatic, after 
photograph by Dr. Brown. 


Fig. 1. Tips of several barbs from 
feather of Snow Bunting showing the 
difference in structure between the 
light and dark portions (greatly en- 
larged ) Photograph by Dr. A. P. 
Brown. 


microscopical examination of these feathers, conducted at my request 
by my friend Dr. A. P. Brown, shows further that the hooklets on 
these terminal parts are fewer in number and less perfectly de- 
veloped, while the basal portion of the feather where the dark 
pigment begins is thicker and probably tougher in structure, the 
barbules and hooklets being here well developed (Fig. 1 and 2). 


6 A paper by Mr. Frank M. Chapman has appeared since the above was written 
‘*On the Changes of Plumage in the Snowflake, Plectrophenax nivalis,” Bull. 
Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist , VIII, pp.9-12. In this he reaches exactly the same 
conclusions as are here set forth by the writer and Dr. Brown, and the fact 
that we were working entirely independently gives additional interest to the 


statements. 


120 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Certain wing feathers show a still more interesting phase of abra- 
sion. In the Rose-breasted Grosbeak, as is well known, secondaries 
and tertials in autumn and winter are marked on their edges with 
spots of white (Plate V, figs. 7, 8), while in the Meadow Lark and 
Curlews at the same season, many of the feathers have regular tooth- 
like indentations of lighter color along the sides (Plate IV, figs. 8,9). 
By the time the breeding season has arrived these light-colored 
areas have been completely lost, while the dark parts remain intact, 
the line of demarcation having been followed as closely as if cut by a 
pair of scissors, except that some curved lines become straight owing 
to the whole barb breaking off beyond the light colored area (Plate 
IV, fig. 9). In these feathers, both portions are equally pennaceous, 
and do not exhibit any difference in structure, so that we must regard 
the light portions as peculiarly brittle. It is a noticeable fact 
that in all the birds that have been examined, the black feathers 
or black parts of a feather seem less subject to abrasion than those 
of any other color. 

In most cases where marked abrasion takes place, the lighter tips 
serve to produce the blended appearance characteristic of the winter 
plumage of all birds, while their loss brings out the strong contrast 
of colors characteristic of the breeding season, and produced in 
other species by actual molt. 

The case of the Bobolink is of particular interest in this con- 
nection, differing from that of any other species, unless it be some 
individuals of the Rose-breasted Grosbeak. It has a complete 
spring molt, but instead of assuming the breeding plumage at this 
time, as in the case of most birds which molt in the spring, it assumes 
a dress almost as dull and blended as its winter attire, but which is 
transformed to the breeding plumage by the abrasion of the long 
buff tips which adorn all the feathers.’ 

The utility of such a process is difficult to see. The long tips are 
“ acquired to be lost” as it were; they begin to break off immediately 
and within two months have disappeared. 


SEASONAL PLUMAGES. 


The number of recognizable plumages, which a bird may assume, 
is obviously dependent upon the length of time that is required for 
it to acquire the mature dress. Thesimplest case is where this is 
accomplished when the first-plumage is molted or at the end of the 


7See Chapman, Auk, 1890, p. 120. 


ee Ee "> s 


ae eae aes 


eS 


DS eee ORE 


" 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 121 


summer in which the bird is hatched. In such a species then, there 
are only three plumages: 1. First Plumage. 2. Winter Plumage. 
3. Nuptial Plumage ;—the latter being acquired in early spring, 
either by actual molt orabrasion. Sometimes it is so like the winter 
plumage that they can scarcely be distinguished, but this is the 
exception, for even when no molt takes place, the abrasion gives 
such a different appearance to the plumage by wearing off the 
blending shades that the spring and fall birds can easily be separ- 
ated. 

In other species the winter plumage of the young bird is not 
absolutely like that of the adult, every shade of difference existing 
from those that are scarcely separable to those that are radically 
different. 

In such cases there are, of course, four or five recognizable plum- 
ages: 1. First Plumage. 2. Plumage of First Winter. 3. Plum- 
age of First Nuptial season. 4. Adult Winter Plumage. 5. Adult 
Nuptial Plumage. In most species the Adult Nuptial Plumage is 
assumed at the first spring molt, in which case there will be only four 
distinct plumages. Sometimes the number of plumagesis still further 
increased by the fact that the bird does not acquire the complete 
adult dress for three or four years. The changes, however, do not 
progress as regularly in these instances after the first year, a greater 
or less amount of the adult plumage being assumed at each molt 
by different individuals; so that a large series instead of being 
divisable into several lots, each characterized by distinctive marks, 
represents on the contrary a complete gradation from the bird of the 
year to the adult. Such instances have been made to serve as 
examples of the alleged change of plumage by direct change in the 
coloration of the feathers. 

Another point bearing upon the plumages of species that require 
several years to acquire the mature dress, is the question whether 
there are not some individuals which never do acquire this plumage. 
The fact of the remarkably small proportion of birds in fully adult 
plumage in such species as the Purple Finch, Pine Grosbeak, White-’ 
throated Sparrow, etc., lends weight to such a theory, although its 
actual demonstration is, perhaps, impossible. 

Then again, there are occasional peculiar plumages, which, though 
they may be abnormal, are nevertheless by no means unique, such 
as the bright orange plumage of the male Scarlet Tanager, the 
Black-headed plumage of the female Rose-breasted Grosbeak, and 


9 


122 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


the occasional extremely brilliant plumage of the male of the same 
species, etc. The two latter instances may be considered as: 1. Partial 
adoption of the characters of male plumage by the female; and 2. 
Extreme development of color in the male probably due to excessive 
vitality. 

Another complicated series of plumages pointed out by Mr. F. M. 
Chapman’ exists in the case of the Bobolink. In these birds there 
are four distinct plumages: 1. First Plumage. 2. Winter Plumage. 
3. Early Spring Plumage. 4. Nuptial Plumage.’ This early spring 
plumage is acquired by direct molt, and passes into the Nuptial 
Plumage by an extensive abrasion of the differently colored tips. 


DIRECT CHANGE OF COLOR. IN FEATHERS. 


There have always been, and are to-day, ornithologists who believe 
thoroughly that feathers actually change their color, and that the 
change from the winter plumage to the nuptial dress in some species is 
accomplished solely in this manner without either molt or abrasion. 

Schlegel, one of the greatest exponents of this theory, considered 
the phenomenon as nearly universal,and Gitke, another of its staunch 
supporters, seems to be of much thesame mind. Other writers while 
supporting it, have regarded it as of much less general application 
and some consider it of very rare occurrence. 

If such a change actually does take place, it would seem strange 
if it should not play a very important part in plumage-changes, 
and, if we admit that it does occur in any species, we may as well 
grant its possibility in a great number. 

The importance of the question warrants a very careful considera- 
tion, and, in order not to be misunderstood, I may state at the out- 
set that in spite of the instances that have been cited to illustrate 
this phenomenon, I have not yet found a single case that cannot be 
otherwise accounted for, and, cannot, therefore, admit that we have 
any proof of an actual change of color in a feather apart from what 
may be produced from abrasion or bleaching. 

In most instances which have been cited in support of this theory, 
the writers have, it seems to me, fallen into the same error—i. e., 
they have taken a series of specimens, showing all sorts of mottled 
intergrades from one plumage to another, as indicating that each 


8 Auk, 1890, p. 120. 

®Tf we consider the birds of the year as recognizably distinct from the fall 
adults we must regard “2” as First Winter Plumage and add “5”. Adult 
Winter Plumage. 


s 
g 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 123 


individual bird passed through all those gradations; or they have 
taken a series of feathers from different individuals or different parts 
of the same individual, which show regular gradations from one style 
of coloration to another, as proof that each feather passes through 
all those gradations. 

As a matter of fact, these mottled plumages are permanent for the 
time being, and at each regular molt a greater proportion of the 
adult plumage is assumed. Scarcely any two individuals, however, 
correspond exactly in the amount of change that is effected at a given 
molt ;” hence a series of breeding birds taken during the late spring 
or early summer, representing individuals of different age, will often 
show a nearly complete series of intergrades between the two styles 
of plumage, and there will, of course, be no signs of a molt. 

A study of several of the more recent examples that have been 
brought forward to illustrate the actual change of color in feathers, 
will be of interest in this connection. 

Dr. R. Bowdler Sharpe, in the Catalogue of Birds in the British 
Museum, seems to regard this alleged phenomenon as of rather 
common occurrence, and in some instances goes into much detail 
with regard to the subject. This is especially the case in treat- 
ing of Motacilla lugens," in which he claims, not only a change 
from gray to black in the plumage of the back, but also a remark- 
able change in the color of the primaries and secondaries from 
brownish to pure white, the adult plumage being assumed according 
to Dr. Sharpe’s theory, in the first spring. 

With the same material examined by Dr. Sharpe, and a little 
more showing the molt in progress, Dr. Stejneger”’ shows conclusively 
that this species requires several years to acquire the fully adult plum- 
age, and that the changes in the color of the wing feathers is effected 
by actual molt and not by a change in the color of each individual 
feather. This shows conclusively the importance of having spec- 
imens in the molt for examination and comparison, and what a 
different aspect they may put upon the case. 

While combating the theory of direct color change in Motacilla 


10Tt is not intended that only a part of the plumage is changed; while this 
may be true of the spring molt, the annual molt is always characterized by a 
complete change, but, in the cases referred to, part of the new plumage comes 
in exactly like the old, while in other parts the color of the new plumage is 
different. 

Cat. Bds. Brit. Mus., X, 1885, p. 474. 


1% Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 1892, p. 307. 


124 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


lugens, Dr. Stejneger, nevertheless admits it in the case of Zantho- 
pygia narcissina,” on what seems to me insufficient evidence. 

This bird he believes changes without molt from an olive plumage 
to one of brilliant orange-yellow and black, while the wings and tail 
change from a dull brownish-gray to adeep black. I have examined 
the series which Dr. Stejneger had in hand, and I fail to see any- 
thing it in that cannot be found ina similar series of Icterus spurius 
or any other species that acquires its mature plumage by successive 
molts, the mottled plumage being permanent for the time. So far 
as 1 can see, an actual molt of black and yellow feathers might 
occur in early spring, or patches of them might be acquired at the 
annual molt at the end of summer. As there are no specimens in 
Dr. Stejneger’s series taken earlier than the 29th of April, and no 
fall adults, it is hardly justifiable to conclude that the change in 
color does not take place by a direct molt, either in early spring or 
in late summer. 

Furthermore, a specimen of the closely allied Z. tricolor,* which 
agrees very well with Dr. Stejneger’s most advanced “ transition ” 
specimens, haying a few patches of olive-brown feathers above and 
brown remiges, but otherwise adult, shows by the presence of 
numerous “ pin feathers” that the yellow breast, and the black on 
the head have just been assumed by direct molt. 

That this specimen is an early spring bird I assume from the fact 
that the remiges and rectrices show no signs of recent molt, which 
they would do if it was the annual molt that had just occurred. 

In regard to the remiges and rectrices of Zanthopygia, which Dr. 
Stejneger thinks change suddenly from dull brown to deep black, 
precisely parallel cases are to be found in Piranga erythromelas and 
Habia ludoviciana, and a series of either collected in May or June 
will show just the same variety of color in the quills as in the case 
of Zanthopygia. 

In these species the dull colored quills are retained during the 
first spring when the winter body plumage is molted for the adult 
dress, but at the annual molt the jet black quills are assumed and 
there is certainly no direct change in the color of the feathers. 

Giitke in his ‘‘ Heligoland,” gives us the most recent endorsement 
of the theory of actual color-change, a theory of which he was always 
a strong advocate. The instances which he treats in detail are 


“38 Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1892, p. 334. Ss 
14791, Coll. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 


* 


—_ 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 125 


almost entirely from the water birds, and we are not informed of the 
exact character of the material which came under his observation, 
all that we have is his interpretation of the facts. The species to 
which he calls especial attention are the Dunlin, Knot and Sander- 
ling. 

“In the Dunlin ” he says “ the change of colour develops itself 
in the following manner: In the ash-grey feathers of the back the 
shaft first becomes black ; this color spreads rapidly over the feath- 
ers, finally leaving only broad gray margins. The latter at first 
change to a dull rusty-grey, which, however, subsequently passes 
into a beautiful ferruginous color. At the same time the dul] ash- 
grey tips of the feathers pass into a whitish-grey, their margins being 
simultaneously rounded off to their former entirety.” 

How such a theory could have been advocated, after the examina- 
tion of a large series of specimens, I cannot understand, for a series of 
spring examples of the American Dunlin taken on the coast of New 
Jersey show the black and rusty feathers coming in abundantly and 
supplanting the worn gray feathers of the winter plumage.” 

In the Sanderling Gatke states there is a change from a uniform 
light gray to a deep black, and from a beautiful ferruginous color 
to a pure white. Here again spring specimens, from the coast of 
New Jersey and Florida, show the black and ferruginous plumage 
molting in and superceding the light gray plumage of winter. 

Gitke says (p. 163) that he “confines his description to what 
actually takes place, without embarking on any hypothetical con- 
jectures.” In this, however, I cannot agree with him; he does not 
claim to have seen the change in color actually take place in any 
individual feather, and to make the assertion that feathers change 
from one style of coloration to another when the only facts before 
him are that hé has feathers which represent those styles of coloration, 
one of which might change to the other, involves entirely too great 
an assumption. 

In his chapter on “ colour-change without moulting” Gitke sup- 
ports another theory, also originally advanced by Schlegel, but which 


1° Since the present paper was presented to the Academy for publication (see 
Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1896, p. 12), Mr. F. M. Chapman has published 
an article on “ The Changes of Plumage in the Dunlin and Sanderling” (Bull. 
Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., VIII, p. 1--8), in which he criticises Giitke’s state- 
ments on the same grounds as above. Here again, it is interesting to note 
that Mr. Chapman and the writer working independently, arrived at exactly 
the same conclusions. 


126 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Giitke formerly repudiated, and one which other advocates of the 
“ color-change ” theory have generally left untouched, 7. ¢., the theory 
that simultaneously with the change in color there occurs a rebuild- 
ing of the worn edges of the feathers which restores all the even 
contours and gives them the appearance of newly molted feathers. 

The acceptance of the theory of color-change without molt or 
abrasion, necessitates the adoption of some such theory as this, since 
the bright spring feathers are generally much more perfect in outline 
and often in striking contrast to the worn winter plumage from 
which Schlegel and Gatke would have us believe they have been 
produced. A slight knowlege of the development of feathers would 
tend to show the absurdity of such a theory as this, since the barbs 
of a feather do not continue to grow out from the shaft like the 
limbs of a tree, but are really formed from the tip inward toward 
the shaft. And once being unfolded from the sheath of the “ pin 
feather,” no further structural development can possibly take place 
in them. 

Too many writers have made arbitrary statements and then ques- 
tioned the accuracy of the investigations of histologists because they 
did not support them. In investigating these questions,we must 
accept at the outset the testimony of physiologists and histologists, 
that from the very nature of the structure of a feather it is incapable 
of renewing its barbs or barbules, and that after the contents of the 
quill have once dried up there is no connection between the vanes 
of the feather and the life fluids of the bird. This at once precludes 
the change of pigment, except by chemical action from without, and 
it is difficult to see how this should only exert an influence during 
a certain short period and have no effect at other times. 

It has been suggested that the presence of innumerable bubbles 
of air would tend to obscure the pigment in a feather and cause it 
to appear white, while the expulsion of air from a white feather 
might bring out a dark pigment previously concealed. In the case 
of the Motacilla, however, portions of the plumage turn white and 
other parts black at the same time and it is hard to understand how 
an external action could affect different feathers in an exactly 
opposite manner, and if there was proved to be exhalation from the 
body into the feather, the structure of the feather would preclude 
a passage of air into the barbs from the quill. It might further be 
added, that the yellow feathers of Zanthopygia, which should accord- 
ing to this theory contain a concealed dark pigment, have really no 


——— 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. IBLE 


pigment at all, as has been ascertained by careful microscopical 
examination by my friend Dr. Thos. H. Montgomery. 

The only instance where I know of an actual change of color in 
the plumage, except by fading, is in the case of certain delicate pink 
tints on the breasts of gulls, which disappear after death, but this 
color, I think, is probably due to a peculiar surface structure which 
is destroyed or altered by the drying out of the plumage, when 
removed from contact with water or the oil of the bird. 


PLUMAGES AND MOLTS OF THE SMALLER LAND BIRDS OF 
EASTERN NORTH AMERICA, 


Below I have recorded such facts as I have been able to gather 
regarding the molts and plumages of our smaller land birds. 

In a number of species I have been unable to ascertain the exact 
extent of the molts or their number from lack of necessary material, 
but have thought it best to give such facts as I have rather than to 
omit the species altogether. Some species on the other hand I have 
been able to treat with much detail, and have referred to them 
in describing others with a similar series of molts. I have as 
a rule omitted any detailed description of the plumages, as these can 
be obtained from any of the manuals or general works on North 
American birds, and have made my remarks as to colors, ete., 
mainly comparative. 

Where I had sufficient material to warrant it, I have given after 
each species a list of its plumages, considering three as the smallest 
number of plumages exhibited by any species. In many, however, 
the winter and nuptial dresses are practically alike except for a 
slight abrasion. 

Where male and female are not definitely indicated their molting 
is the same. , 


Family CUCULIDA. 
Coccyzus erythrophthalmus (Wilson). Black-billed Cuckoo. 
Coccyzus americanus (Linn.). Yellow-billed Cuckoo. 

I have been unable to examine any adult Cuckoos in the molt. 
The young molt the body plumage the last week in August. I am 
inclined to think that there is no spring molt in either species. 
Spring and fall specimens it is true are scarcely distinguishable, but 
I do not consider the unworn appearance of spring birds as a neces- 
sary proof that there has been a spring molt, as an examination of 


128 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


late summer specimens, just previous to the annual molt, shows 
that abrasion produces scarcely any effect in the Cuckoos. The 
sexes are alike in molts and practically so in plumages. 


Family ALCEDINIDZ. 
Ceryle alcyon (Linn.). Belted Kingfisher. 

The Kingfisher presents several peculiarities in its molting and I 
have not yet been enabled to examine sufficient material to satis- 
factorily describe it. So far as my material goes I think the rufous 
edgings to the breast band belong only to the bird of the year, as old 
birds in the annual molt have the new feathers of the breast band 
plain bluish slate or slightly edged with white. Whether the young 
molt the flight feathers with the rest of their first plumage I cannot 
say, but the wing feathers of the rufous tipped fall birds are very 
fresh and perfect, which may be considered evidence that they do. 

That there is a partial molt in early spring is evidenced by the 
fresh feathers in spring specimens which are in strong contrast to the 
older worn plumage, especially on the pectoral band. 

The wing feathers of some spring birds are unusually bright with 
the white tips scarcely worn and one example, (June, 1881, Palo 
Alto Co., Iowa, No. 26,640, A. N.S.), has the remiges all of this 
character, except the innermost pair of primaries and one of the 
secondaries on the left side, which are very much worn and abraded. 
This may indicate a spring molt of the wings in some individuals 
but in the majority it apparently does not occur. The peculiar 
order of molt in the primaries has already been noticed. 


Family PICIDZ. 


The North American Woodpeckers,” as already pointed out by 
Mr. Brewster, (Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, 1878, p. 179), always molt 
the wing and tail feathers along with the rest of the first plumage. 
The molt of this plumage, especially on the head and breast, goes on 
slowly and the birds start on their southward migration before it has 
been entirely renewed. In some individuals indeed the molting is 
not completed till well into the winter. 


Dryobates villosus (Linn.). Hairy Woodpecker. 

Male.—Three plumages, first, winter and nuptial. 

All plumages of this bird are very similar. There is no spring 
molt apparent in any specimens examined and but little effect is 


16 And probably all of the family. 


~~ 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 129 


produced by abrasion. Fema/e molts exactly as in the male, but its 
plumage lacks the red nuchal band. 


Dryobates pubescens (Linn.). Downy Woodpecker. 

Molts and plumages as in the last. Some spring specimens show 
a renewal of some of the breast feathers, but this may also take place 
in villosus. A fall specimen of each species exhibits a remarkably 
worn “ moth-eaten” appearance on the breast and flanks probably 
due to a peculiarity in the habits of these individuals. 

Sphyrapicus varius (Linn.). Yellow-bellied Sapsucker. 

Male.—Three plumages, first, winter and nuptial. 

The molt of the first plumage of the head and breast of this species 
continues all through the fall and winter and one taken April 8th, 
(Philadelphia, Pa.), shows a few new feathers appearing on the 
crown and throat. The winter plumage is, therefore, a mottled one. 
The breeding bird is hardly different from the full plumaged spring 
individual, as abrasion produces but little effect. Female molts 
like the male. Adult plumage differs in having the throat white, 
some individuals have the crown black, others red; whether this 
is due to age or purely individuality I cannot determine. 

Ceophleus pileatus (Linn.). Pileated Woodpecker. 

Three plumages, first, winter and nuptial. 

This species shows but little variation in plumage. There is no 
spring molt, but the nuptial dress is somewhat abraded and browner 
than the winter plumage. 

Melanerpes erythrocephalus (Linn.). Red-headed Woodpecker. 

Three plumages, first, winter and nuptial. 

The first plumage is retained for a long time; of four specimens 
showing the transition to the adult, only one has data, i, e., Haddon- 
field, N. J., Dec. 2, 1880, No. 1,405 Coll. W.Stone. This I think is 
probably the regular time for the molt, as specimens taken in Octo- 
ber show no signs of a change. The annual molt of the adult occurs 
during the middle of August as usual. Whether they have any 
spring molt I am unable to say positively. The plumage is but little 
affected by abrasion, so that the unworn appearance of spring birds 
is not necessarily an evidence of arecent molt. Very highly colored 
individuals have a red patch on the center of the abdomen. 
Melanerpes carolinus (Linn.). Red-bellied Woodpecker. 

Without a satisfactory series I am unable to describe the molt of 
this bird in detail, but it is apparently the same as in the preceding 
species. 


150 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Colaptes auratus (Linn.). Flicker. 

Three plumages, first, winter and nuptial. 

The molt from first plumage begins in July, a specimen taken 
August 9, 1893, in Montgomery Co., Pa. shows it about half com- 
pleted. The annual molt of the old birds occurs at the same time. 
I can find no trace of spring molt and abrasion produces little effect 
upon the plumage until after May. Mr. F. M. Chapman has 
described in detail the variation in the upper tail coverts in this 
genus.” 

Unfortunately I have been unable to examine a sufficient series 
of the Macrochires to give a complete account of the molting of any 
of the species, but have included such notes as I have. 


Family CAPRIMULGID. 
Antrostomus vociferus (Wils.). Whip-poor-will. 

As shown in Wilson’s figure this bird has an early downy plumage 
which almost immediately gives place to the usual “ first” plumage, 
a specimen taken at Haddonfield, N. J., July 2, 1893, (Coll. W. 
Stone), shows the transition. As regards the number and time of 
molts, a comparison of specimens would indicate that they are the 
same as the following. 

Chordeiles virginianus (Gmel.). Night Hawk. 

Mr. Wm. Brewster has described transition specimens from the 
early downy plumage to the first plumage and similar ones are in 
the collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia 
from Florida. A specimen taken Sept. 10, is in the first plumage, 
with many new feathers appearing on the breast and elsewhere, but 
no molt of the flight feathers; how complete this molt is I cannot 
not say. An adult specimen taken Sept. 1, shows much renewal 
of the body plumage, but no trace of it in the wings or tail. It 
would seem from this that the molt was quite late, and the loss of 
the flight feathers relatively later than in most birds. I have seen 
no trace of spring molt. 


Family MICROPODIDZ. 
Chetura pelagica (Linn.). Chimney Swift. 
Plumages, first, winter, nuptial. 
The annual molt in this species occurs from Aug. 1 to the first 
week of September and there seems to be no spring molt. Abrasion 


™ Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., Vol. III, p. 311. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. ee 


does not produce much effect upon the plumage but it loses the 
bright metallic luster which characterizes the fresh winter dress. 
I am inclined to think that the young do not renew the flight 
feathers at their first molt. 


Family TROCHILIDA. 
Trochilus colubris (Linn.). Ruby-throated Humming-bird. 

The only molting specimens of the Humming-bird that I have 
seen are spring birds taken at Labna, Yucatan, March 15th, in 
which the feathers on the throat are being renewed. Probably, the 
young males acquire the ruby throat at this time. 


Family TYRANNIDZ. 


The Tyrant Flycatchers show scarcely any seasonal variation, the 
first plumage being nearly the same as the adult, while the feathers 
are very little affected by abrasion. There are, therefore, as a rule 
only three plumages ; first, winter and nuptial. 

Tyrannus tyrannus (Linn.). Kingbird. 

Adult Kingbirds, taken August 21, show some molt on the 
body but no trace of renewal of the flight feathers, which would 
indicate that the annual molt is not completed until quite late. 
Some spring specimens show a few new feathers appearing on the 
breast and back, but whether there is a more extensive renewal of 
the plumage before the birds start north from their winter quarters 
I cannot say. Abrasion plays little or no part in changing the 
plumage of this species. The first plumage gives way to that of the 
adult late in August but no molt occurs in the wing and tail. 
Myiarchus crinitus (Linn.). Crested Flycatcher. 

The annual molt in this species begins early in August and is 
indicated in the wings before any new feathers appear on the body, 
differing in this respect from the last. There seems to be no spring 
molt. The young birds of the first brood begin to renew their body 
plumage early in August. All the plumages of this bird are very 
similar. 

Sayornis phebe (Lath.). Pewee. 

There is no spring molt in the Pewee but much abrasion takes 
place during winter so that the sulphur tint of the under surface, 
which is characteristic of fall specimens, is nearly lost by the breed- 
ing season. The molt of first plumage in the young is restricted to 
the body feathers. 


132 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Contopus virens (Linn.). Wood Pewee. 

I am unable to say, from an examination of spring specimens, how 
much of a molt this spécies undergoes before its northward migra- 
tion. Compared with specimens of the preceding they appear much 
less abraded, which indicates that a partial spring molt occurs. 
Contopus borealis (Swains.). Olive-sided Flycatcher. 

The above remarks apply equally well to this species. 

Empidonax. 

The species of this genus all resemble Contopus in the appearance 
of their seasonal plumages. The freshness of the spring feathers 
seems to indicate a partial spring molt at least, but without a satis- 
factory series of winter specimens; it is not possible to decide this 
point. The renewal of the body plumage at the annual molt, as 
in Tyrannus, begins before there is any molt of the flight feathers. 


Family ALAUDIDA. 
Otocoris alpestris (Linn.). Horned Lark. 

Plumages, first, winter, nuptial. 

There seems to be no spring molt in this species, but a great deal 
of abrasion takes place during winter and spring, by which the light 
edgings to the black crown and throat patch are lost and the other 
colors brought into stronger contrast. The young birds molt the 
flight feathers at the end of summer along with the rest of the first 
plumage. 


Family CORVIDA. 
Cyanocitta cristata (Linn.). Blue Jay. 

Plumages, three; first, winter and nuptial, though, except for the 
slight effects of abrasion, there is no difference between the last two. 

There is no spring molt and the young molt only the body plum- 
age at the end of their first summer. 

Perisoreus canadensis (Linn.). Canada Jay. 

Three plumages, first, winter and nuptial. 

I have not been able to examine a satisfactory series of this species 
but feel pretty sure that its molt is the same as in the preceding. 
Corvus corax principalis Ridgw. Raven. 

I have been unable to prove the number of molts in the raven by 
actual examination of molting specimens, but such material as I 
have before me indicates a precisely similar molt to that of the crow. 


ee — 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 133 


A molting specimen from Sitka, Alaska, June 15, 1895, shows that 
the central tail feathers are the first to be renewed, and are well 
grown before any of the others are dropped. 


Corvus ossifragus (Wils.). Fish Crow. 
Corvus americanus (Aud.). American Crow. 

Three plumages, first, winter, nuptial. 

The Crow has no spring molt so far as I can ascertain ; the annual 
molt is quite early, occurring in June or July, while the young birds 
molt the first body plumage about the end of the latter month. As 
in most black birds abrasion is but little marked. Many specimens, 
however, are dingy and have the tips of the wings bleached to a 
brown tint. The Fish Crow apparently molts exactly the same. 


Family ICTERIDA. 


The Icteride may be arranged in three groups as regards their 
molt. 

- Dolichonyx has two complete molts each year standing alone 
among our smaller land birds in this respect. The young probably 
has no molt of flight feathers at the close of its first summer. The 
two species of Jcterus have a more or less complete spring molt of 
the body feathers the first year at least, and the young do not molt 
the flight feathers in August. The rest of our species have no 
spring molt whatever, but the young have a complete molt at the 
end of the first summer, including both wing and tail. This occurs 
in only three other instances among our Passeres—i. ¢., in Cardi- 
nalis, Tachycineta and Otocoris. 

Dolichonyx oryzivorus (Linn.). Bobolink. 

Male.—Plumages, first, winter, early spring, nuptial. 

The molting of this species has been so carefully treated by Mr. 
F. M. Chapman who was the first to describe the early spring plum- 
age and the manner in which it is acquired, that it is hardly neces- 
sary to go into details in this connection. When the young bird 
has acquired the buff winter plumage it is practically undistinguish- 
able from the winter adult. 

Early in spring (March Ist,) this plumage is entirely molted 
even to the wings and tail and a new black plumage is assumed, 
all the feathers of which are so broadly edged with brownish buff 
that the general plumage appears to be of this shade. By the 
breeding season the aspect of the plumage is again changed, this 
time entirely by abrasion, and the bird appears in its black and 
white dress. 


154 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


The Bobolink furnishes the only instance known to me, among 
the species here treated, of a molt of the remiges in thespring. The 
molt of the Rose-breasted Grosbeak, with this exception, is almost 
parallel for the first season, though the buff edgings which are lost 
by abrasion are not quite so much developed. Afterward, how- 
ever, the Rose-breast has a winter plumage quite different from that 
of the first year while the Bobolink, year after year, returns to the 
buff “ Reed-bird” garb. The old winter birds are perhaps of a little 
different shade of buffand I think it is only the old birds that show 
the occasional black feathers in fall. 

Mr. Chapman’s specimen in the spring molt as well as specimens 
in the annual molt have been examined. I have been unable, how- 
ever, to ascertain whether the young bird molts the wing and tail 
feathers with the rest of the first plumage or not. 

Female.—Plumage always similar to winter dressof male. I have 
not been able to ascertain whether there is any spring molt or not, 
the breeding plumage, however, is much lighter than the winter 
dress owing to abrasion. A curious plumage is shown in aspecimen 
from Raleigh, N. C. May 2, 1893, No. 86, Coll. W. A. Shryock, in 
which there are many black feathers on the breast, belly and head, 
evidently an approach to the male pattern of coloration. 


Molothrus ater (Bodd.). Cowhbird. 


Male—Plumages ; first, winter and nuptial; the last two, how- 
ever, are scarcely distinguishable, owing to the very small effect pro- 
duced by abrasion in this species. 

There seems to be no spring molt whatever, and almost the only 
effect of the abrasion is to emphasize the line of demarcation 
between the brown head and the black back. The young molt the 
wing and tail at the end of summer with the rest of the plumage. 

Female—Molts as in the male. The adult plumage is entirely 
gray and the abrasion is very marked in spring, presenting a 
“clipped” appearance exactly as in Ammodramus maritimus. 

There is no change in the coloration of either sex of the Cowbird 
after the first winter dress has been assumed. 


Agelaius pheniceus (Linn.). Red-winged Blackbird. 


Male.—Five fairly marked plumages may be distinguished :— 
first, first winter, first nuptial, adult winter and adult nuptial, the 
last two, however, as in many other species, differ very slightly. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 135 


At the end of the first summer the entire plumage of the young 
bird is shed, including the wing and tail, and a black dress broadly 
edged with brown is then assumed.” This becomes almost entirely 
black by the breeding season through abrasion. Owing to the extent 
of the abrasion, however, the plumage presents a somewhat worn 
appearance and there is always more or less trace of the brown edg- 
ings present. The subsequent winter plumages show much less of 
the brown borders and eventually this dress is nearly pure black ; 
except, of course, the shoulders. This is well shown in a fall male 
of A. pheniceus sonoriensis in the U.S. Nat. Mus. Coll. Whether the 
brown edges are ever entirely lost at the second annual molt or whether 
birds in such plumage are always several years of age I cannot say, but 
incline to latter view. The less brown margins to the winter plum- 
age, the less abrasion takes place and the nuptial plumage appears 
relatively smoother. The depth of color of the red shoulder patch 
is not necessarily an index of the age, as some birds in the first year 
have deep red shoulders. 

Mr. Brewster describes (/. ¢.) an occasional, though not unique 
plumage, which has a “ crescentic patch of pale yellow tinged with 
rose-color upon the breast,” which he regards as an “ exceedingly 
high phase of ornamentation.” 

Females.—Vary considerably in the tints on the throat ; the buff- 
est ones I take to be birds in their first year and those with the 
pinkest throats are probably the oldest. The red on the shoulder 
of the females increases in proportion to that on the throat. The 
molts are exactly the same as in the male, and the abrasion in 
spring always well marked. 

Sturnella magna (Linn.). Meadow Lark. 

Male.—Plumages, first, winter and nuptial. 

The Meadow Lark, as in the preceding species, molts both wing 
and tail at the end of the first summer. There is no spring molt, 
the change to the breeding dress being produced entirely by abrasion. 
All the under surface is veiled in winter with long brownish or buff 
tips. The bright yellow and black tips are only brought out when 
these are lost. On the upper surface the abrasion affects the light 
margins to the body feathers and the light bands and indentations 
on the tertials, which become worn in a most remarkable manner 
(see Plate IV, figs. 8 and 9). There is some variation in the extent 


18First described by Mr. Wm. Brewster, Bull. Nutt. Orn. Club, 1878, p. 175. 


136 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


of the brown margins of the winter plumage, birds showing the least 
being probably the oldest. 

Female.—Like the male in molts and plumages. 

Icterus galbula (Linn.). Baltimore Oriole. 

The males of this species assume four distinct plumages. The 
first plumage is ashy on the back passing into dull orange on head 
and rump and whitish below, wings suffused with yellow-brown 
bordered with white and tail dull orange. The body feathers of 
this dress are soon shed and the plumage of the first winter assumed, 
generally by the middle of August. In this the back is dull orange, 
brightest on the head and rump and mottled with dark-brown on 
the interscapulum; below nearly uniform bright orange-yellow. 
These two plumages are remarkably similar, the latter being uni- 
formly brighter and richer and easily distinguished by the different 
structure of the feathers. 

In early spring there is a molt which as usual varies exceedingly 
in its extent in different individuals. Usually the entire black body 
plumage of the adult is assumed covering the back, entire head and 
throat, also the reddish-orange on the breast, sides of the abdomen 
and a certain amount on the rump. The middle of the abdomen 
and the greater part of the rump, however, retain the old yellowish 
winter plumage. There is great irregularity in the molt of the tail 
as well as the tertials and greater wing coverts. All but one of the 
specimens examined show some molt in these feathers, but in none 
is it complete. 

One has renewed all the tail but the four outer feathers of the left 
side, another has renewed only the middle pair and one other; and 
still another retains three old feathers on the right side. The spee- 
imen which shows the least molt in the first spring (No. 25,734, Coll. 
A. N.S. May 24, 1864, Republican Riv., Kas.), has only acquired 
part of the black head, the old yellow plumage remaining ina large 
nuchal patch, while below the reddish-orange feathers have appeared 
only on the breast. There has been no molt, whatever, in the wing 
or tail. 

The black interscapulary plumage, which is assumed by the 
Baltimore Oriole at the first spring molt, shows the same variation 
as exhibited in the Rose-breasted Grosbeak, i. e., in some individuals 
the feathers are uniform black while in others they are bordered 
with orange. At the annual molt in July the entire plumage is 
renewed and the perfect plumage is acquired. This is like the 


a 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 137 


previous dress, but the whole abdomen and rump and lesser wing 
coverts are bright reddish-orange, while the black is more intense. 
All the other wing feathers are jet black bordered with white; the 
two middle rectrices are black, the next pair largely black, the others 
orange with more or less black on the base. The interscapulary 
feathers are generally slightly tipped with orange. 

In the second spring there is no molt, unless there may be a renewal 
of some of the scattered feathers but the light tips of the interscapular 
feathers are entirely lost from abrasion and the white on the wings 
is greatly reduced and on the tertials entirely lost from the same 
cause, 

Icterus spurius (Linn.). Orchard Oriole. 

Notwithstanding the large amount of material that I have exam- 
ined, I have been unable to procure specimens which show conclu- 
sively the history of the molts of this bird. The large series, aggre- 
gating several hundred skins, contained in the collections of the A cad- 
emy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, National Museum, American 
Museum of Natural History and the private collection of Mr. Wil- 
liam Brewster, contains all together only four specimens in the molt, 
of which but two bear the date of capture. In view of this scarcity 
of molting birds, we are compelled to judge of the molts mainly from 
comparing specimens taken before and after the plumage has been 
renewed. 

Male.—The young birds change the first plumage for that of the 
first winter in July or August. This dress is as a rule scarcely differ- 
ent from the first plumage. Some few individuals, however, show a 
few black feathers on the throat. In February or March there is a 
molt of the feathers of the head and throat, and all the males that reach 
us from the south in the spring have a black throat, the extent and 
purity of the black varying in different individuals. I have 
no green males in the annual molt nor after the molt is completed. 
One specimen (No. 91,034, U.S. Nat. Mus. Coll.), taken in Nicaragua, 
Feb. 23, 1883, shows the throat and head to be molting. That this 
bird is not in its first spring molt is shown by the fact that some old 
throat feathers which have not yet been shed are black. The plum- 
age of the second spring is similar to that of the first, but the black 
throat is more complete and there are traces of chestnut on the breast. 
The tail is also clouded with black, but as the specimen just referred 
to is not molting the tail, I think that this change is effected at the 
preceding annual molt. It is probably at the next annual molt that 

10 


158 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


the chestnut and black plumage is acquired. It is impossible to tell 
from an examination of spring males in the green plumage, how 
many years they remain in this dress, as the individual variation in 
the amount of change effected at a given molt is so great, that there 
is a complete series of intergrades from one extreme to the other. 
Between the most advanced specimen and the adult chestnut plum- 
age, however, there is quite a gap, and I have never seen any spec- 
imens like those figured by Wilson and Audubon. 

The variation in the marking of spring birds is shown by the 
following table : 


Males, Ist. and 2nd.|_— Tail Tail Trace of Trace of 
Years. green. partly black.| chestnut black 
on rump. on head. 

Throat-patch incom- | 

plete (4) neseevisaasne 4 0 af 0 
Throat-patch com- 

plete, little or no. 

chestnut (14)....... 13 i: 1 4 
Considerable chest- 

nut on breast (12). 5 7 12 12 


The spring molt is generally confined to the head and throat but 
in some second year birds it is more extensive and in one, (122,073, 
U.S. Nat. Mus. Washington, D. C., May 2, 1887), the body molt 
must have been nearly complete, while the tertials and indeed the 
wing feathers show scarcely a trace of abrasion. Old chestnut 
colored birds have the plumage, especially above, edged with buff, 
which is lost by abrasion before the breeding season. 

Female.—Remains as the male in first winter. Spring specimens 
differ in showing much abrasion but there is little if any spring 
molt. 

Scolecophagus carolinus (Miill.). Rusty Blackbird. 

Male.—Plumages, first, winter and nuptial. 

Only one molt a year, the change from winter to nuptial dress is 
effected entirely through abrasion. 

Female—Molts as in the male. Adult plumage always gray 
instead of black. I have seen no molting birds of either sex, but Dr. 
J. A. Allen writes me that the young renew the flight feathers at 
their first molt, as in the allied genera. 


———————— LLL Cr Ul 


> iA 


~Pe 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 139 


Quiscalus quiscula (Linn.). Purple Grackle. 

Male.—Plumages, first, winter and nuptial. 

The young birds molt the wing and tail along with the first body 
plumage and assume the adult plumage in its entirety the first 
winter. There is no spring molt and very little effect is produced 
by abrasion, owing to the uniform color of the plumage, so that 
the nuptial plumage is scarcely distinguishable from that of winter. 

Female.—Molts as the male. Plumage always duller. 


Family FRINGILLIDA. 


A summary of the molting of the species of finches described 
below shows that thirteen species have no spring molt, while six 
species have a spring molt of the body feathers. In Spinus tristis, 
Passerina cyanea, Ammodramus sandwichensis savanna, A. princeps 
and A. caudacutus, this seems to occur regularly every year. In 
the first two a radical change of color is effected, in the last three the 
new plumage is the same as the old. 

In Habia ludoviciana the extent of the molt varies, probably 


_ decreasing in succeeding years. 


In four other species, Zonotrichia leucophrys, Z. albicollis, Spizella 
socialis and Melospiza georgiana, a partial spring molt occurs, less 
marked after the first year. 

Habia ludoviciana molts the tail the first spring, Ammodramus 
caudacutus molts it in many cases though probably not regularly. 

Cardinalis cardinalis molts both wing and tail with the first plum- 
age at the end of summer and Passerina cyanea and Ammodramus 
caudacutus molt the tail at this time. 


Carpodacus purpureus (Gmel.). Purple Finch. 

Male—Plumages, first, first winter, first nuptial, adult winter, 
adult nuptial. 

I have not been able to examine any molting specimens of Car- 
podacus, but a large series of winter and spring specimens shows 
that no spring molt occurs. The change to the pink plumage is 
evidently effected at an annual molt either the second year or still 
later. The birds retain the brown dress during the first breeding 
season at least. Fall specimens in brown plumage differ from spring 
examples in the loss of buff tints through abrasion, while pink birds 
lose the gray or brown edgings oi winter in the same way. The 
great predominence of brown birds makes it seem at least possible 
that some never acquire the pink plumage. 


140 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Female.—Retains the brown plumage permanently; there is no 
spring molt. 
Pinicola enucleator (Linn.). Pine Grosbeak. 

So far as I can judge from winter specimens the account of the 
Purple Finch applies equally well to this. 


Loxia curvirostra minor (Brehm). American Crossbill. 
Loxia leucoptera Gmel. White-winged Crossbill. 

The molting of the Crossbills is more complicated than would appear 
at first sight and there is probably great individual variation as 
to the time and extent of the change in coloration of the plum- 
age. Mr. W. E. D. Scott has shown that some males assume the 
red dress immediately upon losing the first plumage, while others are 
known to breed in the yellow or green dress. The tints are subject 
to great individual variation, as also the purity of the red plum- 
age, many specimens showing a greater or less mixture of green. 
Furthermore, the red plumage may be partly replaced by green at 
a subsequent molt, as one molting specimen has the throat quite red 
while a majority of the new throat feathers, just coming in are 
green, The annual molt of the Crossbill begins about August 1, 
(Somerset Co., Maine). There seems to be a slight spring molt, 
most pronounced on the throat and breast. 

Female.—Retains the green plumage at all seasons. 

Acanthis linaria (Linn.). Redpoll. 

While I have no molting specimens of the Redpoll for examina- 
tion, I think from a comparison of a large winter series, that the 
change of plumage is effected in the same way as in Carpodacus. 
The variation in the extent of the pink color on the breast of males 
is probably largely individual. 

It is generally stated that the crimson patch on the head is inten- 
sified by a “scaling off” of the surface of the feathers but I cannot 
furnish any evidence upon this point. 

Spinus tristis (Linn.). American Goldfinch. 

Male.—Three plumages are recognizable, first, winter and nup- 
tial. The birds of the year seem to have more brown on the edges 
of the wing feathers which in the older birds are nearly pure white, 
but I am not sure that this is constant. Annual molt occurs between 
the middle of September and the middle of October, and at about 
the same time the young bird renews its body feathers. There is a 
complete molt of the body feathers in spring from about the middle 


1896] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 141 


of April to the middle of May, but none of the wing feathers, not 
even the tertials, are renewed at this time. Throughout the winter 
and spring the white edgings to the tail and wing feathers are being 
lost by abrasion, so that in the summer breeding dress the wings are 
almost entirely black. The Goldfinch continues to have these two 
molts every year throughout its life, and the molting specimens pre- 
_ sent a very peculiar appearance in their mottled dress of brown and 
yellow. 

Female.—The female has exactly the same number of molts and 
plumages as the male. 

Spinus pinus (Wils.). Pine Siskin. 

Plumages, first, winter and breeding. 

So far as my material goes, there is indication of but one molt a 
year in this species, 2. ¢., the annual molt at the end of summer. 
Some abrasion takes place during the winter and spring, by 
which the buff edgings to the feathers are lost and the mark- 
ings are thus intensified in the breeding piumage and more 
strongly constrasted with the white of breast. The white edgings to 
the wings are also lost by abrasion. A male taken Jan. 28th, 
(Cape May, N. J.), has the feathers of the throat and breast very 
much suffused with brown, so that the dark stripes are almost 
obliterated. Whether this is a peculiarity due to age or purely 
individual I am unable to say. 

Plectrophenax nivalis (Linn.). Snow Bunting. 

Male.—Plumages, first, winter and nuptial. 

In the series which I have examined I have not detected any con- 
stant differences between the young of the year, and the adults. There 
seems to be no spring molt in the Snow Bunting, but the remarkable 
change from the winter to the nuptial dress is effected entirely by 
abrasion, which probably is more marked in this species than in any 
other. Furthermore, the abrasion is scarcely apparent until after 
the middle of February.” 

Female.—Molts as in the male. 

Poocetes gramineus (Gmel.). Vesper Sparrow. 

Plumages, first, winter and nuptial. 

Molting exactly asin Melospiza fasciata which it so closely resem- 
bles in plumage. Young of the year seem rather buffer than old 
birds. 


19 See Stone, Science, 1893, p. 52; Chapman, Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., 
1896, p. 9. 


142 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Ammodramus princeps (Mayn.). Ipswich Sparrow. 

Plumages, first, winter and nuptial. 

Molting exactly as in A. sandwichensis savanna. Specimens taken 
March 15th, Atlantic City, N. J. and March 29th, Cape Charles, 
Va., show the spring molt in progress. 

Ammodramus sandwichensis savanna (Wils,). Savanna Sparrow. 

Plumages, first, winter and nuptial. 

Another winter plumage occurs much browner than the usual one 
which may be characteristic of the birds of the year. A complete 
annual molt occurs at the end of the breeding season, and a more 
or less complete molt of the body feathers takes place in spring. 
Birds taken just before the spring molt show effects of abrasion, 
especially on the tertials and resemble July birds. After the 
molt new tertials have been acquired and a general renewal of 
the feathers of the breast, head and rump has taken place, so that 
the birds are in most respects indistinguishable from September 
specimens; the yellow stripe over the eye is also acquired at this 
molt. Whether this spring molt is universal with all the individuals 
or occurs every year, I cannot say with certainty. A series of speci- 
mens taken January 25-26 (Cape May, N. J)., shows a good deal 
of variation in the amount of abrasion. 

Ammodramus savannarum passerinus (Wils.). Grasshopper Sparrow. 

Plumages, first, winter and nuptial. 

After the annual molt the plumage of this species is subject to 
continued abrasion which materially alters the depth of colors by 
the following breeding season, the under surface becoming much 
lighter and losing much of the brown cast while the colors elsewhere 
are in sharper contrast. In such material as I have examined | can 
find no trace of a spring molt. The spotted first plumage is retained 
until about the middle of August. A specimen taken Aug. 10, in 
Chester Co., Pa., shows the beginning of the molt of the body feath- 
ers while another Aug. 26, from the same locality, shows no sign 
of molt, this, perhaps, belonging to a later brood. 

Ammodramus henslowii (Aud.). Henslow’s Sparrow. 

Such specimens of this species as I have been able to examine 
indicate molts and plumages exactly parallel with the last. 
Ammodramus caudacutus (Gmel.). Sharp-tailed Finch. 

Plumages, first, winter and nuptial. 

After the annual molt the Sharp-tailed Finch is subject to great 
abrasion of plumage, which by March presents almost as worn an 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 145 


appearance as characterizes most birds in July or August. In 
April occurs a complete molt of the body plumage, together with 
the tertials and sometimes the rectrices ; a specimen taken April 16 at 
Atlantic City, N. J., shows the new tail about half grown. After the 
completion of this spring molt the birds are indistinguishable, except 
upon close examination of the wing feathers, from October spec- 
imens. The feathers soon begin to show the effects of abrasion again 
and by August, just previous to the annual molt, the birds present 
about as dilapidated an appearance as can be found among any of 
our species. The wear and tear upon the plumage of this species is 
doubtless due to its habit of living entirely among the coarse grass 
and sedges of the salt marshes, which may also have something to do 
with the unusual extent of the spring molt. The young birds gen- 
erally, but, perhaps not always, renew the tail when the first body 
plumage is molted at the end of summer. The remiges are not 
renewed at this time. The series of specimens, upon which the study 
of this species was based, consisted of upward of one hundred skins, 
taken at Atlantic City, N. J., during every month of the year by 
Mr. I. Norris De Haven and myself. 

Ammodramus maritimus (Wils.). Seaside Finch. 

Plumages, first, winter and nuptial. 

In this species the spring plumage differs from the winter plum- 
age only by abrasion, there being but one molt a year. Not only 
are the blending olive and brown tints of the fresh fall dress quite 
worn away, but the whole plumage presents the appearance of havy- 
ing been trimmed with a pair of scissors. It seems strange that in 
this species there should be no spring molt whatever, while in its 
nearest relative, the Sharp-tailed Finch, it should be so extensive. 
Zonotrichia albicollis (Gmel.). White-throated Sparrow. 

Male.—F ive plumages may be distinguished, 7. e., first, first winter, 
first nuptial, adult winter, adult nuptial. The difference between 
second and third, and fourth and fifth is often very slight, espe- 
cially in the case of the latter two. After the change to the first 
winter plumage the bird has a fairly well marked white throat, 
but the black crown stripes are much mixed with brown and the 
central stripe is quite dull. In spring a partial molt occurs, prac- 
tically confined to the throat and head. At this time many black 
and pure white feathers appear in the crown, the yellow supercili- 
aries receive bright fresh feathers and more pure white feathers are 
acquired on the throat. The black stripes of the crown are, how- 


144 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


ever, still mixed with brown posteriorly, for the first season at least. 
Subsequently, whether at the following annual molt or later I cannot 
say, the plumage of the head becomes still brighter, with the crown 
stripes jet black reaching back on the neck while the white throat 
is sharply defined against dark gray cheeks and breast. I do not 
think there is any spring molt after the first year, but subse- 
quent increase in the brightness of the markings takes place at the 
annual molt. The bright markings when once attained are not lost 
again, as some of the handsomest specimens examined are fall birds, 
although it is possible that some birds never acquire the brightest 
markings to which I have referred. Mr. W. E. D. Scott states that 
some birds acquire the highly colored feathers immediately after 
shedding the first plumage, judging the age of fall birds by osteologi- 
cal characters. 

Female.— Apparently has no molt in spring, and though it attains 
the yellow eye-brow and partly black crown stripes, it does not 
approach the brilliancy of the old male. 

Zonotrichia leucophrys (Forst.). White-crowned Sparrow. 

Plumages, first, first winter, nuptial, adult winter. 

Besides the annual molt, a molt of the crown, tertials and many 
of the breast and intescapular feathers occurs in spring. ‘This is 
very marked in the first spring when the brown and buff crown is 
replaced by black and white. Whether it continues to the same 
extent in subsequent seasons I cannot say positively, though the 
appearance of spring specimens would indicate that some molt 
always occurred at this season. The full plumage once attained is 


not lost again, and spring and fall adults are hardly distinguish- 
able. 
Spizella monticola (Gmel.). Tree Sparrow. 

Plumages, first, winter and nuptial. 

There is only one molt a year, though a few odd feathers are often 
replaced during spring, probably when lost or damaged. Breeding 
specimens show great abrasion, which brings the colors into much 
stronger contrast, but this is not apparent until after April Ist, 
so that there is scarcely any variation in specimens taken within the 
winter habitat. 

Spizella socialis (Wils.). Chipping Sparrow. 

Plumages, first, winter and nuptial. 

When the young bird loses the spotted first plumage, at the end 
of summer, it acquires a winter plumage practically identical with 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 145 


that of the old birds except in the purity and extent of the chestnut 
crown. In spring the dusky feathers of the throat are replaced by 
pure white ones and those of the crown by new ones, which are 
richly colored and have no dark spots. Apparently the older birds 
do not molt at all in spring, the pure chestnut crown being gained 
entirely by abrasion of the dusky tips of the feathers. Adults vary, 


_ however, in the purity of the chestnut crown acquired at the annual 


molt, some of them showing much mottling of brown. In con- 
sequence of this a partial spring molt may be necessary in some 
individuals after the first season. Some change is effected in the 
other plumage during spring and winter by abrasion. 

Spizella pusilla (Wils.). Field Sparrow. 

Plumages, first, winter and nuptial. 

After the annual molt the winter plumage changes gradually by 
abrasion, and there is no spring molt except the occasional renewal 
of odd feathers. The contrast between October and August spec- 
imens is striking. The former have the back buff with reddish- 
brown centers and black shaft streaks, while the latter have reddish- 
brown backs with distinct black streaks. 

Junco hyemalis (Linn.). Snow Bird. 

Plumages, first, winter, nuptial. 

No spring molt is apparent in the Snow Bird. The brown tints 
of autumn disappear entirely through abrasion, but this is not 
marked until after May Ist. Birds of the year are probably always 
browner than old birds. 

Melospiza fasciata (Gmel.). Song Sparrow. 

Plumages, first, winter, nuptial. 

No spring molt occurs but abrasion is very marked, all the buff 
tints being lost in the spring bird, while the black streaks on the 
breast appear as if their ends had been cut off with a pair of scissors. 
Melospiza georgiana (Lath.). Swamp Sparrow. 

Male.—Plumages, first, winter, nuptial. 

The molt of this species appears to be precisely like that of Spizella 
socialis, which it so closely resembles in the pattern of its plumage. 
The chestnut crown is acquired in spring as well as a certain pro- 
portion of white throat feathers. The chestnut crown once acquired 
is not lost at the annual molt but some individuals do not seem to 
acquire it in its entirety, at least until the second year. No spring 
molt seems to occur after the full chestnut crown is attained. As 


146 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


in most Fringillidz, abrasion causes marked change in the general 
plumage during winter and spring. 

Female—Apparently like the male, though generally with the 
crown patch less pure. 

Passerella iliaca (Merr.). Fox Sparrow. 

Plumages, first, winter, nuptial. 

Apparently no spring molt occurs in this species apart from a 
slight renewal of the throat feathers in some examples. The rusty 
red tints are to a great extent lost, especially on the head and neck, 
by the breeding season, but the abrasion is scarcely noticeable up to 
the time the bird leaves its winter habitat, so that specimens taken 
there, from November to March, are hardly distinguishable. 

Pipilo erythrophthalmus (Linn.). Towhee. 

Male.—Plumages, first, winter, nuptial. 

There is apparently only one molt a year in the Towhee and, 
although the feathers are subject to abrasion during the winter 
and spring, scarcely any change is effected in the coloration owing 
to the fact that they are not parti-colored. The young birds 
assume the adult winter plumage about the end of August, when 
they present a very peculiar mottled appearance. The wing and 
tail as usual are not renewed at this time. 

Female-—Molts as in the male, the only difference in plumage 
being the substitution of brown for black in the adult. 


Cardinalis cardinalis (Linn.). Cardinal. 

Male.—Plumages, first, winter, nuptial. 

There is no spring molt; the winter plumage shows extensive 
gray margins to the feathers of the back which are lost by the nest- 
ing season through abrasion. In some specimens, evidently younger 
birds, these edgings are brownish rather than gray. Contrary to the 
rule which governs others of our Fringillids, the young Cardinal 
renews the rectrices and remiges at the end of the breeding season. A 
specimen obtained Sept. 18, 1881, at Haddonfield, N. J. shows the 
first plumage nearly lost. The primaries have all been renewed as 
far as the third, while the new tail, still showing the sheaths at base, 
is nearly full grown, except the middle pair of feathers, which are 
not quite two inches in length. The renewal of the flight feathers in 
the first autumn in this species is a matter of great interest (see p. 
i). 

Female—Molts as in, the male, a young female changing from 


the first to winter plumage (Tarpon Springs, Fla., Aug. 11, 1891), 


see 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 147 


shows the wings beginning to molt as described above in the case of 
the male. The adult plumages differ from those of the male in 
intensity of coloration, being generally gray and brown, though some 
Florida specimens are quite red. Much of the brown tint of the 
lower surface in winter is lost by abrasion. 


Habia ludoviciana (Linn.). Rose-breasted Grosbeak. 


The Rose-breasted Grosbeak exhibits probably the most compli- 
cated series of plumages of any of our smaller North American 
birds. Five regular plumages of the male and three of the female 
are recognizable, while the great range of individual peculiarity in 
the amount of change effected at a given molt produces many other 
variations. 

I have treated the plumages and molts of this species at much 
length and have referred to them in other parts of this paper. 
As some of my deductions may not meet with universal endorse- 
ment, it seems proper to state at the outset the nature of the material 
at my disposal while writing the paper. This is as follows: First 
plumage, 1; first plumage, molting, 2. Males in first winter, 12 ; 
in first spring, 10; in first annual molt, 2; in second winter, 5; in 
second spring molt, 2; in second spring, 12. Females in spring, 
8; annual molt,1; winter, 2. Besides this, I have examined the 
entire series in the U. S. National Museum, the numbers of which I 
have not recorded. 

Male.—There is in this species a complete annual molt and a 
more or less complete molt of the body feathers in early spring, 
generally including a molt of the tail in the first season. Much 
abrasion occurs between these two molts and in feathers not molted 
in the spring it continues until the next annual molt. The 
recognizable plumages are as follows: 

First Plumage [80,236, Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. July 1, 1892. 
Beaverkill, N. Y.]. 

Beneath white. Above, head dull black, with buffy superciliary 
and median stripes, all meeting on the hind neck. Rest of upper 
surface olive-brown, mottled with blackish-brown. Wing and tail 
(about half grown) olive-brown with spots and bands buffy-white. 

First Plumage Molting [31,924, A. N.S. Phila. July 6, 1891. 
E. Hartford, Conn. ]. 

Similar to the above, but with wings aud tail of full dimensions, 
while the breast and abdominal tracts are newly molted buff feathers 
with dark centers. The head and throat are also beginning to 
change to the following plumage. 


148 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Plumage of First Winter (28,502, A. N. S. Phila. Aug. 10, 
1879. Winnebago Co., Iowa]. 

Beneath buff, throat somewhat suffused with pink, and belly 
white, many of the feathers with a central dash of blackish-brown. 
Above much as in first plumage, but feathers of back and head 
more strongly edged with buffy-brown. 

No specimens showing the molt from this plumage to that of the 
following spring have come under my observation ; birds in the lat- 
ter plumage are as follows. 

Plumage of First Breeding Season [1,029 Coll. W. Stone]. 

Below, abdomen white, breast pink, throat black, mottled with 
pink and white. Above black, with more or less traces of buff edg- 
ings, rump white somewhat mottled with black, flight feathers gen- 
erally as in first plumage, greater coverts and generally the tertials 
black, tail partly black. 

Annual Molt [1,028, Coll. Wm. Brewster. Aug. 20, 1874. Up- 
ton, Oxford Co., Maine]. 

Below, as in the following specimen, but with many black 
feathers remaining on the throat, above as in first breeding plumage, 
except the back which has molted into fall plumage. Wings entirely 
molted except secondaries and outermost primaries. The old 
wing feathers are olive-brown, the new jet black. 

Winter Plumage of Second Year [1,027, Coll. Wm. Brewster. 
Sept. 1871. Mt. Carmel, Ill.]. 

Differs from first fall plumage as follows: Belly whiter and 
throat and breast much more pink, feathers on back black, with 
comparatively narrow buff edgings. Wing and tail jet black, with 
pure white spots. 

Breeding Plumage of Second Year (34,225, A. N. S. Phila. 
Haddonfield, N. J. May 16, 1882]. 

Differs from first year as follows: Throat uniform, black down to 
the breast, which is brilliant pink. Wings and tail jet black, with 
spots pure white, head and back solid black, ramp pure white. 

While the above descriptions give a pretty accurate idea of the 
seasonal variations of plumage in the Rose-breasted Grosbeak, they 
by no means cover all the peculiarities of plumage found in this 
variable species. It seems quite possible that the male requires 
three years to gain the perfect plumage described above as the 
“ breeding plumage of the second year”; but different individuals 
differ so much inthe amount of change that they undergo at the 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 149 


spring molt, that they present an almost unbroken series from one 
extreme type of spring plumage to the other. It is, therefore, quite 
impossible to do more than separate them into two groups, with 
brown and black remiges respectively, the former representing one 
year old birds, the latter those of more than one year.” 

The remiges, I think, are only shed at the annual molt, as is the 
rule in nearly all passerine birds. The brown wing feathers of the 
fledgling are, therefore, retained until August of the next year. 
I think they are all replaced by jet black feathers at this annual 
molt. One spring specimen (1,029 Coll. W. Stone), it is true, 
has one black feather in an otherwise brown wing, but this is 
evidently an exception, and the black feather may have been as- 
sumed in spring; in any case, it can hardly be considered as evi- 
dence that the brown wings are retained for more than one year, 
Furthermore, all the brown-winged birds I have examined which 
show the annual molt in progress, have new black feathers coming 
in. 

The tertials, as usual, do not accord with the primaries and sec- 
ondaries in the time of their molt. Birds in the first winter plum- 
age (7. e., with brown wings) almost always molt the tertials with 
the body feathers in spring, the new ones being jet black with white 
spots. Two specimens before me, however, retained the old brown 
tertials throughout the breeding season. An example of the other 
extreme is a specimen (No. 501 Coll. W. Stone), a bird of the year, 
shot in September, which has just completed the molt from the first 
plumage to that of the first winter, has lost the brown tertials and 
greater wing coverts and has a new set of black ones which still 
have the embryonic sheaths adhering to the base of the quills. 

Old birds, as a rule, do not renew the tertials in spring, though 
some of the most highly plumaged examples seem to have done so 
In judging of the renewal of these tertials, I have based my opinion 
on the condition of these feathers in spring specimens. In some 
birds they are very much abraded so that the white spots appear to 
have been cut away, while in others they are fresh and show no 
abrasion at all (Pl. V, figs. 7 and 8). The-former I regard as 
acquired at the previous annual molt and latter at the spring molt. 


20 As already stated, the most perfect plumage may not necessarily denote 
an old bird, but perhaps one of exceptional vitality. Though it is undoubt- 
edly the fact that the successive plumages of an individual become more per- 
fect, up to a certain point, at least, it is also quite likely that some indiyid- 
uals never reach the so-called perfect plumage. 


150 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


The tail is generally shed at the first spring molt and a new black 
one assumed,” though sometimes only a few of the feathers are 
changed, frequently only the middle pair. In these latter cases 
the complete black tail is assumed at the next annual molt. 

As regards the spring molt of the body plumage there is a great 
deal of individual variation. In some specimens, especially in birds 
in their first spring plumage, this molt is practically complete, as 
far as the body feathers are concerned, while in others, a good 
many of the old feathers, showing much abrasion, are retained. 
This often gives a mottled appearance to the interscapular region, 
while in the pink breast patch the old feathers may be recognized 
by their worn whitish tips. One curious specimen (No. 31,922, A. 
N.S. Coll., E. Hartford, Conn., May 11, 1891), has the pink of 
the breast thickly spotted with black. Careful examination shows 
that but little molt has taken place on the breast ; the buff margins, 
however, which bordered the feathers in the winter plumage, have 
been completely worn away, while the black portions being appar- 
ently less brittle have withstood the abrasion and remain as promi- 
nent asin the winter bird (see Pl. V, fig. 6). Furthermore, the 
feathers of the interscapular region, which are acquired at the spring 
molt, seem to vary in character, some are jet black throughout, 
while others are bordered with very light buff on thesides. These 
might be considered to be remnants of the winter plumage, but in 
many spring specimens (notably in 1,029, Coll. W. Stone, May 8, 
1892) the feathers are fresh and perfect while if they had been 
acquired at the previous annual molt they would certainly have 
shown more or less abrasion. These buffedged feathers in spring 
birds do not necessarily denote younger birds than those having the 
the pure black feathers, since in the specimen (28,499, Coll. A. N.S., 
June, 1881) which shows the least amount of spring molt of any 
in the series, such new feathers as have been acquired on the back 
are entirely black. 

Female.—Molts and plumages quite different from male. So far 
as my material goes, there seems to be a partial molt in spring in 
addition to the annual molt at the end of the breeding season, but 
in many individuals the nuptial plumage is much abraded and 
shows but little renewal of the feathers. There is a curious plum- 


*1T have not seen any specimen which shows this molt of the tail in progress, 
but I have seen such a specimen illustrating an exactly similar molt in P#r- 
anga erythromelas. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 151 


age of the female which I do not regard as belonging to the regular 
cycle of changes, but rather an abnormal tendency toward the 
color pattern of the male. This differs from the normal female 
plumage in having the head and forepart of the back, sides of neck, 
and chin black, slightly edged with gray, the median crown stripe 
being obsolete. Below white slightly tinged with yellow on the breast, 


where are also a few narrow shaft streaks. The specimen described 


was taken in Chester Co., Pa., May 5, 1888 (No. 1,957, Coll. W. 
Stone). A similar one is in the U.S. Nat. Museum Collection. 


Passerina cyanea (Linn.). Indigo Bird. 


Male.—Four distinct plumages are recognizable in this species. 

First Plumage. 

Much like the following but distinguished by the different struct- 
ure of the feathers. 

Plumage of First Winter. [No. 841, Coll. W. Stone. Sept. 30, 
1891. Chester Co., Pa.]. 

Reddish-brown above, with darker shaft lines on back, below 
quite buff, brownish on breast, with distinct dark shaft lines. 

Breeding Plumage. 

Brilliant blue above and below, varying as described below. 

Winter Plumage of Adult. 

Reddish-brown above, shaft stripes obscure, rump feathers more 
or less blue with brown tips below, tinged with brown, many feath- 
ers with bluish bases, which give it a mottled appearance. Some 
specimens have much blue on the bases of all the feathers above. 

The breeding plumage exhibits a great range of variation and 
the most brilliant and perfect dress is certainly not acquired before 
the second or third year. The primaries and secondaries are only 
renewed at the annual molt, but the tertials and some of the rec- 
trices are often molted in spring, when the brown body feathers are 
lost and the blue plumage acquired. It is the irregularity in the 
extent of this molt that causes the variety in the breeding plumage 
of different individuals. Old brown tertials of the winter plumage 
are frequently retained through the breeding season and also many 
of the old coverts as well as brown patches or single feathers on 
various parts of the body. The white belly of the winter plumage 
also frequently escapes molt in the spring. Individual variation 
in the extent of the molt is so great that the specimens cannot be 
separated in definite groups. Fourteen spring and summer males 


152 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


show only six in which the molt of body feathers has been com- 
plete and no trace of brown feathers remain, but even some of these 
have one or two brown wing-coverts. Eight of the fourteen have 
renewed the tertials in the spring molt while three have partially 
renewed them and three retain the old feathers. Winter specimens 
of more than one year also show a good deal of variation in the 
amount of blue on the feathers. Some which appear brown super- 
ficially, have the bases of the feathers quite blue ; while others have 
broader brown margins and but little blue. Much abrasion 
takes place between the annual and spring molt but a scarcity of 
winter specimens and general lack of dates on such as I have, pre- 
vents a careful study of this matter. The young birds of this spe- 
cies molt the tail at the close of the summer when they renew their 
body plumage but do not molt the wing feathers. 

Females.—Have but one molt a year, and the change in the nup- 
tial plumage is due entirely toabrasion. Whether the young renew 
the tail at the end of the summer, as in the male, I am uncertain. 


Spiza americana (Gmel.). Dickcissel. 
Plumages, first, winter, nuptial. 
No spring molt occurs in this species, unless in the first season. 


Family TANAGRIDZ. 


Piranga erythromelas Vieill. Scarlet Tanager. 

The seasonal changes of this species are analogous to those of the 
Rose-breasted Grosbeak, though the individual variations do not 
seem to be so great. Five regular plumages of the male are recog- 
nizable, as follows : 

1. First Plumage [No. 1,906, Coll. W. Stone. Aug. 17, 1899. 
Chester Co., Pa.]. 

Above olive, below yellowish-white, yellow on middle of the ab- 
domen and crissum, breast and sides of abdomen coarsely spotted 
and streaked with olive. Wings half grown, tail one-quarter 
grown. 

2. Plumage of First Winter [No. 830, Coll. W. Stone. Sept. 18, 
1891. Haddonfield, N. J.]. 

Above olive, below olive-yellow, wing and tail brown, edged with 
olive, except the greater median and lesser wing-coverts, which are 
jet black. 

3. First Breeding Plumage [No. 34,001, Coll. A. N.S. Chester 
Co., Pa. May 18, 1881]. 


—, 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 153 


Above and below scarlet, tail jet black, wings brown, edged with 
olive, except greater median and lesser coverts and tertials which 
are jet black. 

4, Plumage of Second Winter [No. 19,688, Coll. Wm. Brewster. 
Buncombe Co., N.C. Sept. 15, 1886]. 

Above olive, below yellow-olive, wings and tail entirely jet black. 

5. Breeding Plumage of Second Year [ No. 716, Coll. W. Stone. 
Harvey’s Lake, Pa. June 16, 1891]. 

Above and below scarlet, wings and tail entirely jet black. 

From these descriptions it will be seen that the dull brownish 
wing feathers of the first plumage are retained until the first annual 
molt, except the tertials which are molted in the spring when the 
red body plumage is first assumed. The jet black tail is also ac- 
quired at this time in all the specimens that I have examined, ex- 
cept one. In this the molt of the tail has been incomplete, only 
three black feathers having been assumed. In many birds in the 
first breeding plumage a few olive feathers persist on the sides of 
the body and flanks and more rarely on the back. Specimens in 
the plumage of the second winter also frequently show a few red 
feathers on these parts. 

A peculiar plumage of the male which does not belong in the 
regular cycle, but which is of more than casual occurrence, has the 
scarlet of the normal plumage repiaced by bright orange. Other 
peculiarities, which are of rather frequent occurrence, are the pres- 
ence of red or orange feathers among the lesser wing coverts. Speci- 
mens taken in August, showing the annual molt in progress, are 
striking looking birds. One of these before me is about half molted ; 
the crown, ear coverts, interscapulum, throat, sides of the abdomen, 
and spot on the breast are olive, while the hind neck, sides of head, 
rump, breast, center of abdomen and crissum are scarlet. Speci- 
mens showing the spring molt are, of course, exactly the reverse of 
this, but the only one that I have seen was so far advanced that 
nearly all the green plumage was lost. It was a bird entering upon 
its first spring, and showed the jet black tail about half grown while 
the brown remiges were retained and showed no signs of molt. 

Specimens examined: First plumage, 1; first winter, 5; spring 
molt, 2; first breeding plumage, 14; annual molt 4; second winter 
2; second spring molt, 1; second breeding plumage, 11. 

Female.—I have been unable to examine any specimens in the 
winter, but from a comparison of spring and fall birds, I should 


#1 


154 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 
think there was at least a partial molt in spring. 
Family AMPELIDA. 


Ampelis cedrorum (Vieill.). Cedar Waxwing. 

Plumages: first, winter, nuptial. 

Only one molt a year occurs in this species and but little effect is 
produced by abrasion, except that the plumage becomes lighter, es- 
pecially above. The molt is very late; in a specimen taken Sept. 
27, it has just begun while young birds molt the first plumage (?) 
of the body in November as shown in specimens taken Nov. 2-22. 


Family HIRUNDINID&. 


The swallows exhibit certain peculiarities in their molt which 
have already been described (p. 111). In addition to this they differ 
from most Passerine species in having the first plumage better devel- 
oped and more nearly like that of the adult. This plumage is generally 
retained much longer than in most birds and the young of most of 
our swallows seem to start on their migration with little or no molt 
having taken place. Sharpe and Wyatt think that swallows molt 
in their winter quarters, but in the case of Tachycineta and Chelidon 
this is certainly an error and Dr. J. A. Allen” has shown that it is 
equally erroneous in the case of Stelgidopteryx. Some individuals 
probably start on their migration before the molt has begun. Cer- 
tainly great quantities of swallows, mainly Tachycineta and Chelidon, 
congregate along the southern New Jersey coast in August, the 
majority of which are surely migrants, and many of them are 
molting. In the same way, molting Tachycinete occur in abundance 
in the lower Delaware Valley in October, where there are none in 
the summer. An adult Chelidon erythrogaster, taken at Philadel- 
phia, Sept. 1, with the one described beyond, had just begun to molt 
on the head, but showed no trace of shedding any flight feathers. 
This bird would hardly have staid to molt, as this species is rarely 
seen here after that date. 

Progne subis (Linn.). Purple Martin. 

The Martin apparently has no regular spring molt, but some 
young males acquire scattered black feathers on the under parts at 
this time. The complete steel-blue plumage is not acquired till the 
end of the second summer (or perhaps the third ?). 


22 Auk, 1895, p. 374. 


ie 


en te ee 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 155 


Petrochelidon lunifrons (Say). Cliff Swallow. 


From such series of this bird as I have examined, I should judge 
that it had no spring molt; whether the young molt the flight 
feathers at the close of the summer I cannot say, as none of my 
specimens show any molt. 


Chelidon erythrogaster (Bodd.). Barn Swallow. 


The scarcity, in collections, of adults in winter plumage or in the 
molt prevents a complete account of the molting of this species. I 
have only one specimen showing the annual molt in progress, which 
was taken Aug.7, 1878, at Philadelphia. New feathers are coming in 
on the breast, throat, and back, and the tail is just beginning to 
molt. None of the remiges have been cast. Another speci- 
men, taken Sept. 1 at the some locality, shows a complete molt 
just finished. As I am not sure whether the young molts its 
flight feathers with the rest of its first plumage I cannot say whether 
this is an adult or bird of the year, but my impression is that the 
young do not molt the wing and tail at this time and that the speci- 
men is, therefore, an adult. In any case it presents one curious 
question: The outer rectrices are only .35 in. longer than the next 
pair (as in all young summer birds). Now all the spring birds that 
I have examined have the feathers much longer (.75—-1.25 in. longer 
than the next pair), so that there must be a molt of part of the tail 
at least, in the spring. I do not think there is any spring molt of 
the wings or body feathers. 


Tachycineta bicolor (Vieill.). White-bellied Swallow. 


Plumages: first, winter, nuptial, adult winter. 

Male.—A large series of this species, collected in southern New 
Jersey illustrates the changes of plumage very satisfactorily. The 
annual molt in the adults takes place from July 20 to September 1, 
at which latter date the winter plumage is generally completed. The 
birds of the year do not begin to molt until the first week of Sep- 
tember and are in full plumage, indistinguishable from the adults, 
by October 15. Apparently there is no spring molt, but the white 
tips to the wing feathers disappear by abrasion. 

Female-——Two plumages of the female are found, one indistin- 
guishable from the male, the other much duller and quite brown in 
the spring. The latter, I think, is the plumage of the first year ; 
at any rate, in one specimen, it is certainly assumed at the molt of 
the first plumage. 


156 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Clivicola riparia (Linn.). Bank Swallow. 

I can find no evidence of a spring molt in this species, but the 
plumage shows considerable abrasion at this season. I have seen 
no molting specimens. 

Females.—Resemble the males at all times. 


Stelgidopteryx serripennis (Aud.). 
The above remarks apply equally to this species. 


Family LANIID. 
Lanius borealis Vieill. Northern Shrike. 
There seems to bea partial molt in spring, but not extensive 
enough to produce a change in the plumage. One specimen, taken 
March 20, shows new feathers coming in on the breast and head. 


Lanius ludovicianus Linn. Loggerhead Shrike. 

A specimen taken October 20, Haddonfield, N. J. (No. 1,429, 
Coll. W./S.), which shows no sign of molt on the wings, except the ter- 
tials, and appears, therefore, to be a bird of the year, has nearly 
completed the body molt and has likewise renewed the tail. Spring 
specimens show a slight renewal of feathers, as in the preceding spe- 
cies. 


Family VIREONIDZ. 


The uniform coloration of the feathers in the Vireos helps to ob- 
scure what little abrasion takes place in the plumage ; and notwith- 
standing the fresh appearance of the spring dress, I do not think 
there is a spring molt of any great extent. The few winter spe- 
cimens that I have examined show no signs of molt. The young 
in the first winter are like the adults, and the males and females are 
alike. There are, therefore, only three plumages: first, winter and 
nuptial, the last two are often scarcely distinguishable. 

Vireo olivaceus (Linn.). Red-eyed Vireo. 

Spring birds are, perhaps, duller colored, but show but little 
signs of wear. A specimen taken Aug. 27 has nearly completed 
the molt of body feathers while it is also molting the tail. The 
wings show no signs of molt, except the tertials which are generally 
renewed with the body plumage, so that the specimen must be a 
bird of the year. 


Vireo gilvus (Vieill.). Warbling Vireo. 
Vireo philadelphicus (Cass.). Philadelphia Vireo. 
Molt as in the preceding. The winter plumages have respectively 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 157 


more buff and olive-yellow beneath than the nuptial dress. No 
young birds in the first molt have been examined. 

Vireo flavifrons Vieill. Yellow-throated Vireo. 

Vireo solitarius (Wils.). Solitary Vireo. 

These two birds seem to correspond exactly in the condition of 
their plumages. The tertials of some individuals show so little 
abrasion and have the light edgings so perfect that it seems as if 
they must be renewed in the spring. <A young JV. flavifrons in the 
first molt, is renewing only the body plumage. 

Vireo noveboracensis (Gmel.). White-eyed Vireo. 

A young bird in first molt is renewing its tail exactly as in JV. 
olivaceus. Spring specimens show more abrasion than any of the 
other Vireos, and the edge of the tertials are very much worn, in 
striking contrast to the last two species. 


Family MNIOTILTIDA. 


A more or less complete spring molt of the body plumage seems 
to be the rule ih the Warblers but as is usually the case with spring 
molts we have a very unsatisfactory series of specimens available 
for study, and are thrown back largely upon a comparison of spring 
and autumn material. Species of which I have actually seen speci- 
mens in the process of molting in spring are Dendroica blackburnie, 
D. discolor, D. castanea, D. palmarum, D. tigrina, D. coronata, and 
Geothlypis trichas. The question of course arisesas to the extent of this 
molt after the first year. The young of most Warblers in the first 
autumn differ materially from the adults, and an extensive molt is 
necessary in the following spring, but upon once gaining the adult 
plumage they do not change their appearance materially at the next 
annual molt and, therefore, a complete spring molt in subsequent 
years is not necessary. Some species, however, change regularly, 
twice a year. Probably nearly all Warblers have some spring molt, 
but in many it is restricted to the head and breast after the first 
season. Regarding the relation of their seasonal plumages, the spe- 
cies may be grouped as follows : 

1. Adult male at all seasons and young of the year practically alike, 
Seiurus, Helmitherus, Sylvania mitrata (winter plumage with 
light tips on black parts). 

2. Winter and nuptial dress of adult male different: Mniotilta 
varia, Dendroica pensylvanica, D. maculosa, D. striata, D. castanea, 
D. blackburnie. 


158 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


3. Adult males alike at all seasons, young of the year different: 
Geothlypis, Sylvania canadensis, S. pusilla, Setophaga, Helmintho- 
phila pinus, H. ruficapilla, Dendroica estiva, D. virens, D. ceru- 
lescens, D. vigorsii, D. tigrina, D. discolor, Compsothlypis. 
Regarding a few I am in donbt. 

So far as I know, no Warblers molt the flight feathers in spring, 
nor do the young molt them with their first plumage. 

Mniotilta varia (Linn.). Black and White Warbler. 

Plumages : first, first winter, nuptial, adult winter. 

Male.—The worn condition of the plumage of some birds would 
indicate that the spring molt is not as complete as in most Warblers. 
Some individuals do not molt the tertials at this time while others 
certainly do. The plumage of the first winter has only the sides of 
the body streaked and the streaks dull. The adult winter plumage 
is as heavily marked as the nuptial dress but has the throat white. 

Female.—Remains in the plumage of the first winter. 
Helminthophila pinus (Linn.). Blue-winged Warbler. 

Plumages: first, first winter, first nuptial, adult winter, adult 
nuptial. 

Male.—Spring birds are always much worn on the tertials and 
back, and probably have only a partial spring molt. The yellow 
cap is wanting in the first winter, the lores are dull and the under 
surface quite dull. Some spring males are dull and tinged with 
olive below, with the cap ill-defined, these I take to be first year 
birds. Adults are brilliant yellow. 

Female——Like male, with the same two forms of spring plumage. 
Helminthophila chrysoptera (Linn.). Golden-winged Warbler. 

Apparently the same plumages as the above. What I take to be 
the plumage of the first spring is tinted with yellow below. The 
female has the black replaced by gray. 

Helminthophila ruficapilla (Wils.). Nashville Warbler. 

Plumages : first, first winter, nuptial, adult winter. 

The plumage of this species shows still more abrasion in spring, 
and there would seem to be little or no spring molt at this season, 
after the first year. Birds in the first winter lack the pure gray on 
the head, and show little or no chestnut on the cap. 


Helminthophila peregrina ( Wils.). Tennessee Warbler. 


Apparently has the same number of plumages and molts as the 
last. Spring birds are much worn. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 159 


Helmitherus vermivorus (Gmel.). Worm-eating Warbler. 

Plumages : first, winter, nuptial. 

There is scarcely any variation in the plumage of this species 
after the nestling stage. Spring birds show but little abrasion. 
Compsothlypis americana (Linn.). Parula Warbler. 

Plumages;; first, first winter, nuptial, adult winter. 

The spring molt is probably not very marked, as the birds show 
much abrasion. Fall adults have the breast markings fringed with 
yellow, which is lost by the breeding season. How much varia- 
tion there is in the nuptial plumage I cannot say. I had thought 
the dark-breasted individuals to be birds of the second or third 
year, but Mr. Brewster has shown that they represent a geogra- 
phical race, C. americana usnee. Perhaps the younger birds of this 
race will still be found to be lighter colored. 

Dendroica tigrina (Gmel.). Cape May Warbler. 

Plumages: first, first winter, nuptial, adult winter. 

A nearly complete spring molt of body plumage takes place the 
first spring, and a good deal of abrasion follows during May, which 
brings out the spots on the back and throws all the markings into 
stronger contrast. Birds in the first winter are very dull and 
tinged with gray, while adults in winter differ little from spring 
birds, except that all the feathers are broadly bordered with olive- 
gray or yellow. This plumage changes to the adult nuptial dress 
wholly by abrasion, which is very strongly marked in spring adults. 
Dendroica estiva (Gmel.). Yellow Warbler. 

Plumages : first, first winter, nuptial, adult winter. 

There is a complete molt of body feathers the first spring, but it is 
probably not so extensive in subsequent years, as some spring birds 
show that the tertials have not been renewed. Young in first win- 
ter are very dull, with the top of the head quite green. Adults in 
winter are scarcely distinguishable from spring birds. 

Dendroica cerulescens (Gmel.). Black-throated Blue Warbler. 

Plumages: first, first winter, nuptial, adult winter. 

The freshness of the flight feathers in some spring specimens 
seems to indicate that they are sometimes renewed with the rest of 
the spring plumage. Others are so worn that they probably molted 
but little at this time. Most fall adults have white edgings to the 
throat feathers, but others are absolutely indistinguishable from the 
the freshest spring specimens. Females are always in the brown 


160 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


plumage, like the males in the first winter. One old (?) specimen 
(May 19, Coll. A. N. S., No. 29,592) is quite gray above. 
Dendroica coronata (Linn.). Myrtle Warbler. 

Plumages, first, first winter, nuptial, adult winter, adult nuptial. 

A good series of winter and spring examples of this species from 
southern New Jersey shows the spring molt very satisfactorily. The 
entire plumage of the head and breast is renewed as well as the 
greater part of the interscapulum. The tertials are not molted. 
Old birds, in fall, have more or less gray feathers on the back and 
black centered feathers on the breast, but they all continue to molt 
in spring. A spring bird, which I take to be of the second or 
third year, has the black on the breast uniform, not broken up 
by white edgings to the feathers. 

Dendroica maculosa (Gmel.). Magnolia Warbler. 

Plumages and molts as in the last. Adults in winter differ from 
birds of the year in the heavy stripes on the sides of:the body, and 
large black centers to feathers of the back. Spring birds of the 
second or third year have the interscapulum solid black, all the way 
to the yellow rump. 

Dendroica pensylvanica (Linn.). Chestnut-sided Warbler. 

Plumages, first, first winter, nuptial, adult winter. 

Spring molt rather more extensive than in the last two species, 
and the adult in fall always more distinct from the nuptial plumage, 
only differing from the bird of the year in the chestnut stripes on 
the sides. The tertials are not renewed in spring. 

Dendroica cerulea (Wils.). Cerulean Warbler. 

According to the British Museum Catalogue, the winter adult is 
practically like the spring bird, so that the plumages will be as in 
D. cerulescens. 

Dendroica castanea (Wils.). Bay-breasted Warbler. 

Exactly like D. pensylvanica in number and relations of plum- 
age. 

Dendroica striata (Forst.), Black-poll Warbler. 

Plumages, first, first nuptial, first winter, adult winter, adult 
nuptial. 

This species, unlike the preceding, renews the tertials in spring. 
What I take to be the first nuptial plumage shows remains of the 
olive winter dress on the crown and sides of the neck. Adults 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 161 


in fall aremuch whiter beneath than the young and have heavier 
streaks above. Females remain ina plumage like that of winter. 
I am uncertain as to the extent of molt in spring. 


Dendroica blackburnie (Gmel.). Blackburnian Warbler. 


Plumages, first, first winter, nuptial, adult winter. 
Some individuals molt the tertials in spring, others do not. Adults 


‘differ from young in winter, in the brighter yellow throat and 


breast. 
Dendroica virens (Gmel.). Black-throated Green Warbler. 

Plumages, first, first winter, nuptial, adult winter. 

After the first season, the spring molt is much less extensive than 
in the species just preceding and in some individuals there seems to 
be little or no molt. Adults in fall have the black throat as in 
spring, but all the feathers are edged with white, which is afterwards 
lost by abrasion. 

Dendroica vigorsii (Aud.). Pine Warbler. 

Plumages, first, first winter, nuptial, adult winter. 

After the first year there is little or no spring molt. Winter 
adults are nearly like summer examples. 

Dendroica palmarum hypochrysea Ridgw. Yellow Palm Warbler. 

Plumages, first, first winter, nuptial, adult winter. 

The spring molt is restricted to the breast and crown, and the 
back shows much abrasion. 

Dendroica discolor (Vieill.). Prairie Warbler. 

Plumages, first, first winter, nuptial, adult winter. 

The adult birds in autumn are practically like spring specimens 
but have the black stripes on the breast obscured by yellow edgings. 
Birds in their first winter plumage lack the chestnut on the back 
and have but few black streaks below. The tertials are not renewed 
in spring. 

Seiurus aurocapillus (Linn.). Ovenbird. . 

Plumages, first, winter, nuptial. 

Spring birds are practically indistinguishable from autumn exam- 
ples and there is probably a pretty extensive spring molt. June and 
July specimens show much abrasion compared with those taken 
in April. 

Seiurus noveboracensis (Gmel.). Water Thrush. 
Seiurus motacilla (Vieill.). Louisiana Water Thrush, 
The above remarks apply equally well to these species but with- 


162 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


out a series of winter specimens it is impossible to ascertain the 
extent of spring molt in any Seiurus. 
Geothlypis trichas (Linn.). Maryland Yellow-throat. 

Plumages, first, first winter, nuptial, adult winter. 

The spring molt seems confined to the breast, throat and sides of 
the head. Adultsin winter have the hood much obscured by lighter 
edgings, while young have it reduced to a patch on the ear coverts 
and sides of neck. 

Female.—Sometimes has no spring molt whatever. 

Geothlypis philadelphia (Wils.). Mourning Warbler. 

Plumages and molts apparently as in the preceding species. 
Geothlypis agilis (Wils.). Connecticut Warbler. 

Plumages and molts as in G. trichas. The spring molt is mainly 
restricted to the throat. Adults in spring and autumn are practic- 
ally indistinguishable below, but the former show abrasion above. 


Young in the first winter have the throat and breast brownish in- 
stead of gray. 


Geothlypis formosa (Wils.). Kentucky Warbler. 
Plumages and molts as in G. trichas. I have no specimens of the 


young in their first winter and cannot say whether the black mask 
is complete then or not. 
Icteria virens (Linn.). Yellow-breasted Chat. 

Plumages, first, winter, nuptial. 

There is scarcely any difference in spring and autumn specimens, 
except that the former show abrasion above. The spring molt is 
probably restricted to the under surface. 

Sylvania mitrata (Gmel.). Hooded Warbler. 

Plumages, first, winter, nuptial. 

Mr. Wm. Palmer,” has shown that the male of this species acquires 
the full black hood the first year, and that the female varies in suc- 
ceeding molts in the amount of black, finally attaining the full hood 
also. 

Sylvania pusilla (Wils.). Wilson’s Warbler. 

Plumages, first, first winter, nuptial, adult winter. 

Spring and fall adults are practically alike, and there is evidently 
aspring molt. Young of the year lack the black cap. Females 


8 Auk, 1894, p, 287. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 163 


have more or less black on the head and perhaps sometimes attain 
the full plumage of the male, as in the last species. 


Sylvania canadensis (Linn.). Canadian Warbler. 


Plumages and molts as in the last. The adult in autumn is 
exactly like the spring bird. 

Setophaga ruticilla (Linn.). American Redstart. 

Plumages, first, first winter, first nuptial, adult winter, adult nup- 
tial. 

Spring molt is mainly restricted to the under surface in the first sea- 
son at least and probablyafterward. Young in their first nuptialdress 
differ from that of the first winter only in the acquisition of a few 
scattered black feathers; new tertials are sometimes acquired in 
spring also. Some winter adults have gray edgings to the black 
feathers, others are indistinguishable from spring birds. 


Family MOTACILLIDZ:. 
Anthus pensilvanicus (Lath.). Tit Lark. 
Plumages, first, winter, nuptial. 
There is considerable molt of the body plumage in spring. Spec- 
imens taken in January and February are much abraded and 
resemble June birds. 


Family TROGLODYTIDZ. 
Mimus polyglottos (Linn.). Mocking-bird. 

Plumages, first, winter and nuptial. 

There appears to be no spring molt, at least no specimens show 
traces of it. April birds show much abrasion, especially on the 
plumage of the back, and the buff tints of winter disappear entirely 
from the lower surface. 

Galeoscoptes carolinensis (Linn.). Catbird. 

Plumages and molt apparently as in the last. Some spring birds 
have the plumage quite fresh, but abrasion produces very little effect 
in this species, as shown by a comparison of spring and midsummer 
examples, so that I do not consider this as indicating a spring molt. 
Furthermore, none of the winter specimens examined show any 
indications of molt. 

Harporhynchus rufus (Linn.). Brown Thrasher. 

Plumages and molt as in Mimus. Spring birds are somewhat 
abraded, especially on the head, while the spots on the breast appear 
“clipped ” at the tip and somewhat bifurcate. Some fall birds are 


164 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ 1896. 


rather pruinose on the head and back. One of these specimens in 
the molt is proved to be an old bird, while other undoubted old 
birds have the more tawny plumage, so that I am not sure whether 
this slightly different coloration represents a bird of any particular 
age or is merely an individual variation. 

Thryothorus ludovicianus (Lath.). Carolina Wren. 

The molts and plumages of this bird are exactly parallel to those 
of Harporhynchus rufus and, so far as I can ascertain, there is no 
spring molt. The feathers of the crown are much abraded in all 
spring birds, and in late summer the abrasion of the entire plumage 
is extreme. 

Troglodytes aédon Vieill. House Wren. 

Plumages, first, winter, nuptial. 

There is no spring molt in the House Wren and the contrast be- 
tween spring and fall specimens, caused by abrasion, is striking. 
Troglodytes hiemalis Vieill. Winter Wren. 

Plumages and molt exactly as in the House Wren. 

Cistothorus stellaris (Licht.). Short-billed Marsh Wren. 

Plumages, first, winter, nuptial. 

There is a complete spring molt of the body feathers in this 
bird as shown in a series taken at Tarpon Springs, Fla., April 15th. 
They become very much abraded by July. 

Cistothorus palustris (Wils.). Long-billed Marsh Wren. 

Molts as in the preceding.* 


Family PARIDZ. 
Sitta carolinensis Lath. White-breasted Nuthatch. 

Plumages, first, winter, nuptial. 

There is no spring molt, and, excepting on the flight feathers, 
abrasion is not very apparent until after the breeding season. : 
Sitta canadensis Linn. Red-bellied Nuthatch. 

Molt as in the preceding. 

Parus bicolor Linn. Tufted Titmouse. 

Plumages, first, winter, nuptial. 

No. spring molt, and but little effect produced by abrasion. 
Parus atricapillus Linn. Black-capped Chickadee. 

Parus carolinensis Aud. Carolina Chickadee. 


Molt as in the preceding, all plumages very similar to each other. 


* Certhia apparently molts exactly as in Troglodytes aedon. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 165 


Family SYLVIIDA. 


Regulus satrapa Licht. Golden-crowned Kinglet. 
Plumages, first, winter, nuptial. 
No spring molt. 


Regulus calendula (Linn.). Ruby-crowned Kinglet. 
Plumages and molt as in the last. Mr. C. W. Beckham” states 


that the young male generally acquires the red crown patch when 


the first plumage is molted but not always, and that the female never 
acquires it. Several variations in the color of the red patch have 


‘also been described. 


Polioptila cerulea (Linn.). Blue-gray Gnatcatcher. 

Plumages, first, winter, nuptial. 

While none of the February or April specimens show signs of 
molt, I think that some individuals have a partial molt in spring 
and I have examined a specimen of P. albiventris Lawr., showing 
the spring molt in progress (March 19th.). 


Family TURDIDZ. 


Turdus mustelinus Gmel. Wood Thrush. 

Plumages, first, winter, nuptial. 

Although I have no winter or early spring specimens of the Wood 
Thrush, I consider that there is only a slight spring molt if any. 


Turdus alicie Baird. Gray-cheeked Thrush. 
Turdus ustulatus swainsonii (Cab.). Olive-backed Thrush. 

The above remarks apply equally to these species. 
Turdus aonalaschke pallasii (Cab.). Hermit Thrush. 

I have examined a large series of Hermit Thrushes, including 
winter specimens, and can find no traces of a spring molt. The 
abrasion is more marked than in the last two species. 

Turdus fuscescens Steph. Wilson’s Thrush. 
Plumages and molt as in the preceding. 
Merula migratoria (Linn.). Robin. 
Sialia sialis (Linn.). Bluebird. 
Plumages, first, winter and nuptial. 
No spring molt occurs, but some abrasion is seen in spring birds. 


2% Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 1885, p. 625. 


166 


Fig. 


Fig. 
Fig. 
Fig. 
Fig. 


Fig. 


Fig. 


Fig. 
Fig. 


5. 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 
EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 
Puiate IV. 


. Wing of Merula migratoria with molt started ; shaded parts 


represent the new feathers. Quill No. 6 has been shed but 
the new feather has not yet appeared. 


. Wing of Tachycineta bicolor; molt of primaries well ad- 


vanced. 


. Wing of Chetura pelagica, with molt of primaries well ad- 


vanced. 


. Tail of Tachycineta bicolor, with molt of rectrices half com- 


pleted. 
Breast feather of Antrostomus vociferus, first plumage, bear- 
ing a down feather at its tip (much enlarged). 


. Tip of breast feather in sheath of Sturnella magna, winter 


plumage ; forcing out a first plumage feather on its tip (en- 
larged). 


. Feather from breast of Dolichonyx oryzivorus Ad. 3 show- 


ing light border which is lost by abrasion. 


. Terminal part of tertial of Sturnel/a magna, winter plumage. 
. Same in late summer, showing loss of entire terminal por- 


tion even with the tips of the secondaries; also loss by 
abrasion of all the light border and spots, including the 
entire terminal part of the barbs, from where the light color 
begins to their extremities. 


PLATE V. 


. Tail of Dryobates pubeseens showing the beginning of the 


molt. The third quill has just been shed and the tip of the 
new one has not yet ‘appeared. 


. Tail of Galeoscoptes carolinensis showing the molt under way. 
. Wing of Ceryle aleyon showing the beginning of the molt 


with the fourth primary, instead of the innermost as is 
usually the case. 


. Wing of Plectrophenax nivalis with molt of primaries and 


tertials in progress. 


. Wing of Dendroica estiva showing molt of primaries and 


tertials almost complete, while the secondaries are about 
half grown. Dotted line represents the position of feathers 
when the growth is completed. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 167 


Fig. 6. Feather from breast of Habia ludoviciana showing the un- 
worn projecting black tip. Dotted line indicates the 
original size of feather, the edge having been lost by abrasion 
(enlarged). , 

Fig. 7. Terminal portion of tertial of Habia ludoviciana in winter 
plumage showing white border spot. 

Fig. 8. Same from spring specimen with white portion lost by 
abrasion. 


168 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


FEBRUARY 4. 
The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 
Twenty-one persons present. 


The deaths of the following members were announced :—Peter F. 
Rothermel, August 15, 1895; Henry Hazlehurst, January 11, 1896; 
Jesse 8. Walton, January 30, 1896; H. Ernest Goodman, M. D., 
February 3, 1896. 


Frsruary 11. 
The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 
Twenty-nine persons present. 
The death of Charles Wachsmith, a correspondent, February 7, 
1896, was announced. 
A paper entitled “ A Note ona Uniform Plan of Describing the 


Human Skull,” by Harrison Allen, M. D., was presented for pub- 
lication. 


FEBRUARY 18. 
The President, SAMUEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair 
Thirty-six persons present. 


A paper entitled “Contributions to the Life History of Plants, 
No. XII,” by Thomas Meehan, was presented for publication and 
referred to the Publication Committee. 


FEBRUARY 25. 
The President, SamurL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 
Forty-five persons present. 
The death of Owen Jones Wister, M. D., February 24, 1896, 


was announced. 
Papers entitled as follows were presented for publication :— 
“The Coloring Matter of the Aril of Celastrus Scandens,” by 
Ida A. Kellar. 
“The Crystallization of Molybdenite,” by Amos P. Brown. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 169 


The following were elected members:—Homer E. Hoopes, A. 
Feldpauch, Vickers Oberholtzer, J. Edward Farnum, George L. 
Farnum, H. W. Wenzel, Morris Earle and Arthur N. Leeds. 

The following were ordered to be printed :— 


12 


170 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


NOTE ON A UNIFORM PLAN OF DESCRIBING THE HUMAN SKULL. 
By Harrison Auuen, M. D. 


In a recent study of the human skull I attempted to frame a 
method of uniform description which answers a useful purpose. As- 
suming that the skull presents a norma frontalis, a norma basilaris, 
a norma lateralis and a norma verticalis, the following order of pro- 
cedure is recommended. Beginning at the norma frontalis and 
proceeding from above downward I note the following : 

The degree of prominence of the glabella and supraorbital ridges, 
by defining an arc between nasion and ophryon, by a piece of flexible 
wire, drawing achord for the are and measuring the versed sine, 
(In a given case it would read as follows—g. and s. 0. r.=5 mm.). 
Next the degree of deflection of the supraorbital margin is recorded 
on a protractor. (In a given case s. 0. m.=40°). 

The nasal bones yield three portions :—the frontal portion which 
is bounded above by the frontal bone; the mazillary portion, which 
lies between the frontal bone and premaxilla ; the premazxillary por- 
tion which lies in contact with the premaxilla. The frontal portion 
is measured from the union of the nasal bone and the ascending pro- 
cess of the maxilla to the proximal free end of the lateral margin of 
the nasal bone. The maxillary portion constitutes the greater part 
of the bone and lies entirely in contact with the ascending process 
of the maxilla. The premaxillary portion is the least well defined 
and lies on the lateral margin of the bone a few millimeters above 
the free distal margin of the bone. The suture between the pre- 
maxilla and maxilla is never found after an early stage of develop- 
ment; notwithstanding this, the manner in which the premaxilla 
and the nasal bones unite in the apes, taken together with the ranges 
of variation in this same line, as noted in the human subject, give 
the observer an accurate impression of the extent of naso-premaxil- 
lary junction. The texture of the naso-premaxillary suture is dis- 
tinctive. The nasal bone is further divided into two parts, that 
which lies in contact with the frontal bone and the ethmoid bone 
and is outside of the nasal chamber, and that which lies below the 
one last named and is entirely within the nasal chamber; the first 


; 
f, 
; 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 171 


part will receive the name of radix and the last part the name of 
salient. The degrees of angulation of both radix and salient being 
measured on a protractor we have in a given case the following for- 
mule: n. f. 4 mm.; n. mx. 10 mm.; n. pr. 2 mm.; r. 7 mm., 90°; 
s. 10 mm., 40°. 

The next region in order is the vestibule of the nasal chamber, 
which is accepted as the nasal aspect of the premaxilla as seen at 
the floor of the nose. When the parts of this region are as in 
the child, it is called pedomorphic, but when the pzxdomorphic 
features have not been retained the departures from this type are 
defined as follows: The height and elevation of the vestibule just in 
advance of the incisive foramina receives the name of incisive emi- 
nence ; the degree of definition of the line extending from the sides 
of the anterior nasal aperture to the anterior spine receives the name 
of the alveolar line, since it defines the alveolus proximally; the 
alveolus measured from the alveolar line to the alveolar point of 
Broca (a.=15 mm.). The nasal vestibule may be in addition 
macrolophic, microlophic or analophic, depending upon the degree 
of development of the incisor crest. This is held to be a better clas- 
sification of the parts than that presented by writers. The most 
primitive type is the analophic; the most frequent in modern culti- 
vated races is the macrolophic. The North American Indian tends 
to be microlophic and passes from this infrequently to the analophic. 
He is rarely macrolophic. 

Turning to the norma basilaris and describing from before back- 
ward, the hard palate is described in the terms of Broca hyperbolic, 
parabolic, or U-shaped. The choanz are either pzedomorphic or 
broader at base than at apex; the diameter is to be taken (ch. 
pedom. diam. 22mm.). The pyramidal process of the palatal bone 
measures in length in a given case 12 mm. (pyr. pr.—12 mm.). 

The spinous process of the sphenoid bone, whether it separates 
from or unites with the tympanic bone, is to be noted ; if united with 
this, whether the line of union is posterior to that of the Gasserian 
fissure. In a given case (sp. pr. not in contact with tym.). 

The foramen lacerum medium whether open or closed is to be ob- 
served. In a given case (f.].m.open). The petrosal part of the 
tympanic bone whether narrowed or broad, by being inflated on the 
median aspect. In a given case (p. inflated). 

Passing now to the norma lateralis, it is noted that the temporal 
ridge is found interrupted at the stephanion; in a given case 


172 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


(S-interruption=10 mm.) and that the temporal ridge is divided into 
two parts, the fronto-temporal ridge and the parietal-temporal ridge 
In a given case (fr. t. r. spinose: pt. r. ni/.). The parieto-temporal 
ridge as it reaches the lambdoidal suture begins to be slightly 
raised above the plane of the parietal bone and is joined to the 
occipital bone near the asterion by a harmonic suture; or, as it 
reaches the lambdoidal suture it has no influence in changing the 
serrated character of this line which extends to the asterion in the 
manner described by writers. In a given case we have (p. t. r. har- 
monic near A., 3mm.). The posterior margin of the frontal pro- 
cess of the malar bone may be produced in a conspicuous process, 
(the marginal process) or it may be absent. In a given case (marg. 
pr. trenchant.—5 mm. high). If desirable the height of the process 
could be measured by a line drawn across its base. The interrup- 
tion of the temporal ridge at the stephanion, the harmonic char- 
acter of the lambdoidal suture near the asterion, and the large size 
of the marginal process correlate with the size of the temporal 
muscle. 

The line of the parieto-squamosal suture at its junction with the por- 
tion of the temporal bone back of the squamosa may be marked by 
a mortise, which answers to the summit of the petrosa as it joins the 
side of the skull; thus we have (m.—3 mm.). 

The term “ sconce ” is used to express in a general sense the region 
on the norma verticalis which lies between the parieto-temporal 
ridges. This diameter at its narrowest part is recorded, in a given 
instance as (sc. 110 mm.). 

The lower jaw yields at the condyloid process, two facets, the 
lateral, which articulates with the zygoma, and the median which 
articulates with the squamosa beneath the brain-case. The median 
facet is more variable than the lateral and may be horizontal and 
inclined upward, or horizontal, inclined downward. Ina given case 
(condyl. pr. med. fac. horizontal). The coronoid process may pro- 
ject at base so far forward as to conceal in whole or in part the 
third molar when the parts are seen in norma lateralis, or it may lie 
so far back as to permit the third molar to be seen. In a given case 
(cr. pr. concealing 38 mm.). The mental foramen may be on a line with 
the first molar, in the interval between premolar and first molar, on 
the line of the second premolar, or on a line between the first and sec- 
ond premolar. Ina given case (m. f. on line of 3m.). The mas- 
seteric impression ends on a line answering to the angle of the jaw or 


oe ~~ @ 


ee 


1896. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 178; 


stops at a distance proximal to it; the area between those two lines 
constitutes the lemurine process. In a given instance (lm. pr. 
mm. wide). The genial spine may be single or double. The genial 
crest trenchant, rudimental, or absent. Ina given case (g. s. double: 
g.c. nil. ). 

In reviewing the characters ante have been thus employed the 
glabella and supra-orbital ridge (g. and s. o. r.) almost universally 
constitute male characters of low grade. We expect in primitive 
man, this character to be better developed than in more recent man 
and be more apt to enter into composition of the supra-orbital margin 
(s.o.m.). No doubt is felt in accepting these important features in 
the descriptions of skulls. ‘The degree of declination of s. o. r. is of 
importance in distinguishing long, slender from broad, flat faces; 
indeed, it stands asasign of character of face. Analysis of the see 
region needs no defence since craniologists are of one mind, that on 
the whole the best characters separating crania are to be found in 
this region; hence, the care taken to define the relations of the naso- 
frontal, the maxillary and the premaxillary portions. For the terms 
radix and salient I amalone responsible. The value of the vestibule 
would appear also to admit of no argument. ‘The distinction be- 
tween pxdomorphic and other forms in the writer’s judgment is the 
best means of separating the types of the anterior nasal apertures 
from one another. 

The value of the alveolus and the shape of the hard palate as 
defined by Broca needs no comment at this place. The length of 
the pyramidal process has been neglected by writers. I find it of 
value in the comparative anatomy of race. Theshape of the choanz 
having been defined I recognize two types, one of which is psedomor- 
phic and is oval and the other in which the base is wider than the 
apex. The group last named may be subdivided by the rectangular 
form in which the basal and the lateral contour unite to form a right 
angle; and the produced in which the basal contour is extended 
downward and outward beyond the line of the lateral contour. The 
study of the choanz is of importance ; the limitations have not been 
satisfactorily determined. The degrees of development of the spin- 
ous process of the sphenoid bone have likewise been neglected. It 
overlaps the line of the Gasserian and the sphenoido-tympanic fis- 
sures forward to a remarkable extent and, for the most part sex 
can be distinguished, the process being large and prominent in 
males, and rudimental or absent in females. 


174 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


The divisions of the temporal ridge into two parts, the fronto- 
temporal and the parieto-temporal and an interruption between the 
two is one of the best characters by which sex can be distinguished ; 
the same is true of the conversion of the asterionic portion of the 
lambdoidal suture from aserrated to a harmonic type. 

The value of the marginal process of the malar bone in distin- 
guishing sex is conceded. The mortise in the squamoso-parietal 
suture and the division of the condyloid process into two facets are 
of secondary value. 

The degree of concealment of the third molar has been over- 
looked, considering the significance that this relation possesses in 
studies of the horizontalramus. It is evident that the degree of con- 
cealment of the third molar is in direct ratio to the reduction of size 
of the dentigerous portion of the bone and (all things being equal) 
is an evidence of the departure from the primitive type. The phylo- 
genetic value of the so-called lemurine process of Albrecht needs to 
be defined. I have noted this process in the gibbon. The position 
of the mental foramen with respect to the sockets of the premolars 
and the first molar teeth is a character in osteology not to be gain- 
said. In view of the results of Topinard in studying the region of 
the mental symphysis in primitive man it is necessary to describe 
accurately all structural variation at this place, hence peculiarities 
in the shapes of the genial spine and the genial crest are given. 


oO 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 17: 


CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE ZOOLOGY OF TENNESSEE. 
No. 3, MAMMALS. 


BY SAMUEL N. RHOADS. 


In the following annotated list of the mammalia of Tennessee I 
have pursued the same plan of treatment as in the paper preceding 
this' on the avifauna of the same region. The list comprehends all 
the species known to belong to the Tennessee fauna, including not 
only the feral mammals now existing in the State but those which 
have been exterminated since the advent of the white man. An 
itinerary of the trip made during the months of May and June, 
1895, when I secured the collection and field notes forming the basis 
of this paper, will be found on pages 376 to 381 of the Proceedings 
of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia for 1895, and 
on the two following pages there is a brief resumé of the zoo-geography 
of Tennessee which may be of use to the more critical reader in this 
connection. 

References to the mammals of Tennessee in scientific literature 
are so rare and, so far as I am able to search, are generally of so lit- 
tle value, that it would be useless to attempt to tabulate them in 
this paper. In popular literature the hunting stories of David 
Crockett form, perhaps, the most voluminous and reliable (?) source 
of earlier information on this topic, and these have been supple- 
mented in later times by occasional papers and notes published in 
Forest and Stream. The historic literature of Tennessee, so far as 
I have read it, adds but little to the information which may be 
gleaned from literature devoted to the exploits of the aforementioned 
Crockett.2, When taken from other sources the authority will be 
given. 

Much of whatever value may attach to this contribution to our 
hitherto meagre knowledge of the mammals of Tennessee, especially 
the following notes on the habits of certain species, is due to the 
close observations and generous assistance of my friend Mr. B. C. 
Miles, of Brownsville, Tennessee, of whose labors in the ornithology 
of the same region I have already’spoken in a previous paper. 


1Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1895, pp. 463-501. 


? With the exception of references to the buffalo, nearly all of which date 
from Haywood’s Civil and Political History of Tennessee. 


176 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Other aid in the preparation of this paper will be duly acknowl- 
edged in its proper place. The order of families and genera here 
adopted is largely based on the classification of Flower and Lyddeker 
in their recent work on the mammalia. 


Order MARSUPIALIA. 


Family DIDELPHYIDZ. 
Genus DIDELPHIS Linnzus. 
1. Didelphis marsupialis virginiana (Kerr), Virginia Opossum. 

I did not see this species, but it is accounted common all over the 
State below elevations of 2,000 feet. Mr. Miles says the negroes of 
Haywood and Lauderdale Counties claim two species, one with 
black, the other with white feet, but he thinks them identical. 
There is probably a tendency in the opossums of southwestern 
Tennessee to the Texan form, D. m. californica. 


Order UNGULATA. 
Family BOVIDA. 
Genus BISON H. Smith. 
2. Bison bison (L.). American Bison, Buffalo. 

In his Monograph of The American Bisons’ Dr. J. A. Allen 
presents us with nearly all that is obtainable in literature regarding 
the history of this animal in Tennessee. From these sources we 
know that they formerly passed over the Cumberland and Great 
Smoky mountain ranges by way of the Holston and French Broad 
Rivers, to and from the Valley of East Tennessee. 

The number and frequency of these migrations, however, were 
not great, by far the larger number of buffalo being confined to 
the Cumberland Valley and its tributaries in Middle Tennessee and 
no mention being made of their occurrence in Western Tennessee. 

The point of greatest abundance was undoubtedly in the “ blue- 
grass region” of the vicinity of Nashville, especially about the salt 
and sulphur springs of Mansker’s Creek, Madison’s Lick, Lickton, 
etc., in Davidson County. Buffalo River is the most southwestern 
locality which appears to have been the haunt of this animal, and our 
authority for this rests solely on the traditional name. The same 
remarks apply to towns named. Buffalo in Humphreys and Law- 
rence Counties, and seem to indicate that the bison ranged to a 


3Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., Cambridge, Vol. 1V., No. 10, pp. 92, 102, 112, 114. 


af 


PS 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. ge i 


ereater or less extent along the southern boundaries of the State in 
this region. On the west Cumberland plateau, there is Bufialo 
Valley,in Putnam County, and in the Smoky Mountain range, a 
Buffalo Ridge in Washington County, and a place called Bison on 
the Pigeon River in Cocke County. 

At the period of its earliest settlement, the hills and coves of the 
Allegheny Mountains in Tennessee, were in many places covered 
with large tracts of native grasses* which formed the pasture lands 
of herds of elk, and attracted, in summer, the bison from the low- 
lands. 

The pristine condition of the country around Nashville may 
be gathered from the following quotation from Ramsey’s Annals: 
“When the first settlers came to the Bluff [site of Nashville,] 
in 1779-80, Haywood says the country had the appearance of 
one which had never before been cultivated. There was no sign of 
any cleared land nor other appearance of former cultivation. 
Nothing was presented to the eye but one large plain of woods and 
cane, frequented by buffalo, elk, deer, wolves, foxes and other 
animals suited to the climate. The lands adjoining the French 
Lick [at Nashville] which Mansker in 1769, when he first hunted 
there, called an old field, was a large open space frequented and 
trodden by buffaloes, whose large paths led to it from all parts of 
the country and there concentred.” 

Numerous accounts from various sources indicate that the cen- 
tral basin of Tennessee and the blue-grass region of Kentucky, 
connecting therewith, were not inhabited by Indians when first 
discovered, but formed a sort of traditional game preserve and 
hunting ground upon which the hostile tribes of Chickasaws, 
Natchez, Creeks, Cherokees and Shawnees assembled at certain sea- 
sons, to hunt the buffalo and, incidentally, each other. In Ramsey 
(p. 193), we read that in the summer of 1777, Capt. De Membrune 
living at Easton’s Station, near Nashville, “saw no Indians * * * 
but immense numbers of buffaloes and other game.” In February 
of the same year, it is stated that the same party “ in their excur- 
sions had seen no Indians, but immense herds of buffaloes. One of 
their companions, William Bowen, had been overran by a gang of 
these animals and died from the bruises he received.” 

From “ A short Description of the State of Tennessee,” a booklet 
printed for Matthew Carey in 1796, the following paragraph may 


*Ramsey, Ann. of Tenn., 1853, p. 96. 


178 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


be cited as showing the character of country, which formed the 
favorite buffalo range in the early days of Tennessee: “The land 
on the Cumberland and Tennessee Rivers is generally well timbered. 
In some places there are glades of rich land without timber, but 
these are not frequent or large * * * The glades are covered 
with wild rye, buffalo grass and pea vine. * * * The under- 
growth in many places is cane 15 to 20 feet high,so close together 
as to exclude all other plants.” 

From the accounts in Haywood’s History, we can gather that. 
the buffaloes were not migratory in that latitude, but remained 
throughout the year. In 1779 a company of Watauga adventurers 
planted a field of corn on the present site of Nashville. “ After 
the crop was made, Overhall, White and Swanson were left to keep 
the buffaloes out of the unenclosed fields of corn, while the rest of 
the party returned for their families.” The abundance of these 
animals and other game in Middle Tennessee is proved by the fol- 
lowing from Ramsey (p.450). ‘“ Michael Stoner this year [1780], 
discovered Stoner’s Lick and Stoner’s Creek. The woods abounded 
in game,and the hunters procured a full supply of meat for the 
inhabitants by killing bears, buffalo and deer. <A party of twenty 
men went up the Caney Fork as high as Flinn’s Creek, and 
returned in canoes with their meat during the winter. In their 
hunting excursion they killed 105 bears, 75 buffaloes and more than 
80 deer.” This record is interesting, as it accounts for the naming 
of Buffalo Valley in the west end of Putnam County, and proves 
the former abundance of these animals in that and Smith County. 

Regarding the presence of buffaloes in East Tennessee we have 
fewer and less definite records. Ramsey tells us, (p. 69) that in 
1764, “ Daniel Boon, who still lived in the Yadkin * * * came 
again this year [to Tennessee and Kentucky] to explore the coun- 
try—Callaway [his hunting companion] was at the side of Boon, 
when approaching the spurs of the Cumberland Mountain and in 
view of the vast herds of buffalo grazing in the vallies between 
them, he exclaimed, ‘ I am richer than the man mentioned in script- 
ure, who owned the cattle on a thousand hills—I own the wild 
beasts of more than a thousand vallies.’ ” 

In other places we read that the route taken by explorers from 
North Carolina and Virginia to the Cumberland River valley was 
by way of Cumberland Gap, which lies on the boundary between 
Claiborne County, Tennessee and Bell County, Kentucky. Theré 


i 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 179 


is little doubt that from some commanding point in that locality, 
Boon made these observations, and that they related to both the 
States upon whose common boundary line he then stood. 

While at Allardt on the high plateau of Fentress County, I con- 
versed with Mr. Bruno Gernt, who stated that he had heard from 
old residents in that country that buffaloes once abounded in the 
Obey River valleys of Fentress and Overton Counties. Writing to 
Mr. Gernt for more definite information, he referred me to other 
gentlemen on the subject who have failed to respond to my letters. 
Mr. Gernt says, however, he is informed that an old resident, now 
dead, named John Young, killed the last buffalo in Fentress County 
but he does not give the date of its capture. 

In West Tennessee the buffalo seems to have been unknown, so 
far at least, as history, tradition or remains have given evidence. 
This condition of affairs, if a fact, seems unaccountable from a 
faunal or geographical standpoint, as the flora of much of this 
division of the State is almost precisely like that of the east bank 
of the Tennessee River, which was frequented by buffaloes. That the 
river could form any great barrier to the passage of this animal 
from Middle to West Tennessee is not credible, when we remem- 
ber that they had already crossed the Cumberland, and have been 
known to swim waters even more formidable in the valleys of the 
Missouri and Red River during their migrations. 

The absolute silence of Davy Crockett on this subject, is very 
significant proof of the absence of the buffalo on the western border 
of the State. Mr. Miles thus comments on the matter: ‘“ I have often 
thought of and asked in the last forty years about buffaloes in this 
section; never met any one who ever heard of a buffalo here, or 
saw indications that they ever were. * * * Blue grass is not 
indigenous to our section and I doubt if buffaloes were ever numer- 
ous here as in Kentucky and Middle Tennessee, though certainly 
there must have been isolated specimens. I never heard of the 
remains of one, nor did they have roads or wallows, which the only 
writers on Kentucky and Middle Tennessee tell of.” 

The reader is referred to later remarks on the elk for refer- 
ence to the bisons once kept on the Belle Meade farm by General 
Harding. 

Family CERVIDZ. 
Genus DORCELAPHUS Gloger. 
8. Dorcelaphus virginianus (Bodd.). Virginia Deer. 
When we consider the large amount of wild land in the three 


180 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


main divisions of the State, it is surprising how effectually the Vir- 
ginia Deer has been exterminated over the greater part of Tennes- 
see. This is probably owing largely to the number of negroes and 
“poor whites,” who infest these districts, and spend their lives in 
the uncertain pursuit of hunting, rather than in earning an honest 
livelihood. ; 

A few remain in wilder parts of the Cumberland table-land, but 
even there they are rarely taken. I found their fresh track on the 
bluffs near Sawyer’s Springs. Mr. Miles refers to them in his 
vicinity as follows: “In my county, [Haywood] as far as I can 
gather, there are about 20 [wild ones] now alive—one buck was 
killed in February and a doe in August. * * * Weare mak- 
ing a desperate effort to restore this animal, and I think, with the 
sentiment now prevailing, will make a success of it.” Mr. Rags- 
dale, proprietor of Cloudland Hotel, thinks the deer have been ex- 
tirpated from Roan Mountain and that one would have to go many 
miles into the mountain valleys of North Carolina to find them. 

Mr. A. B. Wingfield, in Forest and Stream for December 14th, 
1894, states “The Cumberland Mountain range has been almost 
entirely depleted of its stock of deer. Would you believe it if I 
were to tell you that last year there were 248 carcasses of deer 
shipped from the small town of Crossville in Cumberland County 
* * * Tam glad to report that the last Tennessee legislature 
passed a law forbidding the killing of deer in five of our mountain 
counties (Cumberland, Claiborne, Scott, Morgan and Anderson) 
for a period of five years.” 


Genus CERVUS Linnzus. 
4. Cervus canadensis (Erxl.). Wapiti or Elk. 


At the beginning of the present century, this noble animal was 
probably a visitant to every county in the State. It not only 
abounded in the high passes and coves of the southern Alleghenies; 
but, associated with the buffalo, it frequented the licks near the 
present site of Nashville, gave its name to some of the rivers and 
creeks of the southern counties of Middle Tennessee, and roamed 
through the glades and canebrakes of the Mississippi bottoms. The 
redoubtable Crockett, during his residence in Obion and Dyer 
Counties, gives repeated instances of the occurrence of the Wapiti 
in the bottom lands, and it formed no small part of his larder in 
the period between the years 1820 and 1830. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 181 


Mr. Miles, after careful inquiry about the elk in his region 
writes me, “ The last elk killed in West Tennessee that I can learn 
of was at Reelfoot Lake about 1849. The late David Merriwether 
of Madison County, Tennessee, killed it. In 1865 I heard that an 
elk was killed in Obion County.” 

In Putnam’s History of Middle Tennessee, (page 127), there is 
a foot-note which states that on the famous Belle Meade farm, south 
of Nashville, General William G. Harding had “two hundred deer, 
twenty buffaloes and half dozen elk” in captivity. I understood in 
a conversation with gentlemen in Nashville, that these animals had 
come of native Tennessee stock, and that their descendants had 
been kept in this park until a recent date. Putnam’s note applied 
to a period anterior to the year 1859. I have been unable to get 
any direct information from the Harding or Jackson families, now 
living at Belle Meade, as to these facts, or whether the elk and 
bison are still existing in their preserve. 


Order RODENTIA. 


Family LEPORIDA. 
Genus LEPUS Linneus. 
5. Lepus aquaticus (Bachm.). Aquatic Hare. 

On the borders of Reelfoot Lake, in the closest proximity to the 
water, I found this large hare. It preferred hiding among the 
half-submerged vegetation and piles of driftwood, and when it 
broke cover would run with bold, high leaps from log to log for so 
great a distance that it was difficult to find it again. 

The following, relating to its habits in the vicinity of Browns- 
ville, is from the pen of Mr. Miles: “Though resembling the 
Cotton Tail closely in color and in diet, as well as in movements, 
there the similarity of the Swamp Rabbit, as we term him, ends. 
Never seen on the hills and seldom in the open, he is at home in 
the canebrakes and deep woods, far from the homes of man. The 
more desolate the situation, the more certain he is to be found, ever 
wide awake and ready to test his speed and cunning with that of 
any enemy ; and he has no friends. In the overflow [spring freshets ] 
I have seen him for hours seated on a floating log, as much at 
home as a raccoon, and when disturbed take the water for a 300 
yard swim as readily as any land animal that I know. When hotly 
pursued, he always takes the water, and, once there, I have never 
seen him caught. Twice only, while hunting at night, have I seen 


182 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


him take a hollow tree, seeming generally not to resort to such a 
refuge in the day. The young are born with eyes closed and with- 
out hair, and fewer in number than the cottontail® I have only 
seen one nest, that in an old root. The Swamp Rabbit has fully 
held his own in numbers in my day, though nothing more, and I 
see about one specimen a day when hunting in our deepest bottoms. 
The largest specimen I ever weighed was thirteen pounds, and 
would say thirteen inches at the shoulders. Negroes think him 
good eating, and if properly prepared, I agree with them.” 


In another letter Mr. Miles again refers to this hare, as follows: ~ 


“ As to the aquatic habits of the Swamp Rabbit, they are very pro- 
nounced and he will take to water as readily as the raccoon. I 
have seen him when not pursued swim a slough 30 yards wide and 
shake himself when on the other side, hopping off as though it was 
all right * * * * JT saw one swim several hundred yards 
down and across current when pursued by my pointer, and the dog 
did not gain on him, but was the most exhausted of the two 
when he gave up the chase. The rabbit makes the ‘ dog lick’ 
when in the water, the rump rising and falling as in the swim- 
ming horse.” 
Specimen—Samburg, 1. 


6. Lepus sylvaticus Bachm. Wood Hare. 


In western Tennessee, especially in the woods and thickets skirting 
the cane-bottoms near the Mississippi, this hare has almost become 
a nuisance on account of its abundance. Near Brownsville, Mr. 
Miles declares the “ Cotton-tail is nearly a pest with us, and since 20 
years has increased fully 50 per cent. in my opinion, and this in 
spite of the fact that its young are destroyed by nearly everybody 
and thing. * * * During February last [1895] I could num- 
ber 100 parties who killed in asingle day’s hunt 100 each, and 
the same ratio was kept up during the month; this too at the 
time of breeding, but there are apparently as many as ever and in 
the corporation of Brownsville, they eat up a large per cent of 
the gardens.” 

At Reelfoot Lake I found them very abundant, their range in the 
lowlands overlapping that of the Water Hare. In the uplands I 
rarely met with them. None were obtained in Middle Tennessee or 


5Mr. Miles contrasts this condition of the young at birth with that of 
Rael syvaticus, which he states are brought forth “with eyes open and fully 
haired.” 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 183 


East Tennessee. Those from West Tennessee apparently resemble 
sylvaticus from Pennsylvania and New Jersey, but not having sum- 
mer skins from the Eastern States, the determination is unsatisfac- 
tory. Mr. Bangs® identified three winter specimens from Trenton 
(Gibson Co.?) Tennessee, as “perfect intermediates between sy/va- 
ticus and mearnsi, both in size and color.” 

Regarding the possible occurrence of L. sylvaticus transitionalis 
Bangs, in the Great Smoky Mountains, its describer writes me: 
““T examined a large series last winter from Roan Mountain, and 
they were all true sylvaticus.” 

Specimens—Samburg, 5; Raleigh, 1. 

Genus SYNAPTOMYS Baird. 
7. Synaptomys cooperi Baird. Lemming Vole. 

Six specimens, a lately nursing female and five young, the latter 
apparently belonging to asingle litter, and the former probably 
their parent, were trapped in asmall, springy place on the Caro- 
lina side of the summit of Roan Mountain, where a quantity of 
their favorite tussock rush, Juncus, was growing. The adult is in- 
distinguishable from Massachusetts and Pennsylvania specimens. 
The young are of much interest, no record or description of im- 
mature specimens having yet been published, to my knowledge. 
They are about half grown, their average measurements being, 
total length, 85 millimeters; tail vertebre, 15; hind-foot, 18.5. 
Above, including the sides, they present a uniform blackish gray 
shade, which close examination detects to be obscurely mixed with 
dull wood brown. The prevailing hue is due to the long and very 
numerous dull black hairs, which are sparingly mingled with gray 
ones, and the faint brown shade arises from the exposed subtermi- 
nal bands of the shorter fur which underlies the longer and coarser 
black hairs. The under parts are darker, but otherwise resemble those 
of the adult specimen. In the young skull the length of the upper 
molar series is nearly as great as in the adult skulls of twice the 
size, five millimeters longer. The incisors on the contrary, correlate 
in size with the relative bulk of old and young, those of the latter 
in this case being about half the caliber of the former. The sulcus 
of the upper incisors, which characterizes this genus so strongly in 
adults, is a nearly obsolete depression in the young and not more 
easily detected than in occasional specimens of Microtus pennsyl- 
vanicus which continue to exhibit this persistent index of their 


® Proc. Bos. Soc. N. Hist., 1895, p. 409. 


184 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


ancestry. On cutting away the premaxillary the exposed base of 
the incisor shows a constant increase in the development of the 
lateral sulcus, so that at its root the tooth may be said to be almost 
as characteristically grooved as in the adult. In the half-grown 
skull the cutting edges of the upper incisors are oblique, forming 
an acute angle in each at their median line; in the adult skull this 
obliquity is reversed, the outer sides of the teeth being longer than 
the inner. In the young, the alveolar breadth of the incisor ex- 
ceeds its terminal breadth; in the old these dimensions are equal. 
The incisive foramina are wider and shorter, and the upper molar 
series more widely separated by the bony palate and maxillaries, 
than in old adults. The crown structure of the molars in young 
and old is identical, their only difference being due to the amount 
of wear, shown most conspicuously in the posterior upper molar, 
which has not protruded sufficiently to bring its posterior loop down 
to the triturating plane, and in consequence, that section retains its 
original cuspidate form. 

All of the five young have white-tipped hind feet almost precisely 
like the young Evotomys taken in the same locality. This peculiar- 
ity, isnot confined to the young of these genera. An examination of 
my series from the United States and Canada shows that several 
young and some of the old among four species have the hind feet 
so marked. In an adult Evotomys gapperi from Pennsylvania, both 
fore and hind feet are nearly pure white and in E. g. satwratus from 
Mt. Baker, B. C., all four feet, and the throat and the breast are 
similarly pied. Such cases are rare in my very large series of M. 
pennsylvanicus.. It isan interesting question why Synaptomys and 
Evotomys should show this tendency to pedal albinism, while in 
Peromyscus and Zapus the same kind of variation seems confined 
to the tail. Indeed, in some of these instances this feature has 
almost assumed the dignity of a diagnostic if not specific charac- 
ter, and it may even be conjectured whether these white-footed 
voles do not foreshadow color patterns, which are destined to figure 
in the days to come. On the other hand it may indicate their past 
connection with some harlequin ancestry, such as has given us 
the variegated pelage of the Arctic Lemmings. 

Specimens—Roan Mt., Mitchell Co., N.C. 1 ad.; 5juv. 


Genus MICROTUS Schrank. 
8. Microtus pennsylvanicus (Ord). Wilson’s Meadow Vole. 


The most careful search and systematic trapping failed to reveal 
the presence of this common eastern and northern quadruped in any 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 185 


part of Tennessee west of the Great Smoky Mountains. In this re- 
spect its distribution, or rather its absence, corresponded exactly 
with that of the Song Sparrow, Melospiza fasciata. Wherever I 
found the supposed runways of this vole, the traps only yielded 
the Mole Shrew, Blarina brevicauda and the Pine Vole, M. pine- 
torum and even these in such small numbers that the residents of 
the State may well congratulate themselves on their immunity from 
these little pests. 

On the summit of Roan Mountain two specimens of the Meadow 
Vole were secured in a little “ bulrush” swamp below Cloudland 
hotel, about 100 yards from the Tennessee line in Mitchell County, 
N. Carolina. No specimens were taken in Tennessee, but I feel 
justified in including it here, not only on this nearby record, but be- 
cause similar runways to those in which the Mitchell County spec- 
imens were taken were observed in swampy ground near the sum- 
mit of the mountain in Carter County, Tennessee, during my ascent 
thither from the Doe River ravine. 

There is not the slightest tendency toward any variation in the 
Roan Mountain specimens from those found near Philadelphia at 
the same season, and this is good proof that the distribution of 
this vole is continuous along the ridge of the southern Alleghenies 
and much farther south than in the adjoining lowlands. 

Specimens—Roan Mountain, Mitchell Co., N. Carolina (6,300 ft.), 
2 os. 

9. Microtus pinetorum (LeC.). Pine-woods Vole. 

This seems to be the only representative of the Microtine in 
Western and Middle Tennessee. It may be said to be numerous in 
the woods and their vicinity, forming tunnels in edges of open grass 
fields, much after the manner of Wilson’s Vole. None were taken 
east of the valley of East Tennessee. The seventeen specimens 
from Tennessee show no characters which are not to be found in 
specimens from Pennsylvania, New Jersey and Connecticut. Those 
from Samburg, however, are more uniformly dark beneath, the sil- 
very sheen seen in eastern specimens being clouded, in Reelfoot 
Lake examples, by muddy brown over the entire underparts. The 
same may be said of those from Raleigh and Bellevue, while those 
from East Tennessee are similar to Pennsylvania skins. It may 
be remarked that while the Pine Vole shows great constancy in 
its characters over a large region included between and almost 


overlapping the Austroriparian and Alleghenian faunz, the most 
13 


186 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


southern and most northern extremes in the east show color differ- 
ences which may eventually be recognized as subspecific. Exam- 
ples of this variation may be found in comparing a series from the 
mountains of northern New Jersey with samples from the pine bar- 
rens of the southern part of that State. The former are blackish- 
brown above and plumbeous gray beneath, the latter rusty brown 
with silvery gray sides and underparts. 

Specimens—Samburg, 8; Raleigh, 6; Bellevue, 2; Harriman, 2. 

Genus EVOTOMYS Coues. 
10. Evotomys carolinensis Merriam. Carolina Wood Vole. 

My only specimens of this large and interesting woodland mouse, 
which Dr. Merriam discovered on Roan Mountain in 1877, are not 
much more than half-grown, and all of them were trapped in the 
border of the fir belt just below Cloudland Hotel, in Mitchell 
County, N. Carolina, two of the specimens being taken within forty 
yards of the Tennessee strip. Though their runways were abund- 
ant there, a strange fate prevented my securing any specimens on 
Tennessee soil. In my four young specimens the color is much 
darker than in gapperi of the same age, corresponding very closely 
to the shade characterizing E. g. sutwratus of the northwest. In the 
oldest specimen the hoary appearance of the belly is untinged with 
fulvous; the others are plumbeous, with a scant mixture of gray and 
ochre. In all the specimens the claws of the three middle hind 
toes are each covered with a sheath or brush of white, bristly hairs, 
which exceed the claws in length and project beyond them. 

Contrary to my expectations, the Wood Vole of Roan Mountain 
was not found in wet places but seemed to prefer rather open run- 
ways among the fallen logs, moss and ferns on the borders of the 
forest, and one specimen was taken under the shelter of a pigpen, 
just below the hotel. Such situations were preferred to the depths 
of the forest, owing to the variety of edible grasses and weeds only 
found in clearings. Dr. Merriam writes me that he has specimens 
taken on the Tennessee side of Roan Mountain. 

Specimens—Roan Mt., Mitchell Co., N. C., 3. 


Genus FIBER Cuvier. 
11. Fiber zibethicus (L.). Muskrat. 
Owing to high water in the rivers during my visit I was unable 


to reach the mussel shoals and collect specimens of the Unionide of 
many streams in Tennessee. This difficulty was largely remedied 


1896 .] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 187 


by the industry of the muskrats inhabiting every large stream 
in my course and whose diet seemed to consist very largely of these 
mollusks, which they would collect and deposit on logs by the mar- 
gin of the water. When the mussel dies, the valves of the shells re- 
lax and the muskrat devours the contents, dropping the shells into 
the water. In some places I found many bushels of these shells 
representing ten or fifteen species and three genera in one dumping 
place, and was able to get a much better represention of this part of 
the mollusk fauna in an hour than would have been possible in a 
day’s dredging or wading. Ina fish-dam on the Holston River, 
near its junction with the French Broad, I found these shells wedged 
among the stones by the rats, and among them some newly-devoured 
specimens of the beautiful freshwater shell Jo spinosa. The spe- 
cies most preferred in the Tennessee River was a small clam-like, 
thick-shelled and corrugated Unio, and it was noticeable that the 
the same species was by far the most numerous in the shell-heaps of 
the Cherokees on the river banks. It was rare to find even the 
most fragile species in these rat-larders broken, as if opened forcibly 
by the rats, a condition the reverse of those obtained in similar de- 
posits east of the Alleghenies. 


Genus PEROMYSCUS Gloger. 
12, Peromyscus leucopus (Raf.). Deer Mouse. 

Compared with specimens from eastern Pennsylvania and New 
Jersey there appears to be nothing to distinguish the upland Deer 
Mice of West and Middle Tennesseefrom typical /eucopus. No 
specimens of this genus were taken in the lowlands of East Tennes- 
see, but from our knowledge of the fauna of that region it is quite 
certain that the same species is the prevailing form there, associ- 
ated in certain localities with the Golden Mouse, P. aureolus. I 
found this species numerous at Raleigh. A few were taken at 
Samburg, where they seemed to frequent the intermediate grounds 
between the overflowed bottoms and the bluff, and at this point their 
habitat overlapped somewhat that of the large Cane Mouse, P. gos- 
sypinus mississippiensis, described below. 

Two specimens taken at the entrance of Mammoth Cave, Ken- 
tucky, are identical with those from West Tennessee. 

Specimens—Samburg 6; Raleigh, 8; Bellevue, 1. 

18. Peromyscus leucopus nubiterre. Cloudland Deer Mouse. 


Subsp. nov. Type, ad. 3, No. 3,664, Coll. of Acad. Nat. Sci., 


188 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Phila. Col. by S. N. Rhoads on summit of Roan Mountain (6,370 
ft.), Mitchell Co., N. Carolina, June 19, 1895. 

Description.—Size smaller than P. leucopus, with much longer 
tail and darker coloration. 

Colors, above, blackish-brown or cinnamon with a broad, strongly 
defined, black, vertebral stripe from middle crown to base of tail. 
Sides of nose and a wide space around eyes, sooty. Ears dusky. 
Hair of underparts sooty at base, scarce concealed on parts of legs, 
throat and belly by the pure white tips. Tail sooty-brown above, 
white beneath, quite thickly clothed with long hairs which lengthen 
into a pronounced pencil at tip. Skull smaller than in leucopus, 
otherwise very similar. 

Measurements (of type in millimeters).—Total length, 170; tail 
vertebree, 87 ; hind foot, 20.5. Skull: total length, 23.8; basilar, 
length, 18; zygomatic expansion, 15; interorbital constriction, 4; 
length of nasals, 9.6: length of mandible, 12.3; breadth of mandi- 
ble, 6. Average measurements of four adults from the same local- 
ity: total length, 167 ; tail vertebra, 86; hind foot, 21.5. 

The Cloudland Deer Mouse seems to be exclusively a dweller of 
the balsam or spruce belt which crowns the summit of Roan Moun- 
tain, and is undoubtedly found on all the summits of the southern 
Alleghenies, which rise above an altitude of 5,000 feet. That it in- 
tergrades with /eucopus of the lowlands, a total lack of specimens 
from intermediate localities prevents me from determining. 

In a superficial comparison of nubiterre with typical leucopus, 
the smaller size, sooty color and very long tail immediately suggest 
a specific difference, but the cranial features of the two do not sup- 
port such a conclusion. In all respects, except coloration and size, 
the Roan Mountain animal is an interesting counterpart of the Per- 
omyscus leucopus canadensis, so fully described by Mr. G.S. Miller, Jr.’ 
The differentiation of these two forms from leucopus has been on 
very similar lines, owing to the similarity of the climatic conditions 
affecting them. Their dissimilarity, on the other hand, is exactly 
correlated with the difference in the humidity and mean temperature 
of the balsam forests of Canada and those of the Great Smoky 
Mountains. 

Specimens—Roan Mountain (5,500 to 6,300 ft.), Mitchell Co., N. 
Carolina, 6; Carter Co., Tenn., 2. 


7™Proc. Biol. Soc., Wash., Vol. VIII, 1893, pp. 55-70. 


2 Oe eee 


ee Se ee ee eee ee ee ee 


eh ES See 


— 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 189 


14. Peromyscus gossypinus mississippiensis. Cane Mouse. 


Subsp. nov. Type, ad. 3; No. 3,729, Coll. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila. 
Col. by 8. N. Rhoads at Samburg, Obion Co., Tennessee, May 4, 
1895. 

Description—Larger than gossypinus, with much longer hind feet, 
relatively longer tail, lighter, grayish-fulycus coloration and lack- 
ing the dark orbital ring. 

Color above, yellowish-brown, more fulvous along sides, darker 
along back and mixed with blackish. 

Lower parts and feet, white, shaded by the plumbeous exposed 
bases of hairs on chest, belly and thighs. 

Measurements (of type in millimeters)—Total length, 182; tail 
vertebre, 77; hind foot, 24.5; ear (from crown, dry skin), 12. 
Skull: total length, 29; basilar length, 21.8 ; zygomatic expansion, 
14.7 ; interorbital constriction, 4.5; length of nasals, 11.2; length 
of mandible, 15.2; greatest width of mandible, 7. Average meas- 
urements of five adults from same locality: total length, 182; tail 
vertebre, 80.6; hind foot, 24; average total length of five skulls, 
28; average zygomatic breadth of same, 14.5. 

So far as I have made its acquaintance in Tennessee, the Cane 
Mouse is solely a denizen of the “ bottom lands” of the Mississippi. 
At Samburg it confined its wanderings very closely to the immedi- 
ate vicinity of Reelfoot Lake, and was abundant in the dense forest 
jungle that bordered its margin, seeming to prefer the lowest and 
wettest parts of the overflowed lands, from which, at that time of 
the year (May), the waters of the lake had receded. It is quite dis- 
tinct from the common upland Deer Mouse of the same region, and 
the upper and lower borders of their habitats overlap sufficiently to 
make it possible to capture both species in the same trap. 

A comparison of the Samburg mice with leucopus of the same 
locality having shown their differences, as above stated, to be spe- 
cific, the question at once arises as to their relations to other south- 
ern Peromyscus of the Eastern States. I can find nothing, in exam- 
ining the series before me, to separate these Cane Mice specifically 
from gossypinus of Florida and Louisiana, and of which I am so 
fortunate as to have a large collection, those from Louisiana being 
generously loaned me by Mr. Outram Bangs. The Louisiana spec- 
imens are of interest as showing the extension of gossypinus along 
the Gulf Coast across the Mississippi River. A comparison of some 
of these from near New Orleans with specimens from the west coast 


190 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


of Florida shows a great similarity, the former averaging darker 
and smaller but the variation is perhaps too slight to warrant recog- 
nition. On the other hand, the Tennessee form represents the max- 
imum development of gossypinus, combined with a light coloration 
which together render it easily distinguishable as a subspecies. 

The relation of eastern gossypinus to leucopus has been a question 
frequently discussed by mammalogists, but the lack of good material 
from regions intermediate between N. Carolina and Florida has 
prevented any final determination. I had hoped to obtain the de- 
sired series from the regions in question in order to intelligently dis- 
cuss the matter now brought forward in West Tennessee, but a cor- 
respondence with our more prominent collectors of eastern mam- 
mals, including Messrs. Miller, Bangs and Brimley, shows that we 
are but little better off in this regard than thirty years ago, unless 
collections of the U.S. Dep. of Agriculture contain such series. I 
am, therefore, only able to predict, on the basis of the relationships 
of gossypinus and leucopus of the lower Mississippi Valley, that they 
will prove to be as distinct species in the east as in the west. In 
this connection the cognatus of Leconte again intrudes itself. Le- 
conte states Georgia and South Carolina to be the type localities of 
this species. Dr. Coues declares* that “three dried specimens, 
labelled ‘ cognatus’ in what we presume to be Major Leconte’s own 
handwriting, as it is the same as that upon his other types now in 
our possession,” should be considered the types of cognatus. One 
of these, from Illinois, Dr. Coues says is “ H. michiganensis pure 
and simple!” and adds, “ The other two, Nos. 4,708, 4,709 are not 
marked for locality but probably came from Ohio, Wisconsin or 
Michigan, and are really his types!” It is very difficult to reconcile 
this statement with Leconte’s assertion that cognatus is a native of 
Georgia, and if these two specimens really are original types of 
cognatus, it is far more reasonable to assign them to Georgia or 
South Carolina. On this basis, Dr. Coues’ diagnosis of “ Nos. 4,708, 
4,709,” viz., that “ They are exactly the size of ordinary /eucopus, 
the tail a little shorter, relatively, than the average of leucopus, but 
not shorter than is often found in leucopus, and they are colored 
exactly as in gossypinus, the upper parts being very dark, the under 
impure white, and the tail indistinctly bicolor,” strongly points to 
the conclusion which Prof. Baird and Dr. J. A. Allen have ad- 
vanced, that cognatus is a synonym of gossypinus, based, I might 


8 Mon. N. A. Rodentia, pp. 77, 78. 


~ 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 151 


add, on a somewhat immature specimén of that species from near 
the same type locality. It is very probable that Leconte’s positive 
statement, in his introductory paragraph to the description of 
cognatus, that he had never, during a long period of residence in 
Georgia, seen leucopus there, will be confirmed by future investi- 
gators. 

Another species whose status is affected by the foregoing remarks 
is Peromyscus megacephalus of northern Alabama. Not having se- 
cured a series from that region I am unable to throw any light on 
the question of the affinity of this species to gossypinus, to which it 
is most closely related, and indeed it may be found to be only a case 
of aberrant and extraordinary individual variation from typical 
gossypinus, or may represent a mountain or foot-hill race of that 
species. In either case the validity of megacephalus nowise affects 
the status of mississippiensis, which represents the modifications of 
an environment quite the reverse of that obtaining in northeastern 
Alabama. 

Specimens—Samburg, 16; Raleigh, 1. 

15. Peromyscus aureolus (Aud. & Bach.). Golden Mouse. 

Prof. Baird, in his great work on the North American Mam- 
malia (p. 468), tabulates two specimens of this mouse which were 
taken near Knoxville, Tennessee, by Prof. J. B. Mitchell and pre- 
sented to the Smithsonian Institution. Dr. Coues, in the Mono- 
graph of North American Rodentia, specially refers to one of these 
specimens as typical of the peculiar coloration of aureolus, so we 
may reasonably accept the identification and the record as the first 
for the State. Dr. C. H. Merriam writes me that his assistant, Mr. 
H. C. Oberholser obtained one of these mice at Roan Mountain 
Station. In view of these Tennessee records, which would indicate 
the presence of the Golden Mouse over the greater part of the State, 
it seems strange that I did not meet with it, although the Deer 
Mouse was taken in considerable numbers. The elevation of Roan 
Mountain Station is about 2,500 feet. Messrs. H. H. and C. 8S. 
Brimley inform me that they have received numbers of this mouse 
taken by J. S. Cairns near Weaverville, N. Carolina, about 25 miles 
east of the Tennessee line, at 2,300 ft. elevation, so it is reasonable 
to expect them in any of the passes of the Great Smoky Mountains 
below that altitude. 


192 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Genus NEOTOMA Say & Ord. 
16. Neotoma magister Baird. Allegheny Cave Rat. 

This large mountain-dwelling rat is found in the cliffs of Roan 
Mountain and other peaks of the Southern Alleghenies. I have no 
records of it from the Tennessee section of the mountain but the 
natives of Carter County do not state that it shows a decided par- 
tiality to North Carolina. 

A careful examination of the cave deposits which came into my 
hands from Middle Tennessee failed to show any remains of this 
genus. 

I have examined specimens of the rat which frequents Mammoth 
Cave, Kentucky, and am unable to detect any difference between 
them and those taken in Clinton and Cumberland Counties, Penn- 
sylvania. The skull of an old specimen forwarded to me alive from 
Mammoth Cave is exactly like the largest adult skulls of fossilized 
specimens from the limestone caves of eastern Pennsylvania. 

After particular inquiry among tke hunters of southwestern Ten- 
nessee as to the existence of a Wood Rat in those parts I am in- 
clined to think that it has been noted there, but the confusion of 
Neotoma floridana with the Old World rats of these parts makes the 
evidence of questionable value. 


Genus MUS Linneus. 
17. Mus decumanus Pallas. Norway Rat. 
18. Musrattus L. Black Rat. 

Mr. Miles mentions the former occurrence of the Black Rat in 
West Tennessee but he has not seen it for twenty years. The Nor- 
way Rat, however, has not been exterminated so successfullly, as the 
open streets of the larger cities of Tennessee can frequently testify. 
19. Mus musculus L. House Mouse. 

Found both wild and semi-domesticated. 

Specimens—Raleigh, 1 ; Roan Mountain, 1. 


Family CASTORIDA. 


Genus CASTOR Linneus. 
20. Castor fiber canadensis (Kuhl). American Beaver. 

In company with a trapper, I visited a beaver house in Reelfoot 
Lake. This was situated in a cypress swamp called the “ Turkey- 
roost,” about three miles west of Samburg. It was not tenanted, 
but there were signs that a beaver had been at work there within a 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 193 


few days. Other lodges were known to my guide, and Mr. H. B. 
Young of Samburg, who makes it his business to take some of these 
animals in the lake every winter, declared there were twenty of 
them left, and contracted with me to furnish the gardens of the Zoo- 
logical Society of Philadelphia with some of their young ones the 
coming winter. 

Mr. Miles says, “ the beaver, in limited numbers, has been here 
always and is more numerous now than 40 years ago, because less 
hunted. Within 9 miles of Brownsville, I know personally of 
a ‘house’ now inhabited, and it has been so for 25 years. I 
know the locality of two others by report.” 

It is not likely that any beavers now exist in the eastern half of 
the State, though their former distribution over the whole of Ten- 
nessee is well known, and attested by the frequency of the name for 
smaller streams and meadows throughout the state. 


Family SCIURIDZ. 
Genus ARCTOMYS Schreber. 


21. Arctomys monax (L.). Woodchuck. Ground Hog. 

Stated by Mr. Miles to be “ very rare” in Haywood Co. A bur- 
row, apparently used by one of these animals, was located on the 
banks of Indian Creek just above the overflow of Reelfoot Lake. 
From the character of the signs and paths leading from this den to 
an adjacent field, it could have belonged to no other animal. I did 
not find the woodchuck as numerous anywhere in Tennessee as we 
have it in eastern Pennsylvania. It is found high up among the 
Great Smoky Mountains, but does not, so far as I could learn, in- 
vade the fir belt, which occupies their summits down to an altitude 
of about 5,000 feet. Dr. Merriam says’ of them in this region that 
they “ were common in places in the Alleghenian belt, about half- 
way up the mountains.” 


Genus TAMIAS Illiger. 
22. Tamias striatus (L.). Hastern Chipmunk. 

This Ground Squirrel was very abundant on that part of Roan 
Mountain lying between the station and the foot of the fir belt. A 
few casually invade this belt, but never to a great distance. In the 
lowlands of Tennessee, the chipmunk was very sparingly and ir- 
regularly distributed, so far as my personal observations were made, 


® Amer. Jour. Sci., 1888, p. 459. 


194 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


but I was frequently informed they were often seen in districts 
where none appeared during my visit. I saw them at Johnson City, 
Greenville and Nashville, and heard one or two while riding 
through the woods in Obion Co., near Samburg. They are to be 
found near the Springs at Raleigh and on the road from Raleigh to 
Bartlett. None were seen at Chattanooga or Knoxville, nor on the 
Cumberland plateau. Two specimens from Roan Mountain are 
precisely like some of my skins from southern New Jersey. 

Mr. Miles speaks of them near Brownsville as being “ identical 
with the chipmunk of Virginia in color, though, I think, larger 
and not near so plentiful. * * * * I see five or six every sum- 
mer.” The Messrs. Brimley of Raleigh, N. C., record two speci- 
mens taken at Warner, Hickman Co., Tenn., in November and De- 
cember, indicating that the hibernation of this animal in that lati- 
tude is of short and irregular duration. 


Genus SCIURUS Linnzus. 


28. Sciurus niger ludovicianus (Custis). Western Fox Squirrel. 

We do not find this species numerous except in the heavily tim- 
bered bottoms of West Tennessee, more especially west of the Ten- 
nessee River in the direct drainage of the Mississippi. 

A very interesting account of this species, as observed in Hay- 
wood and Lauderdale Counties by my veteran friend and sports- 
man, B.C. Miles, is too valuable to be lost, and with some emen- 
dations, I give it here: “The Fox or Red Squirrel is the largest 
of all the tribe and varies considerably in size in different neighbor- 
hoods. Wherever food to his liking is found, there he is, and al- 
ways a glutton, putting in his whole time eating, drinking, or snooz- 
ing on a cozy limb, in such a position that he attracts attention 
neither of the hunter below nor of the hawk above. I am certain I 
have seen him clean up a quart of mulberries in a half-day and not 
move ten feet during the time, nor give utterance to a single sound. 
Early in the morning and late in the evening he chatters much and can 
even condescend to be a little gay in the mating season. I doubt his 
ever migrating, as do the gray and black, though an excursion of 
a mile from home through cultivated fields and small timber is no 
unusual tramp for the gentleman. 

“He is a denizen of big timber always: more at home in the 
gums and cypresses of our swamps than elsewhere, though he is not 
infrequently found in the most unexpected places, on the hills near 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 195 


the house, or in the garden, where he goes for fruit. Of all the 
tribe he is the greatest eater of berries and the like, and I have even 
known of his scratching sweet potatoes out of the ground and making 
a dinner off one of half a pound weight. 

“ When closely hunted he is very much more wary than the Gray 
Squirrel and the way he can huga limb and spread himself out 
flat on the bark is truly artistic. In his movements he is the very 
acme of animated silence, seeming at all times to fear a noise and it 
is not an infrequent ruse of hunters, by making a great outcry, to 
scare him from a secure hiding place. As a table game he is much 
inferior to his gray relation, being tougher, and the very red bones 
always give an uncanny appearance to the dish, cook it as you may. 
* * *§ * Asa caged pet he is dull, gets over-fat, becomes stu- 
pid, is ill-natured, has no gloss to his hair and is a dismal fail- 
ure. He is bravest of the tribe, often refusing to leave the ground 
when pursued by a small dog; has been seen to stand at bay and 
hold off such. Rarely he mates with the Gray Squirrel, when the 
produce is called a ‘ferrydiddle.’ Ihave killed two such in my 
forty years of squirrel hunting. One at all familiar with the two 
species would at once recognize its hybrid origin.” 

Referring to the black phase of this squirrel, Mr. Miles says: “I 
never saw any blacks save those like the Fox squirrel. Have 
seen two killed in this county, but when in Memphis, in 1871-74, 
my uncle frequently purchased Black Squirrels in the markets. 
We understood they came from Mississippi (never from Arkansas), 
10 or 20 miles below Memphis, and we both thought them a dis- 
tinct species; no resemblance to Fox Squirrel save in size and 
that the tip of the nose in each is gray. Have frequently observed 
that the bones of Black Squirrel were the same color (violet) as in 
the Gray Squirrel, while the bones of Fox Squirrel were invari- 
ably a deep salmon or red when brought to table. * * * * I 
never saw or heard of the black phase of Gray Squirrel save 
through you.” 

Specimen—Samburg, 1. 

24. *%Sciurus niger cinereus (L.). Northern Fox Squirrel. 

I base the admission of this subspecies to the list, first, on evi- 
dence from hunters of the Great Smoky Mountains that the Fox 
Squirrel is found there, and secondly, because Dr. J. A. Allen in- 
cludes the Southern Alleghenies in the geographical distribution of 
this form. 


% 
196 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


25. Sciurus carolinensis pennsylvanicus (Ord). Northern Gray Sqiurrel. 

Typical examples of this squirrel are confined to the high moun- 
tains of the extreme eastern part of the State. From thence west- 
ward there will be found to be a gradual transition to the form, pe- 
culiar to the bottom lands of the Mississippi, which is next consid- 
ered. I saw hunter’s skins of the Gray Squirrel, taken at an eleva- 
tion of 4,000 feet on Roan Mountain. It is not common in the 
more settled parts of Middle Tennessee. 

26. Sciurus carolinensis fuliginosus (Bachm.). Louisiana Gray Squirrel. 

Mr. Outram Bangs has revived’ the Sooty Gray Squirrel of 
Louisiana, described by Bachman under the name fuliginosus, as a 
valid subspecies of carolinensis. I was able to make close examina- 
tion of a number of live Gray Squirrels in the city park at Mem- 
phis, where they have become domesticated and form one of the 
chief attractions to the large number of people who frequent this 
thoroughfare. These squirrels averaged fully up to the size of the 
northern Gray Squirrel of Pennsylvania and were distinctly darker 
than the eastern animal, so much so, in fact, that I attributed their 
sooty appearance to their smoky environment in a city exclusively 
burning bituminous coal. Memphis, however, can not be classed as 
a ‘smoky city,’ and I am now satisfied that these squirrels came by 
their colors legitimately, and represent Bachman’s Louisiana spe- 
cies, as redefined by Mr. Bangs. 

Writing of the migrations of this animal, Mr. Miles informs me: 
“JT have seen them exhausted and wet on the east bank of the Mis- 
sissippi River, when I know the emigration eastward was taking 
place on the west bank. About that time I was fishing on a lake 
in Arkansas and one came by my boat headed from the west to the 
east bank, looking very unconcerned, with tail curled over back 
and well out of the wet. I gave pursuit, which he soon noticed, 
and that tail was then put up on the sail principle and very much 
increased his speed, I thought at the time, though I overtook and 
killed him.” 


27. Sciurus hudsonicus (Erxl.). Red Squirrel, “ Boomer.” 

Owing to the severe winter of 18945, the “ Boomer” was very 
scarce in its usual haunts on the summit of Roan Mountain. I 
spent parts of three days in careful search of it and only saw one in 
the fir belt. Another was seen and captured, during the descent of 


1° Proc. Bost. Soc. N. Hist., Vol. XX VI, p. 543. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 197 


the mountain, at an elevation of 3,500 feet. This species is not seen 
in Tennessee below an elevation of 2,000 feet, so far as I could ascer- 
tain, and the majority live above 4,000 feet. They are unknown on 
the Cumberland plateau. Lack of suitable specimens prevents me 
from making the necessary comparisons, but I am suspicious that 
the Red Squirrels of the Balsam belt of Roan Mountain are a dark, 
local race of hudsonicus which may merit separation from the typi- 
cal form. 
Specimen—Roan Mountain, Carter Co., 1. 


Genus SCIUROPTERUS F. Cuvier. 
28. Sciuropterus volans (L.). Southern Flying Squirrel. 

From reports of the hunters, and what we know of its distribu- 
tion in other parts-of the United States, this elegant squirrel may be 
said to be common all over the State of Tennessee from the summit 
of Roan Mountain to the western “ bottoms.” Specimens from the 
highest altitudes would be of interest in determining whether sub- 
species sabrinus, the northern form, is not found there. In the low- 
lands of Haywood County, Mr. Miles observes that in the evening 
this species “ makes a chattering sound, that sooner or later I hear 
whenever camped in the woods and don’t think I ever miss hear- 
ing in clear weather, never in foul weather. Five years ago, in 
the country, they took possession of my martin box and ran the 
martins out. I got after them and routed out thirty.” 


Order CARNIVORA. 


Family PROCYONIDA. 
Genus PROCYON Storr. 
29. Procyon lotor (L.). Raccoon. 
The “Coon” is excessively abundant in the bottoms of West 
Tennessee and Mr. Miles thinks their numbers there are increasing. 
In other parts of the State they appear to be well represented. 


Family MUSTELIDA. 
Genus LUTRA Linnzus. 


30. Lutra hudsonica Lacép. American Otter. 

This fisherman is often seen by hunters at Reelfoot Lake. A 
specimen was killed at Open Lake, Lauderdale Co. this winter and 
was seen by Mr. Miles. The otter is a rare but constant inhabitant 
of all the larger streams in the State. 


198 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896 


Genus LUTREOLA Wagner. 
31. Lutreola vison Schreber. Mink. 
$2. Lutreola vison vulgivagus (Bangs). Louisiana Mink. 

Only one specimen of mink from Tennessee has passed through 
my hands. It is a skull of a mink taken at Open Lake in Lauder- 
dale County, by Mr. Miles. This specimen corresponds so closely 
to Mr. Bangs’ diagnosis of vulgivagus, as contrasted with typical 
vison, that I am induced to class it with the former, but the cranial 
differences in vulgivagus, however, constant they may have proved, ~ 
do not appear to me specific. There is little doubt that the minks 
of eastern Tennessee are typical vison.” 

Specimen—Open Lake, Lauderdale Co., 1. 


Genus PUTORIUS Cuvier. 
83. Putorius noveboracensis Emmons. Carolina Weasel. 


This weasel is said to be common in West Tennessee, and, from 
what we know of its general distribution, is nowhererare. Regard- 
ing the possible occurrence of the Canadian Weasel, Putorius rich- 
ardsoni cicognani (Bonap.), in the Smoky Mountains, Mr. Outram 
Bangs, who has been making a special study of the eastern forms, 
writes me that Putorius noveboracensis is numerous on Roan Mount- 
ain but that cicognani he has “ never seen from any locality south 
of the lower Hudson Valley, although it may occur in Pennsyl- 
vania and West Virginia.” 


Genus MUSTELA Linneus. 
34. Mustela pennanti (Erxl.). Fisher. Pekan. 


There is little doubt that the Pekan was long ago exterminated 
in East Tennessee, as none of the hunters with whom I conversed 
knew of such an animal. Dr. Merriam includes it among the 
Alleghenian species not to be found on Roan Mountain in 1887. 
Audubon and Bachman” speak of this animal’s occurrence in the 
State as follows: ‘We have seen several skins procured in East 
Tennessee and have heard of at least one individual that was 
captured near Flat Rock in that State, latitude 35°.” 


To these may be added L. vison lutreocephalus (Harlan) which Mr. Bangs, 
(Proc. Bos. Soc. Nat. Hist., 1896, pp. 1-6.) considers separable from true 
L. vison of the Boreal zone. The latter Mr. Bangs thinks may range into 
the higher Alleghenies of North Carolina. On this basis I retain the name 
as above listed under No. 31. 


™ Quad. N. Amer., I, p. 314. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 199 


The Pine Marten, Mustela americana, does not seem to have been 
noted farther south than central Pennsylvania in the Allegheny 
Range, no records for Tennessee or N. Carolina being extant, to my 
knowledge. 


Genus MEPHITIS Cuvier. 
35. Mephitis mephitica elongata Bangs. Carolina Skunk. 

Reported to be rare in the Mississippi lowlands. I rarely detected 
the signs of this animal in Tennessee, though every one seems to be 
acquainted with the animal in all localities visited except, perhaps, 
on the summits of highest mountains. 

Mr. Bangs has separated* the skunk of the East Canadian fauna 
from the southern animal, giving the latter a new subspecific name, 
as above. 


Family URSIDZ. 
Genus URSUS Linneus. 


36. Ursus americanus Pallas. American Black Bear. 

Bears are now very scarce, even in the wildest territory of the 
State, but formerly this species was wonderfully plentiful in the cane- 
brakes of West Tennessee. It is difficult to credit the straight for- 
ward anecdotes narrated by David Crockett of his experiences with 
this game in the bottoms of Obion County. On one occasion he 
killed four bears in one day and 105 in less than one year. 

The hunters at Reelfoot Lake, think they are all killed off and 
say that none have been shot for several years. Mr. Miles writes 
that “ A bear was killed in the west border of Haywood County 
in 1865—the last one I think—though in Lauderdale County, one 
is occasionally killed now.” 

Dr. Merriam found bears in the Great Smoky Mountains in 1887, 
but I was told that none have been seen on Roan Mountain for 
several years. On the Cumberland plateau they seem to have been 
practically exterminated. 


Family CANIDZ. 
Genus UROCYON Baird. 


37. Urocyon cinereoargenteus (Miill.). Gray Fox. 
Found all over the State but said to be supplanted by the Red 
Fox in western portions, where it is Jess common than formerly. It 


13 Proc. Bost. Soc. N. Hist., 1895, pp. 1--7. 


200 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


sometimes courses over the balsam belt of Roan Mountain when 
pursued by dogs, but does not reside at so great an altitude. 


Genus VULPES Baird. 


38. Vulpes pensylvanicus (Bodd.). American Red Fox. 


Always numerous in the mountains, the Red Fox has spread with 
the increasing population into West Tennessee, where it was un- 
known to the early pioneers. The same conditions are true of the 
Central Basin and of Middle Kentucky. 

Mr. Miles calls it common in his locality now, though it was intro- 
duced or migrated thither only forty years ago. 


Genus CANIS Linnzus. 


89. Canis lupus nubilus (Say). American Wolf. 


In 1887 Dr. Merriam found the wolf still existing in the Smoky 
Mountains. One was seen during the winter, about the year 1883, 
near Cloudland Hotel. A few may yet exist in the southern 
Alleghenies, but they are exceedingly rare. 

In Middle Tennessee they seem to be extinct. Their status in the 
lowlands of West Tennessee may be gathered from the following 
quotations from letters sent me by Mr. Miles, the first of which was 
the result of a publication as to the specific identity of black and gray 
wolves made in Forest and Stream for August 31, 1895: “Since 
the article for Forest and Stream was written Major Shaw, an old 
hunter of this County, tells me that many years since he captured a 
a litter of seven wolf whelps, three of which were gray and four 
black. * * * Our present wolf is larger and very much fiercer 
than those of my childhood, at least those specimens were which 
came under my observation. I suppose our present big gray 
wolf has always been here and some favorable circumstance must 
have developed his numbers.” In a more recent note Mr. Miles 
announces the killing of two wolves by poison about the 10th of 
December, 1895, within seven miles of Brownsville, “ by a man who 
had killed hogs and heard the wolves howling near, when he put 
out poison with the above result.” 

Summing up the case for Lauderdale County, Mr. Miles says the 
“Large Gray” is “common” (!); the “Small Black” is “rare” 
and the “ Yellow Medium, very rare.” 


; 


i 
1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 201 


Family FELIDA. 
Genus LYNX Kerr. 


40. Lynx rufus (Guld.). Wild Cat. 


This species is yet numerous in all the wilder tracts of country. 
It is common in the swamps and bottoms of the western regions, 

41. *tLynx canadensis Kerr. Canada Lynx. 

With no little hesitation, I include this species in the fauna of 
the Tennessee on the statements of Prof. E.D. Cope.* He says: 
“ Like the Red Squirrel, the Canada Lynx extends to the southern 
limits of the Allegheny ranges, occupying the highest ground, 
though apparently not so restricted to the elevations as the first 
named. It is distinguished, by the name catamount, from the 
Iynx rufus which is called wild cat and is well known to the 
hunters.” No cotemporary or previous writer that I have been able 
to consult, confirms these statements and unless Prof. Cope examined 
specimens it is probable he was misled by the statements of hunters. 


Genus FELIS Linneus. 
42. Felis concolor (L.). Puma, Panther. 

The panther appears to have been exterminated in all parts of the 
State except the most impassable brakes and “ harricanes ” of the 
bottoms of Lauderdale County. This exception is made on the 
authority of Mr. Miles, who is confident that a few yet exist in that 
locality. 


Order INSECTIVORA. 


Family TALPIDA. 
Genus SCALOPS. 
°48. Scalops aquaticus (L.). American Mole. 

No moles were captured. Their underground labors in Tennessee 
were in frequent evidence. It is not probable that any other form 
of this genus is to be found in the State than the one prevailing in 
our Middle States. 

Mr. Miles reports the mole common in Haywood County “ where- 
ever land is rich, and is troublesome in that he burrows in the rows 
and destroys growing plants, and runs tunnels up and down hill 
which I have seen in one season wash into gullies 18 inches deep.” 
Any one who has noted the extreme solubility of the agricultural 


14Fauna of S. Allegh., Amer. Nat., 1871, p. 395. 
14 


202 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


soils of West Tennessee and has witnessed the complete destruction 
of large areas for farming purposes, due to careless tillage and heavy 
rainfall, will appreciate the significance of this remark. 


Family SORICIDA. 
Genus BLARINA Gray. 
44. Blarina brevicauda (Say). Northern Blarina. 

Specimens from the summit of Roan Mountain correspond closely 
in size and color to Quebec examples. Those taken at Harriman 
are appreciably smaller, like specimens from the vicinity of Phila- 
delphia. Bellevue skins and skulls show an exactly intermediate 
size and character between the northern animal and subspecies caro- 
linensis. As in the east, I found this to be the most ubiquitous 
small mammal of subterranean habits. 

Specimens—Bellevue, 1; Sawyer’s Springs, 1; Harriman, 4; 
Roan Mt., Carter Co., 2. 

45. Blarina brevicauda carolinensis (Bachman). Southern Blarina. 

The southern mole-shrew inhabits the bottom lands of West 
Tennessee both in the open and in deep, swampy woods. Typical 
specimens from the shores of Reelfoot Lake and Wolf River con- 
firm Dr. Merriam’s recent (1895) diagnosis of this subspecies in 
North American Fauna, No. 10. Dr. Merriam records (I. ¢., p. 14) 
a specimen from Big Sandy, on the river of same name in Benton 
County. 

Specimens—Samburg, 4; Raleigh, 1. 

46. Blarina parva (Say). Least Blarina, 

Prof. Baird records a specimen of what he called Blarina exilipes 
from Brownsville, Tennessee, obtained by Capt. S. Van Vliet. 
Baird’s exilipes being proved asynonym of parva, I place it as above. 
Dr. Merriam” questions if Baird’s record should not have been 
Brownsville, Texas. No evidence to the contrary being given, 
and the habitat of parva being in the faunal territory occupied 
by West Tennessee, I feel justified in accepting Baird’s record as 
it stands. I did not secure any of this species, nor can I find other 
records of its occurrence in the State. 


Genus SOREX Linneus. 
47. Sorex personatus (Geoff. St. Hil.). Masked Shrew. 
In the deep balsam forests which crown the summit of Roan 


15 N, Amer. Fauna, No. 10, p. 7. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 203 


Mountain this tiny shrew was numerous. Its burrows were found 
under decaying logs and large stones in moist places along the 
bridle path leading directly from Cloudland to the Doe River 
valley. 

Specimens—Roan Mt., Carter Co., 4. 

48. Sorex fumeus Miller. Smoky Shrew. 

Two specimens of this large Sorex were taken on Roan Mountain 
in similar situations to those frequented by the Masked Shrew. A 
large number of specimens of both species were taken by Dr. 
Merriam and his assistants on the North Carolina side of the mount- 
ain. 

To the painstaking and intelligent studies of my friend Gerrit S. 
Miller, Jr.° we are indebted for the identification and naming of the 
‘Smoky Shrew, as well as the simplification of a group of mammals 
whose identity and nomenclature had become so confused as to be a 
byword and reproach to American mammalogy. 

Specimens—Roan Mt., Carter Co., 2. 


Order CHIROPTERA. 


Family VESPERTILIONIDE. 
Genus ATALAPHA Rafinesque. 
49. Atalapha borealis (Mull.). Red Bat. 

A few of these bats were noted in the mountains of East Tennessee. 
None were found in the caves nor in Mammoth Cave. Specimens 
from Tyree Springs and Knoxville are recorded in the catalogue of 
the National Museum. . 

Not having any records of the presence of the Hoary Bat, Atala- 
pha cinerea, in the State, it may be mentioned that it is likely to 
occur either as a migrant or resident anywhere east of the Cumber- 
land plateau. 

Genus VESPERTILIO Linnzus. 
50. Vespertilio lucifugus (Le C.). Little Brown Bat. 

I am informed by Messrs. Brimley of Raleigh, N.C., that they 
received four specimens of this bat collected by J. T. Park at Warner, 
Hickman Co., Tennessee. One was taken in April, another in July, 
the rest in September. ¥ 

As Dr. H. Allen has adopted it,” this name is subspecifically ap- 


46N. Amer. Fauna, No. 10, pp. 38 and 50. 
™ Mon. N. Amer. Bats, 1893, p. 78. 


204 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


plicable to the little brown bat which he had previously called swb- 
ulatus in the first monograph and to which he now applies (p. 75) 
the name gryphus of F. Cuvier. Taking for granted that his iden- 
tification and choice of names is correct, we will have to alter their 
order to accord with sequence of publication, V. ducifugus (1831) 
being the type and JV. ducifugus gryphus (1832) the subspecies. But 
I fail to discover that Dr. Allen has indicated in what respect or to 
what geographical or faunal areas the subspecies in either case shall 
be distinguished or restricted. The doctor apparently accepts gry- 
phus (p. 76, last par.) as “the name of the eastern species,” but 
does not say whether he means lucifugus to represent the western 
form.  It-is difficult to come to any other conclusion than that he 
did so intend it, unless the trinomial was used merely to indicate a 
type of individual variation having no regard to faunal distribution. 
Cuvier’s type of gryphus came from New York, Leconte’s type of 
lucifugus appears to have come from Georgia. Granting with Dr. 
Allen that these names were applied to the same species of eastern 
bat, it is impossible to use either name for any of its geographic sub- 
species, and hence, Leconte’s having priority, Cuvier’s name is 
merely a synonym. 


Genus ADELONYCTERIS H. Allen. 


51. Adelonycteris fusca (Beauy.). Brown Bat. 

I found this bat abundant in the lowlands. None were seen on 
the summit of Roan Mountain. Specimens from Hickman County, 
are recorded by the Messrs. Brimley. It is found on the Cumber- 
land plateau. 


Genus VESPERUGO Keyserling & Blasius. 


52. Vesperugo carolinensis (Geoff.). Carolina Bat. 

This is a common form in the caves of Kentucky and Tennessee 
but is not as abundant there as Vespertilio lucifugus. Mr. Park 
took three specimens in Hickman County. 

Specimens—Vaughan’s Cave, Bellevue, 3. 


Genus NYCTICEJUS Rafinesque. 
53. Nycticejus humeralis (Raf.). Rafinesque’s Bat. 
Five specimens of this animal, taken in Hickman County by Mr. 
Park in August and September, have been identified by the Messrs. 
Brimley. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 205 


Genus LASIONYCTERIS Peters. 
54. tLasionycteris noctivagans (Le C.). Silvery Bat. 

On two occasions it was my opinion that I had seen the Silvery 
Bat in Tennessee, viz. at Sawyer’s Springs and on Roan Mountain. 
The fluttering, moth-like flight of some of these mountain bats was 
characteristic of the peculiar movements of noctivagans, and on this 
identification I admit it here with a query. From our knowledge 
of the wide distribution of this species in North America there is 
little doubt that it is to be found over the greater part of the State. 


Order PRIMATES. 


Family HOMINIDZ. 
Genus HOMO Linnus. 


55. Homo sapiens americanus. North American Indian. 

I shall make no apology for including aboriginal Man in a faunal 
list of the native and feral mammalia of Tennessee. The customary 
omission of the genus Homo from such lists finds no justification in 
nature or in science. 

For accounts of the history, distribution and habits of the native 
Indian races of Tennessee, the reader is referred to Haywood’s 
Natural and Aboriginal History of Tennessee. For the history of 
their extinction no references are necessary. 


206 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Marcu 3. 
The President, SamuEet G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 
Two hundred and fifty-eight persons present. 


Messrs Morris E. Leeps and J. 8. Sroxes of Messrs Queen 
& Co. gave a resumé of investigations relating to Roentgen photo- 
graphy and a demonstration of the processes employed. (No 
abstract). 


Marcu 10. 
The President, SamuEL G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair. 


Forty-nine persons present. 


Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :— 

“Summary of New Liberian Polydesmide,” by O. F. Cook, was 
presented for publication. 

“The Minerals of South Carolina,” by J. G. Hartzell, Jr. 


Two Supposed New Trap Dykes in Chester County, Pennsylvania. 
—The following communication was read from Dr. PERsIFOR 
FRAZER :— 

In a paper read before the Academy, Feb. 1, 1896, Mr. Theo. D. 
Rand calls attention to two trap dykes which he thinks have thus far 
escaped notice. The writer is unable to ascertain by the localities 
to which Mr. Rand refers, the beginning of the one said to be in the 
northern half of the County. viz.: “ Williams’ Quarry, near Aldham.” 
The trap is called “a peculiar porphyry * * containing the variety 
of silica Vetsan ;” and it is said that “a rock which Mr. Goldsmith 
has pronounced identical occurs near Barneston Station on the 
Waynesburg branch of the Penna. R. R.” In the working town- 
ship map used by the writer in his field studies of the geology of 
Chester County, is found noted a porphyritic quartzose syenite. In 
Report of Progress, Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, 
Volume C 4, p. 248, 3d paragraph from bottom, a quartz porphyry 
is also noted as visible in place probably about half a mile south of 
Barneston Station. 

The second dyke which begins in Downingtown is probably the 
same to which the following reference is made (same volume, p. 
274). “At several points on the road leading south from the 
Downington R. R. station occur fragments of trap.” 

Again just south of the northernmost apex of West Marlboro’ town- 
ship and within a short distance of Doe Run the existence of trap 
is noted on the working field township map of the writer, as is also 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 207 


the case on his working township map of Caln about two miles 
west of Downingtown. 

It is only fair to remark that, in the nature of things, much must 
be discovered as time goes on which was not observed by the last 
field geologist. New cuts are made, obscure outcrops are made dis- 
tinct by continued weathering, etc. ; yet it is also true that different 
observers may give different values and interpretations to the same 
phenomena. 

The writer added many dykes of trap to those already recognized 
in geological maps before his werk began, but he refrained ina 
great many instances from connecting together scattered locali- 
ties where trap fragments occurred, on the assumption that these 
represented a dyke, because he was often unable to assure himself that 
these fragments were anywhere near the place of their origin, or 
uncertain which of the many scattered localities should be joined. 
In a country so much denuded as that of Chester Co., Pennsylvania, 
and where collections of surface fragments of trap occur so frequently, 
it is generally hazardous to indicate their relations to each other 
without more substantial grounds than mere geographical position. 

As a matter of fact, a very large number of such indications 
which appear on the writer’s field maps were never transferred to 
his final geological map, and in some cases not alluded to in the 
text, because of the difficulty of ascertaining whether or not they 
possessed real importance. 


Marcu 17. 
The President, SamuEL G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair. 


Twenty-eight persons present. 


Marca 24. 
The President, SAamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 
Twenty-nine persons present. 


The death of Samuel H. Gilbert, a member, March 20, was 
announced. 


Marcu 31. 
The President, SAamurL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 
Thirty-six persons present. 


The death of Jean Gundlach, a correspondent, March, 1896, 
Was announced. 


208 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


A paper under the following title was presented for publication :— 


“Dr. Collett on the morphology of the cranium and the auricular 
openings in the north European species of the Family Strigide; 
to which is added some recent opinions upon the systematic position 
of the Owls,” by R. W. Shufeldt, M. D. 

On the recommendation of the Council an invitation to the 
Academy from the University of Glasgow to participate in the 
celebration of the fiftieth year of the Right Honorable Lord 
Kelvin’s tenure of office of the Chair of Natural Philosophy therein 
was accepted and GENERAL Isaac JonES WIsTAR was appointed 
to represent the Academy on the occasion. 


On a Collection of Barnacles—Mr. H. A. Pitspry spoke of a collec- 
tion of barnacles from the bottom of the iron ship “ Puritan ” of Glas- 
gow, which had been dry docked in Cramp’s shipyard after a voyage 
from San Francisco to Hong Kong, and to Philadelphia via Java and 
India. The forms represented were Balanus tintinnabulum L., B. 
tintinnabulum zebra Darwin, B. tintinnabulum spinosus Gm., Tetra- 
clita porosa patellaris Darwin, Lepas anatifera L. and L. Hillit Leach. 
The forms ranked as varieties of B. tintinnabulum retain their in- 
dividuality perfectly, although growing side by side under appar- 
ently identical external conditions, so that their differential charac- 
teristics can scarcely be attributed to unlike environmental factors. 
The variety of Tetraclita porosa seems to be a rare form, originally 
described by Darwin from three examples taken off a ship’s bottom 
in Boston by Dr. A. A. Gould. It is very unlike the ordinary form 
of the species. Specimens of Ostrea rivularis Gld. are attached to some 
of the barnacles. As this is a species of east Asian seas, it is very 
probable that the load of barnacles was obtained in China; although 
the Balanidze themselves have been so widely diffused by commerce 
that alone they afford but little evidence of their original patria. 
The specimens were procured and presented to the Academy by 
Master Lester Bernstein. 


Pugnus parvus—Mr. Prispry also spoke of a remarkable shell 
representing a new genus of Tectibranchiate mollusks, Pugnus par- 
vus Hedley, of which a specimen from Middle Harbor, near Sydney, 
N.S. W., Australia, was exhibited. The shell is involute, like that 
of Bulla, ’Haminea, ‘Cylichna and many other genera of Cephalas- 
pidea ; but it differs from all of these in the remarkable features of 
a thickened outer lip and thrice-folded columella. These characters 
caused Mr. Hedley, its describer, to consider Pugnus a “ telescoped ”” 
Ringicula. All other Ringiculide, both fossil and recent, have the 
spire developed ; so that Pugnus stands unique in that family i in its 
depressed and concealed spire. The generic name is an allusion to 
the resemblance of the shell to a clenched hand. 


1896.] . NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 209 


The following were elected members :— 

E. G. Conklin, Ph. D., Louis S. Amonson, Jacob Reese, A. 
seleeresbeieain Smith, M. D., Charles L. Phillips, Walter P. Stokes and 
Mary T. S. Schaeffer. 

The following were ordered to be printed :— 


210 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


THE CRYSTALLIZATION OF MOLYBDENITE. 
BY AMOS P. BROWN. 


Although molybdenite, Mo §,, has been known to mineralogists 


since crystallography was first studied, its crystalline form has never - 


been satisfactorily determined. It has been provisionally assigned 
to the hexagonal and monoclinic systems by different authorities, 
the general opinion being{that it is hexagonal. The crystals that 
have thus far been examined can be ex- 
plained on a hexagonal basis, but they 
are not sufficiently lustrous to admit of 
very exact measurement, and the softness 
of the substance also militates against the 
exact determination of its angles. The 
locality at Frankford, Philadelphia, has 
long been known to mineralogists as 
affording well crystallized molybdenite, and I have for some years 
been collecting material from there with a view of making a crystal- 
lographic study of the mineral. Having in hand some crystals 
which are sufficiently lustrous for measurement on the reflecting 
goniometer I have examined them and obtained some positive 
results. 

The crystals are hexagonal in habit, consisting of six sided prisms 
and barrel shaped crystals, the best of which are not more than 
6 mm. in diameter. They strongly recall some mica crystals and 
seem often to show atwinning with the basal pinacoid as the composi- 
tion face. A number of crystals were examined, the one giving the 
best results being a nearly perfect hexagonal plate of some 5 mm. 
diameter, which represents a broken crystal, only one termination 
being preserved. Nearly all of the faces gave fair images but the 
basal pinacoid was uneven, due to slight crumpling, and gave several 
images. By observations on a number of crystals these angles could 
be checked, however. The pyramid as a termination was not ob- 
served, all crystals examined showing the basal termination. The 
following crystallographic constants were observed : 


1896. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 211 


Molybdenite. Hexagonal, axis c=1.908; 0001 A 1011=65° 35’ 
. Forms observed : ¢ (0001, 0 P), 0 (1011, P, O), p (2021, 2P, 2), 
q (3031, 3P, 3), m (1010, &P, 7). 


Angles: Observed. Calculated. 
ép= (ot oie Baer hip bo 
GL LT) 
Gil 7) 
= 81° 31’ 81° 23’ 
mm= 60° 2’ 60° 


Besides these, the angle ¢ m was observed as 89° 48’ and several 
other angles near 90° on different crystals, but in general the images 
from m in this zone were imperfect. The angle ¢ 065° 35’ was 
obtained in the same crystal in adjacent zones, it was observed on 
several crystals. Oscillatory combination and probably vicinal 
planes render the measurements somewhat irregular but the above 
shows that the crystals may be explained on a hexagonal basis. 
The angle commonly observed is ¢ p==77° 13’ and has been reported 
as 75°. This seems to show that the pyramid 2P, (2021) is more 
common than the others. Many crystals only show two pyramids 
and the basal pinacoid, in others the prism is more prominent. 
While it is still possible that better crystals may show the mineral 
to be monoclinic, the above results are of sufficient value to place 
on record. It may be added that etching figures on the basal 
cleavage seem to indicate a hexagonal, perhaps rhombohedral 
erystallization. 


212 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


THE COLORING MATTER OF THE ARIL OF CELASTRUS SCANDENS. 
BY IDA A. KELLER. 


The presence of different pigments manufactured by the vege- 
table organism has forced the plant world upon the attention of the 
human race from time immemorial. If we submit the colored 
parts to microscopical examination we are usually confronted by one 
of two distinct cases. 

Firstly, we may find that the pigment, instead of pervading the 
entire cell, is found only in certain variously shaped bodies which 
are more or less regularly scattered through the cell contents. The 
best known illustration of this kind is to be found in ordinary 
leaves, the green color being confined to the chlorophyll granule. 
Secondly, if we examine other parts of plants we may find that the 
coloring matter is distributed uniformly throughout the cell sap. 
The blue flower of the Grape Hyacinth may serve as one of the 
many illustrations of the latter case. Wherever fixed and definite 
portions of protoplasm subserve a special function within the plant 
cell, these may be considered as parts of a unit and they may be 
termed organs of the cell. In addition, then, to the nucleus we may 
find various other organs as, for example, the colored bodies just 
referred to. A distinction must be made between such differentiated 
portions of the protoplasm and the products which are the result of 
their activity, between the colorless protoplasmic matrix and the 
colored product which makes it conspicuous. If we observe e. g., a 
living cell of a leaf of Elodea Canadensis we find as organs of the 
protoplasmic contents the nucleus and the chlorophyll granules ; as 
a product of the latter, chlorophyll and finally starch as a result of 
the action of the chlorophyll in response to satisfactory external con- 
ditions. Such conditions are a certain amount of heat, light, moisture 
and the absence of any injurious factors which might impede the 
various operations manifested in life activity. 

In dealing with the products of this activity we come to a problem 
of great complexity. It is true that certain phenomena as 
witnessed in the vegetable cell can be explained by known prin- 
ciples of physics and chemistry, and that many substances for which 
mankind was formerly dependent on the vegetable organism are NOW 
manufactured in the chemical laboratory. I need only recall the 


1896. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 213 


synthetic preparation of alizarin, alcohol, indigo, oxalic, citric, tar- 
taric and salicylic acids, vanillin and finally sugars, to call to mind 
a host of further illustrations. On the other hand it must be admit- 
ted that this victory, great as it is, has sometimes been overrated 
and has tended to make the scientist overbearing as shown by his 
attempts to resolve the phenomena of life into a simple operation of 
chemical and physical forces, without taking duly into consideration 
the highly organized structure of the protoplasmic mass, whose har- 
monious operation with a set of external conditions is manifested by 
what we call life. It is because of the exceedingly intricate mechan- 
ism of the protoplasmic structure, of whose operations we know very 
little, that our knowledge of the products of its activity is still 
extremely incomplete. Only in such cases, when we can obtain pro- 
ducts capable of crystallizing, can we with any certainty state that 
we have to deal with chemical individuals whose formulas may be 
ascertained. If amorphous we cannot be sure but that we have 
instead of one, a mixture of substances more or less closely allied. 

Before going further in the discussion of these plant products a 
few more words should be said in regard to the organs which bear 
the colors. The protoplasmic corpuscles have been appropriately 
designated chromatophores, which name is now generally accepted. 
It has been observed that as a rule, yellow, orange and brown 
(sometimes blue) coloring matters are deposited in such chromato- 
phores, while white, violet, blue and red (sometimes yellow) are 
usually caused by a solution of the pigment in the cell sap. It has 
been found desirable to make a distinction between the kinds of 
chromatophores. They are for convenience classified as follows: 
chloroplasts, chromoplasts and leucoplasts, the latter class, which 
are the colorless color bearers, being one of the contradictions in 
which the systems of human classification abound. The bond of 
sympathy is, however, their common origin, the fact that one may 
be converted into the other according to the conditions, and each 
one can originate only as a result of the division of pre-existing 
chromatophores. 

Chloroplasts, as their name indicates, are the green bodies which 
impart the green color characteristic of leaves and stems. The 
pigment in this case can be readily extracted by means of such 
solvents as alcohol, ether and chloroform, while the matrix remains 
behind as a definitely shaped, colorless mass of protoplasm. The 
pigment itself may under the influence of various factors, external 
or internal, undergo modifications into chemically different sub- 
stances, such as etiolin. 


214 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Chromoplasts include all colored chromatophores, not green. It 
may be seen from this that the distinction is quite an arbitrary one, 
Chromoplasts may originate from leucoplasts or chloroplasts. This 
latter case can be easily observed in the ripening of many fruits, 
as they change from green to red, for example, apples or the berries 
of the potato plant. 

As indicated by the variety of colors found in plants we have to 
deal with a number of chemically different substances. The litera- 
ture existing on these pigments is not very satisfactory. Although 
the metamorphosis of the chloroplasts into the chromoplasts may be 
readily observed the new substances resulting from this metamor- 
phosis are not well known. This past summer I became somewhat 
interested in the red color of fruits and collecting among others those 
of Ilex verticillata, I found that they turn brown in 50 per cent 
alcohol, those of Gaultheria procumbens turn gray ; those of Magno- 
lia glauca, dark brown; those of Lindera Benzoin, almost black ; 
those of Berberis Thunbergii, light brown; those of Crategus cocei- 
nea, dark brown. It is a matter of general observation that in most 
cases when immersed in alcohol the red color disappears and changes 
to gray, black or intermediate tints and this no doubt is due to a 
process of oxidation of the pigment. In rare instances, however, the 
red color does not seem to be affected by alcohol as, for examples, the 
berry of Arisema triphyllum and the aril of the seed of Celastrus 
scandens. The latter I determined to submit to microscopical and 
chemical examination and the following are the results of my 
observations. 

The coloring matter in this case occurs in chromatophores. The 
figure reveals the following anatomical structure:—A very much 
thickened cuticle (c) of a lemon yellow 
color. This without a doubt affects to 
some extent the tint of the aril which 
has some yellow in it. Courchet' states 
that the color of certain fruits is entirely 
due to the impregnation of pigment in 
such epidermal thickenings and he cites 
as illustrations Solanum macrocarpum 
and S. racemiflorum. The epidermis (e) 
consists of a layer of smaller cells of a 
rather uniform size. The chromato- 


1Courchet. Recherches sur les chromoleucites, Annales de Sc. Nat.; Bot. 
VII, Ser. VIL, 1888, p. 301. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 215 


phores (ch) within these are very conspicuous. They are rather 
closely packed together and lie parallel to each other. In color they 
are bright red, and in form very narrowly spindle-shaped. Below the 
epidermis, the cells constituting the rest of the pulp of the aril are 
of larger dimensions, and the chromatophores seem scattered irregu- 
larly through the cells. The drawing shows also the groove (9) be- 
tween the arils of two adjoining seeds. Attention has been called to 
the fact that the study of chromatophores and pigments can be carried 
on with entire certainty only within the living cells on account of 
their ready decomposition. When I collected my material I had not 
the opportunity of careful examination, but the resistance which 
this tissue manifests to powerful reagents, leads me to conclude 
that in all probability the arrangement as above described is iden- 
tical with that of the living material. I found further that sections 
from the dried seeds did not show any difference in appearance 
from that represented in the drawing. 

According to Zimmermann’ the pigments of chromatophores found 
in phanerogams, regarding which we have somewhat definite de- 
scriptions, are as follows: 

1. Chlorophyll green. 

2. Carotin including chlorophyll yellow. 

3.°Xanthin. 

4. Coloring matter of Aloe flowers. 

Although certain reactions are characteristic of each of these four 
pigments, and although an abundant literature exists, at least so far 
as the first of these, chlorophyll green, is concerned, we can not with 
any justification claim even such knowledge as the chemist has in 
reference to many organic compounds of the various complex series. 
A formula is attempted only for carotin which is said to be C,, H,,. 
The great difficulty in investigating these pigments lies in their un- 
willingness to crystallize. Carotin is the only one of these four 
which occurs within the vegetable cell in crystalline form, and 
which can be again crystallized when extracted from the plant. In 
regard to amorphous extractions complete certainty is always want- 
ing as to the purity of the product, i. e., whether we have a chemical 
individual to deal with or with a mixture of more or less closely 
related compounds. 


tes 


* Zimmermann, Botanical Microtechnique. Translated by James Ellis Hum- 
phrey, N. Y., 1893. 


216 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


In spite of these discouraging facts this field of research seems to 
me well worth especial labor and care and the only feasible method 
is to continue the careful investigations of Arnaud, Courchet, Im- 
mendorff and Zimmermann which will no doubt shed further light 
on this hitherto dark field, of interest alike to the botanist, chemist 
and physiologist. 

I selected the aril of the seed of Celastrus scandens, since some of 
the peculiarities of the pigment are well marked and I desired to 
find if possible its place in Zimmermann’s four pigments. 

Carotin is found as a crystalline secretion in the root of Daucus 
Oarota also in red flowers and fruits of other plants. It imparts a 
blood red color to carbon bisulphide in which it is readily soluble 
and from which it may be obtained in the form of a crystalline pre- 
cipitate by the addition of alcohol. I found that the pigment of the 
aril of Celastrus scandens was soluble in carbon bisulphide forming 
a deep red solution, but no precipitate was visible in the addition of 
aleohol. After evaporation an amorphous sticky mass resulted and 
it will thus be seen that it differs from carotin in this respect. 

In using various well known solvents I found their effects as 
follows : 

1. Water, no visible effect. 

2. Alcohol, 50 per cent no visible effect on chromatophores, but 
the solution was slightly tinged yellow. 

3. Alcohol absolute, more soluble; the solution of a deeper 
tinge. 

4, Ether, about like 50 per cent alcohol in color but a greater 
amount of yellow residue left on evaporation.® 

5. Aceton, about like 50 per cent alcohol. 

6. Chloroform, much more soluble, solution deep red. 

7. Carbon bisulphide, similar to chloroform, solution deep red. 

Carotin “according to Arnaud is insoluble in water, almost so in 
alcohol, very slightly soluble in ether, and most so in chloroform 
and carbon bisulphide. These solutions are colored yellow to orange 
yellow, according to their degree of concentration, while the solution 
of carotin in carbon bisulphide is always blood red.” * 


3 Tt is possible that the yellow matter with which the cuticle is impregnated 
influences to some extent the color imparted to the solvents. This requires 
further attention. 


‘Zimmermann, Microtechnique, p. 102. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 217 


Comparing then this statement with what I have observed re- 
garding the pigment under consideration we find that there is a 
close similarity as to its solubility and that of carotin. 

With concentrated sulphuric acid the chromatophores changed 
first to a greenish color and then to a decidedly purple-blue. ‘This 
same change of color was effected when concentrated sulphuric acid 
was added to the chloroform solution. With iodine (in potassium 
iodide) the chromatophores turned blue-green, like the color char- 
acteristic of the Cyanophycez. 

According to Zimmermann’ with a solution of iodine (e. g. aque- 
ous solution of iodine and iodide of potassium) carotin is colored 
greenish or greenish-yellow ; with concentrated sulphuric acid, first 
violet and then indigo blue. 

There is evidently, therefore, also much resemblance between the 
effect of iodine and concentrated sulphuric acid upon carotin and 
the red pigment of Celastrus scandens. 

Lacking, however, complete correspondence I next determined to 
discover if it approached xanthin more closely in its properties. It 
differs from this in its most conspicuous, although on that account by 
no means most important property, its color. ‘“ Xanthin occurs in 
yellow chromoplasts in amorphous form, and especially in small 
granules.© Its alcoholic solution leaves on evaporation a wholly 
amorphous resin-like mass. It is insoluble in water, little solu- 
ble in ether, chloroform and benzine but more so in alcohol. 
With concentrated sulphuric acid, the isolated pigment, as well as 
the chromoplast takes first a greenish then a blue color; with iodine 
best used in the form of potassium iodide it becomes green.” 

It will be seen from this that while the red pigment of Celastrus 
scandens differs from xanthin in its solubility it agrees with it more 
closely as regards the effect of sulphuric acid than does carotin. 
Another striking resemblance with xanthin is the resin-like amorph- 
ous residue left when the solvents are evaporated. 

The behavior of the coloring matter of the aril of the seed of 
Celastrus scandens with different solvents and other reagents leads 


> Thid., p. 102. 

6 Tt appears to me of no great importance to distinguish between pigments 
occurring in solution or in granules so long as we know no more about solu- 
tions than we doat present. Weconsider pigments in solution if present in 
such a fine state of division that the individual particles can no longer be recog- 
nized. It must be admitted than such an distinction is purely arbitrary. 

7Zimmermann, Microtechnique, p. 103. 


15 


218 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


us to conclude that in it we find a connecting link between the 
crystallizing carotin of red flowers and fruits and the amorphous 
resin-like xanthin of yellow flowers, and these observations tend to 
confirm Courchet’s views that the pigments of yellow and red 
chromatophores having the property of turning blue or green with 
sulphuric acid, thus distinguished from all other pigments, repre- 
sent a group of closely related compounds’ whose composition cer- 
tainly demands further investigation.’ 


8 Courchet, Recherches sur les chromoleucites. Annales de Sc. Nat., Bot. VII 
Ser. VII, 1888, p. 291. 

® The coloring matter described in this paper is also remarkable for its resis- 
tance tothe action of alkalies. Boiling with potassium hydroxide does not de- 
compose it. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 219 


APRIL 7. 
Mr. THEODORE D. Ranp in the Chair. 
Twenty-five persons present. 


The Serpentines of Eastern Pennsylvania.—THEODORE D. Ranp 
called attention to the specimens of serpentine presented this even- 
ing. They had been collected from numerous localities in south- 
eastern Pennsylvania. He regarded them, as stated in a paper read 
before the Academy, as belonging to at least two groups: one bor- 
dering the ancient gneiss; the other, which he believed to be much 
more recent, occurring in the mica schists and gneisses. 

The former are altered igneous rocks, either pyroxenic or chryso- 
litic, the chief material being enstatite, found often but slightly al- 
tered ; the latter of more doubtful and perhaps varied origin, deter- 
mination of which will require much more study of thin sections 
under tke microscope. 

The bright yellow serpentine from Easttown Township, Chester 
Co., is probably altered chrysolite chiefly, while that from Fritz 
Island, near Reading, is an altered dolomite. That from Brinton’s 
Quarry, near West Chester, contains bronzite, not entirely changed. 

The Radnor serpentine is chiefly altered enstatite, but specimens 
presented show, also, a change from asbestus into serpentine. 

No rock is better suited than serpentine to show that minerals 
have a life history, that they are not the unchangeable substances 
commonly supposed, for serpentine seems to be a stage in the life of 
many minerals of which magnesia is a large component, while ser- 
pentine, in its turn, decomposes into soil, or occasionally, indeed in 
this region frequently, into quartz. 


Perido-Steatite and Diabase—Dr. FLORENCE Bascom stated that 
she had recently made examination of thin sections from the ser- 
pentine of the belt running northeast and southwest from Chestnut 
Hill through the soapstone quarry to a point northeast of Bryn 
Mawr, and also of the trap of the Conshohocken dyke. 

The serpentine was from the quarries on the Black Rock road, 
between Mill Creek and the Roberts road. The belt lies wholly 
within the mica schists on the southeast side of the Pre-Cambrian 
gneiss. The serpentine proved to be derived from a peridotite and 
not from a dolomite or from an enstatite rock, as in other cases 
mentioned. The thin sections show olivine grains with the charac- 
teristic alteration to serpentine on their peripheries; much tale or 
steatite is present. The rock is, therefore, a perido-steatite. The 
dark green crystals, conspicuous in the hand specimens, often 
twinned, are pseudomorphs after olivine, and not after staurolite, 
the forms of each resembling the other closely. 


220 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


The rock of the Conshohocken dyke is medium-grained, compact, 
of a gray color on the fresh surface, a rusty green on the weathered 
surface. In thin sections it shows itself a typical diabase, with 
plagioclase, pyroxene, ilmenite and apatite, as primary constituents, 
and chlorite, serpentine, scanty biotite and calcite, as secondary 
constituents. The structure is characteristically ophitic: slender 
idiomorphic lath-shaped feldspars form a net work, while allotrio- 
morphic pyroxene fills the angular spaces. The feldspar is twinned 
according to the albite law, and its optical properties indicate that 
it belongs to the labradorite-bytownite end of the series. The py- 
roxene is a colorless nonpleochroic monoclinic variety. The cleay- 
ages and low extinction angle point to diallage as the species. Apa- 
tite is the oldest constituent. Ilmenite shows slight alteration to 
leucoxene. The rock is very like the Pine Rock diabase described 
by Dana in Amer. Jour. Sci., Vol. 42, 1891, page 82. 


ApRIL 14. 
The President, SamMuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 


Twenty-seven persons present. 


APRIL 21. 
The President, Samuet G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair 
Thirty-six persons present. 


A paper entitled “ A Revision of the Polar Hares of America,” 
by Samuel N. Rhoads, was presented for publication. 


APRIL 28. 
The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 
Thirty-three persons present. 


A paper entitled “ A Remarkable Central American Melanian,” 
by H. A. Pilsbry, was presented for publication. 

The death of William Hunt, M. D., a member, April 19, 1896, 
was announced, 

Dr. PersrrorR FRAZER was appointed to represent the Academy 
at the Seventh Session of the International Congress of Geologists 
to be held in St. Petersburg in 1897. 

An invitation to participate in the Mining and Geological 
Millennial Congress, to be held at Budapest, September 25th and 


“ae. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 221 


26th, was accepted and Pror. ANGELO HEILPRIN was appointed 
to represent the Academy on the occasion. 

~The following were appointed to constitute the Hayden Geo- 
logical Memorial Committee for 1896:—Dr. Persifor Frazer, Prof. 
Angelo Heilprin, Mr. Benjamin Smith Lyman, Prof. J. P. Lesley 
and Mr. Theodore D. Rand. 

Mr. William H. Roberts was elected a member. 

The following were ordered to be printed :— 


222 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


A BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH OF JOHN ADAM RYDER. 
BY HARRISON ALLEN, M. D. 


if 


JoHn ApAM Ryper,’ the first child of his parents, was born Feb- 
ruary 29, 1852, near Loudon, Franklin County, Pennsylvania. His 
parents are Benjamin Longenecker Ryder and Anna Frick Ryder. 
On his father’s side he was descended from Michael Ryder who was 
one of three sons whose father came from England and settled 
near Cape Cod, Massachusetts. Michael Ryder removed from Mas- 
sachusetts to Pennsylvania where his descendents have since lived. 
His paternal grandmother, Elizabeth Longenecker, the wife of Adam 
Ryder, was of German origin. She was born in Lancaster County, 
Pennsylvania. 

Anna Frick Ryder, the mother of John Ryder, was born in 
Maryland. She is in part of Swiss descent. The maternal grand- 
mother Anna Kelso was of Scotch origin. Her great grandfather 
was William, Earl of Kelso. At the time of the persecution of the 
Presbyterians in Scotland during the reign of Charles II, the Earl 
of Kelso, together with his wife, infant son and brother James, were 
compelled to leave Scotland. They sought refuge in Ireland, where 
James Kelso was captured, taken to London and executed. The 

1In the preparation of this sketch the list of questions prepared by Mr. 


Galton in his monograph on “ Men of Science’”’ was sent to the family of Dr. 
Ryder and the details in all respects are based upon the answers received. 
The expressions of opinion of the speakers at a meeting held at the Acad- 
emy’s Hall, April 10, 1895, have been frequently quoted. The words “ Me- 
morial Pamphlet,’ when following a quotation refers to a brochure entitled 
“In Memoriam,” which comprises addresses delivered at that meeting in 
the following order: Dr. Harrison Allen, Dr. Bashford Dean, Prof. Horace 
Jayne, Prof. E. D. Cope, Mr. H. F. Moore and Prof. W. P. Wilson. The 
brochure was printed for private distribution by a few admirers of Dr. 
Ryder in the fall of 1895. The writer desires to express his acknowledgments 
to many of Dr. Ryder's associates for information, especially to Rey. Jesse Y. 
Burk, Secretary of Board of Trustees University of Pennsylvania, Mr. W. C. 
Seal of Philadelphia, Prof. J. S. Kingsley of Tuft’s College, Massachusetts, 
Mr. Edward Brooks, Superintendent of the Public Schools of Pennsylvania, 
and Mr. Herbert A. Gill, Secretary of the United States Fish Commission. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 223 


estates were confiscated. A grandson of William Kelso, above 
referred to, came to America. 

It will be thus seen that Dr. Ryder was twice removed from an- 
cestors who combined English, Scotch, German and Swiss traits. 

Dr. Ryder’s father was by training a farmer. He became inter- 
ested in horticulture and at one time conducted a large nursery. 
His talents for invention are of an exceptional order; he has im- 
proved mechanical devices for preserving and curing fruits, vege- 
table and animal products, and has become widely known in con- 
nection with their manufacture and introduction. 

Dr. Ryder’s inventive ability can be traced in great measure to 
his father and remotely to the Longenecker branch of the family. 
His mother, however, possesses inventive skill in no mean degree. 
Ryder had no taste for music; in this respect he resembled his 
mother, since the taste was well developed in the father. He had a 
natural facility for drawing, although he never cultivated it beyond 
what was necessary for the illustration of his papers and for the 
class room. This talent, also, is traceable to his father. His taste 
for natural history is a direct inheritance from his mother. While 
Dr. Ryder never became much interested in medicine, many phases 
of his researches are so closely allied to this science that he may be 
said to have inherited the taste from his father, who, although never 
having studied medicine systematically, had that turn of mind 
which is constantly tending to contemplate the nature of disease. A 
paternal aunt of Dr. Ryder studied medicine. She was never grad- 
uated. Her medical opinion was frequently sought for and valued 
in the community where she lived. She was also of an inventive 
turn of mind. 

Dr. Ryder early exhibited a taste for natural history. When 
three years old he was constantly bringing into the house brightly col- 
ored stones, insects and other natural objects. At eight years he 
knew the botanical names of all the plants in his father’s nursery. 
While very young he was noted for a habit which distinguished 
him throughout life, namely, of always having his mind occupied 
with something apart from the duties in hand; thus, while helping 
his father at pruning or grafting, he would recite aloud passages 
from a favorite author, a copy of which would be found in his pocket. 
On one occasion his father hearing hearty laughter asked him the 
cause of his mirth. The boy replied he wondered how Diogenes 
felt living in such a small place asa tub, and what fun he must 
have had searching for the honest man. 


224 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Every farmer in those days kept a few swarms of bees. While 
Mr. Ryder was not a professional apiculturist, he knew in common 
with his neighbors a good deal about the raising of bees. Ryder 
developed an interest and without being specially instructed became 
proficient in the care of bees, and throughout life often reverted to 
their habits for many points in the economy of insects. 

At three years of age he began to receive instruction from his 
maternal grandmother from whom he early mastered the rudiments 
of German. He attributed his subsequent fluency in German (for 
he could speak it like a native) to this early impression. A little 
book entitled “Biblische Naturgeschichte fiir Kinder” bears his 
name on the cover with the date of 1860. 

Ryder spent the life usual to a country boy. He possessed great 
energy of body and was fond of walking, rarely, if ever, using a 
horse to ride, although the stable was athiscommand. He attended 
the country school from the age of six or seven until his fifteenth 
year, when he ran away. Soon afterward he was sent to the Acad- 
emy and then to the Normal School at Millersville from which he 
also ran away, and did not return home but lived the life of a tramp 
for some days before he was detected. He was severely punished 
for both these escapades. It appears that Ryder was always very 
sensitive and never associated with boys of his age in the sports cus- 
tomary to youth, but wandered about alone through the woods and 
meadows collecting insects and plants. He soon earned the nick- 
name of “crazy John.” In the end his father prudently inter- 
viewed the principal of the Academy and made special arrangements 
which enabled Ryder to live on more agreeable terms. But he was 
unhappy under restraint. Class work was distasteful to him and 
discipline of any kind resented. In order to secure his obedience 
it was sometimes necessary to give him directions adverse to those 
which it was intended for him to obey. Preferring to study in his 
own way, he spent the greater portion of his time in the library of 
one of the local literary societies. He read every book it contained. 
He was geatly influenced by Horace Mann’s “ Thoughts fora Young 
Man,’” a copy of which he procured. In 1875 in writing to his 
brother he said “ be careful of this book, five dollars would not buy 
it, if I were unable to get another.” In 1868 when in his sixteenth 


2“ A Few Thoughts for a Young Man: a Lecture delivered before the Bos- 
ton Mercantile Library Association on its 29th Anniversary. By Horace 
Mann. Boston: Ticknor, Reed and Fields, 1850. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 225 


year, he wrote home asking for a microscope, books on natural his- 
tory, chemical apparatus, etc. His restless spirit caused him to 
drop out of the school for good after a few months. 

He taught school in the neighborhood of Loudon and afterward 
in the High School of the county for three years. He was quite suc- 
cessful and was much esteemed by all who were brought in contact 
with him. 

We now find Ryder in his twenty-second year with the best 
equipment it was possible to secure for him in a rural district. His 
tastes were defined, and he at once made up his mind to devote him- 
self to the study of science. This decision was quickened by the 
failure of his father in business, so that Ryder was thrown entirely 
upon his own resources. Of a proud disposition, he refused all 
assistance from his relatives, and learning that the Jessup Fund of 
the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia afforded assist- 
ance to young men who were desirous of devoting themselves to the 
study of natural history, he came to Philadelphia in the spring of 
1874, and appealed to Mr. Thomas Meehan, an old friend of his 
father, for advice. Mr. Meehan states that Ryder visited him at his 
residence in Germantown. His funds were low, and to save money 
he had walked the entire distance, twelve miles, from Philadelphia. 
Mr. Meehan was interested in Ryder, who was, however, urged not 
to attempt to live on the small amount of five dollars a week per- 
mitted by the fund. But Ryder was not to be deterred. He felt 
confident that he could in some way manage, and accordingly, 
armed with a letter of introduction, he visited the Academy and 
made formal application. This was, at first, unsuccessful, but in 
the latter part of the year he was duly appointed. He remained in 
the Academy as a beneficiary of the Fund for six years. 

Little is known of his private life during the greater part of this 
time. In 1879, Mr. J. S. Kingsley, now Professor of Biology in 
Tuft’s College, Massachusetts, was his associate, and through him it 
is ascertained that Ryder lived on the top floor of No. 1115 Chest- 
nut Street. His chamber and laboratory were one. Upper rooms 
in business blocks were then cheap, and food at moderate prices, 
offered for the use of employés of newspaper offices in the neighbor- 
hood, could be obtained day and night. The markets and restaur- 
ants of Philadelphia furnish plain, wholesome food at rates which 
compare favorably with those in any American city. Meals at 
_. fifteen cents each are important factors in solving a problem of 


226 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


living on seventy cents a day. It was the custom of the proprietor 
of the restaurant frequented by Ryder to put aside for him the oys- 
ter shells, which, after each meal, were inspected for organisms. In 
this way he discovered the sponge Camaraphysema. Doubtless the 
work on the habits and food of the oyster, on which Ryder’s fame in 
a measure rests, began in these desultory studies. 

It was a time of formative plans. Among these may be recalled— 
an educational scheme by which the teachers in the public schools 
were to be prepared for imparting the elements of biology to their 
pupils ; a course of popular lectures at the Wagner Institute; anda 
series of papers on natural history for a Philadelphia paper. None 
of these came to anything. 

Such a life in a region of stores and warehouses is well enough dur- 
ing the week. The daysand nights are separated by the changes in 
light—but not by changesin habit. But on Sunday the business part 
of a city is but little better than a desert. Ryder was in the habit 
of spending this day, when the season favored his so doing, in the 
suburban districts, or in Fairmount Park. It was on such excur- 
sions he discovered Scolopendrella and Eurypauropus. 

The previous education of Ryder was one inadequately qualifying 
him for the career of a naturalist. This, indeed, is not less than that 
required to equip a student for any intellectual career whatsoever. 
How immense the labor when one is compelled to equip himself! The 
naturalist must be a linguist (for there is scarcely a modern Euro- 
pean language which may not possess a treasure for his needs) ; he 
is all the better for being a draughtsman; he should command a 
good literary style; he should be a mathematician and physicist. 
Ryder, in these preparatory years, attempted all these things but the 
last. His endeavors to acquire new languages and a good literary 
style were unending. One of his favorite pastimes was to read an 
essay of Addison twice and then write out the essay from memory. 
He would then compare his sketch with the original. His tastes in 
art were not formed, and he rarely alluded to the subjects embraced 
among the humanities. 

Mr. W. P. Seal, the well-known aquarium expert, was of great 
value to Ryder at this time in bringing him all the unusual speci- 
mens he detected while making collections of fresh water fishes and 
plants in the neighborhood of Philadelphia. At the end of his ser- 
vice in the Academy, Ryder had contributed thirty-one papers, most 
of which were based upon studies made in the Museum or on 
low forms of life. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 227 


In 1880, the National Government was desirous of having investi- 
gations prosecuted in behalf of the United States Fish Commission on 
the life-history of the American food-fishes and other aquatic animals, 
especially their embryology and growth, the character of their food 
in the early as well as the later stages of life. In the judgment of 
Prof. Baird, who was at that time Commissioner, no one in the 
country possessed the qualifications to meet the provisions of such 
investigations in so high a degree as Dr. Ryder. 

He was at once invited to undertake the work, which not only 
gave him an opportunity of systematizing his studies (these were 
already embracing the higher problems in biology), but had the 
advantage of placing him in a better paid pusition. 

It is true that up to this date Ryder had given no special atten- 
tion to fishes, but he had obtained a general knowledge of the sub- 
ject at the Academy, his inherited talent for invention lent itself 
readily to the details of field-work, while his acquaintance with 
the lower forms of aquatic life fitted him for the study of the food 
of fishes, the study of their young stages, their parasites, etc.’ 

Dr. Ryder always referred to this period with interest. His first 
detail was to the field, but in 1882, Prof. Baird transferred him to 
the National Museum, occasionally only, assigning him to field- 
work. He was extraordinarily active during the six years he re- 
mained on the Commission. He contributed twenty-nine papers on 
the oyster and oyster-culture, and fifty papers on the development 
of fishes, their food material and methods of development. All his 
contributions were carefully prepared and showed extensive know]- 
edge of the subjects treated. He discovered, in 1888, a byssus in 
a young stage of the long clam Mya arenaria. Prof. Baird, in 
commenting on this discovery in his report for that year, believed “ it 
to be of economic importance since the young individuals now can 
be freely handled and transported.” Mr. Bashford Dean remarks : 
“T have heard it said that Dr. Ryder had, in his scientific work, 
grown up with the Commission ; it might, I think, be said even as 
justly that the Commission had, in a measure, grown up with him.”* 
His personality and methods had stamped themselves upon every 


3(1) The following papers, prior to 1880, related to Dr. Ryder’s contribu- 
tion to ichthyology : ‘‘ On the Origin of Bilateral Symmetry and the Numer- 
ous Segments of the Soft Rays of Fishes ;”’ ‘‘ Phosphorescence of very Young 
Fishes ;’’ ‘‘ The Psorosperms found in Aphredoderus sayanus.” 


* Memorial Pamphlet. 


228 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


officer of the Commission to which he had been originally attached 
as an expert. He “merited the confidence and esteem of every one 
from the Commissioner to the humblest attendant.” 

On the occasion of his resignation, 1886, Prof. Baird expressed 
himself in a personal letter in these words: “In view of the many 
years of your connection with the Fish Commission, and the valu- 
able services which you have rendered by the exercise of your pro- 
fessional skill and ability, I accept your resignation with very 
great regret.’ His work, however, on the Commission, did not at 
once cease. He was employed in May and June, 1888, to investi- 
gate the sturgeon fisheries in the Delaware River. During the 
remainder of the summer of the same year, he had charge of the 
station at Wood’s Hole. 

His interest in the study of Cetacea began while on the Commis- 
sion. Although his work on this subject was never extensive, per- 
haps no other group of observations better illustrate the higher 
characteristics of his mind. 

In 1886, it was determined by the authorities of the University of 
Pennsylvania, at the suggestion of Prof. Horace Jayne, to found a 
chair of Comparative Histology and Embryology. As stated by 
Prof. Jayne, “It was seen that a course was needed which would 
give students a thorough knowledge of comparative microscopic 
anatomy, together with the development of the tissues and of the 
different kinds of animal forms.’® The chair was offered to Dr. 
Ryder and accepted, though “ he hesitated at first,” to again quote 
Prof. Jayne, “because he mistrusted his power to teach and handle 
large classes of students, a mistrust which was never shared by his 
friends.” In many respects, the change from the duties of a bio- 
logical expert on the Fish Commission to those of a professorial 
position was beneficial. He was now enabled to systematize his 
time, and permitted to extend the range of his inquiries. By re- 
newal of associations at the Academy of Natural Sciences, he was 
assisted also in keeping thoroughly in touch with the progress of his 
favorite science. 

In illustration of the zeal with which he prepared himself for his 
new duties, the following extract is taken from a letter written to 
Mr. Seal, from Chambersburg. “I am embracing an opportunity 
for the collection of embryos of warm-blooded vertebrates, which I 


5 Report of Fish Commission, Bulletin, 1888, p. 251. 
6 Memorial Pamphlet. 


4 


2h OO ae 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 229 


have never enjoyed until this season, and, unless one can give his 
whole time to the work of opening hundreds of females with great 
eare, and have the means and time to preserve the material ob- 
tained, it is but very little use to bother with the subject. I have 
eviscerated about five hundred rats, mice, field-mice, moles, bats and 
musk-rats. I have a fine lot of embryos of all stages nicely pre- 
served. Besides this I have obtained two hundred and fifty spar- 
row’s eggs in all stages of incubation, which I have also put in good 
condition.” 

After an experience of nine years, terminating only in his death, 
it can be said of him that all the expectations raised at the time of 
his appointment were more than realized. He proved himself to be 
a diligent teacher and an esteemed colleague. As matters appear to 
be arranged for men of Ryder’s attainments, a university position is 
the best available. Speaking for the personal side of his career, it 
may be said of him, as ] am sure he might have said for himself, 
that to receive the respectful admiration and affection of pupils and 
to influence for good the mental development of youth, is for any 
man a sufficient reward. A former pupil, Mr. H. F. Moore, says of 
him: ‘“ What he may have lacked in some of the usual attributes 
of a successful teacher was more than compensated for by his 
keen sympathy, his painstaking care and his skill with crayon and 
pencil. If ‘he had found a point of interest in his work, he usually 
invited us to enter, and would unfold to us his hopes and aspira- 
tions with the enthusiasm and simplicity of youth.” Yet, after all 
is said, one must agree with his friend, Mr. W. V. McKean, that 
“ Ryder was essentially the kind of investigator that it would have 
been a public benefit to have established in an amply endowed uni- 
versity chair, so that he might be entirely free to pursue his re- 
searches unhindered by any mere task work.” 

Dr. Ryder enjoyed perfect health until 1882, when he contracted 
malaria while engaged in some researches in connection with his 
work on the Fish Commission, at Ridge, Maryland. He suffered 
from a recurrence in 1888, while residing in Philadelphia. About 
this time dyspepsia announced itself. He suffered greatly and be- 
came much emaciated. In the summer of 1890 he visited Europe, 
but returned scarcely at all improved. He had an attack of the pre- 
vailing influenza in 1894, and from this time more serious and ob- 
secure impairment of the general health ensued. He died March 
26, 1895, after an acute illness of a few days, aged forty-three 
years. 


230 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Dr. Ryder’s death was unexpected, and expressions of regret were 
universal. The daily papers published detailed accounts of his life 
and services. Immediately after the death, the Board of Trusteesof the 
University held a meeting, at which Dr.S. Weir Mitchell made a feel- 
ing announcement. The Board then passed the following resolution: 
“The Trustees of the University of Pennsylvania deplore the loss 
sustained by it in the death of John A. Ryder, Ph. D., Professor of 
Comparative Histology and Embryology. Called to that Chair in 
1886, he quitted for it a congenial field of labor under the United 
States Fish Commission, in which he had rendered great service to 
the Government, and acquired for himself a world-wide reputation. 
Thenceforth, he devoted himself equally, and with a fidelity and 
effectiveness that ended only with his life, to the work of a teacher 
and that of an investigator. His characteristic traits were modesty, 
unselfishness, and sincerity in the search for truth. To these were 
added a rare talent for investigation, strong intellectual capacity, 
and unremitting industry ; and these inured not only to the benefit 
of the schoo] in which he taught, but to the distinct advancement, 
both in theory and in application to the science of biology to which 
his life was consecrated.” 

The funeral services were conducted by Prof. George F. Fuller- 
ton, Vice-Provost, and the Rev. Dr. H. C. McCook. His body was 
cremated. 

A memorial meeting, held in the hall of the Academy of Natural 
Sciences of Philadelphia, April 10th, was participated in by mem- 
bers of the faculty of the University of Pennsylvania, representatives 
of the American Philosophical Society, the United States Fish 
Commission, and the Academy.’ 

Dr. Ryder was elected a member of the Academy of Natural Sei- 
ences of Philadelphia, January 29, 1878, and of the Biological Section 
of that body November 15, 1886. He was Director of the Section 
from 1886 to 1888. He was elected a member of the American 
Philosophical Society, December 17, 1886. The University of Penn- 
sylvania conferred upon him the degree of Doctor of Philosophy, 
1886. He was also a member of the following societies: The 
Zoological Society of Philadelphia (life member); the American 
Morphological Society; the American Society of Naturalists; the 
American Association for the Advancement of Science; the Asso- 
ciation of American Anatomists, and the Historical Society of Penn- 
sylvania. 


-T See note on page 222. 


= oop 2S 


; 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 231 


i: 


Dr. Ryder was a man of restless mental activity. Plan after plan 
was discussed in his early letters. No defence was offered for this 
eagerness of spirit. On the contrary, he says in one of his outbursts : 
“T see more worlds ahead of me to conquer, so that I have little 
time to attend to number one, that often restive and troublesome 
person who is always reaching for toys he ought not to have, greatly 
to the disadvantage of more serious matters.” Circumstances an- 
nulled most of his numerous enterprises, but the ideas were, without 
exception, admirable, and some of them were afterward realized by 
others. In 1879, he proposed to establish in Philadelphia, in con- 
junction with Mr. W. C. Seal, a depot of material for biological 
laboratories and class-room demonstrations. It was intended that 
Mr. Seal would collect and preserve the specimens which Dr. Ryder 
would undertake to identify and to furnish all other information. 
It was designed to embrace marine and fresh-water, as well as 
terrestrial forms. In association with his friend, Mr. J. S. Kingsley, 
he at one time thought of writing a book on the infusoria, a work 
that yet remains a desideratum. Dr. Ryder had a ready knowledge 
of thegroup. In later years he constantly reverted to it for illustra- 
tion in his studies of the movements of protoplasm. A third under- 
taking on the embryology of fishes was proposed. It never went 
further than the title-page. In 1887, he seriously contemplated a 
text-book on general embryology. It was to be “ copiously illus- 
trated and to set forth the principles from new points of view.” To 
this task he intended devoting two or three years. In 1893, he 
published, under the auspices of the University of Pennsylvania, a 
pamphlet entitled “ The Synthetical Museum of Comparative Anat- 
omy as the Basis for a Comprehensive System of Research.” 

It isa remarkable fact that Dr. Ryder, in his active and versa- 
tile career, never wrote an extended memoir. Everything he pre- 
pared for the press was the direct outcome of the practical tasks 
upon which he was officially engaged. 

His work in zoology* was not large. Reference to the bibli- 
ography shows that twelve papers may be so classified. He once 


8 Dr. Ryder made a few observations in physiological botany. Early in his 
career, viz., 1877, he noted the disposition of the tendrils of Cocculus indicus 
to twine. (Proc. A. N.S., 1877, 3). In 1879 he observed the honey-glands 
of the leaves of Catalpa, and the habits of bees respecting them. (Proc. A. N. 
S., 1879, 6; Pastime, 1881, II, 8; Am. Nat., 1878, 4.) 


232 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


said, “ The species makers are caviare to me.” But he himself did 
not escape the fate of most biologists in the making of species. 

I have given my impressions of his disinclination to study species 
elsewhere :? “ In competent hands the elucidation of species is not, as 
it has opprobriously been said to be, a dullard’s task of taking an 
inventory of nature, but the study of the ultimate forms which those 
organisms assume which breed true. The shifting of color schemes, 
the exhibition of the effects of food and climate on size in whole or 
in parts, and of other causes by which minute differentiations are 
started and maintained, are of unending interest, and worthy of the 
best powers of the naturalist. If Ryder had been more closely iden- 
tified than he was with the careers of the great academicians who 
had preceded him, it would in no whit have detracted from the 
value of his philosophical labors. One cannot but regret, if for no 
other reason than for his health’s sake, that he discontinued those 
fruitful excursions to our woods, ponds and rivers, by which he con- 
tributed so notably to our micro-fauna.” 

While Dr. Ryder did not identify himself with zoology, his repu- 
tation may be said to rest in great part upon his labors on the 
morphology of the early stages of the development of fishes. This 
work, for the most part, represents that accomplished by him as an 
expert on the Fish Commission. His interest in the subject of the 
nature of species was, however, a deep-seated one, and he was con- 
stantly reviewing masses of data which he had accumulated in at- 
tempting to explain the tenets of evolution. That these attempts 
should have been largely in the direction of dynamics was to be ex- 
pected, since he was enabled to apply to the problems his talent for 
mechanics and invention. He also had at hand the conclusions of 
many contemporaries who were with him eagerly seeking for a 
hypothesis of evolution not embraced in that of natural selection. 

As early as 1874, he wrote: “I think I have discovered a law 
which offers a way to the solution of the variation of forms in animal 
life. This law I propose to call the law of the dynamics of phylo- 
geny. In reading over Herbert Spencer's brilliant essay on the cir- 
culation of sap in plants and the formation of wood, I saw the solu- 
tion of the problem. Here is field enough for a Darwin. I almost 
shrink from the task when I consider its magnitude. Cleavage of 
muscular fibre; the processes of bone ; the arrangement of the bony 
layers; the change of form and length and of position of bony pro- 


®» Memorial Pamphlet. 


a 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 233 


cesses ; their relations as a whole; their relations to the muscles; 
their form, arrangements, etc., all proclaim a common law: while 
every abnormality, injury, reparative expedient, still further strength- 
ens it in my mind, and is the only thing that will demonstrate to 
the world the truths of the doctrines of unity of law and universal 
evolution. It completes Darwin’s work on a grander scale than 
Darwin ever dreamed of. It still further declares that there is one 
eternal ever-active cause, operating in lines of constant and mathe- 
matical precision. If Dr. Haughton, of Cambridge, can demon- 
strate the mathematics of the bones and muscles, surely some one 
_ else can study the dynamics that creates them.” 

His first work in speculative biology was an attempt to explain 
by such reasoning a law of reduction of digits in the mammalia.”° 
In the same year he endeavored to establish a dynamical theory to 
account for the modifications in the forms of tooth structure and to 
correlate this structure with the shapes of the lower jaw and other 
parts oftheskull. In the following year he discussed the mechanical 
genesis, degeneration and coalescence of vertebral centra in a gigan- 
tic extinct armadillo. 

He developed a theory on the origin of the amnion in 1886, and his 
explanation of the different types of placentz in 1887. In 1889 he 
defended the thesis “that the segmentation of the soft rays of the 
fins of fishes are simply fractures due to flexures, and that on the 
caudal fin they possess probably the same direction as the inter- 
myomeric fissures.”"* Ryder’s bibliography contains fourteen titles 
of papers which illustrate similar lines of reasoning. 

In the same year we have evidence of additions to his methods, 
for, while keeping to the lines already indicated, he added others of 
a different character, and sustained by broadly contrasted methods 
of expression. Allusion is made especially to his studies of the con- 
tractility of protoplasm, which is first mentioned in his paper, “On 
the Fore and Aft Poles, the Axial Differentiation and a Possible 
Anterior Sensory Apparatus of Volvox minor” and in his paper on the 
“ Origin and Meaning of Sex.” These papers began a series which 
Gincluded in the bibliography under numbers 174, 186, 190 and 191) 
dealt not so much with problems in dynamics as with the old vital 
doctrines, or, as would be expressed in modern phrase, metabolism. 
“The Origin and Meaning of Sex” appeared in the Biological Bul- 


10 Law of Digital Reduction, Proc. A. N. S., 1877. 
1. D. Cope, Memorial Pamphlet. 


16 


234 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


letin, Univ. of Penna., 1889. Extensions of opinion were printed 
in the Proceedings of the Academy, 1889, and in the American 
Naturalist, 1889, 501. He held that over-nutrition led to all forms 
of sexual reproduction ; that the male and female elements are con- 
trasted in their tendency to undergo segmentation—the female ele- 
ment having lost the power to undergo such segmentation spontane- 
ously (excepting in parthenogenesis),—while the male element is 
accompanied by an increase of segmental power, * * * *% 
“Sex probably arose simultaneously and independently in both 
female and male as soon as certain cells of coherent groups became 
over nourished, and incapable of further segmentation unless 
brought into contact and fused with the minute male element, or 
one which is the product of an increase of segmentational power 
which is transferred to the female element in the act of fertilization.” 
Important applications were made of the hypothesis to the study of 
variation, the evolution of sexual characters, and, as the author be- 
lieved, a consistent and simple theory of inheritance which is in 
harmony with all the facts of reproduction. At this time he was in 
a state bordering on exaltation. “I sat up late last night after the 
whole thing flashed across my mind in an instant,” he writes, “and 
did not sleep for two hours after I went to bed because my brain 
was going like a dynamo, thinking out detail after detail of my hy- 
pothesis. * * * * Wolfe and Schwann mark two eras in the 
history of hypothesis. I shall mark a third if I live to complete 
the sketch of the vast hypothesis. * * * * My disappoint- 
ments vanish into the uttermost inane when I think of what it bas 
been possible for me to achieve.” 

After such strong evidence of his belief in the value of this theory, 
it is hard to understand how he practically dropped the subject. 
Subsequent to the dates above given, I have come across no refer- 
ence to it, nor is any mention made of the matter in the estimates 
of his work that have appeared since his death. 

It is impossible to understand Ryder’s attitude toward evolution, 
without regarding his disbelief in the “ cult” usually known as Weis- 
mannism, which embraces the opinions that acquired characters 
cannot be transmitted, and that a portion of each organism is car- 
ried unchanged from parent to offspring. He said, in his paper on 
sex, ‘‘The hypothesis which assumes that the germ-plasma is pre- 
cociously set aside in order to render it unmiscible with the somatic 
plasma, and therefore immortal, is based upon a fundamental error 


—_—— 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 235 


of interpretation of the facts of morphology.” In another place, an 
address entitled “Dynamics in Evolution,” 1893, he said, “ experi- 
mental investigations in embryology will make no solid progress 
until the mischievous influence of such speculations have been eradi- 
cated from the minds of the present generation.” These opinions 
remained unmodified to the day of his death. Perhaps the best ex- 
pression of his views can be found in a lecture delivered at Wood’s 
Hole, 1894, and a second lecture entitled “A Dynamical Hypothe- 
sis of Inheritance.” 

The last phase of his scientific life is the most instructive, namely, 
that relating to the application of geometry and the differential cal- 
culus to the study of organic forms. The idea that anatomy and 
mathematics can be of mutual assistance generally comes to savants 
too late for practical use. Against the example of Helmholtz we cite 
many failures. Mathematics came to John Goodsir too late for 
anatomy, and anatomy to Fechner too late for mathematics. When 
Ryder saw the necessity of preparing himself in these sciences 
(for his early training had excluded them), he set to work to supply 
the defect with characteristic energy. He studied geometry and the 
calculus in spare hours. He became enthusiastic for them. He 
declared geometry to be the noblest of the sciences. He read the 
writings of Lord Kelvin carefully; his admiration for them was 
unbounded. At the time of Ryder’s death, two works lay on the 
bed, one was a text-book on the differential calculus, the other a 
volume of Lord Kelvin’s works. 

It is difficult to fix a time when the mathematical explanation of 
the mechanics of evolution occurred to him. We have seen that he 
was influenced by Haughton as early as 1874. If we can draw an 
inference from the reading of the paper entitled “The Fore and Aft 
Poles of Volvox minor,’ previously quoted, and again the essay 
“ The Polar Differentiation of Volvo minor” and “ Specialization of 
Possible Anterior Sense Organs” (No. 174, Bibliography), the idea 
apparently suggested itself by studies in the early Academy days on 
the infusoria and later on the development of simple organisms. 
The same conception occurs in his papers on “ Energy in Biological 
Evolution ; ” “ Ofthe Representation of the Relative Intensity of the 
Conflict Between Organisms;” “ Energy as a Factor in Organic 
Evolution ; ” “ Mechanical Genesis of the Form of the Fowl’s Egg ;” 
“The Adaptive Forms and Vortex Motions of the Substance of the 
Red Blood Corpuscles of Vertebrates ;” ‘“‘ The Correlation of the 


236 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Volumes and Surfaces of Organisms.”” One of the last demonstra- 


tions he made was at a meeting of the Bibliographical Club of the 
University of Pennsylvania, when he exhibited contractile films of 
gelatin in illustration of the mechanical conditions underlying the 
problem of the arrangement of the convolutions of the brain. 

In January, 1890, he writes: “It is my hope to reduce the doc- 
trine of evolution into a simple realization of Newtonian principles. 
The three great Newtonian laws of motion are at the bottom of the 
whole matter. Some day I shall be able to tell a great deal that I 
have kept to myself in order to test its truth, * * * * Tam 
engaged—and will be hereafter almost entirely—in determining the 
factors and processes which have effected the evolution and diverg- 
ence of species. * * * * J have at last worked out a new 
theory of inheritance which must ultimately replace those of Weis- 
mann and Darwin, or at least furnish the foundation by which the 
data and phenomena of variation and inheritance can be co-ordi- 
nated with the great universal principle of the doctrine of the con- 
servation of energy. The speculations of Darwin, Haeckel, Weis- 
mann, Brooks, DeBries, Strassburger and Nageli looking to a theory 
of inheritance are irreconcilable with the fundamental postulates of 
physical science, and must be abandoned. This also renders the 
conflict between the hypothesis of Darwin and those of Lamarck one 
of primary importance, and sharply defines the line of battle be- 
tween the thinkers who range themselves under the banner of one 
or the other of these prophets of transformism,” 

While it is impossible to say what Dr. Ryder would have accom- 
plished in his attempt to use mathematics as a medium of expression 
of biological problems, this much can be said, not only for him, but 
for all others similarly placed, that a course of training in geometry 
and the higher mathematics should be a part of the equipment of 
the student in biology. It does, indeed, seem pitiable that, ascend- 
ing the heights of knowledge, he finds, as he nears the top, that the 
key which he believes can alone open the temple erected there has 
been left behind. 


chk 


Dr. Ryder was five feet eleven inches high, of a slender, slightly- 
stooping figure. While spare he had a robust physique. He was 


12 See Bibliography, Nos. 182, 184, 186, 187, 189, and especially Nos. 190, 
191, 192, 195, 199, 200, 204, 205, 206 and 207. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 237 


of nervous temperament. His complexion was light—the hair 
flaxen. He was plain—almost careless—in his dress. He had a 
habit of sitting cross-legged and swinging one foot when deeply 
engaged in thought or study. He was of a genial disposition and 
enjoyed gatherings with his students after class hours, or discussions 
with his colleagues and friends at the Academy and other places. 
His learning was great, especially in contemporary literature, and 
nothing appeared to give him so much pleasure as talking of the 
work of his co-laborers; but he disliked what are called “social 
functions,” and toward the Jatter part of his life was rarely present 
at them. From the beginning of his scientific career to his later 
years he did not require much sleep, taking about six hours daily, 
though his habits in this resprct were never regular. He had great 
energy of mind, and power of accomplishing a large amount of brain 
work. His memory was remarkably retentive—he never forgot 
anything he once heard or read. In addition to his early attain- 
ment of German, he read for scientific purposes French, Italian, 
Spanish, Dutch, Danish, Swedish and Russian. 

His sense of duty was highly developed. He believed that the 
power of the will over action was practically without limit. Yet 
the motive for the exercise of the will must be from within. Hence 
ean be explained his apparent obstinacy of disposition as a child ; 
his aversion to class work at school; and his independence of con- 
vention, both as to thought and action in mature life. 

Sometime prior to his appointment on the Fish Commission, Mr. 
W. V. McKean invited him to write articles on natural history for 
the Public Ledger. But Ryder could not overcome a distrust 
that his essays would be too technical fur popular favor. That he 
should have declined an offer apparently so advantageous to himself 
at a time when he needed money, is an evidence of the rigid scrutiny 
to which he subjected all his actions. None but his most intimate 
friends knew of the costs he often paid to maintain his freedom 
of mental action. They were met without a murmur. But in their 
payment he doubtless drew largely on that vital energy, without 
which long life is impossible. His dearest friend said of him, “his 
self-sacrificing devotion cost him his life.” 

But, under the stern repression lay a child-like, affectionate 
nature. He was not happy unless he had one or more of his family 
with him; he was continually writing to the absent ones. His 
domestic letters contain full accounts of how he lived, whom he met, 


238 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


and of his enthusiasm for his discoveries. Those who knew him 
only as a scientist, had but little conception of the spirit that actuated 
him. His work was not aseries of merely intellectual achievements, 
but back of it all lay the feeling that he was bringing something 
bright and interesting from the outside world to adorn the home. 

His affection for kin extended to his friends. His relations with 
Prof. Baird were almost those of ason. His anxiety and distress at 
Prof. Baird’s last illness found expression in all the letters he wrote 
at that time. As is common with such natures, his sense of justice 
was keen, though no instance can be shown in which his indignation 
was not excited by the general sense of wrong implied in the situa- 
tion rather than by any personal feeling. 

Dr. Ryder’s religious training was that of the strict orthodox 
Christian faith as expressed in the teachings of the Mennonites. 
His paternal grandmother who directed his education was a woman 
of deep piety. For the faith of his parents he always entertained 
the profoundest respect, and at least toward the latter part of his 
life was inclined to return to it. At the age of eighteen he studied 
the Bible closely; and, ever afterward, no matter how limited his 
travelling effects, a copy of the New Testament was always among 
them. Though, as shown by his letters, he departed from the ten- 
ets of his early education, one cannot doubt that he retained all the 
force of a severe mental and moral discipline that such teaching 
implies. He was faithful in friendship; singularly frank and sin- 
cere in disposition ; and disliked violent language, dispute or critic- 
ism. He was always severe to himself, but sacrificing in spirit to 
those whom he loved. 

While a Jessup Fund student he became a devoted listener to the 
Rev. Mr. Mangasarian, an Armenian preacher, who, at that time, 
held a pulpit in a Presbyterian church in Philadelphia, but who 
afterward became a leader in an independent organization allied to 
the Society of Ethical Culture. In speaking of Mangasarian in one 
of his letters, Dr. Ryder uses the following language: “ He has all 
the charm of the finished orator combined with rationalism and 
advanced evolution.” Ryder greatly admired Emerson. He spoke 
of him as “the sanest man of the nineteenth century.” In writing 
to a friend who was in mental distress, he advised him to read Emer- 
son. He carried his admiration even to matters of scientific import. 
In his last paper he quotes from this writer the saying: “To a 
sound judgment the most abstract truth is the most practical.” He 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 239 


was much influenced by the teachings of the Stoics. “I would 
strongly advise you,” said he to a friend, “to get hold of the 
thoughts of Marcus Aurelius, when you are most provoked or vexed 
in spirit, and take their lessons to heart. Epictetus will do equally 
well, only I think Marcus is calculated to humble and content a 
man.” His letters contain many expressions of trust in an infinite 
beneficence, and he would have agreed with Epictetus as to “ whither 
dost thou tend after death, that is to nothing dreadful, but to a 
place from whence thou camest, to things friendly and akin to thee.” 

We admire Ryder not so much for what he accomplished as for 
the indomitable spirit that actuated him. With imperfect equip- 
ment, with engrossing occupation, and—for much of his intellectual 
life at least—with impaired health, he attempted the solution of the 
most difficult problems. It is not for us to consider in what degree 
he succeeded. Had Bacon, Franklin or Darwin died at forty-three, 
or had their days been absorbed as his had been, in cares and the 
routine of task work, how much less would have been their achiev- 
ments! It is enough for us to know that we are studying in Ryder’s 
life phenomena of a mind of the first order, and that we have lost 
by his death one of the brightest of the group of workers to which 
he belonged. . 


THE PUBLISHED SCIENTIFIC PAPERS OF JOHN A. RYDER. 
BY H. F. MOORE, PH. D. 


This bibliography was originally prepared for the Proceedings of 
the Ryder Memorial Meeting but the committee having that publi- 
cation in charge pointed out that the importance of Dr. Ryder’s 
work demanded for it greater publicity than that medium would 
afford. It was suggested that it would be most fitting to publish it 
with the preceding memoir. 

The list of papers given is supposed to be complete, being pre- 
pared partly from memoranda left by Dr. Ryder and partly by 
research in the bibliographies of the Zoological Record and of the 
several journals as well as in the sources of original publication. 

The citations, with one or two exceptions, have been verified, and 
the appended notes are partly from the Zoological Record, partly 
Dr. Ryder’s and partly by the compiler. The list is given under 
three heads: Original Research, comprising 215 titles; Descriptions 
of New Scientific Apparatus, 4 titles; and Translations and Re- 
views, 59 titles; a grand total of 278 papers published between 
1877 and 1895. 


240 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


ORIGINAL RESEARCH. 


1—On the laws of digital reduction. Amer. Nat., Oct., 1877, 
pp. 603-607. (Points out the modes of modification of the digits 
in response to the methods of use in the different forms of mamma- 
lia). 

2—On the evolution and homologies of the incisors of the horse. 
Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1877, pp. 152-154, 4 figs. in text. 
(Traces the history of the “pit” or “mark” in the incisors from 
the early equine forms to the existing domestic horse). 

3—Note on the color variation in mammals. Proc. Acad. Nat. 
Sci. Phila., 1877, pp. 272-273. (Discusses the probable causes 
which lead to a disturbance of the symmetry of coloration observed 
in wild animals when brought under the influence of domestication, 
assigning as that cause the protection which they receive under the 
latter, as a result of which asymmetrical and parti-colored individ- 
uals are protected and preserved to perpetuate their peculiarities, 
wild individuals of that character the more readily becoming the 
prey of enemies). 

4—On the growth of Cocculus indicus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. 
Phila., 1877, pp. 284-285. (Points out the habit or tendency of the 
terminal part of the newer apical growth to twine). 

5—The significance of the diameters of the incisors in rodents. 
Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1877, pp. 314-318, 1 fig. in text. 
(Points out the fact that the greatest diameter is in the line of great- 
est stress and is correlated with increased use). 

6—A dog with supernumerary toes. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., 
Phila., 1877, p. 321. 

7—On the mechanical genesis of tooth forms. Proc. Acad. Nat. 
Sci. Phila., 1878, pp. 45-80, 11 figs. in text. (This paper points 
out for the first time the correlation existing between the forms of 
the crowns of the teeth in the various groups of mammalia and the 
manner and direction in which the jaws are used to bring stress 
upon the teeth). 

8—On Polyxenes fasciculatus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 
1878, p. 223. 

9—Description of a new species of Smynthurus. Proc. Acad. 
Nat. Sci. Phila., 1878, p. 335, 1 fig. in text. Smynthurus quadri- 
maculatus sp. nov. 

10—On the form of the stapesin Dipodomys. Amer. Nat., 1878, 
9. 125. 
11—On like mechanical (structural) conditions as producing 
like morphological effects. Amer. Nat., 1878, pp. 157-160. 

12—Discovery of two remarkable genera of minute myriapods in 
Fairmount Park (Polyxenes and Pauropus). Amer. Nat., 1878, 
pp- 557-558. 

13—Bees gathering honey from the Catalpa. Amer. Nat., 1879, 
». 648. 

14—A monstrous frog. Amer. Nat., 1878, pp. 751-752. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 241 


15—The mechanical genesis of tooth forms. Dental Cosmos, 
XX, 1878, pp. 465-472. Abstract by Dr. C. N. Pierce of “On 
the mechanical genesis of tooth forms.” Proceedings of the Acad- 
emy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, 1878, pp. 45-80, 3 figs. 

16—Addenda to etiological views expressed in a paper “On the 
mechanical genesis of tooth forms.” Dental Cosmos, XX, 1878, pp. 
472-474. 

17—The gigantic extinct armadillos and their peculiarities, with 
a restoration. Popular Science Monthly, XIII, 1878, pp. 139-145, 
4 figs.in text. (Discusses the mechanical genesis, degeneration and 
coalescence of vertebral centra). 

18—Morphological notes on the limbs of the Amphiumide as in- 
dicating a possible synonymy of the supposed genera. Proc. Acad. 
Nat. Sci. Phila., 1879, pp. 14-15. (Points out the variation in the 
number of digits in the same specimen, rendering the genus Mure- 
nopsis untenable). 

19—Further notes on the mechanical genesis of tooth forms. 
Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1879, pp. 47-51, 1 fig. in text. 

20—Notice of a new pauropod. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 
1879, p. 139. 

21—Description of a new species of Chirocephalus. Proc. Acad. 
Nat. Sci. Phila., 1879, pp. 148-149, 3 figs. in text. (Chirocephalus 
holmanii sp. nov.). 

22—Honey glands on Catalpa leaves. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. 
Phila., 1879, p. 161. 

23—The larva of Eurypauropus spinosus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., 
1879, p. 164. 

24—Description of a new branchipod. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. 
Phila., 1879, pp. 200-202, 1 fig. (Streptocephalus sealii, sp. nov.). 

25—The gemmule vs. the plastidule as the ultimate physical 
unit of living matter. Amer. Nat., 1879, pp. 12-20. 

26—On the origin of bilateral symmetry and the numerous seg- 
ments of the soft rays of fishes. Amer. Nat., 1879, pp. 41-43. 

27—Ryder on the mechanical genesis of tooth forms. Amer. 
Nat., 1879, pp. 446-449. (Abstract with comments by Prof. E. D. 
Cope, of “ On the mechanical genesis of tooth forms.” Proc. Acad. 
Nat. Sci. Phila., 1878, pp. 45-80. And “Further notes on the 
mechanical genesis of tooth forms.” Loc. cit., 1879, pp. 47-51). 

28—On the destructive nature of the boring sponge, with obser- 
vations on its gemmules or eggs. Amer. Nat., 1879, pp. 279-283. 

29—Strange habitat of a barnacle on a garpike. Amer. Nat., 
1879, p. 458. (Platylepas decorata Darw. on Lepidosteus). 

30—An account of a new genus of minute pauropod myriapods 
(Eurypauropus spinosus). Amer. Nat.,1879, pp. 603-612, 1 pl. and 
2 figs. in text. (Eurypauropodide, fam. nob. Eurypauropus spin- 
osus gen. et. Sp. NOV.). 

31—Suceessive appearance of Chirocephalus and Streptocephalus 
in the same pond. Amer. Nat., 1879, p. 703. 


242 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


32—A third locality for Eurypauropus. Amer. Nat., 1879, pp. 
703-704. 

33—A_ probable new species of Phytoptus or Gall-mite. Amer. 
Nat., 1879, pp. 704-705, 1 fig. in text. 

34—The psorosperms found in Aphredoderus sayanus. Amer. 
Nat., 1880, pp. 211-212, 6 figs. in text. 

35—Scolopendrella as the type of a new order of articulates. 
Amer. Nat., 1880, pp. 875-376 (Symphyla). 

36—Note on a larval Lithobius-like myriapod. Amer. Nat., 1880, 

376. 
‘ 37— Trichopetalum. Amer. Nat., 1880, p. 376. 

38—Ichthydium ocellatum. Amer. Nat., 1880, p. 674. 

39—On the course of the intestine in the oyster. Amer. Nat., 
1880, pp. 674-675. 

40—Phosphorescence of very young fishes. Amer. Nat., 1880, p. 
675. 

41—On the occurrence of Freia producta Wright in the Chesa- 
peake Bay. Amer. Nat., 1880, pp. 810-811. 

42— Rhipidodendron splendidum. Amer. Nat., 1880, p. 811. (The 
first notice of this monad in American fresh-waters). 

43—A pale variety of Polyxenes fasciculatus. Amer. Nat., 1880, 
pp. 811-812. 

44—On Camaraphysema, a new type of sponge. Proc. U.S. Nat. 
Mus., III, 1880, pp. 269-272,1 pl. (Camaraphysema obscura gen. 
et sp. nov.). 

45—List of the North American species of myriapods belonging 
to the family of the Lysiopetalidae, with a description of a blind 
form from Luray Cave, Virginia. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., III, 1880, 
pp. 524-529. (Describes Zygonopus whitei, gen. et sp. nov.). 

46—The structure, affinities and species of Scolopendrella. Proce. 
Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1881, pp. 79-86, 2 figs.in text. (Scolopen- 
drella gratiae sp. nov.). 

47—Occurrence of the same species of Protozoon on both sides of 
the Atlantic. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1881, pp. 442-445. (The 
first record of the occurrence of Licnophora cohnii Clap. on the 
west side of the Atlantic). 

48—A valuable edible Mollusk of the West Coast. Bull. U. 8S. 
Fish Comm., 1, 1881, p. 21. 

49—Preliminary notice of the more important scientific results 
obtained from a study of the embryology of Fishes. Bull. U.S. Fish 
Comm., 1, 1881, pp. 22-23. 

50—Notes on the development, spinning habits and structure of 
the four-spined stickleback (Apeltes quadracus). Bull. U. S. Fish 
Comm., 1, 1881, p. 24-29. (Points out the existence of a pouch in 
the male which supplies a viscid material to be drawn out into 
threads which are wound around plants to form a nest. This paper 
gives the first intimation of the true source of the material of which 
nests of the Gasterosteidae are woven). 


1896. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 243 


51—Development of the spanish mackerel (Cybiwm maculatum). 
Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm.,1, 1881, pp. 135-172, 4 pls. 

52—On the retardation of the development of the ova of the shad 
(Alosa sapidissima}, with observations on the egg fungus and bac- 
teria. Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., 1,1881, pp.177-190. Including an 
appendix on the histological rationale of retardation, also in Rep. 
U.S. Comm. Fish and Fisheries, 1881, pp. 795-811. (2d ed. revised). 

53—A contribution to the development and morphology of the 
lophibranchiates (Hippocampus antiquorwm, the sea-horse). Bull. 
U.S. Fish Comm., 1, 1881, pp. 191-199, 1 pl. 

54—The micropyle of the egg of the white perch. Bull. U.S. 
Fish Comm., 1, 1881, p. 282. 

55—Development of the silver gar (Belone longirostris), with ob- 
servations on the genesis of the blood in embryo fishes, and a com- 
parison of fish ova with those of other vertebrates. Bull. U.S. Fish 
Comm., 1, 1881, pp. 283-301, 3 pls. 

56—On the nuclear cleavage-figures developed during the seg- 
mentation of the germinal disk of the egg of the salmon. Bull. U. 
S. Fish Comm., 1, 1881, pp. 335-339, 1 pl. 

57—Notes on the breeding, food and green color of the oyster. 
Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., 1, 1881, -pp. 405-419. 

58—Additional observations on the retardation of the develop- 
ment of the ova of the shad. Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., 1, 1881, pp. 
422-494, 

59—The protozoa and protophytes considered as the primary or 
indirect source of the food of fishes. Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., 1, 
1881, pp. 236-251 ; and Rep. U.S. Comm. Fish and Fisheries, 1881, 
pp- 755-770. (2d ed. reviséd). 

60—Notes on some of the early stages of development of the clam, 
or mannanose (Mya arenaria Linn.). Report of T. B. Ferguson, a 
Commissioner of Fisheries of Maryland, for 1881, pp. 81-91, 11 figs. 

61—An account of experiments in oyster-culture and observations 
relating thereto, made at St. Jerome’s Creek, Md., during the sum- 
mer of 1880. Report of T. B. Ferguson, a Commissioner of Fisher- 
ies of Maryland for 1881, 15 figs. in text. Appendix A., pp. 1-64 
and 76-80 (First Series). 

62—Structure and ovarian incubation of the top minnow (Zy- 
gonectes). Forest and Stream, Aug. 18, 1881. (The species was 
afterwards determined to be Gambusia patruelis, and the subject was 
treated of more fully in No. 65 of this bibliography). : 

63—Incubation of shad eggs in brackish or sea-water. Sea- 
world, Fishing Gazette and Packer’s Journal, Wednesday, Oct. 12, 
1881. 

64—Observations on the species of planarians parasitic on Limu- 
lus. Amer. Nat., 1882, pp. 48-51, 10 figs. in text, of egg-capsules, 
embryos and adult. 

65—Structure and ovarian incubation of Gambusia patruelis, a 
top-minnow. Amer. Nat., 1882, pp. 109-118. (Describes the 


244 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


mode of viviparous development of the species and points out the 
early absence of an egg membrane and the existence of an opening 
in the ovarian follicle comparable to a micropyle). 

66—Additional note on tne egg-cases of planarians ectoparasitic 
on Limulus. Amer. Nat., 1882, p. 142-148. 

67—Synopsis of the Scolopendrellidae. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
V, 1882, p. 234. Old genus Scolopendrella subdivided into 1. Seuti- 
gerella gen. nov. sp. 1, S. gratiae Ryder; sp. 2, S. immacalata New- 
port. 2. Scolopendrella Geryv. sp. 1, microcalpa Muhr; sp. 2, 
notacantha Gerv. 

68—A. contribution to the embryography of osseous fishes, with 
special reference to the development of the cod, Gadus morrhua. 
Rep. of U.S. Comm. of Fish and Fisheries, 1882, pp. 455-605, 12 
plates, 11 figs. in text. 

69—Preliminary notice on some points in the minute anatomy of 
the oyster. Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., II, 1882, pp. 185-137. (Points 
out the almost complete absence of connective tissues in tne body- 
mass of the young “spat’’). 

70—Observations on the absorption of the yelk, the food, feeding 
and development of embryo fishes, comprising some investigations 
conducted at the Central Hatchery, Armory Building, Washington, 
D. C., in 1882. Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., I, 1882, pp. 179-205, 1 
fig. in text. 

71—The microscopic sexual characteristics of the American, 
Portuguese and common edible oyster of Europe compared. Bull. 
U.S. Fish Comm., II, 1882, pp. 205-215. Reprinted in Ann. Mag. 
Nat. Hist., Vol. XII, 1883, pp. 37-48. 

72—Note on the organ of Bojanus in Ostrea virginica Gmelin. 
Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., [I, 1882, pp. 345-347. 

73—On the mode of fixation of the fry of the oyster. Bull. U.S. 
Fish Comm., IJ, 1882, pp. 383-387, 1 pl. (Points out the uniform- 
ity with which fixation of the fry occurs by the edge of the left 
mantle border, etc.). 

74—On the preservation of embryonic materials and small organ- 
isms, together with hints upon embedding and mounting sections 
serially. Rep. U.S. Comm. Fish and Fisheries, 1882, pp. 607-629. 

75—An account of experiments in oyster culture and observa- 
tions relating thereto. (Second Series). Rep. U. S. Comm. Fish 
and Fisheries, 1882, pp. 763-778. (Journal of experiments con- 
ducted at St. Jerome’s Creek, Md., in 1882. Mode of fixation of 
oyster spat determined). 

76—The metamorphosis and post-larval stages of development of 
the oyster. Rep. U. S. Comm. Fish and Fisheries, 1882, pp. 779- 
791, 3 figs. in text. (Points out the mode in which the veliger of 
Ostrea is metamorphosed into the spat and adult, and the rotation 
of the body mass). 

77—Supplementary note on the coloration of the blood-corpuscles 
of the oyster. Rep. U.S. Comm. Fish and Fisheries, 1882, pp. 801- 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 245 


805. (Shows that the pigment which causes the coloration is prob- 
ably phycocyanin). 

78—A summary of recent progress in our knowledge of the cul- 
ture, growth and anatomy of the oyster. Forest and Stream, Nov. 
30, 1882, Vol. XIX, pp. 351-352. 

79—Notes on the breeding, food and cause of green color of the 
oyster. Trans. Amer. Fish Cult. Assoc. Eleventh Ann. Meet., N. 
Y., 1882, pp. 57-59. Also Forest and Stream, 1882, May 25th, 
pp. 331 and 332, and June Ist, pp. 349-351. 

80—On the green color of the oyster. Amer. Nat., 1833, pp. 86- 
88. 

81—A correction. Amer. Nat., 1883, pp. 98-99. 

82—Theodore Gill and John A. Ryder. Diagnoses of new genera 
of nemichthyoid eels. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VI, 1883, pp. 260- 
262. 

83—Theodore Gill and John A. Ryder. On the anatomy and 
relations of the Eurypharyngidae. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., VI, 1883, 
pp- 262-273. 

84—On the thread-bearing eggs of the silversides (Menidia). 
Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., III, 1883, pp. 193-196, 4 figs. in text. 

85—Preliminary notice of the development and breeding habits 
of the Potomac cat-fish Amiurus albidus (Le Sueur) Gill. Bull. U. 
S. Fish Comm., III, 1883, pp. 225-230. 

86— Rearing oysters from artificially fertilized eggs, together with 
notes on pond-culture, etc. Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., ITI, 1883, pp. 
281-294. New Zealand Journal of Science, I, No. 10, 1883, pp. 
455-459. 

87—Report on the abnormal appearance of some shad eggs from 
a fish kept in confinement at Havre de Grace, Maryland. Bull. U. 
S. Fish Comm., III, 1883, p. 440. 

88—Rearing oysters from artificially impregnated eggs. Science, 
I, 1883, pp. 60-62. 

89—The law of nuclear displacement, and its significance in em- 
bryology. Science, I, 1885, pp. 273-277. 

90—Protozoan parasites of the oyster. Science, I, 1885, pp. 567 
—568. 

91—Rearing oysters from artificially fertilized eggs at Stockton, 
Md. Science, II, 1885, pp. 465-464. 

92—Primitive visual organs. Science, II, 1883, pp. 739-740. 

93—The nature of heredity. The Monthly Review, Philadelphia, 
T, 1883, No. 11, pp. 161-164. : 

94—The pedunculated lateral line organs of Gastrostomus. Sci- 
ence, III, 1884, p.5. Amer. Nat., 1884, p. 547, 1 fig. 

95—On the chlorophylloid granules of Vorticella. Proc. U.S. 
Nat. Mus., VII, 1884, pp. 9-12, 1 fig. in text. 

96—Theodore Gill and John A. Ryder: On the literature and 
systematic relations of the saccopharyngoid fishes. Proc. U. §. 
Nat. Mus., VII, 1884, pp. 48-65. 


246 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


97—On the origin of heterocercy and the evolution of the fins 
and fin-rays of fishes. Rep. U.S. Comm. Fish and Fisheries, 1884, 
pp. 981-1107, pls. 12, 8 figs. in text. 

98—On a new form of filter or diaphragm to be used in the cul- 
ture of oysters in ponds. Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., IV, 1884, pp. 
17-51, 1 pl. 

99—On askin parasite of the cunner (Ctenolabrus adspersus). 
Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., IV, 1884, pp. 37-42. 

_ 100—Journal of operations on the grounds of the Eastern Shore 
Oyster Company on Chincoteague Bay, near Stockton, Md., during 
the summer of 1883. Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., IV, 1884, pp. 43-47. 

101—Carp do eat young fishes. Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., IV, 
1884, p. 152. 

102—Report respecting the present condition and future pros- 
pects at St. Jerome Creek for the work of oyster culture. Bull. U. 
8. Fish Comm., IV, 1884, pp. 235-237. 

103—Floats for the so-called fattening of oysters. Bull. U.S. 
Fish Comm., [V, 1884, pp. 302-303. 

104—Note on the regeneration of the scales of the German carp. 
Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., IV, 1884, pp, 345-346. 

105—On apparatus for collecting oyster spat. Bull. U.S. Fish 
Comm., IV, 1884, p. 373. 

106—Care of gold fish. Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., 1884, pp. , 
381-382. 

107—A sketch of the life history of the oyster. U.S. Geological 
Survey. Fourth Annual Report of J. W. Powell for 1884, IV, pp. 
317-333. pls. LX XITI-LX XXII. 

108—On the development of Mola. Science, IV, Bulletin, Nov. 
14, 1884, p. v. 

109—On the morphology and evolution of the tail of osseous fishes. 
(Abstract). Proce. American Association for the Advancement of 
Science, Philadelphia meeting, Sept., 1884, Vol. XX XIII, pp. 532 
-—533, 1885. Science, [V, Oct. 31, 1884, pp. 341-342. 

110—Theodore Gill and John A. Ryder: Note on Ewrypharynz 
and an allied new genus. Zool. Anzeiger, VII, 1884, pp. 119-123. 

111—On the forces which determine the survival of fish embryos. 
Forest and Stream, Aug. 14, 1884; and Transactions of American 
Fish Cultural Association, 15th Annual Meeting at Washington, 
May 13th and 14th, 1884, pp. 195-199. 

112—A contribution to the life-history of the oyster ( Ostrea vir- 
ginicaw Gmelin, and O. edulis Linn.). Fisheries Industries of the 
U.S., Vol. II, 4 to, Washington, 1884, 1 pl. pp. 711-750. 

113—An outline of a theory of the development of the unpaired 
fins of fishes. Amer. Nat., 1885, pp. 90-97, (abstract), 8 figs. in text. 

114—The development of the rays of osseous fishes. Amer. Nat., 
1885, pp. 200-204. 

115—On the translocation forwards of the rudiments of the pel- 
vic fins of the embryos of physoclist fishes. Amer. Nat., 1885, 
pp. 315-317. 

* 


1896. ] * NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 247 


116—On the position of the yolk-blastopore as determined by the 
size of vitellus. Amer. Nat., 1885, pp. 411-415. 

117—Development of the spines of the anterior dorsal of Gaste- 
rosteus and Lophius. Amer. Nat., 1885, p. 415. 

118—On the probable origin, homologies and development of 
the flukes of cetaceans and sirenians. Amer. Nat., 1885, pp. 515- 
519. 

119—On the formation of the embryonic axis of the teleostean 
embryo by the concrescence of the rim of the blastoderm. 1 fig. in 
text. Amer. Nat., 1885, pp. 614-615. 

120—On the development of the mammary glands of cetacea. 
Amer. Nat., 1885, pp. 616-618. 

121—On the availability of embryological characters in the clas- 
sification of the Chordata. Amer. Nat., 1885, pp. 815-819 and 903 
-907. 

122—On the genesis of the extra terminal phalanges in the cet- 
acea. Amer. Nat., 1885, pp. 1013-1015. 

123—On the manner in which the cavity of the heart is formed 
in certain teleosts. Amer. Nat,, 1885, pp. 1015-1017. 

124—The archistome theory. Amer. Nat., 1885, pp. 1115-1121. 

125—The development and structure of Microhydra Ryderi Potts. 
Amer. Nat., 1885, pp. 1232-1236. 

126—An exposition of the principles of a rational system of 
oyster culture, together with an account of a new and practical 
method of obtaining oyster spat on a scale of commercial import- 
ance. Rep. U.S. Comm. Fish and Fisheries for 1885, pp. 381-423, 
3 plates. 

127—On the development of the cetacea, together with a con- 
sideration of the probable homologies of the flukes of cetaceans and 
sirenians. Rep. Comm. Fish and Fisheries 1885, pp. 427-488, 3 
plates. 

128—On the development. of osseous fishes, including marine 
and freshwater forms. Rep. Comm. of Fish and Fisheries, 1885, pp. 
489-604, 30 plates. 

129—Note on the male organs of the eel. Bull. U. S. Fish 
Comm., V, 1885, 2 figs. in text, pp. 1-3. 

130—Directions for collecting embiotocoid fish embryos. Bull. 
U.S. Fish Comm., V, 1885, p. 32. 

131—The rate of growth of oysters at St. Jerome Creek Station. 
Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., V, 1885, pp. 129-131, 2 figs. in text. 

132—On the development of the mammary glands and genitalia 
of the cetacea. Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., V, 1885, pp. 135-142, 2 
figs in text. 

133—On the rate of growth of the common clam, and on a mode 
of obtaining the young of the giant clams of the Pacific Coast for 
the purpose of fransplanting. Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., V, 1885, 
pp. 174-176. 


248 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


134—On the green coloration of the gills and palps of the clam 
(Mya arenaria). Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., V, 1885, pp. 181-185, 1 
fig. in text. 

135—Answers to questions about fattening oysters. Bull. U.S. 
Fish. Comm., 1885, p. 416. 

136—On the development of viviparous osseous fishes. Pro- 
ceedings of the U. S. National Museum, VIII, 1885, pp. 128-155, 6 
figs. 

137—On certain features of the development of the salmon. 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., VIII, 1885, pp. 156-162, 1 pl. 

138—The swimming habits of the sun-fish (Mola mola). Science, 
VI, 1885, pp. 103-104, 1 fig. 

139—A_ new system of oyster-culture. Science, November 27, 
1885, pp. 465-467. (A practical solution of the oyster question). 

140—On some points in microtomy. The American Monthly 
Microscopic Journal, V, No. 10, October, 1884, pp. 190-191; Proc. 
Amer. Assoc. Adv. Sci., XX XIII, 1885, pp. 565-566. 

141—The oyster problem actually solved. A new system of 
oyster culture. Forest and Stream, Vol. XXV, No. 13, Oct. 22d, 
1885, pp. 249-250. 

142—The nectar glands of the Catalpa tree. The Pastime, IJ], 
No. 7, January, 1885, pp. 8-9. 

148—Resting position of the oyster. Nature, Nov. 26, 1885, pp. 
80-81. 

144—The placentation of the two-toed ant-eater Cycloturus di- 
dactylus. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1886. (Cited from Dr. 
Ryder’s notes; original not found). 

145—The development of the toad-fish. Amer. Nat., 1886, pp. 
77-80. 

146—The origin of the amnion. Amer. Nat., 1886, pp. 179-185, 
8 figs. in text. 

147—The development of Anurida maritima Guerin. Amer. 
Nat., 1886, pp. 299-302, 1 plate. 

148—On an unusual relation of the notochord to the intestine in 
the chick. Amer. Nat., 1886, pp. 892-394, 1 fig. 

149—On the symmetry of the first segmentation furrows of the 
blastodisk of Elasmobranchii. Amer. Nat., 1886, pp. 470-473, 2 
figs. 

”150—The metamorphosis of the American lobster, Homarus 

americanus H. Milne-Edwards. Amer. Nat., 1886, pp. 739-742. 

151—The monstrosities observed amongst recently hatched lob- 
sters. Amer. Nat., 1886, pp. 742-743. 

152—The development of the mud-minnow. Amer. Nat., 1886, 
pp. 823-824. 

153—The development of Fundulus heteroclitus. Amer. Nat., 
1886, p. 824. 

154—Why do certain fish ova float? Amer. Nat., 1886, pp. 
986-987. (Describes the floating egg of Macrepodus). 


ATP 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 249 


155—The origin of the pigment cells which invest the oil-drop in 
pelagic fish-embryos. Amer. Nat., 1886, pp. 987--988. 

156—On the value of the fin-rays and their characteristics of 
development in the classification of the fishes, together with re- 
marks on the theory of degeneration. Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., 1886, 
pp. 71--82. 

157--Preliminary notice of the development of the toad-fish 
Batrachus tau. Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., VI, 1886, pp. 4-8, 1 pl. 

158—On the earlier stages of cleavage of the blastodisk of Raia 
erinucea. Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., VI, 1886, pp. 8--10, 1 fig. in text. 

159—On the intra-ovarian gestation of the red-fish (Sebastes 
marinus). Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., VI, 1886, pp. 92--94. 

160—A theory of the origin of placental types and on certain 
vestigiary structures in the placente of the mouse, rat and field- 
mouse. Amer. Nat., 1887, pp. 780--784. 

161—The inversion of the germinal layers in Hesperomys. Amer. 
Nat., 1887, pp. 863--864, 3 figs. in text. 

162—Vestiges of a zonary decidua in the mouse. Amer. Nat., 
1887, pp. 1037--1038. 

163—The rudimentary pineal eye of chelonians. Amer. Nat., 
1887, pp. 1126-1127. (By Geo. Fetterolf under Prof. Ryder’s 
directions). 

164—On a tumor in the oyster. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 
1887, pp. 25--27. 

165—On the homologies and early history of the limbs of ver- 
tebrates. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1887, pp. 344--368. 

166—On the development of the common sturgeon. Amer. Nat., 
July, 1888, pp. 659--660. (The first published account of the lar- 
vee of Acipenser sturio developed from artificially fertilized eggs ob- 
tained by Cesarian section of the abdomen of the female). 

167—On the blunt-nosed sturgeon and the sense organs and 
canals of the head of Serranus atripinnis. University Medical 
Magazine (Philadelphia), December, 1888, pp. 175--177. 

168—The sturgeons and sturgeon industries of the eastern coast 
of the United States, with an account of experiments bearing upon 
sturgeon culture. Bull. UD. S. Fish Comm., 1888, pp. 231-281, 
plates XXX VII-LIX. 

169—Report of operations at the laboratory of the United States 
Fish Commission, Wood’s Hole, Mass., during the summer of 1888. 
Rep. U.S. Fish Comm., 1888, pp. 513--522. 

170—On the fore and aft poles, the axial differentiation and a 
possible anterior sensory apparatus of Volvox minor. Proc. Acad. 
Nat. Sci. Phila., 1889, pp. 138--140. Reprint in Ann. and Mag. 
Nat. Hist. (6), IV, p. 253. , 

171—Heterocercy in batrachia. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 
1889, p. 155. (In Amblystoma larve). 

172—The hypertrophied hairs on Ampelopsis. Proc. Acad, Nat. 
Sci. Phila., 1889, p. 158. 


LT, 


250 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


173—The byssus of the young of the common clam (Mya arena- 
via). Amer. Nat., 1889, pp. 65--67 ; abstr. in Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc., 
1889, p. 375. (The byssus gland is at the base of the foot and the 
clams are bound together partially by byssus threads and partly by 
fibres from Ascidians). 

174—The polar differentiation of Volvor and specialization of 
possible anterior sense organs. Amer. Nat., 1889, pp. 218--221. 

175—The quadrate placenta of the common red squirrel. Amer. 
Nat., 1889, pp. 271-274. 

176—The origin and meaning of sex. Amer. Nat., 1889, pp. 
501-508. 

177—Notes on the development of Ampullaria depressa Say. 
Amer. Nat., 1889, pp. 735-737. (Description of eggs, ete.). 

178—Karyokinesis in larval Amblystoma. Amer. Nat., 1889, 
pp- pe (Pointing out the clearness of the karyokinetie pro- 
cesses). 

179—On a brood of larval Amphiuma. Amer. Nat., 1889, pp. 
927-928. 

180—The acquisition and loss of food-yolk and origin of the cal- 
careous egg-shell. Amer. Nat., 1889, pp. 928-933. (Interpreta- 
tion of the various ways in which surplus nutriment is elaborated 
into numerous small eggs or into fewer and larger ones, or diverted 
to the embryo itself ). 

18i1—The phylogeny of the sweat glands. Proc. Amer. Phil. 
Soc., 1889, pp. 534-540. 

182—Proofs of the effects of habitual use in the modification of 
animal organisms. Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., 1889, pp. 541-549. 
(The principle of over-nutrition was at once the cause of sexuality, 
the struggle for existence and the direct means of evolution of all 
larval forms. Over-nutrition, resulting in sexuality, was the means 
of heaping up potential physiological energy in the egg, so as to ren- 
der larval development and a larval struggle for existence a possi- 
bility. The mainspring of evolution or its motive force is to be 
sought in sexuality). 

183—A physiological theory of the calcification of the skeleton. 
Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., 1889, pp. 550-558. 

184—Evolution of the specialized vertebral axis of the higher 
types. University Med. Mag., April, 1889. 

185—The function and histology of the yolk-sac of the young 
toad-fish (Batrachus tau). Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1890, pp. 
407-408. 

186—A_ physiological hypothesis of heredity and variation. 
Amer. Nat., 1890, pp. 85-92. 

187—The continuity of the primary matrix of the scales and the 
actinotrichia of teleosts. Amer. Nat., 1890, pp. 489-491. 

188—The eye, ocular muscles and lachrymal glands of the shrew 
mole (Blarina talpoides Gray). Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., 1890, pp. 
16-18. (Calling attention, among other points, to the slight attach- 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 251 


ment of the eye-ball and the great development of the lachrymal 
land). 

z 189—The origin of sex through cumulative integration and the 
relation of sexuality to the genesis of species. Proc. Amer. Phil. 
Soc., 1890, pp. 109-159. 

190—On the kinds of motion in the ultimate units of contractile 
living matter. Proc. Amer. Assoc. Adv. Sci., Vol. XL, 1891, p. 328. 

191—On two new and undescribed methods of contractility man- 
ifested by filaments of protoplasm. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 
1891, pp. 10-12. (Fixed and reversible spiral contraction in Vor- 
ticella and in Trypanosoma balbianii respectively ). 

192—An attempt to illustrate some of the primary laws of me- 
chanical evolution. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1891, pp. 62-70. 

193—Sherwood and Ryder. Abnormal duplication of urosome 
in Rana catesbiana. Amer. Nat., 1891, pp. 740-742. (Remark 
upon bifid-tailed tadpoles). 

194—Notes on the development of Engystoma. Amer. Nat., 1891, 
pp. 838-840. 

195—On the mechanical genesis of the scales of fishes. Proc. 
Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1892, pp. 219-224, 3 figs. Reprint in Ann. 
& Mag. Nat. Hist., XI, pp. 243-248. 

196—Diffuse pigmentation of the epidermis of the oyster due to 
prolonged exposure to the light; regeneration of shell and loss of 
adductor muscle. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1892, pp. 350-351. 
(Recording observations of Prof. R. C. Schiedt). 

197—Hermaphroditism and viviparity of the oysters of the north- 
west coast of the United States. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1892, 
pp. 351-352. (Recorded in behalf of Prof. R. C. Schiedt). 

198—On the cause of the greening of the oyster and its presumed 
algous endo-parasites. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1892, p. 352. 

199—The principle of the conservation of energy in biological 
evolution: a reclamation and critique. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 
1892, pp. 455-468. 

200—A geometrical representation of the relative intensity of the 
conflict between organisms. Amer. Nat., 1892, pp. 923-929. 

201—Cholera and flies. Entomological News, Oct., 1892, pp. 
210-211. (Reprint from Public Ledger, Phila.). 

202—The inheritence of modifications due to disturbances of the 
early stages of development, especially in the Japanese domesticated 
races of gold-carp. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila,, 1893, pp. 75-94. 

203—The vascular respiratory mechanism of the vertical fins of 
the viviparous Embiotocidae. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1893, 
pp: 95-99, 1 fig. 

204—Energy as a factor in organic evolution. Proc, Amer. 
Phil. Soc., 1893, XX XI, pp. 192-203. (Upon ergogeny, kineto- 
geny and statogeny, with an appendix giving a list of the author’s 
papers on ergogenetic development of morphological characters—25 
titles). 


252 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


205—The mechanical genesis of the form of the fowl’s egg. Proc. 
Amer. Phil. Soc., 1893, XX XI, pp. 203-209, 1 fig. 

206—The adaptive forms and vortex motion of the substance of 
the red blood-corpuscles of vertebrates. Proc. Amer. Phil. Soe., 
XXXII, No. 148, May, 1893, pp. 272-275. (Read at the meeting 
commemorating the 150th anniversary of the foundation of the So- 
ciety). 

207—The correlations of the volumes and surfaces of organisms. 
Contrib. Zod]. Lab. Univ. of Penna., Vol. I, No. 1, 1893, pp. 3-36, 
1 plate. 

508__The growth of Euglena viridis when constrained principally 
to two dimensions of space. Contrib. Zool. Lab. Univ. of Penna., 
Vol. I, No. 1, 1893, pp. 87-50, 1 plate. 

209—The synthetic museum of comparative anatomy as a basis 
for a comprehensive system of research. Contrib. Zool. Lab. 
Univ. of Penn., 1893. Separate, pp. 1-15. (A valuable paper 
giving an outline of a museum adopted to modern methods of re- 
search ; now being realized, in part, at the Wistar Institute, Uniy. 
of Penna.). 

210—Biological research in relation to the fisheries. Bull. U. S. 
Fish Comm., 1893, pp. 59-63. (Read before the World’s Fisheries 
Congress, Chicago, 1893). 

211—Ryder and Pennington, Mary E. Non-sexual conjugation 
of the nuclei of the adjacent cells of an epithelium. Anat. Anzeiger, 
11, Aug., 1894, pp. 759-764. 

212—Dynamical evolution. Biological Lectures Marine Biol. 
Lab., Vol. II, Boston, 1894. 

213—An arrangement of the retinal cells in the eyes of fishes 
partially simulating compound eyes. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 
1895, pp. 161-166, 2 figs. in text. 

214—-The true nature of the so-called “ nettle-cells” of Paramoe- 
cium. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1895, pp. 167-170. 

215—-A dynamical hypothesis of inheritence. Biological Lectures 
Marine Biol. Lab., Vol. II], Boston, 1895. 


DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SCIENTIFIC APPARATUS. 


216—Holman’s new compressorium and moist chamber. Amer. 
Nat., 1880, p. 691. Also in Journal of the Franklin Institute. 

217—Ryder’s automatic microtome. Amer. Nat., 1887, pp. 298—- 
302, 2 figs. (Description of rapid cutting section instrument in- 
volving new principles of micrometric adjustment). 

218—A new paraffine embedding apparatus. Amer. Nat., 1887, 
pp. 597-600. 

219—A new method of entrapping, killing, embedding and 
orienting infusoria and other small objects for the microtome. Amer. 
Nat., 1895, pp. 194-198, 1 fig. in text. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 253 
TRANSLATIONS AND REVIEWS. 


220—Notes on the recently described monotremes. Amer. Nat., 
1878, pp. 320-321. 

221—A remarkable new genus of giant sloths. Amer. Nat., 
1879, pp. 590-592. (Review of “ Beskriivelse af Hovedskallen af 
et Kaempedovendyr, Grypotherium darwini, fra Laplata-Landenes 
plejstocene Dannelser.” Af. J. Reinhardt. in Vidensk. Sel. Skr. 5te 
Raekke. Naturv. og Math. Afd. XII, 4, 4to pls. Il, Kjobenhavn, 
1879). 

New sub fams. proposed: Aphelorhinz, Diarhine. 

222—A new species of Coelodon. Amer. Nat., 1879, p. 592. 
(Review of “ Kaempedovendyr Slaegten Coelodon.” Af. J. Rein- 
hardt, 4 to p. 257-349, pls. 7. Ext. Vidensk. Selsk. Skr. 5te Raekke, 
Naturvidensk. og Math. Afd., XII, 3, Copenhagen, 1878). 

223—Growth asa function of cells. Amer. Nat., 1880, p. 44-45. 
(Review of “Growth as a function of cells,” by Chas. Sedgwick 
Minot. Proc. Bos. Soc. Nat. Hist., 1878-79, Vol. XX, pt. I, p. 190). 

224—On the genitalia of male eels and their sexual characters, 
by S. Th. Cattie (Translation). Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., III, 1880, 
pp. 280-284. 

225—On the mature male sexual organs of the conger-eel ( Conger 
vulgaris), with some observations on the male of the common eel 
(Anguilla vulgaris). By Otto Hermes. Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., 
I, 1881, pp. 126-130. (Translation of “Ueber reife mannliche Ge- 
schlechtstheile des Seeaals [Conger vulgaris] und einige Notizen uber 
den mannlichen Flussaal, Anguilla vulgaris”). Zool. Anzeiger, 1881, 
No. 74, pp. 39-44). 

226—On Semper’s method of making dry preparations. Proc. U. 
S. Nat. Mus., 1881, pp. 224-225. 

227—A contribution to our knowledge of the development of the 
oyster (Ostrea edulis), by Dr. R. Horst. Bull. U.S. Fish Comm., 
II, 1882, pp. 159-167, 12 figs. (Translation of “ Bijdrage tot de 
Kennis van de Ontwikkelingsgeschiedenis van de Oester ( Ostrea 
edulis)” in Tijdschr. d. Ned. Dierk. Vereen. dl. VI, 1882). Ab- 
stract in Zool. Anzeiger, 3d April, 1882. 

228—Report relative to the generation and artificial fecundation 
of oysters, addressed to the Minister of Marine and Colonies by M. 
Bouchon-Brandely. Bull. U. S. Fish. Comm., II, 1882, pp. 319- 
338. (Translation of “ Rapport relatif 4 la génération et a la fé- 
condation artificielle des huitres, addressé au ministre de la marine 
et des colonies, in Journ. officiel de la Republique Francaise,” Decem- 
ber 16-17, 1882, pp. 6762-6764 and 6778-6782) with notes by the 
translator. 

229—On the sexuality of the common oyster (O. edulis) and 
that of the Portuguese oyster (O. angulata). Artificial fecundation 
of the Portuguese oyster, by M. Bouchon-Brandely. Bull. U.S. 
Fish Comm., IT, 1882, pp. 339--341. (Translation of “ De la sexual- 


254 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


ité chez l’huitre ordinaire [ O. edulis] et chez V’huitre Portugaise 
(O. angulata). Fécondation artificielle de ’huitre Portugaise,” in 
Comptes Rendus de L’Academie des Sciences, XCV, No. 5 [31 
Juillet, 1882], pp. 256--259, Paris, 1882). 

230—Researches on the generative organs of the oyster (0. edulis), 
by P. P. C. Hoek. Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., II, 1882, pp. 348, 
(Translation of ‘‘ Recherches sur les organes génitaux des huitres.” 
par M. P. P. C. Hoek, Comptes rendus des seances de |’Academie 
des Sciences, Paris, November 6, 1882). 

231—A simple test to learn if fish ova are impregnated, by Prof. 
Nussbaum. Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., II, 1882, pp. 347--548, 
(Translation from Deutsche Fischerei Zeitung, VI, No. 5, Jan. 30, 
1883. 

232—On the cause of the greening of oysters. Rep. U. S. Comm. 
Fish and Fisheries, 1882, pp. 793-801. (A translation of “ Notice 
sur la cause du verdissement des huitres.” Par M. Puységur, in 
Rev. Maritime et Coloniale, pp. 11,1 pl. Paris, Berger-Levrault 
et Cie, 1880). 

233— Development of the membrane-bones of the skull of the pike. 
Science, I, 1883, p. 513. 

234—Oyster culture in Holland. Science, II, 1883, p. 79. 

235—The development of the viviparous edible oyster. Amer. 
Nat., 1885, pp. 317-318. (Review of Dr. Horst’s paper). 

238—The mode of formation and the morphological value of the 
eggs of Nepa and Notonecta. Amer. Nat., 1885, pp. 615-616. (Re- 
view of paper by Ludwig Will). 

237—The unpaired fins of selachians. Amer. Nat., 1886, pp. 
142-143. (Review of paper by Dr. Paul Mayer). 

239—The development of Patella. Amer. Nat., 1886, pp. 563- 
564. (Review of paper by Dr. Wm. Patten). 

240—Professor Selenka on the development of the opossum (Di- 
delphys virginiana). Amer. Nat., 1886, pp. 394-396. (Translation 
from Biblog. Centralbl., V, No. 10, 1885, pp. 294-295). 

241—The development of Dentalium. Amer. Nat., 1886, p. 565. 
(Review of paper by M. Kowalevsky). 

242—The development of the Chitonide or Polyplacophora. 
Amer. Nat., 1886, pp. 565-567. (Review of paper by M. Kowaley- 
sky). 

13 The development of the gill in Fuscio/aria. Amer. Nat., 
1886, p. 567. (Review of paper by Dr. H. Leslie Osborn). 

244—-The early development of Julus terrestris. Amer. Nat., 
1886, pp. 662-666. (Review of paper by F. G. Heathcoat, M. A.). 

245—The development of Agalena naevia. Amer. Nat., 1886, 
pp. 666-667. (Review of paper by Wm. A. Locy). 

246—Life-history of Thalessema. Amer. Nat., 1886, pp. 988-989. 
(Review of H. W. Conn’s paper). 

247—The formation of the eggs and development of rotifers. 
Amer. Nat., 1887, pp. 93-95. (Review of G. Tessin’s paper). 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 255 


248—The gestation of armadillos. Amer. Nat., 1887, pp. 95- 
96. (Review of von Ihering’s paper). 

249—The ventral suckers or sucking disks of the tadpoles of dif- 
ferent genera of frogs and toads. Amer. Nat., 1887, pp. 263-264. 
(From Dr. Ryder’s notes. Citation not found). 

250—Haddon’s “Introduction to the Study of Embryology.” 
Amer. Nat., 1887, pp. 292-293. 

251—Development of the carnivora. Amer. Nat., 1887, pp. 
394-396. (Review of A. Fleischmann’s work). 

252—Suggestion respecting the epiblastic origin of the segmental 
duct. Amer. Nat., 1887, pp. 587-590. (Review of Prof. A. C. 
Haddon’s paper). 

253—The development of an eight-limbed vertebrate. Amer. 
Nat., 1887, pp. 862-863. (Review of S. Watase’s paper.) 

254—Spermatogenesis in mammalia. Amer. Nat., 1887, pp. 946- 
948. (Review of paper by Dr. Carl Benda). 

255—Development of the Coecilians. Amer. Nat., 1887, pp. 
1035-1036. (Review of work of Messrs. Sarasin). 

256—The origin of the segmental duct in elasmobranchs. Amer. 
Nat., 1887, p. 1037. (Notice of Dr. Beard’s work). 

257—Rudiments of true calcified teeth in the young of Ornitho- 
rhynchus. Amer. Nat., 1888, pp. 368-369. (Review of paper by 
E. B. Poulton). 

258—The ectoblastic origin of the Wolffian duct in the chelonia. 
Amer. Nat., 1888, p. 369. (Notice of paper by M. Mitsukuri). 

259—Origin of the Wolffian duct in lacertilia. Amer. Nat., 
1888, p. 369. (Notice of paper by J. von Perenyi). 

260—The origin of the mamme. Amer. Nat., 1888, p. 3570. (Note 
upon investigations of W. Haacke). 

261—The several functions of the enamel organ in the develop- 
ment of the teeth of mammals, and on the inheritance of mutilations. 
Amer. Nat., 1888, pp. 547-550. (Review of researches of von 
Brunn et al). 

262—Researches upon the development of Comatul/a. Amer. Nat., 
1888, pp. 657-659. (Review of paper by Barrois). 

263—Observations on the development of cephalopods. Amer. 
Nat., 1888, pp. 754-755. (Review of S. Watase’s paper). 

264—On the development of the calcareous plates of Asterias. 
Amer. Nat., 1888, p. 755. (Note on J. Walter Fewkes’ work). 

265—The value in classification of the stages of growth and de- 
cline with proposals for a new nomenclature. Amer. Nat., 1888, p. 
755. (Note on A. Hvatt’s paper). 

266—Development of the sea-bass (Serranus atrarius). Amer. 
Nat., 1888, p. 755. (Note). 

267—On the primary segmentation of the germ-band of insects. 
Amer. Nat., 1888, pp. 941-942. (Review of Veit Graber’s work). 

268—Development of the peripheral nervous system of verte- 
brates. Amer. Nat., 1888, pp. 1132-1134. (Review of Dr. Beard’s 
work). 


256 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


269—A new atlas of embryology. Amer. Nat., 1888, p. 1134- 
1135. (Review of M. Duval’s work). 

270—New studies of the human embryo. Amer. Nat., 1889, pp. 
171-172. (Review of work of M. C. Phisalix). 

271—On the development and first traces of the anterior roots of 
the spinal nerves in selachians. Amer. Nat., 1889, pp. 172-173. 
(Review of Dohrn’s paper). 

272—The maturation and fertilization of the egg of Petromyzon 
planeri. Amer. Nat., 1889, p. 173. (Review of A. A. Bohm’s pa- 

er). 

; 278—The structure of the human spermatozoon. Amer. Nat., 
1889, pp. 183-184 (Vol. irregularly paged). (Review of E. M. Nel- 
son’s paper). 

274—Development of Crangon vulgaris. Amer. Nat., 1889, pp. 
737-738. (Review of J. W. Kingsley’s paper). 

275—Development of Sepia officinalis. Amer. Nat., 1889, p. 
738. (Review of M. L. Vialleton’s paper). 

276—Extra-ovarian primordial ova inthe humanembryo. Amer. 
Nat., 1889, p.827. (Review of W. Nagel’s paper). 

277—Placentation of the hedgehog and the phylogeny of the 
placenta. Amer. Nat., 1890, pp. 376-378. (Review of Hubrecht’s 

aper). 

: 278A theory of development and heredity,” by Henry D. Orr. 
Amer. Nat., 1894, pp. 154-156. (Review). 


= 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 25 


SUMMARY OF NEW LIBERIAN POLYDESMOIDEA. 
BY O. F. COOK. 


In a preceding paper’ on the diplopod fauna of Liberia several new 
species and genera were referred to, of which a list is here given to- 
gether with such additional diagnostic characters as may be neces- 
sary for the separation of the various forms from the territory 
explored. Extended descriptions and plates are in preparation. 


Ammodesmus granum. 

Locality, Mt. Coffee, a cluster of hills in western Liberia, reach- 
ing an altitude of about 300 feet, and covered with dense forest. A 
large part of the other forms were collected in the same vicinity, all 
except those of which other localities are specified. 


Cenchrodesmus volutus. 

Length about 2 mm., width .65 mm. 
Campodesmus carbonarius. 

Surface of head and segments covered with rough granules; first 
segment scarcely broader than the head, with three transverse rows 
of coarse tubercles ; second segment broadest of all; segments with 
a cluster of three large tubercles on each side of the middle, five 
smaller scattered tubercles on each side of these, and three tubercles 
on each of the very broad, decurved carinz ; last segment not con- 
cealed, rounded at apex, with three broad, blunt, setigerous tuber- 
cles on each lateral edge; preanal scale with two long smooth seti- 
gerous papille. Length of male 29 mm., width 5.25 mm.; length 
of female 32 mm., width 6.5 mm. 


Tropidesmus jugosus. 

Generally similar to the preceding, except that the segments are 
dorsally ornamented with two transverse rows, each of six short lon- 
gitudinal carine; also the tubercles of the preanal scale are short, 
not papilliform. Length 28 mm., width 5 mm. ; locality Mt. Coffee 
and vicinity ; much rarer than Campodesmus, and more inclined to 
burrow in the ground. 


1A New Diplopod Fauna in Liberia. American Naturalist, xxx, pp. 413- 
420, 1896. 


258 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Comodesmus lanatus. 

Antenne distinctly clavate; last segment decurved, the immedi- 
ate apex small, projecting, truncate ; lateral carinz present only as 
a longitudinal row of large tubercles, above which the tubercles are 
gradually smaller; length 8 mm., width 1 mm. 


Thelydesmus dispar. 


Antenne distinctly clavate ; first segment nearly as wide as the 
second, scarcely concealing the head in front; segments with four 
regular transverse rows of conic piliferous granules; carine moder- 
ately broad, somewhat narrowed toward the margin, coarsely den- 
tate all around by reason of the prominent granules, the largest of 
which is located at posterior corner; last segment triangular in out- 
line, the edges dentate with setiferous tubercles, the apex narrow, 
with a small tubercle; females nearly black above, 18 mm. long, 
3.25 mm. broad; males quite black above, less convex and more 
slender than the female, and with proportionately broader carine; 
length of male 15 mm., width 2.75 mm. ; locality, Mt. Coffee; females 
not rare. 


Discodesmus senex. 


Smaller and more slender than Comodesmus; dorsum densely 
granular-tuberculate, the prominences subequal in size and setiferous ; 
lateral carinz nearly wanting, the segments slightly thicker at the 
sides and with larger tubercles; repugnatorial pore located above 
the lateral row of tubercles ; color white. 

Prepodesmus tigrinus. 

This and its congeners have the copulatory legs with a large 
needle-like straight or slightly curved spine from the ventral or 
median face. The present species has the anterior margin of the 
first segment, the anterior lateral apices of the second and third 
segments, and the carins, or at least the posterior part of the carinz 
of poriferous segments bright yellow, with the remainder of the body 
black ; legs and antennz reddish-yellow ; length of female 42 mm., 
width 5 mm.; antenne and longest legs 9 mm.; males distinetly 
smaller. 


Prepodesmus mimus. 

Of the same form and size, but with the anterior margin of the 
first segment, the carinze of the second and third, and the whole pos- 
terior subsegments of the poriferous segments bright red ; legs and 
antenne reddish; locality, Muhlenburg Mission. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 259 


Tylodesmus crassipes. 

Color entirely black, legs and antennz yellowish ; copulatory legs 
without the spine present in Prepodesmus, and with the interior 
lamina broad and flabellate; anterior male legs slightly, though 
distinctly, crassate; length of male 40 mm., width 4.5 mm.; length 
of female 48 mm.; width 5.6 mm. 


Tylodesmus amebus. 

Anterior half of first segment, the carine of the second and third, 
and the whole of the poriferous segments, except the last two or 
three, bright red; the remainder of the body is black; legs and 
antenne pale; legs of both sexes distinctly more slender than in the 
preceding species; sexes not strikingly unequal, though the male 
is more slender and has somewhat longer legs; length 35 mm., width 
of male, 4 mm., of female, 4.5 mm.; locality, Muhlenburg Mission. 
The color of this species is almost exactly that of Prepodesmus 
mimus. 


Lyrodesmus nigerrimus. 

The genus is evidently related to the last, and has a closely similar 
copulatory foot; it is distinct in being more slender and depressed, 
and in having the first segment lenticular or fusiform in outline, 
rather than hemispheric-elliptical as in the two preceding genera. 
The species is deep, shining black, including the legs and antenne ; 
length of male 35 mm., width 4 mm., legs 6 mm., antennze 8 mm. in 
length. Very rare, only two specimens found. A third, nearly 
white in color and somewhat different in form, may prove to be 
specifically distinct. 


Cheirodesmus ater. 

First segment as in Lyrodesmus, but the angles not so pointed ; 
body more slender, narrower, dorsum flat; carinze with square 
corners, so that the poriferous callus projects from a nearly straight 
edge ; copulatory legs less complicated, the slender branch shorter ; 
color uniform black, legs and antenne yellowish; length 30 mm. ; 
width 3.75 mm. 


Cheirodesmus discolor. 

Similar to the preceding in size and form, but distinct at least in 
color ; an area around each pore, and a moderately broad median 
line, yellow; legs and antenne reddish-yellow; rare, only one pair 
taken, near Muhlenburg Mission. 


260 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Anisodesmus cerasinus. 

Perhaps doubtfully distinct from <A. erythropus (Lucas) in the 
greater size and lighter color, all the specimens from the interior 
differing thus from individuals collected at Monrovia. Length 
41 mm., width of male 5.5, of female 6.5 mm. The length of what 
I have identified as erythropus is about 35 mm. ‘The species can, 
however, hardly be determined with confidence from Lucas’ des- 
cription. Both forms are very beautiful in life, deep wine-color, 
with bright cherry-pink legs. 


Isodesmus immarginatus. 

Resembles Lyrodesmus and Cheirodesmus, but is distinctly broader | 
than either, and distinct from all the related forms in the absence 
of a distinct poriferous callus, the margin being sintate. Legs and 
antennse more slender than in Anisodesmus, but less so than in 
Lyrodesmus and Cheirodesmus. Color uniform black, the antennz 
and apical joints of the legs also dark. Copulatory legs also very 
distinct in that the outer ramus is broad and bifid, while the inner 
is trifid, giving five distal divisions. Length 42 mm., width 5 mm. 


Isodesmus interruptus. 

Is somewhat larger than the above and has the carine of the 
poriferous segments pale yellow. It is known from a female spec- 
imen only. 

Oxydesmus medius. 


Black or very dark vinous; carinz concolorous; legs and antenne 
also dark ; length 52-66 mm., width 10-12 mm. 


Oxydesmus liber. 


Dark chocolate-brown to black; ends of the carinz, especially the 
submarginal ridge, yellow or orange ; antennz and legs light yellow 
or orange; length 68-80 mm., width 12-13 mm. 


Bactrodesmus claviger. 

Antenne very long and slender, clavate, sixth joint longest, 
scarcely exceeding the third; dorsum much as in Polydesmus, with 
three rows of scattering tubercles, each with a large clubbed hair; 
pores dorsal, of the usual arrangement ; penultimate segment toothed 
behind; first legs reduced, the second greatly enlarged, especially 
the penultimate joint; last joint curved; claw very short, broad ; 
copulatory legs with the basal joint much enlarged, galeate, contain- 
ing the apical joint when at rest; length 7 mm., width 1 mm. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 261 


Pterodesmus brownellii. 

Last segment exceeded and included by the penultimate, the pos- 
terior sinus of which is nearly square, longer than broad ; copulatory 
legs excised at apex, the posterior lobe longer, laterally excised, the 
anterior broad, with three or four short teeth; length 28 mm., width 
7 mm. 

Gypsodesmus pruinosus. 

Dorsum very flat, the carinze curved gently upward toward the 
posterior corners, and as high as the middle of the segments; last 
segment subequal to the penultimate in length, the sinus of the latter 
broader, the sides diverging; copulatory legs with the dorsal ramus 
long, strongly decurved and turned mesad; length 16 mm., width 
4 mm. 

Lampodesmus volvatus. 

Dorsum distinctly convex, the carine slightly decurved, nearly in 
the direction of the dorsal arch ; last segment and copulatory legs 
somewhat as in Gypsodesmus; male legs crassate, especially the 
anterior; two large and conspicuous processes from the sternum of 
the sixth legs of males; length 24 mm., width 5.7 mm. 
Compsodesmus pulcher. 

About as convex as the last, but the sides sloping more directly 
from the middle ; no processes from the sixth segment; male legs 
scarcely crassate ; copulatory legs very simple, apically somewhat 
cup-shaped ; penultimate segment with sinus broader; length 24.5 
mm., width 6.5 mm. 

Choridesmus citus. 

Last segment nearly or quite concealed under the penultimate ; 
length 5.5 mm., width 1.5 mm. 

Scolodesmus grallator. 

Dark vinous, a narrow, poorly-defined median spot on each pos- 
terior subsegment, giving the effect of a pale median line; legs and 
antenne pinkish or yellowish; length 28 mm., width 2.5 mm., the 
first segment as broad as any, the other anterior segments distinctly 
narrower ; locality, Monrovia. 

Habrodesmus letus. 

Length of male 27 mm., width 2 mm.; width of female 3 mm. 

Stylodesmus horridus. 


Length 10 mm., width 3.2 mm.; the processes of the seventeenth 
and eighteenth segments project far behind the nineteenth, which 


262 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


has neither process nor pores. The first and eighteenth segments 
have the processes united for more than half their length. 


Udodesmus telluster. 

Length 8.5 mm., width 1.25 mm.; penultimate segment project- 
ing beyond the last, but not exceeded by the processes of the eigh- 
teenth, which are not coalesced; processes trituberculate at apex ; 
first segment with two large processes, and four large lobes in front, 
the median notch large, deep, rounded. 


Hercodesmus aureus. 

Length 6.75 mm., width .75 mm.; last segment exceeded by the 
penultimate ; processes replaced by longitudinal ridges; carinz very 
narrow; first segment with margin very faintly lobed. 

Stiodesmus stratus. 

Length 10 mm., width 1.4 mm.; last segment not concealed ; first 
segment not lobed, but, like the rest of the dorsal surface, beset with 
rounded granules or tubercles. The affinities of this form are some- 
what obscure. The general appearance and sculpture suggest 
Comodesmus, but the form of the first and last segments and the 
structure and location of the pores are very different. It may prove 
to be one of the Cryptodesmide, in the sense of being more nearly 
related to Cryptodesmus olfersti than to the other species which have 
been described under that much over-worked generic name. 


RELATED FORMS NOT FOUND IN LIBERIA. 


Xyodesmus planus. 

Related to Thelydesmus, but distinctly more depressed, especially 
the male. Last segment broad at apex and with a large, conic, 
marginal tubercle on each side nearly equalling the apex; dorsum 
densely beset with conic tubercles; carine broad, dentate, with 
numerous pointed-conic tubercles; antennz scarcely clavate; head 
not concealed; first segment narrower than the second; sterna 
granulate, especially in the female ; color nearly black; length 21 
mm., width of male 3.75 mm. ; of female 4 mm. ; locality, Bismarck- 
burg, Togo Colony, Dr. K. Bittner; Berlin Museum. 


Helodesmus porosus. 

Related to Comodesmus rather than to the other families, but with 
remarkable differences. First segment widest, concealing the head ; 
body tapering caudad, subcylindric, not coiled into a spiral; dorsum 
very convex, rough with low granules, and incrusted with earth; 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 263 


pores with distinct raised rims, located far above the slightly prom- 
inent carine of segments 5, 7-17; antennz and legs very short and 
stout; copulatory legs of two simple, equal processes; segments of 
adult 19; color above black, below white ; length of female 4 mm.; 
width .6 mm.; locality, mountains of Western Java, 8,000 feet. 
This species may be considered the type of a new family, Helodes- 
mide. 

Prepodesmus pictus. 

Suggesting P. tigrinus, but the yellow areas of that species are 
here bright pink ; legs and antennz very dark reddish; length of 
male 45 mm., width 5.5 mm.; locality, Togo Colony; numerous 
specimens in the Berlin Museum. 

Anisodesmus konakri, 

Nearly black, margins of all carinz yellowish; legs and antennz 
pinkish, rather pale; dorsum less convex than in A. cerasinus, and 
the posterior corners of the carine less strongly dentate ; copulatory 
legs not expanded at apex, but bent together at a right angle; 
locality Konakri, French Gambia, where I collected a pair of 
mature individuals, January, 1896. 

Anisodesmus gracilis. 

Very distinct from the Liberian species in the smaller and more 
slender body, and light pinkish color. Copulatory legs similar in 
form to the other species, but much more slender apically ; length 
of male 27 mm., width 3.25 mm.; locality, Bismarckburg, Togo 
Colony, Dr. K. Bittner; Berlin Museum. 

Lipodesmus sublevis. 

Legs and antennz moderately long; segments faintly granular or 
longitudinally rugulose toward the posterior margin; pores located 
on a distinct marginal callus projecting from about the middle of 
anterior and middle segments; in front of the callus is a distinct 
notch and tooth; posterior corner of anterior segments square, acute 
on posterior ; copulatory legs rather robust, a spiniform process rising 
from each side of the ungual portion and curved cephalad (dorsad) ; 
length of male about 28 mm., width 3.8 mm.; locality, Karewia, 
East Africa, Stuhlmann ; two male specimens in the Berlin Museum. 
Scytodesmus kribi. 

Dorsum roughened with five or six irregular rows of close-set dis- 
tinct granules; submarginal ridge and last segment asin Oxydesinus ; 
copulatory legs not flexed and inserted under the edge of the aper- 


264 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


ture, but constructed somewhat as in Ozydesmus; length 50 mm., 
width 9 mm.; locality, Kribi, German Colony of Kamerun; a male 
specimen collected by Morgen is in the Berlin Museum. 

Mimodesmus parallelus. 

Vertex and dorsal surface smooth or faintly coriaceous, with 
neither granules, tubercles nor areas; posterior subsegments without 
a transverse furrow or depression; pores situated in the outer slope 
of the submarginal ridge, asin Oxydesmus ; last segment much asin 
Oxydesmus, but the tubercles obsolete ; anterior male legs distinctly 
crassate ; copulatory legs long and twisted, apically recurved against 
the ventral surface of the segment; color a dull brown, with the sub- 
marginal ridges and a large spot in the middle of each posterior sub- 
segment, yellowish; length 46 mm., width 6.5 mm. ; locality, Kare- 
wia, East Africa, Stuhlmann; Berlin Museum. 

Plagiodesmus obliquus. 

Probably allied to and perhaps identical with Stenonia occidentalis 
Karsch, described from Quango. Distinct from the species of 
Oxydesmus by the very oblique submarginal ridges, which are wide 
and not prominent about the pores; copulatory legs long and some- 
what twisted, not inserted under the edge of the aperture as in 
Oxydesmus; color dark vinous, nearly black ; length about 75 mm., 
width 13 mm.; locality, Congo Valley; a few specimens in the 
British Museum. 

Compsodesmus perlatus. 

Length about 20 mm., width 7.5 mm., without the carine 2.3 
mm.; color dark brown, marked with transparent radiating lines as 
in the other species of the present family; copulatory legs distally 
cupulate, the posterior rim produced caudad into a strong curved 
spine; locality, Kamerun hinterland; a male specimen collected by 
Zenker is in the Berlin Museum. 


Tanydesmus ordinatus. 

This genus is related to Lampodesmus and the allied Liberian 
forms, as previously noted. Dorsal areas arranged in three distinct 
transverse rows; pores distinct, of the usual formula, near the ante- 
rior edge of the carinze, remote from the lateral margin ; penultimate 
segment subequal with the last, the sinus rather broad, the sides 
distinctly diverging caudad; color in alcohol uniform light reddish- 
brown; length of male 19 mm., width 4.5 mm.; female 22 mm. by 
5 mm.; locality, Togo Colony; several specimens in the Berlin 
Museum. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 265 


Scolodesmus securis. 


Smaller and more slender than S. gradlator ; of the same color, but 
without a lighter median line or row of spots; sternum of fourth 
pair of legs with a large process more deeply bilobed than S. graila- 
tor ; copulatory legs longer and more slender, reaching to the fourth 
segment, in general form like those of S. grallator ; above the middle 
a curved acicular process projects from each, and the apices of the 
two lie in contact; apical portion gently curved mesad and pointed, 
with a large process from the inner side with a straight inner edge, 
its corners produced proximad and distad, suggesting the blade of 
a Roman axe; length of male 18 mm., width 1.6 mm ; locality, Togo 
Coast ; a male and a female in the Berlin Museum. 


Habrodesmus falx, 


Closely resembling H. Jetus in size and form, differing in that 
the copulatory legs end ina broad, obliquely truncate lamina with a 
small transparent process from near the middle of the apical edge. 
In H. /etus the distal extremity is slender and curved, with two 
small teeth below the apex, so that the apical sinus is shaped like 
the figure 8. Color in alcohol, brown or black; the margins of the 
first, the posterior margins of the other segments, the ventral sur- 
face and legs, whitish; antenne dark ; several specimens from Togo 
are in the Berlin Museum. A label states that the legs are (in life) 
pinkish-red ; a female specimen is slightly larger and more robust 
than the female of H. letus. 


Napodesmus costatus. 


Differing from Udodesmus, to which it is nearest related, in the 
more depressed body, the thin margins of the carins, and the four, 
fine, slightly elevated, dorsal longitudinal ridges or carinz, scarcely 
separated into their component tubercles; surface rough, uneven, 
and finely setose, incrusted with earth, but without distinct tuber- 
cles ; pores located at the posterior corners of segments 5, 7, 9, 10, 
12, 13, 15-18, each surrounded by a frill of short, fine hairs ; first 
segment with numerous large conic processes, anteriorly with four 
large subequal lobes, each of which is incised along the margin, the 
median with two incisions, the lateral with one; penultimate 
segment considerably exceeding and completely concealing the last ; 
lobed at the sides, and slightly so at apex; length 6 mm., width 
1.1 mm.; locality, the forests of Western Liberia, along creeks and 
rivers; rare. 


18 


266 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Pelodesmus fossor. 

Differing from Udodesmus in the more robust body, the squarer and 
broader dorsum, and the more prominent and stronger dorsal pro- 
cesses arranged in two rows; each process distinctly bifid, instead of 
indistinetly trifid, directed obliquely cephalad. The first segment 
lacks the inner pair of large lobes, which are apparently replaced by 
a pair of anteriorly directed large processes similar to those of the 
other segments; last segment much as in Udodesmus. Surface 
thickly incrusted with earth; length 7.5 mm., width 1.5 mm.; 
locality, Freetown, Sierra Leone, under stones in a moist, shaded 
place. 


Stegodesmus leonis. 


A recently discovered genus evidently related to Udodesmus, but 
distinct by remarkable characters. First segment nearly as broad 
as any, much broader than the second, about twice as broad as long, 
strongly decurved, the anterior margin transverse, entire, decurved, 
completely concealing the head; antennz distinctly clavate, genic- 
ulate; dorsum strongly arched, the carinz depressed ; surface finely 
roughened, ornamented with four longitudinal ridges, of which the 
part on each segment is apparently composed of three coalesced 
tubercles or granules; a deep median longitudinal sulcus, giving a 
resemblance to the Platydesmide ; last segment completely concealed 
by the greatly produced median pair of ridges of the nineteenth, 
which is canaliculate and deeply bifid when viewed from above; 
pores on very distinct special papille of segments 5, 7, 9, 10, 12, 18, 
15, 16; color pale pinkish, concealed by the adhering soil; length 
5.5, width 1.1 mm.; a single female specimen was found under a 


? 


stone in a moist place in Freetown, Sierra Leone, January, 1896. 


Pronodesmus melas. 


First segment completely concealing the head, the anterior margin 
faintly lobed or scalloped, the upper surface with a few scattered 
conic tubercles; segments with two conspicuous longitudinal ridges, 
the prominences of each segment composed of two tubercles some- 
what coalesced at base; below these ridges there is on each side a 
row of three small tubercles on each segment; pores located near 
the posterior corner of the carinze, opening dorsad on inconspicuous 
rounded prominences of segments 5, 7, 9, 10, 12, 13, 15-18 ; eigh- 
teenth segment with processes coalesced in the median line, the 
resulting protuberance projecting as far caudad as the apex of the 


rt 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 267 


last segment ; nineteenth segment with distinct carinz, the processes 
much smaller than on the eighteenth ; last segment not concealed, 
apex very broad and rounded, dorsally rough like the other seg- 
ments, two distinct notches on each side; color black, legs, antenne, 
and anal valves, white; length 7 mm.; width 1.5 mm.; locality, 
Gede, West Java, 9,000 feet. 

Myxodesmus lobatus. 

With general resemblance to Pronodesmus and Napodesmus. Dor- 
sum with four equal longitudinal rows, each of three conic tubercles 
on each segment; pores located as in Pronodesmus; lateral carinz 
with three deep, narrow incisions, one in the lateral margin, two in 
the posterior, dividing the carinz into three distinct lobes; tubercles 
of the caudal segments not larger than those of the others; last 
segment apically broad, entire, exposed ; color black above, antenne, 
legs and anal valves white; length 4.5 mm., width .9 mm.; locality, 
Geeneeng File, West Java, at an altitude of 8,000 feet. 

Cynedesmus formicola. 

First segment clypeate, concealing the head, the surface covered 
with rounded granules of different sizes, the anterior margin thin, 
flattened, forming a projecting horizontal rim; segments covered 
with rounded granules somewhat regularly arranged, and with four 
equal longitudinal rows of three larger granules on each segment; 
pores much as in Stegodesmus, on a special process from the poste- 
corner of the areate carine of segments 5, 7, 9, 10, 12, 13, 15, 16; 
last segment large, broad and rounded at apex, with six small lobes 
or scallops; color pinkish-brown, with fine black points; length 
7 mm., width 1.25 mm.; locality, Grand Canary, in the nests of 
ants, at Telde and at Guia. 


268 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


May 5. 
The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 


Forty-five persons present. 


May 12. 
The President, SamureL G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair. 
Thirty-three persons present. 


A paper entitled “Remarks on Filaria,” by Fred’k P. Henry, M.D., 
was presented for publication. 


May 19. 
The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 
Ninety-eight persons present. 


A paper entitled “The Planktonokrit, a Centrifugal Apparatus 
for the Volumetric Estimation of the Food-Supply of Oysters and 
other Aquatic Animals,” by Charles S. Dolley, M. D., was presented 
for publication. 

Specimens of mammals, birds, reptiles, fishes, insects and mollusks 
collected in western Somali Land and the Galla Country, northeast- 
ern Africa, by Dr. A. Donaldson Smith, were presented to the Acad- 
emy and commented on by Messrs. A. E. Brown, A. Donaldson 
Smith, Samuel N. Rhoads, Witmer Stone, Henry Skinner, William 
J. Fox and H. A. Pilsbry. (No abstract). 


May 26. 
The President, SAMUEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 

Twenty-nine persons present. 

A paper entitled “Catalogue of the Species of Cerion, with 
Descriptions of New Forms,” by H. A. Pilsbry and E. G. Vanatta, 
was presented for publication. 

The death of Auguste Sallé, a correspondent, May 5, 1896, was 


announced. 
The following were ordered to be printed :— 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 269 


A REMARKABLE CENTRAL AMERICAN MELANIAN. 
BY H. A. PILSBRY. 


Some months ago Dr. Wm. H. Dall sent to the writer for com- 
parison with the series in the collection of the Academy of Natural 
Sciences of Philadelphia, a peculiar Pachycheilus from Central 
America which he believed to be undescribed. The specimen proved 
to be totally different from 
anything yet made known, 
and may be briefly charac- 
terized as a species of the 
Pachycheilus Levissimus 
group, with the aperture 
characters resembling the 
genus Melanatria of Mada- 
gascar. 

It isabout equally similar 
to P. levissimus var. indorum 
Morelet and P. chrysalis 
wt, Brot, having the short aper- 
Pachycheilus Dalli. ture of the former, and the 
color-tone and robust growth of the latter; but it is a stouter shell 
in figure than either, with the last whorl decidedly more convex. 
The operculum is like that of other species of Pachycheilus. 


Pachycheilus Dalli n. sp.! 

Shell ovate turreted, solid, dusky olivaceous-yellowish, with more 
or less distinct irregular and interrupted longitudinal black streaks. 
The surface is covered by a strong cuticle, beneath which the shell 
substance is white with livid stains; smooth to the naked eye, but 
showing fine, superficial growth-lines under the lens, cut by minutely 
wavy close spirals into a microscopic granulation, most noticeable 
near suture and base, but often almost obliterated on the body- 
whorl. Whorls numerous, but owing to erosion but 6 or7 remain, 
the earlier ones nearly flat, last two or three convex. 


1See Science (n. ser.) ITI, p. 608, April 17, 1896. This is the species re- 
corded as “ Pachycheilus walli” in Zoologischer Anzeiger, No. 502, 4 Mai, 
1896, foot of p. 223. Itis an unfortunate typographical error, not traceable to 
the record as officially furnished by the Academy. 


270 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Aperture trapezoidal, white within, with livid brown or purplish 
tracts. Outer lip having a very deep rounded sinus a short dis- 
tance below the suture, its outer portion then produced forward in 
a broad rounded lobe, retracted again on the lower outer portion, 
and produced in a more or less prominent narrow lobe at base. 
Columella concave; parietal wall covered by a transparent film, 
with a slight callus developed near the posterior angle of the aper- 
ture. 

Alt. 52, diam. 25 mm. Alt. 54, diam. 27mm. Alt. 53, diam. 
28 mm. 

Described from four adult and four young specimens in collection 
of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, and one adult 
in collection of the United States National Museum. The latter 
specimen, having suffered least erosion, is figured. 

The peculiar sinuousity of the lip is strictly an adult character. 
In most specimens it is not perceptible a half whorl back from the 
lip-edge, although in the last of those measured above, the sigmoid 
contour is seen in the growth lines almost a full whorl back. Four 
young specimens examined have the lip hardly more bent than in 
the ordinary Pachycheili. 

The altitude given above is, of course, measured on decollate 
specimens. A young shell 52 mm. high has 7 whorls left; one 
measuring 33 mm. high has 73, and probably has lost about 13. 

Specimens subsequently received from Dall, collected by Dr. 
Spear in Tehuantepec, are dark chestnut colored, with traces of 
darker streaks, and the sinuation of the lip is somewhat less deep 
than in the types. The columella is brown. One very old speci- 
men approaches a cylindrical form, measuring, in its truncated con- 
dition, alt. 51, diam. of last whorl 27, diam. of the truncated top 16 
mm. Somewhat less than three whorls are left. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 271 


REMARKS ON FILARIA. 


BY FREDERICK P.,HENRY, M. D. 


The case which is the basis of my remarks belongs to one of a 
group of diseases included under the generic term “ filariasis,” by 
which is understood an affection caused by one or other species of 
Filaria. This parasite is by no means rare in the lower animals, 
especially in the dog, but I will confine my remarks to those Filarize 
which infest the blood of man. Of these, three species are univer- 
sally recognized: (1) Filaria sanguinis hominis nocturna, (2) Fil- 
aria sanguinis hominis diurna, (3) Filaria perstans. This classifica- 
tion is based upon the habits of the filarial embryos, the first species 
being found in the superficial vessels solely or chiefly during the 
night; the second solely or chiefly during the day, while the third 
is constantly present in the cutaneous capillaries. 

There is a fourth species recently discovered by Dr. Patrick 
Manson, formerly of Amoy, China, now of London, which he has 
modestly named Filaria Demarquayi, after Demarquay, the dis- 
coverer of Filaria nocturna. 

Filaria diurna and Filaria perstans are confined thus far to the 
West of Africa and adjoining districts, while the Filaria nocturna is 
widely prevalent in the tropics and endemic in certain sections of the 
United States. The adults of Filaria nocturna have been frequently 
found ; that of Filaria perstans never, so far as I have been able to 
ascertain. In the opinion of Manson the Filaria loa of the eye of 
the negro of Old Calabar is probably the adult form of the Filaria 
diurna. If it is not, he argues, then there must be another blood 
worm yet to be discovered, for the embryos of the Joa must escape 
from the body of their host through the medium of the circulation. 
Filaria perstans has been practically proved by Manson to be the 
cause of the fatal “ sleeping sickness” of the Congo region. 

While engaged in the study of filariasis my attention was called 
by Dr. Charles A. Oliver of Philadelphia, to a remarkable case of 
Filaria loa recently reported by Dr. Argyll Robertson, the distin- 
guished ophthalmologist of Edinburgh. The patient was a lady 
who had spent eight years in missionary work at Old Calabar on 


272 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


the West Coast of Africa. Without entering into the details of this 
most interesting case I will merely state that in two successive 
operations Dr. Robertson extracted two Filariz (species loa) from 
the ocular tissues, the first a male the second a female. Both of 
these adult parasites are described by Manson in tke course of 
Robertson’s paper. The female was stuffed with embryos but 
repeated examinations of the blood failed to detect any embryonic 
Filariz in that fluid. This fact seems to refute Dr. Manson’s hypoth- 
esis that Flaria loa is the adult form of Filaria diurna. 

The fact that the case on which my remarksare based is the first 
of the kind observed in Philadelphia justifies the publication of a 
life-history of the parasite, Filaria nocturna, which I found in the 
blood of my patient and of which living specimens are placed under 
the microscope. I wish, therefore, to emphasize the fact that Filariz 
in the blood vessels are undeveloped, embryonic, and that they are 
the progeny of an adult, two or three inches long, which has its 
permanent abode in one of the lymphatic channels, probably the 
thoracic duct. Manson, observing the embryonic characters of the 
circulating Filariz, came to the inevitable conclusion that they must 
reach a further stage of development outside of the body and, in all 
probability, in the interior of some blood-sucking animal. He 
naturally thought of the mosquito, an insect whose nocturnal blood- 
sucking habits seemed to render peculiarly fit to act the part of 
intermediary host. Without entering into details I will merely say 
that Manson’s hypothesis was fully verified by experiment. 

In the case of Filaria diurna it is conjectured that certain blood- 
sucking flies of Old Calabar known as Mangrove flies play the role 
of intermediary host. 

The mode in which the embryos of Fi/aria perstans are supposed 
to escape from the human body is equally interesting, although it does 
not involve the agency of any blood-sucking insect. In the region 
in which Filaria perstans is endemic there prevails a skin disease 
called “ craw-craw” attended with pustules, in the contents of which 
Filariz have been found. It is supposed, with great probability, 
that the embryos escape with the rupture of the pustules and, in 
some as yet unexplained manner, although probably through the 
medium of drinking water, gain access to the human system in 
which one, or more, attain maturity. It must be confessed, how- 
ever, that our knowledge of the life history of Filaria perstans and 
Filaria diurna is based more upon analogy than fact and that this 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 273 


will probably continue to be the case until some Manson takes 
residence in West Africa. 

The presence of Filaria embryos in the blood does not necessarily 
give rise to disease, their transverse diameter (3:50 inch) being as a 
rule such as to enable them to traverse the narrowest channels of 
the blood and lymph. Occasionally, however, they occlude these 
vessels and this is due to the fact that the embryos are prematurely 
born enclosed in a sac or sheath of globular form, the transverse 
diameter of which is about 7i> inch. Disease in man occasioned 
by the Filaria is, therefore, the result of disease in the Filaria itself. 
If the adult female Filaria produces the young in a physiological 
manner they are innocuous to their host; if, through disease or 
irritation, she brings them forth prematurely, they obstruct the lymph 
channels and produce one or more of the diseases grouped under the 
title of filariasis. According to Manson, “it is very certain that in 
the great majority of instances in which the blood is infested with 
Filaris, no harm whatever accrues.” 

The principal diseases to which the Iilaria gives rise are abscesses, 
lymphangitis, dermatitis and cellulitis, erysipelas, orchitis, chyluria, 
chylous dropsy of the peritoneum, chylous dropsy of the tunica 
vaginalis, varicose groin glands, lymph scrotum and elephantiasis. 

The disease or rather the symptom that induced me to search for 
the Filaria was chyluria, which is not a common manifestation of 
filariasis even in the tropics. 

It is an interesting fact that the diseases to which the Filariz give 
rise are entirely due to mechanical interference with the circulation 
of lymph and blood; no toxines, or at least none inimical to man 
seem to be generated by this parasite and this fact is in marked 
contrast to what is observed in the ordinary infectious diseases. In 
the latter, as is well known, the products of bacterial activity are 
intensely toxic. I would venture to suggest, in explanation of this 
anomaly, that excretory products diminish in toxicity to man in 
direct ratio with the ascent in the scale of being of the organism 
that discharges them. 

The most remarkable fact in connection with the habits of Filaria 
nocturna is that it is found in the superficial capillaries solely 
or chiefly during the evening and night. On several occasions I 
have examined the blood of my patient at noon or thereabouts and 
have found the parasites either absent altogether or very sparsely 
present; whereas at night they have always been abundant. This 


274 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


“filarial periodicity,” as it is called, has been carefully studied by 


Manson who found that toward sunset the embryos “ begin to enter 
the general circulation. Gradually, as the night wears on, their 
numbers increase. About midnight they are most numerous. As 
morning approaches they get fewer and fewer, and by 8 or 9 A. M. 
they have disappeared.” This periodicity is wonderfully adapted 
to facilitate the escape and further development of the embryo 
through the medium of the mosquito. Various theories of the cause 
of “ filarial periodicity” have been advanced but none of them is 
entirely satisfactory. The most satisfactory of them is that which 
correlates the habits of the parasite with the sleeping and waking 
habits of the host. This, however, is simply reiterating the fact 
without explaining it. That the approach of the embryos to the 
surface is not entirely due to the somnolent condition of the host is 
shown by the fact that it begins several hours before bedtime; 
while, on the other hand, the parasites begin to retire to the deeper 
vessels hours before the usual hour of rising. It cannot be denied, 
however, that the condition of sleep has something to do with the 
approach of the Filaria to the surface. This is proved by a celebrated 
experiment of Dr. Stephen Mackenzie who induced a patient who 
harbored the Filaria nocturna to reverse his usual] habits as to sleep- 
ing and waking: 7. e. to remain awake all night, and sleep during 
the day. While this experiment was in progress the Filaria was 
found in the surface vessels solely or chiefly during the day. The 
fact that the embryos begin to find their way to the surface several 
hours before bedtime would seem to indicate that the systemic condi- 
tion which induces sleep is chiefly vascular and that it is of gradual 
development. 

The refuge of the embryo of Filaria nocturna during the day has 
not, as yet, been discovered. The embryos of Filaria immitis, a 
parasite of the dog, observe a modified periodicity and when fewest 
in the surface vessels are found in enormous numbers in the blood 
vessels of the lung. This is not the case with Filaria nocturna 
for Manson has examined blood expectorated from the lungs of a 
Filaria patient by day without finding the embryos and Myers has 
examined blood withdrawn by aspiration from the spleen and liver 
during the day, with negative results. 

I have ‘elsewhere! discussed the question of the treatment of 


' Medical News, May 2d, 1896. 


0 image Oat nO: 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 275 


filariasis and will, therefore, confine myself to the statement that 
there is no drug that will kill the adult parasite, and that even if 
such a drug were known it would be wisest to refrain from its em- 
ployment. When the adult worm has its seat in one of the extrem- 
ities and dies, an abscess usually results; or it is perhaps more 
correct to say that adult Filarize have been found in such abscesses, the 
presumption being that the latter are caused by the former. If, 
however, the adult Filaria dies in the thoracic duct, with consequent 
abscess, the result would be of necessity fatal. The only treat- 
ment worthy of the name is prophylaxis. Filaria nocturna being 
introduced into the system through the medium of drinking water, 
it is of vital consequence, in the countries in which filariasis is 
endemic, to secure a pure water supply by filtration or other means. 

As Manson remarks’; “the ultimate disappearance of the filarial 
diseases is entirely a matter of personal and municipal education” — 
in other words of “civilization . . . . and if any municipal 
or other body is in want of one more argument for a pure water sup- 
ply, here is one ready made to their hands.” 


2 Davidson’s Hygiene and Diseases of Warm Climates. 


276 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


THE PLANKTONOKRIT, A CENTRIFUGAL APPARATUS FOR THE 
VOLUMETRIC ESTIMATION OF THE FOOD-SUPPLY OF 
OYSTERS AND OTHER AQUATIC ANIMALS. 


BY CHARLES 8. DOLLEY, M. D. 


To Dr. Victor Hensen of Kiel is due the credit of being the first 
to insist upon the importance of a quantitative determination of the 
primitive food supply of marine animals. 

In place of the terms ‘“Auftrieb” and “ pelagische Mulder ” (pel- 
agic tow-stuff) introduced by Johannes Miller, and commonly em- 
ployed by zoologists for nearly half a century, Hensen substituted 
the more comprehensive term, plankton,’ to include all those free- 
swimming, or drifting organisms which make up the fauna and 
flora of the sea. As the result of the initiative taken by Hensen 
and based largely upon the investigation conducted in the North 
Sea and Atlantic Ocean under his leadership, there has been devel- 
oped in less than a decade, one of the most important departments 
of biological science, to which Haeckel has applied the term plank- 
tology. Biologists interested in the practical solution of the diffi- 
culties met with in the preservation and propagation of the food 
supply of Man, as found in ocean and lake, bay and river, were 
quick to recognize the importance of planktonic studies; and the 
broad considerations of the physiologist, concerning the cycle of 
matter in the sea, have led to narrower, but, nevertheless, exceed- 
ingly important studies regarding the source, character and quan- 
tity of the food supply of edible fishes and mollusks. 

It is each year becoming more evident to the fish and oyster cul- 
turist that he has before him a problem of very considerable com- 
plexity. He is awakening to the fact that it is not sufficient that 
he should be able to hatch out and liberate millions of young fish 
fry, or plant thousands of bushels of oyster spat, but that he must 
base his culture experiments upon a thorough knowledge of the 
conditions affecting the survival and growth of the planted forms. 

To the very imperfect knowledge of fish culturists and oyster plant- 
ers, may be largely attributed the fact that American oysters have for 


‘ zhayxrés, wandering, roaming. 


——_— "= 


i See 


mt Baa 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 277 


years steadily diminished in abundance, notwithstanding the enor- 
mous quantity of plants spread out on the oyster grounds of our 
seaboards, as well as that the fisheries of the Great Lakes have, in 
several instances, grown steadily less profitable, notwithstanding 
that millions of young fry have been liberated annually ; for unless 
the transplanted organism can find suitable and abundant food, 
the time and money spent in rearing it, up to the period of its plant- 
ing, is practically wasted. 

As the result of the planktonic studies of Hensen, aquiculture is 
taking on a new phase which promises to mark a period in its 
history as important as has been seen in the very rapid development 
of scientific agriculture, directly attributable to the teachings and 
methods of Sir John Bennett Lawes of Rothamstead, England. 

A glance at recent literature is sufficient to show the marked con- 
trast between modern planktonic investigation and the empirical 
methods hitherto employed in aquiculture. 

Prof. H. B. Ward, in his paper on the “ Food Supply of the Fish 
in the Great Lakes,” and Prof. J. E. Reighard, in his reports on the 
“Biological Examination of Lake St. Clair,” indicate very clearly that 
the practical failure of fish culturists to replenish the rapidly dimin- 
ishing supply of white fish in the Great Lakes may be directly at- 
tributed to a lack of knowledge on the part of those conducting the 
fish hatcheries, of the conditions affecting the primitive food supply 
of these waters. In the work conducted under the direction of 
Prof. Reighard, we find the first recognition in this country of the 
prime importance of a knowledge of the protophytes of the plank- 
ton, constituting as they do the primitive food supply upon which 
are dependent all other forms of the plankton, as well as all higher 
aquatic organisms. 

John P. Lotsy, in a study of the food of the oyster, clam and 
ribbed mussel, confirms what has long been known, that these mol- 
lusks feed almost entirely upon diatoms, and that a knowledge of 
the life conditions of these latter must furnish the basis of intelligent 
oyster culture. 

In reviewing the literature pertaining to oysters and the oyster 
industries, frequent mention is found of the food of oysters and the 
importance of an abundant and regular supply of the same, but no- 
where in the numerous reports of expensive investigations of oyster 
grounds, carried on by the various governments, do we find any sys- 
tematic study of the protophytic plankton of the waters examined. 


278 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Other and much less important factors, such as depth and density 
of the water, the character of the bottom, etc., have received ex- 
haustive attention and are to be found displayed in lengthy tables 
and expensive charts, whereas, the most important factor of all, 
the conditions of the oyster’s food supply, are relegated to brief 
paragraphs and have as yet received practically no consideration at 
the hands of those who have sought to awaken interest in scientific 
oyster culture. i 

In this connection I may be allowed to quote briefly from Prof. 
Haeckel : “ The unicellular plants (Protophyta) have very great im- 
portance in the physiology of the plankton and the cycle of matter 
in the sea, for they furnish by far the greater part of the primitive 
food (Urnihrung). The inconceivable amount of food which the 
countless myriads of swimming marine animals consume daily is 
chiefly derived, directly or indirectly, from the planktonic flora, 
and in this the unicellular protophytes are of much greater impor- 
tance than the multicellular metaphytes. 

“ Nevertheless, the natural history of these small plants has thus 
far been very much neglected. As yet, no botanist has attempted 
to consider the planktonic flora in general, and its relations to the 
planktonie fauna. Only that single class so rich in forms, the di- 
atoms, has been thoroughly investigated and systematically worked 
up; as regards the other groups, not a single attempt at systemiza- 
tion has been made; and many simple forms of great importance 
have lately been recognized for the first time as unicellular plants.” 

James I. Peck, in a recent article on “ The Sources of Marine 
Food,” adds testimony to the importance of primary food supply, 
showing, in a number of instances, the steps in the series from the 
microscopic plants of the sea to the voracious bluefish or squeteague ; 
the higher organisms in the series being dependent on the lower. 
How essential, then, to the planktologist is a knowledge of the con- 
ditions affecting the development of the protophyta, since these 
minute plants form the primitive organic food, determining the wel- 
fare of a long series of higher forms, ending with man himself. 
Means should be devised for establishing planktonic standards based 
upon-the ascertained conditions existing in waters known to be pro- 
lific in higher forms of life. 

Knowing that the oysters, clams and mussels depend practically 
upon diatomaceous food, and that certain bays, coves or estuaries 
are noted for the abundance and quality of their molluscan fauna, 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 279 


let the average weight or bulk of diatoms for each cubic metre of 
such a region be determined and used as a standard of comparison, 
by means of which the culturist may estimate the value of neigh- 
boring waters. 

Corporations such as are now rapidly securing control of the best 
oyster grounds of the coast, will not long be content to work under 
the rule-of-thumb methods of the unscientific oysterman. The ex- 
periments of laying out extensive oyster beds, or establishing fatten- 
ing parks, are too costly to be undertaken on the basis of guess-work 
as to whether conditions are or are not favorable. The money in- 
vested in an oyster bed of one hundred thousand bushels is so great 
that a year’s difference in the time required by the plants to reach 
marketable size means a very considerable profit or loss to the 
planters. 

How to turn over the investment every two or three years, in- 
stead of every five years, is a question which affects very materially 
the dividends of a corporation engaged in oyster culture. In cer- 
tain regions, the oysters grow rapidly in size, but do not become 
sufficiently fat to command the prices paid for oysters of a similar 
size from other beds. These thin oysters, for a few cents a bushel, 
can be transferred to parks or fattening ponds, where, by supplying 
them with waters rich in diatoms, they will become “ primes” in 
the course of a few weeks. j 

The advantage of such fattening is obvious, as is the fact that the 
time consumed in the process is a most important factor, the profit 
depending on whether the parks can be emptied of oysters and re- 
filled every three weeks or every six weeks. To regulate conditions 
of this kind it is not enough to wait for results, to judge from day 
to day whether the oysters are fattening or not, and to judge the 
quality of the water of the park by the effects seen on the oysters. This 
method is unprofitable; it is either too slow, too uncertain or too 
wasteful. Variation in rainfall, in temperature, ete., will affect the 
relative number of food organisms in the water so materially that 
the best results can be secured only by a daily test of the supply. 

Water rich in diatoms is too precious to be allowed to pass 
through the parks in quantities larger than necessary to bring the 
oysters to perfection in the shortest possible time. How now shall 
the ostreaculturist ascertain quickly and accurately the amount of 
plankton in the water of his parks and claires from day to day, or 
decide upon the best places for the location of new beds as regards 
food supply ? 


280 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


The methods adopted by Hensen and his followers in estimating 
the plankton content of any given area of water, are tedious in the 
extreme, and hold the same relation to practical fish and oyster cul- 
ture as do the old fashioned methods of counting blood corpuscles 
and milk globules to the modern use of the hematocrit for the 
quantitative estimation of blood corpuscles; or of the various cen- 
trifugal machines and the Babcock system for the determination of 
the fat contents of milk. To the use of the pelagic tow-net we are 
indebted for practically all our present knowledge of minute aquatic 
organisms, and in so far as concerns the enumeration of the species 
constituting the plankton of any given region, no improvement can 
be suggested over the methods now employed. Prof. Haeckel has, 
however, very clearly pointed out the difficulties connected with 
Hensen’s method of counting the individuals obtained in each haul 
of the net and that such counting “ possesses only an approximate 
and relative value,” and further, that “the only thorough method 
of determining the yield in planktology is the determination of the 
useful substance according to mass and weight, and subsequent 
chemical analysis.” Without undervaluing in any way the count- 
ing methods at present employed by planktologists, I desire here to 
call attention to an apparatus which I have devised and by means 
of which one may make a large number of plankton estimations in 
a single day, in each case determining the volume and weight, 
rather than the number of individuals. By means of this apparatus 
one is enabled to judge of a given area of water at different times of 
the day, states of the tide, from various depths, in fact of the plank- 
tonic variations as regards depth, temperature, density, wind, tide, 
ete. 

The method which I employ is that of the centrifuge, an appara- 
tus which consists of a series of geared wheels driven by hand or 
belt, and so arranged as to cause an upright shaft to revolve to 
a speed of 8,000 revolutions per minute, corresponding to 50 revolu- 
tions per minute of the crank or pulley wheel. To this upright 
shaft is fastened an attachment by means of which two funnel- 
shaped receptacles of 1 litre capacity each may be secured and 
made to revolve with the shaft. The main portion of each of these 
receptacles is constructed of spun copper, tinned. To this is at- 
tached the stem of the funnel consisting of a heavy annealed glass 
tube of 15 mm. in outside diameter with a central bore of 24 to 4 
mm. These glasses are held in place and protected by a cover, 
such as is employed in mounting a water-gauge. 


(12 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 281 


The receptacles having been filled with the water to be examined, 
are caused to revolve for one or two minutes, when the entire con- 
tents of suspended matter in the water is thrown down to the bottom 
of the tube, from which the volume may be read off by means of the 


graduated scale on the outside of the tube. The plankton thus ex- 
peditiously secured can be transferred quickly to a vial or other re- 
ceptacle, to be weighed or otherwise examined at leisure. 

The apparatus is simple and efficient, covering, I think, some of 
the faults in the Hensen method, as pointed out by Haeckel, at any 
rate supplementing the counting method by one which makes it 
possible to secure a far greater number of estimations in agiven time, 
It is free from many sources of error connected with the use ofa net, 
and for the practical purposes of oyster and fish culture enables the 
scientist in charge to ascertain the diurnal variations of any given 
area of water, from planktonic standards previously established 
under the most favorable conditions. I have chosen the name 
planktonokrit for this apparatus, and I am confident that it will 
facilitate in many ways the solution of the cecological problems 
which confront the student of aquatic organisms, and at any rate 


free him, to a certain extent, from “ the Danaides task ” of counting 
the individuals. 19 


282 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF PLANKTOLOGY. 


Anprussow. Remarques biologique et géographique de la flore 
et de la faune pélagiques. Diatomiste, V, II, p. 60. 

ApstEIN, C. Das Plankton des Stisswassers und seine quantitative 
Bestimmung Apparate. Schriften d. naturw. Vereins f. Schleswig- 
Holstein, Bd. 14, p. 267-273, 1890. 

— Quantativ Plankton-Studien im Siisswasser. Biol. 
Centrlb., Bd. XII, p. 484-512, 1892. 

Vergleich der Plankton-produktion in verschiedenen 
holsteinischen Seen. Bericht d. naturf. Gesellsch. Freiburg’i. Br., 
Bd. VIII, p. 79-80, 1894. 

Aurtvitiius, C. W.S. Redogérelse for de svenska hydrogra- 
fiska undersdkningarne aren 1893-1894. III Planktonundersék- 
ningar. Animalisk Plankton. Bih. K. Svensk. Vet.-Akad. Hdlgr., 20 
Bd. Afd. IV, No. 3 (30 p., I Tab., Zusammenfassung, p. 17-18). 
Zool. Ctbl., 3 Jhg. No. 6, p. 102. 

Brrex, E. A. A report on a collection of Cladocera, mostly from 

Lake St. Clair, Michigan, with a table of species. Bull. of the 
Michigan Fish Com., No. 4, 1894. Appendix II, p. 45-47. 
—, assisted by O. A. Olson and H. P. Harder. Plankton 
Studies on Lake Mendota. The vertical Distribution of the pelagic 
Crustacea during July, 1894, with 4 pl. From Trans. Wiss. Acad. 
Se. Arts, Vol. x, p. 421- 482. 

Bors-REY MOND, E. pu. Bericht. tiber die Humboldt-Stiftung und 
die Kieler Plankton-Expedition des National. Sitzungberichte der 
Berliner Akademie d. Wissensch. vom 23 Jan., 1890, pp. 85-87. 

Borne, M. von DEM. Das Wasser fiir Fischerei und Fischzucht. 
Neudam, 1887. 

Bosg, L. A. G. La cause de la coloration des huitres et les ani- 
malcules qui servent 4 Jes nourrir. Institut. Bul. Uniy. Férussae, 
II, 319, 1828. 

Branpt, Karu. Die coloniebildenden Radiolarien (Spherot- 
sen) des Golfes von Neapel, 1885. 

Ueber die biologischen Untersuchungen der Plankton- 
Expedition. Verhandl. der “Gesellsch. f. Erdkunde zu Berlin, yom 
7 Dec., 1889, p. 515. 

Ueber die Schliessnetzfiinge der ae Expedition. 
Verhdlgn. Ges. deutsch. Naturf. u. Arzte, 67 Vers. 2 Bd. I Hft. p. 
107-112. 

Brooks, W. K. The Origin of Food of Marine Animals. Bull. 
U.S. Fish Com., Vol. XIII, p. 87, 1893. 

Browne, Ep. T. On the Changes in the Pelagic Fauna of Ply- 
mouth during September, 1893 and 1895. Jour. Mar. Biol. Assoe., 
N.S., Vol. 4, No. 2, p. 168, 1896. 

BuckLAND, FRANK. The Oyster’s Food, Young and Foes. 
The Sea World and Fishing Gazette, N. Y., Oct. 12, 1880, Vol. I, 
No. 9. 


92 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 283 


CaLpERWooD, W. L. The Feeding-ground of the Herring. 
Nature, Vol. 53, No. 1360, p. 54. 

CaRILLON, Dr. Bol alimentaire de 7’ Ostrea edulis. Bul. Soc. 
Ostr. d’Auray, 105, 1881. 

CHEYNEY, A. Netson. Breeding natural food artificially for 
young fish artificially hatched. Bull. U.S. Fish Com., Vol. XIII, 
p- 277, 1893. 

CHIERCHIA, GAETANO. Collezioni per studi di scienze naturali, 
fatti nel Viaggio intorno al mondo dalla R. Corvetta Vettor Pisani. 
Anni 1882-1885. 

Cuun, Cart. Ueber die geographische Verbreitung der pela- 
gisch lebenden Seethiere. Zool. Anz., No. 214, 215, 1886. 

Die pelagische Thierwelt in gréssern Meerestiefen und 
ihre Beziehungen zu der Oberflachen-Fauna. Bibliotheca zoologica, 
Hft. I, 1888. 70 Jahrsber., Schles. Ges. f. vaterl. Cult. allg. Ber., 

. 20-27. 

B ——_— — Bericht tiber eine nach der Canarischen Insel im Win- 
ter 1887-88 ausgefiihrte Reise. Sitzungsberichte der Berliner 
Akad. der Wiss., p. 519, 1889. 

Die pelagische Thierwelt in grossen Tiefen. Verhandl. 
d. Gesellsch. deutsch. Natuf. u. Aerzte, Bremen, 1890. 

———— Atlantis. Biologische Studien tiber pelagische Organ- 
ismen. V. Uber pelagische Tiefsee Schizopoden. Bibliotheca Zool. 
19, Hft. 3, 1896. 

CiaRk, Frx. N. History and methods of Whitefish Culture. 
Bull. U.S. Fish Com., XIII, p. 213, 1893. 

CLEEVE, Pror. P. T. Planktonundersékningar Cilioflagellate 
och Diatomaceer. Diatomiste, Vol. II, p. 142. 

Dean, Basurorp. The Physiological and Biological Character- 

istics of the Natural Oyster-grounds of South Carolina. (V. The 
Food of the South Carolina Oyster. Animal Element of Oyster 
Food. Plant Element of Oyster Food. Amount of Oyster Food 
occurring in South Carolina Waters as determined by analysis). 
Bull. of the U. S. Fish Com., Vol. X, for 1890. Wash. Gov. 
Printing Office, 1892. 
The Food of the Oyster; its conditions and variations. 
Sec. Rep. of the Oyster Investigation and of Survey of Oyster Ter- 
ritory for the years 1885 and 1886. Albany, 1887, Sup., pp. 49-78, 
3 pls. 

— Sur la cause de la coloration violacée des huitres du 
bassin d’Arcachon. Compt. Rend., LX X XV, 967, 1877. 

Dyer, W. T. TuHistLeTron. Greening of Oysters. Nature, 
Lond., Sep. 6, 1877, Vol. XVI, p. 397. 

Ecxsretn, K. Die Rotatorietifauna des Muggelsees. (Aus. d. 
biol. Station d. deutsch Fischerei-Ver.) Zeitsch. f. Fischerei, 1895. 
Ausz. von C. Zelinke. Zool. Cntrlb. 2 Jhg., No. 24-25. 30 Dee. (8 
Jan.), p. 756-757. 


284 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Forses,S. A. The First Food of the Common Whitefish ( Corego- 
nus clupeiformis, Mitch.). Bull. Ill. State Lab., Vol. I, No. 6, p. 
95-109, 1883. 

France, R. H. Zur Biologie des Planktons. Vorliufige Mit- 
theilung, Biol. Cntrlbt., Bd. XIV, p. 38-38, 1894. 

Fucus, Tu. Ueber die pelagische Flora und Fauna. Verhandl. 
d. k. k. Geol. Reichsanstalt in Wien, 4 Feb., 1882, p. 49-55. 

GatLuon, G. B. Des huitres vertes et des causes de leur colora- 
tion. Annales generales des sciences physiques, VII, 89, 1820. 

——— — Observations sur la cause de la coloration des huitres, 
et sur les animalcules qui servent a leur nutrition. Mém. Soc. Lin- 
néenne du Calvados, I, 135, 1824. 

GrIEsBRECHT, W. Ueber pelagische Copepoden des Rothen 
Meeres, gesammelt yom Marineslabsarzt, Dr. Augustin Krimer. 
Zool. Jahrb., Abth. f. System., 9 Bd., 2 Heft, p. 315-327, 328. 

Goopr, GreorGe Brown. The Relation of Scientific Research 
to Economic Problems. Bull. U.S. Fish Com., Vol. XIII, p. 49, 
1893. 

Graupb, 8. L’Industrie huitriéred Marennes. Michelet, Paris, 
1882. 

GRAEFFE, Epwarp. Uebersicht der Seethier-Fauna des Golfes 
von Triest, nebst Notizen tiber Vorkommen, Lebensweise, Erschein- 
ungs-und Fortpflanzungs-Zeit. Arbeiten d. Zool. Station, Trieste 
1881-88. 

GREEF, RicHARD. Reise nach den canarischen Inseln “ Die 
Meeresstr6mungen als Thierstrassen,” pp. 307-309, 1868. 

HArECKEL, Ernst. Indische Reisebriefe. II Auf. 1, 1882. 
—— Monographie der Medusen. I Bd. Das System der 
Medusen. II Bd. Der Organismus der Medusen, 1879. 

———— Natiirliche Schépfungsgeschichte. Achte Auflage, 
1889. 

———— Plankton Studien. Jenaische Zeitschrift, Vol. XXV, 
Hft. 1, 2, 1890. Published separately by Gustav Fischer, Jena, also 
translated in English by G. W. Field. Planktonie Studies, a Com- 
parative Investigation of the Importance and Constitution of the 
Pelagic Fauna and Flora. Rep. of the U. 8S. Com. of Fish and 
Fisheries for 1889-1891, pp. 565-641, Wash., 1895. 

Monographie der Radiolaren. Uebersicht der Ver- 
breitung, pp. 166-1938, 1862. 

——_—— Report on the Radiolaria collected by H. M. 8. Chal- 
lenger during the year 1873-1876, Chronological Section. S$ 226- 
240 (Deutsch in der “ Algemeinen Naturgeschichte der Radio- 
larien,” 1887, pp. 123-137). : 

Hensen, Vicror. Ueber die Bestimmung des Planktons, oder 
des im Meere treibenden Materials an Pflanzen und Thieren. V, 
Bericht der Commission zur wissenschaftl. Unters. der deutschen 
Meere in Kiel, 1887. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 285 


Ergebnisse der in dem Atlantischen Ocean von Mitte 
Juli bis Anfang Noy., 1889, ausgefiihrten Plankton-Expedition der 
Humboldt-Stiftung auf Grand von gemeinschaftlichen Untersuch- 
ungen einer Reihe von Fach-Forschern herausgegeben. Leipzig, 
1895. 

———— Einige Ergebnisse der Plankton-Expedition des Hum- 
boldt-Stiftung. Sitzungsberichte der Berliner Akad. d. Wissen- 
schaft, vom 13 Marz, “1890, pp. 243-253. Verhdlgn, 65 Vers. 
Ges. deutsch Naturf. u. Arzte PO Ch,, psi24. 

Hopeson, T. V. Notes on the Pelagic Haans at Plymouth, 
Aug.-Dec., 1895. Jour. Mar. Biol. Assoc. N.S ., Vol. 4, No. 2, p. 
173, 1896. 

LAMEERE, Auc. la faune des regions belgiques. Feuille des 
jeunes Naturalistes, (3) 26 Ann., No. 303, Jany. 1896, p. 58 (Tiré du 
“Manuel de la Faune de Belgique”), V. Z. A., 1895, p. 448. 

LEvANDER, K. M. Materialien zur Kenntniss der Wasserfauna 
in der Umgebung von Helsingfors, mit besonderer Beriicksichtigung 
der Meeresfauna. I. Protozoa. Mit 3 Taf. in Acta Soc. Fauna et 
Flora Fenn., XII, No. 2. 

—— Materialien zur Kenntniss der Wasserfauna von Hel- 
singfors. II. Rotatoria. Ausz. von C. Zelinke. Zool. Centrlb. 2 
Jhg., No. 24-25. 30 Dee. (8 Jan.), p. 754-756, 1895. 

Lotsy, Joun P. The Food of the Oyster, Clam and Ribbed 
Mussel. Rep. of the U.S. Com. of Fish and Fisheries for 1893, 
pp. 375-386, 1896. 

McCrapy, JoHn. Observations on the food and reproductive 
organs of Ostrea virginiana, with some account of the Bucephalus 
calculus, nov. spec. Pro. of the Boston Soc. of Nat. Hist., Dee. 3, 
1873, Bost., 1874, Vol. XVI, pp. 170-192. 

McIntosa, W.C. Fish-cultural Investigations at St. Andrew’s 
Marine Laboratory, Scotland. Bull. U. S. Fish Com. for 1893, 
Vol. XIII, p. 241. 

Mostus, Kart. Wo Poatiat die Nahrung fiir die Tiefseethiere 
her? Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Zool. Bd., X XI, p. 294, 1871. 

———— How can the cultivation of the oyster, especially on the 
German coasts, be made permanently profitable? Rep. U.S. Fish 
Com. 1877, Wash., 1879, Vol. V, p. 875-884. 

——_— The Oyster and Oyster-culture. Rep. U.S. Fish Com. 
1880, Wash., 1883, Vol. VIII, pp. 683-752. 

‘Beitriige zur Meeres-Fauna der Insel Mauritius und 
der Seychellen, 1880. 

—— Systematische Darstellung der Thiere des Plankton in 
der west]. Ostsee und auf einer Fahrt von Kiel in den Atlantischen 
Ocean bis jenseit der Hebriden. V. Bericht der Com. z. wissensch. 
Unters. der Deutschen Meere in Kiel, 1887. 

MoseLeEy, H. N. Pelagic Life. Address at the Southampton 
Meeting, Brit. Assoc. Nature, Vol. XX VI, No. 675, p. 558, 1882. 


286 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Murray, Jonny. Preliminary Report on some surface organ- 
isms examined on board H. M.S. Challenger, and their relation to 
ocean deposits. Proc. Roy. Soc., Vol. XXIV, pp. 532-537 
Narrative of a cruise of H. M. 8. Challenger, with a 
general account of the scientific results of the expedition (1875- 
1876). Vol. I, II, 1885. 

Mtuer, Jonannes. Ueber die Larven und die Metamorphose 
der Echinodermen. Abhandl. der Berl. Akad. d. Wissensch., 
1845-1855. 


Ueber die Thassicollen, Polycystinen und Acanthome- 
tren des Mittelmeeres, 1858, Ibid. 

Newson, Jutius. Oyster interests of New Jersey. N. J. Agri- 
cultural Experiment Station, Special Bulletins. ‘Trenton, 1889, 
1891, 1892. 

Ounuin, A. Bidrag till Kannedomen om Malakostrakfaunan i 
Baffin Bay och Smith Sound. Akad. Afhdlg. Lund., 1895. Ausz. 
von L. A. Jagerskiéld in Zool. Centrlb. 2 Jhg., No. 18, p. 565-566. 

Peck, JAMES J. Onthe Food of the Menhaden. Bull. U.S. 
Fish Com. for 1893, Vol. XIII, p. 113. Wash., 1894. 

The sources of Marine Food. Bull. U.S. Fish Com 
for 1895, pp. 851-368, Plates 64-71, 1896. 

Puysecur, M. Notice sur la cause du verdissement des huitres, 
Berger-Lexrault, Paris, 1880, translated, with a supplementary note 
on the coloration of the blood corpuscles of the oyster, by John Ryder. 
Rep. U.S. Fish Com., 1882, Wash., 1884, Vol. X, pp. 793-805. 

Reape, J. B. On the cilia and ciliary currents of the Oyster. 
(States that the food consists entirely of Infusoria). Rep. of the 
Brit. Assoc. for the the Advancement of Science, 15th Meet., 1845, 
Lond., 1846, pp. 66-67. 

REIGHARD, J. E. Suggestions for an experimental method of 
determining the efficiency of quantitative nets. Bull. of the Mich. 
Fish Com., No. 4, 1894. Appendix V, pp. 57-60. 

———— A Biological Examination of Lake St. Clair. Prelim- 
inary account of work done during the summer of 1893 by the 
the party maintained by the Mich. Fish Com. Bull. of the Mich. 
Fish Com., No. 4, 1894, pp. 1-41. 

———— Some Plankton Studies in the Great Lakes. Bull. U. 
S. Fish Com. for 1898, V, XIII, p. 127. 

Rice, H. J. The propagation and natural history of the Ameri- 
can oyster. Supplement to the Rep. of the Com. of Fisheries of the 
State of New York, in charge of the Oyster Investigation. Albany, 
1885, pp. 71-137. 

RicwarD, J. Sur la faune pelagique du Tegernsee. Zool. Cen- 
trlb., 3 Jhg., No. 4, p. 139. 

Ryper, Joun A Notes on the breeding, food and green color 
of the oyster. Bull. U.S. Fish Com., Vol. I, 1881, Washington, 
1882, pp. 403-419. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 287 


An account of experiments in oyster culture and ob- 
servations thereon, made at St. Jerome’s Creek, Maryland, during 
the summer of 1880. Appendix A toa Report of the Commissioner 
of Fisheries of Maryland, Jan., 1881, Hagerstown, 1881, pp. 1-64. 
Discusses* the anatomy and food of the oyster (Ostrea virginiana) 
and the fauna of oyster beds. 

Notes on the breeding, food and green color of the 
oyster. Trans. of the Amer. Fish-cult. Assoc., 11th Annual Meet- 
ing, N. Y., 1882, pp. 57-79. 

Notes on the breeding, food and cause of green color of 
the oyster. Forest and Stream, N. Y., May 25, 1882 and June 1, 
1882, Vol. XVIII, pp. 331-332, and pp. 349-351. 

A contribution to the life-history of the oyster (Ostrea 
virginiana Gmelin, and QO. edulis Linn.). The Fisheries and Fish- 
ery Industries of the U. S., Washington, 1884, sec. 1, pp. 711-758. 

SCHENKLING-PREvoT. Beitrage zur Tiefseeforschung. Zool. 
Garten, 36 Jhg., No. 6, p. 162. Abbildungen aus Chun und aus 
Marshall. 

ScHMIDTLEIN, R. Vergleichende Uebersicht tiber das Erscheinen 
groésserer pelagischer Thiere wihrend der Jahre 1875-1877. Mit- 
theil. der Zool. Station, Neapel, Bd. I, p. 119, 1879. 

SHIMKEWITscH, Wu. La fauna de la mer blanc et les travaux 
de la station biologique russe de Solovetzky. Avec 2 incis. in Re- 
vue Scientifique. T. 3, No. 23, p. 705. 

Sexico, A. Hydrobiologische Untersuchungen, I. Schriften d. 
naturf. Ges. Danzig, n. F., Bd. VII, p. 43-89, 1890. 

SrrorH, H. Neue pelagische Schneckenlarven und Muscheln 
von der deutschen Planktonfahrt. Sitzgsber. Nat. Ges. Leipzig, 
19-21, Jhg., p. 8-10, 42-3. 

SmirH, FrRanK. List of the Protozoa and Mollusca observed in 
Lake St. Clair in the summer of 1893. Bull. of the Michigan Fish 
Commission, No. 4, 1894, Appendix I, pp. 42-44. 

Sorsy, H.C. Description of methods for collecting and estimat- 
ing the number of small animals in sea water. Report, 65 Meet. 
Brit. Assoc., Ipswich, 1895, p. 730. 

SPANGLER, A. M. The Decrease of Food-Fishes in American 
Waters and Some of the Causes. Bull. U.S. Fish Com. for 1893, 
V. XIII, p. 21-35. 

Suttivan, W. K. Composition of the Soils of Oyster Grounds. 
Appendix to Report of the Commissioners Appointed to Inquire into 
the Methods of Oyster Culture in the United Kingdom and France, 
with a View to the Introduction of Improved Methods of Cultivation 
of Oysters into Ireland. Dublin, 1870, pp. 166-176. 

Susra,J. Die Ernahrung des Karpfen und seiner Teichgenossen. 
Stettin, 252 pp., 2 Taff., 1888. 

Tanner, Z. L. On the Appliances for Collecting Pelagie Or- 
ganisms, with Special Reference to those Employed by the U. S. 


288 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Fish Commission. Bull. U.S. Fish Com., Vol. 14, 1894, p. 143- 
151. 

THompson, Wyvitie. The Depths of the Sea. An account of 
the general results of the dredging cruises of H. M. S. S. Porcupine 
and Lightning, 1873. 

The Atlantic. A preliminary account of the general 
results of exploring voyage of H. M.S. Challenger, 1877. 

TuRBYNE, ALEX. The Feeding Ground of the Herring. Nature, 
Vol. 52, No. 1356, p. 617, and No. 13638, p. 129. 

VALENCIENNES, A. Sur les causes de la coloration en vert de 
certaines huitres. Compt. Rend., XII, 345, 1841. 

VANHOFFEN, E. Ueber grénlandisches Plankton (Vortrag.). 
In Verhdlgn. Ges. deutsch Naturf. u. Arzte, 66 Vers. Wien, 2 Th., 
I Halfte, p. 133-135. 

Voet, CaRL. Ocean and Mittlemeer, p. 303, 1848. 

Water, E. Eine praktische verwerthbare Methode zur quanti- 
tiven Bestimmung des Teichplankton. In Forschgsber. Biol. Stat. 
Plén., Th. 3, p. 100-187. 

Warp, H. B. A Preliminary Report on the Worms (mostly 
parasitic) collected in Lake St. Clair, in the summer of 1893. 
Bull. of the Michigan Fish Commission, No. 4, 1894. Appendix 
III, pp. 49-56. 

A new Method for the Quantitative Determination of 
Plankton Hauls. Trans. Amer. Mier. Soc., Vol. 17, p. 255, 1896. 
Zool. Centrlb., 3 Jhg., NR. 7, p. 225. 

—— The Food Supply of the Fish in the Great Lakes. The 
Nebraska Literary Magazine, Vol. 1, Nov., 1895, No. 2, pp. 107- 
124. 


The Food Supply of the Great Lakes; and some Ex- 
periments on its Amount and Distribution. 2 Plates. Trans. 
Amer. Micr. Soc., Vol. 17, p. 242-251, 1896. 

WuintHer, G. On the Geographical Distribution of the Common 
Oyster. Annals and Magazine of Natural History, London, March, 
1878, 5 ser., Vol. 1, pp. 185-189. 

———— ! Abstract translation of Om vore Haves Naturforhold 
med Hensyn til konstig Oestersav] og om dei den henseende an- 
stillede Forség. Kopenhagen, 1876. Nordisk Tidskrift for Fiskeri. 

Wo.corr, Dr. R. H. The Insecta and Acarina of Lake St. 
Clair, a preliminary Report. Bull. of the Michigan Fish Com., No. 
4, 1894. Appendix IV, pp. 55-56. 

ZACHARIAS, QO. Statistische Mittheilungen tiber das Plankton 
des Grossen Pliner Sees. In Zool. Anz., 17 Jhg., No. 464, p. 457. 

———— Quantitative Untersuchungen tiber das Limnoplank- 
ton. Nebst Anleitung zur Vornahme von Zahlungen und Volu- 
menmessungen. Berlin, 1896, 64 p., M. 2. 

Faunistische Mittheilungen (Pléner See) 2 Taf. In 
Forschungsber. Biol. Stat. Plén, Th. 3, p. 73. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 289 


Ueber die wechselnde Quantitit des Plankton im 
Grossen Ploner See. Ibid., p. 97-117. 

——_—_ Ueber die horizontale und verticale Verbreitung lim- 
netischer Organismen. Ibid., p. 127. 
— Planktonmessungen in Grossen Ploner See. Corr. BI. 
f. Fischzucht, 3 Jhg., No. 1, p. 7-8. 
Fauna des grossen Ploner Sees. Forschungsber. d. 
Bel Station zu Plon., Il Theil, p. 57-64, 1894. 


290 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


JUNE 2. 
The President, SamueL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 


Seventy persons present. 


JUNE 9. 
Harrison ALLEN, M. D., in the Chair. 
Thirteen persons present. 


Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :— 

“Contributions to a Knowledge of the Hymenoptera of Brazil, 
No. 1. Scoliide,” by William J. Fox. 

“The Mesenteries of the Lacertilia,” by Edward D. Cope. 

“Revision of the Slugs of North America: Ariolimax and 
Aphallarion,” by Henry A. Pilsbry and E. G. Vanatta. 


JUNE 16. 
Mr. CuHarces Moreis, in the Chair. 
Nineteen persons present. 


Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :— 

“A Collection of Fishes obtained at Swatow, China, by Miss 
Adele M. Fielde,” by Cloudsley Rutter. 

“ A Collection of Fishes made by the Rey. Joseph Seed Roberts 
in Kingston, Jamaica,” by David Starr Jordan and Cloudsley 
Rutter. 


JUNE 23. 
The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 


Twenty-eight persons present. 


JUNE 30. 
The President, Samuret G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 


Twenty-one persons present. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 291 


The Ulna of the Common Brown Bat.—Dr. Harrison ALLEN 
called attention to the ulna in the common Brown Bat, Adelonyc- 
teris fusca. The ulna in the Vespertilionidae had been described by 
some authors (e. g. de Blainville) as ending free in the muscles of 
the forearm. Dr. Allen believed he had demonstrated this arrange- 
ment in Adelonycteris and Vespertilio. Others assert that in all the 
bats the ulna is anchylosed to the shaft of the radius. Dr. Allen 
wished to revise his former statement’ on this subject. In a fully 
adult specimen of the bones of the forearm which he had subjected 
to prolonged boiling, Dr. Allen found that the ulna by gentle trac- 
tion could be separated from the radius and be traced as a slender 
filament along the entire length of the forearm and to end at the 
wrist joint. The arrangement in the adult, in this species at least, 
is, therefore, not different from that found in the embryo. 


The following were ordered to be printed :— 


1Mon. N. A. Bats, 1894. 


292 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


CONTRIBUTIONS TO A KNOWLEDGE OF THE HYMENOPTERA OF BRAZIL. 
No. 1, SCOLIIDZ. 


BY WILLIAM J. FOX. 


The explorations of Herbert H. Smith have done more to extend 
our knowledge of the insect fauna of Tropical America than those 
of any other person, with the possible exception of the late Henry 
Walter Bates. His work in Mexico for the Biologia Centrali 
Americana and for the West India Committee has given him an 
extended reputation; but it remains for the classifying of his 
South American collections to show the real extent of his labors in 
the field and forest. 

It has been my good fortune to have Mr. Smith’s collection of 
fossorial hymenoptera placed in my hands for identification and 
study, and its size is indicated by the number of species contained 
in the present paper on the Scoliidee, which includes no Jess than 
thirty species, besides some half dozen species of the genus Tiphia, 
which, in consequence of many faulty descriptions of South American 
forms, I have been obliged to leave undetermined. 

In 1873-1875, Mr. Smith worked alone on the Amazons, and the 
Santarem material was then gathered. In 1881-1886, accompanied 
by his wife and two assistants, another journey was made. Going 
first to Pard he and his wife made a flying trip to Santarem, and 
then down the coast, stopping a week at Pernambuco and several 
months at Rio de Janeiro ; from the latter place they went to Entre 
Rios. Six months were spent in Rio Grande do Sul; but there are 
no hymenoptera in the collection from that place. By steamer 
they proceeded up the Paraguay to Corumbé and Cuyabé. Head- 
quarters were established at Chapada, and there four years were spent. 
Ad interim Mr. Smith returned to Rio de Janeiro for a year, leay- 
ing his wife and one assistant in the interior. After finally leaving 
Chapada they made a canoe journey on the Upper Paraguay to 
Pedra de Amolas, Pacoval, ete., but most of the time was here given 
to geological and ethnological work. Subsequently several weeks 
were spent at Corumbd and Piedra Blanca, before returning to the 
United States. 


1896. ] _ NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 293 


Mr. Smith has kindly furnished me with the following notes on 
localities visited as far as they relate to the hymenoptera. 

Santarem. A town at the junction of the Tabajés with the 
Amazon. Its immediate vicinity is more or less open land, with 
scattered low trees and a thin grass growth: the type of vegetation 
ealled campo in Brazil. Most of the hymenoptera labeled 
Santarem, were, however, collected a few miles inland or down the 
Amazon, at the settlements of Panema, Marurii and Taperinha, 
where most of the land is covered with heavy forest broken by a 
few clearings. The soil both of campo and forest is sandy. The 
climate is moderately warm for a region so near the equator, and 
moist, though not extremely so. 

Monte Alegre isin campo land very similar to Santarem ; it is on 
the opposite or northern side of the Amazon. 

Specimens marked Pernambuco are from the San Francisco plan- 
tation, some miles inland: a clearing in forest; land hilly, and soil 
clay. 

Rio de Janeiro. Land originally forest. No specimens were col- 
lected above 2,500 ft. alt. 

Entre Rios, in the State of Rio de Janeiro, is on the Parabyba 
do Sul River, back of the Organ Mountains. The soil is clay, cov- 
ered with low and somewhat open forest; climate rather dry. Mr. 
Smith says: “The insects of Entre Rios, I have found, resemble 
those of Chapada and Corumbd rather than those of Rio.” 

Corumbd, in the State of Matto Grosso, on the western bank of 
the Paraguay, close to the confines of Bolivia. The climate dry and 
hot ; the vegetation open ; dry forest, full of cacti and other thorny 
plants. The opposite side of the Paraguay, where some collections 
were made (these are marked “ lowland’) isin the great flood-plain : 
a vast semi-swampy region, flooded every year during several months. 
This is the region known to geographers as Lake Xaraes, or, better, 
the Xaraes Marshes (also written Charaes or Jaraes). 

Piedra Blanca (or Pedra Branca), a small settlement and custom- 
house just within the boundary of Bolivia, on a lake opening into 
the Paraguay, and only four miles from Corumba. The land is low 
and damp and covered with heavy forest, very different from the 
region about Corumba. 

Pacoval and Pedra de Amolas are settlements on the Paraguay 
above Corumba, on the edge of the flood-plain, but backed by rocky 
hills; land open or forest. 


294 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Cuyaba is the capital of Matto Grosso, on the River Cuyaba, a 
sub-branch of the Paraguay ; soil dry and stony, with campo growth ; 
climate dry and hot. 

Cachoeira is just above Cuyaba, on low, semi-swampy land. 

Chapada. Here the greater part of the collection was made. It 
is an Indian village, thirty miles northeast of Cuyabda, on the plateau 
stretching from the southern tributaries of the Amazon to the flood- 
plains of the Paraguay, and is about 2,700 ft. above sea level. The 
land in the immediate vicinity of the village is clayey or stony. 
Many of the specimens marked from here are from the neighboring 
settlements of Abrilonga, Gloria, etc., several hundred feet lower, 
and on sandy soil. All this region has a varied vegetation : stretches 
of open land or campo and semi-forest are interspersed with large 
patches of heavy forest. The climate is never very warm (mean at 
Chapada 72° F.) and there are cold snaps in June, July and August, 
when the thermometer frequently sinks to 40° or lower. These cold 
snaps are caused by southerly winds, which, as Mr. Smith states, he 
has proved are the same as the “ pamperos,” which are so destructive 
to shipping on the Rio de la Plata. The latitude of Chapada is 
about 14°8’. The hymenoptera from this place were largely col- 
lected on flowers about the open lands, and near the streams, where 
many specimens were gathered in muddy places. 

To quote from a letter of June 16, 1896, from Mr. Smith: “I 
cannot say that the collection of fossorial hymenoptera is a par- 
ticularly good one. The best work was done at Chapada; but even 
' there most of our time was given to other branches, and I was much 
interrupted. In my opinion, the hymenoptera of Brazil are hardly 
touched. The rule in the tropics, with all orders of insects, is that 
a few species are common, while a great majority are rare, and re- 
quire a long and patient collecting to amass a reasonably good rep- 
resentation. Probably the Scoliide are as well represented as any, 
because most of the species are large and conspicuous. They have 
a very peculiar and almost indescribable odor. I found them most 
common on flowers.” . 

The Scoliide are as follows: 


Myzine flavopicta Sm. 


Rio de Janeiro (November) ; Corumba (February and April) ; 
Chapada (March and November). Four female and seven male speci- 
mens. Burmeister’s M. duplicata is a variety of this species. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 295 


Myzine emarginata n. sp. 

 .—Black ; basal two-thirds of mandibles; tibiz, tarsi and apex 
of femora reddish ; a transverse, medially enlarged line across front, 
a narrower one across occiput ; line on pronotum posteriorly and a 
spot on each side anteriorly, spot on dorsulum medially, small one near 
tegule, line on scutellum and metanotum, tegule at base, triangular 
spot on mesopleurz, a large one on each postero-lateral angle of 
middle segment, and a small elongate one above in the middle, rarely 
absent, spot on fore femora beneath near apex, spot on medial and 
hind femora above near apex, this spot sometimes extending on the 
lower surface, fore tibiz externally, broad transverse band on first 
dorsal segment, sometimes emarginate anteriorly in the middle, the 
second ‘entirely except a narrow line at base and a transverse medial 
line, these lines united so as to form a low X, the medial one not 
extending to the sides, and apex of second, third and fifth with a 
narrow, thrice emarginate line at apex, yellow, that on the fifth 
irregular; body sparsely clothed with griseous pubescence; front 
with large separated punctures, smooth medially, those of the vertex 
and occiput very sparse; clypeus rather sharply carinated down the 
middle; pronotum and dorsulum much more sparsely, with large 
punctures, those of the scutellum and mesopleure closer; middle 
segment above finely punctured, in the middle somewhat roughened 
posterior face above and at the sides with coarse transverse wrinkles, 
at apex the wrinkles are longitudinal, sides very finely and obliquely 
striated ; first dorsal segment punctured at the sides, the second 
with fine sparse punctures, strong at sides, punctures of segments 3 
and 4 fine and closer, of the fifth stronger, second ventral with large 
sparse punctures, the remaining ventrals finely punctured at base, 
coarsely at apex; pygidial area covered with strong, longitudinally 
parallel striz, the apex narrowly reddish ; wings light fusco hyaline, 
with a broad fuscous streak running from stigma to apex of supe- 
riors. Length 16-17 mm. 

Chapada (March to May). A series of males collected at Chapada 
and Corumba (April), I place here with some doubt. 

$ —Black ; abdomen iridescent ; clypeus, mandibles except apex, 
inner orbits, spot on scape beneath, one over each antennez, line on 
anterior and posterior margin of pronotum, that on anterior margin 
interrupted medially, dorsulum medially, spot on scutellum and 
metanotum, large spot on mesopleurz anteriorly and a small one 
posteriorly, two parallel spots on upper surface of middle segment, 


296 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


postero-lateral angles of the latter, spot on all the coxe beneath, and 
above on the posterior pairs, femora except base, remainder of legs. 
except stripe on tibize beneath and a ring at apex of tarsal joints, a 
thrice emarginate fascia at apex of dorsals 1-6, the first broadest, 
the last interrupted medially, and a elongate spot on each side of 
ventrals 2-5, all yellow ; wings hyaline, faintly dusky at apex, stigma 
testaceous; antennz but little longer than the combined length of 
head and thorax; front rather strongly and closely punctured, the 
occiput much more finely so; middle segment above in the middle 
strongly punctured, the posterior face closely and transversely striato- 
punctate, on the sides obliquely and more finely so; abdomen above 
with rather strong, separated punctures, beneath the punctures a 
little finer and sparser. Length 15-17. 

This sex is very like the ¢ of flavopicta, but is, as a rule, larger ; 
spots on postero-lateral angles of the middle segment larger, abdom- 
inal fascise thrice emarginate, and the sculpture of the middle seg- 
ment is less coarse. The spotted upper surface of middle segment 
is constant in all but two of the twenty-two specimens before me. 


Myzine frontalis Burm. 


One specimen. Corumba (April). 


Myzine radiata n. sp. 


? .—Black ; abdomen iridescent ; spot on each side of elypeus, at 
base of each antenna, inner orbits, two dots on metanotum, and a 
small spot on each side of the first dorsal segment, yellow ; tibis, 
tarsi, mandibles and tegule in part obscurely rufo-testaceous ; 
clypeus with fairly strong punctures on each side, in the middle 
longitudinally raised or carinated and impunctate ; front and occiput. 
with large separated punctures, which are finer along the occipital 
margin; region including the ocelli almost impunctate; scape dis- 
tinetly punctured ; pronotum and dorsulum with strong, though not 
very deep punctures, the posterior portion of dorsulum, however, 
and the scutellum are longitudinally rugoso-punctate; sides of pro- 
thorax strongly and obliquely striated; mesopleure with the pune- 
tures deeper and more even than on pronotum ; upper surface of mid- 
dle segment at base microscopically punctured, transversly strigose 
posteriorly, posterior face with unusually coarse wrinkles orf olds ra- 
diating rather evenly from apex and covering the entire surface, and 
running into less coarse oblique striz on the sides; calearia and 
spines of legs white; dorsal segments 1-4, rather finely and evenly 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 297 


punctured, the fifth more strongly, the base of 5 and 4 transversely 
smooth; ventrals with a series of strong punctures before apical 
margins, from which pale hairs project, otherwise sparsely punctured; 
pygidial area longitudinally and evenly striated; pubescence of 
body pale, a rather prominent bunch on each side of the first dorsal 
segment; wings subfuscous, the anterior portion of the anteriors 
deeply clouded, nervures black. Length 15 mm. 

Chapada (March). One specimen. Seems to be very distinct as 
regards coloration and sculpture of middle segment. 
Myzine iridescens n. sp. 

?.—Black ; abdomen iridescent, especially the first dorsal seg- 
ment; inner orbits, metanotum, and a dot on each side of the first 
dorsal segment of abdomen, yellow; pubescence pale; clypeus with 
fairly strong punctures, except in the middle, which is longitudinally 
smooth and raised or carinated; front with large, deep punctures 
closer than in radiata; occiput with large, rather sparse punctures, 
its posterior margin with finer and closer ones; ocellar region almost 
impunctate; scape distinctly punctured; pronotum with large, 
though not deep, somewhat confluent punctures ; dorsulum with the 
punctures on anterior portion fine and closer, on the remainder 
stronger and sparser than those of the pronotum; scutellum with large, 
separated punctures, upper surface of middle segment at base finely 
and closely punctured, apically rugose, particularly in the middle; 
posterior face covered with fairly strong, close strize which radiate 
from the apex, become coarser laterally, and extend on sides where 
they are finer and evener; sides of prothorax finely striated obli- 
quely ; mesopleurz with large, deep punctures; calcaria and spines 
of the legs white; the tibize and tarsi obscurely rufo-testaceous ; 
abdomen above rather finely punctured, most strongly on segments 
4 and 5, and at the sides, base of 2-4 transversely smooth; ventral 
segments with large, sparse punctures, a transverse series before the 
apical margins of segments 2-5 ; pygidial area longitudinally striated ; 
wings subfuscous, the anterior portion of anteriors deeply clouded, 
nervures and tegule in part testaceous. Length 12 mm. 

Chapada (December). One specimen. This is very similar super- 
ficially to radiata, but differs in much finer sculpture of thorax, 
particularly the middle segment. 

Tiphia parallela Sm. 

Chapada (December and January); Santarem (February); Villeta 

(M ern specimens. 


298 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Tiphia solitaria Sm. 

Chapada (May and November); Santarem. Four specimens. 
Smith doubtfully referred solitaria to parallela as the latter’s male, 
in which he was probably correct. 

In addition to the two species of Tiphia above noted the collec- 
tion contains, perhaps, five others, which I have not been able to 
place in consequence of the many incomplete descriptions that exist 
of neotropical forms. Smith’s descriptions of Tiphia are almost 
useless. 


Epomidiopteron Julii Rom. 


Chapada (December and February) ; Santarem. Four specimens, 
all females. 

Scolia (Discolia) nigrescens n. sp. 

Deep black, shining ; mandibles red ; wings black, with a strong 
blue reflection ; tibise and tarsi reddish ; base of second ventral seg- 
ment with two small tubercles. 

9 .—Head with deep, sparse punctures, closest at base of antenn 
and on occiput; anterior margin of clypeus truncate ; scape sparsely 
punctured ; thorax coarsely punctured, tolerably closely so on pro- 
thorax and mesopleurz, dorsulum and scutellum impunctate me- 
dially, upper segment of middle segment in middle strongly pune- 
tured, posteriorly depressed, and sparsely punctured; legs more or 
less reddish, their amount of black and red variable, the spines black, 
longer spur of hind tibize equal to about one-third the length of the 
first hind tarsal joint ; abdomen strongly punctured, particularly on 
the first and second dorsals, dorsals 3-5 almost impunctate except at 
base, where the punctures are close and small, dorsal segment six 
with cribrose punctures and coarsely hirsute, ventrally the abdomen 
has large, sparse punctures, out of which. project black hairs; 
pilosity of the body black and sparse ; base of second ventral with 
two small, transverse tubercles. Length 22-24 mm. 

$.—Similar to ? in coloration except that the legs are usually 
entirely black ; antennz scarcely as long as head and thorax, stout; 
abdomen with all the segments punctured alike, the punctures being 
well separated, but not sparse ; joints of medial and hind tarsi within, 
at apex, with a small bunch of grayish hairs. Length 16-20 mm. 

Chapada (November, December and March). Fourteen speci- 
mens. Near monticola Cam., from Mexico, but is distinct in the 
tuberculate second ventral segment, the medially impunctate dor- 
sulum and scutellum and differently colored legs. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 299 


: Scolia (Discolia: versicolor Sauss. 

Chapada (November and March.) Four ? and one ¢ specimen. 
Saussure in describing this species was in doubt whether its habitat 
was Brazil or Africa. The specimens before me agree very well with 
the description, and leave no doubt in my mind as to their identity. 
The color of thorax varies somewhat, the dorsulum, tegule and scu- 
tellum sometimes partaking of rufous. 

The male has not before been recorded. It may be briefly diag- 
nosed as follows: 

$.—Colored like the 9, but with four apical segments reddish ; 
antennee stout, about as long as head and thorax; thorax strongly 
punctured, sparsely so on dorsulum, scutellum, metanotum and 
middle segment, medially; abdomen with strong punctures, fairly 
close, on dorsal segments 4—6 in the middle somewhat sparsely, the 
ventrals much more sparsely so; second ventral at base strongly 
bituberculate; longer spur of hind tibize about half as long as the 
first hind tarsal joint ; wings black, with a strong bluish-purple re- 
flection ; pilosity of body black, rather sparse. Length 20 mm. 


Scolia (Discolia) Drewseni Sauss. 

Chapada (March and April). Eighteen 9 and fifteen 3 speci- 
mens. The wings have a bronzy-purple reflection, not violaceous as 
described by Saussure. 

The ¢, heretofore unknown, may be described as follows: 

$.—Similar to 9 as to coloration, the black or under side of 
thorax more distinct; antennz about as long as head and thorax; 
thorax strongly punctured, sparsely so on the middle of dorsulum, 
scutellum, metanotum and upper surface of middle segment ; abdo- 
men with strong punctures becoming closer toward apex, sparsest 
on first and second dorsal and on the ventral segments ; longer spur 
of hind tibiz nearly half as long as the first hind tarsal joint; 
second ventral segment at base indistinctly tuberculate; wings black, 
with a strong bronzy-purple reflection; pilosity of body reddish, 
rather dense on apical abdominal segments. Length 12-18 mm. 


Scolia (Discolia) decepta n. sp. 
Similar to Drewseni, but the wings are deeper blue, and not pur- 
plish ; clypeus transverse, not produced in the middle as in Drewseni. 
2 .—Head with deep, sparse punctures, almost impunctate above 
on the front, more closely at base of antennz and on occiput ; clypeus 
convex and impunctate medially, depressed and punctured on the 
sides, a small patch of pale hairs on each extreme side; thorax 


300 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


strongly punctured, very closely above on prothorax, elsewhere 
sparsely, the center of dorsulun, scutellum and metanotum impunc- — 
tate or nearly so, the middle segment above in the middle with large, 
scattered punctures ; longer spur of hind tibiz less than half as long 
as the first hind tarsal joint ; first and second dorsal segment strongly 
punctured, the punctures on second sparsest and feebler, dorsals 3-5 
almost impunctate, the sixth with cribrose punctures, ventrals 
with large, much scattered punctures, the base of second segment 
bitubereulate; venation about asin Drewseni, the second transverso- 
cubital nervure strongly curved outwardly. Body rufous; flagel- 
lum except first joint, occiput narrowly, thorax on sides and beneath, 
the middle segment entirely, and first and base of second abdominal 
segments, black ; legs, including spines, rufous; pilosity black, except 
fringe of mandibles and two apical abdominal segments. Length 
21 mm. 

Chapada. One specimen. Superficially, decepta shows a striking 
resemblance to Drewseni, from which it differs in the bluer wings, 
shape of clypeus and color of pilosity. 


Scolia (Discolia) bisignata n. sp. 

Similar to Drewseni and decepta in coloration, the third dorsal 
abdominal segment with a small lateral yellow spot ; clypeus trans- 
verse anteriorly ; wings black, with a strong purplish reflection. 

9 .—Head with deep, sparse punctures, those of the occiput, base 
of antennze and on sides of clypeus, much closer ; elypeus strongly 
convex and impunctate medially, its fore margin transverse, at the 
sides with a small bunch or fringe of pale hairs; thorax strongly 
punctured, closest on prothorax and dorsulum anteriorly, posteriorly 
on dorsulum the punctures are large and sparse, as are likewise those 
of the scutellum and metanotum, on the centre of upper surface of 
middle segment the punctures are more evenly spaced ; mesopleurse 
posteriorly, metapleurz and posterior face of middle segment smooth, 
impunctate, or nearly so; longer spur of hind tibiz not one-third as 
long as the first hind tarsal joint; dorsal segments 1, 2 and base of 
third with strong, separated, though not sparse punctures, those at 
base of second and third segments finest and closest, apical portion 
of dorsals 3-5 with large sparse punctures, sixth dorsal cribrose, 
ventrals very sparsely punctured, the punctures of the last segment 
finest, second ventral bituberculate at base. Body rufous; flagellum 
except basal joints, mandibles at tips, thorax on sides and be-. 
neath, and the dorsulum medially as a rule, and a narrow, somewhat 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 301 


indistinct line at apex of dorsal segments 1-3, black ; pilosity red- 
dish and rather sparse, that on the occiput pertaining to yellow; 
none of the abdominal segments fringed ; tegulze strongly punctured 
on anterior half. Length 16-21 mm. 

$ —Head strongly and evenly punctured throughout the front, 
shallowly so on the occiput; antennze scarcely as long as the head 
and thorax united, first and second joints of flagellum about equal 
in length, the terminal joint rounded at apex (the antenne are de- 
cidedly stouter than in the male of Drewsenz) ; thorax strongly punc- 
tured but rather more closely than in the female, and the posterior 
face of middle segment with large punctures; abdomen closely 
punctured particularly above, the last dorsal hardly cribrose ; second 
ventral bituberculate. A yellow spot in the emargination ‘of the 
eyes, and the black on dorsulum and abdomen more generally dis- 
tributed. Length 13-16 mm. 

Chapada (January, March and April). Eleven female and six 
male specimens. The extent of black of abdomen and sides of thorax 
is subject to variation : in two females the dorsal segments are almost 
entirely black. ‘The yellow spots on abdomen are constant in all 
specimens, and may be regarded as a good superficial character in 
distinguishing this species from Drewseni and allied species. 

Elis vitripennis Sm. 

Chapada (March). Four specimens. 
Elis regina Sauss. 

Chapada (January to April). Thirty-nine specimens, all females. 
Elis nigra Sauss. 

Chapada (October,. February, March and April). Twenty-three 
female specimens. 

Elis lucida Lep. 

Two specimens from Chapada, collected in December and March 
respectively, I refer with some doubt to E. lucida. The larger 
specimen. measures 27 mm. in length, whereas Saussure gives 38 mm. 
Should my specimens be correctly determined, there is no reason for 
considering this species as a variety of costalis, as suggested by 
Saussure and Sichel on p. 219 of their catalogue, as it is clearly 
distinct from that species. 

‘Elis hyalina Lep. 

Represented in the collection by numerous specimens of both 

sexes from Chapada (December, March and April). In addition to 


302 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


the clear wings, the male of hyalina is distinguished from those of 
costalis and Wesmaeli by the unusually prominent and pointed tu- 
bercle at base of second ventral abdominal segment. 


Elis costalis Lep. 

Chapada (March and April) ; Rio de Janeiro (November). Four- 
teen females and numerous male specimens. The latter show con- 
siderable variation in size and maculation, the spotted form, however, 
is apparently rare. This form is the E. fallax Saussure, referred by 
that author as a variety of E. hyalina. It should be placed with 
costalis, however, in consequence of its heavy form and darker wings 
and also by the shape of the ventral tubercle of abdomen. 


Elis Wesmaeli Lep. 


Chapada (December, February, March and April). Numerous 
specimens of both sexes. 
Elis cineraria Sichel. 

A large series, over one hundred specimens, is in the collection 
from Chapada (November, March and April). The specimens 
agree with the description of cineraria, except that there is no yellow 
on the fourth dorsal or on any of the ventral abdominal segments. 
Only males are represented ; and the series shows considerable vari- 
ation in size, specimens measuring 16-30 mm. 

Elis variegata Fabr. 
Chapada (March). Fourteen male specimens. These only vary 


in that two specimens have the spots on the second dorsal segment 
united. 
Elis conspicua Sm. 

Four males. Santarem; Chapada (March). These vary in length 
from 12-20 mm.; and in the smaller specimens the pronotum is 
partly yellowish, and in one the third dorsal abdominal segment is 
bimaculated with that color. 

Elis (Dielis) angulata n. sp. 

Close to conspicua, but dorsal segments 1-4 fasciate with yellow- 
ish, thorax less shining, and pubescence of pronotum entirely pale 
yellowish. 

9? .—Black, mandibles medially, tegule and tibize and tarsi more 
or less reddish-testaceous ; transverse spot on metanotum and a band 
on dorsal segments 1-4, yellowish, the bands on first and fourth seg- 
ments narrow, those on second and third greatly dilated medially 


oe 
<—- 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 303 


and emarginate anteriorly, at the sides narrowed ; pubescence pale, 
that of the occiput and pronotum somewhat yellowish; apical mar- 
gins of dorsal and ventral segments 2—5 distinctly fringed, the color 
of which fringe is white except on the dorsal segments medially and 
the fifth ventral (which have it golden-brown); the first dorsal is 
rather densely pubescent; clypeus punctured at the sides, bearing 
two longitudinally parallel carinzee down the middle; front strongly 
and closely punctured, the vertex and occiput, with exception of a 
few scattered punctures, impunctate ; scape with scattered punctures ; 
thorax subopaque, the dorsulum strongly punctured laterally and 
anteriorly, impunctate medially; scutellum and metanotum with 
scattered punctures; middle segment above with strong separated 
punctures, with a smooth, longitudinal, narrow space in the middle; 
posterior face concave, impunctate at extreme sides, the lateral mar- 
gins somewhat sharply carinated ; spines of the legs whitish-testa- 
ceous, calearia darker; hind tibiz beset with strong, black thorns 
externally, their longer spur more distinctly spatulate than in con- 
spicua; wings subhyaline, subfuscous anteriorly and apically, with 
a purplish iridescence, nervures and stigma testaceous, apex of 
second submarginal cell very sharply angular in the middle; dorsal 


segments punctured toward the sides, rather opaque, ventrals shining, 


the second and third with two, and the fourth with one, transverse 
series of strong punctures; pygidium nude, sculptured in such a way 
as to appear shingled, its apical margin narrowly smooth and testa- 
ceous. Length 17 mm. 

Santarem. One specimen. The strongly angulated apex of sec- 
ond submarginal cell and the maculation distinguish this species 
from conspicua and auripilis. 

Elis (Dielis) auripilis n. sp. 

Likely to be confused with angulata, but differs in its golden 
pubescence of front and dorsulum, the semi-yellowish wings and 
strongly punctured occiput. 

2 .—Black; mandibles reddish ; transverse spot on metanotum, 
and a fascia on dorsal abdominal segments 1-4, or 5, yellow, those 
on the second and third, or fourth broad, emarginate anteriorly and 
narrowly incised with black at the sides, else a small black spot is 
enclosed by the yellow on each side, on the first segment the fascia 
narrow and sometimes interrupted medially, on the fourth more or 
less variable, on the fifth narrow and inconstant; front, occiput, 
pronotum and dorsulum bearing golden pubescence, that of cheeks, 


304 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


clypeus, thorax beneath and legs griseous ; dorsal segments 2-5 with 
a fringe of golden-brown pubescence at apex, ventrals 2-5 with a 
white fringe; clypeus furrowed down the middle, bearing some 
coarse folds anteriorly; front strongly and closely punctured, the 
vertex with a few large, scattered punctures; occiput coarsely punc- 
tured and posteriorly, in addition, bearing coarse folds or rugosities ; 
scape with scattered punctures; pronotum except posterior margin, 
strongly and closely punctured, bearing near each antero-lateral 
angle a deep, oblique depression ; dorsulum with very large, rather 
regularly placed punctures, which are but little sparser medially ; 
scutellum smooth medially, strongly punctured at each side, the 
metanotum impunctate; middle segment above somewhat prominent 
in the middle at apex, the median division with large punctures 
smooth at base, however, the lateral ones more finely punctured, 
posterior face concave, smooth, at the sides crenulated, not carinate ; 
spines of medial and hind tibize yellow, those of the tarsi and cal- 
earia, whitish ; wings fulvo-hyaline, iridescent, particularly on apical 
third, nervures and stigma fulvo-testaceous, apex of second submar- 
ginal cell angular medially, but not sharply, the second transverso- 
cubital vein being rather more sinuate than angulate ; dorsal segments 
1-4 sparsely punctured medially, rather strongly and closely at the 
sides, segment 5 strongly punctured throughout, ventrals shiny, 
segments 2-4 with two transverse series of punctures, segments 5 
and 6 more generally punctured, sculpture of the pygidial area much 
as in angulata, but finer, and when held in certain lights the pygi- 
dium is clothed with a short appressed golden pubescence. Length 
16-17 mm. 

Three specimens. Chapada (March). This seems quite distinct 
from its allies in the color uf the wings, which approaches that of 
Saussure and Sichels “stirps Elidis vespiformis ;” those species have 
the abdomen immaculate, however. 

Elis (Dielis) Smithii n. sp. 

In maculation, similar to confluenta, but the thorax immaculate ; 
wings faintly yellowish along costa. 

9? .—Black; mandibles in part reddish ; narrow transverse spot 
on first and a large spot on each side of the second dorsal segments 
orange, the spots on second segment almost united internally, thereby 
having the appearance of a band which is strongly emarginate in 
the middle anteriorly; otherwise the abdomen black ; insect with 
pale pubescence, that on the vertex and dorsulum fuscous; dorsal 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 305 


segments 2-5 and fifth ventral with a fringe of black pubescence, 
ventrals 2-4 with a white fringe ; clypeus furrowed down the middle, 
strongly punctured laterally and basally, in the middle and ante- 
riorly smooth ; front strongly and closely punctured, the punctures 
of vertex large and scattered; occiput with strong separated punc- 
tures, but not rugose; scape with scattered punctures; pronotum 
except posterior margin strongly and closely punctured, and with a 
depression on each side as in auwripilis, but less strong ; punctures of 
dorsulum coarse, close anteriorly, sparser at the sides, and in the 
middle absent; scutellum and metanotum strongly punctured except 
the apical portion which is smooth ; middle segment with the median 
division strongly punctured laterally, smooth medially and a little 
produced at apex, on each side of this median division the middle 
segment is more finely and evenly punctured, the posterior surface of 
the median division only smooth and shining, sides of posterior sur- 
face crenulated; spines of the tibiz and the middle tarsi black, 
ealearia and spines of hind tarsi whitish; wings subhyaline irides- 
dent, faintly yellowish along the costa, costal vein black, the others 
testaceous, apex of second submarginal cell angulate in the middle; 
dorsal segments 1-3 with sparse, rather indistinct punctures, those 
on the following segments closer and more distinct, especially on 
segment 4, ventrals shining, segments 2 and 3 with two, 4 and 5 
with one, series of transverse punctures, sixth sparsely punctured ; 
pygidial area coarsely longitudinally striate, not pubescent. Length 
17 mm. 

One specimen. Corumba (April). Distinguished from conspicua 
which it resembles, by the immaculate thorax, distinctly puncttred 
occiput, ete. 

Elis dorsata Fabr. 

Rio de Janeiro (November); Chapada (January, March and 
April) ; Santarem (February); Corumba (April). Nineteen speci- 
mens, all females. 

Elis mutandaS. &S. 

Santarem. One @ specimen. I refer this specimen here with 
hesitation. It measures but 17 mm., and the wings are bluish-purple ; 
the second and third dorsals have a small, somewhat rounded, yellow 
spot on each side. 

Elis (Dielis) aureohirta n. sp. 

Belongs evidently to Saussure and Sichel’s “ Stirps Elidis vespi- 

formis,” and differs from other species of that group (vespiformis, 


306 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


brasiliana and Gerstaeckeri) by the dense fulvous pubescence with 
which the pronotum and dorsulum are clothed. 

?.—Black; mandibles reddish in part; head in front, occiput 
and thorax above with long golden yellow pubescence, particularly 
dense on the pronotum and anterior portion of dorsulum, the latter 
in the middle nude, as well as middle of secutellum, metanotum and 
upper surface of middle segment ; thorax beneath, legs, first dorsal 
and the ventrals more or less with long griseous pubescence, dorsals 
1-3 with sparse pale pubescence longest at sides, the fourth, fifth 
and sixth with black pubescence, dorsals 1-3 and ventrals 2-5 
fringed with white pubescence at apex ; clypeus strongly punctured 
basally, smooth medially, and bearing folds or rugze on apical por- 
tion; front strongly punctured, transverse smooth space before the 
ocelli; vertex with larger scattered punctures, which become closer 
on the occiput; scape with a few scattered punctures; dorsulum 
strongly punctured laterally and anteriorly, perfectly smooth and 
polished medially ; scutellum, metanotum and median divisions of 
middle segment with large separated punctures at the sides, impune- 
tate medially ; outer lobes or divisions of middle segment with finer, 
shallower punctures, their punctures stronger in the middle of their 
upper surfaces, the sides of which are sharply carinated, the carinze 
not extending on the posterior surface ; spines of the legs and the 
ealearia black ; wings fulvous, slightly bluish on apical portion, the 
second transverso cubital nervure sinuated, pertaining to angular in 
some specimens; abdomen above with sparse, shallow punctures, 
strongest toward the sides and on the first, fourth and fifth segments, 
base of second, and sides of third, fourth and fifth ventrals with 
strong punctures, the lateral punctures of third segment, however, 
not reaching its base, the second and third with two, the fourth and 
fifth with one, series of transverse punctures, sixth with finer, scat- 
tered punctures; pygidial area longitudinally and irregularly rugose. 
Length 16-17 mm. 

$ .—Colored like the female, but the abdomen bluish, the pubes- 
cence of the body denser throughout, is finer, less yellow on the 
thorax and is very dense in the middle segment ; form slender, simi- 
lar to E. plumipes 3; antenne fully as long as head, thorax and 
first segment of abdomen united, the first joint of flagellum distinetly 
shorter than the second; thorax on sides and beneath clothed with 
a silky pile in addition to the long pubescence ; dorsulum and middle 
segment on upper and posterior surfaces punctured throughout ; legs 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 307 


slender, the spines of hind and medial tarsi pale; dorsal segments 
1-4 with shallow, separated punctures, those of fifth, sixth and base 
of seventh closer and deeper, the ventrals sparsely punctured ; second 
ventral at base not at all tuberculate. Length 15-17 mm. 

Chapada (March). Over one hundred specimens. Differs from 
its allies including E£. albojfimbriata Smith, by the color of the thor- 
acic pubescence. 

Elis plumipes Dr. 

Chapada (November and March). Eight female specimens. I 
am uncertain whether a large series of male specimens contained in 
the collection from Chapada (March and October), Corumba (April) 
and Santarem (November) belong to this species or to E. dorsata. 


308 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


THE MESENTERIES OF THE SAURIA.! 
BY EB. D. COPE. 


Examination of the literature shows that this subject has been 
nowhere adequately treated. The most considerable paper is one 
by Dr. F. E. Beddard in the Proceedings of the Zoological Society 
of London for 1888. This, however, includes an examination of 
a limited number of genera, (eight) only. The present paper is 
founded on a study of most of the genera of all the families, except- 
ing in the cases of the Gecconidze and Agamidz, where my oppor- 
tunities have been more restricted. I am indebted for this material 
to the U. S. National Museum, the collections of the Academy 
of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia and my own. 

A fold suspends the alimentary canal from the median dorsal line, 
forming the dorsal or epigastric mesentery (EG). No other mesen- 
teries. bind the alimentary canal, except the stomach, and sometimes 
the adjacent portion of the small intestine, which have other connec- 
tions. The liver, on the other hand, has several mesenteric connec- 
tions, as follows: Its ventral face has usually asingle sheet connect- 
ing it with the median ventral line, but in rare instances it is bifureate 
posteriorly (Scincide generally), or even double (Tiliqua, LHV, 
RHV). This sheet, or one of them, is continued along to the ante- 
rior abdominal artery to the ventral wall, and sometimes along the 
gall-duct to the pyloric part of the small] intestine. Each border of 
the liver is twice or thrice concave above, in adaptation to the 
stomach and lungs in the types where the latter extend so far poste- 
riorly, which is the usual arrangement. From the left hand ridge 
thus produced, a sheet or mesentery extends to the stomach, form- 
ing the gastrohepatic mesentery (GH). It is sometimes median 
in position. From right hand superior angle a mesentery ex- 
tends to the right dorsal body wall, forming the right hepatic 
mesentery. The four mesenteries now described are the only 
ones which are universally present, which bind the liver. The 
following sheets are present in various types. Frequently the 
right hepatic and the gastrohepatie give off sheets to the right 


1 Read before the American Association for the Advancement of Science, 
Springfield meeting, Aug. 30th, 1895. 


———————— 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 309 


and left lungs respectively, constituting the right hepatopulmo- 
nary and gastropulmonary mesenteries (RHP. and GP.). A 
sheet occasionally goes off from the gastrohepatic to the left body 
wall, forming the left gastroparietal mesentery. This is frequently 
represented by a narrow band, and occasionally, as in Dipsosaurus, 
it joins the small intestine just beyond the extremity of the gastro- 
hepatic sheet. This is not represented on the accompanying dia- 
gram. In Heloderma a distinct sheet extends from each border of 
the liver to the body walls, forming the right and left lateral hepatic 
mesenteries (LLH, RLH). In Chameleon, Polychrus and Anolis, 
the left lung besides being attached to the gastrohepatic mesentery, 
is attached by a sheet to the left border of the liver, forming the 
left hepatopulmonary mesentery, (LHP). 


Diagram of peritoneum of Sauria, with all the folds displayed by a 
transverse section near the middle of the liver. L liver; St. stomach: RL 
right lung; LL left lung; EG epigastric peritoneal fold; LHV and RHYV, 
left and right hepatoventral folds; RLH and LLH, right and left lateral 
hepatic folds; RH, right hepatic; GH, gastrohepatic; LHP and RHP left 
and right hepatopulmonary folds. 

In Varanus salvator there is a short median gastrohepatic sheet. 
(GH). In Varanus, owing to the anterior position of the lungs, 
they have no hepatic or gastric connections. In no Saurian have 
I observed a right hepatopulmonary sheet, as the right hepatic 
mesentery supports the right lung. . The latter extends along the 
apical strip of the right lobe of the liver to the genital mesentery in 
many genera. In Tupinambis, Dracena, and some others, the right 
hepatie extends as a strong sheet to the right body wall, forming 
with an equally strong gastroparietal of the left side, a kind of dia- 


310 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


phragm. In many genera, the right hepatic sheet is connected with 
the stomach, especially at its proximal part. 

Besides the hepatic and gastric mesenteries, there are those which 
enclose the internal genitalia, the urinary bladder, and the corpora 
adiposa. The genital mesentery is sometimes quite extensively 
free, and is always so anteriorly, especially where it supports the 
wide fontanelle of the oviduct. A mesenteric pouch encloses the 
corpora adiposa, only in those forms where those bodies project 
freely into the abdominal cavity, as is frequently the case. The 
cystic mesentery is a transverse fold of the peritoneum which lines 
the inferior wall of the pelvic cavity, which encloses the urinary 
bladder, when it is present. 

Beddard has stated that in the genus Varanus there is a “ hori- 
zontal sheet” of mesentery between the viscera and the abdominal 
peritoneum. This is an interpretation of the fact that the abdominal 
peritoneum is loosely attached to the abdominal muscular sheaths, 
and is readily separated from them. This sheet, however, presents 
the usual relation of the abdominal peritoneum to the viscera, as 
Beddard states, and appears to me to be homologous with it.” The 
same condition caused Gtinther® to state that in Regenia ocellata the 
corpora adiposa are enclosed in “a separate sac of the peritoneum,” 
whereas the former are not enclosed in a special sac as in some 
other genera. 

In the Chameleonidse the mesenteries include the usual hepato- 
ventral, epigastric, gastrohepatic and right hepatic, the last includ- 
ing the right Jung. The left lung is included in a left hepatogastrie, 
a feature seen in few other groups, notably in the Anoline Iguanide. 
There is also a left hepatolateral, from the liver to the left body 
wall, having a direction diagonal to the long axis of the liver in C. 
basiliseus. 

In the Nyctisaura I have been able to examine the mesenteries in 
relatively few genera of the superfamily. I find in both Gecconidee 
and Eublepharide the structure to be of the type most frequent in 
the Sauria; 7. e.; a simple hepatoventral; a single gastrohepa- 
tic; a left gastropulmonary; and a right hepatic which embraces 
the right lung. 

In the Agamide the mesenteries present the usual sheets, hepato- 
ventral, gastrohepatic, left gastropulmonary and right hepatie, 


2 Proc. Zool. Soc., London, 1888, p. 98. 
3 Loe. cit., 1861, March. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. dll 


which includes the right lung. I have noted the following modifica- 
tions: In Agama colonorum the left gastropulmonary has become a 
right gastrohepatic by its continuing to the liver, a character ob- 
served in Chameleon and the Anolinz. There is also in this species 
a left hepatomarginal. In Megalochilus auritus there is a right 
hepatoventral, as in Phrynosoma. 

In the Iguanidz the hepatic mesenteries conform to the general 
type, with certain exceptions to be mentioned. Thus there are no 
right or left lateral hepatic mesenteries, and but one ventral. The 
right hepatic supports the right lung. There is frequently a rudi- 
mental right lateral hepatic which connects the long right apex of 
the liver with the right body wall. There is a gastrohepatic which 
generally spreads over the space enclosed in the bend of the stomach. 
There is no left gastroparietal sheet or band. The most remarkable 
deviation from this type (which I have verified in twenty genera) is 
found in the Anolinz. Here the left lung, besides its superolateral 
connection with the stomach, is connected by a special sheet with 
the left part of the inferior face of the liver. Thus the latter organ 
is suspended by two sheets to the left side of the middle line. In 
genera where this is the case the two sheets are sometimes difficult 
to distinguish owing to their easy adhesion together. They may be 
separated by inserting a probe from the free caudad extremity of 
the lung. 

Another variation from the normal type is seen in the presence of 
a right lateral hepatic sheet in Phrynosoma and Polychrus (in Poly- 
chrus gutturosus it is wanting in the one specimen examined), A left 
lateral sheet is present on the cephalad half of the liver in Cyclura 
cornuta and Polychrus marmoratus. It is rudimental in Polychrus 
acutirostris, and wanting in P. gutturosus. There is a gastroparietal 
band in Cyclura cornuta, which is joined by the apex of the peritone- 
um of the corpus adiposum. 

In the Anguide the viscera do not display any exceptional 
features, except as to the serpentiform genera. The mesenteries are 
of the typical character, modified in Ophisaurus by the reduction of 
the left lung. The hepatoventral sheet is very near the left margin 
of the liver in Pseudopus apus, and the gastrohepatic and right 
hepatic are near together when slack. 

In the Helodermatide the mesenteries of Heloderma are charac- 
teristic. There is a single hepatoventral, and the gastrohepatic has 
the usual position. The right hepatic goes to the right side of the 


312 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


stomach, becoming a right gastrohepatic, and does not extend to the 
dorsal peritoneum, a character in which it is unique in the Sauria. 
Posterior to the middle of the liver they unite on the middle line, 
as in the Teide. The lungs are attached to the adjacent parts 
of the gastric peritoneum by separate sheets, the right and left gas- 
tropulmonary. Besides these there is a strong sheet on each side 
extending from the superior side of the liver near the border, to the 
body wall, forming the right and left hepatolateral. The right 
hepatolateral does not extend along the right border of the liver 
beyond the cephalad half. The right gastrohepatic continues along 
the elongate right process of the liver to the genital fold of the 
peritoneum, and the apex of this process of the liver sends a recur- 
rent sheet backward, which forms with the former, a funnel-shaped 
passage. This recurrent sheet might be regarded as a caudad 
hepatolateral. Dr. Shufeldt states* that Heloderma possesses the 
free ventral peritoneum found in Varanus, but this is not the case, 
as this structure is the usual one. 

The peritoneum forms a transverse fold at the posterior part of the 
corpora adiposa, supporting the urinary bladder, and forming the 
cystic mesentery. Itis but loosely attached to the corpora adiposa, 
which do not project freely from the body wall and hence have no 
special peritoneal pouch. They are elongate and coarsely sub- 
divided. 

In the Zonuride the mesenteries in the genus Zonurus are of the 
usual type. There are one hepatoventral, a gastrohepatic, a left 
gastropulmonary, and a right hepatic which encloses the right lung. 

The mesenteric attachments of the liver are very characteristic in 
the Teide. There is but one suspensor, a median gastrohepatic, but 
this bifurcates above the middle of the organ, and each half diverges, 
and adhering to the caudad margin, extends to the lateral inferior 
body wall on each side. In Tupinambis these sheets are united on 
the median line for a distance posterior to the liver. The lungs are 
each attached to the stomach by a separate sheet. The left hepato- 
parietal sheet is always present in this family, but the right one is 
feeble in some genera, and is easily ruptured, as for instance in 
Cnemidophorus. I have examined the genera Dracena, Tupinam- 
bis, Callopistes, Amiva, Cnemidophorus, Centropyx, Tejus, Anadia 
and Oreosaurus. 


*Proceeds. Zool. Soc., London, 1890, pp. 193-4. 


——_— 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 313 


In the Scincide, as in other families, in the serpentiform types the 
liver and stomach occupy a position caudad to the lungs, and so the 
latter do not appear in the mesenteric connections of the former, e. g. 
Siaphus. The mesenteries are the usual ones, but one peculiarity is 
very frequent though not universal in the family. The hepato- 
ventral sheet is generally divided into two, a right and left sheet 
next the liver, forming a pocket which opens caudad. In the 
Tiliqua scincoides the two sheets only unite at the cephalic end of 
the liver, remaining separate throughout. 

In the Anniellidz the viscera display the following characters. 
The left lung is much smaller than the right lung and is proximally 
fused with it,sothat there is but a single lumen. Right lung much 
enlarged and covering the alimentary canal below (ventrad). Liver 
considerably posterior to heart, long and narrow, with a small left 
lobe and a long right lobe extending to the reproductive cells. Gall 
bladder enclosed by the liver and exposed inferiorly, 7. e., occupying 
a foramen as in the Diploglossa. Alimentary canal distinguished 
into stomach, and a small and large intestine, without distinct colon. 
Stomach without curvature; small intestine moderately plicated, 
with lacertiform mesentery. Reproductive cells anterior, symmet- 
rical; kidneys symmetrical, posterior. There is a single gastro- 
hepatic mesentery from the middle line of the liver, and no right 
hepatic or lateral hepatics.  Hepatoventral simple; plates of epi- 
gastric very loosely attached together. No pulmonaries at middle 
of liver. 

The fusion of the lungs is a peculiarity that I have not noticed 
elsewhere among the Sauria. The left lung is like a diverticulum of 
tke right, and posterior to the point of divergence from the latter is 
bound to it by connective tissue to the extremity. This fusion is a 
step nearer to obliteration than occurs in any of the serpentiform 
genera of Teide, Scincids or Anguide, where, though of reduced 
size, it is distinct from the right except at its proximal extremity. 

In the Amphisbenide, as the left lung only is present in this 
family, there is but one gastropulmonary wesentery. The liver has 
a crescentic cross-section, and it is supported by two gastrohepatic 
mesenteries (Amphisbena alba and A. fuliginosa), or by only one, 
and a right hepatic or hepatolateral, as it may be: (Rhinetira florid- 
ana). There is but one hepatoventral. The last described structure 
also characterizes Euchirotes diporus. 

21 


314 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Since the above was written a paper has been published in the 
Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London (1896, p. 702) by 
Mr. G. W. Butler on the lungs of snakes, Amphisbznide, etc. Here 
the fact of the suppression of the right lung in the Amphisbzenia is 
pointed out. 


io) 
joe, 
or 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 


CATALOGUE OF THE SPECIES OF CERION, WITH DESCRIPTIONS 
OF NEW FORMS. 


BY HENRY A. PILSBRY AND E. G. VANATTA. 


The genus Cerion, or as it is commonly known, Strophia, is one of 
the most characteristic forms of West Indian land-molluscan life. 
With two exceptions the species are all insular; C. incanum and C. 
Antonii only, the former from South Florida Keys, the latter reported 
to be from Guiana, are continental. The Greater Antilles—-Cuba, 
Hayti and Porto Rico, with the Virgin Is. and the entire group of 
the Bahamas, are inhabited by numerous species, with a multitude 
of local races. South of the larger islands named, if we include 
with Cuba the faunally dependent Cayman group and Isle of Pines, 
but one single species is found, C. wa of Curacoa, singularly isolated 
in characters as well as geographically. Jamaica is without a 
species ; and the genus also fails in the Caribbean chain. 

In the main, each species is confined to some single island, or toa 
series of adjacent keys or islets; but there are numerous exceptions, 
where forms unquestionably conspecific are found on several islands 
separated by considerable distances. 

The species are subject to a remarkable range of individual and 
local variation. Thus, many species vary from strongly and con- 
spicuously ribbed to entirely ribless and smooth. In fact this is a 
common variation, incontestably established by the series we have 
examined of Cerion dimidiatum, C. columna, C. regina, C. uva, C. 
maritimum, C. Sagraianum and many other species. Color is equally 
variable, pure white species varying to heavily brown-mottled, and 
this not in one, but in many of the species. Absolute size of adults 
is almost as mutable as in Cyprea; and occasional individuals are 
abnormally shortened by the premature assumption of the features 
of maturity, giving them a stunted appearance. 

All of these considerations render the study of the species one of 
unusual difficulty ; and the older authors, unacquainted with the 
protean nature of the species, as with the usually restricted range of 
each, often failed to properly discriminate them. Thus, the several 
volumes of Pfeiffer’s Monographia Heliceorum Viventium are un- 


316 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


reliable in dealing with many species, especially in respect to geo- 
graphic distribution. 

An American writer on natural history, Mr. C. J. Maynard, 
some years ago begun the study of this genus, and to his earliest 
publication on the subject we owe the first clear statement of some 
facts of prime importance; that the Cerions are excessively plastic, 
and locally modified into a considerable number of species and sub- 
species; that the range of some of these forms is excessively limited ; 
and that former authors had failed to discriminate many really dis- 
tinct species, “lumping” them under a few old names; and finally, 
that the aperture-armature, or “teeth ” of the Cerions are variously 
arranged, and furnish ground for the division of the genus into 
several subgenera. Mr. Maynard, moreover, has discovered and 
described a large number of most interesting species and varieties, 
especially the Cayman Island group ; so that his work on this genus 
has been an important one. However, in our opinion he has unduly 
multiplied species and subspecies, basing them on characters we hold 
to be too slight and inconstant, and his work is marred by inaccur- 
acies of all kinds “ too numerous to mention.” 

Our object in preparing the present list has been primarily to place 
before students a moderate estimate of the species of the group, 
specific values being held neither in extremely narrow nor very 
wide limits, but practically in conformity with the views represented 
by the leading English and American conchological authors of to- 
day. 

We have taken this occasion to place on record the results of a 
careful study of a very large collection of shells of the genus, a 
collection including numbers of shells which have been identified by 
Bland, Swift, Pfeiffer, Dohrn, Gruner and others, as well as acces- 
sions, considerable in the mass, from Messrs. H. D. Van Nostrand, 
S. Raymond Roberts, W. H. Dall, C. J. Maynard and others. 

The soft anatomy of the Cerions is still but little known. Dr. 
Leidy, the Cuvier of American Zoology, has given figures of the 
the anatomy of ©. incanuwm Binn.’ W. G. Binney has figured jaw 
and teeth of the same species’ and C. J. Maynard has more recently 
published figures of the jaws and soft anatomy of a species from 
the Cayman Is. Leidy’s figure unfortunately does not show the 
various systems of organs separately, and it is difficult to interpret 


1 Terrestrial Mollusks I, pl. xv, figs. ii-iv. 
2Terr. Moll. V. 
3 Contributions to Science, Vol. I. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 317 


the confused masses and ducts of the generative and digestive 
tracts, shown crowded together. It appears, however, that the long 
spermatheca duct bears a diverticulum, and the vas deferens is of 
unusual length. Maynard does not seem to have been fortunate 
in his preparations, and his figures afford no data of assistance to us. 

The only species seen by us in the flesh is Cerion Yumaense P. & 
V. ;* the specimens examined being part of the type lot received from 
Mr. Henry Prime and corresponding to fig. 3 of pl. XI. 

The penis (p) is a moderately stout sack from the termination of 
which the short retractor springs. Near the base of the penis the 

vas deferens (v. d.) enters; and this is of extraordi- 
(a) nary length asshownin the figure. Thespermatheca 
(sp.) has a long duct, without branch or diverticulum ; 
and there is a large talon (t). Ovotestis not ob- 
served. 

A transverse section of penis-sack some distance 
above entrance of vas deferens shows a cavity with 
bipartite or dumb-bell shaped section, filled with a 
granular yellowish substance. 

It will be seen that this differs from Leidy’s figure 
in lacking the diverticulum of the spermatheca duct. 
It agrees with it in showing an excessively long free 
portion of the vas deferens, inserted abnormally low on 

C. Yumaense the penis ; and these will doubtless prove to be generic 

P.& V. characters widely sundering Cerion from all other 

genera of which the genitalia are now known. 


ef Io” 


SUBDIVISION OF THE GENUS CERION. 


Four groups of subgeneric value may be distinguished by concho- 
logical characters. Strophiops only is known anatomically. 


I. Axial and parietal folds wanting, EosTROPHIA. 
II. Axial fold in angle at root of columella; no parietal fold, 

CERION 8S. STR. 

III. Axial and parietal folds present, the latter near middle of 
parietal wall, single and short, not over one-third of a whorl 
long, STROPHIOPS. 

IV. Axial and parietal folds present, the latter very long and 
doubled, or short and interrupted, with an accessory denticle ; 
rarely obsolete, DIACERION. 


* The dissections and drawing are by Mr. Vanatta. 


318 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


The first and second of these groups consist, at present, of one 
species each. Strophiops is by far the most numerous in species, 
We are unable to make any subgeneric division into long- and short- 
toothed forms; the various species present a perfectly graduated 
series. Maynardia Dall and Longidens Maynard are, therefore, in 
our opinion, merely subordinate divisions of Strophiops. 


Genus CERION (Bolton, 1799.) Mérch, 1850. 


Morch, Catal. Yoldi, p. 63. Dall. Bull. M. C. Z. XX V, No. 9, p. 120 
Strophia Albers, 1850, not of Meigen, 1832. 


Subgenus EOSTROPHIA Dall, 1890. 


1. Cerion anodonta Dall.*° Trans. Wagner Free Inst. Sci., III, p. 13, pl. 1, figs. Se, 
8d. 


Miocene: Silex Beds, Ballast Point and Old Tampa Bay, West 
Florida. 
la. Cerion anodonta floridanum Dall.* L. c., fig. 6. 

Miocene: Ballast Point. 


Subgenus CERION «. str. 

Distribution, Curacoa. This is the most distinct of the subordin- 
ate groups of the genus. The teeth of the inner whorls are frequently 
absent. 

2. Cerion uva Linné.* Syst. Nat. (10), p. 765. Fér., Hist., pl. 153, f. 11-14. 

Island of Curacoa! The locality “ Guadeloupe ” is erroneous. 
2a. Cerion uva desculptum P.& V.* PI. XI, fig. 1. 

Curacoa. 

Subgenus STROPHIOPS Dall, 1894. 


Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Vol. XX V, p. 121 (October, 1894). 

+ Maynardia Dall, 7. c. (type S. neglecta Mayn.). 

+ Seniculus Maynard, Contrib. to Sci., ITI, p. 17 (type S. »:«mia Brug.). 

+ Umbonis Maynard, Contrib to Sci., IIT, p. 28 (type S. sca/arina Gundl ). 
+ Pinguitia Maynard, Contrib to Sci., II, p. 30 (type S. “dimidiatia” Pfr.). 
+ Longidens Maynard. Contrib. to Sci., [L1, p. 39 (type S. pannosa Mayn.). 
+ Multostrophia Maynard, Contrib. to Sci., I, p. 177 (type S. extmea Mayn.). 


Group of C. pannosum (LoNGIDENS Maynard). 


Distribution, Cayman Islands. Maynard correctly separates this 
group of species from typical Strophiops. 
3. Cerion nanum Maynard.* Contr. to Sci., i, p. 27. 


Little Cayman. 


5Species and varieties marked with an asterisk (*) are represented in the col- 
lection of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 319 


4. Cerion copium Maynard.* Contr. to Sci., i, p, 22. 
Cayman Brac. 

4a. Cerion copium parvum Maynard.* Contr. to Sci., i, p. 24. 
Cayman Brac. 

5. Cerion glaber Maynard.* Contr. to Sci., i, p. 25. 
Cayman Brac. 

5a. Cerion glaber perplexum Maynard.* Contr, to Sci., i, p. 1, 
Cayman Brae. 

6. Cerion levigatum Maynard.* Contr. to Sci., i, p. 12. 
Little Cayman. 
S. festiva Mayn.* t. c., p. 17, is a more variegated form. 


6a. Cerion levigatum acutum Maynard.* Contr. to Sci., i, p. 15. 


S. nitela Mayn.,* ¢. ¢., p. 78. 
S, picta Mayn.,* ¢. c., p. 18. 


These seem to be very closely allied, differing from acutwm merely 
in size and degree of mottling. 

Little Cayman. 
7. Cerion pannosum Maynard.* Contr. to Sci., i, p. 10. 


S. fusca Mayn.* ¢. c., p. 77. Seems to be the same thing differing only in 
color. 
S. intermedia Mayn.* ¢, c., p. 13. A smaller form. 


Little Cayman. 
8. Cerion lineotum Maynard.* Contr. to Sci., i, p. 20. 


Little Cayman. 


Group of C. maritimum. 


9. Cerion dimidiatum Pfr. Zeitschr. f. Mal., 1847, p. 16. 


P. proteus Gundlach mss., Pfr., Malak. Bl., VII, 1860, p. 19; Novit. Conch. 
t. 66, f. 13-22. 


Gibara, Cuba. 

An altogether ribless form occurs. The species varies toward the 
following. 
10. Cerion incrassatum Sowb.* C. Icon., XX, pl. 1, f. 6. 

Cuba, Gibara. 
10a. Cerion incrassatum microdon P. & V.* PI. XI, fig. 5. 

Cuba. 


11. Cerion multicostum Kiister.* Conchyl. Cab., p. 77, t. 11, f. 6, 7. 


Punta Maisi, Cuba. 


320 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


12. Cerion iostomum Pfr.* Malak. BI., 1854, p. 204. 
Southern Cuba. 

12a. Cerion iostomum Arangoi P.& V.* PI. XI, fig. 12. 
Cienfuegos, Cuba. 


13. Cerion Sagraianum Pfr.* Zeitschr. f. Malak., 1847, p. 15. 


S. marmorata Maynard, Contrib. to Sci., III, p. 12 (not of Pfr.!). 
S marmorata polita Maynard, Contrib. to Sci., I, p. 14. 
S, obscura Maynard,* Contrib. to Sci., III, p. 21. 


.Cuba, Cayo Galindo, Cayo Piedra del Norte, Cardenas. 

There are two forms of C. Sagraianum, one smooth (typical), the 
other with fine riblets; but the distinction does not seem to be of 
subspecifie value, being too variable in the series before us. The 
cone of the spire is always minutely sculptured. The intergradation 
of S. obscura Mayn. is established by specimens before us. 


14. Cerion maritimum Pfr.* Archiv f. Naturg., 1839, I, p. 353; Conchyl. Cab., t. 
9,f. 10, 11, 


14a. Cerion maritimum sublevigatum P. & V.* Proc. A. N.S., May 4, 1895, p. 
209; Conchyl. Cab., t. 9, f. 12, 13. 


Matanzas, Cuba. 
15, Cerion incanum Binn.* Terr. Moll., II, p. 318 (1851). 
P. detrita Shutt., mss. 
Florida Keys; Eastern Cuba. 
16. Cerion hyperlissum P. & V.* PI. XI, fig. 10. 
Cuba. 


Group of C. regina. 


17. Cerion Weinlandi ‘Kurr’ Martens.* Malak. BI., VI, 1859, p. 207, Novit. 
Conch., t. 84, f.1, 2. 


Crooked Id., Bahamas. 

18. Cerion nudum Maynard.* Contr. to Sci., I, p. 29. 
Long Island. Near to C. Weinlandi, but smaller. 

19. Cerion incanoides P. & V.* Proc. A. N. S., May 4, 1895, p. 209. Pl. XI, fig. 15. 
Turks Island. 

20. Cerion regina P. & V.* Proc. A.N.S., 1895, May 4, 208. Pl. XI, figs. 23, 24. 
Turks Island. 


20a. Cerion regina comes P. & V.* Proc. A. N. S., 1895, May 4, 208. 
Turks Island. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 321 
20b. Cerion regina eucosmium P. & V.* Proc. A. N. S., 1895, May 4, p. 208. Pl. 
XI, fig. 21. 
Turks Island. 


20c. Cerion regina percostatum P. & V.* Proce. A. N.S., 1895, May 4, p. 208. Pl. 
XI, fig. 22. 


Turks Island. 


20d. Cerion regina Swiftii P. & V.* Proc. A. N.S., 1895, May 4, p. 208. 
Turks Island. 


20e. Cerion regina brevispirum P. & V.* Proc. A. N. S., 1895, May 4, p. 209. PI. 
XI, fig. 25. 


Turks Island. 
21. Cerion regium Benson.* Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. 2d. Ser., IV, p. 125; Con- 
chy]. Cab., t. 17, f. 13, 14. 
Pupa decumana of authors, not Fér. 
22. Cerion columna P. & V.* Proc, A. N.S., 1895, May 4, p. 207. Pl. XI, fig. 17. 
Inagua, Bahamas. 
22a. Cerion columna validum P.& V.* Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1895, p. 207. 
Pl. PI, fig. 18. 
Inagua. 
23. Cerion caleareum Pfr. Zeitschr. f. Malak., 1847, p. 83; Conchyl. Cab., Pupa, 
pl. 19, f. 4, 5. 
Habitat unknown. Probably will be found in the Inagua group. 
24. Cerion sarcostomum Pils. & Van.* PI. XI, fig. 16. 
Little Inagua. 
25. Cerion infandum ‘ Shutt.’ Poey.* Memor., II, p. 29-60; Malak. BI., 1854, t. 
S. fde hi 
Punta Gorda en Matanzas, Cuba. 
26. Cerion mumia Brug.* Encycl. Meth., I, p. 348, N. 87, Fér. Hist., t. 153, f. 5, 6. 


S, fasttgata Maynard, Contrib. to Sci., 1896, Vol. III, p. 6, 7. 
S. eurystoma Maynard, Contrib. to Sci., 1896, Vol. ILI, p. 7-9. 


Cuba. 


26a. Cerion mumia chrysalis Fér.* Hist., t. 153, f. 1-4. 

S. scripta Maynard, Contrib. to Sci., iii, p. 34. 

S, scripta obliterata Mayn., Contrib. to Sci., iii, p. 5. 

S, media Mayn., Contrib. to Sci., iii, p. 18. 

Differs from mumia only in the insufficient character of being 
mottled in zig-zag pattern. The various forms described by Maynard 
are well represented in our series, with intermediate forms also. 
They have no racial characters worth naming. 


322 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


26b. Cerion mumia magister P.& V.* PI. XI, fig. 4. 

Larger, stouter, more cylindrical, closely mottled and variegated ; 
aperture large, with the lip broadly flaring, reflexed. 

Matanzas and other localities in eastern Cuba. This is probably 
S. mumia Mayn., Contrib. to Sci., I, p. 190; not of Bruguiére. 


27. Cerion mumiola Pfr.* Archiv f. Naturg., 1839, I, p. 353; Malak. BI., 1854, t. 
3, f. 7, 8. 
zy) ’ 


Matanzas; Bahia Honda, Cuba. 


27a. Cerion mumiola major Pfr.* Malak. Bl., 1854, t. 3, f. 6. 


Cuba. 


28. Cerion sculptum Poey. Mémorias, II, p. 30, pl. 2, f. 22. 


Cuba. 
Group of C. sealarinum. 


This is one of the most peculiar groups of the genus, unique in 
the sculpture of fine spiral lines crossed by very prominent ribs. 
Maynard proposes for it the subgeneric name Umbonis, but we 
would hardly accord the group so high a rank. 


29. Cerion scalarinum ‘Gundlach’ Pfr. Novit. Conch., p. 367, pl. 84, f. 16, 17. 


Gibara, Cuba. 


30. Cerion Johnsoni Pils. & Van.* Proc. A. N. S., 1895, May 4, p. 207. Pl. XI, 
fig. 30. 
S. faxoni Maynard, Contrib. to Sci., iii, p. 32. 
Cuba. 


31. Cerion felis P. & V.& Proc. A. N.S., 1895, May 4, p.206. Pl. XI, fig. 29. 

Cat Island, Bahamas. 

Group of C. glans. 
32. Cerion lentiginosum Mayn.* Contr. Sci., 1889, Vol. 1, p. 75, t. 7, f. 18. 

Rum Key, Bahamas. 

There is also a pure white form. 

33. Cerion album Maynard.* Contr. Sci., 1889, Vol. 1, p. 74. t. 7, f. 17. 

Rum Key. A closely allied form with liver-brown lip occurs on 
Eleuthera, but our specimens are only “ crab shells,” not suitable 
for exact comparisons, 
33a. Cerion album Brownei Maynard.* Contr. to Soi., I, p- 196. 

Rum Key. 

34. Cerion Abacoense P. & V.* Proc. A. N.S., 1895, May 4, p. 209. Pl. XI, fig. 11. 

Abaco, Bahamas. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 323 


34a. Cerion Abacoense Bendalli Pils. & Van.* Pl. XI, fig, 13. 
Abaco. 
35. Cerion Ritchiei Maynard.* Contr. Sci., 1894, Vol. 2, p. 135, f. 41 a. b. 
Highburn Key. 
35a. Cerion Ritchiei eburneum Maynard.* Contr. to Sci., 1894, Vol. 2, p. 144, f. 
45 a.b. Costz slightly closer. 
U Key, Exuma group. 
35b. Cerion Ritchiei elongatum Mayn. T.c. p. 148. 
Same locality as preceding, with which it is probably identical. 
35c. Cerion Ritchiei Grayi Maynard.* Contr. Sci., 1894. Vol. 2, p. 138, f. 42 a. b. 


S. Grayi giganica Mayn., ¢. ¢., p. 141, f. 44.a., Gray pumilia Mayn. ¢. ¢., p. 
143, f. 44 b. 


Highburn Key, Bahamas. 
35d. Cerion Ritchiei Vannostrandi P. & V.* 

Similar to C. Grayi gigantewm Mayn., but smooth and snow-white. 
Aperture small, built forward, its margins not reflexed. Alt. 40, 
diam. 16 mm. 

36. Cerion Maynardi P. & V.* Proc. A.N.S., 1895, May 4,p.210. Pl. XI, fig. 31. 

Abaco, Bahamas. 

37. Cerion griseum Maynard.* Contr. to Sci., 1894, Vol. 2, p. 159, f. 51. 


S. glans Mayn.* ¢. ¢c., p. 15, f. 50. Fresh Creek, Andros. 
S. bimarginata Mayn.* ¢. c., p. 164, f. 53. Green Key. 

S. bimarginata cera Mayn.* ¢. c., p. 168, f.54. Green Key. 
S. Pilsbryi Mayn.* ¢. ¢., p. 170, f. 53. Goat Key. 

S. Pilsbryi evolva Mayn.* ¢. c., p. 173, f. 57. Goat Key. 

S. crassicostata Mayn.* mss. Andros. 


Type from about one mile N. of Calabash Bay, Andros. 
37a. Cerion griseum regulum Mayn.* Contr. to Sci., 1894, ii, p. 161, f. 52. 
Fresh Creek, Andros. 
37b. Cerion griseum restrictum Mayn.* Contr. to Sci., 1894, Vol. 2, p. 175, f. 58. 
Goat Key. 
38. Cerion glans Kuster.* Conchyl. Cab., p. 74, t. 11, f. 1, 2. 
? Pupa tumidula Desh. in Fer. Hist., pl. 153, f. 8. 
S. Curtissii Mayn.* Contrib. to Sci., 1894, Vol. 2. p. 107, f. 33. Waterloo, 
Nassau, N. P. 
S. Curtiss nivea Mayn.* ¢. c., p. 112, f. 34.a, Waterloo, Nassau, N. P. 
S. cinerea Mayn.* and varieties robusta, tracta and mutata, ¢. c., p. 119, f. 
35-37. N. P. 
S, neglecta and var, agava Mayn.* ¢. c., p. 150, f. 47. N. P. 
S. Carlotta Mayn.* ¢. c., p. 156, f. 49. Fort Charlotte, N. P. 
S, albea Mayn.* ¢. c., p. 128, f. 28. Spruce Key. 
Scone Mayu.” 2. cp. 129, f. 39. N. P. 


Nassau, New Providence, may be considered type locality for C. 
glans. 


324 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


88a. Cerion glans Thorndikei Maynard.* Contr. to Sci., 1894, Vol. 2, p. 116, f. 34, 
b,c, d. 
Waterloo, Nassau, N. P. 
This variety, like the next is not trenchantly defined. 


38b. Cerion glans varium Bonnet.* Rey. et Mag. Zool., XVI, 1864, p. 71, t. 6. 

P, zebra Weinland, Sowb., Conch. Icon, pl. 2, f. 12 a, b. (1875). 

New Providence. 

Under this head may be grouped the mottled and maculated forms 
with comparatively delicate, narrow riblets. Intergradation with 
the maculated forms with slightly stronger ribs, such as “ cinerea 
mutata,” “Curtisii,” “cinerea tracta,” etc., of Maynard, may be 
expected. Gods and men may well stand aghast at the splitting of 
C. glans recorded above. 

C. griseum is doubtfully distinct from glans. We leave it separ- 
ate, because in the average, the two are distinguishable, and they 
inhabit different islands. 


39. Cerion martinianum Kuster.* Conchyl. Cab., p. 75, t. 11, f. 3, 4. 
Habitat ? 

40. Cerion Blandi Pils. & Van.* PI. XI, fig. 7. 
Turks Island. 


Group of C. Agassizii. 
41. Cerion Agassizii Dall.* Bul. Mus. Comp. Zool., 1894, Vol. XXV, p. 120, 
Nassau Ridge, New Providence, fossil in the calcareous sand-rock. 
42. Cerion Eleuthere P. & V.* Pl. XI, figs. 19, 20. 
Eleuthera. 


43. Cerion gubernatorium Crosse.* Journ. Conch., 1869, p. 186; Journ. Conch., 
1870, t. 2, f. 4, lower figure. 


New Providence, Bahamas. 
Group of C. crassilabre. 

44. Cerionrude Pfr.* Malak. BI., II, 1855, p. 102, t. 5, f. 1, 2, 

St. Croix. A quaternary fossil. 
45. Cerion Yumaense P. & V.* Proc. A. N. S., 1895, May 4, p. 210. 

S. ferruginea Maynard, Contrib. to Sci., 1896, Vol. II, p. 19-21. 

Yuma River, Hayti. 
46. Cerion crassilabre Shuttlew.* Sowb., Conch. Icon., 20, t. 2, f. 14. 

Porto Rico, Virgin Is. 

The locality given by Sowerby, “India” is a mistake. Porto 
Rico may be considered the type locality, for here large specimens 


—— 


C(O 


a 


ae. 3 F 


: NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 5 
1896 A AL SC OF PHILADELPHIA By 


such as that figured by Sowerby occur. They are either maculated 
or unicolored. On Anagada a short, egg-shaped raceisfound. On 
Necker Island the shells are pure white, but white ones also occur 
at Ponce and Puna, Porto Rico. 
46a. Cerioncrassilabre Sallei P. & V.* Pl. XI, fig. 6. 

Small and cylindrical; creamy, maculated on the terminal cone. 
Alt. 19, diam. 7°5 mill. San Domingo (Sallé). 
47. Cerion Antonii Kiister. Conchyl. Cab., Pupa, p. 92, pl. 10, f. 7, 8. 

Berbice (British Guiana). 

This species is unknown to us. 

Group of C. cyclostomum. 

48. Cerion cyclostomum Kuster.* Conch. Cab., IT, p. 6, t. 1, f. 5, 6. 

? Pupa Kusteri Pfr., Proc. Zool. Soc., 1852, p. 69. 

Cuba. 


49. Cerion pinerium Dall.* Proc. U. S. Nat. Mu 
Isle of Pines. 


mn 


. 1895, p. 6. 


50. Cerion tenuilabre Gundl.* Malak. Bl., XVIII, 1870, p. 91. 
Barigua en Baracoa, Cuba. 


50a. Cerion tenuilabre pygmeum Pils. & Van.* Pl. XI, fig. 9. 
Gibara, Cuba. 

51. Cerion microstomum Pfr.* Malak. Bl., 1854, p. 207, t. 3, f. 15, 16. 
Punta Jiacos, Cayo Paredon Grande, Cuba. 

52. Cerion Cumingianum Pfr.* Proc. Zool. Soc., 1852, p. 68. 
Hab. ? 

53. Cerion Gundlachi Pfr.* Zeitschr. f. Malak., 1852, p. 175, t. 1, f. 39-42. 
Punta de San Juan, Cuba. 


Group of C. Martensi. 
54. Cerion Milleri Pfr.* Malak. Bl. XIV, 1867, p. 129 ; Novit. Conch., t. 84, f. 6-13. 
Duck Key, Exuma group. 


55. Cerion Gruneri Pfr.* Zeitschr. f. Malak., 1847, p. 15. 


Sagua de la Grande, Cuba. 


56. Cerion venustum Poey. Memorias, IT, p. 30. 
Cuba. This species is unknown to us, and perhaps identical with 
OC. Gruneri. 


57. Cerion Martensi Weinl.* Malak. Bl., IX, 1862, p. 164; Novit. Conch., t. $4, f. 
3-5. 


‘Crooked Island, Bahamas. 


326 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 
58. Cerion eximeum Mayn.* Contr. to Sci., 1894, Vol. 2, p. 177, f. 59. 
Cat Island. We have a small form; alt. 143-18 mm. from San 
Salvador. i 
58a. Cerion eximeum agrestinum Mayn.* Contr. to Sci., 1894, Vol. 2, p. 179, f. 60. 
New Providence. A pure white specimen was collected by Mr. W. 
Bendall, and kindly presented to the Academy, with others varying 
from sparsely to heavily marked. The claim of this variety to dis- 
tinction rests solely on its locality. The shells of eximewm and 
agrestinum are often indistinguishable. 


59. Cerion multistriatum Pils. & Van.* Pl. XI, fig. 8. 
Crooked Island. 


Group of C. vulneratum. 


60. Cerion inflatum Mayn. Contr. tu Sci., I, p. 126. 


Galena Point, Auklin Is. 


61. Cerion marmoratum Pfr.* Zeitschr. f. Mal., 1847, p. 83; Conch. Cat., t. 19, f. 
10-12. 


Cat Island, Bahamas (according to Bland.). 


62. Cerion vulneratum Kiister.* Conch. Cat., p. 161, t. 19, f. 16-18. 

Gibara, Cuba. 

Subgenus DIACERION Dall, 1894. 
Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 1894, Vol. XXV, p. 122. 
Group of C. striatellum (Paracerion Pils. & Van., 1895.) 

See Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1895, p. 206. 

Distribution, Cuba. Maynard’s name Tridentistrophia (Contrib. 
to Sci., III, p. 9, 1896) isa synonym. The group has much affinity 
with Diacerion, but the parietal folds are short. 


68. Cerion tridentatum P. & V.* Proc, A. N.S., 1895, May 4, p. 206, Pl. XI, fig 27. 


Cuba. 


64. Cerion striatellum Fer.* Icon. Regne Animal, Moll., 1829-1843, p. 60, t. 6, 
fonl2. 


Cabo Cruz, Cuba. 
65. Cerion basistriatum P. & V.* Proc. A.N.S., May 4, 1895, p. 206. 


Cabo Cruz, Cuba. 
Group of C. rubicundum (Diacerion Dall). 


Distribution, Imagua. The species or forms of this group form an 
excessively complex problem, which is far from being satisfactorily 


EE &<—&mox<—_— —-_- 


a 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 327 


solved by the material yet studied. C. Bryanti, rubicundum and 
Dailli appear to be stages in a continuous or almost continuous 
series of variations. C. Dalli is the largest form, with the peculiar 
armature of the aperture most highly developed. ©. rubicundum is 
more slender, often much smaller, with the armature less developed 
in many specimens. C. Bryanti is decidedly smaller, thinner, with 
the teeth reduced to a mere vestige in the typical form, although 
specimens occur which seem to establish its intergradation with rubi- 
cundum in tooth arrangement. C. Bryanti may be regarded as a 
stunted race of Diacerion which has re-assumed the characters of the 
group Maynardia. 

C. Dalli varies from the fine-ribbed typical form with as many as 
63 riblets on the last whorl, to a rather coarsely sculptured surface, 
27 ribs on last whorl (40 specimens examined, including one of type 
lot). 

C. rubicundum varies in the same way, Maynard’s S. ianthina and 
S. pallida being coarse forms. Some examples before me are more 
elongated and coarse-ribbed than Maynard’s types of ianthina, but 
the integradation effaces specific lines for these forms. 

There is likewise a very stout variety of C. Bryanti, and as already 
mentioned, the specimens vary from almost toothless to the typical 
Maynardia dentition, and onward toward the condition of C. rubi- 
cundum. We are indebted to Mr. H. D. Van Nostrand for a large 
series of these species and varieties. 


66. Cerion Bryanti Pfr.* Malak. Bl. XIV, 1867, p. 130; Novit. Conch., t. 84, f. 14, 
15: 
Inagua. 


67. Cerion rubicundum Menke.* Catal. Malsb., p. 8; Conchyl. Cab., t. 9, f. 8, 9. 


S. tanthina Mayn.* Contr. to Sci., 1889, Vol. 1, p. 69, t. 2, f. 13. 
S. pallida Mayn.* Contr. to Sci., 1889, Vol. I, p. 70, t. 2, f. 14. 


Great Inagua. 
68. Cerion Dalli Mayn.* Contr. to Sci., Vol. 1, 1889, p. 128, t. 13, f. 23. 
Great Inagua. 


69. Cerion cylindricum Mayn. Contr. to Sci., 1896, p. 34-36, pl. 7, figs. 3, 4. 


Great Inagua. We have not seen this form and know nothing of 
its status. 


70. Cerion duplodon P. & V.* PI. XI, fig. 26. 
Bahamas. 


328 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


UNDESCRIBED OR UNRECOGNIZED SPECIES. 


S. orbicularis Maynard. Contr. to Sci, I, pl. 16, f. 6a, b. Un- 
described ; no locality assigned. 

S. viola Maynard. Contr. to Sci., I, pl. 16, f5a,b. Undeseribed ; 
no locality assigned. 

Pupa capillaris Beck. Index Molluscorum, p. 82. Undescribed. 
“TJ, Antill.” 

Pupa elegans Beck. Index Molluscorum, p. 82. Undescribed. 
et; Antill:” 

Pupa conus Beck. Index Molluscorum, p. 82. Undescribed- 
«J, Antill?” 

Pupa strobilus Beck. Index Molluscorum, p. 82. Undescribed. 
“T. St. Domingo.” 

Helix (Cochlodonta) decumanus Fér., Prodr., p. 59 (undescribed) 
—=Pupa decumana Gray, Ann. of Philos., N. ser., 1825, IX, p. 413, 
referring to Lister, pl. 588, f. 47, is unrecognizable with any reason- 
able degree of certainty, but may be Pupa multicosta Kiister. 

Turbo alvearia Dillwyn, Descript. Catal., I, p. 862,—Bulimus 
fusus Brug., Encycl. Méth., I, p. 348,—Lister, pl. 588, f. 49, is an 
unrecognizable form, similar to Gibbus palanga. 


DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW AND LITTLE-KNOWN SPECIES AND 
VARIETIES.° 
Cerion uva desculptum. PI. XI, fig. 1. 

Shell similar to C. uva, but differs in lacking the strong, regular 
ribs characteristic of that species, or in having them very few, weak 
and irregular. 

Alt. 22, diam. 9; apert. alt. 73, width 63 mm. 

Alt. 19, diam. 9; apert. alt. 7, width 6 mm. 

Curacoa. 

A sectionized specimen shows no internal sets of laminz, but these 
are frequently wanting in specimens of the typical C. uva. Of the 
latter a good many figures have been published. 

Cerion incrassatum microdon Pilsbry & Vanatta. Pl. XI, fig. 5. 

Shell varying from cylindric to'stout oval, strong and solid ; whit- 
ish with some inconspicuous gray flecks. Whorls 8} to 94, the first 
one smooth, next finely and regularly costellate, following whorls 


® See also Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1895, p. 206. Separate copies issued 
May, 4, 1895. 


1896. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 329 


with coarser riblets becoming regular, curved, moderately coarse 
ribs on the cylindrical portion, on base of last whorl obsolete or sub- 
obsolete. Latter 3 to 4 whorls of about equal diameter, those above 
forming rather a long cone. Aperture rounded, truncate above, 
white within. Peristome white, narrowly expanded and reflexed, 
obtuse ; parietal callus very thin or moderate. Axial fold incon- 
spicuous from in front ; parietal tooth extremely small, short. 

Alt. 213, diam. 102; alt. of aperture 83 mm. 

Alt. 193, diam. 93; alt. of aperture 8 mm. 

Alt. 183, diam. 10; alt. of aperture 7 mm. 

Cuba. 


While this species is very much smaller than C. incrassatum, and 
has the parietal tooth extremely small or almost obsolete, still in 
figure and sculpture it resembles the larger shell, and may be con- 
sidered a variety of it until further information is received. 

C. inerassatum, like the very closely allied C. dimidiatum, has a 
smooth form which intergrades with the stoutly ribbed typical 
shells. The earlier whorls have the minute sculpture as in the type 
form, but to the unaided eye the surface appears smooth. 


Cerion iostomum Pfeiffer. Pl. XI, fig. 14. 


This species has not been figured. It was described from the 
south coast of Cuba living among Prickly Pears. Subsequently it 
was reported from Turk’s Island and Great Inagua (see Bland, 
Ann. Lye. Nat. Hist., N. Y., XI, p. 85), but having examined spec- 
imens from these localities, so labelled by Bland, we find them to be 
totally distinct species, having little save the purplish-brown color 
of the mouth, in common with the true Pupa iostoma of Pfeiffer’s 
first description. 

The specimen shown in our figure answers to the description of 
Pfeiffer in all respects save that the median whorls are only obsoletely 
ribbed, hardly “ distanter plicato-costata”’—more like the “ var. 8.” 
The post-nepionic whorls of the cone are “ conferte costulatum ;” the 
cone itself “corneo-marmoratum”, suture conspicuously “ exserto- 
marginata,” and the corrugation of last whorl and color of aperture 
(“intus violacea”’) are likewise in agreement. Thespecimen figured 
is 2 mm. shorter than Pfeiffer’s. Alt. 30, diam. 12; alt. of aperture 
12 mm. 

Pfeiffer’s type measured, alt. 32, diam. 12; alt. of aperture 13 mm. 

22 


330 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Cerion iostomum Arangoi Pilsbry & Vanatta. Pl. XI, fig. 12. 

Shell similar to the type in form, but smaller. Latter two 
whorls only of equal diameter, those above forming a rather long 
cone. Whorls83to9. Surface closely and regularly ribbed through- 
out (except the smooth nepionic whorls), the ribs mainly white, 
interstices purplish-brown, mottled with white. Sutures without 
noticeably exserted margination. Aperture deep, rich purple 
within. 

Alt. 233, diam. 104; alt. of aperture 9 mm. 

Alt. 182, diam. 9; alt. of aperture 8 mm. 

Alt. 24, diam. 103; alt. of aperture 93 mm. 

Cienfuegos, Cuba (R. Arango). 

Strikingly different from iostomum at first sight, but we believe it 
to be closely allied and probably a subspecies thereof. 

Cerion hyperlissum Pilsbry & Vanatta. Pl. XI, fig. 10. 

Shell moderately strong, much elongated, cylindrical, the latter 
four whorls of about equal diameter, those earlier gradually taper- 
ing, forming an obtuse cone with slightly convex outlines. Pinkish- 
brown (with more or less white maculation), the riblets white. 
Whorls 113, weakly convex, those of the cone smooth, the rest 
sculptured with rather fine riblets narrower than the intervals, 
about 36 in number on each of the several later whorls. Umbilicus 
a short rimation, compressed. 

Aperture ovate, decidedly higher than wide, the throat flesh-tinted. 
Peristome white, well reflexed and revolute, thickened ; parietal 
callus light, its edge hardly thickened ; parietal fold median, very 
long, one-fourth to one-third of a whorl in length. 

Alt. 823, diam. 10; alt. of aperture 12 mm. 

Alt. 293, diam. 10; alt. of aperture 11 mm. 

Cuba. 

This species has the unusually long parietal tooth of the Cayman 
Island Cerions. For the rest, it does not differ remarkably from 
such Cuban forms as C. maritimum. The whorls of the cone are 
ribless. 

A form also referable to this species is much striped and maculated 
with fleshy-brown and white, the riblets being finer. 


Cerion regina Pilsbry & Vanatta. Pl. XI, figs, 25, 24. 


Shell thick, subcylindrical, gradually tapering above, the long 
terminal cone passing gradually into cylindrical portion; lower 3 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 331 


whorls of about equal diameter ; apex obtuse; earlier whorls not 
striate; chalk-white and dull, the smoothness of the surface but little 
broken by slight growth-lines, the basal whorl irregularly and rather 
distantly costate, at least on its latter half. Whorls 10 to 103, flat, 
with superficial, seam-like sutures. Last whorl] suddenly ascending in 
front, much compressed and pinched toward the base. Umbilicus 
open or perforate, with the usual arcuate rimation, below which it 
is broadly excavated and flattened. 

Aperture oblong-cordate, slightly less than one-third the length 
of shell, higher than wide, dark or light brown within, rarely pur- 
plish. Peristome expanded and reflexed, its face convex but not 
much thickened, whitish, parietal callus moderate, its outer edge not 
raised. Axial lamina situated high, narrow and inconspicuous from 
in front. Parietal tooth low, small, varying from moderately short 
to long, central in position. 

Alt. 313, diam. 11} mill. 

Alt. 33, diam. 122 mill. (average typical specimen). 

Alt. 38, diam. 13 mill. 

Turk’s Island, Bahamas. (Gabb, Swift). 

Cerion sarcostomum Pilsbry & Vanatta. PI. XI, fig. 16. 

Shell solid and strong, subcylindrical, but slightly wider below; 
whitish. Whorls 11 to 113, slightly convex, the earlier 6 forming 
a convexly tapering cone with extremely obtuse apex, almost dome- 
shaped at top; passing gradually into the cylindrical portion of 
shell, which consists of 5 to 6 whorls. Sculpture, somewhat irreg- 
ular and unequal, straight ribs, about as wide as the intervals, about 
25-30 on last whorl. These ribs are strongly developed on the 
cylindrical portion of the shell, but the cone is very densely, finely 
and sharply striated, the earliest whorl only being smooth. 

Aperture small, less than one-third the total length of shell, pink- 
ish-flesh colored in the throat; peristome well reflexed, recurved, 
more or less thickened on the inner edge of the face; parietal callus 
thick and heavy, its edge elevated. Parietal tooth rather strong and 
moderately long; axial fuld moderately conspicuous. 

Alt. 34, diam. 113; alt. of aperture 10 mm. 

Little Inagua, Bahamas. 


Some specimens are larger than the above dimensions; one worn 
and broken “ crab-shell” before us would probably be not less than 
40 mm. alt. if perfect. It is not unlikely that forms occur with the 
ribs obsolete, as in the allied C. columna. 


302 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


C. sarcostomum clearly belongs to the immediate group of C. creta- 
ceum and C.columna. The latter has a very dark aperture, broadly 
flanged lip and less obtuse apex. C. cretaceum lacks sculpture except 
on the basal whorl, is absolutely cylindrical, with light mouth and 
excessively short terminal cone, while the present species is more 
tapering, with the cone decidedly longer, gradually passing into the 
cylindrical portion, 

This species is, we believe, the first one to be reported from Little 
Inagua. It is extremely likely that C. cretaceum, described without 
locality, will prove to inhabit some part of the Inagua group, when 
it is re-discovered. 

Cerion Abacoense Pilsbry & Vanatta. PI. XI, fig. 11. 

Shell cylindrical, solid and strong, entirely white. Latter three 
whorls of about equal diameter, preceding one slightly smaller, those 
earlier rapidly tapering to form a short cone; apex obtuse. Sculpt- 
ured with rather close, strong and nearly straight riblets, as wide as, 
or narrower than the interstices, numerous (31-38 on last whorl), 
part of the riblets generally splitting on the base ; 1} to 1} nepionie 
whorls free from riblets, and those of the following several whorls 
very fine, though distinct. Whorls 9} to 114, slightly convex, the 
last ascending as usual. Sutures well-marked. Umbilicus a nearly 
straight rimation terminating in an almost closed axial chink; um- 
bilical area (back of columellar lip) small, with a bounding furrow 
below. 

Aperture vertical, brought forward almost to anterior level of the 
cylinder ; rounded, nearly as wide as high, obliquely truncate above. 
Peristome well reflexed, recurved, its face thickened and convex ; 
parietal callus heavy, but thinned at outer edge. Axial fold moder- 
ate, parietal fold deep seated, low, and rather long. 

Alt. 34, diam. 13; alt. of aperture 12 mm. (largest specimen). 

Alt. 274, diam. 13; alt. of aperture 11{ mm. (shortest specimen). 

Abaco, Bahamas. 

This beautiful species differs from C. albwm Maynard and C. 
Maynardi Pils. & Van. in the characters of the umbilical region and 
lip, as stated in our former paper on Cerion.’ 


Cerion Abacoense Bendalli Pilsbry & Vanatta. Pl. XJ, fig. 13. 
A miniature A bacoense (q. v.) in shape and sculpture. Whorls 10 
to 103. White, closely mottled with brown, the nepionie whorls 


™Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1895, p. 209. 


r 
; 
= 
. 
j 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 333 


corneous-brown. Aperture dark brown within; peristome white, 
less heavy; parietal callus thin, translucent; parietal tooth very 
small, short. 
Alt. 193, diam. 83; alt. of aperture 7 mm. 
Alt. 213, diam. 83; alt. of aperture 7 mm. 
Abaco, Bahamas. 


This form at first sight looks extremely different from C. A bacoense, 
and as we have seen no intermediate examples it may well prove to 
be a distinct species. However, we consider it best to rank Bendalli 
as a subspecies, thereby keeping in sight its genetic relationship with 
the larger form; this might otherwise be easily overlooked, on 
account of its maculated coloring, which would at first incline one 
to look to another group of forms for its allies. 

It is named in recognition of the services to science of Mr. Wil- 
fred Bendall, who has recently published a list of the land snails of 
the Bahamas. 

Cerion Eleuthere Pilsbry & Vanatta. PI. XI, figs. 19, 20. 

Shell solid and strong; smoothish above, ribbed below; color 
lusterless ; white, with a bluish-purple tint, most obvious around the 
base, cylindric-tapering, terminating above in a rather long slightly 
convex-sided cone which passes gradually into the cylindrical por- 
tion. Apex obtuse ; whorls 103 to 123; nepionic 23 whorls nearly 
smooth, slightly convex; following whorls of the cone smoothish to 
the naked eye, showing rather irregularly spaced wrinkles under the 
lens, flat, with seam-like sutwres, not in the least impressed. Latter 
4 whorls approaching equality in diameter, subregularly and rather 
strongly costate (at least the lower two whorls), the last one with 
about 27 (22 to 50) ribs, which do not split or double on the base, 
although sometimes there are some riblets intercalated there. 

Aperture about one-third the shell’s length, oblong or rounded, 
obliquely truncate above, liver-brown within. Peristome white, re- 
flexed, the outer edge sharp and someshat recurved, inner edge 
built far forward, especially below, bevelled outwardly; parietal 
callus either very thin orthick. Axial fold variable in prominence ; 
parietal tooth very strong, long. Axis perforate, with a rather 
short rimation. 

Alt. 29, diam. 113; alt. of aperture 11 mm. 

Alt. 33, diam. 11; alt. of aperture 11 mm. 

Alt. 233, diam. 11; alt. of aperture 9 mm. 

Eleuthera, Bahamas. 


334 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


This species is closely allied to C. Agassizi Dall and C. guberna- 
torium Crosse, of the island of New Providence. It has more 
remote affinity with C. sarcostomum P. & V. of Little Inagua. 

From C. Agassizi it differs in never having the parietal callus 
raised in a strong ridge making the peristome continuous; the ribs 
are less sharp and narrow, ete. C. gubernatorium has a proportion- 
ally very large mouth, less thickened lip, finer riblets or none, and 
a glossy surface; moreover, while nearly white examples occur, it is 
generally much variegated. There can be no doubt of the close 
relationship of the three species, but judging from a series of 25 
examples of C. Eleuthera, a good series of C. gubernatorium and 
author’s examples of C. Agussizi, they are specifically distinct. 

A pair of specimens of C. Eleuthere before us (from Krebs) are 
considerably streaked with brown, otherwise typical. Another spec- 
imen, received from Mr. Van Nostrand, is very small, alt. 18%, diam. 
8 mm., and somewhat maculated. The costulation extends further 
up, and the peristome is not thickened. This probably represents a 
subspecies. 

Cerion Blandi Pilsbry & Vanatta. PI. XI, fig. 7. 


Shell solid and strong, cylindric-tapering, the latter 3 whorls ap- 
proaching equality in diameter, those above slowly tapering to form 
a long cone, gradually passing into cylindrical portion. Light 
grayish, with inconspicuous white flecking. Whorls 10, the nepionic 

} corneous, smooth, the following 23 weakly, distinetly ribbed, later 
43 to 5 whorls very sharply and roughly, strongly ribbed, ribs narrow 
and high, 19 to 22 on each of the two or three later whorls. Um- 
bilicus compressed, rimate, the area behind columellar lip excavated- 
smooth. 

Aperture ovate, white within ; peristome reflexed and recurved, 
not thickened ; parietal callus heavy, forming a strong bar across 
the space between lip ends.- Parietal tooth median, moderately 
strong. 

Alt. 273, diam. 11; alt. of aperture 103 mm. 

Alt. 263, diam. 11; alt. of aperture 10 mm. 

Turk’s Island, Bahamas. 

This species resembles C. g/ans in general figure and the stout 
parietal callus; but the ribs are conspicuously different, peculiarly 
rough and unfinished in appearance, somewhat like C. felis. 

Cerion tenuilabre pygmeum Pilsbry & Vanatta. PI. XI, fig. 9. 

Shell small and rather thin, varying from cylindric to short oval. 

Whorls 7 to 84, the latter 2 to 3 of subequal diameter, those above 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 300 


forming a stumpy (often very short) cone. Rusty brown. Surface 
regularly costellate; apical whorl smooth, next whorl finely and 
regularly striated. Last whorl ascending as usual in front, having 
a very short umbilical rimation below. 

Aperture brownish within, rounded, obliquely truncate above. 
Peristome white, blunt, slightly expanded; parietal callus thin. 
Axial fold inconspicuous; parietal tooth deep within and extremely 
small. 

Alt. 10, diam. 64; alt. of aperture 4 mm. 

Alt. 12, diam. 7; alt. of aperture 5 mm. 

Alt. 153, diam. 73; alt. of aperture 6 mm. 

Alt. 143, diam. 64; alt. of aperture 5 mm. 

Gibara, Cuba. 


The short, typical form of this variety is extremely peculiar in 
shape, being shorter than any other Cerion. Longer examples are 
more like ©. tenuilabre, of which we consider it a small variety. 
Many specimens are before us. 

Cerion multistriatum Pilsbry & Vanatta. PI. XI, fig. 8. 

Shell small and rather thin, short cylindrical ; white, longitudin- 
ally marbled with gray or chestnut-brown. Whorls 8 to 83, the 
latter 2 or 3 about equal in diameter, the rest rapidly tapering, apex 
obtuse. Sculptured with excessively fine, close, sharp thread-like 
strize, apical 2 whorls smooth. Aperture rounded obliquely, trun- 
cate ; peristome narrowly reflexed ; parietal callus very thin; axial 
fold median, moderate; parietal tooth extremely small. 

Alt. 17, diam. 7; alt. of aperture 63 mm. 

Alt. 14, diam. 7; alt. of aperture 5 mm. 

Crooked Island, Bahamas. 


This is a small, extremely fine striated form with very siall 
parietal tooth. It is represented in the collection of the Academy 
by only five specimens, given by Mr. H. D. Van Nostrand, and 
originally from Bland. 

Cerion basistriatum Pilsbry & Vanatta. PI. XI, fig. 28. 

Shell rather thin, cylindrical, the latter three whorls of about 
equal diameter, those above tapering rapidly, forming a straight- 
sided cone about one-third theshell’s length. Surface rather smooth 
and glossy. Two corneous nepionic whorls smooth ; succeeding one 
or two turns densely and regularly striated; rest of the shell smooth 
except for slight irregular growth-wrinkles, down to the last whorl, 


336 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896.. 


which is finely costulate. Color white with irregular longitudinal 
streaks and blotches of brown. Whorls 9, hardly convex, the last 
ascending slowly in front, rounded below, with a short umbilical 
rimation. Aperture about four-tenths the shell’s length, rounded- 
ovate, nearly as wide as high, brownish within. Peristome thickened, 
outer lip expanded but scarcely reflexed, columellar lip reflexed ; 
~the terminations connected across the parietal wall by a strong, 
elevated callousledge. Axial lamina small as seen from the mouth ; 
parietal lamina small, often double, moderately long; a small denti- 
cle to the left of, and an elongated lamina behind and to the right 
of its inner end. 

Alt. 18, diam. 9; apert., alt. 7, width 63 mm. 

Alt. 163, diam. 8; apert., alt. 6, width 53 mm. 

Cabo Cruz, Cuba. 

This species differs from C. tridentatum in its round aperture with 
strong parietal callus, and the costulate basal volution; from C. 
striatellum it differs in the much smoother surface, thinner substance, 
ete. The arrangement of parietal plice is of the same type as found 
in the two species mentioned. 

Cerion tridentatum Pilsbry & Vanatta. Pl. XI, fig. 27. 

Shell moderately thick, strong, cylindrical, the latter three whorls 
of about equal diameter, those preceding tapering to form a long 
cone about one-third the total length of shell. Chalky-white, 
mottled with corneous, especially on the cone, rather polished, the 
surface smooth except for slight growth-wrinkles, but a few whorls 
following the two smooth, corneous nepionic ones are seen under a 
strong lens to be densely striated, and the base of the last whorl has 
irregular strise. Whorls 10, with just perceptible convexity, sutures 
well marked below. Last whorl ascending as usual. 

Aperture ovate, about four-tenths the total length, much higher 
than wide, light brown in the throat; peristome rather thin, nar- 
rowly reflexed, white; columellar margin well reflexed; parietal 
callus thin, its edge indistinct, axial lamina small or inconspicuous 
from front aspect. Parietal lamina small, short, central, with a still 
smaller accessory denticle to the left of and beyond its inner termi- 
nation, and another slightly to the right and deeper within ; all 
visible without cutting the shell. Umbilical rimation short and 
curved. 

Alt. 273, diam. 10; apert., alt. 11, width 8? mm. 

Alt. 25, diam. 9; apert., alt. 10, width 7} mm. 

Cuba (Robert Swift colln,, A. N.S. P.). 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 337 


This species superficially resembles closely the C. incanum of Key 
West, but differs in the ovate form of the aperture, sculpture of the 
earlier whorls, and the teeth of the aperture. 


Cerion duplodon Pilsbry & Vanatta. PI. XI, fig, 26. 

Shell rather thin, cylindrical, the latter three whorls of about 
equal diameter, those above slowly tapering to form a rather long, 
convex cone. White, variegated with gray-white. Whorls 103, 
slightly convex, two nepionic smooth, those of the cone very finely, 
sharply striate, the latter four with coarser riblets, much narrower 
than their intervals. Umbilicus a short, compressed rimation. 

Aperture ovate, large and open, white, higher than wide. _Per- 
istome expanded and recurved, rather thick; axial fold basal; 
parietal fold narrow, nearly a half whorl long; an acccessory fold 
ascends around the root of the columella, but at the apertural termi- 
nation approaches close to the main parietal lamella. 

Alt. 29, diam. 102 ; alt. of aperture 11 mm. 

Bahamas, exact locality unknown. 


This is an albino form of the Diacerion group, differing from C. 
rubicundum and its immediate allies in the greater distance between 
the two parietal lamellze within. 


Puate XI. 


Fig. 1 Cerion uva desculptum Pils. & Van. 

Fig. 2,3. Cerion Yumaense Pils. & Van. 

Fig. 4 Cerion mumia magister Pils. & Van. 

Fig. 5. Cerion incrassatum microdon Pils. & Van. 
Fig. 6 Cerion crassilabre Sallei Pils. & Van. 
Fig. 7 Cerion Blandi Pils. & Van. 

Fig. 8 Cerion multistriatum Pils. & Van. 


Fig. 9. Cerion tenuilabre pygmeum Pils. & Van. 
Fig. 10. Cerion hyperlissum Pils. & Van. 

Fie. 11. Cerion Abacoense Pils. & Van. 

Fig. 12. Cerion iostomum Arangoi Pils. & Van. 
Fig. 13. Cerion Abacoense Bendalli Pils. & Van. 


co) 
Fig. 14. Cerion iostomum Pfr. 
Fig. 15. Cerion incanoides Pils. & Van. 


Fig. 16. Cerion sarcostomum Pils. & Van. 
Fig. 17. Cerion columna Pils. & Van. 

Fig. 18. Cerion columna validum Pils. & Van. 
Fig. 19, 20. Cerion Eleuthere Pils. & Van. 


> 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Cerion regina eucosmium Pils. & Van. 
Cerion regina percostatum Pils. & Van. 


. Cerion regina Pils. & Van. 


Cerion regina brevispirum Pils. & Van. 
Cerion duplodon Pils. & Van. 

Cerion tridentatum Pils. & Van. 
Cerion basistriatum Pils. & Van. 
Cerion felis Pils. & Van. 

Cerion Johnsoni Pils. & Van. 

Cerion Maynardi Pils. & Van. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 309 


REVISION OF THE NORTH AMERICAN SLUGS: ARIOLIMAX AND 
APHALLARION. 


BY HENRY A. PILSBRY AND E. G. VANATTA. 


The genera of slugs inhabiting North America have hitherto 
been discriminated by external characters, and those of the jaw and 
teeth. We purpose to indicate, in a series of papers of which this 
is the first, some of the more important of their internal features, 
particularly the genitalia and alimentary canal. 

The genitalia have been utilized by Mr. W. G. Binney and others 
for the discrimination of species; and we have already considerable 
knowledge of these organs from his descriptions and drawings; but, 
of late, quite a new stress has been laid upon certain characters of 
the organs of generation. By Dr. Simroth, in Germany, and the 
senior author of this paper in America, characters of generic, as 
well as of still higher value, have been found in the genitalia. It 
is, therefore, important to review our data upon the anatomy of 
American slugs, to correct the numerous misinterpretations of organs 
which have arisen from lack of good material or other causes, and 
to expose the true generic characters and affinities of these animals, 
so far as may be possible in the present state of our knowledge. 

As the species of slugs also rest largely upon characters of internal 
anatomy, their revision will be attempted ; a work 1fow most timely, 
in view of the fact that such a multitude of insufficiently defined 
specific and varietal names have been proposed that he who attempts 
the identification of a West Coast slug to-day is not only a bold 
man but also one probably doomed to a miserable failure. / 

The largest slugs of America, Ariodimax and Aphallarion, are 
selected for the present essay. 

No correct figures or descriptions of the genitalia of these animals 
have yet been published. The true structure of the male organs of 
Ariolimaz is here for the first time made known; and the genus 
Aphallarion is proposed for a new species, perhaps the largest Amer- 
ican slug, remarkable in lacking a penis.’ 


1We must acknowledge our indebtedness to P. B. Randolph, of Seattle, 
Washington, and to Fred L. Button, of Oakland, California, for large series 
of slugs used in preparing this paper. 


340 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


EXTERNAL CHARACTERS. 


The external characters of Ariolimaxz and Aphallarion are de- 
scribed below. Arion differs from these American groups in the 
rounded, not keeled, back, the anterior breathing pore and the more 
posterior genital orifice. 


JAWS AND TEETH. 


The jaw in Ariolimax and Aphallarion is of the ribbed type 
usual in Arionide, and does not differ materially from that of Arion. 
The teeth offer no characters of generic importance, being of the 
general type found throughout Arionide. Those of the median part 
of the radula are of the Helicid form; the marginal teeth develop 
long mesocones, simulating somewhat the teeth of Zonitida, precisely 
as those of some Endodontide do. 


DIGESTIVE SYSTEM. 


In Arion, Ariolimax and Aphallarion the alimentary canal is dis- 
tinctly differentiated into fore-, mid- and hind-gut. The short cesopha- 
gus leads into a capacious crop, which is separated by a decided 
constriction from the stomach, which lies near the posterior end 
of body. At the termination of the stomach the bile duct enters, 
near the origin of the intestine. The latter presents, after coiling 
spirally once around the visceral mass, an anterior loop, lying to the 
right of the albumen gland. Passing backward it coils in a reverse 
direction around the visceral mass and forms a posterior loop, which, 
in the American forms (P]. XIII, figs. 2, 4) lies behind, in the Eur- 
opean (Arion, Pl. XIII, fig. 3) above and anterior to the main mass 
of the stomach. From this loop the intestine passes forward, deserib- 
ing aspiral coil again reversed in direction, and terminates near the 
respiratory orifice on the right side of the body anteriorly. 

The digestive systems of the three genera Arion, Ariolimax and 
Aphallarion differ only in subordinate features. In Arion, the 
stomach, as mentioned above, lies behind the posterior loop of the 
hind-gut. In Ariolimax and Aphallarion the posterior loop lies 
behind the stomach. Aphallarion differs from the other two genera 
in having a spiral turn less of the intestine. As usual in slugs 
there are four lengthwise folds of the gut. 

A very long and (for a slug) complexly disposed intestine, and a 
complete separation of crop and stomach, are the peculiar charac- 
teristics of these great slugs. This will become more apparent when 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 341 


we compare it with the simpler and very different digestive tract in 
Prophysaon, Limax, or the Helices. 

The liver extends forward nearly as far as the anterior loop of the 
intestine, and backward to the tail (Pl. XIII, fig. 1), enveloping and 
partly concealing the convolutions of the intestine in all three genera. 

The suboral gland (Pl. XIII, fig. 1) is about half as long as body, 
and lies free, not imbedded in the muscles of the foot. 


GENITALIA. 


In Arion, Ariolimax and Aphallarion the genitalia lie quite dif- 
ferently in the body-cavity from those organs in Limax or Prophysa- 
on, the whole system being crowded forward. The albumen gland 
(PI1.XIIL, figs. 1 and 2) lies to the left of the anterior loop of the intes- 
tine, almost entirely forward of the middle of the body-cavity. The 
distal end of the albumen gland turns down the left side and extends 
part way across the body beneath, often showing a longitudinal 
impression made by the suboral gland. (This is seen at /. gr. in fig. 
14 of Plate XIV.) At the base of the albumen gland the ovotestis is 
closely packed (PI. XIII, fig. 1) in Ariolimax and Aphallarion, and 
its duct is largely imbedded in the albumen gland; but in Arion the 
ovi-sperm duct follows the course of the mid-gut backward, and the 
ovotestis issituated at the tail, behind the stomach (PI. XIII, fig. 3). 

The penis in Ariolimax lies obliquely across the viscera, overlying 
salivary glands and crop. It is seen removed from its natural posi- 
tion in P]. XIII, fig. 1. 

In treating of Arion and allied forms, Dr. Simroth, the distinguished 
German malacologist, has discriminated between a true penis and 
that enlargement of the anterior end of the vas deferens seen in 
Arion, ete., which he has termed the Patronenstrecke. 

The senior writer, in dealing with Helices, made the same distine- 
tion.” The penis is an evertable sack, provided with a retractor 
muscle. The “Patronenstrecke,” or, as we have termed it, the epi- 
phallus, is not evertable, and has no retractor muscle; its function 
being merely to gather the spermatozoa into packets or spermato- 
phores; and it is strictly homologous with the lower portion of the 
vas deferens of ordinary snails. In the vast majority of snails in 
which the vas deferens is modified into an epiphallus, it occurs in 
connection with a normally developed penis, as in fig. 14, Pl. XIV. 
In Arion, Aphallarion, Prophysaon, and some other genera, the true 


2 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1892, p. 388. 


342 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


penis has been lost, and the epiphallus directly enters the atrium. 
In these forms the vagina assumes the function of an evertable penis, 
an extraordinary but by no means unparalleled instance of change 
of function. 

These matters are here dwelt upon somewhat fully, because in all 
former American work on slug anatomy, no discrimination whatever 
has been made between the penis and the epiphallus, the very real 
and important morphologic facts involved being, therefore, entirely 
ignored. 

The most prominent general feature of the genitalia in the three 
genera is the crowding of the main mass forward into the anterior 
half of the body-cavity. 


GENERIC CHARACTERS. 


The three genera of Arionidw mentioned above are seen by the 
foregoing general description to present many common features in 
their digestive and generative organs, showing them to be nearly 
allied. Their main differential characters are shown in the follow- 
ing analysis: 

I. Respiratory pore anterior, the genital orifice below it. No 
caudal mucus pore. Back rounded in adults. Stomach extend- 
ing back of posterior loop of intestine. No penis, an epiphallus 
replacing it ; ovotestis widely separated from the albumen gland, 
situated in the cavity of tail, behind the stomach (see Pl. XIII, 
tig. 3, A. hortensis), . Genus ARION Férussac. 

II. Respiratory pore behind middle of shield. Genital orifice near 
right tentacle. A caudal mucus pore. Back keeled, at least 
toward the tail. Posterior loop of intestine behind stomach. 
Ovotestis packed close to the base of albumen gland. 

a. No penis, a short epiphallus replacing it (see PI., XIV. fig. 
12); right eye retractor passing to the left of genitalia. 

Genus APHALLARION Pilsbry and Vanatta. 

aa. A well developed penis, with short, fleshy retractor mus- 

cle; epiphallus more or less introverted in penis (see PI. 

XIV, figs. 7, 8, 9,14) ; right eye retractor passing between 

$ and 9 branches of genitalia, Genus ARIOLIMAX Morch. 

One species of the Palearctic genus Arion has been introduced 
by commerce within our limits, A. hortensis Fér. It occurs at Bos- 
ton and New Bedford, Mass.; Poughkeepsie, N. Y.; Seattle, Wash., 
etc. 

Genus ARIOLIMAX Morch. 

ExTERNAL CHARACTERS.—Body limaciform, its posterior half 

more or less keeled on the back; foot margin defined by deep pedal 


inal 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 343 


grooves, deeper toward the more or less distinct caudal mucus gland. 
Mantle oval, about one-fourth as long as the entire body, finely 
granular, the respiratory orifice at its posterior third near the right 
edge. Genital orifice behind the right eye tentacle. Orifice of the 
suboral gland very broad. Integument scored by numerous grooves, 
longitudinal behind, obliquely descending below the mantle and for 
some distance along the flanks.’ Sole tripartite, the divisions rather 
indistinct ; alcoholic specimens haying the median band smooth, 
lateral bands finely transversely wrinkled. 

The principal internal characters of the genus are mentioned 
above. The extraordinary modification of the penis is fully de- 
scribed below. 

Key to species of Ariolimax. 

a. Mantle free anteriorly for about one-third of its length. Penis 
with terminal retractor, and nearly filled for its entire length by 
the invaginated epiphallus; vas deferens not enlarged, 

Columbianus. 

aa. Mantle free anteriorly about one-fourth of its length. Penis hol- 
low, with very broad retractor, beyond which it is attenuated ; 
yas deferens enlarged into an epiphallus external to the penis, 
the invaginated portion small. Californicus. 


A. Columbianus Gould. Plate XII, fig. 2. 


Limax Columbianus Gld. in Terrestrial Moll. U. S., II, p. 48, pl. 66, f. 1 
(1851); U. S. Exp!. Exped., Moll., p. 3, pl. 1, f. 1 (1852); Tryon, Amer. 
Jour. Conch., III, p. 315 (1868). 

Ariolimax Columbianus Mirch, Malak. Blitter, VI, p. 110 (1859). W. G. 
Binney, Amer. Journ. Conch., I, p. 48, pl. 6, f. 11-15; Land and Fresh 
Water Sh. N. A., I, p. 279, f. 496-501, (1869); Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., 
Phila., 1874, p. 33, pl. 2, f. B. to H; Terr. Moll., V, p. 231, pl. v, f. E (denti- 
tion), pl. xii, f. C (genitalia); Man. Amer. L. Shells, p. 98, f. 58, 59, 61, 61; 
Third Supplement to Terr. Moll., V (Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., XIX, No. 4), 
p- 211, pl. vi, f. A (mottled form) and f. G (penis). 


Mr. Charles Hedley, the accomplished Australian student of mollusk 
morphology, considers the oblique surface grooves as characteristic of the 
Aulacopoda generally. I quote this passage from a recent letter: “ Besides 
the pedal grooves, tail pore and horn, the typically developed Aulacopod has 
a keeled tail and oblique secondary grooves. The pore may be lost by de- 
generation, so, too, may the oblique grooves; and the keeled tail may become 
flattened. Nevertheless, both are typical characteristics, and deserve mention 
in the diagnosis. Again, the Holopoda have long tapering eye tentacles, with 
bulbous tips, but the Aulacopoda hgve shorter cylindrical tentacles, less bulb- 
ous at tip and set wider apart.”’ 

There can be no doubt that the features mentioned by my friend are of very 
frequent occurrence in the Aulacopoda, while they do not occur in Holopoda ; 
but they are not invariable, the pedal grooves being, I believe, the only strictly 
diagnostic external character of the group.—H. A. P. 


344 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Ariolimax Columbianus forma typicus Cockerell, Nautilus, V, p. 31 (1891). 

Ariolimnax Columbianus forma maculatus Ckl\l., Nautilus, V, p. 31. Binney, 
Third Suppl. to Terr. Moll., V (Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., XIX, No. 4), p. 211, 
Lipa Columbianus forma niger Ckl]., Nautilus, V, p. 32. 

Ariolimax subsp. Californicus forma maculatus Ck\\., Nautilus, V, p. 31 (foot 
0 dates Columbianus var. stramineus Hemphill, Nautilus, IV, p. 130 
(Feb., 1891). 

GerocRAPHiIc Disrrisution.—British Columbia (J. H. Keen) ; 
Victoria (H. F. Wickham); Washington, at Tacoma, and North 
Bend, about 25 miles east of Seattle in the foot-hills of the Cascade 
Mts. (P. B. Randolph) ; Nesqually (Case); Discovery Bay, Puget 
Sound (Dyes); San Juan Island (Hemphill) ; California, at St. 
Helena, Napa Co. (Hemphill) ; Santa Cruz Island (Hemphill, var. 
stramineus). 

Color of alcoholic examples a lighter or darker shade of reddish- 
brown, or sometimes ochraceous. Foot margin without dark vertical 
lines (see descriptions of varieties). 

Melanistic form: Color of alcoholic specimens a slightly reddish- 
brown, marked with large, irregular scattered black spots along the 
sides, and with a rounded black spot on the mantle behind the middle. 
In some specimens the spots on each side coalesce into a large, irreg- 
ular black area. 

Anterior third of mantle free. 

Jaw (Pl. XIV, fig. 10) with 13 to17 ribs and riblets, which some- 
times do not denticulate the basal margin; but there is variation in 
this respect. Teeth about as in A. Californicus (q. v.), but the outer 
laterals have less lengthened cusps, and there are rather fewer bi- 
cuspid outer marginals. The differences between the teeth of the 
species are too slight to be of any practical diagnostic value. 

Shell oblong, convex above, calcified in the middle, but with a 
broad, yellow, uncalcified peripheral portion. Nucleus median, near 
the posterior end. Length 12, breadth 6}, convexity 1} mm. 

The general internal structure (pl. XIII, fig. 1) and the digest- 
ive tract (pl. XIII, fig. 2)* have been sufficiently described above. 

The genitalia (Pl. XIV, fig. 7, typical form, and figs. 8, 9, black- 
spotted form) present a rather long and stout penis, receiving the 
vas deferens and a very short retractor muscle at its apex; upon 
opening the penis longitudinally (fig. 9) it is seen to contain a large 


*Compare Binney’s figure of the digestive system in Proe. Acad. Nat. Sei., 
Phila., 1874, pl. II, f. D, F. 


2 ee eee 


toi) Sa 


diana 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 345 


inner body, which extends to the external orifice, where it terminates 
in a penis-papilla (fig. 9, P. papilla). This internal body consists 
of a fleshy cylindrical tube (fig. 9, epi.) en- 

Rh cscasie veloped by a very thin-walled and minutely 
corrugated outer tube (fig. 9, sheath of epi.). 
This structure we can only interpret as an 
introverted epiphallus, which has extended 
entirely to the proximal opening of the penis, 
carrying the penis-papilla at its summit. 
This will be more clearly seen in the annexed 
diagram. The clearer, because less ad- 
vanced, penial morphology of A. Californicus 
bears out this view of the structure in A. 
~ Columbianus, which is, moreover, more read- 

Diagram of the penis of ily seen in our preparations than in the flat 
Ariolimax. v. ¢. vas def- figures, necessarily complicated by lines to 
Eeabalha 2 ack show the ducts and layers of tissue not 
rated penis papilla, ele- visible from the outside? 
vated on the epiphallus; — The female side shows a rather long vagi- 
o. external opening of pe- ‘ : : be) The es 
nis. na, provided with a broad, split retractor 
muscle, inserted high. Spermatheca situated high, on a short duct. 
Other organs call for no special remark. 

A. Columbianus is a dimorphic species in most, perhaps all, local- 
ities. There iz a unicolored form, and one more or less heavily 
spotted or blotched with black. This maculated form has received 
the name “ forma maculatus” Ckll. It is in no sense a true variety 
or subspecies but merely a “form,” comparable to the glaweus form 
of the dimorphic Papilio turnus. 

Cockerell’s “forma niger” was described from one specimen in 
which the black blotches had coalesced, upper surface entirely black, 


5 A similar penial structure has very recently been described and figured by 
Charles Hedley in the epiphallogonous genus Xanthomelon of the Helicide. 
In X. fodinalis Tate and X. Adcockiana Bednall, a tube occupies the penis 
cavity. ‘‘ This,” writes Hedley, “Iinterpret with some hesitation as an in- 
vaginated epiphallus, of which the distal end has grown to the atrium wall, 
and which has drawn after it into the penis sac both vas deferens and the 
retractor”? (see Hedley’s anatomical appendix to Professor Ralph Tate’s 
report on the Mollusca of the Horn Expedition to Central Australia). 

No such structure has been described before ; and we are disposed to accept 
Hedley’s ingenious interpretation of the morphologic problem. In Xantho- 
melon the invaginated epiphallus is attached at the proximal end of penis sac. 
This is not the case with Ariolimax, in which the invaginated structure is to 
that extent clearer. 


23 


346 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


from the humid British Columbian region, in which melanism is of 
common occurrence in snails, birds and mammals.’ In a series of 
several hundred examples we find great variation in the extent of 
the black marking. 

We hazard little in assuming that “A. Californicus forma macula- 
tus” Ckll. is identical with the spotted form of Columbianus, and has 
nothing whatever to do with the true A. Californicus Cooper. Like 
a good many “ varieties” of slugs, this is “such stuff as dreams are 
made of.” 

We have opened numerous spotted Californian Ariolimaces, and 
found them invariably to have the extremely characteristic genitalia 
of Columbianus. Proof that a spotted form occurs in the other species 
is lacking. 

A. Columbianus var. stramineus Hemphill. PI. XII, fig. 1. 

Alcoholic specimens clear, light buff. Length 59; greatest breadth 
(across shield) 19; greatest width of sole 15 mm. Genitalia as in 
typical A. columbianus. 

Habitat: Santa Cruz Island, California. 

The specimen figured is one of Hemphill’s original lot. 

A. Californicus Cooper. PI. XIII, figs. 5,6; Pl. XIV, figs. 14-16. 


Ariolimax Californicus J. G. Cooper, Proce. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1872, 
p. 146, pl. 3, f. D, 1-3. W. G. Binney, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1874. p. 
33; Am. Lyc., N. Y., X, 1873, p. 297; Terrest. Moll., V. p. 232, pl. v, fig. F 
(dentition), and pl. xii, f. D (genitalia); Man. Amer. Land Sh., p. 99 f. 62, 
63; Third Suppl. Terr. Moll., V (Bull. M. C. Z., XIX, No. 4), p. 211, pl. v. 
f. E (living animal) and f. H (penis). Simroth, Nova Acta Acad. Caes. Leop. 
Carol. Germ. Nat. Cur., LVI, 1891, p. 365, pl. 7 [xv], f. 9-11; Malak. Bliat- 
ter (n. F.) XI, pl.1, f. 5. 6. 


DistRIBUTION: We have seen this species from San Mateo Co., 
California, only. 

Color of alcoholic specimens brownish ochraceous, sole gray ; foot 
margin uniform with the upper surface, or dusky with vertical dark 
lines. 

The free anterior portion of mantle is shorter than in A. Colwm- 
bianus, less than one-fourth the entire length of the mantle. 

Jaw (Pl. XIV, fig. 13) with about 9 ribs, denticulating both mar- 
CiINEs aie 
Radula (Pl. XIII, figs. 5, 6) with the formula 67.1.67. Rhachid- 
ian teeth with well developed side cutting-points; mesocone long, 
reachiug to posterior edge of basal plate. Inner lateral teeth, without 
inner cusps, otherwise similar ; outer laterals becoming oblique, with 
long mesocones, the ectocone gradually reduced to a slight sinuation. 


ad 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 547 


The transition to marginals is extremely gradual; the latter being 
at first as described above (fig. 5, at 24, 25, 46), but about 20 at the 
outer edge of radula are of the form shown in fig. 6, with distinct ecto- 
cones, and the short, Helicid form of basal plates of other Arionide. 

Genitalia (Pl. XIV, fig. 14) somewhat as in A. Columbianus. The 
$ and 9 orifices are, as Binney has remarked, hardly united in an 
atrium (see figure). The penis is fleshy, with plicate inner walls, 
and its retractor is short and fleshy, as in Colwmbianus, but is ex- 
tremely broad. The epiphallus (ep7.) is very stout, nearly as large 
in calibre as the penis in sexually mature specimens. Further 
downward it becomes very small again, approaches the penis, follows 
it toits apex, turns in (fig. 15, enlarged view of apex of penis) and 
is introverted and invaginated therein for some distance, nearly as 
far as the insertion of retractor muscle (fig. 16, distal end of penis 
opened, showing the invaginated epiphallus).* 

The female organs are as usual, except that there is a broad, stout, 
fleshy vaginal retractor muscle inserted near the base of vagina.’ 

It will be seen that this species shows a less advanced stage of 
penis structure than A. Columbianus, although of the same kind. 
The very stout, low, vaginal retractor is also a diagnostic feature. 


INSUFFICIENTLY KNOWN ARIOLIMACES, 


Ariolimax Columbiana var. Hecori Wetherby (Some Notes on 
American Land Shells, p. 6) from Santa Cruz, California, is stated 
by Wetherby to differ from A. Colwmbianus in the genitalia, but no 
characters whatever of the new form are mentioned. Binney 
(Manual American Land Sh., p. 103) apparently endorses the spe- 
cific value of the form ; but beyond stating that it has about 60.1.60 
teeth (Columbianus varying from 56.1.56 to 67.1.67), with about 16 
laterals, he gives no characters. The form has been mentioned in 
various lists, etc., by Cockerell and the senior author of this paper, 
but in the entire absence of diagnosis it can have no standing, and 
had better be dropped until described. We have not seen specimens, 
nor, in fact, any specimens of the genus from Santa Cruz. 

Ariolimax Costaricensis Cockerell, Annals and Mag. Nat. Hist. (6), 
VI, 1890, p. 279, described as a sub-species of A. Californicus, from 


§ The slender distal end of the penis has been erroneously described as a ‘‘ fla- 
gellum”’ by Binney, “ Blindschlauch ” by Simroth; both overlooking the fact 
that the epiphallus runs up to its apex, as shown in our figure 15. 

7 Binney (Man. Amer. Land Sh., p. 100) calls the structure a “ vaginal 
prostate,’ overlooking the easily ascertainable fact that it is composed of solid 
muscular tissue, similar to that of the penis retractor. All Ariolimaces have 
vaginal retractors, and at times invert and protrude the vagina, like a penis. 


348 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


alcoholic specimens in Brit. Mus. The only diagnostic words of 
Cockerell’s description are the locality, “Costa Rica.” The other 
characters mentioned in the description are common to Columbianug 
and some Californicus. Measurements, ete., as given therein, look 
well on paper, but every practical limacologist knows them to be 
merely an empty form. We consider Costaricensis as probably a good 
species, on account of its locality (if correct), but a diagnosis is still 


wanting. 
Genus APHALLARION P. & V. (n. g.). 


External characters, jaw, radula and digestive tract, shell, and 
general internal topography, as well as female genitalia, as in Ario- 
limax; penis (and its retractor) completely wanting, a small and 
short epiphallus lying in its place ; right eye retractor passing to the 
left of the genitalia. 

We institute this new group for a large slug like Arion and Pro- 
physaon in the total lack of a penis and its appendages, and like 
Ariolimax in the other essential features, internal and external, ex- 
cept the disposition of the eye-retractor mentioned above. 

In view of the high development and complicated structure of the 
. penis in Ariolimaz, the strength of its retractor, the large size and 
extraordinary introverted character of the epiphallus, we can hardly 
refuse generic rank to a form differing so radically as this one. The 
anterior position of the genital foramen in Aphallarion, the poste- 
rior position of its breathing pore, and the anterior ovotestis, pressed 
agaiust the base of the albumen gland, deny to our slug entrance into 
Arion; and in the genus Prophysaon the whole internal topography* 
as well as the type of digestive system is profoundly different. 

A. Buttoni P. & V. (n.sp.). Pl. XII, figs. 3, 4, 5. 

Color of alcoholic specimens light yellow-brown, the shield lighter, 
more yellowish, especially anteriorly. Foot-margin dusky, with close 
vertical black lines, alternately heavier, and seen under the lens to 
be impressed and pigmented wrinkles. Sole gray, more or less 
dusky. Anterior third of the mantle free. Length 82; length of 
mantle 34; greatest breadth of sole 21 mm. 

Shell oblong, nearly flat, well calcified; white below, with a 
yellowish cuticle above, except toward the middle. Length 123, 
width 6} mm. 

8 By this we mean the positions of the organs in the body-cavity, both rela- 
tive and actual. The relative positions of genitalia and digestive tract are 


greatly varied in different genera of slugs, and of considerable systematic 
value. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 349 


Mr. Button writes of the living animal as follows: “ He has a 
way of occasionally raising up the mantle over the respiratory 
orifice, as shown in the sketch, which is characteristic. The follow- 
ing are some measurements of a very large specimen: Length, over 
all, when extended, 7 inches; width,  in.; height, ¢in.; length of 
tentacles, j inch. The color is the same throughout, shield included, 
being an olive brown.” 

- Figures 4 and 5 of Plate XII were drawn from sketches of the 
living animal furnished by Mr. Button. Fig. 3 represents an alco- 
holic specimen, dorsal view. 


Jaw with 10 to 12 ribs (Pl. XIV, fig.11). Teeth asin Ariolimax 
Californicus, but the outer laterals and marginals have the cusps 
shorter, less thorn-like, and there are rather fewer bicuspid outer 
marginals. 

General characters of the digestive system (Pl. XIII, fig. 4) as in 
Ariolimax Columbianus; but the ascending gut from posterior loop 
passes under the stomach (instead of over it) and the descending 
gut from anterior to posterior loop makes one spiral turn less than 
in that species. 

Genitalia (Pl. XIV, fig. 12) lying in the body-cavity like that of 
Ariolimax. Penis absent, the epiphallus (epi.) small and short. 
Vagina very long, strong, with plicate internal walls, and provided 
with a band of retractor fibers. Spermatheca large, of irregular 
shape, on a short duct. 

Oakland, California (Fred L. Button !). 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 
Puare XII. 


Fig. 1. Ariolimax Columbianus stramineus Hemph., lateral view of 
an alcoholic specimen. 
Fig. 2. Ariolimax Columbianus Gld., lateral view of an alcoholic 
specimen of form maculatus, from Tacoma, Washington. 
Fig. 3. Aphallarion Buttoni Pils. & Van., dorsal view of an alco- 
holic specimen of average size. 
. 4,5. Aphallarion Buttoni Pils. & Van., lateral view and dorsal 
outline of a large living individual in motion, drawn from 
sketches by Fred. L. Button. 


All figures natural size, 


OQ" 


350 

Bro ele 
Fig. 2 
Bigi7 3 
Fig. 4. 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


PuLatTeE XIII. 


Ariolimax Columbianus Gld. General view of viscera, the 
upper integument removed, viscera turned aside, and penis 
lifted from its normal position across salivary glands and 
crop. 


. A. Columbianus. Digestive tract, the salivary glands and 


liver removed ; albumen gland remaining in place. 


3. Arion hortensis Fér. (specimen from New Bedford, Mass.).” 


Digestive tract, the liver removed ; also showing position 
of the ovotestis. 

Aphallarion Buttoni P. & V. Digestive tract, the salivary 
glands and liver removed. 


Figs. 5,6. Ariolimax Californicus Cooper. Dentition. 


Fign de 


Bigs; 8. 


PLATE XIV. 


Ariolimax Columbianus Gld. Genitalia of an unicolored 
specimen. 

Ariolimax Columbianus Gld. Lower portion of the genitalia 
of a black-spotted specimen. 


. Ariolinax Columbianus Gld. Vagina and penis opened, 


the latter showing invaginated epiphallus (epi.), its strue- 
ture shown by dotted lines. 


. Ariolimax Columbianus Gld. Jaw. 
. Aphallarion Buttoni P.& V. Jaw. 
. Aphallarion Buttoni P. & V. Genitalia, epiphallus shown 


at epi. 


. Ariolimax Californicus Cooper. Jaw. 

. Ariolimax Californicus Cooper. Genitalia. 

. Ariolimax Californicus Cooper. Enlarged end of penis. 

. Ariolimax Californicus Cooper. Enlarged distal portion 


of penis split to show the invaginated epiphallus. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 351 


SYNOPSIS OF THE POLAR HARES OF NORTH AMERICA. 
BY SAMUEL N. RHOADS. 


Owing to the extreme scarcity of specimens of skins and skulls, 
with reliable data, of our American Polar Hares in the museums of 
this country or of the Continent, no attempt has yet been made to 
study this group ina comprehensive way. To this fact, together 
with the prevailing opinion that the Arctic representatives of our 
land mammal fauna retain their specific constancy throughout the 
breadth of their habitat, the animals which form the subject of this 
paper owe the neglect and consequent misconception of their rela- 
tionships which have so long existed. 

Having occasion to identify a summer specimen of Polar Hare 
from Alaska, recently presented to the Academy of Natural Sciences 
of Philadelphia by Dr. Benjamin Sharp, I was led to a critical ex- 
amination of the series in our museum. The subject proved ofso much 
interest that I secured the loan of some specimens from the Smith- 
sonian Institution, which finally led to a general correspondence 
with collectors in this country and in England, and the examina- 
tion of a series of skins, skulls and alcoholic specimens of American 
Polar Hares, representing over thirty individuals, together with 
about fifteen specimens of Siberian and Swedish Polar Hares. Be- 
sides these, I secured data from correspondents, which covered the 
examination of nearly thirty more specimens, more than half of 
which were American species. 

Especial mention is due to the courtesy of Messrs. Goode and 
True of the Smithsonian Institution, for their liberal assistanee in 
the loan of their specimens and furnishing of data. To Mr. Outram 
Bangs I am indebted for a most valuable set of Newfoundland spec- 
imens and the use of a set of drawings of the type skull of L. a. 
bangsi, executed by Mr. Blake. Messrs. Walter Faxon of the 
Museum of Comparative Zoology, William De Winton, of tke Brit- 
ish Museum, and Ludwig Kumlien, of Milton College, Wisconsin, have 
also furnished me with timely aid in the loan and examination of speci- 
mens and the use of private field notes and references to literature. 
The illustrations on plates VI, VII and VIII, are reproductions of an 
exceptionally fine set of photographs made by H. Parker Rolfe, of 


302 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Philadelphia. Plates [X and X contain figures of the type skull of 
L. a. bangsi drawn by Mr. J. H. Blake of Boston. The remaining 
figures on Plate X were drawn by myself. 

Although the series of specimens which I was enabled to bring 
together for study is much larger than any yet examined, it is very 
deficient in examples from certain parts’ of America, especially 
Baffin Land, the Arctic Archipelago and the interior of British 
America. On this account some of the opinions advanced ih this 
paper may be found to need revision, but it is believed that suffi- 
cient material has been examined to establish the main conclusions 
arrived at, and also to indicate the direction in which our further 
investigations of these mammals should be turned. 


HISTORY AND NOMENCLATURE. 


Owing to the confusion of some authors, as to the difference be- 
tween the European and American Polar Hares, it will be neces- 
sary first to briefly outline the nomenclature of the former. 

Linneus, in the tenth edition of the Systema Nature,’ was the 
first author to impose a tenable name upon the Polar or Arctic 
Hare of Europe, the Lepus albus of Brisson. He gave it the name 
Lepus timidus, including under that title both it and the Common 
Hare, Lepus europeus Pallas. Pallas, in 1778, in distinguishing 
between the two, not only gave a new name to the Common Hare, 
but renamed the Polar Hare, Lepus variabilis,? and by this name it 
has since been known to most authors. 

The description of Linnzus unmistakably refers in all particulars 
to the Polar Hare rather than to the Common Hare, which, how- 
ever, he included under the name timidus. Pallas’ name for the 
latter should be retained, while that of Linnzus continues to belong 
to the former. 

No series of the Polar Hares of Russia, Siberia or the mountains 
of Central Europe being available for study in this country, attempt 
will not be made to give a synopsis of their status or nomenclature. 
While there is no doubt that the Old World is represented by at 
least three forms of the timidus group, for which there are available 
names in literature, it only concerns us, in this connection, to fix 


2 Nov. Sp. Glires, 1778, p. 30. 
3 Ibid, pp. 1, 30. 


1896. ] . NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 353 


tween it and the hares of North America. A careful consideration 
of the question induces me to adopt the Scandinavian animal as 
the type of DL. timidus, from the fact that Linnzeus’ conception of 
the Arctic Hare, when he wrote his original diagnosis, was based 
primarily on those frequenting the localities near his Swedish 
home.* 

Captain John Ross was the first.author to publish a description 
and new name for the American Polar Hare.’ Owing to the fact 
that he gave this animal the name “ Lepus arcticus Leach,” and 
that Leach, a few pages further on, names and describes the same 
specimen as “ Lepus glacialis,”* some confusion of synonymy has re- 
sulted. Owing to the scarcity of the work in which these descrip- 
tions occur, and to make the status of the case more clear, they are 
herewith given. 

Later authors recognized the American Hare as distinct from the 
European, but none of them, until Gray, in 1845, used the name 
arcticus for it, but adopted Leach’s later name, g/acialis.© In 1877, 
Dr. J. A. Allen revived Ross’ name on account of the priority of 


* Linneus’ 1758 description refers to Fauna Suecica, 1746, No. 19, p. 8. 

5 Ross’ Voy., 1819 (2d [octavo] ed.). Appx IV, p. 151 (Written by Ross). 

6 Ibid, p. 170 (Under caption: ‘* Desc. N. Sp. Anim., Discov. * * * in 
Arc. Reg. by Dr. W. E. Leach’’). 

7 Ross’ description (p. 151, 1. c.) is as follows : 

“Genus Lepus (Hare). 

‘Species Lepus arcticus Leach. The only one of this species was shot in 
lat. 73° 37’, on the west side of the Straits. It was nearly the same size as 
Lepus timidus (the common Hare) ; the body was white, except that a few 
solitary black hairs, longer than the rest, were dispersed over every part and 
which appeared to be rapidly coming away ; the tips of the ears and the short 
hairs within the ears were black; tail short and white. It was shot on the 
first of September. Another, shot by a Master of a Whaler, in May, at Hare - 
Island [Greenland ?], differed very little from the above. Dr. Leach thinks 
it to be very distinct from the common White Hare of Scotland ( Lepus albus 
Brisson) and equally so from the Lepus variabilis Pallas. See Appendix No. 
V ” 


Ross’ reference to ‘‘ Appendix No. V,” isa mistake, as Leach’s descrip- 
‘tion comes in the latter part of appendix IV, page 170. It reads as follows: 

“Genus Lepus of Authors (Hare). 

‘Species Glacialis. Albus, vertice et dorso pilis nigricante fuscis albo fas- 
ciatis sparsis, collo lateribus nigricante abloque mixtis, auribus apice extremo 
nigris. 

“This animal, which will neither agree with the Lepzs albus of Brisson 
nor the Lepus variabilis of Pallas, both of which are now before me, is of the 
size of the common Hare (Lepus timidus and of a whitecolor. The back and 
top of the head are sprinkled with blackish-brown hair which is banded with 
white; the sides of the neck are covered with hairs of the same color, inter- 
‘spersed with white. The extreme tips of the ears are tipped with black, in- 
termixed with white; the insides of the ears have a few black hairs mingled 
with the white. 

“Tam sorry that the skeleton (which would, in all probability, have fur- 
nished a good specific distinction) was not brought home.” 

8 See Baird, Mam. N. Amer., 1857, p. 577 (foot note). 


304 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


paging of his description of arcticus. Dr. Allen further gave Leach 
sole credit for this name and was induced, by the difficulty of spe- 
cifically separating the American from the European Hare, to con- 
stitute the former a “ variety” of the latter, so as to make it stand 
trinomially, Lepus timidus arcticus (Leach). As I have already 
attempted to show’ our American forms are quite distinct from 
those of Europe, and the most proper formula for typical arcticus 
north of Baffin Land is Lepus arcticus “ Leach” Ross. In the 
same paper I have described two new forms, Lepus arcticus bangsi, 
representing the dark southeastern race of arcticus, and Lepus 
grenlandicus, a strongly characterized species which appears to be 
peculiar to Greenland and Grinnell Land. To these is now added 
a fourth, Lepus tschuktschorum (Nordquist), from the west coast of 
Alaska. 

A skin, without skull, feet or limbs, from near Great Slave Lake, 
N. W. Territory, dated May, 1877 (No. 13,350, Sm. Inst.), and in 
full summer pelage, indicates the existence of an interior geograph- 
ical race, so much lighter in color than L. a. bangsi, as to indicate 
that it should be separated under another name. The most diligent 
search in this country, however, has failed to reveal another sum- 
mer skin from that region, and the condition of the one in hand does 
not warrant its use in this connection. 


GEOGRAPHICAL-DISTRIBUTION AND VARIATION. 


The American Polar Hares confine their habitats very closely to 
the faunal areas designated by Dr. J. A. Allen” as the “ Barren 
Ground” and “ Alaskan Arctic.” The most southern points of 
their distribution yet recorded, beginning in the east, are Bay St. 
George, Newfoundland (I. ¢.),"' Solomon Island and Ungava, 
Labrador (1. ¢.); | Fort Churchill,” Fort Rae (1. ¢.), Great Bear 
Lake,’® Yukon Valley and mouth of Kuskoquim River,’* Alaska. 
A line connecting these points runs northwest from latitude 47° in 
Newfoundland to latitude 57° in northern Labrador, thence directly 
west across Hudson Bay to Fort Churchill, and northwest along 


® Amer. Nat., 1896, pp. 251, 252. 

10 Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., 1892, Pl. VIII 

1 Aud. & Bach., Quad. N. Amer, 1846, I, p. 248, state it is reported from 
Nova Scotia. This is not authenticated. 
12 Richardson, Faun. Bor. Amer , 1829, I, p. 221. 
13 Nelson, Rep. N. Hist. Alaska, 1887, p. 271. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 309 


the eastern drainage of the Mackenzie to its mouth in latitude 67°. 
The distribution between Great Bear Lake and Nulato is uncertain, 
but may be restricted to the Yukon drainage southwestward to 
Kuskoquim Bay, Behring Sea, in latitude 60°. North of this line, 
the Polar Hare is likely to be found in greater or less abundance, 
as far as explorations have reached. The Greenland Hare, ac- 
cording to Fabricius,’ abounds throughout that country. His 
observations were probably restricted to the southern half of 
Greenland, but they equally apply to the northern sections. It is 
also found on the west side of Robeson Channel and Hal] Basin in 
Grinnell Land,” and on the northeast coast of Greenland in lati- 
tude 75°." The Baffin Land Hare, in its typical form, oceupies the 
northern half of the Barren Ground Fauna of America, north 
of latitude 70°, exclusive of Alaska and the habitat of grenlandicus, 
Its subspecies, bangsi, may be provisionally restricted to the 
country east of Hudson Bay, including south Baffin Land. The 
Polar Hares of the southern interior, west of Hudson Bay, as al- 
ready stated, probably constitute another race of arcticus, while the 
Siberio-Alaskan species occupies the remaining portions of the 
“ Alaskan Arctic ” range of the Polar Hare in the northwest. 

The causes of geographic variation in arcticus and its subspecies 
are nowadays so well understood, as far as they relate to color char- 
acters, as to need little comment. It is interesting to note, however, 
how they are correlated with the variations of some other animal forms 
inhabiting the same areas. In the extreme north, where it is never 
dissociated from snow-covered areas, arcticus practically retains its 
winter coat throughout the year. In those southern areas where 
snow largely disappears for a short summer season, we find an as- 
sumption of colors to correspond with the environment, blackest in 
rocky, fog-clouded Newfoundland, and hoary in the arid, gray 
wastes of the interior. On the verdant, humid shores of Alaska, a 
very distinct Old World species, in sooty-brown summer dress, takes 
the place of its eastern congener. 

When we come, however, to inquire into the origin of the Green- 
land species, with the peculiar dental characters which seem to sep- 
arate it, not only from its Polar allies, but from all other members 
of the genus, the problem is more difficult. It is not unlikely that 


15 Faun. Gronl., 1780, p. 25. 
16 Feilden, in Nares’ Voy., 1878, II, Appx., p 204. 
17 Zweite Deutsche Nordpolarf., II, 1874, pp. 165-167. 


356 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


the character of the food procurable in extreme northern localities, 
as compared with that of the more southern, has been a factor in 
the development of the slender protruding incisors. In northern 
Greenland, plant-life is not only greatly reduced in size and num- 
ber of species from that of Labrador, but the difficulty of procuring 
it is enhanced by the depth and long continuance of the snow in the 
former locality. For many months in the year the Greenland 
Hare must subsist entirely,on dwarfed plants. which it uncovers 
and reaches by scratching away the snow,” while the Labrador ani- 
mal is living without exertion on the twigs, leaves and branches of 
a large variety of bushes and shrubs. The character of the diet in 
each instance naturally accounts for the relatively weaker dentition 
of the northern animal and we may believe that the projecting form 
of incisor was the outcome of the needs of the animal in rooting 
among snow and stones for its seant repast. To insure such an ar- 
mature the are of the tooth must have a larger radius and hence 
the tooth itself a greater length, bringing its root farther back upon 
the maxillary than the sharply curved, perpendicular, massive form 
of the twig-eating animal. Again we see how the projecting form 
of incisor tooth, meeting its opposing member at a triturating 
angle of 45°, must, of necessity, have a greater relative vertical re- 
sistance than opposing pairs of teeth which meet on the same plane 
or at an angle scarcely appreciable. Asa result, we have the nar- 
row, deep incisors of grenlandicus and the long, slender premaxil- 
lary and ramus enclosing them. By this means, the incisor sulcus 
is not only diminished but the weakness resulting from its possession 
is remedied by a special functional provision which fills it with the 
cementum-like scale as the animal approaches maturity. 

It may be stated that the Polar Hares of America, contrary to 
the rule of specific stability in cireumpolar animals have proved no 
exception to the protean character of the many members of the 
genus Lepus on this continent. On the other hand, they emphasize 
that fact, and form a group, apparently more sensitive to the min- 
ute alterations of a Polar environment than any other of the Arctic 
vertebrata. 

Contrary to what we should expect, it does not appear that our 
Arctic Hares decrease in size as we go south. The average meas- 
urements of North Greenland Hares are less than those of 
the series taken in Newfoundland and it will be noted that the 


18 See Feilden, in Appx. Nares’ Voy,, 1878, LI, pp. 204, 205. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 307 


west Alaskan Hares are considerably larger than any others from 
either higher or lower latitudes. The length of ear, which the laws 
of variation lead us to suppose would increase southwardly, is actu- 
ally less in Newfoundland than in Labrador, Baffin Land and 
Greenland, while the hind foot follows a reverse order, being longer 
in the south than in the north. 


GENERAL OBSERVATIONS ON SEASONAL, SEXUAL AND JUVENILE 
PHASES OF COLOR. 


The Polar Hares of all countries and latitudes undergo a double 
annual moult of the entire pelage, taking place during late spring 
and early autumn. Throughout their more southern distribution, 
the contrast between the perfect summer and winter coats, in color, 
texture and quantity is very marked. As their habitat nears the 
Pole, these seasonal differences diminish, so that it is difficult to dis- 
tinguish at a distance the midsummer hares of North Greenland 
and the Arctic Archipelago from the same animals in their snowy 
winter dress. There is but one color character which remains con- 
stant to all members of the group at all ages and seasons the world 
over, namely, the black extreme tips of the ears. In winter this is 
the only exception to the prevailing whiteness which characterizes 
every American form of Polar Hare. 

In Scotland, Ireland and parts of Europe and Asia, the au- 
tumnal change of color is incomplete in the Polar Hares which in- 
habit the more temperate parts of the range of Lepus timidus of the 
Old World. This peculiarity scarcely assumes the dignity of a 
racial or geographical character, owing to its inconstancy, some in- 
dividuals in a given neighborhood changing to a pure white winter 
pelage while others acquire the grayish-brown or hoary dress which 
was named canescens. by Nilsson,’ for the Swedish variety, and hi- 
bernicus, by Bell,” for the Irish animal. 

In America I have found no instances which may be said to be 
analogous to this variation. The Newfoundland Polar Hare reaches 
a more southerly distribution than any of the Old World forms, but 
I have seen no specimens nor know of authentic instances of its fail- 
ing to become pure white in winter, unless a few gray hairs on the 
fore part of the ears may be called an exception. 

The number of skins showing intermediate stages of the molt, 
which would enable me to outline the process of change from winter 


19 Ofver. Ved. Akad., 1844, p. 133. 
20 Brit. Quad., 1837, p. 341. 


358 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


to summer and from summer to winter dress is very small in the 
series available, and those which I have seen appear to differ in the 
manner of molting from that outlined by Dr. J. A. Allen for the 
American Varying Hare, Lepus americanus.” An adult female, 
taken at Bay St. George, Newfoundland, October 16th, 1895 (No. 
3,756, Col. of E. A. & O. Bangs), appears to be undergoing a bleach- 
ing process which affects, with remarkable uniformity, every part 
simultaneously. There is no ragged appearance, caused by the pres. 
ence of patches of old hair, anywhere. The summer fur appears to 
have uniformly about half fallen, giving place to a growing, but 
still short, under-fur of white, which will speedily lengthen into the 
mature winter fur. The feet and hinder bases of ears are unmixed 
white. The leaden gray of inner flanks and lower head and neck 
and the ashy-gray head are little changed from midsummer shades, 
but the whole back, sides and ears are about two shades lighter 
throughout, owing to the disposition of the old over fur and the 
outgrowth of the new. There are no specimens in the series illus- 
trating the style of spring molt. 

In general terms, the spring change of more southern American 
examples consists in the acquisition of black ears, a tawny gray 
head and dark ashy-gray upper parts, including the chin, throat, 
neck and breast; the feet and belly are also more or less shaded 
with gray and leaden hues but the greater part of the belly and tail 
remain white. This diagnosis applies to the eastern subspecies, L. 
arcticus bangsi, and in great measure to the pallid form which fre- 
quents the southern Barren Grounds west of Hudson Bay. In 
species, L. tschuktschorum of Alaska and northeast Siberia, the 
ears are marbled blackish-brown and white, and the upper parts, 
head and neck are blackish-brown, resembling much more closely 
the colors of the Asiatic and European than the American type. 
In typical northern arcticus and grenlandicus the summer coat 
never (?) attains a dark appearance except in the young, but close 
examination shows a greater or less admixture of clear gray hairs 
over the upper parts, most numerous on the head and ears, where 
it is generally accompanied by a tawny suffusion. In some in- 
stances these gray hairs are so sparse as to make the animal prac- 
tically indistinguishable, save in texture and density of fur, from 
winter specimens. 


21 Bull. Amer. Mus. N. Hist., 1894, pp. 107-128. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 359 


So far asI am able to determine, there are no secondary sexual 
color characters in the Polar Hares of America. 

The young, at birth, as well as in the more advanced fcetal stage, 
are as dark or even darker colored than their parents in full sum- 
mer pelage. In grenlandicus they ‘are fully and thickly haired 
some time before birth, and resemble in color and color pattern 
much faded summer skins of arcticus from Great Slave Lake. The 
inner posterior half of the ears is white, their tips and inner borders 
broadly marked with black, the remainder of the ear rusty gray. 
The pelage is remarkably long and well developed for an embryo. 
The soles of the hind feet are as dark as the back, their uppers 
white. The fore-feet and the tail are white throughout. With in- 
creasing age, the young of the northern forms assume a lighter col- 
ored pelage and it becomes nearly as white as that of their parents 
ere the winter fur begins to replace it. In the south the half-grown 
young are marked very similarly to their adult associates, but with 
a stronger fulvous or brownish tinge among the gray. 


HABITS. 


I find very few satisfactory accounts of the habits of any of our 
American species of Polar Hare. The literature on this subject 
mainly consists of brief allusions to the animal by Arctic explorers, 
and some of the most observing of these seem to have formed a very 

‘imperfect acquaintance with the animal. Richardson’s account in 
the Fauna Boreali Americana is the best one relating to Lepus are- 
ticus of the interior of British America. He says: “It is not found 
in wooded districts, hence it does not come further south on the 
line of the Mackenzie and Slave Lake, than latituds 64°. It was 
found in latitude 75°, on the North Georgian Islands. Although 
it does not frequent thick woods, it is often seen near the small and 
thin clumps of spruce fir, which are scattered on the confines of the 
Barren Grounds. It seeks the sides of the hills, where the wind pre- 
vents the snow from lodging deeply and where, even in the winter, 
it can procure the berries of the Alpine arbutus, the bark of some 
dwarf willows, or the evergreen leaves of the Labrador tea-plant 
(ledum). It does not dig burrows, but shelters itself amongst large 
stones or in the crevices of rocks, and in the winter time its form is 
generally found in a wreath of snow, at the base of a cliff. The 
Polar Hare is not a very shy animal, and on the approach of a 
hunter it merely runs to-a little distance, and sits down, repeating 


360 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896.. 


this manceuvre as often as its pursuer comes nearly within gunshot. 
* %* * According to Indian information, the Polar Hare brings 
forth once in the year and from two to four young at a time.” 

Respecting the Greenland Hare, Captain Koldewey of the Ger- 
man-Arctic Expedition of 1869-70, writes :” “The European hare: 
is remarkable for its long and rapid, hasty flight. The Greenland 
Hare, on the contrary, sits as if nailed down in its rocky refuge, 
however near the hunter may pass to him. Sometimes one sees the 
mountain slopes dotted with white spots, which, from their motion- 
lessness, might be taken for snow; but they are only white hares. 
They are about the size of our own hares, but their flesh, like that 
of the Alpine Hare, is insipid. Hare hunting in Greenland often 
gives rise to the drollest scenes. Their hearing appears to be even 
weaker than their sight. Payer once stood near a hare which was 
startled by repeated firing, but had confined its flight to a few steps. 
The creature was nibbling the moss quietly. Payer took out his 
sketch book and drew it in all the different positions which, in its 
uneasiness at the conversation and laughter of his companions, it 
assumed.” 

This relates to the hares of northeastern Greenland. H. W. 
Feilden, in the Appendix to Nares’ Voyage to the Polar Sea, thus 
describes the Hares of north Grinnell Land: “The Polar hare was 
found, though in scanty numbers, along the shores of Grinnell Land 
and its footprints were seen on the snow clad ice of the Polar Sea, 
by Captain Markham and Lieutenant Parr, in lat. 83° 10’ Na 
distance of about 20 miles north of the nearest land. * * * * On 
February 14, two weeks before the sun reappeared at midday, the 
temperature minus 56°, I started one from its burrow, a hole about. 
four feet in length, scraped horizontally into a snowdrift. I have no 
doubt the same burrow is regularly occupied, as this one was dis- 
colored by the feet of the animal and a quantity of the fur was sticking 
to the sides; all around, the hare had been scratching up the snow 
and feeding on Savxifraga oppositifolia. yen where exposed to the 
wind, this hardy plant had delicate green buds, showing on the brown, 
withered surface of last year’s growth. The hare does not tear up 
this plant by the roots, but nibbles off the minute green shoots. 
The number of young that we found in gravid females varied from 
seven to eight, which is much in excess of that produced in Great 
Britain by Lepus variabilis, from which naturalists have found dif 


2 Germ. Are. Exp., Mercier’s transl., 1874, p. 483. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 361 


ficulty in separating the Arctic species. * * * * We find Lepus 
glacialis inhabiting the most northern land yet visited, and attain- 
ing its normal weight, eight to ten pounds, under apparently very 
adverse circumstances. Still, I must say, it is sparsely diffused, and 
we found that after killing a pair or two out of each valley that af- 
forded any vegetation, the race seemed to be extirpated in that dis- 
trict.” 

Referring to the Alaskan Polar Hare, Lepus tschuktschorum, Mr. 
E. W. Nelson says:” “The open country of the Yukon delta is 
their place of greatest abundance, so far as I was able to learn. 
There, in May, 1879, I found them very common. The snow was 
nearly gone, and while travelling along the small channels between 
the islands, in the pale twilight which marks the nights at that sea- 
son, we saw many hares playing about on the banks. They were 
often in small parties of from three to five or six, and were not very 
shy. * * * While camped in this vicinity, at that time, I found 
them to be almost entirely nocturnal in their habits, rarely moving 
about in day-time, even during the gloomy days, when the sky was 
- obscured by dense, low lying clouds. Although they are nocturnal 
in their habits, they see very well in the day, and it is extremely 
difficult to surprise one in its form. Usually it spies the hunter be- 
fore he gets within gunshot and leaves the spot in great haste. 

“ During most of the year, these animals are essentially solitary, 
but during April and May they gather into small parties, and some- 
times as many as a dozen or more may be found on a single hill- 
side.” ‘After declaring that he is sure this hare voluntarily takes to 
the water, and crosses streams 30 yards in width in its wanderings, 
Mr. Nelson continues: “In severe winter weather they seek the 
shelter of willow or alder patches on the slopes of sheltered ravines, 
or in other comfortable situations, but as a rule they are character- 
istic of the open Arctic barrens, and on the wide expanse of deso- 
late snow, their tracks are among the few evidences of life the tray- 
eller finds in crossing the Alaskan tundras in winter.” 


KEY TO SPECIES AND SUBSPECIES. 


Cranial characters. 


I. Upper and lower incisors strongly and regularly curved, meet- 
ing within the are of a circle mutually described by their ex- 


3 Rep. Nat. Hist. Col. Alaska, 1887, pp. 271-273. 
24 


362 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


posed outer faces. Upper incisors rooted on the inferior bases 
of the premaxillaries. Diameter of upper incisor wider than 
deep, its face strongly and broadly grooved. 


la. 


1b. 
le. 


Nasals compressed and narrowed anteriorly ; bony palate 
longer than width of postpalatal fossa; narrow incisive 
foramina terminating opposite anterior alveolus of pm. 1; 
narrow premaxillary process falling short of base of 
nasal; breadth of rostrum opposite bases of pm. 1 shorter 
than distance from alveolus of pm. 1 to alveolus of poste- 
rior incisor; total length of adult skull never exceeding 
100 mm. (95 to 99 mm.), molars narrow, rounded— 
arcticus. 
Similar to la— bangsi. 
Nasals broad, equilateral, flattened ; bony palate shorter 
than width of postpalatal fossa; the wide incisive fora- 
mina reaching nearly opposite base of pm. 2; broad pre- 
maxillary process reaching to or beyond base of nasal ; 
breadth of rostrum equal to or greater than distance be- 
tween alveolus of pm. 1 and the base of corresponding 
secondary incisor ; total length of adult skull always ex- 
ceeding 100 mm. (101 to 115 mm.); molars very broad 
and angular— tschuktschorum, 


II. Jaws prognathous; upper and lower incisors meeting at angles 
of 35 to 50 degrees. Upper incisors rooted on the anterior 
floor of the maxillaries. Diameter of upper incisor deeper than 
wide, its slender sulcus filled with a functional, indurated, stri- 
ate cementum approaching the consistency of enamelled dentine 
at the cutting edge. 


2a. 


Nasals compressed and narrowed anteriorly ; bony palate 
shorter than width of postpalatal fossa ; incisive foramina 
reaching opposite anterior alveolus of pm. 1; narrow pre- 
maxillary process falling short of base of nasal; breadth 
of rostrum opposite bases of pm. 1 equal to or shorter than 
distance between the base of pm. 1 and the apex of the 
incisive foramina; total length of adult skull exceeding 
100 mm.; molars broad, angular, very massive as com- 
pared with slender incisors— grenlandicus. 


External characters. 


I. Size medium, length of hind foot 14 times that of ear from 


crown. 


Tail always white. Upper body fur in summer, dark 


tawny gray to nearly pure white. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 363 


la. Summer fur: ears black; back and sides dark gray ; 
rump blackish— bangst. 
1b. Summer fur: ears grayish-black ; back and sides hoary 
gray, belly and vent pure white—(Interior subspecies ?) 
le. Summer fur: ears grayish-white; back, rump and sides. 
white, sprinkled with gray arcticus. 
1d. Similar to le— grenlandicus. 
IJ. Size very large; hind foot 1? times as long as ear from crown. 
Tail dusky above in summer. Upper body fur in summer 
grayish or blackish-brown. 
2a. Summer fur: ears sooty brownish-black and gray, their 
posterior margins, white; back blackish smoke-brown, 
becoming grayish-brown on sides, ramp darker— 
tschuktschorum. 
Genus LEPUS Linneus. 
Lepus Linneus, Systema Nature, 1758, p.57. (Type DL. timidus L.) 


1. Lepus arcticus “ Leach” Ross. Baffin Land Polar Hare. 

Lepus arcticus Ross, Ross’ Voy., 8vo ed., II, 1819, appx. iv, p.151. Type 
from lat. 73° 37’, Baffin Land, southeast of Cape Bowen. 

Lepus glacialis Leach, Ibid (Under Chap. ‘Descr. N. Sp. Anim. Dise. in Voy. 
to Are. Reg.’), p. 170. (Same type). 

Lepus timidus var. arcticus, J. A. Allen, Mon. N. Amer. Rod., 1877, p. 288 
(in part). 

Lepus arcticus “Leach”? Ross, Rhoads, Amer. Nat., 1896, p. 252. 

Geographic distribution —Northern Baffin Land and the Arctic 
Archipelago; intergrading southeastward into subspecies bangsi, 
and south-centrally into a gray, pallid race. 

Habitat—Open rocky barrens and tundras, preferring in sum- 
mer the borders of thickets ; most abundant on rocky and hilly sea 
coasts; always avoiding the shelter of trees or bushes, but retreat- 
ing to rock crevices for escape from an enemy. 

Color—Summer pelage white, interspersed over back more or 
less sparsely with long, gray-black and brown-pointed hairs, but not 
sufficiently to greatly alter the prevailing whiteness. Ears and face 
grayer, with a tawny shade, the former with black tips. Winter 
pelage pure white everywhere, except tips of ears, which are black. 
Summer pelage, in more southerly districts, darker, intergrading 
into subspecies bangsi. 

Cranial characters.—Total length of skull twice the greatest 
breadth. Nasals broad and flattened posteriorly, narrowed and 
compressed anteriorly, their greatest breadth 23 times greatest 


364 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


length, their bases reaching behind the superior prolongation of 
premaxillaries. Supraorbital frontal processes widely and deeply 
indented posteriorly, highly and broadly arched and upraised above 
the frontal plane. Posterior interorbital constriction tumid, arched 
high above anterior frontal plane and wider than alveolar length of 
molar series. Upper anterior incisors rooted at the inferior max- 
illo-premaxillary sutures, the termini of incisor roots marked by 
decided lateral osseous convexities of the rostrum. Incisors broader 
than deep (transverse exceeds the longitudinal diameter), the ante- 
rior upper pair each deeply and widely grooved by a single sulcus. 
on the inner face. With the skull, minus mandibles, resting on a 
plane, horizontal surface, the chord of the are described by the ex- 
posed incisors is vertical and the radius of this are is about one- 
eighth (,12,) the basilar length of skull.“ — Lower incisors rooted 
anterior to pm.1. Incisive foramina reaching to pm. 1, suddenly 
broadening and then contracting at base. Palatal bridge longer 
tnan width of incisive foramina. Palatal foramina opposite divid- 
ing alveolus of second and third premolars. 

For measurements, see table, pages 374, 375. 

General remarks.—As only one specimen of the Baffin Land 
Hare, and that consisting merely of head and neck skin with the 
skull of a young adult animal, has come to hand, it is impossible to 
furnish a description and measurements of typical adult arcticus, as. 
compared with its southeastern subspecies, bangsi. The descrip- 
tions of older authors who have handled summer specimens, how- 
ever, agrees substantially with the above diagnosis. The skull, 
which was taken from the above mentioned skin by myself, I have 
considered typical of the form described by Ross, and on this basis 
rests the separation of the Greenland Hare from areticus. 

Mr. Ludwig Kumlien, referring to the hares of south Baffin 
Land, states that ‘“‘ Many do not undergo any change of color dur- 
ing summer, and I doubt if it be more than a partial change with 
any. I have seen pure white specimens during all the summer 
months, and occasionally one about half gray.” In a communica- 
tion dated Milton, Wis., March 4, 1896, Mr. Kumlien writes me: 
“T saw no gray hares at any season and I was told at Washington, 
by Dr. Emil Bessel, that Capt. Hall made [the same] observation 


4 For a comparison between the cranial and external characters of arcticus 
and timidus, see Amer. Nat., l. ¢., pp. 252, 253. 
2 Notes on Mam. of Cumb. S8d., Smiths. Mise. Coll., No. 15, 1879, p. 53. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 365 


as regards the hares of Baffin Land. This [statement] was included 
in my mss. of Bulletin No. 15 [l. c.] and crossed out by the final 
proof-reader, leaving my bare statement.” Mr. Kumlien brought 
four specimens of Cumberland Gulf hares to the United States. 
One of these (No. 12,946, Sm. Inst.), a skin in white pelage, lacking 
head, is the only one remaining, the rest having been lost or acci- 
dentally destroyed by fire at the Wisconsin University. 

No other Baffin Land specimens being discoverable, we are 
forced to rest our assumptions of the cranial characters of the hares 
of that region on the single skull which has come to hand. The ap- 
parent discrepancy between the dark color of this summer speci- 
men and that reported by Mr. Kumlien in the above quotations is 
explainable. An examination of the itinerary of the Howgate 
Polar Expedition shows that Mr. Kumlien was absent from Baffin 
Land between the 6th of July and the 51st of August, which more 
than covers the short period in which the Polar Hares of that lati- 
tude retain their full summer pelage. The “ gray” phase noted by 
him was the intermediate condition of molt. Captain Hall’s state- 
ment may have related to the more northern form. 

Lepus arcticus and its subspecies, bangsi, may be cranially dis- 
tinguished from timidus of Sweden by the greater relative height 
and breadth of skull to its length, by the upraised anvil-shaped su- 
praorbital processes and the relatively short, broad incisive fora- 
mina. Taking summer specimens of southern Sweden and Labra- 
dor, strictly comparable on account of latitude, the external charac- 
ters separating arcticus from timidus are striking, the former being 
dark plumbeous-gray above, with black ears, and unicolor white tail, 
the latter rusty brownish-black, with darker ears of the same color, 
and bicolor gray and white tail. Typical arcticus undoubtedly re- 
sembles closely, in summer pelage, the hare of North Greenland, L. 
grenlandicus. 

Specimens examined.—Baffin Land, Niatilik, 1 head and neck 
skin, with skull. Interior form, N. W. Territory, 1 skin, 2 skulls. 
Lepus arcticus bangsi Rhoads. Newfoundland Polar Hare. PI. IX, figs. 1, 2 & 3. 
Pl. X, figs. 1 & 2. 


Lepus arcticus bangstt Rhoads, Amer. Nat , 1896, p. 258. Type from @odry, 
Newfoundfound, No. 3,752, ad. 2, Col. of E. A.& O. Bangs. Collected by 
Ernest Doane, Aug. 3, 1895. 


Geographic distribution Newfoundland, northeastern Labrador 
and southern Baffin Land. 


366 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Habitat—Hiding by day in rock piles on the coasts of Cumber- 
land Gulf. Starting up out of range and running up the mountain 
sides to escape the hunter—Kumlien. High rocky hills of New- 
foundland, descending in severe winters to lower grassy levels, but 
never in woodland. Hiding by day among rocks or under a bush. 
—Doane. 

Color.—Adult summer pelage: entire back and upper sides, in- 
cluding neck, shoulders and outer surfaces of thighs, uniform, dark, 
grizzled gray, faintly suffused with tawny. A pinch of hairs from 
near the middle of back shows the following color pattern: under 
fur fine, tawny-white basally, becoming tawny at distal end; over- 
fur white or black at base in about equal proportions, the coarser 
black-based hairs black throughout, the finer white-based hairs 
with terminal half, black, interrupted by a subterminal band of 
white or pale tawny. Lower head (including chin), lower neck, 
nape, forebreast to forelegs, lower sides, edges of thighs and rump, 
dark, plumbeous gray, flecked with very long, slender, white hairs. 
Lower breast, belly, vent and tail white, bordered by a nearly clear 
plumbeous edging which separates the ventral from the abdominal 
regions and joins the dark rump along the inside of thighs. Inner 
anterior border of hams, sides of hind feet and toes, and lower sur- 
faces of forelegs, white, thinly intermixed with leaden. Outer sur- 
faces of fore and hind legs and superior surfaces of the feet, tawny 
gray. Ears and space between them, black, becoming grayish at 
base and witb a narrow, whitish outer posterior margin from near 
base to tip. Upper head, including cheeks and nose, grizzled buffy 
gray, appreciably lighter than the gray shades of the back. Eye- 
lids whitish, edged with black. Whiskers weak and sparse, white 
and black in equal proportions, the longer black hairs tipped with 
white. 

Winter pelage: entire fur, exclusive of ears, white. Extreme 
tips of ears, black, the median anterior borders of ears, grayish ; in- 
side of ears, blackish. 

Summer young, two-thirds grown, very similar to adults of same 
season but more fulvous above, the ears grayer, the basal half of 
back- hairs leaden, their terminal half tawny brown with gray and 
black tips. 


Cranial characters. 


Not distinguishable from those already given 
for arcticus. 
Measurements’* (taken in flesh): average of four adults; total 


26 For measurements of type Langsi see table, pp. 374, 375. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 367 


length 600 millimeters, hind foot 164; ear, from crown, 84; tail 
vertebre 60. Skull: total length 97; greatest breadth 49; great- 
est diagonal length of nasal 41; greatest length of mandible 76; 
greatest breadth of mandible 47; alveolar length of upper molar 
series 17.8, 

General remarks—This form has the most southern distribution 
of the Arctic Hares of America. It is found about eight degrees 
farther south than the most southerly locality inhabited by the 
Lepus timidus group of the Old World, and twelve degrees south of 
the southernmost habitat of our Alaskan representative. As al- 
ready stated, it is quickly distinguishable from timidus by its clear, 
blackish-gray summer coat and black ears. It owes its separation 
from arcticus to the greater average temperature and humidity of 
its environment, intergrading with the parent stock across the bar- 
ren grounds of Baffin Land. From L. tschuktschorum it is easily 
separable on account of smaller size, and its black ears and bluish, 
grizzled cast contrast decidedly with the sooty-brown shades of the 
Pacific coast animal. From the form inhabiting central British 
America the exact amount of difference is not determinable, owing 
to lack of specimens. 

Specimens examined.—Newfoundland, 5 skins, 6 skulls; Labra- 
dor, 5 skins, 10 skulls. 

Lepus grenlandicus Rhoads. Greenland Polar Hare. Pls. VI, VII & VIII, figs. 
1. Pl. X. figs. 5, 6 & 7° 


Lepus glacialis Peters, Die Zweite Deutsch Nordpolarf., II, 1874, pp. 164— 
167, pl. 2. 

Lepus grenlandicus Rhoads, Amer. Nat., 1896, p. 254. Type from Robert- 
son’s Bay,* lat. 78°, Greenland. No. 1,486,ad. ¢ (?), Col. of Acad, Nat. Sci., 
Phila. Collected by C, E. Hite for the Peary Relief Exp., Aug. 2, 1892. 


Geographic distribution—Greenland and Grinnell Land.  Ice- 
land ? 

Habitat—Everywhere quite numerous in southern Greenland, 
but preferring secluded places and the snowy mountains.—Fabri- 
cius. Rocky hillsides, keeping closely to snow patches in summer. 
—Heilprin. On the plains and mountains at all seasons, though 
never numerous.—Dr. Pansch (fide Peters I. c.). 

Color.—Adult summer pelage (of type) white, suffused anteriorly 
with light tawny and sparingly sprinkled with gray over upper 
head and ears; back with scattering black, gray and tawny-tipped 
hairs. Tip of ears black. Tail, sides and lower surfaces, pure 
white. Whiskers black and white, Half-grown young in July 


*Misspelled ‘ Robinson’s Bay’ in the original description. 


368 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


and August, like adult, but darker, owing to greater abundance of 
gray and tawny hairs and the leaden under-fur. Appearance of 
young and old, at a distance, at all seasons, white. A pinch of hairs 
from near middle back presents the following color pattern: short 
under-fur very fine and silky white ; over-fur silky white with rarely 
scattering black-pointed hairs and a few very long spinous hairs 
with the basal two-thirds black, and the terminal one-third white 
with a black tip. 

Winter pelage (No. 1,047, A. N.S., Phila. Port Foulke, Green- 
land) pure white thwoughout, except the black ear tips, which are 
mixed with white hairs. Whiskers white. 

Cranial characters —Total length of skull twice the greatest 
breadth. Nasals narrow, compressed, their greatest breadth half 
their greatest (diagonal) length. Superior premaxillaries barely 
reaching bases of nasals. Supraorbital processes more greatly de- 
veloped and widely flaring than in arcticus. Posterior interorbital 
constriction narrow, its width considerably less than alveolar length 
of upper molar series. Upper anterior indisors rooted on the max- 
illaries nearly half way from the inferior maxillo-premaxillary sutures 
to pm. 1, the termini of roots lying within the inferior lateral plane of 
the rostrum, but forming a marked interruption of the inferior ros- 
tral profile, viewed laterally. Incisors slender, prolonged, deeper 
than broad (transverse less than longitudinal diameter), the ante- 
rior upper pair in adults, multistriate, the normal sulcus of inner 
face, peculiar to all other members of the genus, being so filled with 
a calcareous process as to obliterate the depression, the face of the 
tooth presenting a more or less even, rounded and enamelled con- 
tour, marked where the groove normally belongs by irreg- 
ular longitudinal strive.” With the skull, minus mandibles, resting 


27 [havesubmitted teeth of granlandicus to my friend Dr. J. C. Curry, a dentist 
of Philadelphia, for examination of this character. He defines it in the fol- 
lowing words : ‘“‘ The groove on the face of the tooth is filled with a grayish, 
opaque, homogeneous substance, which, on first examination, would appear to 
be continuous with the enamel. As it approaches the cutting edge its density 
increases and it is more striated in appearance. A continued maceration of 
the tooth, however, will enable the operator to separate this structure from 
the enamel groove with a clear line of cleavage, and with care the part may 
be removed entire. In the alveolus this structure is not continuous through- 
out the length of the root, but seems to have its beginning in a little triangu- 
lar flap, about one quarter of an inch from the entrance of the tooth pulp into 
the base of the incisor. Like the tooth itself, this sulcus filling has a higher 
per cent of inorganic matter as it approaches the cutting edge, varying from 
about 40 per cent organic at base to 10 per cent at tip. At the incisive edge, 
its composition seems more closely allied to that of the cementum of the osse- 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 369 


upright on a horizontal plane, the chord of the are described by 
the exposed incisors forms an angle to the horizon of 45 to 50 de- 


grees, and the radius of this arc is about one-fifth ( 79;) the basilar 


length of the skull. Roots of lower incisors extending to base of 
pm. 2. Incisive foramina terminating opposite pm.1; widest at 
or near base. Palatal bridge shorter than greatest width of in- 
cisive foramina. Palatine foramina opposite middle of pm. 8. 

Measurements.*—Average of four adults: hind foot 147 millime- 
ters; ear, from crown, 98. Skull: total length 102; greatest 
breadth 48 ; greatest diagonal length of nasal 41; greatest length 
of mandible 75; greatest breadth of mandible, 49 ; alveolar length 
of upper molar series 19. 

General remarks.—The peculiar incisor dentition of this species, 
so far as I have been able to compare it with other members of the 
genus Lepus, is quite unique, not only in the obliteration of the sul- 
cus of the upper anterior pair but in the extension of the roots of 
both upper and lower incisors, the former being planted far behind 
the inferior anterior maxillary border and the latter reaching the 
bases of the second premolars. 

Externally grenlandicus will probably not be found to differ 
materially, even in its summer dress, from typical northern arcticus. 
Fabricius, whose experience was mainly confined to southern Green- 
land, twice asserts that its summer coat does not change in color 
from that of winter. Whether grenlandicus will prove to be en- 
tirely distinct from the haresinhabiting Iceland and the extreme 


ous tooth than anything else.” 

While a formation analogous to this structure is seen in some adult speci- 
mens of all the species of Polar Hares I haye examined, in no case does it as- 
sume the prominent and functional character which it invariably attains in 
adult grenlandicus. In the others it manifests itself as a homogeneous de- 
posit along the bottom of the sulcus; in the Greenland animal it is a laminate 
bistriate structure, having its inception near the base of the tooth in a honey- 
combed hastate flap which lies within, but does not touch the sides of the sul- 
cus and which, as it extends toward the crown of the tooth, increases in den- 
sity and calibre and is closely cemented within the groove. On the exposed 
surface of the incisor it often overtops the contour of the face of the tooth 
and widens up on the tooth face in the form of a protuberant lamina, with 
from one to three irregular longitudinal striz upon its enamel-like surface. 

In nearly mature foetal specimens of grenlandicus there is not the slightest 
indication of this incisor groove layer. In young grenlandicus, one month 
old, the cementum has begun to form closely along the bottom of the groove 
and reaches along the median third of its length to the alveolar edge of the 
premaxillary. At this period its consistency is that of indurated cartilage. 
In specimens apparently but lately arrived at maturity, the sulcus is partly 
filled to the tip, and in very old skulls the groove is obliterated, as described 
above. 

8 For measurements of type grenlandicus, see tables, pp. 374, 375. 


370 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


North Polar regions westward, is an interesting problem, which 
lack of specimens prevents me from answering. ‘That it is radically 
distinct from any American or Old World species represented in 
the collections at my disposal, is certain. 

Through the courtesy of Mr. William De Winton, of the British 
Museum, I am in receipt of the following information about the 
hares of Grinnell Land: “ The collection is rich in specimens of 
old and young from more northern localities, and those from Dis- 
covery Bay, Lincoln Bay, ete., have the characters [of grenlandi- 
cus] mentioned [in your letter], viz.: the projecting. narrow, slightly 
grooved incisors.” Accompanying this, Mr. De Winton sends a 
full length tracing of an upper incisor from a skull from Lincoln 
Bay, 82° 7’, Grinnell Land, which unmistakably belongs to the 
grenlandicus type. He further says that these incisor “ characters 
are not so marked in the small brown young,” and that “ Green- 
land specimens are more curved, so far as our collection shows, but 
they seem to me to get straighter with age, till the angle of meeting 
is considerably Jess than aright angle.” In all particulars Mr. 
De Winton’s examinations not only confirm but emphasize my own. 
Respecting the color of the young, which he incidentally mentions 
as “brown,” it is of interest to note that while hali-grown individ- 
uals are very light bluish-gray (nearly white), the newly born 
young and fully developed embryos collected by Dr. Hays at Port 
Foulke, Greenland, in the Academy’s collection, are quite dark and 
resemble in color and color pattern miniature summer specimens of 
L. timidus, but are grayer. The embryos are densely clothed with 
long hair. The number of specimens in each litter above mentioned 
is four. Whether the full complement in each case was preserved, 
I am unable to state. The most satisfactory and reliable account 
of the Greenland Hare that I have seen is the one by H. W. 
Feilden, already referred to, in which he treats of these animals in 
Grinnell Land as observed by the Nares Expedition. The speci- 
mens secured by Mr. Feilden are those referred to above by Mr. 
De Winton, which I have identified as grenlandicus. Feilden 
found the young of the year to have become nearly pure white by 
the end of July. The number of young in a litter was seven to 
eight. Tracks of this Hare were seen on the Polar Sea in lat. 
83° 10’, twenty miles north of the nearest land. 

Specimens examined.—Port Foulke, Greenland, 1 mounted skin 
and skull, 1 skull and 8 embryos in alcohol. Robertson’s Bay, Green- 
land, 3 skins, 7 skulls. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 371 


Lepus tschuktschorum (Nordquist). Bering Sea Polar Hare. Pls. VI, VII & 
VIII figs. 3. PI. X, figs.3 & 4. 


Lepus timidus var tschuktschorum Nordquist, Vega Exped., II, 1883, pp. 84 
-90; figs. 8, 9, 10, p- 88. Type locality, Pitlekaj, lat. 67°, lon. 173°, N. E. 
Siberia. 

Geographic distribution —Northwestern Alaska, from the mouth 
of the Kuskoquim River, northward.” (Northeast Siberia.) 

Habitat—Abounding in the open coast country and in the inte- 
rior open barrens of the river valleys; seeking the shelter of 
ravines and willow scrub in severer weather but often found at such 
times in the open barrens.—Nelson. 

Color.—Adult summer pelage (No. 3,780, A. N. S., Phila., Choris 
Peninsula, Alaska); upper surfaces of head and body, blackish 
smoke brown, becoming grayish-brown on the sides of body, neck 
and head. Median line of back smoky-black, sparsely tipped with 
dull tawny; rump purer black. Crown to nape like median line 
of back. Region around eyes, cheeks and nose dull rusty-black, 
grayer on lower jaws and with a white orbital ring. Chin and fore- 
throat, lower surfaces of limbs and feet, lower neck, chest, belly, 
vent and tail, white. Lower abdominal region clouded by a faint 
band of black hairs. Lower neck blackish-gray, suffused with 
tawny. Upper limbs and feet tawny gray, the hind feet nearly 
white. Median outer surface of ears sooty brownish-black, sprinkled 
with dull tawny, tawny gray and black on the inner surfaces, and 
white along the posterior borders; tips of ears black with brown 
and gray intermingled. Whiskers white. A few black hairs at 
upper base of tail. A pinch of hairs from near middle of back, about 
two inches from the vertebral line, shows the following color pat- 
tern: under-fur coarse, grayish-white at base, brown or sooty at 
distal end. Over-fur black, with or without a subterminal brown 
zone, intergrading into black spinous hairs, which form nearly 
twenty per cent of the dorsal pelage. 

Winter pelage (No. 13,887, Col. Smiths. Inst.,, St. Michaels, 
Alaska), pure white, except extreme tips of ears, which are Lape 
with rusty-based hairs. Whiskers white. 

Cranial characters.—Total length of skull less than twice its 
greatest breadth. Nasals very wide, flattened, nearly as wide ante- 
riorly as at base, their greatest breadth more than half their great- 
est (diagonal) length. Superior premaxillaries heavy, broad, reach- 


29See Nelson, Rep. Nat. Hist. Col. Alaska, 1887, p. 271. 


O12 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


ing behind bases of nasals. Supraorbital processes as in bangsi. 
Posterior interorbital constriction narrow, its relative width to al- 
veolar length of upper molar series as in grenlandicus. Upper an- 
terior incisors rooted as in arcticus, their roots not forming decided 
maxillar convexities, owing to the great relative width of rostrum. 
Form and position of incisors as in arcticus, but heavier. Molars 
much heavier. Incisive foramina as in arcticus. Palatal bridge as 
in grenlandicus. Palatine foramina as in grenlandicus. 
Measurements——Average of three adults: hind foot, 176 milli- 
meters; ear, from crown, 96. Skull: total length 103.5; greatest 
breadth 54; greatest (diagonal) length of nasal 42.5; greatest 
breadth of nasals 23; width, at tip, of upper incisors 66; alveolar 
width of upper incisors 9.8; alveolar length of upper molar series 
20; greatest length of mandible 80; greatest width of mandible 51. 
General remarks—The Polar Hare of West Alaska, as will be 
seen by its measurements, represents the maximum development of 
the Arctic group in America. Added to great size we have in 
tschuktschorum several cranial and external characters which sepa- 
rate it from arcticus and its eastern subspecies so plainly that there 
is little doubt of their specific value. Among these we may note 
an approach in color to timidus of Sweden, but the uniformly broad 
flattened nasals, the great relative width of skull and large calibre 
of the dental armature and the anvil-shaped, upraised supraorbital 
processes induce me to specifically distinguish it. A skull from 
Plover Bay (Smith. Inst., No. 7,180) should be classed strictly as 
tschuktschorum. Reference to the table of measurements shows 
its dimensions to be of the largest. The relative zygomatic width 
is narrower, but in all other respects the Siberian skull is typical of 
the Alaskan as contrasted with the Scandinavian and Baffin Land 
animals, The researches of Radde® and Middendorff® show that 
the Polar Hares of east Siberia do not specifically differ from the 
European species either in color or in cranial characters, the latter 
mentioning the occurrence of this species in the Stanovoi Range 
which extends into the Tschuktschee country. Four skulls from 
Kamtchatka, in the collection of the Smithsonian Institution, show 
beyond question that the small timidus type of Polar Hare inhabit- 
ing that region is very different from the hare which frequents the 


8° Reisen im Ost-Sibirien, I, 1862, pp. 207-211. 
51 Sibirische Reise, II, 1853, p. 115. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 373 


Plover Bay territory. Brandt” says that “ Wossenessenski ob- 
served the true form of Lepus variabilis in Kamtchatka and the 
coast provinces of Okotsk Sea, to be entirely white as far as the tips 
of the ears ;” but the refereuce is of little value except in regard to 
the distribution and winter pelage of this hare in the maritime 
provinces of southeast Siberia. Schrenck* says the Amoor Land 
hares are not separable from the Polar Hare of Europe except that 
he regards the southern form as a variety of the northern, applying 
to it the name canescens of Nilsson, in which the normal change 
from the dark summer pelage to the white of winter presents an in- 
termediate gray phase of coloration which is retained the whole 
winter season. As we would naturally expect, from the known 
character of the west Alaskan fauna, it furnishes us not only with 
the largest of our American Polar Hares, but with the darkest col- 
ored example of the whole group of Arctic Leporide I have yet 
seen. 

Nordquist’s description of the Tscuktschee Hare leaves no room 
for doubt as to its specific identity with the Alaskan animal. 
Owing to my lack of summer skins of this hare from Siberia it is 
impossible to say whether the Alaskan animal is separable as a 
darker race, though such a state of affairs is likely to exist. 

The elaborate table of measurements given by Nordquist confirms 
my own conclusions regarding the great size of the Bering Sea 
Hare, the relative shortness of its ears, the great length of the hind 
foot and the strong peculiarities of the cranium. 

I am informed that this hare, in common with some other species 
of the mammal fauna of these regions, is frequently known to cross. 
Bering Strait on the ice in the winter. 

Specimens examined.—Alaska, 3 skins, 4 skulls; Siberia, 2 skins 
(winter furs, without feet), 1 skull. 


3? Reisen im Amur.-Lande, 1, 159, p. 1845. 
33 Bem. Wirbelth. Nord. Eur. Russl., p. 44. 


— 


[1896. 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF 


374 


- a ae ae aR > = Y= aa aa “—, - ea a 
ssmpiuent 7 yoorddy, | OG | GL | 02 | OF} 29] 2 | BE \G'8F] &6 yo ‘BN ‘V 9L0'% 
‘snp “7 [wIdhT, | 6b | 8L \G8T| 6129] IZ | OF | OF | Oot} & « MOT Y90}g Avou ,, “Uapaag ‘I 8 80P 
ssnpiman “7 [words | 6% | O8 | OZ. | OL! 89 |8°ss) Sh | so | TOL | PEISETLAH ‘Uapans ‘I's Th 
g Sapir) “T OF |8 EL /L'6T| 26 | 29 |8'6T| LE | BF t6 BABY) vy il boat) GRE IZ 
gsnpiudn "7 |\o'8p) SL \L 61) 96) 99) 2 |2 68) O¢ 6 Spuv[sy JopuBuiwio dy ‘I's AERR 0G 
gsupiuiy-T | 0S | LL \9'6T| 26 | 99! GZ |8' tr} OF | 86 SpuB[sl JopUBaIOUO) ‘I'S X£88'0Z 
*(uayorq peytd1990 yo diy) wan<oyospyny2s7 “7 to | $8} 12 | OL) ZL) & | Gb \@cS| LOT Us AVAL “BLOqIS ‘I'S OfT'L 
“qstInbpaoN opg ‘zencoyospynyosz “7 yword Ay, ZEZ|S Sh) 99 | GOT BiLIGIS JSBOyWION, “dx eAaA 469'% 
“4WSINDpPION opy ‘enm<oyoszynyos? “7 [Rod AT, cz | 9F IG’cc| 6OL| 3 Biaqig weaqwion| “dx Bsaq 9&7 
"menaoyoszyny Is} “T | OS | SL |L61| V6) 29) Ze \S'OF| Zo | TOT SPBYOIW IS ‘ByAsVly ‘Ts £88'CT 
“MENAOYISJYNYIS) “T TS |G 08 jG°0Z| OL | $9 |§ G2 |B EF Z's | SGOT SOVIIIW IS ‘BASVLV Bliss} £88 UT 
"MANAOQYISZY RY ISS 7 eB |2:0c| OL} 4] #2] SF | 99 | 290r | 3 BinsapUad SO) “Bxse[y ‘SN '‘'V O8L'E 
*(uayoaq [ByTd1090 Jo diy) wemeoyospynys} “T 6. |9'8| 9 \¢°6I 2c | 86 « WONT ,, Z'O'W 7Z1'9 
ESnI1jI4V JO “ASQUS LOLLOJUT 6. | 6 9/86] 68 | TS | 66 OV WO ‘AT, IOMTILON Te G08'L 
‘dung “vy “7 yooddT, | Lh | GL 9°8 OF | 8F | L6 3 “A£IpOL) ‘puzlpunojymaN |sduvg “OW V “OL ZOL's 
‘asSuvg ‘v7 -dsqug | Lp 9 LL|GLT|¢8| 9) 2 | Th | GF S26 | & | 28100H 4g Avg ‘puL[panoyMoN |ssueg "Oy 'V “A! FOL's 
“asdung “v7 “Asqug ; 8/19) 8% |c'ep| 0c | 86 | P | o8100H “4g Avg ‘puv[punoyMoN stag “ORV “| G8L'T 
‘asduvg “v “7 “ASQUS 9 /C1Z| IF |8 SF} o'96 | 3 | ed4005 “4g Avg ‘pav[punoyMoN |sduvg_ ‘OY V Al LSL'T 
“usSeng ‘v7 ‘dsqus 6¢/G1Z|G'OF| 6F | &6 BAVIU() ‘LOPBIqe'y] ‘I's ZEUES 
isdung “v7 “dsqng 29 |G'1Z|G'sF| TS 86 Baus) ‘Lopeisqe’y ‘I's 6Z1'E% 
‘asdung “v7 “dsqug 9| 2 | FF | 2g | 8°86 vavduy) ‘1opraqu’y TES FGI'EZ 
“wsdung “VT “dsqng $C | 1% | Gt | 6F 96 Bavsuly ‘1Lopesqey] I's OZL'EZ 
*SNI1IAV “T UPB ATS JON 99 | G |G OF! Sb | 96 AUMBIN “ps quing‘puvy] apes res IFS 
“SHILIPUDIUDAS “T YUPV G| IZ. | te | SF OOL Avg S,dos}1eqoy ‘puepueasry SNOW; 6LL‘E 
“SHITPUYIND AS “T IUPV PS) 06 | 8b | TOL Aug Ss Mos}raqoy “pue(deets) oS Nn ay L632 
*(aayoag eITd1990) srapunzun«d “7 “YyUpPT PIO |#'S | 02 | oF | SF | éFOr Aug s,uosjseqoy ‘puvlasety ‘SN VW CLUE 
‘snoipunjumas *T Jo addy, 92 |9°0G| Tr | 0S | OOF te) Avg $,Wosjwaqoy ‘pavpaeatry i ONE OV) 98F'L 
BPQSTOBPISEIP sl O |SaQro!] 4 |2 2) 2 
salediocareald join | 2 |g S. ee 
PS SSsisSids 2 BRIER] FB | 8 = 
&| Bleside| =|8 | 88/8 | = ee a 
oo eo g Bal’ ow > es ct!) 5 8 . Be 
cs] ole = faa | toe I ee E 
“SYIVUIOY 3 nS BS| 3 S 3 e 3 = “AYTBIO'T z 
ct =a i—9 oO} & ct ia 
El re el eee & 
Sl ote) Sh, Oh ENS [ec 4 
= eel Ms Mi Se = Po Fg 
S = = ® ® 
e| 2) S| 3] gle | & 
a S|) = 
cold ral MS WEES ell ln E 


‘SHUVH UVTOd NVIAVNIGNVOS (NY NVIUAAIS ‘NVOINANV LDIOAV 10 STTOMS NGAGS-ALNAMEL 40 SINUNAYASVAW 


ee 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 375 


BODY MEASUREMENTS OF TWENTY ADULT AMERICAN, SIBERIAN AND 
SCANDINAVIAN POLAR HARES. 


5 
2 | = 
= 3 | >! ./°ls 
2 Fs Locality. (sel) SVE Remarks. 
a 3s 2/8) 2is 
= 2 | ssn eesalins > bee 
1,486, A.N.S. Greenland, Robertson’s Bay. 2? 143) 97,  |Typeof ZL. evenlandicus 
(relaxed). 
1,520 A. N.S. Greenland, Robertson’s Bay. 2 144100 Dry. 
3,779 A. N.S. Greenland, Robertson’s Bay. 520 155 Skeleton only (ligamen- 
| tous). 
1,047 A.N.S Greenland, Port Foulke. of 148100 Mounted (dry). 
12,456 S.I. Baffin Land, Niantilik. 95 Head and neck (dry). 
14,151 S.I Labrador, Solomon Is., Da- 
| |_ vis Inlet. hel 145, 95 | Dry. 
14,149 Nude ‘Labrador, Ft. Chimo. 140102. Relaxed. 
14,793. S.I. Labrador, Ft. Chimo. _ 140 100 53 Dry. 
1,187 E. A. & O. Bangs New foundland, Bay Saint) | 
George. 2 |586 170) 85 45 Meas. in flesh. 
3,752 E. A. & O. Bangs Newfoundland, Codry. Q |626 160) 85 63\ Type of L. a. dangsi. 


3,754 E. A. & O. Bangs Newfoundland, Bay Saint 


George. 2 603,167 85 67 Meas. in flesh. 
3,756 E. A. & O. Bangs N ‘ewfoundland, Bay Saint) 
George. | 583.159 8265 Meas. in flesh. 
3,780| A.N.S. Alaska, Kotzebue Sound. | | 180 ¢8 Relaxed. 
13,886 S25: Alaska, St. Michaels. 19 | 175; 95) |Dry. 
13,887) Sak |Alaska, St. Michaels. os 173} 95) |Dry. 
VegaExp. N.E. Siberia, near Pitlekaj.| 2 74717911075 Typical L. tschuktschor- 


| um, fide Nordquist. 
| VegaExp. |N. E. Siberia, near Pitlekaj.| 7 720170 100 80 Typical ZL. éschustschor- 
} um, fide Noraquist. 


408 “ight: Sweden, near Stockholm. | 9 | 165114, Relaxed. 
409 SE. ‘Sweden, Helsingland. é } 165108 Relaxed. 
+ 


aii Sit. ‘Sweden, Hellestad. \d 160112 Relaxed. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 
Puate VI. 


Fig. 1. Lepus grenlandicus Rhoads. Robertson’s Bay, Greenland. 
(Topotype, No. 3,779, Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila.). 

Fig. 1. Lepustimidus L. Near Stockholm, Sweden. (No. 408, U.S. 
Nat. Mus.). 

Fig. 3. Lepus tschuktschorum (Nordq.). St. Michael’s, Alaska. 
(No. 1,588, U. S. Nat. Mus.). 


Puates VII & VIII. 
Figs. 1, 2 and 3. Inferior and superior views of the same skulls fig- 
ured in Plate VI, in the order there named. 
PLATE IX. 


Figs. 1, 2 and 3. Lateral, superior and inferior views of Lepus are- 
tieus bangsi Rhoads. Codry, Newfoundland. (Type, No. 
3,792, 9. Col. E. A. and O. Bangs). 


376 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


PLATE X. 


Figs. 1 and 2. Lepus arcticus bangsi Rhoads. (Type). Mandible: 


and super anterior view of rostrum. 


Fig. 3. Lepus tschuktschorum (Nordq.). (No. 1,588, l.¢.). Man- 
dible. 

Fig. 4. Upper incisor typical of timidus and arcticus types. (From 
a specimen of Alaskan L. tschuktschorum). 

Fig. 5. Lepus grenlandicus. (No. 3,779, 1. ¢.). Upper incisor. 

Fig. 6. Lepus grenlandicus. (No. 3,779, |. ¢.). Mandible. 

Fig. 7. Lepus grenlandicus. (No. 3,779, 1. c.). Super anterior view 
of rostrum. : 

Fig. 8. Lepus timidus L. (No. 408, 1. c.). Mandible. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 37 


be | 


JULY 7: 
The President, SamurL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 
Thirteen persons present. - . 


A paper entitled ‘‘ New and little-known Mammalia from the 


Port Kennedy Bone Deposit,” by Edward D. Cope, was presented 
for publication. 


JuLy 14. 
Mr. CHARLES Morris, in the Chair. 
Fourteen persons present. 
Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :— 
“Tnsular Landshell Faunas as illustrated especially by the data 


obtained by Dr. G. Baur in the Galapagos Islands.” By William 
Healey Dall. 


“New Species of Fungi from various localities.” By J. B. Ellis 
and B. M. Everhardt. 


JULY 21. 
Mr. CHARLES Morris, in the chair. 


Eleven persons present. 


JULY 28. 
The President, SamureL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 
Fifteen persons present. 


A paper entitled, “The Hemipenes of the Sauria,’ by Edward 
D. Cope, was presented for publication. 
The following were ordered to be printed :— 


25 


378 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


NEW AND LITTLE KNOWN MAMMALIA FROM THE PORT KENNEDY 
BONE DEPOSIT. 


BY E. D. COPE. 


The notes contained in the following pages are based on mate- 
rial acquired by the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia 
from the locality above mentioned, and are preliminary to a com- 
plete and illustrated report which I hope to be able to publish after 
a full investigation of all accessible material. This paper extends 
and modifies the conclusions communicated to the Academy at the 
meeting of December 5th, 1895, where a general survey of the results 
was given. After a fuller study of the material presented, I have 
been compelled to reduce the relative number of existing species 
whose remains have been recovered. While the total number of 
species of mammalia is thirty-eight, the number of existing species 
is only six. They are as follows: 

Erithizon dorsatum L. 

Castor fiber L. 

Lepus sylvaticus Bachm. 

Ursus americanus L. 

Felis eira Desm. 

Lynx rufus Guld. 

The remains of birds are not abundant, and consist chiefly of a 
species of turkey (Meleagris). Of reptiles there are a snake of the 
genus Zamenis and three species of turtles. One of the latter 
seems to be identical with the existing Clemmys insculpta Lec. 
while the others are apparently new. One is a large form, perhaps 
referable to Clemmys, and the other is a box tortoise. 


BRUTA. 


Megalonyx wheatleyi Cope. 

This species was extremely abundant at the period when the fissure 
was open, fragments of at least sixty individuals haying been ob- 
tained. The speciesis uniformly smaller than M. jeffersonii,and differs 
from it constantly in the form of the canine molars. Material for 
determination of the cranial characters has been found. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 379 


Study of the specimens shows that M. dissimilis Leidy was founded 
on inferior canine molars of M. jeffersonii, and that the teeth so 
named by me are the corresponding teeth of M. wheatleyi. M. 
sphenodon was founded on teeth of young individuals of M/. wheat- 
leyi. M. loxodon and M. tortulus are sustained as distinct. 


GLIRES. 


Anaptogonia hiatidens Cope. Proc. Amer. Philos. Soc., 1871, p- 91, fig. 18. 
I have described from the Wheatley collection several species al- 
lied to or belonging to the voles, and in this paper I add two others. 
These forms are referable to those genera, which are defined as fol- 
lows: 
Pulp cavity and lateral grooves closed below; teeth rooted ; 
ANAPTOGONIA Cope. 
Lateral grooves and pulp cavities open below; no roots; 
Microtus Selys. 

The first term in the Microtine series of genera is the genus Anap- 
togonia, where the crowns of the molars are short at maturity, and 
there are rather elongate roots. This is naturally the primitive 
genus, and it is interesting now that two fossil species referable to it 
have been discovered." 

But one species of Anaptogonia has been obtained from the cave 
formations of this country, Anaptogonia hiatidens Cope. It is rep- 
resented by two series of the inferior molars of the right side, a first 
inferior molar separate, and some superior molars. The prism-for- 
mule of these teeth are as follows: (1) 1 six-lobed 31; (2) 21; 
(3) 141. The first molar is larger than both of the others together. 
Its triangles 3 are isolated, but anterior to these, one on each side is 
well defined, but the dentine is continuous with that of the anterior 
lobe. This lobe consists of two prominent basal loops, and two less 
prominent terminal rounded lobes, all unsymmetrical. There are 
thus six keels on each side of the crown and a rounded front bor- 
der. The triangles of the M. ; are acute, and the anterior of the 
opposite sides are not fully separated from each other, a strip of 
dentine connecting them. In the M. ; the triangle of one side is 
less developed than the other, and the one extremity of the last col- 
umn is smaller than the other, forming rather a curved process of 
aterminal triangle of the opposite side. The pulp cavity is well 
enclosed below, and the two roots are rather small and divergent. 


1See Merriam, North American Fauna, No. 2, 1889, p. 28; On anew 
Genus and Four new Species of Arvicoline. 


380 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


As compared with A. ruti/a of the northern parts of the earth, 
this species has double the linear dimensions of the teeth. 


Measurements. m.M. 


{ lenganneten a) of crown ; 
Diameters of M. ; < anteroposterior ; 
( transverse posteriorly ; 


for) 


longitudinal of crown ; 

Diameters of M. 5 | nteopstero ; 
transverse posteriorly ; 
longitudinal of crown ; 

Diameters of M. 5 < anteroposterior ; 
leiganavetes posteriorly ; 


Brae Dor oO 
on 


The teeth of the second specimen are a little larger than those 
above measured. They are in a decayed jaw, with the incisor in 
place, and they agree with the types in all details, excepting only 
that the external column of the anterior lobe is not grooved. 

The first inferior molar, which was originally described and fig- 
ured, is peculiar in the failure of the anterior triangles to isolate 
themselves from each other. This character turns out to be incon- 
stant, as in two other corresponding teeth the triangles are closed. 
The name Anaptogonia was applied to the species in a subgeneric 
sense, and although based on a worthless character, must, under the 
rules, be retained. It antedates the Evotomys of Coues, which was 
proposed in 1874 in the Proceedings of the Academy of Natural 
Sciences of Philadelphia, p. 186, for voles with rooted molars. 
Anaptogonia cloacina Cope sp. noy. 

Crowns prismatic, the common pulp cavity with lateral walls 
which close the lateral grooves, but do not close the pulp cavities ; 
no roots. 

The dentition of this species is that which is regarded by G. S. 
Miller as that of the immature stage of the species which were termed 
by Merriam Phenacomys. I do not see that this dentition can be 
distinguished from that of Anaptogonia.’ 

Two individuals of this species are indicated by the specimens 
preserved by Mr. Mercer. These include, the first, the M. = and 
M. 2; the second, the M.1 and M.2. As usual in this group, 
the molars diminish in size posteriorly. The triangle formule are : 
M. 1,12; M. 2,13; M. 3, 13-3 lobes. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 381 


In the M. + the triangies of one side are acute angled ; and of the 
other, obtuse-angled. The posterior triangle presents an angle pos- 
teriorly as well as laterally. In the M. 2 the same characteristics 
exist, with the addition that the anterior (terminal) triangle has its 
acute column pinched together, but not so as to exclude the dentine. 
In the M. 2 the entering angle (groove) of one side enters the tri- 
angle of the other side opposite to it, so as to destroy its triangular 
character. The second triangle of the same side is also reduced by 
the deep inflection of the opposite groove. Opposite the apex of 
the second groove, a rudimental third triangle is present in the form 
of the section of a keel of the surface. This, I reckon as one of the 
three divisions of the terminal lobe. The other two are not well 
distinguished, one opposite to the keel just mentioned is an acute 
angle, and the terminal one is strongly convex. Thus on this tooth 
there are three keels on one side and four un the other. The ante- 
rior (terminal) column is flattened. Excepting on the M. 3, all the 
triangles are well isolated. 


Measurements. m.m. 

( longitudinal ; 7.5 
Diameters M. +} sp. no. 1 { anteroposterior ; 3.3 

| transverse ; 2 

( longitudinal ; 6 
Diameters M. 2 sp. no. 2 {4 anteroposterior ; 2.7 

| transverse : 2 

( longitudinal ; 5.5 
Diameters M. 2 sp. no. 2 { anteroposterior ; 3 

| transverse ; Tk 


The walls of the common pulp cavity are broken off in most of 
the teeth of this species above described, but portions remain in most 
of them, and in the M. 2 they are so far perfect as to show that the 
pulp cavity is not closed below as in Evotomys. 

Microtus diluvianus sp. nov. 

The numerous species of the genus Microtus are distinguished 
into groups by various characters, e. g., those of the molar teeth, of 
the size of the ears, tail, ete. The extinct species can be most read- 
ily determined by dental characters, and as these are in all the spe- 
cies less matters of proportion, and more a question of the number 
of parts, they are to be preferred as possessing greater fixity. 
Thanks to the excellent work of Blasius on the Mammalia of 
Europe (1859), it is possible to determine the relation of the Amer- 


382 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


ican species to the types of the divisions proposed by European 
authors. I am also much indebted to my friend, Mr. S. N. 
Rhoads for the opportunity of examining skulls of a number of rare 
North American species, and especially those described by himself 
from the Pacific coast. 

The species differ as to the number of triangles in the first inferior 
premolar. There is, however, some lack of constancy in the relations 
of the anterior triangles to the treffle so that I have depended 
rather on the characters of the second molars in both jaws for con- 
venience of definition of the larger groups. Thus, in the species of 
the M. pinetorum group, the last two triangles on one side fuse to a 
median position similar to that of the first column. In the other 
groups, where this tooth has two triangles on each side, the second 
superior molar differs in the number of its triangles. There are al- 
ways two on the external side; but the posterior outer may be pro- 
longed to the inner side, or this prolongation may be cut off into a 
distant triangle. These divisions include the following species : 


A. Second inferior molar, triangles, 2 1. 


1. Second superior molar, triangles, 1 3, Agricola Blasius. MM. 
agrestis Europe. 

2. Second sup. molar triangles, 1 + 1, Myonomes Raf., M. riparius, 
K. N. Amer. ; M. principalis, N. W. N. Amer. 

3. Second sup. molar triangles, 1 ¢; Microtus Selys (—Hemiotomys 
Selys, Paludicola Blas., Tetramerodon Rhoads). M. amphibius ; 
M. nivalis; M. ratticeps; M. campestris; M. arvalis; M. subterra- 
neus; M. savii, Europe; M. xanthognathus; M. townsendii; M. 
arvicoloides, N. America; M. speothen; M. sigmodus; M. invo- 
lutus; M. diluvianus Extinet, N. Amer. 


AA. Second inferior molar, triangles, 1 + 1. 


4, Second super. molar, triangles, 1 2, Pitymys MeMur. M. pine- 
torum, N. Amer. ; M. didelta, Extinet, N. Amer. 


The large size of Microtus diluvianus Cope distinguishes it from 
all the extinct and recent American members of the genus. It is 
only represented by the M. 1=2 of both sides, so that many of its 
characters remain to be discovered. The triangle formula of these 
teeth is M.11 2, M.21%. In both molars the triangles are acute 
and are well closed, and the posterior one presents an angle poste- 


riorly. The lateral keels are 8 and §. The valleys are wide open below. 


I eS 


ll titi ie 


a) eo 


~ 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 383 


~ 
=> 


bo 09 m1 bo 09 Cc 


( longitudinal ; 
Diameters M. 1 { anteroposterior ; 

| transverse ; 

( longitudinal ; 
Diameters M. 2 4 anteroposterior ; 

| transverse ; 


Oror=1 
So ol 


bo 


Microtus speothen Cope. Proceeds. Amer. Philos. Soc., 1871, p. 87, fig. 13. Arvicola 

(Pitymys) tetradelta, 1. ¢., 1871, pp. 87-8, fig. 14. 

Arvicola tetradelta was founded on the M. + and 2 of an in- 
dividual of smaller size than the types of A. speothen, but not other- 
wise different. 

The species Microtus involutus from the Port Kennedy deposit is 
allied to M. sigmodus, while M. didelta is more nearly related to 
M. pinetorum. 


CARNIVORA. 


Ursus haplodon sp. nov. Ursus pristinus Leidy, Cope, Proceeds. Amer. Philos. Soc., 
1871, p. 96, not Arctodis pristinus Leidy, Proc. Acad. Philada., 1854, 90; Holmes, 
Postpliocene Foss. So, Carolina, 1860, 115, pl. xxiii, figs. 3-4. 

There axe contained in the Academy’s collection, remains of 
thirty-six individuals of this large bear from the Port Kennedy fis- 
sure, and parts of several others are included in the Wheatley col- 
lection. Study of this material has led me to the conclusion that 
Ursus pristinus of Leidy is a distinct though allied species. The 
latter was founded on a single tooth, the first inferior true molar of 
the left side. This tooth cannot now be found, but Leidy has given 
a figure which is of much excellence from an artistic point of view, 
and judging from other figures in the same work, is probably trust- 
worthy, especially as it corroborates the description in every par- 
ticular. I should have hesitated to distinguish the present animal, 
however, had it not been that the Port Kennedy material includes 
fourteen teeth from the same position in the jaw, three of which are 
in the Wheatley collection. These all agree closely and differ 
from Leidy’s animal. 

Leidy notes that in U. pristinus the anterior width of the 
tooth exceeds the posterior, and the figure confirms this statement. 
In U. haplodon the extremities of the crown are of equal width. 
The grinding surface of the crown is in U. pristinus rough with 
tubercles, while it is smooth in U. haplodon. This character 
might be supposed to be due to the attrition of use, but it is uni- 
versal in the teeth of U. haplodon without regard to age. The 
trigon in U. pristinus is triangular; in U. haplodon it is a semi- 


384 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


circle. The apex of the triangle is in U. pristinus internal, and 
it is split by a fissure which separates paraconid from metaconid. 
In U. haplodon the paraconid is wanting. In this respect U. 
pristinus more resembles the modern bears. I suspect that U. pris- 
tinus is distinct from U. haplodon, but of the same group; more 
approaching the typical Ursi. Itis of smaller size, about equaling 
the grizzly. 

Ursus haplodon belongs to the American type of the Plistocene 
and present ages, which is distinguished from the typical Ursi by 
the greater development of the sectorial part of the first inferior 
true molar. This is due to the more anteroposterior direction of the 
paraconid, the larger size of the protoconid and the smaller size of 
the metaconid. The tooth makes a sensible approach to that of 
Hyenarctos. To this group belong the following species, and they 
differ in the following ways: 


I. Superior premolars crowded, overlapping. (South American.) 


Large species ; U. ornatus Cuv., U. bonaerensis Gerv. 
Smaller species ; U. brasiliensis Linn. 


II. Superior premolars uninterrupted, not overlapping. (Cali- 
fornian.) 


Muzzle very short ; U. simus Cope. 


III. Superior premolars spaced. (E. N. America.) 
Muzzle moderate ; U. haplodon Cope. 


Where JU. pristinus should be placed in this series can only be 
ascertained by future discovery. The three species first named 
are separated from Ursus under the name of Tremarctus (Gerv- 
Arctotherium Brav.), as the humerus exhibits an entepicondylar 
foramen. It is not known whether the last two species possess this 
character or not. 

A conspicuous character is common to the living Tremarctus 
ornatus and Ursus (? Tremarctus) haplodon, which is not present in 
Tremarctus bonaerensis of the Pampean beds. There are two mas- 
seteric fossee of the mandible, which are separated by a crest which 
extends obliquely downward and backward from below the coro- 
noid process. 

The size of the teeth of this species, as well as that of the jaws 
preserved, exceed the average dimensions of the grizzly bear 
(Ursus horribilis). U. haplodon was evidently one of the most 


Qe ee 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 385 


formidable of its genus, and it probably found an abundant supply 
of food in the sloths of the genus Mega/onyx, which were the most 
abundant of the contemporary mammalia. 

Osmotherium spelaeum Cope. 

This genus is characterized by inferior dentition as in Mephitis, 
but the dental formula Pm. 4, M. 2. Metaconid well developed ; 
heel of sectorial large, cupped. 

The inferior dental formula of this genus is that of the extinct 
form, Potamotherium, which intervenes between Mephitis and 
Intra. The typical species of Osmotherium, however, resembles 
Mephitis so greatly in its inferior dentition that I suspect that the 
superior molar formula will be found to be Pm. 3, M. 2, as in Me- 
phitis, instead of Pm. 4, M. 2, as in Potamotherium. The latter 
genus is of the Miocene age in Europe and North America, the 
genus Brachypsalis Cope from the Loup Fork formation of Ne- 
braska being probably founded on a species of Potamotherium. 
The presence of an additional premolar is important in the Musteli- 
dz, but might in some case prove to be a mere individual variation, 
but in the present instance this is clearly not the case. 

Osmotherium spelaeum Cope is represented by a left mandibular 
ramus which contains alveoli or roots of the C. and Pm. 4-2, with 
Pm. 1 and Ms. 1-2 perfectly preserved. 

The ramus is robust, and its inferior border rises from below the 
heel of M. 1 upward and posteriorly; in Mephitis mephitica the 
ramus is less robust, and the inferior border begins to ascend below 
the posterior part of the M. II. The anterior border of the mas 
seteric fossa is not sharply defined. There are three mental fora- 
mina, the first and second below Pm. 2, and the third below Pm. 
1, the anterior being the largest. The molar teeth are much like 
those of M. mephitica, but are more robust. The metaconid is 
considerably smaller than the protoconid as in Mephitis putorius, 
and smaller than in M. mephitica. The borders of the heel are 
strongly and equally elevated, enclosing the basin completely. The 
Pm. I differs from that of WM. mephitica in presenting a flat face 
inward and posteriorly, which is bounded externally by an angu- 
lar ridge, as in M. fossidens. The crown of the Pm. 2 is mostly 
lost, but a short, flat transverse heel remains, which is similar to 
but smaller than that of the Pm. I. The anterior root of Pm. II 
is opposite the posterior root of the Pm. III; while the Pm. IV is en- 
tirely and directly in front of the anterior root of Pm. II, and ex- 


386 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


ceeds it in size. The dental foramen enters at a point as far poste- 
rior to the M. IJ as the long diameter of the latter, about as in M. 
mep hitica. 


Measurements. m.M. 
Length of ramus from M. II inclusive, 29 
Length of molar series ; 25 
Length of true molars ; 13 
Length of sectorial ; 10 
Width of sectorial at heel ; 5.5 
Length of heel of sectorial ; 4.5 
Length of crown of M. IT; 3 
Depth of ramus at Pm. IV; a 
Depth of ramus at posterior body of M. 1; 9 


The only question as to the validity of this form that can arise, is 
due to its similarity to Mephitis fossidens. See the description of 
the latter below. 


Mephitis fossidens sp. nov. 

Two species of the genus Mephitis Linn. occur in the bone de- 
posit in considerable abundance. After a cursory examination 
I referred both of them to M. mephitica,? but a thorough study 
convinces me that this reference must be reconsidered. I give a 
table by which they may be distinguished from the best known re- 
cent species, M. mephitica and M. putorius. I add here that Dr. 
Merriam has endeavored to substantiate the reference of the latter 
species to a separate genus under the name of Spilogale.* He gives 
a list of characters which he regards as generic, but which are to 
me specific only, as they only consist of proportions of the skull and 
teeth. 

I. M. 1 with para- and metaconule forming a straight longi- 
tudinal crest ; no posterior ledge. 
Metaconid small, low; inferior premolars 2-3 overlapping ; ento- 
conid low ; M. fossidens Cope. 
II. M. 2 with distinct V-shaped para- and metaconules sepa- 
rated by a fossa inwardly. 
Metaconid small, low; inferior premolars 2-3 not overlapping ; 
ramus, lower border rising posteriorly ; entoconid low; 
M. orthostichus Cope. 


% Proceeeds. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1895, p. 447. 
* North American Fauna, No. 4. 1890, p. 5. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 387 


Ill. M. + without metaconule, but with a broad posterior 
ledge ; paraconule V-shaped. 
Metaconid small; premolars not overlapping; ramus not rising 


posteriorly ; smaller ; M. putorius L. 
Metaconid large; premolars not overlapping ; ramus rising poste- 
riorly ; smaller; entoconid elevated : larger ; M. mephitiea L. 


The characters above assigned to the species of Mephitis are es- 
tablished by numerous specimens. ‘There are twenty-eight individ- 
uals represented by jaws and teeth in the Port Kennedy collection. 
Of them I can only determine fifteen. My own collection and that 
of the Academy of Natural Sciences include a number of skulls 
of M. mephitica, while the collection of Mr. 8. N. Rhoads includes 
as many more, which he has kindly placed at my disposal. For 
my knowledge of the cranial dentition of M/. putorius series I am 
also indebted to’ Mr. Rhoads, and to the monograph by Dr. Mer- 
riam above cited. 

A species of this genus was found by me in a cave breccia in 
Wythe County, Virginia, and a left mandible ramus with complete 
dentition was obtained. I described it under the name Galera per- 
dicida” Dr. Coues has suggested that this species was founded on 
a specimen of Mephitis putorius, and on a reéxamination of the 
specimen I am inclined to believe that he is correct. 

Mephitis fossidens® is represented by parts of the jaws with teeth 
of eight individuals. In only one of these do superior and inferior 
molars occur together, and this one is, therefore, regarded as the 
type. The species is of the same size as M. mephitica, and was 
supposed at first to be identical with that animal, until further study 
revealed several important differences. 

The peculiarities of the dentition have been already pointed out 
in the synopsis of species. These are found in the relations of the 
paraconule and metaconule of the M. +, in the small metaconid of 
the inferior sectorial, and in the overlapping of the premolars. 
The character of the M. + is seen in three specimens; of the ante- 
rior premolars in one, and of the inferior sectorial in six. The an- 
terior portions of the mandibular rami are often injured, and the 
canine teeth are preserved in only two specimens, and the incisors 
in none. 


> Proceeds. Amer. Philos. Soc., 1869, p. 177, Pl. III, fig. 1. 
6 Fur Bearing Animals, 1877, p. 2). 


388 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


The inferior molars resemble those of M. mephitica but differ 
in the following points: The metaconid is much smaller, resem- 
bling that of M. putorius. The entoconid is small and low. The 
Pm. 1 has a flat face, presenting backward and inward and is 
bounded by a ridge on the external side. This face is rounded in 
M. mephitica. The overlapping of the Pm. 2 and 3 does not oc- 
cur in the latter. The inferior border of the ramus rises gently 
from below the posterior part of the M. 7. The angle is prominent 
and the condyle occupies a position inferior to that seen in Mephitis 
mephitica and M. putorius, in the two jaws in which this part is pre- 
served. It does not rise above the level of the molars as it does in 
M. mephitica. 

The M. + is the most characteristic part of the dentition. The 
crown is traversed by two parallel anteroposterior crests; the ex- 
ternal consisting of the paracone and metacone, and the internal of 
the paraconule and metaconule. The posterior border is deeply 
notched between the two, and the anterior border lessso. The pro- 
tocone is represented by a cingulum which occupies the anterior 
half of the interior base of the crown, enclosing a fossa with the 
paraconule. Its border then rises vertically to the inner longitu- 
dinal crest which it joins about the middle. Just exterior to this 
crest is a small tubercle which may represent a metaconule. An 
external cingulum except at the base of the metacone. No ante- 
rior or posterior cingula. 

In the existing species of Mephitis the protocone is continued 
into a wide ledge round the posterior side of the crown as far as the 
base of the metacone. The paraconule is V-shaped and does not 
reach the posterior part of the crown. 


Measurements. m.m. 
: anteroposterior (greatest) ; 8 
Diameters ofiiiyd 4 Surenopesveuon \Baeateet S. 
{ transverse ; 5 
Length of inferior sectorial ; 11 
Depth of mandibular ramus at 79; 6 


No. 2 (with angle of mandible). 
Length of M. ;; 1 
Length from M. ; to condyle; 2 
Length from M. ; to angle; 2 
Depth of ramus at M. ;; 


ae 


td i ee ee ae 


a ee < 


P 


¢ 
@ 
¢ 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 389 


No. 3 (with canine). m.™M. 
Length of dental series ; 31 
Length of true molars and Pm. 1; 21 
Length of M. =; 11.5 
Depth of ramus at M. ;; 8 


This species represents a section of the genus distinct from ©. 
mephitica, with which it is connected by M. orthostichus Cope. 
Mephitis orthostichus sp. nov. 


This species is represented by superior first molars of five individ- 
uals and mandibular rami of two others. Unfortunately in no case 
are inferior and superior dentition of the same individual preserved 
together. In one individual both rami are preserved. 

This species is intermediate in size between M. mephitica and M. 
putorius, and resembles the latter species in the small metaconid. 
It resembles M. mephitica in the rising inferior outline of the man- 
dibular ramus, and differs widely from both species in the character 
of the superior M. 4 

The superior M. + instead of presenting two parallel longitudinal 
erests, has a slightly curved crest representing the paraconule, 
which reaches a trihedral cusp, the metaconule. Thus is produced 
an internal longitudinal crest which presents a convexity anteriorly 
and an angle posteriorly, and an entrant angle between the two. 
The protocone is a mere cingulum which rises to the apex of the 
metaconule, and extends no further, so that there is no posterior 
ledge as in the existing species. While the internal crest is quite 
different in its zig-zag character from that of Jf. fossidens, the species 
further differs from the latter in the inferior premolars which do not 
overlap, and in the inferior size. The posterior border of the M. 4 
is not so deeply notched asin M. fossidens. 

The inferior dentition does not differ from that of M. mephitica 
except in the small metaconid and entoconid, and the flatter pos- 
terointernal face of the Pm. 1, in which it resembles M. fossidens. 
The third premolar is in contact with the canine, and has two roots 
which do not overlap those of the second. The crown is longer 
than either and has a heel with a recurved rim. The third has the 
same, while the fourth is a narrow heel, with a recurved rim all 
around it. In no specimen is the angle of the mandible preserved. 

Measurements. m. Mm. 
No. 1; superior M 4 


! anteroposterior ; 


, 8 
Diameters. 2 
transverse (greatest) ; 8 


390 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


No. 2; both mandibular rami. m. mM. 
Length of premolar series ; 11 
Length of molar series ; 13.5 
: anteroposterior ; 
Diameters M. + | eee of heel. a 
4 anteroposterior ; : 
Diameters M. 5 | se Bek ry: 
Depth of ramus at Pm. 1 ; 9 
Depth of ramus at Pm. 2 ; 10 
No. 3; smallest ramus. 
Length of last three molars ; TZ: 
Length of M. z; 9.5 
Depth of ramus at Pm. 1; 6 
Depth of ramus at M. 2; 8 


In two last superior molars the short angle connecting the 
metaconule with the paraconular crest is rudimental or wanting, so 
that the arrangement only differs from that of M. fossidens in the 
greater separation of the metaconule from the crest. Such teeth 
are nearly transitional between the two species, but they maintain 
the inferior size of M. orthostichus. ‘The two types of molars 
might be regarded as representing male and female, but for the 
difference in the relations of the inferior premolars, as pointed out 
in the analytical table of species. 

Pelycictis lobulatus, gen. et sp. noy. 

Char. gen.—Dental formula Pm. 3, M. 3. Sectorial with basin- 
shaped heel, and without metaconid. Premolars without posterior 
lobe. 

The genus Pelycictis is only known from the mandible. The 
dentition agrees in number of teeth with both Mephitis and Puto- 
rius. From the former it differs in the absence of metaconid, and 
from the latter in the basin-shaped heel of the sectorial molar. 
From Gulo it differs in the presence of but three premolars. But 
one species is known, P. lobulatus Cope, represented by an entire 
left mandibular ramus containing all the teeth excepting the third 
premolar and the incisors. 

Char. specif—This weasel is larger than any of the existing 
species of Putorius of North America, but equals P. vittatus of 
Brazil. In some respects the parts preserved resemble the corre- 
sponding ones of Mephitis orthostichus, but the differences are also 
conspicuous. The ramus is rather robust, and the symphysis is 
short. The inferior border is regularly convex, ard rises to the 


———— 


eS re, 


Se ee eel OO 


en 


>. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 391 


angle, latter projects as far posteriorly as the condyle. The condyle 
is rather elevated, its inferior border being in the horizontal line of 
the apices of the cusps of the sectorial. The coronoid process pre- 
serves its anteroposterior width to near the apex, which is broadly 
rounded, and not contracted, as in Lutra species. There isa longi- 
tudinal keel on the inner side of the angle, distinct from the inferior 
margin. 

The teeth form a continuous series, the anterior premolars not 
overlapping. The canine is rather small; the crown is somewhat 
compressed, and is not grooved or facetted, but is smooth. The 
second premolar has the heel produced backward. In the first pre- 
molar the heel is a cingulum, and is not produced. The metaconid 
of the sectorial is represented by a convexity of the internal edge of 
the protocone. Heel concave, with an elevated border on the 
internal edge only. This consists of a larger lobe or entoconid, and 
a smaller between it and the lobe representing the metaconid. 
Entoconid not elevated, resembling that of the extinct species of 
Mephitis already described. No cingula. The tubercular molar 
has a semicircular concave grinding surface, and no cingulum. 


Measurements. m. M. 
Length of ramus from canine to condyle inclusive ; 42 
Depth of ramus at Pm. 3; i 
Depth of ramus at M. 5 8 

Depth at condyle; 7.5 
Depth at coronoid process ; 22 
Length of dental series ; 25 
Length of true molars ; 12 

Diameters of base of crown of canine ; aD 
Elevation of crown of canine ; 4 

elevation ; oo 

Diameters of crown of sectorial | sterooreri : 8.5 

width of heel. 3.5 


The jaw described is about the size of that of the common skunk. 
Lutra rhoadsii sp. nov. 

Portions of both mandibular rami with the right superior tuber- 
cular molar represent this otter. The right ramus supports part of 
one of the premolars, a large part of the sectorial, and the tubercular. 
The left ramus supports the tubercular. In the right ramus the 
alveoli of the premolars and part of that of the canine are preserved. 
All belong to one individual, aud were found in place in the 
matrix. 


392 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


This species differs from Lutra canadensis in two conspicuous 
points ; first, the inferior border of the mandible is a nearly straight 
line to the angle; second, the third premolar is nearly transverse to 
the long axis of the jaw in position, in consequence of the much 
shorter mandibular symphysis. 

The coronoid process is at right angles to the horizontal ramus 
and its anterior and posterior borders are straight and of equal in- 
clination to the obtuse apex ; the posterior border is convex in L. 
canadensis. The angle is opposite the base of the sectorial; in 
L. canadensis, it is opposite the apices of the cusps of the sectorial. 
The anterior border of the masseteric fossa is below the middle of 
the tubercular molar. The inner side of the ramus is flat and not 
grooved, except immediately above the angle. The mental foramina 
are below the middle of the first, and the anterior root of the second 
premolars. 

Both the internal and external borders of the inferior tubercular 
molar are elevated, the former as a low cusp. The crown is hori- 
zontal in position and is not tipped forward as in L. canadensis. 
An external basal cingulum on both this tooth and the sectorial. 
In the latter the metaconid is well developed ; the protoconid and 
paraconid are broken away. The basin of the heel has the form of 
of that of Z. canadensis, and the external cutting edge is notched 
in front. The first premolar is longitudinal in position, but the 
anterior root of the second premolar is interior to the middle line. 
The internal root of the third premolar is near the middle of the 
superior face of the ramus, but the interior root is anterior to the 
internal border of the anterior root of the second premolar. Both 
are close to the canine alveolus. The crown of a premolar was dis- 
placed and adherent in the alveolus of the root of the paraconid of 
the sectorial. The crown probably belongs to the second premolar. 
It has no lobe on its posterior edge, and is expanded posteriorly at 
the base. The superior tubercular has lost its paracone and meta- 
cone. The interior part of the crown is a broad table with the 
protocone as an obtuse cusp on the interno-anterior border, with a 
cingulum at its base. This part of the tooth is much like that of 
L. canadensis, but is not so convex posteriorly. 

Uncia mercerii Cope. Proceeds. Academy Nat. Sciences Phila., 1895, p, 445. 

Crocuta inexpectata Cope, 1. ¢., p. 449. 

Additional material of this large feline confirms its distinctness. 
The sectorial tooth referred to the genus Crocuta as above cited, 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 393 


with reservation that it might be found to pertain to a feline animal, 
must be referred here. The superior sectorial is peculiar in the 
small indication of protocone as in the Smilodons. 


DIPLARTHRA. 


Cariacus levicornis sp. nov. 

A series of superior molars of the right side lacking the last one, 
represents this species. There were obtained at about the same 
time the basal parts of the antlers of two deer of the same size, 
which I suspect to belong to this species. There are various bones 
of the skeleton of probably the same. 

The true molars have internal basal columns,and the internal 
crescents send backward and outward processes into the lakes, as 
in the existing North American species of the genus. The molars 
are of the size of those of C. virginianus, but the premolars are 
smaller. The first and second are especially reduced in anteropos- 
terior diameter, and while the third is larger than these, its form is 
different from that of the corresponding tooth in any species of this 
genus or of Coassus. The anteroposterior diameter of the crown 
does not exceed the transverse, and there is no ridge of the external 
face such as is present in all the Cervi, but only a slight convexity. 
This ridge is present, but indistinct in the other premolars. It is very 
strong on the paracone of the true molars, but weak on the meta- 
cone. The horns of all the crescents are well developed. The width 
of the base of the crowns of the true molars is greater anteriorly 
than posteriorly. There are no processes entering the lakes of the 
premolars such as are usual in the species of Cariacus. 


Measurements. m. Mm. 
Diameters of Pm. 1 eae ae 5 
Diameters of M. 1 | haar te 
Diameters of M. 2 eee ie 


The fragments of horns both include the bur. This is not very 
prominent, and the beam is quite smooth. There are indications of 
tines, but they are broken off at the bases. In the shorter fragment 
a tine is given off on the internal side, but it is broken off near the 
base, and the beam beyond its base is also lost. In the second frag- 
ment the position corresponding to the internal tine is split away 

26 


394 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Above it the beam is somewhat compressed anteroposteriorly, and 
sends off a smaller tine directly anteriorly. ‘The beam in both is 
entirely smooth. 


Measurements. m.m. 
Diameters of beam No. 1 at base | eee eee 18 
transverse ; 16 
Elevation to internal tine; 13.5 
Anteroposterior diameter of beam No. 2 at base; 17.5 
Anteroposterior diameter of beam No. 2 at superior 
base of anterior tine; 15.5 
Transverse diameter of anterior tine ; 14 
Elevation of anterior tine above base; 27 


The smoothness of the beam of the horns distinguishes this species 
from the existing species of Cariacus of both North and South 
America, and resembles the condition seen in the species of Coassus, 
where the horns are unbranched. ‘The inferior tine originates 
nearer the bur than in the known species of Cariacus, while the 
anterior tine is present only in species (C. campestris) where the 
interior tine is absent. The longer beam preserved shows no tend- 
ency to an anterior curvature such as is present in most of the 
species of the genus. 

The true molar teeth of this species are of about the same size as 
those of the Virginia deer. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 395 


INSULAR LANDSHELL FAUNAS, ESPECIALLY AS ILLUSTRATED BY THE 
DATA OBTAINED BY DR. G. BAUR IN THE GALAPAGOS ISLANDS. 


BY WILLIAM HEALEY DALL. 
INTRODUCTORY, 


The Galapagos Islands, lying under the equator about 90° west 
of Greenwich, comprise two principal groups separated by nearly 
1,200 fathoms of water. One of these groups, northwest of the other, 
contains only Culpepper (550 ft.) and Wenman (830 ft. elevation) 
Islands and a few insignificant rocks. Culpepper, owing to its 
small elevation, is nearly barren, while Wenman shows on its upper 
surface a thin coating of grass and other vegetation. From neither 
of these has any collection been made or is any land shell known. 

_ The main group of the Galapagos rests on an elevation of the sea 
bottom included within the 1,000 fathom line. It may be provision- 
ally divided into three groups, a southeastern, a central and anorth- 
eastern, in all about a dozen islands and some smaller islets and 
rocks. 

The southeastern group comprises Charles, Chatham, Hood and 
Barrington Islands. Hood is destitute of water in the dry season 
and green only in the wet season, owing to its small elevation which 
does not bring it into the region of condensing clouds. Much of 
the surface is covered with blocks of lava. Chatham and Charles 
are among the most fertile islands of the group. 

The central islands include the largest of the whole, Albemarle, 
which appears to consist of several primitive islands united by low 
areas of volcanic material; Narborough, which exhibited volcanic 
activity as lately as 1836; James; Indefatigable, and the much 
smaller Duncan Island, besides a number of islets. 

The northeastern group comprises three comparatively small 
islands Abingdon, Bindloe and Tower. 

The floral characteristics of the Galapagos have been mentioned 
by Darwin, fully discussed by Hooker and well described by Wolf, 
while Tanner, Baur and Agassiz have added the facts gathered by 
later explorations. I shall, therefore, merely briefly summarize the 
characteristics which these writers have noted. 


396 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


The vegetation of the islands appears to be divided into three 
distinguishable zones. Near the sea-level the basaltic or tufaceous 
voleanic rocks of which the islands are exclusively composed, appear 
almost devoid of plants, especially in the dry season, except dry 
grayish-white, apparently dead brushwood which grows thickly be- 
tween the blocks of ash and lava, and which on close inspection 
exhibits inconspicuous small leaves and flowers. The most common 
according to Wolf' and Agassiz’ are a Verbena bush and an 
Acacia, with an occasional tree known as the Palo Santo. Near the 
beaches are a few species of salt loving plants, probably all identi- 
cal, with forms also known from similar localities on the mainland. 
Cacti, Opuntia and Cereus, are found among the blocks of lava, 
where nothing else grows. This zone extends to a height of 800- 
1,000 feet, the rains in general being limited even during the rainy 
season (February or later, to July) to the higher levels above 500- 
600 feet. The change to the second zone is sometimes very abrupt, 
but on the leeward side of the islands the arid region extends higher 
than on the southern side from which the moisture-bearing winds 
come. - 

The second zone is green and wooded, the Acacia and Palo Santo 
increase in size, the Verbena disappears, and the region shows num- 
erous open grassy spaces. The volcanic rocks, under the influence 
of moisture, have become decomposed into a soft reddish earth. 

The last and highest region is bare of trees, having the aspect of 
an undulating plateau covered with a rather coarse grass, which ex- 
tends to the highest summits of many of the islands. Here even in 
the dry season, there is a more or less constant deposition of moist- 
ure from the mists which sweep over the islands. However, both 
above and below, on several of the islands, extremely barren local- 
ities or areas occur of strangely desolate aspect ; in some instances 
the arboreal vegetation of the second zone is supplemented at the 
sea-level by thickets of mangroves or other shrubby trees, so that 
there is, among the island floras, no absolute rule without an excep- 
tion or two. 

The sea currents about the islands and between them and the 
mainland are very complicated. Ina general way it may be said 
that two currents converge upon the islands, one from an east-north- 


1 Kin Besuch der Galapagos Inseln mit drei Kartchen, 1870. 
2 General sketch of the expedition of the Albatross, Feb.-May, 1891; Bull. 
M. C. Zool., XXIII, No. 1, 1892. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 397 


easterly direction from the Gulf of Panama, and another from a 
southeasterly direction from the Peruvian coast. Both are strong 
currents, both have doubtless contributed their aid in populating 
the Galapagos, but in this the Panama current seems to have pre- 
dominated, not only because it has a shorter traverse, but because 
around the Gulf of Panama and on the banks of the rivers falling 
into it, a luxuriant fauna and flora are found close to the sea, while 
along the Peruvian coast only in time of freshet could any large 
quantity of débris be expected to reach the waters of the current, 
owing to the aridity of the immediate shores. The two currents join 
forces at some distance eastward from the islands, and pour through 
the passages between them with considerable force. Professor Alex- 
ander Agassiz has shown how much terrigenous material the Panama 
current bears, and that there is no reason to doubt that trees still 
bearing leaves and with some of their branches above water might 
be carried from the Gulf and cast upon the islands, and that, at least 
during the rainy season and in favorable years, there would be op- 
portunities for animals so carried, especially land shells glued by the 
epiphragm to the bark of branches, to gain vegetation on the shores 
where they could support life and propagate their kind. Though 
unproven, yet there can be little doubt that in this way the Jand 
mollusk fauna of the islands was introduced and preserved.’ 

The first explorer of the Galapagos Islands for land shells was 
Hugh Cuming, about 1850, who collected Bulimulus nux Brod., B. 
ustulatus Sby., and B. wnifasciatus Sby., on Charles Island ; B. rugi- 
ferus Rve., B. calvus Sby., and B. jacobi Sby., on James Island; 
while from his collection at a later time were described B. eschari- 
ferus Sby., B. rugulosus Sby., B. verrucosus Pfr., B. nucula Pfr., and 
B. galapaganus Pfr., without definite reference to a particular 
island. Assuming that the last three mentioned were collected by 
Cuming and not obtained from later collectors, this comprises eleven 
species. 

The next collection was made by Darwin in 1835, who obtained 
Bulimulus Darwini Pfr., B. sculpturatus Pfr., a Helix (not named 
or subsequently reported for over half a century but, perhaps, 
Trochomorpha Bauri) and thirteen other species not specified at the 
time, as well as a “ Paludina” (probably an Ammnicola) which has 


3 Attention has already been called to these facts by Dr. Stearns, but in or- 
der to make the present discussion complete I have been obliged to restate 
them briefly here. 


398 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


never been described or found since. Reeve mentions that Darwin 
collected Bulimulus rugulosus on Chatham Island, but this is the 
only species of Darwin’s which I have been able to find in print 
referred to any particular island. Darwin says in his journal 
(Chapter XVII), “Of land shells I collected sixteen kinds (and 
two marked varieties) of which, with the exception of one Helix 
found at Tahiti, all are peculiar to this archipelago. A single fresh 
water shell (Paludina) is common to Tahiti and Van Diemen’s 
Land.” With the much closer drawn specific lines of the present 
day, it is probable that both the “ Helix” and “ Paludina” would 
be discriminated as distinct from their allies mentioned by Darwin. 
A part at least of Darwin’s Galapagos shells went into the Cuming- 
ian collection, but I have been unable to discover any trace of the 
remainder, which were probably scattered. 

The next recorded expedition to touch at the islands and bring 
back land shells, was that of Kellett and Wood in 1846. The col- 
lection was worked up by Professor Edward Forbes, who reports 
seven species from Chatham Island, namely, Bulimulus nua, calvus, 
eschariferus, unifasciatus, and rugulosus already known, and B. 
chemnitzioides and achatellinus Fbs., which he described as new. 

Subsequently whalers and sealers frequently touched at the islands 
either for water or other necessaries, and a certain number of land 
shells reached Europe from the Galapagos Islands without positive 
data in regard to their origin, and have been described by various 
authors. Of these Bulimulus asperatus Albers, B. incrassatus Pfr., 
B. nuciformis Petit, B. amastroides Ancey, and several varieties of 
rugulosus and eschariferus may be mentioned. 

In later years collections have been made by Dr. Simon Habel in 
1868, who added one new species (Bulimulus Habeli Stearns) to the 
fauna of Chatham Island and collected B. chemnitzioides at Chatham, 
B. Darwini at Bindloe and B. achatellinus at Hood Island. He 
also collected Auricula stagnalis Petit, and Pedipes angulatus C. B. 
Adams at Bindloe ; Melampus trilineatus C. B. Adams, Tralia pan- 
amensis C. B. Adams, at Hood; Williamia peltoides Dall and Onchi- 
della Steindachneri Semper, all new to the fauna. 

In 1872 the U.S.S. Hassler with the Agassiz party on board, 
spent ten days among the islands, but no list of the species collected 
has been published. 

In 1875 Dr. Theodor Wolf, geologist of Ecuador, visited the 
islands and collected a few land shells subsequently described by P. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 399 


Reibisch in 1892, as will be more particularly discussed later. Dr. 
Wolf obtained the following species, mostly represented by a small 
number of individuals, and too often in an imperfect state of preser- 
vation. From Charles Island, B. wnifasciatus, nucula, asperatus, 
nuxz, nuciformis, ustulatus and calvus, known forms, and B. invalidus, 
venustus, cinereus and nudus, described by Reibisch as new. From 
Chatham Island, among known species, Wolf found B. inerassatus, 
rugulosus, achatellinus, chemnitzioides, Succinea Bettii, and the fol- 
lowing supposed to be new: B. terebra, ventrosus var., acutus, curtus, 
lima, canaliferus, Leptinaria cymatoferus, Helicina Wolfi and Sucei- 
nea Wolfi, described by Reibisch. From Albemarle Island, B. pa/- 
lidus, Simrothi and Pupa munita, all regarded as new by Reibisch ; 
Indefatigable Island supplied the new B. Wolfi and Pupa clausa 
Reibisch ; and Barrington Island B. ventrosus Reibisch. These spe- 
cies will submit to some additions from data furnished by letter 
through the politeness of Herr Reibisch, who has also sent me for 
examination a number of his types. 

H. M.S. Peterel, Commodore Cookson, visited Charles Island in 
1875, obtaining B. nux in numerous varieties, B. unifasciatus, 
eschariferus and the Succinea described by E. A. Smith as S. Betti 
and var. brevior, in honor of Staff-Surgeon Bett, who collected the 
specimens. 

In 1888, the U.S. S. Albatross, Captain Tanner, of the U.S. Fish 
Commission, during her voyage from Norfolk, Virginia, to San 
Francisco, California, spent a short time in the Galapagos group, 
and obtained a good many specimens of a few species of land shells, 
which have been discussed by Dr. Stearns in the Proceedings of 
the U.S. National Museum for 1892. The collection from Chatham 
Island comprised Bulimulus nux, nuciformis, amastroides, chemnitzi- 
oides, Habeli, and Succinea Bettii; from Charles Island B. nux in 
numerous varieties, rugulosus, eschariferus, Siphonaria gigas, Onchi- 
della Steindachneri Semper, and the new O. Lesliei Stearns ; Albe- 
marle Island afforded B. nux and the two Onchidiumas, while at 
Hood Island Williamia peltoides was obtained. The Albatross again 
visited the Galapagos under the direction of Professor Alexander 
Agassiz in 1891, but no land shells appear to have been collected on 
this occasion. 

The most thorough and important exploration for land shells 
which has yet been made is that upon which this paper is essentially 
based, namely, the expedition of Dr. G. Baur in 1890, in which 


400 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


careful notes were made as to the occurrence of the different species, 
not only as to the particular island, but the altitude above the sea, 
the sort of vegetation, rock shelter, etc., where the species were col- 
lected. The results, tabulated by islands, of Dr. Baur’s labors are 
as follows: 

CHATHAM ISLAND. 


Bulimulus nux var. incrassatus, 1,600 feet on leaves. 
B. jacobi, typical form, 1,600 feet. 

achutellinus, 1,600 feet, under leaves. 
untfasciatus, 1,600 feet, under leaves. 

Baurt, n. s., 1,600 feet, under leaves. 

curtus, 1,600 feet, under leaves. 

nucula, 1,600 feet, under leaves. 

chemnitzioides, 1,600 feet, under leaves. 
eschariferus, near seashore under stones. 

Habeli, near seashore under stones. 

Conulus galapaganus, 1,600 feet, on leaves of plants. 
Vitrea chathamensis, 1,600 feet, on leaves of plants. 
Succinea producta, typical, 1,600 feet, on mossy rocks. 
Leptinaria chathamensis, 1,600-2,000 feet, on ferns. 
Helicina nesiotica, 1,600 feet, on leaves. 


Baobab aed 


CHARLES ISLAND. 


Bulimulus rugulosus.. B. galapaganus. 
B. planospira. Succinea brevior. 


SOUTH ALBEMARLE ISLAND. 


Bulimulus jacobi. Trochomorpha Bauri. 
B. Simrothi. Succinea Bettii and corbis. 
Pupa Wolfii. - Leptinaria chathamensis. 


DUNCAN ISLAND. 
Bulimulus olla. B. duncanus. 
BARRINGTON ISLAND. 
Bulimulus eschariferus var. ventrosus. B. olla. 
JAMES ISLAND. 
Bulimulus jacobi var. cinereus. Succinea Bettii, typical. 


INDEFATIGABLE ISLAND. 
Bulimulus olla. 


i 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 401 


The total, after suppressing a number of synonymous names, 
amounts to twenty-seven discriminable forms collected from seven 
out of the twelve principal islands by Dr. Baur. 

Dr. Baur’s results leave little room for doubt that a thorough ex- 
ploration of all the islands, and especially of Albemarle and Nar- 
borough, would add materially to the number of determinable forms 
and, therefore, that the time for finally discussing or speculating 
upon the distribution of the species among the several islands has 
not arrived. Albemarle, much the largest, should when explored 
yield a larger harvest than the much smaller Charles or Chatham 
Islands, which seem to have been better explored, because they have 
better anchorages for a vessel. Narborough, said to be very fertile, 
has not been explored at all for land shells; we have nothing at all 
from Abingdon or Tower, and only three species from Bindloe. 

Nearly all the land shells of the Galapagos are more or less arbo- 
real and pass much, if not the whole, of the dry season attached to 
branches of shrubs or trees by a deposit of tough dry mucus form- 
ing a hermetic seal to the aperture, as well as a means of fixation. 
So tough is this material, that, when dry, the bark or the shell will 
break easier than the epiphragm if one tries to dislodge a specimen. 
The mucus is poured out in such quantity as not only to close the 
aperture of the shell with a brownish parchment-like membrane, 
but to fill the minor irregularities of the surface upon which the 
aperture rests and to rise around the outer margin nearly a milli- 
meter above the edge of the shell. About a third or half a turn 
further inside the shell, the animal constructs a second epiphragm, 
behind which it rests in a torpid state until a change in the season 
leads to its awakening. Several specimens of Bulimulus planospira 
which had been gathered more than a year and kept in a corked 
vial, when they reached my hands, still contained the living animal 
in his self constructed refuge, and doubtless other species would have 
done the same if they had not been put in alcohol. Nearly all of 
Dr. Baur’s living Bulimuli were collected during the hibernating 
season as indicated by the remains of bark and epiphragm still ad- 
adhering to them. 

Of the species not known to construct an epiphragm there are 
only a few identified from the islands, three small forms of Helici- 
de,a Leptinaria and Helicina, besides the semi-amphibious salt- 
marsh loving Awriculide, ete. The Helicina has ashelly operculum 
with which it can hermetically seal its shell. Both it and the Hel- 


402 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


ices are forms which would be apt to hide in minute crevices of bark 
or holes in decaying timber. The Leptinaria lives on ferns, and its 
minute size renders it possible that it might be carried on dead 
leaves, etc., which an exceptionally high wind blowing for eight or 
ten hours might carry to theislands. Such winds are not unknown, 
especially in the tropics, and a single hurricane blowing in the 
right direction might introduce a large number of seeds, insects, 
fern spores and minute land shells, to say nothing of larger objects. 

It is obvious, therefore, that the derivation of the island flora and 
land shell fauna does not present us with serious difficulties. Its 
distinctively American type indicates the point of origin. Before 
discussing this branch of the subject further, it may be well to refer 
to the characteristics of the several islands, in order that the rela- 
tions of the fauna to the fertile area may be considered. 

The islands which lie most directly in the track of currents and 
winds are those of the southeastern group. Chatham is one of the 
best known and most fully explored in the whole group, and is nota- 
ble for the clean cut development of the three zones and the fertility 
of its upper portion. On Charles there is less vegetation on the 
lower levels but, according to Agassiz, the beach shows many plants 
common to Panama and Guayaquil. Hood is so much lower than 
the others (640 feet) as to be chiefly in the barren zone, covered 
with lava blocks destitute of water in the dry season, and partially 
green only in the rainy season. 

Of the Central group, Indefatigable is first in the track of the 
current, and much resembles Charles and Chatham with a vast tract 
of arable upland. Duncan is comparatively small with abrupt sides, 
and has no living water, though its upper part is somewhat verdant. 
The south and east parts of James Island seem partly sheltered by 
Charles and Indefatigable from the prevailing trade winds; at all 
events they are dryer and less fertile than the portion north of 
James Bay. Much of Albemarle Island is low and consequently 
barren, having a desolate burnt aspect. The highlands of the 
southern portion are covered with rich vegetation, and there are 
elevated green patches near the northern end. Although there is 
actually a larger area of vegetation on Albemarle than on either of 
the other islands, yet the fertile region is not as large in proportion 
to the total area as the size of the island on the chart would lead 
one to expect. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 403 


Narborough, from which no land shells have yet been collected, 
has a rich and abundant vegetation witha luxuriant growth of man- 
groves on the eastern shore. This island was the last to exhibit its 
volcanic activity, and the fauna may prove meagre, yet it can hardly 
be doubted that it will afford a certain number of species and pos- 
sibly some novelties. 

The islets of the northeastern group are small and comparatively 
barren. Tower and Bindloe are not high enough to profit much by 
the mists. Abingdon is higher, and with Bindloe shows a certain 
proportion of green. No land shells are known from Tower and 
Abingdon. From Bindloe only the following are yet reported : 

Bulimulus Darwini, Auricula stagnalis, Pedipes angulatus. 

From the central group come:—Bulimulus Wolf, B. duncanus,* 
B. calvus, B. jacobi, B. jacobi var. cinereus, B. olla, B. Tanneri, 
B. unifasciatus, B. Simrothi, B. n. sp., near to Habeli, B. rugiferus,* 
B. Reibischi, B. nesioticus, Trochomorpha Bauri,* Pupa clausa, 
Pupa Wolfii, Succinea Bettii, Succinea corbis, Leptinaria chatha- 
mensis, Leptinaria sp. larger than chathamensis, Helicina nesiotica. 

In all 21 forms, of which none is common to the northeastern 
group of islands; 14 are peculiar or not yet reported from either 
the northeastern or southeastern group of islands; one is of doubt- 
ful locality but provisionally placed here on account of its similar- 
ity to B. rugiferus; and the remaining six are common to the south- 
eastern group. Onchidium is not counted. 

In the southeastern group are found thirty-three forms (not count- 
ing Onchidium), of which the following are peculiar to, or not yet 
found outside of this group of islands :—Bulimulus nua, B. achatelli- 
nus, B. rugulosus, B. nudus, B. planospira, B. ustulatus, B. eschari- 
ferus and var. ventrosus, B. galapaganus, B. perspectivus, B. jacobi 
var. acutus, B. nucula, B. amastroides, B. curtus, B. Bauri, B. 
canaliferus, B. chemnitzioides, B. Habeli, Vitrea chathamensis, Conulus 
galapaganus, Succinea producta, S. brevior. 

To which may be added:—Melampus trilineatus, Tralia pana- 
mensis, Williamia peltoides, Siphonaria gigas. 

Omitting the Auriculide and Siphonariide, we have as supposed 
peculiar forms in each group of islands, twenty-one characteristic of 
the southeastern, fourteen from the central and one from the north- 
eastern group of islands, which agrees well with the hypothesis that 
the species originated with forms brought by winds and currents 
which impinge first on the southeastern group. | 


404 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


On the other hand, it is certain that the southeastern islands are 
much better known than either of the other groups and that the area 
and fertility of the central group are such that there is every reason 
to suppose many more forms remain to be discovered there, perhaps 
including some of those so far known only from the southeastern 
islands. Prudence strongly urges that we know too little of the 
mollusk fauna yet to intelligently discuss its inter-island distribution. 

Taking the forms enumerated in the table showing the distribu- 
tion of the species and omitting the Onchidium and species of Aurie- 
ulide and Siphonariide, all of which are denizens of the salt marshes 
or beaches, we have forty-six, of which fifteen are found on more 
than one island, five on more than two islands and three are 
found without material change on four islands; all of the latter are 
found in both the central and southeastern groups of islands. One 
of the species, and perhaps two, are probably common to the main- 
land of South America as well as the Galapagos, and all of them 
doubtless have been derived from the fauna of the Panamic and 
South American region. 

The following table will show the distribution of the various spe- 
cies among the several islands, as far as known, their presence being 
indicated by an initial letter in the column devoted to the island 
concerned. <A, stands for the Albatross expedition; B, for Dr. 
Baur; C, for Hugh Cuming; D, for Darwin; H, for Dr. Habel; 
K, for Kellett and Wood; P, for the Peterel, Captain Cookson ; and 
W, for Wolf as reported on by Reibisch, with some additions to his 
printed list. The names are given in the left hand column, the col- 
umns for the islands follow in the order of their distance from the 
source of supply, approximately ; the last column sums up the num- 
ber of specimens actually examined by the writer in preparing this 
paper. 

One or two species are noted as new, which Herr Reibisch has 
mentioned in his letters as now in his possession, in addition to 
which are several Pupas which he regards as new, but has not in- 
formed me to which islands they should be assigned. 

Habits and environment.— With the exception of Dr. Baur no one 
seems to have noted very particularly the exact location of the spe- 
cies collected, either with regard to altitude or situs. A few of 
Wolf’s species are so noted, but, as most of hisspecimens were dead, 
their value in such a discussion is impaired. Cuming noted the situs 
but neglected the altitude. The matter really needs the attention 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 405 


TABLE OF DISTRIBUTION OF GALAPAGOS LAND SHELLS. 


A, Albatross; B, Baur; C, Cuming; D, Darwin; H, Habel; K, Kellett ; P, Peterel; 
W, Wolf; collectors or authorities. 


Groups of the Islands. | a 

|| & 

Names of the forms. Southeastern. Central. N.E. | a 

|| & 

| So 

Chatham. | Charles. |Hood.| Bar. || Indf. | Dun.| Alb. | Jas. \Bindl.| 2. 

1] 

Bulimulus nux..........cs0 KABW | CPWA | 374 
Bulimulus seen Press KWB H 2 

. | 
Bulimulus Darwini.......... | ey —— 
Bulimulus Wolfi............... a 1 
Bulimulus duncanus........ B 6 

* * ! | { 

- Bulimulus rugulosus......... (a Diky© DAWB | 64 
Bulimulus var. nudus...... 1] Ww | pee 
Bulimulus planospira....... B | 71 
Bulimulus ustulatus......... Cc 14 
Bulimulus calvus ......... ... K CWA | Cc 2 
Bulimulus nucula ............ B WwW 6 

x 
Bulimulus eschariferus. .... DK WAB P | 66 

- Bulimulus var. yentrosus.. Wes 4 
Bulimulus var. pileatus.... | A | 6 
Bulimulus galapaganus.... | B | | | 5 
Bulimulus PEE NEE eee WwW 2 

* * 1] | | | 
Bulimulus jacobi...... ........ | BW Cc | | iBW|c || 12 
Bulimulus var. cinereus... \| |\WAB) 4 
Bulimulus var, acutus...... WwW | | | 1 
Bulimulus olla Bees BA } 16 
Bulimulus Hehe sponcneee A 1| 4 
Bulimulus amastroides.. ... A || 25 
Bulimulus yar. curtus...... WAB | 34 
* | 
Bulimulus unifasciatus.. ... KB CP Xo i) 22 
Su | 
Bulimulus Simrotht Shee | | WB | 85 
* | | 
Bulimulus Bauri............++- | ee | | | 16 
Bulimulus canaliferus...... WwW 1 
23 ESE: > 
Bulimulus sculpturatus.... ? A = 
Bulimulus nesiotieus.. ...... Cc ii 4 
Bulimulus rugiferus,........ } | 10 
Bulimulus Reibischi......... He Ac 4) 1] 2 
aS) ED ESE: | | 
Bulimulus chemnitzioides. K H W AB | 68 
Bulimulus Habeli.... ........ HWAB | 10 
Balimulus Nn. sp....<......-..- WwW W — 
Trochomorpha? Bauri..... D? || B 1 
Vitrea chathamensis... B 1 
Conulus galapaganus.. B \| lunes 
EMA WOlfi er. .....cccecesne | WB] | 4 
BETIS, CLAUS... <s022---ceccersses Ww ies 
_ Succinea Bettii........ a WwW PA 7 TN Fea +f il 86 
Succinea brevior...... 2B } 21 
_ Succinea producta... aie WB | 15 
Succinea corbis................. B | 45 
Leptinaria chathamensis.. WB B 19 
HOD LINATIA SP.-------2.00peecs Ww | —- 
Helicina nesiotica............ WB W 55 
Auricula stagnalis...... oo H — 
Melampus trilineatus....... H = 
Tralia panamensis..........0 | H 12 
Pedipes angulatus............ H — 
Siphonaria gigas.............. A ite 6 
- Williamia peltoides........... H H H Hi 83 
- Onchidium Lesliei........-... A A ees 
- Onchidella Steindachneri.. AH A 7 
: | ——— | ———— | | ——_ | ——_ | ——_ | —— _ J | ——_ | | ——_— 
Number of forms, 54. 25 ial (ae Sy Re || 3 | ih 1 9 3 || 1188 


406 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


of a person sufficiently expert to recognize the species when col- 
lected, and to collect with judgment in all the zones. Dead speci- 
mens are so easily carried down hill by wind or temporary rills of 
water in the rainy season, or transported and dropped by birds in 
places which they did not originally inhabit, that no weight can be 
given to the place of their occurrence in such a discussion as this. 
In regard to some of the species, no information is available; some 
of the others have been collected in a dead condition from the dry 
zone below 800 feet, which are known to live in the wooded zone 
above, hence these may be eliminated from the local population of 
the dry zone. Making such eliminations, the known population of 
the dry, the wooded and the grassy upper plateau regions, respec- 
tively, are as follows: 


DRY ZONE. 
Bulimulus Wolfi. B. eschariferus and var. ventrosus. 
B. rugulosus. B. galapaganus. 
B. planospira. B. perspectivus. 
B. ustulatus. Pupa clausa. 
B. calvus. P. munita. 


WOODED ZONE. 


Bulimulus nux —_-B. curtus. Conulus galapaganus. 
and varieties. Bb. wnifasciatus. Suecinea Betti. 

B. achatellinus. B. Bauri. — S. brevior. 

B. jacebi. B. canaliferus. S. producta. 

B. acutus. B. chemnitzioides. Leptinaria chathamensis. 

B. nucula. B. Habeli. Helicina nesiotica. 

B. amastroides. Vitrea chathamensis. 


GRASSY ZONE. 
Bulimulus olla. B. Simrothi. 


It is not at all improbable that some of the species of the wooded 
zone extend downward into the dry or partially dry zone, and that 
the singular variations observed in some of the species may be due 
to the direct action of the differing conditions in which they, respec- 
tively, exist. Making allowance for this, the chief distinction which 
presents itself between the species of the dry zone and those of the 
wooded zone, is that the Bulimuli of the dry region show a tendency;— 
1. To a pupiform shape (such as might facilitate their entry into 
narrow crevices beneath the lava blocks) ; 2. To reddish-brown col- 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 407 


oration with rather conspicuous peripheral color bands (forming a 
combination not unlike the reddish streaked lavas and hence, possi- 
bly protective) ; and lastly 3. To a rugose, peculiar crenulation or 
wrinkling of the surface of those species not characteristically 
smooth. This last character which, for reasons which will presently 
be shown, is correlated with aridity or alkalinity of environment, 
may be regarded as having been impressed upon species which first 
gained a foothold in the arid region and as having persisted to some 
extent in their descendants when the latter succeeded in reaching 
the upper and more congenial zones of the islands. It is character- 
istically developed in the following species: Bulimulus Darwini, 
nesioticus and Wolf, Bulimulus sculpturatus, Bulimulus rugiferus, 
partially in Bulimulus Simrothi, and traces of it are perceptible in 
some specimens of Bulimulus Bauri. The external appearance is 
such as to suggest that the shell when soft, had been pecked at with 
a pointed object, leaving small irregular depressions scattered more 
or less closely over the surface. It never appears in the nuclear 
whorls, rarely in the earlier ones following the nucleus, and, when 
a sufficient number of specimens is examined, some will be found 
in each species which do not exhibit it. The latter often look very 
unlike the commoner form of the species, and, by those unacquainted 
with the relation between them and unsupplied with a sufficiently 
large series for study, might easily be regarded as specifically dis- 
tinct. 

The wrinkling or indenting of the surface is distinct from the 
longitudinal turgid plications, or narrow warty prominences seen in 
Bulimulus nux var. inerassatus, Bulimulus rugulosus and B. plano- 
spira ; nor is it the same as the granular sculpture found in the two 
last mentioned species, in some specimens of Bulimulus jacobi and 
in cinereus, B. Simrothi, rugiferus, and numerous Lower Californian 
and Peruvian arid region species, such as B. proteus and B. monte- 
zuma. This sculpture is more ancient in the history of the group, 
its elements may often be detected on the nuclear whorls and their 
subsequent development on later turns is often correlated with the 
presence of epidermal cirrhi or hairs, sometimes numerous enough 
to form veritable fringes. Something of this is visible in a perfectly 
preserved young B, Simrothi; in the full grown shell the delicate 
hairs have fallen or been lost through abrasion. Nevertheless, the 
extra development of this and the above mentioned plicate sculpture 
are generally associated in arid regions with the dryness, and in moist 


408 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


regions with the presence of some alkaline salt, which accentuates the 
action of those factors in the organism which are concerned in the 
formation of the minor irregularities of the shellsurface. The man- 
ner in which this is brought about is one of the prettiest illustrations 
of the direct action of the environment which I know, and seems to 
be sufficiently established by both geological and physiological evi- 
dence. 

In the arid region of the far west, especially in the desiccated lake 
basins of Utah, Nevada and California, it has long been observed by 
the writer, Dr. R. E. C. Stearns and others, that in the successive 
beds of fresh water marl, which the now dried up lakes deposited in 
Pliocene and Pleistocene times, the shells indicate a progressive 
change in surface characters as the alkalinity of the water increased, 
until at last the amount of alkali became so great that the mollusks 
were exterminated or found a precarious refuge in the fresh water 
streams which fell into the basins in question. The shells, without 
regard to genus or systematic relations, showed a unanimous ten- 
dency to become ridged, plicated or rugose; the regularity of the 
gastropod coil was interfered with, abnormalities became more com- 
mon, and, toward the last, almost general. Projecting sculpture, 
spiral threading, caring, riblets, etc., were exaggerated ; size gener- 
ally diminished, the height of the spire relatively to the diameter 
became less, and general degeneration curiously combined with ex- 
treme accentuation and irregularity of surface characters. Some- 
thing of the same sort is visible at the present time in the shells of 
fresh water gastropods in the irrigating ditches of farms in the 
alkaline arid region; those shells, in the ditches where the water 
has leached out alkaline matter from the soil, showing evidences of 
change in the same direction in surface sculpture, as I have person- 
ally observed in the Honey Lake Valley, Nevada. 

In Whitfield’s observations on the degeneration of Limnea mega- 
soma—kept for many generations in an aquarium where the water 
lost by evaporation was constantly replenished, the old residual sup- 
ply not being emptied, so that a concentration of the salts contained 
in the much greater bulk of the original water took place in the 
aquarium—somewhat analogous but less marked changes are re- 
corded, 

The dynamical origin of these changes may be explained by con- 
sidering the origin of the surface characters of the shell. The de- 
position of the shell substance and epidermis takes place from the 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 409 


surface and the edge of the mantle. The process is not absolutely 
continuous, but is carried on at more or less frequent intervals when 
the animal is in a state of rest. At times when deposition is going 
on, the margin of the mantle is in a more extended state than usual, 
reaching to a point where the extremely thin and delicate mem- 
brane is in contact with the extremest margin of the already formed 
shell. The glandular epithelium of the edge of the mantle secretes 
less lime than that of the surface behind it, and is chiefly responsi- 
ble for the periostracum of the shell, while the rest of the mantle 
has the task of secreting the more limy matter which makes up the 
bulk of the calcified shell. As the margin expands or contracts 
over the still viscous secretion, the ornamentation of the mantle 
edge, cilia, papillze, fringes, etc., everything which by its form or 
bulk varies the flatness of the filmy membrane itself, mechanically 
influences the form of the surface over which it passes, as the teeth 
of a rake leave shallow furrows over the gravel of a garden walk. 
Essentially in this way are the spiral striz, the revolving threads 
and similar ornamentation developed on the surface of a fresh water 
gastropod. The transverse sculpture, usually known as incremental 
lines, arises from the periodicity of secretion, while ribbing or spin- 
ose ornamentation originates in a periodic turgidity of the mantle 
(how induced normally is not known) which rhythmically affects 
that organ, and by its tidal rise and subsidence causes the shell 
secreted during such epochs to be more inflated or capacious than 
at the corresponding intervals. These features and modes of growth 
can be observed in an aquarium with the more common fresh water 
gastropods. 

It is a matter of common observation that alkaline salts, dust and 
dryness are very inimical to land and fresh water mollusks. Salts of 
chlorine and lime or soda will destroy slugs or snails subjected to 
their influence; the creature exudes a copious protective mucus up 
to a point when exhaustion results and death soon follows. The tis- 
sues under the action of such agents contract violently, shrivel, and 
finally die. Against hot pure dry air and dust the slug protects 
himself by burrowing and secreting a protective coccoon of limy 
mucus, which dries to a leathery substance preventing further evap- 
oration. The shell-bearing snail retreats into its house and closes 
the door with a succession of almost air-tight epiphragms of which 
the outer one, is often applied to a stone, a bit of bark, or the sur- 
face of a tree or shrub, either on the branches or leaves. The com- 


27 


410 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


tose condition which follows is only broken up by the presence of 
moisture in the air, which the prisoner perceives and takes advant- 
age of to return toactive life. The state of torpor may occasionally 
last for years, but is general among land shells during the dry sea- 
son in the tropics and during the winter of the colder zones. Most 
of the collections made at the Galapagosseem to have been made in 
the dry season. This was the case with Darwin’s work and all the 
Bulimuli collected in a living state by Dr. Baur retain the whole or 
portions of the epiphragm, showing that they were in retirement 
when taken from the trees. If the creature, by an early diminution 
of humidity, is forced into its state of hibernation before its normal 
period of growth is absolutely completed, it frequently happens that 
the portion of the shell about the aperture is irregular and bears 
indications of having been secreted under abnormal conditions. The 
incremental ruge in the vicinity of the margin will be exaggerated 
or crowded, the color of this part of the shell absent or different 
from the rest, the pillar irregularly tubereulose or keeled at the 
base; abnormal thickenings or tubercles may appear on the outer 
lip or on the parietal portion of the aperture, and the margin of the 
lip will take on an irregular form, presumably to adapt itself to the 
irregularities of the surface to which the creature is about to attach 
itself for hibernation. Reeve’s figure of Bulimulus Darwini shows 
a state of affairs such as I have described, so does the form figured 
under the name of B. Simrothi by Reibisch, and similar indications 
are afforded by specimens of B. nuz, B. rugulosus, B. tortuganus and 
B. Bauri. An understanding of these facts is necessary in order to 
avoid the use of these temporary and individual dynamic mutations 
as specific characters, an error several authors have not succeeded 
in escaping. 

To return to the modification of the surface of the shell by local 
conditions, the facts above cited enable us to understand how under 
normally favorable conditions the organism deposits the mucus mat- 
ter, which, by a process analogous to the crystallization of salts ina 
colloid medium, hardens into the shell substance, which then forms 
a compound of crystallized lime (aragonite) and conchioline (not 
chitine as stated by Osborn‘ and others). 

Now if we assume the attenuated film of secretive tissue constitu- 
ted by the margin of the mantle expanded, in order to divest itself 


‘Studies from the Biol. Laboratory, Johns Hopkins University, I, p. 4381, 
1883. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 411 


by the usual process, of the products of secretion, to be suddenly 
brought in contact with alkaline salts either as dust or in solution 
in the moisture about the animal, the result will be a sudden con- 
traction of the portion of the mantle affected, consequently the 
mucus deposit either will not be laid down evenly on the margin of 
the shell or its deposition may be for the moment retarded. In 
either case an irregularity will result. The mantle, turgescent with 
secretion, cannot indefinitely retain the secreted fluids, and, after a 
time, even if the alkaline irritant is still active, the mucus must be 
exuded. But if this is done by a film of tissue, more or less irregu- 
larly contracted, the deposition will be correspondingly irregular in 
its location. As the epidermis is first laid down, and the more cal- 
careous matter subsequently upon its elastic surface, it follows that 
an irregular surface of the epidermis will be reinforced by shelly 
matter and, as it were, petrified in its irregularity, which will be 
exhibited permanently in the external surface of the shell. Ifa 
minute process of the mantle edge would normally produce a spiral 
thread on the surface of the shell, and its regular deposition is inter- 
rupted by the alkalinity of dust, air or moisture about it, the tissue 
will be obliged to contract after a short period of expansion, and the 
spiral thread will consequently appear broken up into a series of 
granules. The more violent the induced contraction the greater will 
be the amount of undeposited mucus contained in the respective 
glandular cells, and which must be got rid of at the next period of 
expansion, and, consequently, the coarser will be the granules formed 
by its exudation at the next opportunity. The coil of the shell is 
determined partly by that portion already existing, against which 
the new deposit must be laid down, and partly by the form and mass 
of the body of the animal within the shell. The direction of the 
coil is a resultant of the reactions between these two factors, guided 
to a limited extent by gravity which pulls the shell, pendant from 
the extruded animal to one side or the other, while the animal is 
active. Yet as the deposition of shelly matter takes place chiefly, 
if not entirely, when the animal is contracted and at rest, mostly 
within the shell, it cannot be expected that the action of gravity 
should have much influence on the form of the shell. But, if the 
growth of the soft parts be accelerated so that they increase in length 
of coil disproportionately to the growth of the shell, the direction of 
the coil is correspondingly less dependent on the form of the existing 
whorls and more dependent on the posture assumed by the extruded 


412 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


soft parts, so that if the suggested growth be sudden, as if forming 
a climax during which maturity is rapidly assumed (a state of things 
readily induced by changes in the reproductive organs and the ripen- 
ing of their contents), a sudden change in the direction and form 
of the whorl may be induced dynamically. This is what I believe 
takes place in such forms as Holospira, Cylindrella and various 
Cyclostomatide. If we picture the animal on a twig, holding on by 
the foot and partially retracted, the spire heavy with contained ova 
and the animal at rest, pending secretion of shell matter, it is easy 
to imagine the manner in which the mature aperture may be built 
up on the margin of a perpendicularly pendant immature shell, 
without following the cycloidal curve of the earlier whorls. 

The influence of a very dry warm atmosphere on the expanded 
mantle will be analogous to that of alkaline matter, but likely to 
act with less irregularity. A particle of alkaline dust might affect 
a small part of the margin of the mantle and not the rest, while the 
air might be expected to act on the whole expanded margin. It is 
probable even then, however, that some portions of the edge might 
dry quicker than others and more or less irregularity would almost 
certainly result. Of course, if the margin of the mantle were to be- 
come actually desiccated, secretion would cease and could not go on 
again until the dry tissue had been cast off and replaced. But it is 
probable that the tissue is too sensitive for such an event to occur 
under ordinary conditions. It would probably operate so that when 
the animal felt the mantle becoming uncomfortably dry, it would 
simply retract, and temporarily cease secretion as in the presence of 
alkali. But enough has been said to indicate the mode by which 
drought and alkaline matter may act upon the growing mollusk and 
directly modify its secretions, and, by consequence, its hard parts. 
That this action takes place substantially as suggested I have little 
doubt, and that its results may be differentiated from those of nor- 
mal growth in continuously favorable conditions, I think will be 
shown to be probable. 

Let us consider the features presented by Bulimulus Simrothi and 
see how far they exemplify the processes above described. The de- 
position of ova may take place with the opening of the wet season. 
No data are available, but none of the specimens collected in the 
hibernating state by Dr. Baur, and of which the soft parts were ex- 
amined, contained any developed ova. It would be in accordance 
with what we know of species in other regions if the ova were rapidly 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 413 


developed and deposited in the early part of the wet season. The 
nuclear portion of the shell presents the features so characteristic of 
many continental Bulimuli in that the first whorlis angulated above 
and the vertex is consequently concave or even funicular. The sur- 
face of the nucleus is evenly, closely, transversely ribbed, with fine 
spiral strize perceptible between the ribs upon magnification. The 
sculpture of the nuclear whorl merges gradually into that of the 
succeeding whorls, the ribbing becoming finer until it is lost in the 
incremental sculpture. The spiral strize become stronger and prac- 
tically cover the whole shell. Four delicate, fine spiral threads are 
evenly spaced on the whorls between the periphery and the suture, 
somewhat broken by the rather regularly spaced incremental eleva- 
ted lines. Where the two intersect, the epidermis is raised in micro- 
scopic cilia only visible in finely preserved young specimens. In 
this condition there are four or five whorls besides the nucleus. 
They are of a reddish-brown with a pale olive-greenish narrow 
peripheral band. Up to this point, unless it be that the shell is 
slightly narrower, the species is indistinguishable from B. unifascia- 
tus. About this time, earlier in some later in others, the peculiar 
indented irregularities of the surface begin to appear; at first exag- 
gerated slightly irregular incremental lines, then irregular broken 
surface markings recalling rusted metal which has been cleaned but 
preserves the macule of oxidation. Finally the aperture shows a 
slightly reflected lip, a pillar thickened, keeled at the base, tubercu- 
lar with a single tubercle set anywhere along its length; the outer 
lip with one or two adjacent tubercles, the umbilicus from large and 
ample to very contracted, almost closed. 

The peripheral band persists in some cases; the warty prominen- 
ces are whiter than the shell normally would be, having a bleached 
aspect. I should read the developmental history of this species gen- 
erally as follows: The species sprang from a form not unlike B. 
Xantusii of Lower California, the superficially more similar Peru- 
vian B. rhodacme and pruinosus having a different nucleus. The 
ova hatching in the height of the rainy season grew normally, and, 
if the rainy season had been long enough, would have developed into 
shells with the color and sculpture of 6. wnifasciatus and the form 
of a small slender B. jacobi. Some of the specimens almost attain 
this ideal. Toward the end of the season either occasional hot spells 
or the influence of salts leached out of the decomposed lava soil by 
the rains began to effect the growing shells, some more and some less, 


414 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


and continued to do so until they completed their shells, or were 
forced, immature, to go into hibernation. Completing their shells 
under pressure and affected by the environment the thickening of 
the aperture was more or less irregularly deposited, and the excess 
of shell matter appears in the form of tubercles or lumps of callus 
disposed about the aperture. As might be expected, so far as we 
know the situs of the various species, these peculiar deformations 
occur chiefly among the species of the dry zone below or the grassy 
zone above, the conditions of the intermediate wooded zone are 
probably more uniform, or, perhaps, species living on the ground or 
on low herbage are more likely to be affected by alkaline efflores- 
cences than those which live at a greater height on trees and shrubs. 

If these views are correct, we should expect to find analogous 
effects produced on similar mollusks in similar situations throughout 
the world. They should be produced without reference to the line of 
descent of the species, that is, species of the European Buliminus or 
the African Achatina should in analogous situations exhibit practi- 
cally the same sort of deformation as has just been described in spe- 
cies of Bulimulus isolated on the Galapagos. Is this the case? 
Analogous situations are not very numerous. Wanted, an island 
habitat with volcanic rocks, a climate combining periodical dryness 
with occasional wet mists and a regular rainy season. In the 
Hawaiian Islands we have something of the sort, but, owing to their 
larger size, there isa much more continuous flow of water in streams, 
the climate is not so hot and the parallel is far from exact. The 
island of Fernando de Noronha has been said to have a remarkable 
resemblance to the Galapagos, and so did St. Helena before it was 
deforested. A glance at the fauna will be of interest. 

The island of Fernando de Noronha like the Galapagos is voleanie, 
with a soil formed by decomposition of the basalt, and is well sup- 
plied with vegetation and water. Smith says of the mollusk fauna’® 
“Of the land shells two are well known West Indian species, one 
has been recorded from Brazil, Peru and the island of Opara, and 
the remaining four, up to the present, appear to be peculiar to the 
island. One of these, however, Bulimus Ramagei suggests a faunis- 
tic similarity to Brazil, as the section of Bulimus to which it belongs 
( Tomigerus) with one exception occurs only in that country.” 

The species are as follows according to Smith : 

1. Helix (Polygyratia) quinquelirata Smith. 


5 Journ. Linn. Soe. Zool., Vol. XX, p. 484, 1890. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 415 


2. B. (Tomigerus?) Ramagei Smith. 

3. B. (Bulimulus) Ridleyi Smith. 

4, Pupa solitaria Smith. 

5. Stenogyra ( Opeas) octonoides C. B. Ads. 

6. S. (Opeas) subula Pfr. 

7. S. (Opeas) Beckiana Pfr. var. 

This fauna is of South American type. While there are some 
Australasian forms which recall Polygyratia in their shell charac- 
ters, their anatomy is still unknown. The nearest relatives of this 
species appear to be the continental H. pollodonta Orbigny, and such 
forms as H. endodonta of Ecuador. It is curious that the Helices 
of oceanic islands so frequently belong to groups which have the 
throat of the shell armed with spiral lamelle, and the fact will be 
considered later in connection with theSt. Helena fauna. None has 
yet been described from the Galapagos, yet one cannot help wonder- 
ing if the Helix not specifically named, found by Darwin, and sup- 
posed by Cuming and himself to be identical with a Tahitian spe- 
cies, might not have been of this type. It is obvious that the 
Noronha fauna is too small to admit of basing much upon its char- 
acters, but small as it is, they are quite suggestive. The second 
species is referred with some doubt to Tomigerus by Smith. It 
seems to the writer that the doubt is well founded, and that the 
curious species in question is hardly more different from B. Ridleyi 
than B. Darwini is from B. jacobi or Simrothi. 

Bulimulus Ridleyi is fuscous with a pale peripheral line. The 
incremental lines are cut by slender spiral strize and the shell is umbili 
eated. The aperture recalls that of B. Simrothi and in some respects 
that of the fossil Bulimuli of the Oligocene silex beds of Tampa, 
Florida. It is found on trees and under stones rather widely dis- 
tributed on the island. According to Smith “It resembles some- 
what in form certain species of Partula ; it faintly recalls, chiefly on 
account of color, Bulimulus jacobi from the Galapagos Islands.” It 
will be observed that all the forms with which it is compared are of 
insular habitat, Florida in Oligocene times having been an island, 
while in the Oligocene beds of the continent, of the same horizon as 
the silex beds, no Bulimuli have been found. 

Pupa solitaria Smith, is so similar to the variable P. Wolfii Mil- 
ler of Guayaquil (P. munita and P. clausa Reibisch of the Galapa- 
gos) that, bearing in mind the wide dispersion of these minute spe- 
cies, I strongly suspect a sufficient number of specimens would 


416 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


demonstrate their identity. The species of Stenogyra are obviously 
West Indian or continental and call for no special remark. 

The land shells of St. Helena have been described by Smith (P. 
Z. S., 1892, pp. 258-270), from collections by Captain W. H. Tur- 
ton R. E. The National Museum is indebted to Captain Turton for 
a nearly complete series of his St. Helena shells, including one 
or two species accidentally introduced since the settlement of the 
island. These have proved of great value for comparison, as the 
best figures fail to give the peculiarities of surface texture with 
which, in this discussion, we are largely concerned. Omitting syn- 
onyms, mere varieties and recently introduced species, the land shell 
fauna of St. Helena comprises four species of helicoid shells without 
lamellee, which have been referred to Patula but which may prove 
to be edentulous species of Endodonta, ten* species of Endodonta 
(section Helenoconcha Pilsbry) with more or less complicated oral 
lamellee ; Achatina (Pachyotus) awris-vulpina Dillw., and two or 
three related species ; Achatina ( Cleostyla) exulata and subtruneata ; 
Bulimulus (Pachnodus) helena and two related species ; a Tomigerus- 
like shell, Pupa (Campolemus) perexilis (Smith) Pilsbry, and two 
minute species of Pupa; and, lastly, three species of Succinea, in all 
twenty-nine species. Of these, by the gradual desiccation of the 
island, twenty-two are become extinct. 

The native forms found living comprise two species of Endo- 
donta, Pachyotus melanoides and P. Turtoni, and three species of 
Succinea. The mollusk fauna as a whole, is Oceanic, and shows no 
strong affinity with either America or West Africa, especially the 
former. The manner in which these mollusks reached the island is 
a mystery, the more so as it is said that the flora and insect fauna 
also show no special relationship with those of South America. 
Nevertheless, the contours of the sea bottom as well as certain feat- 
ures of the fauna indicate a previous more intimate relation between 
South America and Africa than has recently existed, and, whatever 
this bond may have been, it is not improbable that St. Helena par- 
ticipated in it. Any ordinary means of transport would seem to be 
insufficient to account for the presence of Pachyotus, of which even 
the eggs are six millimeters long. We are not obliged for present 
purposes to concern ourselves with this problem of origin. The in- 


§ H. Alexandri Forbes and polyodon Sby., are both represented in Captain 
Turton’s series and are distinct species ; a single specimen of a species appar- 
ently undescribed also occurred among those sent to the National Museum. 


pt 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 417 


timate structure of these animal as related to the conditions in 
which they live is the object of consideration. 

The Helices are of less importance in this discussion because we 
do not know what species may be found to inhabit the Galapagos on 
thorough search. But we may, in passing, note that the species 
have certain characteristics which are almost exclusively found in 
members of insular faunas, of which the most remarkable are the 
parallel spiral lamellze running inward from the aperture. They 
are obviously protective and their presence would suggest a peculiar 
enemy, entering the aperture to devour the inhabitant of the shell, 
as prevalent in island faunas. 

If we examine Pfeiffer’s list of species belonging to the section of 
Patula called Endodonta, to which these Helices were referred by 
him, we shall find that of those with basal lamelle all are insular 
species, the largest body of land to which any species is referred be- 
ing Tasmania. Of the eighteen forms with parietal lamelle all are 
insular on tropical islands from New Caledonia to Hawaii. Of 
those with both parietal and basa] Jamellee, omitting those described 
from St. Helena, the entire thirty-three species are insular and from 
mountainous tropical islands, most of which are known to be vol- 
canic. 

Of the other land shells the singular Pupa or Tomigerus perexilis 
appears to be a local development, but there are two ordinary 
Pupas one of which is very similar in its general features and type 
of lamellation to the Noronha and Galapagos species, a likeness 
already noted by Smith. The Succineas again, over and above the 
general similarity of the species everywhere, exhibit certain pecu- 
liarities which appear to be associated with an insular habitat. The 
Succinea brevior of the Galapagos can hardly be discriminated from 
S. helene from St. Helena. S. Bettii is parallel with S. picta, and 
S. Wolfi with Bensoniane. In endeavoring to find, in our large 
collection of domestic and foreign Succineas, some species with 
sculptured surface to compare with S. corbis, the only forms of the 
kind which the National Museum afforded were insular, from Samoa, 
Martinique, St. Helena, etc. Doubtless the peculiar vermicular or 
dichotomous impressed lines which these species show are due to 
causes similar to those already described which modify the surface 
sculpture in Bulimulus. Not all them show it, but those which do 
show it are, so far asI have yet observed, either insular or subjected 
to locally arid conditions. Those species in which this sort of sculpt- 
ure has become habitual are all insular and tropical. 


418 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF. [1896.. 


There remain only the Bulimoid forms; these being mostly fossil 
have received little attention in the usual works of reference. The 
well known Bulimus auris-vulpina of Dillwyn (sp.) was erected into 
a genus by Beck as early as 1857 under the name of Pachyotus.’ 
With it Beck associated a number of species of the type of Bulimus 
bilabiatus and melanostomus, which arrangement was followed by 


Pfeiffer and most subsequent writers. There are distinct points of 


resemblance, but these are probably dynamic rather than ontogen- 
etic. To the writer the relations of Pachyotus are directly with a 
certain number of its associates of St. Helena. 

The Bulimiform Helicacea of St. Helena may be divided into two 
groups :—one (Achatinoid) typified by the Pachyotus auris-vulpina 
and characterized by a closed or nearly closed umbilicus and a cork 
screw twisted axis, the other (Bulimuloid) by a straight axis and 
more or less open umbilicus. The last group comprises Bulimulus 
Blofieldi and Seleanus of Forbes and B. helena Quoy and Gaimard. 
The Pachyotus group’ comprises all the other species of the island. 


™The type was selected from among Beck’s species by Gray in 1847. In 
1848 Fischer de Waldheim named it Chilonopsis. 

5 According to Mr. H. A. Pilsbry, whose opinion on the subject is entitled 
to the greatest weight, the two principal groups are probably referable to the 
Achatinide (Pachyotus and Cleostyla) and the Bulimulide ( Pachnodus), The 
former would be nearest to /erideris, and the latter to Pachnodus as typified 
by P. velutinus. Asthe so-called 7omigerus of St. Helena is probably a mod- 
ified Pupa (Campolemus Pilsbry) analogous to Aoystdia and Hypselostoma, it 
would seem that the affinities of the St. Helena fauna are West African, Ori- 
ental or Oceanic, rather than South American, in spite of the presence in 
South America of the Achatinoid ‘‘ 8.’ coronatus and ‘“‘ B.” Hanieyi Pfr. 

®The teeth of the radula of ?. me/aniotdes are in nearly straight transverse 
rows, and the rhachidian teeth are narrow, with a single small cusp, as in 
typical Achatinide. The laterals are bicuspid. On the marginal teeth the outer 
cusp splits, forming two or three denticles on the inner, four or more on the 
uter teeth. The formula is 14.12.1.12.14. The arcuate jaw (distorted in my 
preparation) is very closely and finely striated, as in Zimicolaria. 


WK IM 


AL 


Teeth of Pachyotus melanioides, Jaw of P. melanioides, 


The main character of the dentition different from other genera of Acha- 
tinide is the multiple splitting of the outer cusp on the marginals, as in Cion- 
ella, Pupide, Vallonia, ete.—H. A. P. 


— 


a 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 419 


Those who are not accustomed to recognize the flexibility of organ- 
isms nor to discriminate ancestral from dynamic characters will, 
perhaps, be astonished at any arrangement which includes in one 
group species apparently so dissimilar as auris-vulpina and melant- 
oides, but I think a little unprejudiced study of the specimens, in 
connection with B. subplicatus, will convince any one of the likeli- 
hood of their genetic relationship. 

To treat the simplest and smallest group first, we may take the B. 
helena and its allies. This species was placed in the section Neesio- 
tus by Pfeiffer in 1856 (Mal. Blatt., IT, p. 161); and it is quite similar 
in several respects to some of the Galapagos species, but is probably 
derived from another shoot of the genus Bulimulus. The nucleus 
in this species, in B. Blofieldi and Seleanus, is swollen and almost 
smooth. It has no axial dimple and the surface seems not to have 
had any coarse sculpture. The species show the microscopic irreg- 
ularity of the incremental lines, the undue thickening of the shell 
and the broken lines of spirally disposed granulations which indicate 
the influence of an arid or alkaline habitat. Full grown specimens 
generally show the irregularities of the aperture characteristic of 
individuals which have been forced into long continued hibernation 


_ before the mantle had discharged all its surplus calcareous salts, or 


had, by reason of long continued aridity, to caulk the vicinity of the 
aperture with shelly matter in order not to be absolutely desiccated 
by evaporation. These characters are precisely those we find im- 
posed upon the Galapagos, Lower California and other arid region 
species. 

The Achatinoid group though possessing many dynamic charac- 
ters in common is probably derived from two sources. B. exulatus 
Benson and B. subtruncatus Smith have an imperforated twisted 
axis, a plump small nucleus followed by a few small and then sev- 
eral rapidly enlarging whorls, a flaring aperture angulated below 
and with a keel or angle on the edge of the pillar. They show less 
than any of the others the effects of aridity and have rather thin 
shells. They originally had translucent or brownish shells with a 
pale tracery of opaque white or yellowish. The aperture is regular 
and there is but little callous deposit. For this section the name 
Cleostyla may be used. Its resemblance to Pseudachatina seems to 
be slight and superficial. 

The second group, Pachyotus of Beck, with C. awris-vulpina as 
type, comprises also B. melanioides, B. subplicatus and probably B. 


420 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Turtoni, though the latter is less certain and may possibly belong to 
a third section. The typical Pachyotus has a dimpled nucleus, 
though it is not keeled like that of Nesiotus and the Lower Califor- 
nian and Peruvian Bulimuli. In its sculpture the transverse pre- 
dominates over the spiral. The surface of the shell is everywhere 
transversely wrinkled and toward the suture is more or less gathered 
into short rounded plaits, stronger in the younger whorls. The 
colors are dark, more or less translucent tesselated with paler opaque 
markings or streaks. The axis is minutely tubular and twisted, 
especially as the last whorl is being finished off, where at maturity 
a plait is more or less distinctly developed. 

The aperture has a simple, somewhat expanded, more or less thick- 
ened edge, which, in old specimens which have hibernated, may 
show heavy deposits of callus, which is always angulated or obscurely 
channelled at the base of the pillar. Specimens which have sur- 
vived hibernation have the usual irregularities about the margin. 
A careful inspection reveals no reasons for supposing that P. auris- 
vulpina might not have been the descendent of a form like P. 
melanioides. I have seen no completely adult specimens of the lat- 
ter or of B. Turtoni, but see no reason to suppose that the lip would 
not, under suitable conditions, be thickened in them as it is in ~ 
P. subplicatus. Perhaps at present P. melanioides inhabits a region 
where it does not now suffer from aridity, which would account for 
the difference in the deposit about the mouth. It is well known 
that great fluctuations have taken place in the rainfall on the island 
due to variations in the woods and forests, their destruction and 
partial restoration. However this may be; the living species of the 
group have but little callous deposit about the mouth ; P. subplicatus 
which evidently from the freshness of its colors, cannot have been 
long extinct, has a greater amount, and P. auris-vulpina in addition 
to the marginal thickening shows a parietal tubercle of callus often 
of large size, and the irregularities of form, size, and margin of the 
aperture are such as to indicate clearly degeneration leading to ex- 
tinction by increasing aridity of its habitat. 

Curiously enough, according to Mr. Smith, only one Helix, an 
introduction from other regions, has been found in Ascension Island ; 
the other known terrestrial mollusk is Limax ascensionis Quoy, 
which may well be an introduction also. The explanation of this 
difference between St. Helena and Ascension lies in the greater 
aridity of the latter. Though thorough search might reveal some 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 421 


extinct species, it is highly probable that this island was never 
wooded and has always been much dryer than St. Helena. 

It would carry us too far afield to undertake a discussion of the 
characteristics of the terrestrial mollusk fauna of those Pacific 
islands which by their elevated and volcanic character and geo- 
graphic situation might be comparable with those we have already 
reviewed. A comparison of other highland subtropical faunas where 
the situation is complicated by seasonal or general aridity, will 
throw much light on the principles involved. I have elsewhere 
examined the Lower Californian Bulimuli (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 
1893) a group which, like that of the highlands of Peru and Chili, 
offers an excellent field forstudy. But the absence of detailed knowl- 
edge of the situs affected by the several species is a great drawback 
to safe generalization. A species which spends its existence bur- 
rowing in the succulent fronds of cactuses can hardly be said to be 
subject to arid conditions, even if the cactus stands in a desert, and 
similar doubts and difficulties are encountered at every turn, when 
one would investigate a general question of this kind. On isolated 
islands like the Galapagos and St. Helena, the conditions are com- 
paratively simple, but on the continents it is different, and there the 
complexity of conditions is too great to allow us with safety to take 
much for granted. 

Fischer has pointed out that existing faunas are most nearly 
related to the antecedent tertiary faunas of the same region (Man. 
Conch., p. 118), the writer has shown that this is true for the Amer- 
ican and Antillean regions, and others have recognized the same 
truth in other parts of the world. In pursuance of the same idea, 
the writer believes that, in the majority of cases, a circumscribed 
local fauna of land shells will be found in the main to be most 
nearly related to geographically adjacent groups from which it has 
probably been derived ; that the conditions of the environment are 
capable of inducing directly and without the aid of natural or any 
other kind of selection, certain changes in the form and surface 
characters which, on the present basis of classification, are generally 
taken as of systematic value; that these characteristics may be so 
loosely worn as to disappear in the individual or in the whole group 
if the pressure of the environment inducing them be altered or re- 
moved; that in time, and especially if the characters be of useful 
nature, they may become fixed by hereditary, transmission or natural 
selection, or both combined; that similar factors in the environ- 


422 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


ment if not too intimately complicated with others, will produce in 
organisms of the same general nature similar results wherever situa- 
ted; and, lastly, that the resulting features strikingly similar 
though they may be, are, conversely, no evidence of ontogenetic 
relationship. In any census undertaken with a view to determin- 
ing systematic relationship, such characters must be eliminated in 
order to avoid an erroneous conclusion. 

It is only by close and minute study of the details of the situs of 
species and of their minor, though by no means unimportant, char- 
acters of form and surface, that we shall be able to recognize those 
features which may be classed as dynamic as opposed to those which 
even if dynamic also in their ultimate origin, have become geneti- 
eally constant. The noxious and stupefying multiplication of spe- 
cific names, which has been characteristic of a certain school of 
workers during the last twenty years, could never have gained scien- 
tific recognition had there been any general appreciation of the 
extent to which dynamic modifications affect all organisms. It is 
much easier to describe and name a character than it is to search 
out its reason for existence. It is even easier, with proper appara- 
tus, to count the cells in an organism of moderate size than it is to 
recognize and discriminate the influence of the environment upon 
the organic total of those cells. By inspecting the fragments of a 


building one may learn something of construction, but it is only by _ 


contemplating it as a whole that the higher elements of architecture 
can be recognized. 

Recognizing the imperfection and inadequacy of our knowledge, 
even of the limited groups discussed in this paper, the writer thinks 
that some glimmerings of light may be had on the subject of 
dynamic characters from the accompanying study of insular land 
shells. 

The following summary will express, tentatively, such of the con- 
clusions as appear justified from the study of the specimens 

A. Given a region of voleanic origin and mountainous character, 
with local or seasonal aridity, more or less arboreal vegetation as 
well as herbage and a tropical or nearly tropical climate, moderate 
isolation and safety to propagate and increase. 

B. Into this region let land shells of the principal continental 
types be introduced, and allowed the necessary time to become dis- 
persed over the region, multiply abundantly and respond to the 
environment. 


A 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 425 


C. What results in the shape of dynamic modifications may be 
anticipated ? 

AnswerR.—The first result of room to spread, safety and plenty of 
food, would be to release the species from the shackles of the en- 
vironment from which they had been transplanted and to promote 
general variability. 

(Ex. Wonderful variability of insular shell faunas, such as those 
of Madeira, Galapagos and St. Helena Islands). 

Secondly, the particular features likely to indicate local dynamic 
influence under the assumed conditions would be: 

On the surface: wrinkling, corrugation or shagreening. 

(Ex. The great majority of land shells in such situations, as the 
Helicide in Madeira, the Bulimuli in the Galapagos, Succinea in 
many islands, etc.). 

At the suture: plaiting or wrinkling more or less rhythmical. 

(Ex. B. achatellinus Forbes and B. nux Brod. of the Galapagos ; 
many Achatinella ; all the Pachyotis, etc.). 

At the vertex: loose coiling or dimpling of the nuclear coil. 

(Ex. Bulimuli of Lower California, Galapagos, Peru, St. Helena, 
-ete.). 

Of the axis: Exhibition of a tendency to irregularity, cork screw 
twisting, or outward (internal to the tube of the axis, but external 
to the tube of the shell) grooving in shells of elongated form, result- 
ing in a tendency to form an angle or keel at the anterior edge of 
the pillar within the aperture and an obscure channel at its extrem- 
ity. 

(Ex. All the Pachyotis, many of the Nesioti, Cleostyla, Pleuro- 
pyrgus, Achatinella, etc.). 

Of the aperture: Thickening of the margin in connection with 
hibernation, the formation of ill defined tubercles on the lips or par- 
ies, irregularity of the margin with respect to the plane of incre- 
ment, and a tendency to contraction at the full grown aperture dur- 
ing or after hibernation. 

(Ex. Pachyotus, many Nesioti, some Bulimuli of Lower Califor- 
nia, etc.). 

Of these characters some are more likely than others to be selected 
_as beneficial to the species, and these relate chiefly to general form 
and coloration. In the matter of form the particular situs of the 
species has a preponderating influence, small and slender shells be- 
ing easier to manage in the narrow fissures under stones frequented 


424 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


by many species; short and stout forms apparently succeeding bet- 
ter among dead leaves and the short herbage in stony places, while 
more elongated medium-sized forms are more in vogue among those 
which live on trees and high shrubs. It may also be the case that 
when hibernating, affixed to a branch or leaf stalk, a form simulat- 
ing a bud or spine would to a certain extent be protected from 
thrushes and other mollusk-eating birds. 

In the matter of color, selection undoubtedly has much influence. 
Subtranslucent browns and pinkish flesh-color harmonize with dead 
leaves, and the opaque tracery of yellowish streaks so common on the 
ground loving species obviously adds to the difficulty of recognizing 
the snail in such localities. Among the lava rocks sienna browns 
flecked with white are common and unquestionably protective. On 
trees everywhere the tendency is to spiral stripes of color, the sur- 
face is frequently more polished, the color brighter, with a tendency 
to the development of green among the colors, which is, so faras I 
know, never found in species living on the ground. In Achatinella 
these tendencies may be studied with advantage, and they can be 
recognized in the Nesioti and other Bulimuli almost everywhere. 
They are recognizable also among the Helices. In insular faunas 
the Helices which seem to persist most effectively are small with 
many whorls, a wrinkled surface, yellowish or olive coloration often 
with reddish radiating flecks when fresh, or wholly reddish-brown. 
Many of them have a protective armature of lamellz obstructing 
the aperture, perhaps against the hard round-bodied millipedes, like 
Julis, which eat snails and are not uncommon in insular faunas. 

In an insular or isolated fauna, under the conditions we have 
assumed, we should expect to find under the bulimoid forms (even 
in a limited number of species derived from a still more restricted 
number of ancestral types) a globose, a medium and a very attenu- 
ated type. This is well-illustrated in almost all the faunas, as in 
the Hawaiian Islands (Achatinellide), Bulimuli of Lower Califor- 
nia, Galapagos Islands and St. Helena. Leaving out the more nor- 
mal or medium type, a few examples may be mentioned : 


Locality. Globose. Very slender. 
Hawaii, A. kauiensis, ete. A. subula, plicata, ete. 
Galapagos, B. Darwinii, nux, B. Habeli, chemnitzoides. 
St. Helena, B. auris-vulpina, B. melanioides. 

’ Lower Cala. B. sufflatus, pilula, B. artemesia. 


1896. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 425 


There is no reason why such exceptional forms should maintain 
themselves, unless there is a niche in the environment which they 
are especially qualified to fill. 

The small Zonitide, commonly known as Hyalinia, Conulus, etc., 
are especially fitted by their size and lightness to be transported by 
winds, adhering to dead leaves or other light objects. They are also 
well-adapted to maintain themselves under adverse circumstances, 
excepting against extreme aridity. Consequently it is not surpris- 
ing that they, and the small Pupide of which the same is true, 
should be found as members of nearly all insular faunas where many 
other common types are wanting. 

Other small, thin and light shells like Leptinaria, Balea, Subu- 
lina, ete., are so easily transported that their presence in insular 
faunas excites no surprise, though the mystery as to how any of 
these shells reached their present habitat remains as provoking as 
ever. The distribution of land shells is full of such mysteries, to- 
ward the solution of which so little has been done. Thus, the Helix 
(Tachea) subglobosa of Binney is apparently not distinguishable 
from the pale unicolorate variety of the H. hortensis of Europe and 
has been confidently asserted to have been introduced by commerce. 
It is the only representative of its particular group in America, and 
is known only from the extreme northeastern border of the United 
States from Massachusetts to Cape Breton Island, living everywhere 
close to the sea or even on small islands off the coast. The suspi- 
cion that this species is an importation is very natural, but never- 
theless it is found in the clays of the Champlain epoch of the coast 
of Maine and in prehistoric shell-heaps of the same region, so that, 
if it was imported, Leif Ericsen had a predecessor in the glacial 
epoch. The banded forms of hortensis, since imported, do well and 
multiply varieties without difficulty and in profusion. How did it 
happen, then, that the importer of the subglobosa brought only one 
of the rarer varieties and planted it along a thousand miles of 
coast? And why should it appear living chiefly on rocky islets, 
never occupied or tilled by man? ‘The answer to such questions in- 
volves matters of the greatest interest and importance in the history 
of the distribution of life on the globe. Applied to the Galapagos 
Islands, it is evident that occupation, especially by sheep, will ren- 
der it impossible forever to get any complete data. May it not be 
hoped, therefore, that some one will undertake to make a thorough 
and complete survey of the malacology of these islands before it is 


28 


426 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


too late. The study of the development of specific forms can never 
be made complete in the Hawaiian Islands, because the sheep and 
goat have preceded the investigator. There isstill a chance to study 
the problem in the Galapagos Islands, and it should not be lost. 


SUMMARY OF THE LAND SHELL FAUNA OF THE GALAPAGOS 
ISLANDS. 


Genus BULIMULUS Leach. 
Section NAESIOTUS Albers. 


Nesiotus Albers, Heliceen, p. 162, 1850. Type 2. nux. 

Rhaphiellus Pfr., Versuch einer Anordnung der Heliceen nach natiirlichen 
Gruppen. Malak. Blatter, II, p. 160, 1855. Type &. achatinellinus, Martens 
in Albers, Ed. ii, p. 238, 1860 (Sect. Budimini). 

Omphalostyla H. & A. Adams, Gen. Rec. Moll., ii, p. 161, 1855; not of 
Schleuter, Syst. Verz., p. 7, 1838. 

Nesiotes Martens, in Albers, ed. ii, pp. 220-21, 1860. 

Nesiotus Clessin, in Pfeiffer, Nom. Hel. Viv., p. 254, 1881. 

Ataxus sp. Clessin, of. ctt., p. 253. 

Pelecostoma Reibisch (exfarte) in Isis, Abh. 3, p. 13, 1892. 


The nomenclature of this section has had serious vicissitudes, as 
indicated by the above synonymy. 

The group was named Nesiotus by Albers who gave no derivation 
for it, though the sound of the word naturally inclined the hearer 
to suppose that it was suggested by »yccdrns, islanders, and on this 
assumption von Martens proceeded to modify the spelling to Nesiotes, 
which would be a proper latinization of that Greek word. There is 
no rule of nomenclature which authorizes any one to supply a gratu- 
itous derivation for a word published without any; still less because 
the original does not agree with the later assumption is any one 
authorized to modify or destroy a name properly proposed in other 
respects. Consequently von Marten’s substitute cannot be accepted.” 

In describing his Bulimus achatellinus, Forbes says that it “is 
unlike any known Bulimus, and its characters distinctly indicate 
affinity with the Achatinelline.” Elsewhere he speaks of it “ dis- 
tantly,” indicating “affinity with the fauna of the Sandwich Is- 
lands.” This was not an unnatural conclusion when drawn from a 
few specimens, but, as is elsewhere shown in this paper, rests upon 
purely superficial characters. Actually the species is American in 
its relations, and is very closely related to some varieties of B. nua, 
from which protean species it may even be an offshoot. Conse- 


10 This seems to be a suitable occasion to protest against the unauthorized 
meddling with generic names which has lately been fashionable among writers 
from whom more sensible things would have been expected. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 427 


quently the sectional name proposed for it must fall into the syn- 
onymy of that given earlier to B. nux and its allies. It is probably 
due to the great rarity of this species that its situation in accepted 
systems has not been challenged before this; certainly if it had been 
as common as B. nuz, the facts could hardly have escaped attention 
so long. I have not found anywhere any reasons stated for putting 
the species into Buliminus rather than Bulimulus where it really 
belongs. 

The name Omphalostyla was applied by Schliiter to Bulimi with 
the pillar vertically twisted, and his sole example was the African 
shell, since better known under the name Achatina ustulata (Lam.) 
Menke. It was probably to some accidental confusion of the spe- 
cies with the Bulimus ustulatus Sby. of the Galapagos, that is due 
the application by the brothers Adams of Schliiter’s name to the 
Nesioti. 

The type of the section Pelecostoma Reibisch, is a Nesiotus which 
shows a ridge at the base of the pillar which gives a peculiar chan- 
nelled aspect to the adjacent part of the aperture. This feature will 
be found more or less distinctly present in some specimens of almost 
any Galapagos species of which a large number is examined, show- 
ing that it is dynamic or individual, and not of systematic value. 
The second species of this “section ” is Leptinaria chathumensis, a 
species belonging to a totally distinct group. The name Pelecostoma, 
therefore, may be safely laid away on the synonymic shelf. 

The question remains as to whether the section Nesiotus has any 
just claims to be separated from Thaumastus, Scutalus and other 
nominal sections of Bulimulus into which so many diverse forms 
have been gathered. The diagnostic characters given by von Mar- 
tens in his second edition of Albers are certainly not distinctive or 
- even characteristic of the whole group, or even of several separate 
species of the same group. The shells are by no means always 
“‘aperte perforata,” even in the same species; the columella is as 
often “ plicata” as “recta,” and the peristome, while generally 
“simplex,” and sometimes “acutum,” is not seldom denticulate or 
tuberculous and more or less distinctly reflected. The anatomical 
details, as elsewhere shown, offer no characters by which the species 
may be differentiated from many of the Bulimuli of the mainland. 
The utmost that can be said, therefore, is that Nesiotus is a con- 
venient term for the geographical group inhabiting the Galapagos 
Islands, and, as such, we may retain it, without giving way to the 
delusion that it stands for anything more important. 


428 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


In the recent revision” by Prof. H. A. Pilsbry of the genus Buli- 
mulus Leach, the subgenus Bulimulus s.s. is defined as having the 
apex irregularly wrinkled or with the wrinkles broken into granules 
or dislocated, while the subgenus Orthotomium has regular vertical 
riblets. Nesiotus is referred to the former. The South American 
Bostryx has the apex smooth and slightly swollen, not funiculate. 

An examination of the entire series of Nesiotus in the National 
Museum shows that the apex is nearer to that of Orthotomium than 
to that of Bulimulus s.s. It is characterized invariably by vertical 
riblets sometimes strong and with subequal furrowed interspaces ; 
sometimes distant with wider, flat interspaces, and sometimes ex- 
tremely delicate and fine ; but, except when worn, always unbroken 
and regular and with extremely fine spiral striz visible in a good 
light, between the riblets. The apex always has a dimple or funicle 
over the axis, but the upper margin of this is rounded, never keeled 
as in some species of Orthotomium. This is an important point, as 
it indicates the origin of the Nesioti from the more northern stock, 
or from the same source as the more northern stock. 

It often happens, especially among those species which have the 
riblets low and fine, that they are broken by wear on the periphery 
of the nepionic whorls, thus suggesting the Bulimulus type ; or even 
that they may be entirely removed, while the polished surface shows 
no traces of erosion. But in young, fresh specimens, they may 
always be found unbroken and regular, except in the case of rare 
abnormal individuals. Of the latter, I have come across only one 
or two in all my series of several hundreds of specimens. 

Bulimulus (Naesiotus) achatellinus Forbes. Plate XVII, figure 13. 


Bulimulus achatellinus Fbs., P. Z. S., 1850, p. 56, pl. LX, figs. 5 a-b. 

Bulimulus achatinellinus Pfr., Mon. Hel. viv., II], p. 429, 1853; Kiister, in 
Chemn. Conch. Cab. ed. ii, Budimus, No. 112, pl. 31, figs. 19-20. Pfr. Mon., 
IV, p. 492, 1859. 

Bulimus (Rhaphiellus) achatinellinus Pfr., Vers. in Malak. Blitt., I, p. 160, 
1855. 

Bulimulus (Omphatostyla) achatinellus H. & A. Ads., Gen. Rec. Moll., II, p. 
161, 1855 ; Wimmer, Sitz. Akad. Wiss. Wien., lxxx, p. 43, 1879. 

Buliminus (Rhaphwellus) achatinellinus Martens, in Albers, Heliceen, ed. ii, 
p. 238, 1860. Reibisch, Isis, 1892, p. 15, t. ii, fig. 8. 

Bulimina (Rhaphiellus) achatinellina Pfr., Nom. Hel viv., p. 300, 1881. 

Bulimulus (Rhaphiellus) achatinellinus Stearns, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., XVI, 
p- 428, 1893. 


Habitat. Upper levels of Chatham Island on trees and bushes, 
Kellett, Wolf and Baur; Hood Island, Habel, fide Wimmer. 


1 Nautilus, IX, No. 10, p. 114, 1896. 


1896.) NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 429 


Three specimens examined, of which one, collected by Dr. Baur, 
contained the soft parts. Owing to the fact that the specimen had 
been partially dried up, it was impossible to examine the genitalia. 

The jaw was like the jaw of B. nux,with about 18 irregular flat plate- 
like ribs, whose blunt ends denticulate the margin, especially the cut- 
ting edge. The outer margin of these platesis a little raised and thick- 
ened, the color is pale amber, darker where thickest. The radula 
was rather broad, the single teeth did not differ in outline from those 
of B. nux more than those of one specimen of nuzx differs from those 
of another. The number of laterals is 14, of marginals 23, the 
formula 3 

23 + 14°14-++ 23 

It will be observed from these facts that nothing in the dentition 
of B. achatellinus justifies the presumption that it deserves a section 
to itself. Im Dr. Baur’s specimen, the nucleus is delicately trans- 
versely ribbed, the vertex almost umbilicate, the earlier whorls 
nearly white and opaque, pinched up into irregular little tubercles 
at the suture; the later whorls have revolving dark brown color 
bands, separated by whitish interspaces covered with a yellowish 
epidermis. The base is mostly pale, with a dark band around the 
umbilicus. The outer lip is sharp-edged, and the umbilicus small. 
The pillar is short and straight. 

A specimen sent by Cuming to Dr. Lea is not so large, and is 
darker colored, the ground color being an olivaceous brown with a 
narrow chestnut band at the periphery; the base pale and the um- 
bilicus entirely closed. The nodulous band in front of the suture is 
present and of a whitish color. 

The name applied by Forbes was achatellinus, which, by several 
authors, on the assumption that it was intended as a diminutive of 
Achatinella, has been emended to achatinellinus, a most awkward 
and clumsy word. But it is just as likely that he intended the word 
as a diminutive of the same root as Achatina ; and, at any rate, no 
one has the right to make changes on an unsupported assumption, 
for which reason the original form is retained here. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) nux Broderip. Plate XVI, figure 6; Plate XVII, figure 10. 


Bulinus nux Brod., P. Z. S., 1832, p. 125, (Charles Id.) ; Sby., Conch. II1., p. 
6, figs. 37, 37*, 1833. 

Bulimus nux Desh. in Lam. An. s. Vert., ed. ii, vol. viii, p. 276, 1838; Pfr., 
Mon. Hel. Viv., II, p. 183, 1848; Reeve, Conch. Icon., pl. xxiii, fig. 150 (not 
typical) ; Smith, P. Z. S., 1877, p. 72. 

Buliminus nux Beck, Ind. Moll., p. 70, 1838. 

Bulimus (Nesiotus) nux Albers, Heliceen, p. 162, (Type of section). 


430 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Bulimulus (Omphalostyla) nux H. & A. Adams, Gen. Rec. Moll., II, p. 161, 
1855. 
Bulimulus (Nesiotes) nux Martens, in Albers ed. II, p. 220, 1860. 
Bulimulus ( Nesiotus) nux Pfr., Nom. Hel. viv., p. 254, 1881. 
Bulimus nuciformis Petit, Journal de Conchyl., [V, p. 365, pl. xi, fig. 7, 
1853; Pfr , Mon. Hel. Viv., IV, p. 410, 1859. 
Bulimus (Nesiotus) nuciformis Pfr., Mal. Blatt., ii. Vers., p. 161, 1854. 
Bulimulus ( Nesiotes) nuciformis Martens in Albers, ed. ii, p. 220, 1860. 
Bulimulus ( Nesiotus) nuciformis Pfr., Nom. Hel. Viv., p. 254, 1881. 
Bulimus incrassatus Pfr. P. Z.S., 1852, p. 157; Kiister in Chemn. Conch. 
Cab., ed. ii; Bulimus, No. 88, pl. 30, figs. 13,14; Pfr., Mon. Hel. Viv., II, 
p. 415, 1853. 


Bulimulus (Omphalostyla) incrassatus H. & A, Ads., Gen. Rec. Moll. II, p. 
161, 1855. 


Hae untfasciatus Reibisch (non Sby.) Isis, 1892, p. 20, pl. i, fig. 1, not 
 Bulimulus (Nesiotus) nux Reibisch, Isis, 1892, p. 3. 
Bulimulus (Nesiotus) incrassatus Reibisch, Isis, 1892, p. 4, t. i. fig. 4a; var. 
rege Reib., Ibid, p. 4, t. i, figs. db; var. 2uctformis Reib., Ibid., p. 4, t. i, 
g. 4d. 


Bulimulus (Nestotus) nux Stearns, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., xvi, pp. 376-381, 
425, 426, 1893, 


Variety verrucosus Pfeiffer. 

Bulimus verrucosus Pfr., P. Z. §., 1885, p. 116, (Gal. Is.); Mon. Hel. viv., 
IV, p. 475, 1859. 

Bulimus (Nesiotus) verrucosus Pfr., Mal. Blatt. ii, Vers., p. 161, 1854. 

Bulimulus (Nesiotus) verrucosus Pfr., Nom. Hel. viv., p. 204, 1881; Reibisch, 
Isis, 1892, p. 3. 

Bulimulus asperatus Reibisch (non Pfr.), Isis, 1892, pl. 1. fig. 3, (syn. exel.). 


Variety asperatus Albers. 

Bulimus asperatus Albers, Malak. Blatt., IV, p. 98, 1857; Pfr., Mon. Hel. 
viv., IV, p. 475, 1859; VI, p. 121; Novit. Conch., IV, p. 145, pl. 133, figs. 8, 
9 


" Bulimulus (Nesiotes) asperatus Martens in Albers Heliceen, ed. ii, p. 220, 
1860. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) asperatus Pfr., Nom. Hel. viv., p. 254, 1881; not of 
Reibisch, Isis, 1892, pl. 1, fig. 3, —= verrucosus var. 

Bulimulus invalidus Reibisch, Isis, 1892, p. 5, t. i, fig, 6. 

Habitat. Original typical nuz of Broderip on bushes, Charles 
Island, in the upper wooded region; mut. nuciformis, Chatham Island, 
U.S. Fish Commission ; mut. incrassatus, on the under side of leaves 
hibernating, 1,600 feet above the sea, on the S.-W. end of Chatham 
Island, Baur; mut. figured by Reeve in Conch. Icon., abundant on 
Charles Island, U.S. Fish Commission ; variety verrucosuvs, Chatham 
Island ; var. asperatus, Charles Island, abundant, Wolf and U.S. 
Fish Commission. The reference to Albemarle Island for this spe- 
cies in Stearns’ list appears to be due to some accidental misplace- 
ment of labels, as no specimens from that locality are in the collect- 
ion or among the duplicates. Number of specimens examined, three 
hundred and seventy-four. 

The synonymy exhibits, almost as clearly as the specimens, the 
great variability of this species. The facts also seem to indicate 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 431 


quite positively that a great proportion of this variability in this 
instance is due quite as much to an intrinsic tendency to vary in the 
matter of color and form as to any direct influence of the environ- 
ment promoting by special circumstances any special variation. At 
least, while it is not questionable that some of the variations might 
easily be made permanent by natural selection, it is probable, as 
yet, that matters have not reached that stage, since the evidence of 
collectors seems to establish the fact that the different variations of 
color and form are found indiscriminately in the same region and 
under the same conditions. Further and more precise observation 
is needed to establish this beyond controversy, but at present there 
seems no escape from this conclusion. 

An examination of several specimens by Mr. Binney afforded the 
following anatomical data: ‘‘ Genitalia with a short, stout, linguiform, 
bluntly pointed ovary ; testicle of numerous bunches of long blunt 
ceca ; epididymis long, convoluted along nearly its whole length ; 
oviduct long; genital bladder small, oval, on a long stout duct ; 
penis sac long, narrow, subcylindrical, white, with a silken lustre, 
receiving the retractor muscle at its upper third, the vas deferens at 
its apex.” 

Jaw low, wide, ends rather blunt, but little arcuate, anterior sur- 
face with about 20 broad, flat, crowded ribs, squarely denticulating 
both margins. It is thin, membranaceous, light horn-colored, of 
equal height throughout, with the outer edges of the ribs reinforced. 


Radula long and narrow, formula 3 ; rhachidian with a 
31.9+-9.31 


long central and two shorter lateral cusps, the whole narrower than 
the base; true laterals bicuspid, the outer cusps shorter, 9 in number 
on each side; marginals low, wide, with one long wide bifid inner 
cutting point and one outer short bifid cutting point, the latter in the 
extreme marginals becoming irregularly serrate. In the figure 
(plate XVI, fig. 6) of the genitalia, the proximal orifices are sepa- 
rated, an accident of dissection, the two canals actually open into a 
single atrium. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) rugulosus Sowerby. Plate XVII, figure 1. 


Bulinus rugulosus Sby., Conch. Ill. Part 142, fig. 87 (a, b), 1839. 

Bulimus rugulosus Pfr., Mon. Hel. Viv., II, p. 113, 1848. 

Bulimus eschartferus Reeve, Conch. Icon., pl. xx, fig. 121, (text, figure ex- 
cluded), 1848, not of Sowerby. 

Bulimulus (Omphalostyla) rugulosus H. & A. Adams, Gen. Rec. Moll., II, p. 
161, 1855. 


432 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) rugulosus Pfr., Nom. Hel. viv., p. 254, 1881; Ancey, 
Bull. Soc. Mal. France, IV, p. 294, 1887, (Chatham Island); Stearns, Proc. 
U.S. Nat. Mus., xvi, pp. 381, 426, 1893. 

B. rugulosus var. infuscata Ancey, op. cit., p. 294, 1887, 

? Bulimulus (Nesiotus) nudus Reibisch, Isis, 1892, p. 9, t. i, fig. 15. 

Not 2. rugulosus Reibisch, Isis, 1892, p. 7, t.i, figs. 11 a-b, = B. perspec- 
tivus Pfr. 

Under stones near the shore, Blackbeach Road, Charles Island, 
Dr. Baur; Charles Island, Darwin and Wolf; Chatham Island, 
Darwin, Kellett and Cuming. 

Jaw thin, membranaceous, light horn-colored, low, wide, arcuate, 
of equal height throughout, ending bluntly; anterior surface with 
about 20 broad, flat ribs, their outer edges reinforced, the margins 
of the jaw squarely denticulated by the projecting ends of the ribs. 

Some varieties of B. nuz approach this species quite closely, espe- 
cially that to which Reibisch gave the name of invalidus. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) planospira Ancey, Plate XVI, figure 3. 


Bulimus eschariferus Reeve, Conch Icon., pl. xx, fig. 121 (bad, text excl.), 
1848. 


Bulimulus rugulosus var. planospira Ancey, Bull. Soc. Mal, de France, IV, 
p. 294, 1887. 
Bulimulus rugulosus Reeve (Smith, in litt.) ex parte. 


Northeast end of Charles Island, at about 200 feet, Dr. Baur. 

This is one of the most elegant species of the group. It is very 
closely related to B. rugulosus from which it may be discriminated 
by its larger size and greater number of whorls, and by the deeper 
suture and more lax manner in which the last whorl is coiled. In 
B. planospira the spiral sculpture is usually more elevated and con- 
spicuous. It has been found only on a limited portion of Charles 
Island, while rugudosus is common on both Charles and Chatham. 
As this form has not been figured I include a figure of it. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) ustulatus Sowerby. 


Bulinus ustulatus Sby., P. Z. S., 1833, p. 72, (Charles Island) ; Conch. IIL, 
p. 6, fig. 42, 1833. 

Bulimus ustulatus Desh.in Lam. An, s. Vert., ed. II, vol. viii, p. 279, 1838; 
Pfr., Mon. Hel. Viv., II, p. 217, 1848; Kiister, in Chemn. Conch. Cab., ed. 
II, Bulimus, t. 62, figs. 16-18; Reeve, Conch. Icon., pl. xxi, fig. 130, 1848. 

Buliminus ustulatus Beck, Ind. Moll., p. 70, 1838. 

Bulimulus (Omphalostyla) ustulatus H. & A. Ad., Gen. Rec. Moll., II, p. 
161, 1855. 

Bulimus (Nesiotus) ustulatus Albers, Heliceen, p. 162, 1850. 

Bulimulus (Nesiotes) ustulatus Martens in Albers, ed. ii, p. 221, 1860. 

Bulimulus (Nesiotus) ustulatus Pfr., Nom. Hel. Viv., p. 254, 1881; Stearns, 
Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., xvi, p. 427, 1893. 

Bulimulus ( Nesiotus) venustus Reibisch, Isis, 1892, p. 5, t. i, fig. 7; not 2. 
ustulatus Reibisch, Isis, 1892, p. 4, t. i, fig. 5, —= «x var. 


Charles Island, Cuming. 


9 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 433 

This species is notable for the yellowness of its paler parts and the 
bright sienna brown of its darker portions. It is closely related to 
B. calvus Sby., which is a smaller and more streaky shell. The 
form figured by Reeve and Reibisch under this name is larger than 
the true ustulatus, and is considered by Dr. Stearns to be a banded 
variety of B. nux. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) calvus Sowerby. 


Bulinus calvus Sby., P. Z. S., 1833, p. 72 (James Island) ; Conch. IIl., p. 6, 
fig. 41, 1833. 

Bulimus calvus Desh. in Lam. An.s. Vert., ed. ii, vol. vili, p. 179, 1838; 
Pfr., Mon. Hel. Viv., II, p. 225, 1848; Kuster, in Chemn. Conch. Cab., ed. 
ii, Bulimus, t. 62, figs. 37, 38. 

Buliminus calvus Beck, Ind. Moll., p. 70, 1838. 

Bulimulus (Omphalostyla) clavus H. & A. Ad., Gen. Rec. Moll. I, p. 161, 
1855. 

Bulimus calvus Reeve, Conch. Icon., pl. xx, fig. 126, 1848. 

Bulimulus (Nestotes) calvus Martens in Albers, ed. ii, p. 221, 1860. 

Bulimulus (Nesiotus) calvus Pfr., Nom. Hel. Viv., p. 254, 1881; Reibisch, 
Isis, 1892, p. 6, t. i, fig. 8; Stearns, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., xvi, p. 427, 1893, 
ex parte, 


James Island, Cuming; Charles Island, U. S. Fish Commission, 
Cuming and Wolf; Chatham Island, Kellett. 

Specimens sent under this name by Cuming and Reibisch agree 
well with those collected by the U. S. Fish Commission. It is 
closely related to B. ustulatus and is rather nearly approached by 
certain dwarfish, unusually smooth specimens of B. rugulosus. B. 
nucula Pfr. is also closely allied. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) nucula Pfeiffer. 

Bulimus nucula Pfr., P. Z.S., 1852, p. 60 (Gal. Is.); Mon. Hel. Viv., III, 
p- 415, 1853; IV, p. 475, 1859. 

Bulimus (Nestotus) nucula Pfr., Mal. Blatt. II. Vers., p. 161, 1854. 

Bulimulus (Omphalostyla) nucula H. & A. Ads.,Gen. Rec. Moll., I, p. 161, 
1855. 

Bulimulus (Nesiotes) nucula Martens, in Albers Heliceen, ed. ii, p. 221, 
1860. 

Bulimulus (Nesiotus) nucula Pfr., Nom. Hel. Viv., p. 254, 1881; Reibisch, 
Isis, 1892, p. 3, t.i, fig. 2. 

Bulimulus (Nesiotus) nux var. Stearns, Proc. U.S Nat. Mus., xvi, pp. 380, 
426, 1893. 


Charles Island, Wolf, fide Reibisch; Chatham Island near the 
S.-W. end, at a height of 1,600 feet, Baur. 

A specimen submitted to Mr. Edgar A. Smith of the British 
Museum, was said to be somewhat darker colored and more coarsely 
striated than the type of nucula in that collection. These are, how- 
ever, trivial differences under the circumstances. It agrees closely 
with a specimen sent by Reibisch under the name of nueuvla. It is 


434 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


a smoother, smaller and more compact shell than rugulosus, and 
shows asomewhat attenuated and dark colored apex, resembling that 
of galapaganus Pfr. It is, perhaps, most closely related to B. ustu- 
latus or B. calvus Sby., and a sufficient series might very likely con- 
nect them. No living specimens of this species were collected, 
though there are some fresh shells. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) eschariferus Sowerby. 


Bulinus eschariferus Sby., Conch. IIl., figs. 85 (a, b), 1833. 

Bulimus eschariferus Pfr., Symb., I, p. 45; Mon. Hel. Viv., II, p. 115, 
1848; Smith, P. Z. S.. 1877, p. 72. 

Bulimulus ( Nesiotus) eschariferus Pfr., Nom. Hel. Viv., p. 254, 1881; Rei- 
bisch, Isis, 1892, p. 2. 

Bulimus rugulosus Reeve (not Sby.), Conch. Icon., pl. xx, fig. 123, 1848 
(citation, diagnosis and figure refer to eschariferus). 

Bulimulus (Omphalostyla) eschariferus H. & A. Ad., Gen. Rec. Moll. II, p. 
161, 1855. 

Bulimulus eschariferus Ancey, Bull. Soc. Mal. France, IV, p. 295, 1887. 

B. eschariferus var. bizonalis Ancey, op. cit., p. 295, 1887. 

B, eschariferus var. subconoidalis Ancey, op. cit., p. 295, 1887. 

Bulimulus (Nesiotus) eschariferus Stearns, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., xvi, pp. 
381, 426, 1893. 


Chatham Island, Darwin, Kellett, U.S. Fish Commission and 
Dr. Baur, under stones near the shore at Wreck Bay and elsewhere ; 
Charles Island, H. M.S. Peterel. 

Though this species, as usually received, isapparently smooth and 
polished, it has minute more or less granular spirals, which it is 
probable in the young state bear hairs. Among the living speci- 
mens obtained at Chatham Island by the U.S. Fish Commission 
were some rather smaller than the average and covered with a dense 
brown epidermis, which bears numerous spiral lines more or less 
minutely granulose, a small hair or process of the epidermis pro- 
jecting from each granule, giving the shell a pilose appearance. 
These specimens measure about 12 mm. in length and 5 mm. in 
diameter, the color of the shell is browner than in the type, and, 
when denuded of the periostracum, the shell is seen to be marked by 
numerous fine sharp, almost microscopic spirals. It may, perhaps, 
form a variety pileatus, of the typical eschariferus. 

Bulimulus (Nesiotus) eschariferus var. ventrosus Reibisch. Plate XVII, figure 3. 
Bulimulus (Nesiotus) ventrosus Reibisch, Isis, 1892, p. 7, t. i, fig. 12 a-b. 
Barrington Island, common; Wolf, fide Reibisch, also Dr. G. 

Baur, who found it under stones near the shore. 

A specimen of this form was sent to Mr. Smith at the British 
Museum, and by him compared with the type of B. eschariferus with 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 435 


which he identified it. In color, form and range of variation the 
Barrington Island shells agree perfectly with those from Chatham 
and Charles Island (eschariferus), but the latter are always a little 
more slender if the specimens I have seen can be taken as a criterion. 
Twenty-four of them averaged 16 mm. long by 5 mm. in diameter 
above the aperture, while the diameter of the most slender of forty- 
two Barrington Island specimens was 6 mm. The. latter have the 
spire less attenuated and slightly more compact. On the whole, it is 
doubtful if this form can rank higher than as a local race of eschari- 
ferus. 

Jaws light horn-colored, low, wide, thin, slightly arcuate, of equal 
height throughout, with blunt ends; anterior surface with about 16 
irregularly wide flat ribs, their outer edges reinforced, their ends 
bluntly denticulating the upper and lower edges of the jaw. 


Radula long and narrow; formula 13+9. 9+13; rhachidian tooth 
Me 

tricuspid, the lateral cusps shorter ; lateral teeth bicuspid; margin- 

als with one longer inner bifid cutting point and the outer short, 
wide cusp broken up into three or four denticles. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) galapaganus Pfeiffer. 


Bulimulus galapaganus Pfr., P. Z. S., 1854, p. 58. Mon. Hel. viv. IV, p. 
503, 1859. 

Bulimulus (Nesiotus) galapaganus Pfr., Mal. Blatt. II, Vers., p. 160, 1854. 

Bulimulus (Nesiotes) galapaganus Martens, in Albers Heliceen, ed. ii, p. 
221, 1860. 

Bulimulus (Nestotus) galapaganus Pfr., Nom. Hel. viv., p. 1881; Reibisch, 
Isis, 1892, p. 8; Stearns, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XVI, p. 427, 1°93. 


Charles Island, at about 200 ft. elevation, near the northeast end 
of the island, Dr. Baur. 

This is very closely related to B. ustulatus Sby., is slightly longer 
and more pupiform, and wants the bright yellowish bands. The 
whorls are more rounded. in B. galapaganus than in B. per- 
spectivus, and the latter is darker and more uniformly colored. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) perspectivus Pfeiffer. 


Bulimus perspectivus Pfr., P. Z. S., 1846, p. 33; Mon. Hel. viv., ii, p. 97, 
1848 ; Reeve, Conch. Icon., 2udimus, pl. 63, fig. 435. 

Bulimulus (Ataxus) perspectivus Pfr., Clessiu, Nomencl. Hel. yiv., p. 253, 
1881. 

Bulimulus (Nesiotus) rugulosus Reibisch, Isis., 1892, p. 7, t. i, figs. 11 a-b. 


Chatham Island, Galapagos, 300-600 ft., Wolf, fide Reibisch, on 
rocks and under stones. 


436 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


This species is in the British Museum, and appears in the litera- 
ture, without a known habitat, but Herr Reibisch has courteously 
forwarded two specimens for inspection, with the information that 
they are from Chatham Island, Wolf, collector. 

The species resembles B. eschariferus in form, but it is of a deep, 
reddish, instead of an olivaceous brown, and is more rudely striated. 
One specimen shows traces of a narrow, pale band on the last whorl, 
the other does not. The lip is dark colored. One of the specimens 
has the base of the pillar very prominent, almost channelled, the 
other is quite normal. The shell is midway between the typical 
eschariferus and the var. ventrosus in size. The first reference of it 
to B. rugulosus by Herr Reibisch was undoubtedly an error, which 
that gentleman detected upon examining the specimens in the Brit- 
ish Museum. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) jacobi Sowerby. 


Bulimus jacobi Sby., P. Z. S., 1833, p. 74 (James Id.) Conch. IIl., p. 7, figs. 
45, 45 (2 vars.) 1833. 

Bulimus jacobi Desh. in Lam. An. §. Vert., ed. ii, vol. viii, p. 281, 1838; 
Pfr., Mon. Hel. viv., II, p. 98, 1848 (not of Reeve, Conch. Icon., pl. XXI, 
fig. 135, 1848 = B&, olla). 

Buliminus jacobi Beck, Ind. Moll., p. 70, 1838. 

Pal (Omphalostyla) jacobi H, & A. Ads., Gen. Rec. Moll,, ii. p. 161, 
1856. 


Bulimus (Nesiotus) jacobi Albers, Helic., p. 162, 1850; Pfr., Vers., p. 160. 

Bulimulus (Nesiotes) jacobi Martens, in Albers, ed. ii, p. 221, 1860. 

Bulimulus (Nesiotus\ jacobi Pfr., Nom. Hel. viv., p. 254, 1881, _Reibisch. 
er a p. 6. Not 2. jacobi Stearns, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., XVI, p. 381, 

Bulimulus (Mesiotus) pallidus Reibisch. Isis, 1892, p. 6, t. i, fig. 9. 

Bulimulus ( Nestotus) acutus Reib., op. cit., p. 8, t. i, fig. 13, 1892. 

James Island, Cuming; Charles Island, Cuming; typical, in U. 
S. Nat. Mus., from original specimens received by Dr. Lea; 1,600 
ft. near Wreck Bay, Chatham Island, on the under side of leaves of 
plants (var. pallidus), and on East Albemarle Island, Dr. Baur ; 
Albemarle Island, 200-800 ft. on bushes and stones, Wolf, fide 
Reibisch (var. pallidus); Chatham Island, 900-2,000 ft., in damp 
places and on the trunks of trees (var. acutus) Wolf. 

The variety pallidus differs from the typical form in being slightly 
smaller and more slender without the wrinkles, and it is probable 
that a large series would show no dividing line between the variety 
and the type. 

The variety acutus differs from pallidus in the almost entire ab- 
sence of the spiral granulated sculpture, leaving much of the surface 
polished and smooth, except for incremental lines. Reibisch’s figure 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 437 


shows one whorl more in the same length than the specimen he was 
kind enough to send me for examination, but slight differences of 
this kind are common among these very variable forms. It also 
comes very close to some varieties of B. nucula and B. amastroides, 
the latter being slightly smaller and more spindle-shaped. 

The typical B. jacobi, sent by Cuming to Dr. Lea in 1838, is a 
small, stout shell, with rather inflated whorls, covered with fine 
granulations, minute, obliquely transverse broken wrinkles, and fine 
granular spirals, hardly visible without magnification. The shell is 
pale reddish-brown, sometimes with a narrow, pale peripheral band. 
The pillar and body are without fold or tubercular callus. Those 
collected by Dr. Baur on Charles Island are the smallest I have 
seen which can be positively referred to this species. The larger, 
smooth form figured by Reeve under this name is distinct, and will 
be found referred to under the name of B. olla. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) jacobi var. cinereus Reibisch. Plate XVI, fig. 14. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) cinereus Reibisch, Isis, 1892, p. 7, t. i, fig. 10. 
Bulimulus zacobt var. vermiculatus Dall, Nautilus, VII, p. 53, Sept., 1893. 


James Island at James Bay, Dr. Baur and Wolf. No living 
specimens of this species appear to have been collected. 

This variety is hardly separable from the smaller B. jacobi, 
though the dead and the fresh shells appear quite dissimilar. It is 
somewhat smaller than the smallest undoubted jacobi, and the 
granular sculpture is more dense and uniform. I have not seen 
any specimens with a spire as long and _ pointed as in Reibisch’s fig- 
ure. A specimen sent by him agrees in every way with those col- 
lected by Dr. Baur. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) olla Dall. Plate XVI, fig. 2. 


Bulimus jacobi Reeve, Conch. Icon. Budimus, pl, XXI, fig. 135, 1848. 
Bulimulus olla Dall, Nautilus, VII, p. 53, September, 1893. 


James Island, Cuming, Lea Collection; Duncan Island, all dead, 
but fresh, Dr. Baur ; Barrington Island, dead, Dr. Baur; Conway 
Bay, Indefatigable Island, Dr. Baur. 

This shell is closely related to B. jacobi, and was figured by 
Reeve under that name. DB. olla is larger, and wants the granula- 
tions of B. jacobi, its surface is nearly smooth and almost polished, 
marked with faint incremental lines, has seven whorls (against six 
in the other species) and a very bulbous pillar. The present species 
inhabits the grassy upper zone, while B. jacobi is found in the wooded 
area. 


438 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) Tanneri Dall. Plate XVI, fig. 5. 


Bulimulus ( Nesiotus) Fanneri Dall, Nautilus, VIII, p. 127, March, 1895 
(err. typ. pro Zanneri, corrected in the index, p. iii, April, 1895). 


Shell short, stout, pointed, with two nepionic and four subsequent 
whorls; nucleus rather coarsely transversely ribbed, the interspaces 
somewhat wider; the subsequent whorls marked by incremental 
lines and obsolete traces of fine, partly granulose, inconstant spiral 
threads, only perceptible under a lens; color pinkish or brownish- 
white with no traces of a peripheral paler band ; whorls somewhat 
inflated, suture conspicuous, umbilicus large and deeply pervious ; 
aperture large with a widely expanded lip, the outer lip much bent 
over at the body, closely approaching the pillar and united to it by 
a distinct callus; length 11; max. diameter 7-0 mm. 

Indefatigable Island, U. 8. Fish Commission. 

This is about the size of B. cinereus Reib., but is more conical, in- 
. flated and stouter, with a very differently shaped aperture, the lip 
being more expanded and reflected than in any other species yet 
described from these islands. It is named in honor of Capt. Z. L. 
Tanner, U.S. N., commanding the U. S. S. Albatross during the 
Galapagos explorations. None of the specimens were living. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) duncanus Dall. Plate XVI, fig. 7. 
Bulimulus ( Nesiotus) duncanus Dall, Nautilus, VII, p. 52, September, 1893. 


The shell is short, stout, inflated, thin, with two nepionic and four- 
and-a-half subsequent whorls. The apex is rather pointed, the 
axial dimple small, the whorls rapidly enlarging, with the suture 
behind the last whorl deeper than the rest and more oblique to the 
axis; the aperture is relatively small and rather oblique, the lip 
simple, sharp, not reflected, connected across the body with a thin 
callus, a single tubercle on the body, well within the aperture, and 
about equidistant from either lip; umbilicus perforate, narrow ; 
height of the shell 18, of the last whorl 12°5; diameter of shell 11 
mm. 

Dead specimens only were found on Duncan Island, by Dr. 
Baur. 

The sculpture comprises only incremental lines and faint wrinkles 
in harmony with them, especially just in front of the suture and 
near the end of the last whorl. When perfectly fresh, there were 
probably microscopic granules spirally arranged and sparsely dis- 
tributed, but these are now represented only by minute spots of 
erosion. Except the largest specimens of B. nux, these shells are 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 439 


the largest Bulimuli described from the islands. They are, however, 
thinner than any specimens of B. nuz, in this respect resembling B. 
unifasciatus Sby. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) Darwini Pfeiffer. 


Bulimus Darwini Pfr., P. Z. S., 1846, p. 29 (Gal. Ids). Mon. Hel., viv. ii, 
p. 199, 1848; Reeve, Conch. Icon., pl. X XI, fig. 186 (Gal. Ids.), 1848. 

Bulimulus (Omphalostyla) Darwint H. & A. Ad., Gen. Rec. Moll., I, p. 
161, 1855; Wimmer, Sitzb. Akad. Wiss. Wien, Ixxx, p. 44, 1879. 

Bulimulus ( Nesiotes) Darwini Martens, in Albers, Heliceen, ed. ii, p. 220, 
1860. 

Bulimulus ( Nesiotus) Darwini Pfr., Mon. Hel. viv. p. 254, 1881; Reibisch, 
Tsis, 1892, p. 10; Stearns, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., X VI, p. 427, 1893. 

Bulimus manini “ Pfr.”’ Carpenter, Rep. Brit. Assoc., 1856, p. 8359; Stearns, 
Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., XVI, pp. 405, 427, 1893 (Err. typ. ). 


Bindloe Island, Habel, fide Wimmer. 

The type specimen of this species has disappeared from the Cum- 
ingian Collection, and I have been unable to obtain a specimen 
for examination. The only reference to the particular island upon 
which it lives is derived from Habel. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) Wolfi Reibisch. 

Bulimulus (Nesiotus) Wolfi Reibisch, Isis, 1892, p. 10, t. ii, figs. 1 a-b; 
Stearns, of. ci/., pp. 414, 427, 1893. 

Indefatigable Island, Wolf, fide Reibisch. 

A specimen of this species kindly forwarded for examination 
by Herr Reibisch is clearly distinct from anything I have seen. 
It resembles B. Simrothi Reib., but is more robust, the surface of the 
upper whorls smoother and more regular in sculpture, the pillar- 
tooth is more prominent and stronger, the parietal tooth, apparently 
normal, is not found in any Simrothi I have seen, the umbilicus is 
larger than in the latter species. It resembles Reeve’s figure of B. 
Darwini somewhat, but the latter is 17 mm. long, while B. Wolf 
only reaches a length of 13°5 mm. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) unifasciatus Sowerby. Plate XVII, figs. 6, 11. 


Bulimus unifasciatus Sby., P. Z. 8., 1833, p. 37 (Charles Id.). Cénch. IIl., 
fig. 55, 1833. 

Bulimus unifasciatus Desh. in Lam. An. s. Vert., Ed. ii, vol. viii, p. 277, 
1838. Reeve, Conch. Icon., XXIII, fig. 149 (bad) 1848. Pfr., Mon. Hel. 
viv. II, p..195, 1848. Smith, P. Z. S., 1877, p. 72. 

Bulimulus unifasciatus Beck, Index, p. 67, 1838. 

Bulimulus ( Omphalostyla) unifasciatus H. & A. Ads., Gen. Rec. Moll., II, 
p. 161, 1855. 

Bulimulus ( Nesiotes) unifasciatus Martens, in Albers, ed. ii, p. 220, 1860. 

Bulimulus (Nestotus) unifasciatus Pfr. Nom. Hel. viv., p. 254, 1881; 
Stearns, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XVI, p. 427, 1893. 

Bulimulus unifasciatus Reibisch, Isis, 1892. p. 3, syn.; but not p. 20, pl. i, 
fig. 1 (= ux var.). 


440 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


James Island, under lava, Cuming in Lea Collection; Chatham 
Island, near the southwest end, at a height of about 1,600 feet, Dr. 
Baur; Chatham Island, Kellett; Charles Island, Cuming and H. 
M. S. Peterel. 

Jaw thin, horn colored, arcuate, of equal height throughout, with 
blunt ends; anterior surface with about 14 broad, crowded, flattish 
ribs, reinforced along their outer edges; the ends of the ribs broad, 
squarely denticulating the upper and lower margin of the jaw. 

Radula long, thin, narrow ; formula 1 ; rhachidian tooth 

8+12°12+8 
stout, tricuspid, with very short lateral cusps; perfect laterals, about 
twelve in number, bicuspid, with very short outer cusps; marginals 
low, wide, with a long bifid inner cusp outside of which the cutting 
edge is broken up into four or five denticles of nearly equal length. 

In its thin and ample shell, uniform reddish-brown color, and 
narrow, well-defined peripheral pale band, this form resembles the 
species of the mainland more than any other Galapagos species. The 
transverse riblets on the nepionic shell are very fine and almost 
always decorticated; the granular spirals are almost microscopic, 
and when fresh and perfect, bear small projections of the perio- 
stracum. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) Simrothi Reibisch. Plate XVI, figs. 11, 12, 13; Plate XVII, 
fig. 2. 


Bulimulus ( Nesiotus) Simrothi Reibisch, Isis, 1892, p. 11, t. 2, fig. 2; 
Stearns, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., XVI, pp. 414, 428, 1843. 
Bulimulus ( Nesiotus) tortuganus Dall, Nautilus, VII, p. 54, 1893. 


La Tortuga, grassy zone, South Albemarle, Baur; 1,000-2,000 feet, 
in the moist region, Albemarle Island, Wolf. 

Herr Reibisch has kindly furnished a photograph of one of his 
types of B. Simrothi with which I have compared my specimens of 
tortuganus. Wolf’s shellin the photograph appears smoother, with- 
out the deeply indented markings, and exhibits color streaks in 
harmony With the lines of growth which none of the specimens of 
tortuganus do. Nevertheless, the two forms should probably be 
united, especially as Reibisch’s description agrees better than the 
photograph as respects surface and color. As the specimens collected 
by Wolf were more or less immature, the original diagnosis needs 
some additional data. 

Jaw light horn colored, thin, membranaceous, arcuate, of equal 
height throughout and with the ends blunt; anterior surface with 
about 17 rather narrow, flat crowded ribs, with thickened outer 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 441 


edges, the upper and lower margins of the jaw bluntly denticulated 
by the squarish ends of the ribs. Radula of the same type as in the 
species previously mentioned. 

I have figured several specimens to show the variations of form 
and sculpture. When mature the shell always has a pretty solidly 
thickened peristome. The young are more translucent and show 
projecting points of epidermis along the minute granular spiral lines, 
as in B. unifasciatus, and like that species show a distinct peripheral 
paler band. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) Bauri Dall. Plate XV, fig. 12; Plate XVII, figs. 7, 15. 
Bulimulus ( Nesiotus) Lauri Dall, Nautilus, VII, p. 54, September, 1893. 
Hibernating on the under side of leaves of plants at the south- 
west end of Chatham Island, 1,600 feet above the sea, Dr. Baur. 
Jaw thin, light horn colored, arcuate, of equal height throughout, 
with blunt ends; anterior surface with about 12 broad, flat, crowded 
ribs, their outer edges reinforced and their ends bluntly denticulat- 
ing the upper and lower edges of the jaw. 

Radula long and narrow; formula about 1 ; rachidian 


15-+-9°9+-15 
tooth and nine perfect laterals, differing little from those of the 
other species already described; marginals with the inner cusp 
broad and bifid or at the extreme margin trifid, the outer cusp 
broken up more or less irregularly into several denticles or groups 
of denticles. 

Genitalia essentially as in B. nuz. 

This is a very distinct little species, with a pale yellow-brown 
body whorl darkening toward the tip of the spire, with conspicuous, 
lighter transverse wrinkles on the upper whorls, and fine ribbing 
on the nepionic shell which is of a livid purple, almost black. In 
specimens which have survived hibernation, the aperture is usually 
produced, contracted, and conspicuously thickened. Many speci- 
mens have a narrow, pale line in front of the suture. There is no 
spiral sculpture. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) amastroides Ancey. Plate XV, fig. 16. 


Bulimulus ( Nesiotus) amastroides Ancey, Bull. Soc. Mal. de France, IV, p. 
293, 1887. 

Bulimulus jacobi Stearns, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., XVI, pp. 381, 426, 1893, 
not of Sby. 


Bulimulus calvus yvar.? Stearns, op. cit., p. 427. 
Chatham Island, U.S. Fish Commission. 
This is the smooth form of which the plicate aspect is B. curtus of 


Reibisch and Anceyi of Dall. Jaw membranaceous, horn colored, 
29 


442 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


low, wide, thin, of equal height throughout, ends terminating 
bluntly ; anterior surface with about 22 broad, crowded ribs, their 
outer edges thickened, their ends bluntly denticulating the upper 
and lower margins of the jaw. 

The shell has an olivaceous tint which distinguishes it at once 
from the mostly reddish or yellowish-brown species of which the 
fauna contains so many, 

Bulimulus (Nesiotus) curtus Reibisch. Plate XV, fig. 13; Plate XVII; fig. 8. 


Bulimulus (Nestotus) curtus Reibisch, Isis, 1892, p. 9, t. i, fig. 14. 
Bulimulus ( Nestotus) amastroides Ancey, var. Anceyz Dall, Nautilus, VII, 
p- 53, September, 1893. 


Chatham Island, near Wreck Bay, at a height of 1,600 feet, Baur ; 
usually on the under surface of the leaves of plants. Also reported 
from Chatham by Wolf (Reibisch) in grassy places and on the 
trunks of trees, at from 900 to 2,000 feet, and by the U.S. Fish Com- 
mission. 

This is very closely related to B. amastroides Ancey, of which it 
is probably an offshoot. It has, in general, a more plicate surface, 
ruder aspect, smaller mouth, and more angular periphery. Speci- 
mens submitted by Herr Reibisch as representing his curtus agree 
exactly with the types of my variety Anceyi. 

Jaw as in typical amastroides. Radula long and narrow; formula 

1 ; rhachidian tooth tricuspid; laterals tricuspid; both 


11-+9°9-+-11 
with the lateral cusps quite short; marginals subquadrate, low, 
wide, with a longer bifid inner cusp and an outer, shorter cutting 
edge with three or four denticles upon it. 

Genitalia essentially as in B. nua. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) canaliferus Reibisch. Plate XV, fig. 14. 


Bulimulus (Pelecostoma) canaliferus Reibisch, Isis, 1892, p. 18, t. ii, fig. 6 ; 
Stearns, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., XVI, pp. 415, 428, 1893. 


Chatham Island, in moss and on ferns, 900-2,000 feet, Wolf, fide 
Reibisch. 

This is a peculiar shell, characterized by its many-whorled spire, 
short aperture, and a large umbilicus with its walls deeply exca- 
vated, so that the groove shows as a prominent ridge on the pil- 
lar within the aperture. In the specimen sent by Herr Reibisch 
the edge of the aperture is hardly thickened and not at all reflected, 
there is a thin callus deposit over the body, but no trace of a parie- 
tal tooth. The species, with a totally different surface, has some- 
what the form of B. rugiferus, but with a less slender and shorter 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 443 


spire. Reibisch’s figure gives the impression of a more slender shell 
than the specimen I have examined. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) sculpturatus Pfeiffer. 


Bulimus sculpturatus Pfr., P. Z. S., 1846, p. 29 (Gal. Is.). Mon. Hel. 
viv., I, p. 183, 1848; IV, p. 476, 1859. 

Bulimus ( Nesiotus) sculpturatus Pfr., Mal. Blatt. ii. Vers., p. 161, 1854. 

Bulimus sculpturatus Reeve, Conch. Icon., pl. XX, fig. 125, 1848. 

Bulimulus ( Omphalostyla) sculpturatus H. & A. Ads., Gen. Rec. Moll., ii, p. 
161, 1855. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotes) sculpturatus Martens, in Albers, Heliceen, Ed. ii, p. 
220, 1860. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) sculptusatus Pir., Nom. Hel. viv., p. 254, 1881; Rei- 
bisch, Isis, p. 10, 1892; Stearns, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xvi, p. 427, 1893. 

The particular island to which this species, collected by Darwin, 
belongs, is not known. I have not been able to obtain a specimen 
for examination. Reeve’s figure recalls a specimen of B. Simrothi 
in which the lip has not yet been developed fully, but if his meas- 
urement is correct, the shell should be a little larger as well as more 
slender than in B. Simrothi. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) rugiferus Sowerby. 


Bulimus rugiferus Sby., P. Z. 8., 1833, p. 36 (James Id.), Conch. IIl., fig. 
40, 1833. 


Cochlicellus rugifer Beck, Index, p. 63. No. 11, 1838. 

Bulimus rugiferus Desh. in Lam. An. s. Vert., Ed. ii, vol. viii, p. 276. 
1838. Pfr. Mon. Hel. viv., II, p. 115, 1848. Reeve, Conch. Icon., XX, fig. 
118, 1848. 


Bulimulus ( Omphalostyla) rugiferus H, & A. Ad., Gen. Rec. Moll., UH, p. 
161, 1855. 

Bulimulus ( Westotes) rugiferus Martens, in Albers, ed. ii, p. 220, 1860. 

Bulimulus ( Nesiotus) rugiferus Pfr., Nom. Hel. viv., p. 254, 1881. Reibisch, 
Isis, 1892, p. 9. Stearns, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., X VI, p. 427, 1893. 


James Island, Cuming. 

This species is related to B. nesioticus and B. Reibischi from both 
of which it is distinguished by details of form. I have seen a num- 
ber of specimens, but all were from the original series in the Cumin. 
gian Collection. 

Bulimulus (Nesiotus) nesioticus Dalln.s. Plate XVI, fig. 1. 

Shell small, thin, pale brown, with two nepionic and five subse- 
quent whorls; spire slender, suture distinct, umbilicus small or ob- 
solete, apex rather blunt with an axial dimple, nepionie whorls 
transversely ribbed with fine, even regular riblets with about equal 
interspaces; the next whorl is sculptured with fine spirals, close set, 
under which are fine transverse wrinkles; the subsequent whorls 
show a more or less variable transverse ribbing, in which the ribs 
have a tendency to break up and vary in direction ; these are crossed 


444 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


by fine, often granulose spirals, which are swollen where they cross 
the riblets; aperture small, throat yellowish, the pillar white, widely 
reflected without any terminal plait or callus, outer lip thickened, 
somewhat expanded, continuous with the pillar and a slight callus 
on the body. Length 12, breadth 5 mm. 

James Island, U. S. Fish Commission. 

This interesting species was obtained on James Island in small 
numbers, one specimen fresh but none living, the one figured has 
rather sparser ribbing than the best preserved specimen. Most of 
them are bleached white. The shell appears to be intermediate in 
character and size between B. seulpturatus as figured, and B. rugi- 
ferus Sby. It was at first referred to the latter species, but further 
study showed B. nesioticus to have two whorls less in the same 
length and to be a perceptibly stouter shell. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) Reibischi Dall. Plate XVI, fig. 4. 

Bulimulus ( Nesiotus) Retbischit Dall, Nautilus, viii, p. 126, March, 1895. 

Shell elevated, slender, with nine whorls of a pale ferruginous 
color and rather solid consistency ; sculpture like that of B. nesioti- 
cus but rather more closely ribbed ; the suture distinct, somewhat 
appressed, whorls little inflated but not flattened; umbilicus a mere 
chink ; aperture oval, higher than wide, rounded in front, the pillar 
simple, the margins thickened but not reflected ; length 11.0, diame- 
ter 2.5 mm. 

Indefatigable Island, two specimens, U. 8. Fish Commission. 

This shell, though shorter, is intermediate between such forms as 
B. chemnitzioides and the more normal Nesioti. It is named in 
honor of Herr Paul Reibisch, of Dresden, who recently worked up 
the land shells collected by Wolf in these islands, in a paper to 
which I have made frequent reference. 

Bulimulus new species. Plate XV, fig. 15. 

Shell of about nine whorls, small, slender, with flattish sides, 
almost cylindrical, transversely finely wrinkled, suture distinct; 
aperture small, the outer lip sharp, the pillar lip short, broadly re- 
flected, without plait or projecting callus; length 11.5, breadth 2.5 
mm. 

One specimen found on James and two on Indefatigable Island, 
Reibisch in Litt. 

The above description and figure are taken from a photograph 
kindly submitted to me by Herr Reibisch. I refrain from naming 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 445 


the species as the last mentioned gentleman had over two years ago 
announced his intention of describing it, but has so far, I believe, 
published nothing referring toit. As a distinct form from any pre- 
viously reported from these islands, I have thought best to briefly 
indicate it. 


Bulimulus (Newsiotus) chemnitzioides Forbes. Plate XVII, fig. 4. 


Bulimus chemnitzioides Fbs., P. Z. S., 1850, p. 55, pl. ix, fig. 6; Pfr., Mon. 
Hel. Viv., III, p. 303, 1853; Kiister in Chemn. Conch. Cab., ed. ii, Budimus 
No. 113, pl. 31, figs. 21-23. 

Bulimus ( Nesiotus) chemnitzioides Pfr., Vers. Malak. Blatt., p. 160, 1855. 

Bulimulus ( Omphalostyla) chemnitzioides H. & A. Ads., Gen. Rec. Moll., ii, 

. 161, 1855. 
Bulimulus ( Pleuropyrgus) chemnitzioides Martens in Albers Heliceen, ed. ii, 
p. 221, 1860; Pfr., Nom. Hel. Viv., p. 254, 1881; Reibisch, Isis, 1892, p. 12, t. 
li, fig. 4; Stearns, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XVI, p. 381, 1893. 

Bulimulus ( Pleuropyrgus) lima Reibisch, Isis, 1892, p. 18, t. ii, fig. 5. 


On Chatham Island, at 300-600 feet elevation, with B. perspec- 
tivus Pfr., on rocks and under stones, Wolf; on the leaves of plants 
at 1,600 feet elevation, near the southwest end of Chatham Island, 
Dr. Baur; also Kellett, Habel and the U.S. Fish Commission. 

The younger specimens named lima by Reibisch though appar- 
ently differing somewhat in form, appear to grade directly into the 
others. This species sometimes shows a small but distinct parietal 
tooth or callosity, but this is quite exceptional. 

Jaw almost membranous, thin, light horn-colored, slightly arcu- 
ate, of almost equal height throughout, low, wide, with blunt ends 
and margins bluntly denticulated by the broad ends of the ribs; 
anterior surface with about 20 broad, flat ribs, reinforced at their 
outer edges and separated by very narrow interstices. 

Radula long and narrow, formula about 1 ; rhachidian 

22-4-8°8--22 
tooth tricuspid as in the other species; perfect laterals about eight 
on each side, bicuspid; marginals low, wide, with one inner long 
bicuspid cutting point and ashorter wide outer cutting edge broken 
up into three or more denticles. 

The specimens examined anatomically were so much shrunken 
by the alcohol and had genitalia so little developed that they could 
not be satisfactorily dissected. This species is connected so closely 
by such forms as B. Reibischi and B. rugiferus with the typical 
Nesioti that it is obvious that they should be referred to the same 
section of the genus. The nepionic whorls are usually decorticated 
and smooth, but when perfect, show the usual transverse ribbing. 


446 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Bulimulus (Nesiotus) Habeli Stearns. 


Bulimulus ( Pleuropyrgus) Habeli (Stearns MS.) Dall, Nautilus, Jan., 1892, 
p- 99; Stearns, Nautilus, Dec., 1892, p. 86; Stearns, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 
xvi, pp. 382, 428, 1893. j } 

Bulimulus ( Pleuropyrgus) terebra Reibisch, Isis, (Oct.) 1892, p. 14, t. ii, fig. 


3. 

Chatham Island, Habel, U.S. Fish Commission Steamer Alba- 
trossand Dr. G. Baur, under stones near the shore, at the southwest 
end of the island (typical form) ; Chatham Island, under stones and 
on mossy rocks in the moist region, 900-2,000 feet above the sea, 
Wolf fide Reibisch (B. terebra). 

The specimen of B. terebra submitted by Herr Reibisch is slightly 
larger, more dull colored and has a more evident umbilicus than the 
typical specimens of Habeli which were obtained in a more unfavor- 
able station, but the differences do not appear to be sufficient to be 
worthy of a specific name, at least judging from the material I have 
been able tostudy. No specimens of B. Habeli containing the soft 
parts have been received by me. The nepionic whorls are usually 
decorticated and smooth, but when perfect show extremely fine 
transverse ribbing. In the single specimen I have seen of the 
variety terebra Reibisch the nepionic ribbing is coarser and more 
evident. 


Pupa (Leucocheila ?) Wolfii Miller. Plate XVII, fig. 14. 


Pupa (Leucochila) Wolfit Miller, Reibisch, Isis, 1892, pt. 3, p. 15, t. ii, fig. 
ibe 
Pupa (Leucochila) munita Reibisch, Isis, 1892, pt. 3, p. 15, t. ii, fig 9. 

? Pupa Eyriesii Drouet, Essai Moll. Terr. Guyane Frangaise, p. 71, pl. ii, fig. 
16-17, 1859. 


Guayaquil, Ecuador, Wolf, fide Reibisch, op. cit.; Albemarle 
Island, on bushes near the shore, Wolf; on bones of dead tortoises, 
Albemarle Island, Baur ; on the trunks of trees, Iet-la-Mer, French 
Guiana, Drouet. 

Several specimens of a minute Pupa were obtained by Dr. Baur 
adhering to dry bones picked up on Albemarle Island. According 
to their age these show the following denticles in the aperture: 1. 
On the body isa deeply grooved prominent tooth which in some 
specimens is so far bifid as to appear like two slender teeth close to 
each other, this is present on all the specimens; 2. On the pillar, 
well up near the body a small but very distinct horizontal lamella, 
present in all specimens, but less developed in the younger ones; 3. 
Well within the lip is a series of small short denticles side by side, 
longer in the direction of the whorls; the first almost vertically be- 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 447 


low the parietal denticle is small, the next to the right, close to it, 
is higher, slightly bifid at the tip when most completely developed 
and longer in an antero-posterior direction than either of the others ; 
the third is small like the first, and the fourth and last (in any of 
the specimens seen) is still smaller and appears only after the others 
are well developed. The figure of P. Wolfii given by Reibisch 
shows the parietal, columellar and three basal denticles; in the fig- 
ure of P. munita the fourth basal and another denticle in the angle 
between the body and the pillar have appeared. Drouet’s figure of 
P. Eyriesii has the parietal tooth represented as double, while the 
columellar tooth is present only two of the basal denticles appear. 
All these figures are poor and the resemblance between them, allow- 
ing for bad drawing, are so close and the differences between the ac- 
tual specimens I have studied are so great, that am strongly inclined 
to believe they will all prove to be the stages of one and the same 
species. Even Reibisch’s P. clausa which is somewhat smaller than 
those above referred to, shows differences of denticulation from P. 
Wolf not greater than are observable in the different ages of some 
North American species. 

Pupa (Leucocheila ?) clausa Reibisch. 

Pupa (Leucochila) clausa Reibisch, Isis, 1892, pt. 3, p. 15, pl. U, fig. 10. 

On bushes near the sea, Indefatigable Island, Wolf. 

This form differs from the most fully developed P. Wo/fii in hav- 
ing one more denticle on the pillar near its base, in having the 
other teeth more strongly developed, and in being slightly smaller. 
According to Reibisch it has 4% whorls, while P. Wolfii-munita has 
from 5 to 54 turns. It is so difficult to fix on a common point in 
settling where the first apical whorl ends, that I do not put much 
confidence in differences of less than a full turn. It can only be 
decided by study of a large number of specimens whether this spe- 
cies is distinct from the P. Wo/jii or not, and at present the material 
is not accessible. 

Herr Reibisch wrote in February, 1894, that he had three or four 
well differentiated species of Pupa from different islands, but, so far, 
I have not noticed any publication of them, and have not been able 
for eighteen months to obtain any information as to the whereabouts 
of Herr Reibisch himself. 
tTrochomorpha Bauri Dall. Plate XV, figs. 8, 9. 

Zonites ( Hyalinia) Bauri Dall, Nautilus, V, p. 98, Jan., 1892. 

South Albemarle Island, on weathered bones of tortoises, Dr. 
Baur. 


448 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


The single specimen of this interesting form is not quite adult, 
and the slight angulation at the periphery may be lost in the fully 
mature shell. The fine spiral striation which characterizes the spe- 
cies recalls that of several Polynesian species. The close resem- 
blance to TZ. caleulosa Gould, of Tahiti, leads to the query as to 
whether the unnamed “ Helix” collected by Darwin, and said to be 
identical with a Tahitian species not named, may not have been this 
species. It can only provisionally be referred to the group Trocho- 
morpha, as the animal is unknown. 


Conulus galapaganus Dall. Plate XV, fig. 11. 

Conulus galapaganus Dall, Nautilus, VII, p. 55, Sept., 1893. 

Under leaves at 1,600 feet elevation, southwest end of Chatham 
Island, Dr. Baur. 

This species is close to C. fulvus but has five whorls to four ina 
specimen of fulvus of the same diameter. It hasa very well marked 
suture and the whorls between the sutures are more convex than in 
fulvus. The height is greater in C. galapaganus in proportion to the 
number of whorls. It seems to differ from C. fulvus and related 
forms by its smaller size, very brilliant surface, inflated whorls and 
number of turns. It has no spiral striation like that of T. Bauri, 
and, in short, seems like an elevated, dwarfed inflated C. fulvus. 


Vitrea chathamensis Dall. Plate XV, figs. 3, 10. 

Hyalinia chathamensis Dall, Nautilus, VI, p. 54, 1893. 

On dead leaves at an elevation of 1,600 feet, southwest end of 
Chatham Island, Dr. Baur. 

This is a small, thin, straw colored shell, much like V. arborea 
Say, depressed, with four rounded whorls, a distinct suture, the 
polished surface sculptured with numerous slightly flexuous radial 
indented lines; the umbilicus is deep, exhibiting all the volutions, 
but rather narrow. The aperture is like that of H. arborea. 


Succinea Bettii Smith. Plate XV, fig. 6. 

Succinea Bettii Smith, P. Z. S., 1877, p. 72, t. xi, fig. 8. 

Succinea Wolfi Reibisch, Isis, 1892, pt. 3, p. 16, t. 2. fig. 12 a-b. 

Charles Island, H. M.S. Peterel, U. S. Fish Commission ; James 
Island at James Bay, Dr. G. Baur; Chatham Island, 900-2,000 feet 
in the moist region, among moss and stones and on herbage, Wolf; 
South Albemarle Island? on dry bones of turtles, young specimens 
only, Dr. Baur. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 449 


This species very closely resembles the British S. putris, the spec- 
imen figured by Jeffreys in his British Conchology might almost be 
interchanged with a specimen from James Island as regards its gen- 
eral form. The Galapagos shell, however, has a less even surface, 
being somewhat irregularly wrinkled with a dull unpolished aspect. 


Succinea brevior Smith. Plate XV, fig. 4; Plate XVI, fig. 8; Plate XVII, fig. 9. 


Succinea Bettit var. brevior Smith, P. Z. 8., 1877, p. 77. 
Succinea brevior Dall, Nautilus, VII, p. 56, Sept., 1893. 


Found near Black Beach, Charles Island, at about 1,000 feet ele- 
vation on thestems of shrubbery; the stems were of a grayish-brown 
color, covered with small lichens, Dr. Baur. 

Jaw arched, high, thick, horn-colored, the ends acuminate and 
recurved ; anterior surface without ribs, cutting edge with a median 
projection ; upper interior margin with a quadrate insertion plate as 
usual in the genus. 

Radula long and narrow, formula 1 ; rhachidian tooth 

24+6°6-+24 
tricuspid ; on each side six bicuspid laterals, each with the usual 
thinning on the lower edge of the base of attachment; marginals 
low and wide, the inner cusp larger and longer, bifid, the outer 
cusp with several denticles; the extreme laterals lose the distinction 
between the cusps and show a somewhat irregularly serrate cutting 
edge. 

This species closely resembles a small specimen of S. obliqua Say, 
its color is less ruddy and paler than in S. producta, but the apex is 
even more vividly rosy ; the axis is pervious in the last whorl, but 
not as in S. Bettii clear to the summit of the shell. It is readily 
distinguished from either of the other Galapagos species by its short 
rather blunt spire. 


Succinea producta Reibisch. Plate XV, fig.7; Plate XVI, fig. 10; Plate XVII, fig. 5. 


Succinea ( Tapada) Wolft var. producta Reibisch, Isis, 1892, pt. 3, p. 16, t. ii, 
fig. 12 c. 


Chatham Island, 900-2,000 feet elevation, in moist places among 
moss and stones, Wolf; southwest end of Chatham Island, on damp 
lava rocks of a blackish color often covered with very small lichens, 
Dr. Baur. 

Jaw light born-color, strong, thick, high, strongly arched with 
the ends rapidly shortened to a point, the interior upper margin 
with the usual quadrate insertion plate; anterior surface without 
ribs, the cutting edge with a short, wide, mesial projection. 


Radula long and narrow, formula about 1__; rhachidian 
26+-14°14-+4 26 


450 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


tooth tricuspid ; 14 perfect laterals with two rather widely separated 
cusps, the outer shorter; the lower edge of the base of attachment 
thinned out as usual in the genus; marginals low, wide, bicuspid, 
the cusps subdivided into minor denticles giving a serrate look to the 
outer marginals. 

This species is of a reddish-yellow color, with the apex of a pro- 
nounced rosy tint, the surface somewhat rough as in S. Bettii, from 
which it differs by its more produced spire and the manner in which 
the outer lip is bent over so as to reach the body whorl vertically 
instead of obliquely. Only young, and very few even of the young, 
are quite as slender as the one figured by Reibisch. The outer lip 
in fully adult specimens is more expanded than in S. Bettii, both 
have a gyrate and pervious axis, but the S. Bettii has it more open 
than the other species. 


Succinea corbis Dall. Plate XV, fig. 5. 

Succinea corbis Dall, Nautilus, VII, p. 55, Sept., 1893. 

South Albemarle Island, on dry bones of turtles, Dr. Baur. 

Shell small, of two and a half whorls, to which a black mould ad- 
heres with tenacity. The first whorl and a half are salmon-pink in 
the adult, but in the young of that size are pale amber colored. 
The shell resembles S. producta in form, but is smaller and has a 
more contracted aperture, it is instantly recognized when examined 
with a good lens, by its surface, which is minutely shagreened all 
over with an excessively fine network of closely reticulated incised 
lines, Alt. of shell 7, max. diam. 4°5, extreme length of aperture 4 
mm, 

The remarkable sculpture is not visible to the naked eye except 
as a sort of hoary bloom on the surface ; under a compound micro- 
scope it looks like closely woven basket work. I have examined a 
great many Succineas without finding any other species possessing 
this character, but, from the description, S. soliduda Pfr. from Christ- 
mas Island, in the Indian Ocean, must have somewhat such a sur- 
face. Mr, Edgar A. Smith (P. Z.S., 1887, p. 518) states that S. 
solidula has “the texture of very fine linen, or minute criss-cross 
lines,” which fairly well describes the surface of S. corbis. 8S. soli- 
dula exhibits the further peculiarity of having a slight but evident 
internal thickening of the peristome, but as the specimens of S. cor- 
bis are all evidently immature or not fully grown, they would show 
nothing of such a character even if the fully adult possesses it. A 
close examination of the black earthy substance with which the 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 451 


shells are nearly covered, leads to the suspicion that it is composed 
of the execreta of the animal itself, as it is laid on in little sausage- 
like or subcylindrical masses and attached by a dry substance, re- 
calling the silvery streaks left by crawling slugs. 


Leptinaria chathamensis Dall. Plate XVI, fig. 9; Plate XVII, fig. 16. 


Leptinaria chathamensis Dall, Nautilus, V, p. 98, 1892; Stearns, Proc. U. 8. 
Nat. Mus., xvi, pp. 418, 428, 1893. 

Bulimulus (Pelecostoma) cymatoferus Reibisch, Isis, 1892, pt. 3, p. 14, t. ii, 
fig. 7. 


Chatham Island, on ferns 1,600-2,000 feet above the sea, Dr. 
Baur ; also on dry bones of tortoises, South Albemarle Island, Baur. 

Shell small, horn-colored, with a blunt apex and six rounded 
whorls; suture very distinct, surface polished, delicately marked 
with lines of growth ; base rounded, relatively rather widely umbil- 
icated; aperture with the margin hardly thickened, rounded in 
front and at the suture; pillar broad, thin; body with a single ele- 
vated, thin, sharp lamina, extending spirally inward from a point a 
little behind the peristome and nearly equidistant from the inner 
and outer lips; alt. of shell 3.0, max. diam. 1.6 mm. 

Analogous forms are found in the mountains of the Panamic 
region and on several of the Pacific Islands. As all the American 
species are believed to belong to Leptinaria, as distinguished from 
Tornatellina, I have no hesitation in referring this species to the 
American type. The radula of this form is extremely minute and 
difficult to find when boiled out in liquor potassze. I sacrificed sev- 
eral specimens without success, and the tooth figured is from a 
sketch by Mr. Binney. His slide has deteriorated so much in keep- 
ing that I have been unable to find the radula upon it after long 
scrutiny. 


Helicina (Idesa) nesiotica Dall. Plate XV, figs. 1,2; Plate XVII, fig. 12. 

Helicina (Idesa) nesiotica Dall, Nautilus, v, p. 97, Jan., 1892; Stearns, Proc. 
U.S. Nat. Mus., xvi, p. 418, 1893. 

Helicina Wolfi Reibisch, Isis, 1892, pt. 3, p. 17, t. ii, fig. 13; Stearns, Proc. 
U. 8. Nat. Mus., xvi, p. 416, 1893. 

On the leaves of plants 1,600 feet in elevation, near the S.-W. end 
of Chatham Island, Dr. Baur; Albemarle Island, Reibisch in Jitt. 

Shell small, depressed, with rounded periphery, base moderately 
convex, and peristome not thickened nor reflected ; epidermis of a 
bright reddish chestnut, polished, but with obvious regular incre- 
mental lines; base with a thin white callus merging into the lower 
lip without notch or angle; spire depresssd, suture very distinct, 


452 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


not channelled; operculum smooth, whitish, angulated only at the 
upper extreme; alt. of shell 2.3, max. diam. 3.3 mm. 

This was the first species of the family to be reported from the 
Galapagos. The type is not known from the west slope of the 
Andes, though it would be rash to infer that it may not yet be found 
there ; it is present in the Panamic province. Though first obtained 
from Chatham Island Herr Reibisch writes that he has now received 
examples from the Albemarle Island. 

An examination of the radula shows points of interest. The rha- 
chidian tooth has a distinct cusp which is wanting in the Helicinas 
heretofore figured ; there are one major and three minor laterals. 
The inner pair are channelled on the back and have a simple out- 
wardly directed cusp; the next is smaller, with the cusp pointing 
inward. The major lateral appears very differently according to 
the position in which it is viewed. In the normal position the cusp 
is large, short with about seven subequal denticles, the base is plain 
and without accessory projections; the uncini are numerous, close- 
set, simple and very small, Formula 1 


Auricula stagnalis Orbigny. 


Auricula stagnalis Orbigny, Mag. de Zodl., 1835, p. 23, No. 3. 

Auricula granulina Anton, Verz., p. 48, 1839. 

Auricula papillifera Kiister, Auric., p. 25, t. 3, figs. 9, 10, 1844. 

Ellobium granulinum H. & A. Adams, P. Z. 8., 1854, p. 7. 

Ellobium stagnale H. & A. Adams, Gen. Rec. Moll., il., p. 238 ; Wimmer, 
Sitzb. k. Akad. Wiss., Wien, Bd. lxxx, p. 44, No. 87, 1879. 

Panama and Guayaquil, Orbigny and Adams; Tumaco Island, 


Cuming; Bindloe Island, Habel fide Wimmer. 


Melampus trilineatus C. B. Adams. 


Auricula trilineata Adams, Pan. Shells, Ann. Lyc. Nat. Hist., N. Y., V, pp. 
436, 543, 1852. 

Melampus trilineatus Pfeiffer, Mon. Auric., p. 44, 1856; Wimmer, Sitzb. k. 
Akad. Wiss., Wien, Ixxx, p. 44, 1879. 

Panama, Adams; Hood Island, Habel, fide Wimmer. 


Tralia panamensis ©. B. Adams. 


Auricula panamensis Adams, Pan. Shells, Ann. Lye. Nat. Hist., N. Y., V, 
pp. 438, 542, 1852. 

Tralia panamensis H, & A. Adams, P. Z. 8., 1854, p. 10; Wimmer, of. cit, 
p. 45, 1879. 


Hood and Charles Islands, Habel, fide Wimmer; Panama and 
Taboga, C. B. Adams; Cocos Island, U.S. Fish Commission. 
Genus PEDIPES (Adanson) Scopoli. 
Pedipes (Adanson) Scopoli, Intr. Hist. Nat., p. 392, 1777. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 453 


Pedipes angulatus C. B. Adams. 


Pedipes angulata C. B. Adams, Pan. Shells, Ann. Lyc. Nat. Hist., N. Y., V, 
pp- 431, 542, 1852. 

Pedipes angulatus Pfeiffer, Novit. Conch., I, p. 24, t. 6, figs. 26-28, 1854; 
Wimmer, 9. cit., p. 45, 1879. 


Panama, Adams; Bindloe Island, Galapagos, Habel, fide Wim- 


mer. 


Genus SIPHONARIA Sowerby.!2 
Siphonaria gigas Sowerby, 


Siphonaria gigas Sowerby, Tank. Cat., p. vi, No. 808, 1825; Reeve, Conch. 
Teon., Siphonaria, pl. 1, fig. 3. 
Siphonaria characteristica Reeve, op. cit., pl. 2, figs. 8 a-b. 


Charles Island, U. S. Fish Commission ; Peru, Cocos Island, Pan- 
ama and north to the Gulf of California. 


Genus WILLIAMIA Monterosato. 


Ancylus sp. ( Gussoni) Costa, Cat., p. 20, 1829; Scacchi, Cat., p. 18, 1836. 

Patella sp. Phil., Enum. Moll. Sicil., I, p. 255, 1836; II, p. 84, 1844. 

Nacella sp. Cpr., Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 1864, I, p. 474, No. 15; Cooper, 
Geogr. Cat. Moll., Cala., p. 23, 1867. 

Stphonaria ( Liriola) sp. Dall, Am. Journ. Conch., VI, p. 37, 1870. 

Piltscus subg. Allerya Mérch, Journ. de Conchyl., Vol. XXYV, p. 210, 1877. 
Not 4lerya Bourguignat, Atti Accad. Sci. Let. ed. Arti. di Palermo, VI, pp. 
1-7, 1876. 

Scutulum Monterosato, Ann. Mus. Civ., Genova, IX, p. 427, 1877. 

Not Scutulum Tournouér, Bull. Soc. Geol. de France, 1869 ( Zchinide), 

Lirwola sp. Dall, Journ. de Conchyl., XX VI, p. 68, 1878. 

Anisomyon ? Dall, Journ. de Conchyl., XX VII, p. 287, 1879; (? Meek. Am. 
Journ. Sci. & Arts, 2, X XIX, p. 33, pl. 1, 1860). 

Gadinia sp. Jeffreys, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 1870, p. 11. 

Williamia Monterosato, Nom. Conch. Medit., p. 150, 1884. 

Umbrella sp. Cossmann, Cat. Coq. Fos. env. Paris, IV, p. 326, 1891. 

Parascutum Cossmann, Cat. Coq. Fos. env. Paris, V, p. 78, 1892. 


Type W. Gussoni (Costa) of the Mediterranean and Azores; 
other species are the W. Krebsii Mirch, West Indies, W. vernalis 
Dall, Monterey, Cala., W. peltoides Cpr., of the Gulf of California 
and south to the Galapagos. 

The synonymy of this interesting little genus of Siphonariide had 
become so complicated that it seemed best to take this opportunity 
of clearing it up. The wide distribution of the species is partly due 
to their habit of perching on floating sea-weeds. 


12 Siphonaria scutellum Deshayes, was referred to the Galapagos Islands by 
Carpenter, owing to a confusion between its true locality, Chatham Island, New 
Zealand, with the Galapagos Chatham Island. This species according to 
Deshayesis identical with 5S. od/igwata Sby. described sixteen years earlier in 
the Tankerville Catalogue. 


A54 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Williamia peltoides Carpenter. 


Nacella peltoides Carpenter, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 1864, i, p. 474, No. 15; 
Suppl. Rep. Brit. Assoc., 1863, pp. 418, 545. 

Nacella subspiralis Carpenter, Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci., iii, p. 213, 1866 ; Suppl. 
Rep. Brit. Assoc., 1863, pp. 612, 640, 

Siphonaria (Liriola) peltoides Dall, Am. Journ. Conch., vi, p. 37, 1870; 
Journ. de Conchyl., xxvi, p. 68, Jan., 1878. 

Anisomyon peltoides Dall, Journ. de Conchyl., xxvii, p. 288, Oct., 1879. 

Nacella subspiralis Wimmer, Sitzb. k. Akad. Wiss., Wien, Ixxx, p. 41, 
1879. 


Siphonaria ( Williamia) peltoides Stearns, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xvi, p- 
384, 1893. 


Chatham, Charles and Hood Islands, dead on the beach, Dr. 
Habel ; northward to Panama, Mazatlan, Cape St. Lucas, San Diego 
nd the Santa Barbara Islands, California. The variety vernalis 
Dall, which will require to be specifically separated from peltoides, 
extends from the Santa Barbara Islands northward to Monterey, 
Purissima, Lobitas and Crescent City, California. It is much larger 
than either of the others. 

The Nacella subspiralis and peltoides of Carpenter are undoubt- 
edly conspecific with the Galapagos shell, which from its perching 
habit on fronds of Laminaria may be widely distributed by ocean 
currents. The well known Ancylus Gussoni of Costa belonging to 
the South European fauna is congeneric, and from the shells alone 
it is doubtful if the species could be separated. The W. Krebsii of 
Morch is extremely similar, and it is possible that all three should 
be specifically united, but until the anatomy has been compared it 
is probably best to keep them distinct. I figured the dentition and 
jaw of W. vernalis and W. Gussoni in the Journal de Conchyliologie 
in 1878 and 1879, showing specific differences between them, but 
the West Indian and West American tropical forms have not yet 
been examined. 

M. Cossmann has described a species, W. Raincourti, from the 
Eocene of Chaumont, Paris Basin, which differs from the recent 
species in being radially striate; this seems to partially bridge the 
gap between the latter and the upper Cretaceous Anisomyon. 
Onchidium Lesliei Stearns. 

Onchidium Lesliei Stearns, Nautilus, VI, p. 87, Dec., 1892; Proc. U. 8. 
Nat. Mus., XVI, No. 942, p. 383, pl. 51, figs. 2, 8, 1893. 

Living between tide marks on Charles and Albemarle Islands, U. 
8. Fish Commission. 

Dr. Stearns’ description is as follows: 

“Form rounded ovate, nearly as broad as long. Dorsum coria- 
-ceous, nearly black, shiny, closely irregularly reticulated with finely 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 455 


incised lineation, and otherwise characterized by somewhat distant, 
flatly rounded papillz. Under side dingy, yellowish white ; margin 
of mantle wide, nearly smooth; edge of same simple. Anal open- 
ing posterior near edge of mantle and somewhat produced. Respir- 
atory orifice smaller, in median line with and in front of anus; sex- 
ual orifice anterior, on the right side under the edge of the large 
oral hood or collar; labial palpi thin, largely expanded. Dimen- 
sions: Length 37.5; breadth 31.5 millimeters. These proportions 
vary slightly in different individuals.” 


Onchidella Steindachneri Semper. 


Onchidella Steindachnert Semper, Arch. Phil. Bd. III, Heft. VI, p. 296, 
1883; Stearns, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., XVI, p. 384, pl. 51, figs. 4, 5, 1893. 


Charles Island, Habel; Charles and Albemarle Islands, between 
tide-marks, U. S. Fish Commission. 

Dr. Stearns’ remarks are as follows : 

“ A well marked species; edge of mantle prettily fringed on the 
under side with rather regularly placed trifoliate processes ; dorsum 
entirely covered with closely set, rounded, granular papille, which 
also cover the surface of the wide mantle margin beneath, up to the 
edge of the creeping disk. Color dark grayish or smoky black 
above ; dingy whitish on the under side. Anal orifice posterior, 
central just behind the end of the creeping disk? Respiratory ori- 
fice on the right side near the vent; sexual orifice anterior near the 
tentacle or oral appendage, under the edge on the right side. Length 
about 20, breadth about 17 millimeters. These proportions vary 
somewhat in different specimens. Some allowance must be made for 
the contraction caused by the alcohol in both the above and O. 
Lesliei. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY. 


SowErBy, GeorGE BrRerriIncHAM. Conchological Illustrations, 
Bulinus, parts 31, 34, 35 and 142, 1833-41. London, G. B. Sowerby, 
1841, 8°. 

This work was issued in parts and when completed the letter 
press, or portions of it, was reprinted and the whole issued as a vol- 
ume dated 1841. The parts in the copies which I have seen do not 
have any dates, but Pfeiffer cites the list of Bulinus as 1833 (Mon. 
Hel. Viv., i, p. xxxii, 1848). It is probable that part 142, contain- 
ing B. rugulosus was issued in 1859, but the plates containing the 
other Galapagos species may be as early as 1833. 

SowERBY, GEORGE BRETTINGHAM. Descriptions of new species 
of shells collected by Hugh Cuming. Proc. Zool. Society of Lon- 
don, 1833, part i, pp. 72-74. 


456 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


This article contains descriptions of several species of Bulimulus 
afterward figured in the Conchological Llustrations. 

BroperRip, WILLIAM JoHN. Description of new species of shells 
collected by Hugh Cuming. Proc. Zool. Society of London, 1832, 

. 125. 
3 Though this is the first reference to Cuming’s Galapagos land 
shells, only one species, 5. nua, is described from Charles Island. 

PreirrerR, Dr. Lupwic. Description of thirty new species of 
Helicea belonging to the collection of H. Cuming, Esq. Proce. Zool. 
Society of London, 1846, pp. 28-29. 

This article describes two new species of Bulimulus collected by 
Charles Darwin at the Galapagos Islands. 

DaRwWIN, CHARLES. Journal of Researches into the Natural 
History and Geology of the countries visited during the voyage of 
H. M.S. Beagle round the world, under the command of Captain 
Fitz Roy, R. N. New York, D. Appleton & Co., 1882, 8°. X, 519 
pp. from the second English edition of 1860. See Chapter xvii, pp. 
372-401, and especially the notes on mollusea, pp. 390-91. 

This celebrated work first appeared in parts 1844-45, and was 
published by Murray. The “ Zoology of the Beagle” edited by 
Darwin, contains no reference to the mollusea collected. 

Forses, Pror. Epwarp. On the species of mollusca collected 
during the surveying voyages of the Herald and Pandora by Cap- 
tain Kellett, R. N. C. B., and Lieutenant Wood, R. N. Proce. Zool. 
Society of London, 1850, pp. 53-56. 

In this article the Bulimulus chemniizioides and achatellinus 
Forbes, upon which two subgenera have subsequently been founded, 
are described and other species collected at the Galapagos Islands are 
enumerated with comments. All are said to have been collected on 
Chatham Island. 

ALBERS, JOHANN CHRISTIAN. Die Heliceen, nach natitirlicher 
Verwandtschaft systematisch geordnet. Berlin, Enslin, 1850, 8°, 
262 pp. 

i this volume, pp. 162-3, the Galapagos Bulimuli are grouped 
together under the name of Nesiotus. In the second, posthumous 
edition, (Leipzig, Englemann, 1860) issued under the supervision and 
revision of von Martens, Nesiotes is substituted for the earlier name, 
and two of the species set off into new sections ; for chemnitzioides the 
name Pleuropyrgus is proposed, and Forbes’ achatellinus is removed to 
Buliminus (where it does not belong) and made the type of the sub- 
genus Rhaphiellus, following Pfeiffer (Vers. einer Anordnung der 
Heliceen, Malak. Bliitt, ii, pp. 112-160, 1856). 

REEVE, Lovett. Conchologia Iconica, vy, Mon. Bulimus, 1848- 
50. London, Reeve, Benham & Reeve, 1850, 4to. 

Most of the species described at that time from the Galapagos are 
more or less accurately figured in this work. 

CARPENTER, Dr. Pattie PrEAarsaLy. Report on the present 
state of our knowledge with regard to the mollusca of the west coast 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 457 


of North America. Report of the British Association for the Ad- 
vancement of Science for 1856. London, Taylor & Francis, 1857, 
a2. 

The mollusks of the Galapagos Islands are discussed and enum- 
erated pp. 358-62. These include twenty species of Pulmonates. 

SmirH, Epcar A. Account of the Zoological Collection made 
during the visit of H. M.S. Peterel to the Galapagos Islands. Mol- 
lusea. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1877, pp. 72-3. 

Three of the already known species are enumerated, and Succinea 
Bettii Smith with its variety brevior are described as new. 

Ancey, C. F. Nouvelles contributions malacologiques, vi; 
Etudes sur la faune malacologique des iles Galapagos. Bull. Soc. 
Malac. de France, iv, pp. 293-299, July, 1887. 

A new species and several new varieties are described and the 
fauna briefly discussed. 

Wimmer, Avucust. Zur Conchylien-Fauna der Galapagos In- 
seln. Sitzber. der k. Akad. der Wissenschaften, Wien Bd. Ixxx, 
pp. 1-50, Dec., 1879. 

This paper, based chiefly on the shells collected by Dr. Habel, 
refers to two species of Bulimulus and four Auriculide, the latter all 
new to the fauna. 

Dati, WitiiamM HeALEy. On some types new to the fauna of 
the Galapagos Islands. Nautilus, Jan., 1892, Vol. v, pp. 97-99. 

In this short article the presence of Pupa is announced, and Hel- 
icina (Idesa) nesiotica, Leptinaria chathamensis, Zonites (Hyalinia) 
Bauri and Bulimulus (Pleuropyrgus) Habeli (Stearns, MS.) are 
described from collections made by Drs. Habel and Baur. 

ReiBiscH, Paut. Die conchyliologische Fauna der Galapagos 
Inseln. Abh. Ges. Isis in Dresden, iii, pp. 1-20, taf. i-ii, October, 
1892. 

This paper discusses the land shells of the group and is chiefly 
based upon the collections of Dr. Wolf, Government geologist of 
Ecuador, though referring to collections made by others. A large 
number of forms supposed to be new are described and figured. 

Srearns, Dr. R. E.C. Scientific results of explorations by the 
U. S. Fish Commission Steamer Albatross, No. xxv. Report on the 
mollusk fauna of the Galapagos Islands with descriptions of new 
species. Proceedings of the U.S. Nat. Mus., xv, No. 942, pp. 353- 
450, pl. 50-52, August, 1895. 

This important paper discusses the mollusk fauna of the islands 
at large, both land and marine forms, especially those of shallow 
water and the shores. The deeper dredgings from the last expedi- 
tion are not included and will be worked up later. References to 
previous lists of the fauna are very full and the discussion of the 
land shells includes some suggestions of serious importance. 

Dati, Witu1amM Heatey. Preliminary notice of new species of 
land shells from the Galapagos Islands collected by Dr. G. Baur. 
Nautilus, September, 1893, Vol. vii, pp. 52-56. 


30 


458 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


In this article Bulimulus (Nesiotus) duncanus, B. amastroides 
Ancey var. Anceyi, B. jacohi var. vermiculatus, B. olla, B. tortu- 
ganus, B. Bauri, Hyalinia chathamensis, Conulus galapaganus and 
Succinea corbis are described as new, and the relationship of the 
Nesioti to the North American Bulimuli of the type of serperastrus 
is pointed out. 

Dau, WiuittAmM Heatey. New species of land shells from the 
Galapagos Islands. Nautilus, March, 1895, Vol. viii, pp. 126-7. 

Bulimulus (Nesiotus) Reibischi and B. Tanneri are described as 
new. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 


Norr.—Since the figures are of different degress of magnification, 
the length of each shell in millimeters follows the reference to each 
figure. 


PLATE OX V, 
Fig. 1. Helicina (Idesa) nesiotica Dall, base, lat. 3.7 mm. ; p. 451. 
Fig. 2. Helicina (Idesa) nesiotica Dall, profile; p. 451. 
Fig. 3. Vitrea chathamensis Dall, base, lat. 3 mm.; p. 448. 
Fig. 4. Suceinea brevior Smith, alt. 12 mm.; p. 449. 
Fig. 5. Suceinea corbis Dall, alt. 7.0 mm.; p. 450. 
Fig. 6. Succinea Bettii Smith, alt. 12 mm.; p. 448. 
Fig. 7. Succinea producta Reibisch, alt. 11.5 mm.; p. 449. 
Fig. 8. Trochomorpha? Bauri Dall, alt. 1.5 mm.; p. 447. 
Fig. 9. Trochomorpha? Bauri Dall, base, lat. 2.2 mm.; p. 447. 


Fig. 10. Vitrea chathamensis Dall, lat. 3 mm.; p. 448. 

Fig. 11. Conulus galapaganus Dall, lat. 2.5 mm.; p. 448. 

Fig. 12. Bulimulus Bauri Dall, alt. 10 mm.; p. 441. 

Fig. 18. Bulimulus curtus Reibisch, alt. 9.6 mm.; p. 442. 

Fig. 14. Bulimulus canaliferus Reibisch, alt. 9.5 mm.; p. 442. 
Fig. 15. Bulimulussp.n., alt. 11.5 mm., from photograph ; p. 444. 
Fig. 16. Bulimulus amastroides Ancey, alt. 10 mm.; p. 441. 


PuatEe XVI. 


Fig. 1. Bulimulus nesioticus Dall, alt. 12 mm.; p. 448. 

Fig. 2. Bulimulus olla Dall, alt. 15 mm.; p. 487. 

Fig. 3. Bulimulus planospira Ancey, alt. 19.25 mm.; p. 482. 
Fig. 4. Bulimulus Reibischi Dall, alt. 10.5 mm.; p. 444. 

Fig. 5. Bulimulus Tanneri Dall, alt. 11 mm.; p. 4388. 

Fig. 6. Genitalia of Bulimulus nuzx var. incrassatus Pfr. consider- 


bly magnified; the male and female orifices (IX, X) 
open into a single vestibulum and are separated here by 
an accident of dissection ; I, albumen gland; II, herma- 
phoditie duct ; III, ovotestis; IV, oviduct or uterus; V, 
prostate; VI, retractor penis; WII, penis sac; VIII, 


SS 


Bel” eal aaienll 


1896.] 


Bigs 7. 
Pig. r ee 
Big 9 
Fig. 10. 
Fig 

Fig. 14. 
Bigs cL. 
Fig. 2. 
Fig. 3. 
Fig. 4. 
Fig. 5. 
Big?) G: 
Rip, _7. 
Fig. 8. 
Fig. 9. 
Fig. 10. 
Bigs it. 
Fig. 12. 
Fig. 13. 
Fig. 14. 
Fig. 15. 
Fig. 16. 


NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 459 


vas deferens; IX, male; and X, female orifice, accidentally 
parted; XI, duct of spermatheca; XII, spermatheca. 
From a drawing by W.G. Binney, Esq., p. 429. 
Bulimulus duncanus Dall, alt. 17.5 mm.; p. 438. 
Succinea brevior Smith, camera lucida outline of jaw, con- 
siderably magnified ; p. 449. 

Leptinaria chathamensis Dall, alt. 3.5 mm.; p. 451. 
Succinea producta Reibisch, outline of jaw, magnified, from 
camera lucida sketch ; p. 449. 


ig. 11, 12, 18. Bulimulus Simrothi Reibisch (tortuganus Dall) 


showing variation in individuals and character of surface ; 
alts. respectively 12.25, 11.0 and 10.75 mm.; p. 440. 
Bulimulus cinereus Reibisch, alt. 8.5 mm. ; p. 437. 


PLATE XVII. 


Figures all drawn from camera lucida sketches. 


Jaw of Bulimulus rugulosus Sby., much magnified; p. 
431. 

Jaw of Bulimulus Simrothi Dall; p. 440. 

Teeth of Bulimulus ventrosus Reibisch, central and inner 
lateral, 3a two extreme outer laterals or marginals; p. 
434. 

Rhachidian and innermost lateral teeth of Bulimulus 
chemnitzioides Forbes; 4a, three of the outermost laterals ; 
p. 445. 

Rhachidian, inner lateral and 5a, two outer lateral teeth 
of Succinea producta Reibisch ; p. 449. 

Rhachidian and adjacent laterals and 6a, one of the outer- 
most laterals of Bulimulus unifasciatus Sby.; p. 439. 
Rhachidian tooth and adjacent laterals and 7a, two outer 
laterals of Bulimulus Bauri Dall; p. 441. 

Rhachidian tooth, adjacent laterals and 8a, two outer 
laterals of Bulimulus curtus Reibisch ; p. 442. 
Rhachidian tooth, adjacent lateral and 9a, two more mar- 
ginal laterals of Succinea brevior Smith; p. 449. 
Rhachidian and two adjacent lateral teeth and 10a, an 
outer lateral and marginal tooth of Bulimulus nua var. 
inerassatus Pfr.; p. 429. 

Jaw of Bulimulus unifasciatus Sby.; p. 459. 

Rhachidian tooth, laterals of one side and part of the 
uncini of Helicina nesiotica Dall; p. 451. 

Jaw of Bulimulus achatellinus Forbes; p. 428. 

Pupa Wolfii Miller (Bauri Dall, MS.) alt. 2.5 mm.; p. 
446. 

Jaw of Bulimulus Bauri Dall; p. 441. 

Single tooth of Leptinaria chathamensis Dall, from a 
sketch by W. G. Binney, much magnified; p. 451. 


460 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Aveust 4. 
The President, SAMUEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 
Twelve persons present. 


A paper entitled ‘‘ New and Interesting Eocene Mollusca of the 
Gulf States,” by Gilbert D. Harris, was presented for publication. 


Aveust 11. 
Mr. BensAMIN SmitH LyMay, in the Chair. 


Seven persons present. 


Aveust 18. 


Mr. BenJAMIN SmirH LyMAy, in the Chair. 


Seven persons present. 


Avcust 25. 
The President, SamurEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 
Thirteen persons present. 


Mr. Thomas Chalkley Palmer was elected a member. 
The following was ordered to be printed :— 


il i ee 


= 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 461 


ON THE HEMIPENES OF THE SAURIA. 
BY E. D. COPE. 


In the course of preparation of a work on the scaled reptiles of 
North America for the Smithsonian Institution, it has become nec- 
essary to examine some neglected parts of the anatomy. This I 
have recently done for the hemipenes of the Ophidia, with results 
of considerable importance to the systematic indications.’ In the 
present paper I give the results of a similar investigation into the 
corresponding part of the auatomy of the lizards. Very little at- 
tention has been given to the subject hitherto, and our knowledge 
up to 1856 is thus summarized by Stannius: “ A duplication or 
bifurcation of each organ is present in Lacerta and in Platydactylus 
guttatus. The copulatory organs of the Chamaeleonide are distin- 
guished by their shortness. In various Varanidae which have been 
investigated the internal cavity (external when protruded) has 
transverse concentric folds. A fissure interrupts these folds so that 
they are not complete annuli. The extremity is acuminate and ex- 
pands at the base, forming a kind of glans.” 

In 1870° J. E. Gray describes and figures this organ of Varanus 
heraldicus, giving the best illustration that I know of. Besides 
these references I know of nothing later. 

As was to have been anticipated, I have found these organs to 
correspond with the rest of the structure, and to furnish invaluable 
aids to the determination of affinities among the Sauria. Reference 
to them cannot be omitted henceforth in cases where the other 
characters render the question of affinity uncertain. 

In the Sauria the male intromittent organ or hemipenis, presents 
much variety of structure, showing some parallels to the correspond- 
ing part in the snakes. It is, however, rarely spinous, as is so gen- 
erally the case in the Ophidia, the only spinous forms being, so far 
as I have examined, the American Diploglossinz and genera allied 
to Cophias. The higher Sauria have the apical parts modified as 


1 Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, 1895, p. 187. 
2 Zootomie der Amphibien, p. 266. 
3 Annals Magaz. Nat. History, 1870, VII, p. 283. 


462 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


in the Ophidia, by the presence of calyculi. Such are characteris- 
tic of the Rhiptoglossa and Pachyglossa. The Nyctisaura possess 
the same feature. The Diploglossa, Helodermatoidea and Theca- 
glossa have the organ flounced, the flounces often pocketed or 
_repand on the margin. In the Leptoglossa we have laminae only; 
in the Tiidze mostly transverse, and in the Scincidae mostly longi- 
tudinal. In various genera terminal papille are present. The 
organ may be simple or bifurcate or merely bilobate. I have not 
met with the case so common in Ophidia, where the sulcus spermati- 
cus is bifureate and the organ undivided. 

The structures of the hemipenis havea constant systematic value. 
As in the Ophidia, the value differs with the character, but it varies 
from generic to superfamily in rank. 

In the Chamaeleonide the greater part of the surface of the hem- 
ipenis is coarsely calyculate, generally in a transvere direction, 
There are remarkable papillze at the apex, which differ in the differ- 
ent forms. In C. pardalis there isa kind of membranous apron 
proximad of the papille which presents an apex proximad opposite 
to the sulcus spermaticus. In C. vulgaris and C. gracilis the papil- 
lee are erect, laminiform and transverse and serrate on the edges. 
The principal pair have a few papillz in front of and behind them, 
and in C. gracilis there is, behind these, on each side, an oval body 
which is composed of three serrate lamine packed obliquely together. 
In C. gracilis the proximal laminz are low and have a margin of 
acute tubercles, and each serves as a collar to a much larger papilla. 
The latter is largely free and tongue-shaped, with the apex proxi- 
mad, and its flat external surface is covered with three or four rows 
of conic papille. 

I have had the opportunity of examining the hemipenis of a 
relatively small number of species of the Agamidae; the surface is 
generally calyculate. I have not found terminal papille in the 
genera Uromastix, Agama, Liolepis, Physignathus or Calotes. The 
general construction is, that opposite the suleus spermaticus is a 
strong longitudinal welt. Near the apex this welt becomes adher- 
ent to the side on which the sulcus runs, dividing the organ into two 
apical portions. The sulcus bifureates and passes along the base of 
this partition. In Liolepis there are two welts enclosing a smooth 
space between them. In Calotes cristated/us there is a lesser welt on 
each side of the principal one. In all the genera the basal part is 
smooth, and it is sometimes thrown into longitudinal folds. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 463 


I have examined the hemipenis in thirty species of the Iguanide 
of the following genera: Anolis, Xiphocercus, Polychrus, Basiliscus, 
Ctenosaura, Cyclura, Iguana, Corythophanes, Sauromalus, Crotaphy- 
tus, Dipsosaurus, Sceloporus, Callisaurus, Holbrookia, Enyalioides, 
Doryphorus, Microlophus, Uraniscodon and Phrynosoma. These 
differ in the bifurcation of the organ, varying from undivided 
(Cyclura, Iguana) to deeply bifurcate (Anolis, Doryphorus, Micro- 
lophus, Uraniscodon). Other differences are seen in the number of 
welts and their surface structure, and the distribution and size of the 
calyces. Thus the calyces extend to the base in Anolis, but are 
confined to the apex in Crotophytus. They exist in series only in 
Cyclura, Iguana, Ctenosaura, Corythophanes and Sauromalus. They 
cover most of the organ in Sceloporus and Phrynosoma. The syste- 
matic arrangement of the genera in accordance with the characters 
is as follows: 

I. Calyces always present. 

A. Three welts, one opposite the sulcus spermaticus and one 

parallel on each side of it transversely laminate: CrEno- 
SAURA, CycLura, Iguana, CoRYTHOPHANES, SAUROMA- 
Lus, CROTAPHYTUS. 

B. Three welts; one opposite sulcus, the others on each side 
of sulcus converging to median welt, and enclosing spaces 
with it; surfaces calyculate. 

= Median welt confluent proximad : Dresosaurus, 

LiocepHaLus, PHRYNOSOMA. 

2 « Median welt projecting free proximad : CALLISAU- 

Rus, HOLBROOKIA. 

No median welt; lateral welt from sulcus : ScELOPORvs. 
A median, no lateral welts; calyculate. 
= Not bifurcate; welt wide: ENyALIorpEs (calyces 
coarse). 
2 = Bifureate; welt long and narrow: ANOLIs (caly- 
ces minute). 
E. No welts. 
= Deeply bifurcate; calyces confined to branches: 
Microitopuus, URANISscoDON, DoRYPHORUS. 
= « Shortly bifurcate; calyces extending proximad of 
branches: BAsrLiscus. 
II. No calyces or welts. 
: Bifurcate; surface coarsely wrinkled: PoLycu- 
RUS. 


9a 


464 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


In the genera Ctenosaura, Cyclura, Iguana, Sauromalus and 
Enyalioides (laticeps) the organ isentire; in the others it is bilobate 
or bifurcate. 

Of the Nyctisaura I have examined the hemipenis in the genera 
Thecadactylus, Platydactylus, Phyllodactylus and Gymnodactylus. 
In these this organ is short and wide, appropriately to the fragility 
of the tail. It isalso more or less deeply divided into two branches. 
The entire surface is calyculate, generally minutely so. In Thecadac- 
tylus each fork has three strong welts. In Platydactylus there is a 
welt opposite the sulcus which is very large in P. aegyptiacus, and 
divides, sending a half into each branch. In Gymnodactylus pul- 
chellus the welts are not so heavy, below the bifurcation is a welt 
which encloses a circular area which is incomplete proximad. In 
Eublepharis the hemipenis is closely similar to that of the Gecconide. 
It is short and deeply bifurcate; it has a single prominent welt. 
The surface of this is smooth, but the remainder of the surface is 
calyculate. 

Of the Zonuridz I have only seen the hemipenis of Z. cordylus. 
It is short and swollen, so that the spiral structure is accentuated ; 
there is a rigid welt opposite the sulcus, which leaves a triangular 
space at one side proximad, which is finely calyculate. On the oppo- 
site side of the welt distad, is a wide space with radiating laminz 
from a smooth center. The presence of calyculi noted is excep- 
tional in the Diplogossa, and indicates approximation to the Pachy- 
glossa as far as it goes. 

In the Anguide the hemipenis presents well marked characters, 
which distinguish the genera and perhaps the subfamilies. In 
Celestus the extremity carries an osseous spicule of relatively large 
size. Distad of the flounces are more (C. stenurus) or less (C. 
badius) numerous longitudinal series of recurved osseous spines 
which are longer near the sulcus spermaticus. In C. stenwrus the 
flounces are apiculate at regular intervals; organ undivided. In 
the Gerrhonotine the flounces are cupped and continue to the apex 
without spines ; in Barissia and Gerrhonotus the organ is bifureate, 
in Elgaria simple. 1n Anguisa welt on each side of the sulcus has 
tubercular cross-ridges, and the remainder of the surface is marked 
with oblique folds with tubercular margins forming a chevron 
which is directed distad. In Pseudopus apus the organ is not sym- 
metrical. Opposite the sulcus is a low, broad, smooth welt, and on 
each side the sulcus is margined by a thin welt or lip. This is 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 465 


coarsely plicate transversely, the plicae extending to the welt. On 
the other side, the transverse plicae terminate at a band of fine lon- 
gitudinal folds. In Ophisaurus the organ is undivided, and there 
is a welt with one edge and the proximal end free. It is covered 
with robust papille. 

In Xantusiidae the hemipenis is bifurcate and is shortened as in 
many Gecconidae, appropriately to the fragile tail. There is a welt 
on each side of the sulcus spermaticus which follows a short spiral 
direction. Opposite to the sulcus are two short, thick welts, which 
have the direction of parts of consecutive threads of a screw. All 
of the welts are deeply cross-folded. 

In the Tiidz two types may be observed of the structure of the 
hemipenis, but I have not had access to sufficient materia! to enable 
me to refer all the genera to the one or the other. In the typical 
members, as in the genera Dracaena, Tupinambis, Amiva and Cne- 
midophorus, the pattern consists of numerous delicate, imbricate, 
transverse laminz which are closely applied to each other. Oppo- 
site the sulcus all the genera display a welt, which has free borders. 
These are entire in Dracaena and pectinate in Amiva and Cnemido- 
phorus; between these and the borders of the sulcus is a rounded 
welt on eachside. The lamine are sublongitudinal, diverging prox- 
imad from the sulcus; on the first welt they turn sharply distad ; 
between this and the welt they make a second chevron distad, turn- 
ing proximad. Proximad of the median welt these laminz meet, 
forming a curve or chevron turned proximad. In Cnemidophorus 
there is one less chevron. In this genus and Amiva there is a 
strong, fleshy papilla at the apex of each tract between the welt and 
sulcus. 

A modification is seen in Centropyx (pelviceps). Here there is a 
narrow welt opposite the sulcus; on each side of the sulcus a prom- 
inent welt diverges from it proximad and approaches the proximal 
end of the median welt, so as to enclose aspace with it. It is trans- 
versely plicate and the enclosed space on each side the median welt 
has the delicate transverse lamination characteristic of the Tiidz. 
What is entirely peculiar is the presence at the apex of each of the 
laminate spaces of a large patch of acute flexible papille. 

The plan is the same in Anadia bogotensis, but the details are dif- 
ferent. The organ is bifurcate. A strong welt opposite the sulcus 
is divided into fine longitudinal folds, which are crimped trans- 
versely. The space between this and the sulcus is marked with 


466 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


folds which diverge distad from the welt and become longitudinal, 
and are transversely crimped. In the longitudinal direction of the 
plicee this genus differs from the Tiide, and it is likely that 
Ecpleopus and other allied genera are similar. 

In a third type represented by Heteroclonium bicolor,* a welt 
bounds the sulcus on each side. The space between these is marked 
by a few feeble cross folds, and the borders support a single series 
of closely placed recurved spines. Genera allied to Cophias are 
likely to present this structure. 

Of the Lacertidae I have examined the hemipenis in the genera 
Lacerta, Acanthodactylus and Latastia. They are bifurcate and 
bilobate. In each division and proximad to it is an oval area with 
transverse laminz surrounded by a welt. In Acanthodactylus one 
of the areas is marked by longitudinal folds. 

Among the Gerrhosauridae, the hemipenis of Gerrhosaurus nigro- 
lineatus has on its distad third, three welts opposite the sulcus, the 
median larger, all finely cross folded. Between one of these and the 
sulcus is a tract of coarse papille ; between the other and the sul- 
cus the surface is smooth. 

Of the Scincidae I have examined the hemipenis in Trachysaurus, 
Lepidothyris (fernandii), Euprepis (carinatus), Eumeces and Ma- 
buia. They are smooth and with more or less numerous longitudinal 
folds, excepting in Trachysaurus. Here the lamin diverge from 
the sulcus proximad and turn to a horizontal direction, meeting 
opposite the sulcus in a chevron directed distad. In Euprepis eart- 
natus and Ewmeces obsoletus some of the plice are eross-ribbed. In 
Lepidothyris fernandii the organ is shortly bifureate, and each 
division has a membranous welt next the adjacent division. 

In the Anniellidae the genus Annied/a has the entire surface from 
one side of the sulcus to the other, thrown into transverse folds or 


4 HETEROCLONIUM BICOLOR gen. et. sp. noy. 

Char. gen. Frontonasal plates separating nasals ; prefrontals and frontoparie- 
tals absent; nostril in suture between nasal and first labial plate; no interparie- 
tal. Limbs rudimental, two pairs: digits 4-1, the anterior clawed. No femoral 
pores. Different from Sesquipes (type Cophias heteropus Licht. Blgr.) which 
has the digits 4-2 ; and Microdactylus when they are 3-3. Char. specif. Scales 
in annuli of 28 scales, which are angular at the extremities, and alternate with 
those of the adjacent rows. Labials 5-6; temporals 2-2-2. Three large pre- 


Scales of upper surface each with a bluish spot. Total length 130 mm., length 
to vent 78 mm. Bogota; Philadelphia Museum Coll. Two specimens. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 467 


 flounces, which are so wrinkled as to be more or less pocketed, much 
as in Gerrhonotus (Elgaria). Organ undivided. 

Of the Amphisbaenidae the only species of which I have obtained 
a satisfactory hemipenis is the African Monopeltis galeatus Hallow. 
The organ is bifurcate; each branch is marked with fine, close, 
transverse folds, while the region proximad to these has coarser 
folds directed transversely and obliquely. 


31 


468 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


SEPTEMBER 1. 
Mr. CHARLES Morris, in the Chair. 
Eleven persons present. | 
The deaths of Henry C. Ford, August 17, and of George M. 


Conarroe, August 25, members, were announced. 


SEPTEMBER 8. 
The President, SAMUEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 
Fifteen persons present. 


SEPTEMBER 15. 
The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 
Twelve persons present. 


Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :— 

“Fossil Bones of Birds and Mammals from Grotto Pietro 
Tamponi and Gréve St. Alban.” By R. W. Shufeldt, M. D. 

“Contributions to the Zoology of Tennessee. No.4. Mollusks.” 
By Samuel N. Rhoads and Henry A. Pilsbry. 


SEPTEMBER 22. 
The President, SAMUEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 


Fifteen persons present. 


SEPTEMBER 29. 
The President, SamureL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 
Twenty-three persons present. 


Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :— 


“Mammals collected by Dr. A. Donaldson Smith during his 
Expedition to Lake Rudolf, Africa.” By Samuel N. Rhoads. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIa. 469 


“The Hymenoptera Collected by Dr. A. Donaldson Smith in 
Northeast Africa.” By William J. Fox. 

The following were elected members :—J. Howard Breed, 
Effingham B. Morris, Curwin Stoddart, Jr. and Mrs. F. G. Dixon. 

The following were ordered to be printed :— 


470 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


NEW AND INTERESTING EOCENE MOLLUSCA FROM THE GULF STATES. 


BY GILBERT D. HARRIS. 


The following new or interesting fossils belonging to the Lea 
Memorial Collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila- 
delphia haye been put into my hands for description and illustra- 
tion by Rev. L. T. Chamberlain, of New York City. The greater 
part of them were collected by Mr. C. W. Johnson during the 
summers of 1894 and 1895. They are not all new species; but 
many are in such an excellent state of preservation that it has 
seemed worth while to have them figured by the skilled pen-artist, 
Dr. J. C. McConnell, of Washington, D.C. 


JACKSON STAGE. 


Pecten claibornensis Con. PI. XVIII, figs. 1 and 2. 

This species has been frequently referred to, but has not hereto- 
fore been figured. 

Locality, Jackson, Miss. 

Leda regina-jacksonis n. sp. Pl. XVIII, fig. 3. 

This fine species is the Jackson representative of L. opulenta 
Con. of the Claiborne sand. It differs, however, from that species 
(a) in having finer, rounder and not depressed concentric striz ; 
(b) in having directly below the umbo a peculiar, straight, ventral 
margin for some distance; (c) in being less nasute posteriorly, and 
(d) in having the concentric lines on the post-umbonal slope less 
strongly marked and less distinctly interrupted and deflected by a 
radiating depression. 

Locality, Jackson, Miss. 

Meretrix pearlensis n. sp. PI. XVIII, figs. 4 and 5. 

The general characters of the species are shown by the figures. 
The concentric striation is precisely that of Meretrix perovata var. 
aldricht (Bull. Am. Pal., No. 1, p. 48, pl. 1, fig. 1) and the young of 
these two forms sometimes approach each other closely in outline, 
yet there is always noticeable in pearlensis a tendency to become 
elongate, like M. devigata of the Paris Basin. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 471 


Instead of making this a new species, we might speak of it as a 
marked variety of aldrichi, which itself is a variety of perovata Con. 
It seems to us, however, better to designate it by anew name. A 
variety of this species shows concentric lirze over its entire outer 
surface. 


Locality, Jackson, Miss. 
Tellina eburneopsis Con. Pl. XVIII, fig. 6. 
Locality, Jackson, Miss. 


Mactra mississippiensis Con. var. Pl. XVIII, fig. 7. 


Locality, Jackson, Miss. 
Periploma sp. Pl. XVIII, fig. 8, 8a, 8b. 


Owing to the descriptions by Lea and Meyer of two fragmentary 
specimens of Periploma, it is now unsafe to propose a new name for 
this specimen. It differs considerably from either Lea’s or Meyer’s 
figures and diagnoses, but Meyer has stated (Ber. tiber die Senck. 
Nat. Ges. in Frank. A. M., 1887, p. 16) that his P. complicata occurs 
at Jackson. 

Locality, Jackson, Miss. 

Eucheilodon creno-carinata Heilp. Pl. XVIII, fig. 9. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., Vol. 

3, 1880, p. 150. 

Several specimens of this species, of a moderate size and rather 
imperfect, are among the Jackson material of this collection. A 
specimen, perhaps the adult of this species, is shown by fig. 9, pl. 
XVII. The humeral carina, instead of being simply finely crenu- 
late, is regularly nodular; moreover, there are thin, strong, revolv- 
ing ribs on the part of the whorl below the carina. It is quite 
possible this should be regarded as a distinct species, yet it is unsafe 
to propose a new name until more material is at hand. 

Locality, Jackson, Miss. 


Pleurotoma (Ancistrosyrinx) columbaria Ald. 

Aldrich described this species (Geol. Surv. Ala., Bull. 1, 1886, 
p. 31, pl. 6, fig. 9) from a fragment. The Lea Memorial Collection 
possesses a least one perfect specimen. Hence, in continuation of 
Aldrich’s description it may be said: aperture slightly exceeding 
the spire in length; from the dentate carina downward on the body 
whorl to the end of the canal, there are many granular spiral lines ; 
from the dentate carina toward the suture above, two coarse granu- 
lar spiral lines are found ; inside of these spirals the humeral zone 
is smooth, save faint traces of deeply curved longitudinal lines, the 
retral curvature is confined to this smooth zone. 


472 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Harpa jacksonensis n. sp. Pl. XVIII, fig. 10. 

Specific characterization.—Size and general form as indicated by 
the figure; volutions 8; 1 and 2 very minute, smooth; 3 much 
larger, smooth; 4 somewhat larger than 3, showing vertical costz 
in its first half, then assuming the characteristic markings of the 
remaining whorls; costze on the body-whorl nine in number, some- 
what deflected below the suture, asin Drillia; between the cost 
the shell is finely cancellated with a net-work of raised lines; ante- 
rior canal slightly larger than usual for the genus. 

Locality, Jackson, Miss. 

Fusus insectoides n. sp. Pl. XVIII, fig. 11. 

Specific characterization—Size and general outline as figured ; 
whorls 12 or 13; apex acute; upper whorls broadly costate and 
with strong and weak alternating spiral lines; 5 spiral lines on the 
shoulder, decreasing in strength toward the suture; sides of the 
whorls with two or three strong, raised spiral lines, with two weaker 
ones above and two or three weaker ones below; longitudinal lines 
faint, showing only between the coarse spirals; columella twisted 
below; labium sharp and extending some distance away from the 
columella; sutures most remarkably constricted. 

Locality, Jackson, Miss. 

Fusus mortoni Lea, var. near carerus Har. Pl. XVIII, fig. 12. 

We havealready called attention to the variation that this species 
undergoes (Proc. A. N.S. Phila., 1895, p. 72) in the lower Claiborne 
beds. Now we have it from Jackson showing a moderately large 
size in many different forms. The specimen figured is unusually 
smooth; others show stronger spiral lines, especially below the 
carina. 

Locality, Jackson, Miss 
Latirus leaensis n.sp. PI. XVIII, fig. 13. 

Specific characterization.—Size and general form as indicated by 
the figure; whorls 11; 1 and 2 smooth; 3 rather finely costate, re- 
maining spiral whorls with eight rather low costz, considerably 
wider than the interspaces, and arranged so that those on each 
succeeding larger whorl are a little behind those of the preceding 
or smaller whorl, and hence, although in line, the line falls back 
perhaps } revolution from apex to base; spiral lines on each whorl 
6, large, with an equal number of intermediate strie. Body whorl 
ornamented by 8 costs and alternate spiral lines to the end of the 


i 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 473 


eanal. Aperture contracted above and below; columella with 2 
fairly well defined plaits. 

Locality, Jackson, Miss. 

Mazzalina inaurata var. Con. PI. XVIII, fig. 14. 

This is very near to, if not identical with, Conrad’s Mazzalina 
pyrula from the lower Claiborne beds of Alabama. We haye already 
shown in our report on the Tertiary of Arkansas how many forms 
this species assumes. 

Locality, Jackson, Miss. 

Murex marksi Harris. P]. XVIII, fig. 15. 

This, as well as typical marksi from the Eocene of Arkansas, ap- 
proaches very closely to MW. engonatus, and, when specimens enough 
shall have been collected, the two will doubtless be proven identical. 
This has seven costze instead of six. 

Locality, Jackson, Miss. 

Monoceras jacksonium n.sp. Pl. XVIII, fig. 16. 

Specific characterization.—Size and general form as indicated by 
the figure; whorls about 6; the upper 2 or 3 smooth; 4 and 5 
strongly costate medially and below; spiral strize about 8 in num- 
ber; body whorl nearly smooth, with a strongly marked humeral 
zone on which are found about 6 spiral lines; medially smooth ; 
basally more or less strongly spirally striate, with a depressed band 
across which the lines of growth arch forward, hence giving rise to 
a tooth like projection on the subcentral portion of the labrum ; 
columella smooth, labrum lirate within, though the lire do not ex- 
tend far in the interior; anterior canal peculiarly truncated below. 

Loeality, Jackson, Miss. 

Levifusus branneri Harris. Pl. XIX, fig. 1. 

This species was described from a young specimen found in south- 
ern Arkansas. Fragments of larger specimens were found by the 
writer at White Bluff on Arkansas River, and still others in the 
Jackson beds of Mississippi. This is by far the most perfect large 
specimen yet known. Its close relationship to Fulgur must be evi- 
dent to all. 

Locality, Jackson, Miss. 

Siphonalia jacksonia n. sp. Pl. XIX, fig. 2. 

Specific characterization Size and general form as indicated by 
the figure; whorls 7 or 8; marked by 10 rounded, longitudinal 
cost, each in width a little over one-half that of the intermediate 


474 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


spaces, strong from lower suture to greatest diameter of shell, and 
from there decreasing rapidly in size and vanishing before reaching 
the suture above; strong spiral striz about & on each whorl, with an 
equal number of finer alternate lines; columella sharply bent as in 
Strepsidura. p 

Locality, Jackson, Miss. 


Amauropsis jacksonensis n.sp. Pl. XIX, fig. 3. 


Specific characterization.—Size and general form as shown by the 
figure ; whorls 10, the upper 4 to 5 small, the other increasing in 
size rapidly and becoming shouldered ; body whorl large, shouldered ; 
umbilicus none or entirely hidden by a labial callosity. This differs 
from A. perovata Con. by its greater height, the well-defined shoulder 
on each whorl, and the absence of an umbilicus. 

Locality, Jackson, Miss. 


Cyprea pinguis Con. PI. XIX, figs. 4, 4a. 


The specimen herewith figured shows a few spiral whorls. Gener- 
ally, however, they are covered over. 
Locality, Jackson, Miss. 


Cyprea dalli Ald. Pl. XIX, figs. 5a, 6a. 


This was originally described from the Red Bluff horizon of Mis- 
sissippi, yet it is quite abundant, and shows many varietal forms 
at Jackson, Miss. 

Locality, Jackson, Miss. 


CLAIBORNE STAGE. 


Papillina staminea Con. var. Pl. XX, figs. 1, 2, 3, 4. 


Fusus stamineus Con., Foss. Shells Tert. Form., 1833, p, 43, pl. 18, fig. 
14, of 2d ed., 1835. 

There is great confusion among the Claiborne species of Fusus 
and its allies, and here is a most typical example. Papillina stami- 
nea is quite fulgurate in appearance, having a row of compressed 
tubercles on the carina and a long beak. The specimens herewith 
figured show how greatly these features vary. These specimens 
have some parts in common with F. irrasus Con., and we are inclined 
to think all will prove to be one and the same species. The apices 
of this and related species are smooth and blunt. 

Locality, Claiborne, Ala. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 475 


Papillina papillata Con. PI. XX, fig. 5. 


Fusus papillatus Con., Foss. Shells Tert. Form., 1833, p. 29; p. 53, pl 18, 
fig. 8, of 24 ed. 


This large and beautiful specimen came from near Jackson, Ala., 
from the Claiborne sand horizon. Conrad’s figure of the species 
does not show well some of its important characters, hence it is re- 
drawn. Conrad remarks that it is rareat Claiborne. It is certainly 
so in a perfect state of preservation, but portions of its huge. colum- 
ella are quite common in some places. 

Locality, Jackson, Ala. 


LIGNITIC STAGE (UPPER). 


Astarte smithvillensis var. Har. Pl. XX, fig. 6. 


A. smithvillensis Har., Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1895, p. 48, pl. 1, figs. 
8a, 9a, b, c. 


This species is extremely variable, and we have little doubt but 


that this Wood’s Bluff specimen may be referred to it. 
Locality, Wood’s Bluff, Ala. 


Protocardia virginiana? Con. PI. XX, figs. 7 and 8. 

This is probably a variety of the form described by Conrad as P. 
lene or P. virginiana; but since we have no specimens of that spe- 
cies, it is impossible to speak with certainty on the subject. Several 
species of this genus have been described from the Eocene, and it 
will be a serious matter to properly work out their synonymy. This 
form differs from nicolletti by its smaller umbones and smaller size. 


Locality, Wood’s Bluff, Ala. 


Pleurotoma vaughani var. Pl. XX, fig. 9. 
P. vaughani Har., Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1895, p. 57, pl. 4, fig. 8. 
The fine large specimens in the Lea Memorial Collection difler 
somewhat from typical vaughani as found in the lower Claiborne 
beds of Texas. The latter is smaller, less strongly costate, with lirz 
within the labrum. The upper carinal spiral whorl is slightly 
higher in this variety than in the type. 


Cancellaria tortiplica Con. Pl. XX, fig. 10. 

C. tortiplica Con., Am. Jr. Conch., 1865, p. 145, pl. 21, fig. 8. 

Conrad cites this from Texas, but the Alabama specimens ap- 
proach the outlines of his fig. 8, Pl. 21, more nearly than the Texan 
forms do. Aldrich refers this form to evu/sa Brander (Bull. Geol. 
Surv. Ala., 1886, p. 52). 


476 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Cancellaria silverupis n.sp. Pl. XX, fig. 11. 

Specific characterization.—General form and size as indicated by 
the figure; whorls about 6 ; 3 embryonic smooth; others with about 
8 strong spiral lines between the suture above and the suture below ; 
incremental lines especially prominent between the strong raised 
spirals ; labrum sharp at edge but abruptly thickening and varicose 
a slight distance within ; columella concave, two plaits on its sub- 
central portion and one marginal below. 

This species reminds one somewhat of C. quadrata of England and 
C. ulmula of Texas. 

Locality, Wood’s Bluff, Ala. 

Murex morulus Con. Pl. XX, fig. 12. 

In this collection there are specimens of various sizes, and they 
show one marked peculiarity. When small and young the anterior 
canal is long but curved; afterwards it seems to grow no more in 
length, but becomes extremely bent or twisted, and a large umbili- 
cus is formed. 


Locality, Wood’s Bluff, Ala. 


Latirus imbricatulus n. sp. Pl. XXI, fig. 2 


g. 2. 

Specific characterization.—General form and size as indicated by 
the figure; whorls 10; 1-4 embryonic, smooth; the remaining 
spiral whorls with about 7 costze crossed by about 6 very strong re- 
volving strie between which there are an equal number of fine 
spirals. Labrum lirate within; columella very much twisted and 
showing signs of plications, especially at the basal angle. Umbilicus 
not large, but well defined. The most peculiar feature of this spe- 
cies is the imbricate appearance of the incremental lines. This 
strongly reminds one of some of the Muricidx. The general form of 
the species is much like Latirus rugatus Dall from the Ballast 
Point Silex beds. 

Locality, Wood’s Bluff. 


Pyropsis perula Ald. Pl. XXI, fig. la. 

This is such an unusually large and fine specimen, it has seemed 
worth while to have it figured, although it comes from the typical 
locality. 

Sipho? erecta Ald. Pl. XXI, fig. 3. 

We are inclined to regard this beautiful, though imperfect, speci- 
men as an adult form of Aldrich’s S. erecta. The punctate appear- 
ance in the indented spiral lines indicates a relationship to the 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 477 


Tectibranchs. The matter can only be decided when more perfect 


material is at hand. 

Locality, Wood’s Bluff, Ala. 
Cyprea smithi Ald. Pl. XXI, fig. 4. 

This is broader posteriorly than typical smithi, and has a less con- 
spicuous posterior termination of the labium, yet it is most likely of 


the same species. It seems to be the forerunner of C. dalli Ald. 
Locality, Wood’s Bluff, Ala. 
Solarium huppertzi var. Har. Pl. XXI, fig. 5. 

The markings on this specimen are somewhat finer than those of 
typical huppertzi, but this may be only a varietal feature. Again, 
huppertzi was described from a young, small specimen ; this is more 
nearly full grown. 


Solarium sylverupis n. sp. 

Syn. S. texanum Dall, Tr. Wag. Free Inst. Sci., Vol. LI, p. 526. 

After examining the type of tecanum in the Academy’s collection, 
it was found to be the same as Conrad’s serobiculatum. Hence the 
larger, beautiful form described by Dall under the name “ Texanum 
Gabb ” from Wood’s Bluff, must have another name. 

Solariella sylverupis n.sp. Pl. XXI, fig. 6, 

Specific characterization.—Size and general form as indicated by 
the figures; whorls about 6, with about 5 striz on each; slightly 
shouldered at the suture, bearing there a row of beads or tubercles ; 
nacreous within; umbilicus crenate at the periphery, granularly 


striate within, 

Locality, Wood’s Bluff, Ala. 

LIGNITIC STAGE (LOWER). 
Meretrix mortoniopsis var. Hp. Plate XXIJ, figs. 1 and 2. 

The figures represent two well-preserved specimens of this species 
from the lower Lignitic. It seems well to have them accurately 
figured, since their relationship to the species of this genus described 
by Rogers and Conrad from Virginia is still in an unsettled state. 

Loeality, Bell’s Landing, Ala. 

Tellina lignitica n.sp. PI. XXII, fig. 5a. 

Specific characterization.—Size and general form as indicated by 
the figures ; substance of shell very thin; smooth ; 2 cardinal teeth 
in each valve; a furrow in the upper anterior margin of the left 
valve causes the same to form two obscure teeth. 

Locality, Gregg’s Landing, Ala. 


478 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Panopea porrectoides var. Ald. Pl. XXII, fig. 4. 

By comparing our figure with Aldrich’s, it will be seen that typi- 
cal porrectoides is much larger, more developed anteriorly, and with 
umbones nearer the center of the shell. Yet they both belong to the 
same section of the genus, and it is almost certain that the one is 
the ancestor of the other. 

Locality, Gregg’s Landing, Ala. 

Lucina greggin.sp. Pl. XXII, figs. 5 and 6. 

Specific characterization.—Size and general form as indicated by 
the figure; marked exteriorly with concentric lines not deeply in- 
cised; interior with two diverging cardinal teeth and an anterior 
lateral; anterior muscular scar very large and extending from the 
anterior lateral tooth to the basal margin of the shell; posterior 
muscular scar comparatively small, rotund; interior naturally (or 
by disease) much thickened or calloused, a shallow channel extend- 
ing from a little above the upper margin of the posterior muscular 
scar obliquely to near the base of the anterior scar. 

A small specimen, magnified in fig. 5, and probably of this spe- 
cies, shows an extremely deeply excavated ligament pit, reminding 
one of Lucina claytonia. In the old type specimen this pit broadens 
out and the ligament seems to be attached very much as in Dosinia. 

Locality, Grege’s Landing, Ala. 

Pleurotoma nasuta Whitf. Plate XXII, fig. 7. 

This species is extremely variable in ornamentation. Sometimes 
the spiral lines are few and coarse; at other times they are many 
and fine. Our figure shows a specimen of the latter type. 

Locality, Gregg’s Landing, Ala. 

Fusus rugatus Ald. Pl. XXII, fig. 8. 

The specimen figured is more perfect than the type; it shows well 
the characters of the anterior canal, especially its ornamentation. 

Loeality, Gregg’s Landing, Ala. 

Pseudoliva vetusta. Pl. XXII, fig. 9. 

P. vetusta Con. Foss. Sh. Tert. Form., 1833, p. 44. 

The large size to which certain species described originally from 
‘Claiborne often attain in the Bell’s Landing Lignitie has already 
been the subject of various observations. Perhaps no species shows 
to better advantage this tendency than does the present. Note the 
great sutural callosity in connection with like developments on 

Volutilithes petrosus and Rostellaria trinodifera. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 479 


Cassidaria brevidentata Ald. var. Pl. XXII, fig. 10. 

This specimen shows an unusually large number of nodules on 
the humeral carina. In front, the two lower carinze are without 
nodules, while on the back all three carinz are strongly nodular. 


Locality, Bell’s Landing, Ala. 


Levifusus trabeatus Con. Pl. XXII, fig. 11. 
Here is one of the largest and the most compact varieties of this 
species. The labral lire are unusually well marked; the carinal 


nodules are very large but imperfectly defined. 
Locality, Bell’s Landing, Ala. 


Triton (Ranularia) eocenensis ‘Ald. Pi. XXIII, fig. 1. 

Upon the whole, this is the most perfect specimen of this species 
yet found. Its apex is somewhat eroded and might be represented 
a little more acute. Strangely enough, it does not show varices on 
the whorls as is usual in specimens of this species. 


Locality, Gregg’s Landing, Ala. 


Caricella podagrina Dall. PJ. XXIII, fig. 2. 

The specimen herewith figured is so exceptionally fine that it has 
seemed worth while to have it thus specially noticed in our paleon- 
tological literature. 

From the type locality, Bell’s Landing, Ala. 

Fusus bellanus n.sp. Pl. XXIII, fig. 3. 

Specific characterization.—Size and géneral form of the shell as 
indicated by the figure ; whorls 8 or 9; embryonic 3 smooth; others 
marked by from 8 to 10 sharp, flattened peripheral spines, at whose 
base or immediately at the suture a subordinate series of spines oc- 
cur on the larger whorls; canal nearly closed, long, straight ; labial 
eallus thin. 

At first sight this seemed like a large, well-formed F. mohri, but 
on comparing details it was found to be very distinct. 

Locality, Bell’s Landing, Ala. 

Cyllene bellanan.sp. Pl. XXIII, fig. 4. 

Specific characterization Size and general form as indicated by 
the figure; whorls about 8; embryonic 3 small, smooth, others 
finely costate and with fine revolving lines; cost strongest on the 
central portion of the whorls (7. e., on the shoulder) vanishing above, 
reaching the suture below ; columella twisted, Strepsidura-like below ; 
labrum lirate within; exterior of body whorl with extremely fine 


480 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


revolving lines on its central portion, and with coarser lines above 
the carina and near the base. 
Locality, Bell’s Landing, Ala. 


Solarium greggin.sp. Pl. XXIII, fig. 5, 5a. 

Whorls about 5. Nuclear whorls rounded smooth; remaining 
whorls with three crenulate spiral lines and one smooth, strong 
spiral line just above the suture. Periphery above the body whorl 
with one deeply incised spiral line, thus rendering the periphery of 
the body whorl obtuse. Umbilicus small, with radii extending from 
its periphery about 4 way across the body-whorl, and having a 
raised spiral coarsely crenulate carina medially located. 

Locality, Gregg’s Landing, Ala. 

MIDWAY STAGE. 
Pleurotoma (Cithara?) leania Harris. PI]. XXIII, fig. 7. 

This species is rather remarkable for the extreme shallowness of 
the retral sinus. It seems never to attain a much greater size than 
that indicated by the figure (< 23). 

Type, Lea Memorial Collection, Academy of Natural Sciences 
of Philadelphia. 

Loeality, Matthew’s Landing, Ala. 

Pleurotoma (Surcula) ostrarupis Harris. Plate XXIII, fig. 8. 

This species was described from a peculiar looking fragment from 
the Midway beds on Brazos River, Texas. It proves to be quite 
common in the upper Midway of Alabama. 

Locality, Matthew’s Landing, Ala. 


Natica mediavia? Harris. PI. XXIII, fig. 8. 

XN. mediavia Har., Bull. Am. Pal., No. 4, 1896, p. 117, pl. 12, fig. 15. 

While working over a large amount of material from the upper- 
most Midway limestone, as exposed on the Chattahoochee, several 
fragments of N.mediavia were found of the size indicated by the fig- 
ure of the type in Bulletin 4. It was soon found that fragments, too, 
indicated a considerably larger size for some specimens as found 14 
miles northeast of Clayton. Fragments of the body whorl of what 
would seem to be the same species occur at Matthew’s Landing. 
They certainly belong to the species herewith figured. Hence it is 
quite probable that this larger specimen, much compressed vertically, 
belongs to the same species as the smaller specimen figured in Bul- 
letin No. 4. 

Locality, Matthew’s Landing, Ala. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 


PLatTE XVIII. 


Figs. 1 and 2. Pecten claibornensis Con. 
Fig. 3. Leda regina-jacksonis n. sp. 

Fig. 4 and 5. Meretrix pearlensis n. sp. 
Fig. 6. Tellina eburneopsis Con. 

Fig. 7. Mactra mississippiensis Con. 

Figs. 8a. Periploma sp. 

Fig. 8b. Periploma, hinge magnified. 

Fig. 9. Eucheilodon creno-carinata Heilpr. 
Fig. 10. Harpa jacksonensis n. sp. 

Fig. 11. Fusus insectoides n. sp. 

Fig. 12. Fusus mortoni Lea var. near carexus Har. 
Fig. 13. Latirus leaénsis n. sp. 

Fig. 14. Mazzalina inaurata var. Con. 

Fig. 15. Murex markst Harris. 

Fig. 16. Monoceras jacksonium n. sp. 


Puate XIX. 


Fig. 1. Levifusus branneri Harris X #4. 
Fig. 2. Siphonalia jacksonia n. sp. 
Fig. 3. Amauropsis jacksonensis n. sp. 
Fig. 4 and 4a. Cyprea pinguis Con. 
Fig. 5, 5a, 6, 6a. Cyprea dalli Aldr. 


PLATE XX. 


Figs. 1, 2,3 and 4. Papillina stuminea Con. var. 
Fig. 5. Papillina papillata Con. 

Fig. 6. Astarte smithvillensis Har. x 7. 

Figs. 7 and 8. Protocardia virginiana ? Con. * &. 
Fig. 9. Pleurotoma vaughani Har. 

Fig. 10. Cancellaria tortiplica Con. X 3. 

Fig. 11. Cancellaria sylverupis n. sp. 

Fig. 12. Murex morulus Con. 


PuatTe XXI. 


Figs. 1 and la. Pyropsis perula Ald. 

Fig. 2. Latirus imbricatulus n. sp. 

Fig. 3. Sipho erecta Ald. 

Fig. 4. Cyprea smithi Ald. 

Fig. 5. Solarium huppertzi var. Har. x 2. 
Fig. 6. Solariella sylverupis n. sp. 


481 


482 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 
PuatTE XXII. 


Figs. 1 and 2. Meretrix nuttalliopsis Heilpr. 
Fig. 3. Tellina greggi n. sp. 

Fig. 4. Panopea porrectoides var. Ald. 
Figs. 5 and 6. Lucina greggi n. sp. 

Fig. 7. Pleurotoma nasuta Whitf. 

Fig. 8. Fusus rugatus Ald. 

Fig. 9. Pseudoliva vetusta Con. 

. Fig. 10. Cassidaria brevidentata Ald. & 3. 
Fig. 11. Levifusus trabeatus Con. 


PLATE XXITI, 


Fig. 1. Triton (Ranularia) eocenensis Ali, 
Fig. 2. Caricella podagrina Dall. 

Fig. 3. Fusus bellanus n. sp. 

Fig. 4. Cyllene bellana un. sp. X 2. 

Figs. 5, 5a. Solarium greggi n. sp. X's. 

Fig. 6. Pleurotoma (Surcula) ostrarupis Har. * 2. 
Fig. 7. Pleurotoma (Cithara) leania Har. 3. 
Fig. 8. Natica mediavia ? Har. 


4 
q 
: 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 483 


OcTOBER 6. 
The President, SamugeL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 
Forty persons present. 


The Committee on the Hayden Memorial Award reported in 
favor of conferring the recognition for 1896 on Professor Giovanni 
Capellini of Bologna. 


GIOVANNI CAPELLINI was born in Spezia, August 23, 1833. He 
studied in the college of his native city and in the University of 
Pisa. While yet a student he had made important paleontological 
discoveries and was in correspondence with illustrious scientists, 
both Italian and foreign. 

After obtaining his degree in science he made frequent trips in 
France, England, Switzerland, Belgium and Germany. In Sep- 
tember, 1859, he was appointed Professor of Natural History in the 
National College of Genoa. 

In September of the following year he was made Professor of 
Geology and Paleontology in the University of Bologna. 

In 1863 he visited North America. The rich collections then 
made by him in Nebraska and elsewhere are now in the Geological 
Institute of Bologna. In 1864 he made interesting scientific discov- 
eries in the petroleum lands of Wallachia. 

As President of the Second Extraordinary Reunion of the Italian 
Naturalists in Spezia in 1865, he founded the International Congress 
of Anthropology and Prehistoric Archeology. 

In 1872 he travelled in Greece, and in the autumn took an im- 
portant part in the International Anthropological Congresses in 
Brussels. He then travelled in Switzerland, Holland, Austria, 
Hungary, Germany, Spain and Portugal, and returned through 
France and England. 

He was made Vice-President of the First International Geologi- 
cal Congress in Paris in 1878, and obtained its assent that the 
second meeting should take place in Bologna in 1881. Elected 
actual President (in conjunction with Quintino Sella as honorary 
President) of this Congress, he inaugurated the commission for the 
unification of geological nomenclature and a commission for the 
production of a geological map of Europe, outlined at Berlin. To- 
gether meh Sella, he founded, on that occasion, the Italian Geologi- 

2 


484 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


cal Society. In 1885 he directed, in great part, the Third Inter- 
national Geological Congress in Berlin, and contributed not a little 
to its success, as also to that of the Fourth Session in London in 
1888. 

He had now published 140 scientific communications. 

Having served as Rector of the University of Bologna at intervals 
from 1874 to 1888, in the latter year he organized and directed a 
celebration of its Eighth Century, for which he received letters of 
congratulation from all the universities of the world. He has 
been decorated by the Emperor of Germany and other sovereigns. 
The University of Edinburgh conferred upon him through its Rector 
the diploma of Doctor “Honoris Causa.” The University of 
Moscow nominated him honorary Professor. Seventy of the 
principal academies of Europe and America have registered his 
name among their members. He was elected a Correspondent of 
the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia in 1863. 

He is President of the International Commission for the Unifica- 
tion of Geological Nomenclature and President of the Royal Geo- 
logical Survey of Italy. 


Mica Schists of the Schuylkill River.—TuEopore D. Ranp pre- 
sented specimens of mica schist from the river road near Strawberry 
Mansion, Fairmount Park. The nodules resemble very imperfect 
andalusite crystals, but appear to be almost wholly quartz with a 
little kyanite or sillimanite, resembling closely those described by 
the late Dr. George H. Williams, in the Fifteenth Annual Report of 
the United States Geological Survey, p. 665, as occurring on Sligo 
Branch (probably Fairfax Co., Va.) and as suggesting contact 
metamorphism of included fragments. 


OcroBeER 13. 
The President, SAMUEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 
Twenty-three persons present. 


The deaths were announced of Alexander H. Green, August 19, 
1896, and Josiah Dwight Whitney, August 19, 1896, Correspondents. 


OcroBER 20. 
The President, SamMuEL G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair. 


Twenty-seven persons present. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 485 


The Occurrence of Macacus leoninus (Blyth) in Eastern Bur- 
mah—ArtHuR Erwin Brown stated that a young male monkey 
nearly allied to Macacus nemestrinus was purchased by the Zoologi- 
cal Society of Philadelphia in April, 1894, from a person who had 
procured it at Mongnai, in the southern Shan states, Upper Burmah. 
At the time this animal was received, certain peculiarities led him to 
refer it provisionally to M. leoninus (Blyth), but it is only lately 
that he had fully determined this identification to be correct. It has 
now lived in the garden two years and a half and he would suppose 
it to be about four years old, but it has not yet assumed the full 
colors of the male of this species as shown.in Mr. Sclater’s plate’ 
the resemblance between it and the female being still close. The 
general color is pale brown, resulting from the yellow and brown 
annulation of the hairs ; the sides of the body and outside of the limbs 
are rather paler and somewhat grayish ; the horse-shoe mark on top 
of the head is well defined in a darker shade of brown which shows 
also along the back and upper side of the tail and slightly appears 
on the back of the hands and feet. The characteristic red line in 
the bare skin from the outer corner of the eye is well marked, and 
it is interesting to observe that it becomes much brighter in color 
when the animal is excited than at other times. It is doubtful if 
this mark would be at all evident in skins. The specimen is now 
about twenty inches in length from nose to base of tail; the tail 
being about six and a half and without a tuft. 

As compared with nemestrinus of like age leoninus has the muz- 
zle shorter, the superciliary ridges more prominent, the ischial callos- 
ities smaller, the hair about the cheeks, neck and shoulders much 

longer, the spreading whiskers being conspicuous when looked at 
from in front, the face and ears are paler and the iris is distinctly 
hazel brown, while in nemestrinus it is of a paler yellowish-brown. 

It would appear that M. leoninus has heretofore been only known 
to occur in the Province of Arracan, in Western Burmah, on the 
Bay of Bengal, and from a few localities in the Valley of the Irra- 
waddy, the present specimen, therefore, extends the range of the 
species eastward across Upper Burmah to the borders of Yunnan. 
Dr. Griggs, from whom the specimen was procured, fully assured 
the speaker as to the locality. 

The characters of this monkey are very distinct and at its present 
age, when placed side by side with specimens of the southern form 
of pig-tailed monkey, M. nemestrinus, there is no possibility of con- 
fusing them. 


OcTOBER 27. 
The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 


Thirty-one persons present. 


1 Proc. Zool. Soc. of London, 1870, pl. XXXV. 


486 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Papers under the following titles were presented for publication :— 

“New Species of Fresh-water Mollusks from South America,” 
by Henry A. Pilsbry. 

“Geology of the Mussel-bearing Clays of Fish House, N. J.,” 


by Henry A. Pilsbry. 
The death of Baron Ferdinand Von Mueller, a Correspondent, 


October 9, 1896, was announced. 

The following were elected members :— 

Henry A. Laessle, George C. Harlan, M. D., William M. 
Singerly and Henry Beates, Jr., M. D. 

Prof. W. C. Roentgen of Wiirzburg, was elected a Correspondent. 


The following were ordered to be printed :— 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 487 


CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE ZOOLOGY OF TENNESSEE. 
No. 4, MOLLUSKS. 


BY HENRY A. PILSBRY AND SAMUEL N. RHOADS.! 


The following paper concludes the annotated lists of the animals 
of Tennessee, collected and observed by Mr. Rhoads, which have 
appeared in the Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of 
Philadelphia, beginning with page 376, in the volume for 1895. 
The reader is referred to this article for an itinerary of the journey 
through Tennessee, during which the collection of mollusks here 
enumerated was secured. 

The list is restricted exclusively to the collection made by Mr. 
Rhoads in May and June, 1895, no attempt being made, as in pre- 
vious papers of this series, to complete the list. 

The literature of Tennessee mollusks is extensive, nearly all gen- 
eral works on the North American land and fresh water forms con- 
taining descriptions of or references to species from the state. 
There are, however, but few special papers on shells of this area. 
Dr. James Lewis published in the American Journal of Conchol- 
ogy, VI, 1870, p. 188-191, ‘‘ Notes on the Land Shells of East Ten- 
nessee,” based on specimens collected by Miss Annie E. Law. 
Pages 216-226 contain an article “On the Shells of the Holston 
River,” by the same author, likewise from Miss Law’s collection. 
Tryon, in Amer. Jour. Conch., VII, p. 86, reviews Dr. Lewis’ notes 
on Holston River Strepomatide. A third paper by Lewis, “Shells 
of Tennessee (No. 2),” collected by Miss Law, appears in Proceed- 
ings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia for 1872, 
pp. 108-115. A number of other papers by Dr. Lewis, in the same 
Proceedings, and by Prof. A. G. Wetherby, in the Journal of the 
Cincinnati Society of Natural History, deal mainly with Tennessee 
mollusks. 

In species of Unionidew, Tennessee is wonderfully rich. The 
western part of the state, represented in the collection here recorded 


? Prof. H. A. Pilsbry, of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, 
and his assistant, Mr. E. G. Vanatta, identified the entire collection. Chas. 
T. Simpson, of the National Museum, has kindly examined and reported ona 
number of ambiguous and difficult Unionide. All annotations are made by 
Mr. Pilsbry. 


488 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


by the forms taken at Reelfoot Lake, has the typical northern Missis- 
sippi fauna, with a few southwestern species. The special character 
of the Tennessee River system is well known to conchologists; but 
among the species herein catalogued from middle and east Tennes- 
see will be found a number of forms described from Alabama, 
Louisiana and other localities to the south and west, such as Unio 
propinquus, U. pybasit, U. turgidus, U. tumescens, U. caliginosus, 
ete. 


PULMONATA. 
AGNATHA. 
Family CIRCINARIIDZ Pilsbry. 


Selenitide Fischer = Macrocyclis and Selenites Auct. 
1. Circinaria? concava (Say). 

Bellevue (68677)? ; Banks of Emory Riv., Harriman (680676) ; 
Johnson City (68679) ; Road to Cloudland, Roan Mt., 5000 ft. 
(68675). 

AULACOPODA. 
Family ZONITIDA. 
2. Vitrea arborea (Say). 

Samburg, Reelfoot Lake (68689); Raleigh (69104); Sawyer’s 
Springs (69105); Banks Emory Riv., Harriman (68688, 68692) ; 
Allardt (68691); 5 m. S. W. Greeneville (68693) ; Greeneville 
(68694); road to Cloudland, Roan Mt., 3500 to 5000 ft. (68690). 
3. Vitrea indentata (Say). 

Bellevue (68696, 68697). 

. Omphalina kopnodes (W. G. Binn.). 

Samburg, Obion Co. (69106) ; Bellevue (69107). 
. Omphalina fuliginosa (Griff.). 

Banks of Emory Riv., Harriman (68635). 

. Omphalina laevigata (Pfr.). 

Raleigh (68639) ; bank Richland Creek (“‘ Belle Mead”), David- 
son Co. (68642); Bellevue (68637); Sawyer’s Springs, Walden’s 
Ridge (68638) ; bank Emory Riv., near Harriman (68641); John- 
son City (68643). 


» 


or 


f-r) 


? Circinaria Beck, 1837 = Macrocyclis Binney = Selenites Fischer, 1878, 
not Selenites Hope, 1840. 

5 Braketed numbers refer to the catalogue entries of the Academy of Natu- 
ral Sciences of Philadelphia. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 489 


i Omphalina rugeli (W. G. Binn.). 

Roan Mt., Carter Co., 4000 to 6000 ft. (69108, 69109, 69110). 
8. Vitrinizonites latissimus (Lewis). 

Rock Creek, Roan Mt., 3500 to 5000 ft. (68698). 
9. Gastrodonta acerra (Lewis). 

Roan Mt., Carter Co., 5000 ft. (69084). 

10. Gastrodonta intertexta (Binn.). 
Chattanooga (68670). 

11. Gastrodonta ligera (Say). 
Samburg, Reelfoot Lake (68673). 

12. Gastrodonta demissa (Binn.). 
Bellevue (69086). 

13. Gastrodonta capsella (Gld.). 

Belle Mead Farm, near Nashville (69089); Emory Riv., near 
Harriman (69090) ; Roan Mt., Rock Creek (69091). 

14. Gastrodonta gularis (Say). 

Sawyer’s Springs (69092) ; Emory Riv., near Harriman (69098) ; 
Nolachucky Riv., near Greeneville (68094); Roan Mt., Carter Co., 
4000 to 6000 ft. (69095, 69096). 

15. Gastrodonta collisella Pils. 

Emory Riv., near Harriman (69097) ; Johnson City (69098). 
16. Gastrodonta interna (Say). 

Bellevue (68666); Chattanooga (68667); Sawyer’s Springs, 
Walden Ridge (68668) ; bank Emory Riv., Harriman (68669). 


Family LIMACIDE. 
17. Limax campestris Binn. 
Reelfoot Lake (69056); Bellevue (69055) ; Holston Riy., near 
French Broad Junction (69054). 
Family PHILOMYCIDE. 
18. Philomycus carolinensis (Bosc.). 
Reelfoot Lake (69057); Raleigh (69078); Sawyer’s Springs 
(69059) ; Harriman (69058). 
Family ENDODONTIDZ. 
19. Pyramidula perspectiva (Say). 
Samburg, Reelfoot Lake (68650); ‘Belle Mead” farm, near 
Nashville (68649) ; Bellevue (68646) ; Chattanooga (68645) ; Saw- 


490 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


yer’s Springs, Walden Ridge (68653); bank Emory Riv., Harri- 
man (68644); Knoxville (68651); Johnson City (68647); Roan 
Mt., 5000 ft. (68652). 

20. Pyramidula alternata (Say). 

Samburg, Reelfoot Lake (68661); Belle Mead Farm, near Nash- 
ville (69079) ; Bellevue (68663); Williams Isl., near Chattanooga 
(68664) ; Chattanooga (69080) ; Sawyer’s Springs (69081); Knox- 
ville (68662) ; Greeneville (68657) ; Johnson City (69082) ; Rock 
Creek, Roan Mt. (68655) ; Doe Riv., Roan Mt., 4000 ft. (68656). 
21. Pyramidula alternata carinata (Auct.). 

Emory Riv., near Harriman (69083). 

Most Tennessee specimens of this species are more coarsely and 
strongly ribbed than northern and western examples, and there is 
often a more or less pronounced peripheral keel. The culmination 
of this type of shell is P. alternata mordax, of which, however, no 
specimens were taken at localities recorded above. The form called 
var. cartnata contrasts with these, being very fine-ribbed and dis- 
tinctly carinated, and not at all of the mordaz type. Peculiarly de- 
pressed, but not keeled, specimens occurred at Sawyer’s Springs. 
22. Helicodiscus lineatus (Say). 

Belle Mead farm, near Nashville (68681); bank Emory Riv., 
Harriman (68682). 

HOLOPODA. 


Family HELICIDA. 
23. Polygyra plicata Say. 
Emory Riy., near Harriman (69060). 
24. Polygyra troostiana Lea. 

Belle Mead Farm, near Nashville (69061). 
25. Polygyra inflecta (Say). 

Raleigh (68579, 69062); Belle Mead Farm, near Nashville 
(68581); Bellevue (68577); Williams Isl., near Chattanooga 
(68574) ; Chattanooga (68584, 68572); bank Holston Riv., above 
junction of French Broad Riv. (68573) ; Knoxville (68575) ; Green- 
ville (68576) ; Johnson City (69583). 

26. Polygyra rugeli (Shutt.). 

Sawyer’s Springs, Walden Ridge (68571); bank Emory Riv., 

near Harriman (68570). 


— 


1896. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 491 


27. Polygyra fraudulenta Pils. 

Samburg, Reelfoot Lake (68565); Belle Mead Farm, near Nash- 
ville (68566); Williams Isl., near Chattanooga (68569); bank 
Emory Riv., Harriman (68567); bank Doe Riv., 4000 ft., Roan 
Mt. (68564). 

28. Polygyra tridentata (Say). 

Sawyer’s Springs, Walden Ridge (68557) ; Greeneville (68561) ; 
5 m. §. W. Greeneville, bank Nolachucky Riv. (68558); Allardt 
(68562) ; near junction Holston and French Broad Rivs. (68559) ; 
Johnson City (68560); banks Doe Riy., Roan Mt., 4000 ft. 
(68563). 

29. Polygyra palliata (Say). 

Samburg, Reelfoot Lake (68555) ; Johnson City (68556). 
30. Polygyra obstricta (Say). 

Bellevue (68553) ; bank Emory Riv., Harriman (68552). 
31. Polygyra appressa perigrapta Pils. 

Samburg (68547); Raleigh (68544); Belle Mead Farm, near 
Nashville (63557) ; Chattanooga (68542) ; Sawyer’s Springs, Wal- 
den Ridge (68549); bank Emory Riv., Harriman (68548) ; Knox- 
ville (68541). 

32. Polygyra subpalliata Pils. 
Roan Mt., 3000 to 6000 ft. (69064, 69065, 69066). 
This is the “ Mesodon wetherbyi” of most collections. It is a far 


more common species in museums than that, occurring abundantly 
at Roan Mt. 


33. Polygyra wetherbyi (Bld.). 


Emory Riv., near Harriman, Roane Co. (69067). 

The specimens of this excessively rare species agree with one of 
the original lot collected by Prof. A. G. Wetherby. It has been 
found before in Whitley (and Campbell ?) counties. 


34, Polygyra wheatleyi (Bld.). 

Roan Mt., 3000 to 6000 ft. (69068, 69069, 69070). 
35. Polygyra sp.? 

Allardt (69071). 


A single specimen, defective in the umbilical region, of an appar- 
ently new species. 


492 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


36. Polygyra elevata (Say.). 

Samburg, Reelfoot Lake (68606); Belle Mead Farm, near Nash- 
ville (68604); Bellevue (68619); Chattanooga (68607), faintly, 
broadly chestnut-banded at the periphery; bank of Emory Riv., 
Harriman (68605); junction French Broad and Holston Rivers 
(68608, 68618). 

37. Polygyra exoleta (Binn.). 

Samburg, Reelfoot Lake (68614) ; Bellevue (68613); bank Em- 
ory Riv., Harriman (68616). 
38. Polygyra andrewse (Binn.). 

Ten miles east of Allardt (68624); Roan Mt., Doe Riv. valley, 
3000 ft. (68625, 66305) ; top of Roan Mt. (68629): road to Cloud- 
land, 3500 to 5000 ft. (68626, 68628). 

Mr. E. G. Vanatta, who dissected specimens, found that the small 
thin-shelled typical form agrees with the very large, solid shells in 
soft anatomy, confirming Binney’s observations. 

39. Polygyra albolabris (Say). 

Belle Mead Farm, near Nashville (68621) ; Chattanooga (68620). 
40. Polygyra albolabris major (Binn.). 

Vaughan’s Cave, near Bellevue (68623) ; Johnson City (68629). 

Very large specimens. Dissections of them by Mr. E.G. Vanatta 
fully confirm the anatomical distinctions indicated by Mr. Binney 
between this species or variety and the large form of P. andrewse. 
41. Polygyra thyroides (Say). 

Samburg, Reelfoot Lake (68611); Raleigh (68601); Belle Mead 
Farm, near Nashville (68598); Bellevue (68610); Chattanooga 
(68603) ; Knoxville (68602) ; 2 m. E. Watauga Sta., Washington 
Co. (68599) ; Johnson City (68609). 

42. Polygyra clausa (Say’. 

Williams Isl., near Chattanooga (68631); Johnson City (68630). 
43. Polygyra downieana (Bld.). 

Sawyer’s Springs (69072); Belle Mead Farm, near Nashville 
(69073). 

44. Polygyra monodon fraterna (Say). 
Raleigh (69074). 
45. Polygyra leai (Ward). 
Belle Mead Farm, near Nashville (68596). 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. | 493 


46. Polygyra hirsuta altispira Pils. 
Road to Cloudland, Roan Mt., Doe Riv., 4000 ft. (68586) ; top 
Roan Mt.. 6000 ft. (68585). 
47. Polygyra stenotrema (Fér.). 
Chattanooga (68588) ; Sawyer’s Springs, Walden Ridge (68592) ; 
bank Emory Riv., Harriman (68587); Allardt (68593). 
48. Polygyra stenotrema depilata Pils. : 
Belle Mead Farm, near Nashville (68594) ; Bellevue (68590) ; 
Johnson City (68595). 


Family BULIMULIDZ. 
49. Bulimulus dealbatus (Say). 
Belle Mead Farm, near Nashville (68632). 


ELASMOGNATHA. 
Family SUCCINEIDZ. 

50. Succinea obliqua Say. 

Samburg, Reelfoot Lake (68686). 
51. Succinea ovalis Gld. 

Samburg, Reelfoot Lake (68683) ; Mouth of Wolf Riv., Memphis 
(68684); Richland Creek, Belle Mead Farm, near Nashville 
(69282). 


52. Succinea avara Say. 
Samburg, Reelfoot Lake (68687) ; Chattanooga (69281). 
LIMNOPHILA. 
Family LIMN AIDA. 


58. Limneza desidiosa Say. 
Samburg (69297); Bellevue (69295); Johnson City (69298) ; 
Knoxville (69075). 
54. Limneza columella Say. 
Knoxville (69076). 
55. Limneza humilis Say. a 
Johnson City (69299). 
56. Planorbis trivolvis Say. 
Samburg (69250, 69301). 
57. Planorbis bicarinatus Say. 


Emory River, near Harriman (69302). 


494 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


58. Planorbis dilatatus Gld. 
Knoxville, in a spring (69303). 


59. Ancylus diaphanus Hald. 
Knoxville (69334). 


Family PHYSIDZ. 

60. Physa gyrina Say. 

S. Harpeth River, 6 m. from Bellevue (69266); Knoxville 
(69077). 
61. Physa heterostropha Say. 

Belle Mead Farm, near Nashville (69267); Nolachucky River, 
near Greeneville (69269) ; Watauga River, near Watauga (69270) ; 
Johnson City (69268). 


62. Physa integra Hald. 

Samburg (69271); Johnson City (69272). 
63. Physa microstoma Hald. 

Belle Mead Farm, near Nashville (69275). Also taken in Ken- 
tucky, at Mammoth Cave (69276) ; west bluff of Kentucky River, 
opposite Frankfort (69277) ; Shelbyville, Clear Creek (68278). 

This seems to be a distinct and well characterized species, readily 
distinguishable at first sight from all other American forms of this 
genus, in which specific lines are so difficult to define. Judging 
from the rare occurrence of this name in the literature, the species 
must be comparatively rare and local. 


PROSOBRANCHIATA. 


RHIPIDOGLOSSA. 


Family HELICINIDZ. 
64. Helicina orbiculata (Say). 
Chattanooga (68633). 
65. Helicina occulta (Say). 

Bank Emory Riv., near Harriman (68634). 

This species was first found living in the West by Messrs. Pilsbry 
and Shimek, but has subsequently occurred to conchologists in 
many localities in Iowa, Minnesota and Wisconsin. In the East it 
occurs living in “ Western Pennsylvania” (Green), near Pittsburg 
(Stupakoff), in Virginia, western North Carolina and eastern Ten- 
nessee. Its range is apparently interrupted by the Ohio Valley, and 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 495 


the special localities east and west are more or lessisolated. Its distri- 
bution is, on the whole, more markedly discontinuous than that of 
any American land snail known tome. It probably lives in higher 
latitude than any other member of the Helicinide. H. occulta is an 
omnipresent, and therefore characteristic, fossil of the Mississippi 
Valley loess; and during the formation of that deposit was exten- 
sively diffused and excessively numerous over a large area where it 
is now extinct. 


TZNIOGLOSSA. 
4 Family AMNICOLIDZ Tryon. 


66. Somatogyrus aureus Tryon. 
Nolachucky River, near Greeneville (69284). 


67. Pomatiopsis lapidaria (Say). 
Banks of Emory River, near Harriman (69283). 


Family VIVIPARIDZ Gill. 


68. Vivipara intertexta (Say). 

Samburg, Reelfoot Lake (69249). 
69. Campeloma ponderosum (Say). 

Tennessee River, near Chattanooga (69252, 69236, 69237) ; 
Holston River, 1 mile above French Broad (69259, 69260); Ten- 
nessee River, near Knoxville (69258); Clinch River, below Pat- 
ton’s Ferry (69261); Indian shell heap, Williams Island (69251). 
70. Campeloma subsolidum (Anth.). 

Samburg, Reelfoot Lake (69233, 69234, 69235); Big Harpeth 
River, near Bellevue (69263). 

71. Campeloma geniculum (Conr.). 
Emory River, near Harriman (69262). 


72. Lioplax subcarinata (Say). 
Big Harpeth River, near Bellevue (69238). 


Family PLEUROCERID& Fischer. 


This has long been recognized as one of the most difficult families 
of American mollusks. Tryon made a good beginning in the in- 
tricate study of its species in his monograph published by the Smith- 
sonian Institution in 1872. His conclusions were based upon a 
study of material from all the principal collections of that time ; 
and his extensive synonymy has proved in nearly every case which 


496 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


has since been tested to be singularly well judged. It was a splen- 
did piece of work, considering the time and material available. 
But Tryon himself, in his later years, saw as clearly as anyone that 
a vastly greater reduction of species must be made. He told me, in 
1888, that, as he now saw these shells, there were not more than a 
tenth as many good species as names. Whether the particular 
ratio mentioned was deliberately said or not, I do not know: but I 
incline to the belief that it will prove near the truth. 

These shells must be collected and studied by river-systems ; and 
it then appears that often the same species occurs in some localities 
sculptured throughout, in others only on the upper portion, while 
in still other places only the earlier whorls may show the character- 
istic sculpture. Some of the species described from one or two 
decollate examples will be recognized with great difficulty, if at all, 
in cases where the type locality is not known. 

A cursory glance at the generic scheme in current use reveals 
some inaccuracies which call for correction. The genera are un- 
equally related, and, as Tryon has shown, fall into three main 
groups. ‘They are as follows: 

Io Lea, 1831, type Fusus fluvialis Say. Melafusus Swainson, 
1840, is a synonym. 

LirnasiA Hald., 1840, type Anculosa (Lithasia) geniculata 
Hald. 

A section of Lithasia is Angitrema Hald., 1841, type Melania ar- 
migera Say; Glotella Gray, 1847, same type, being a synonym of 
Angitrema. 

It will be observed that this reverses Tryon’s usage, as he places 
geniculata in Angitrema, and restricts Lithasia to smooth species. 

Angitrema is a connecting link between Jo and Lithasia, and 
seems conchologically about intermediate between the two groups. 

PLEUROCERA Rafinesque, 1818, type? 

Synonyms: Ceriphasia Swains., 1840, type, C. sulcata Swains. 
(=P. canaliculatum Say); Trypanostoma Lea, 1862, type M. canal- 
iculata Say, Telescopella Gray, 1837, type Melania undulata Say. 

Strephobasis Lea, 1861, types S. spillmani, cornea and clarkii Lea 
(all =plena Anth.), is a section of Plewrocera. 

Evia H. & A. Adams, 1854, type M. acutocarinata Lea. 

Synonyms: Melasma H. & A. Adams, Juga H. & A. Adams, 
Megara H. & A. Adams, and Goniobasis Lea, 1862. 

The group of Adams brothers, Elimia, contains incongruous ele- 
ments, although most of the species named are Goniobases. LE. ele- 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 497 


vata “ Lea,” filum Lea, spinalis Lea and torta Lea belong to the 
the prior genus Pleurocera Raf., and, therefore, are to be eliminated 
from Elimia. Holstonia Lea belongs to the prior genus Lithasia 
Hald. Apis Lea isa Pachychilus. The other species are true Gon- 
40 bases. 

Gyrotoma Shuttlew., 1845. 

Synonyms Schizostoma and Schizocheilus Lea (preoc.). Apella 
Mighels, MS., 1860. 

ANCULOSA Say. 

73. Io spinosa Lea. 

Holston River, 3 miles from Knoxville (69253); Tennessee 
River, near Knoxville (69252) ; Nolachucky River., 5 miles south 
of Greeneville (69251); in the Indian shell heaps, Williams 
Island, Tennessee River (69255) ; Indian mound, junction Holston 
and French Broad (69254) ; Indian mound, Patton’s Ferry, Nola- 
chucky River (69265). 


74, Lithasia geniculata Hald. 

Indian shell heaps, Williams Island, Tennessee River (69240) ; 
Emory River, near Harriman (69242); Tennessee River, near 
Knoxville (69241) ; Clinch River, below Patton’s Ferry (69239). 


75. Lithasia verrucosa (Raf.). 

Tennessee River, near Chattanooga (69332); Tennessee River, 
near Knoxville (69247) ; Aboriginal shell heaps, Williams Island 
(69248); shell heap, junction Holston and French Broad Rivers 
(69264). 

76. Lithasia venusta Lea. 

Big Harpeth River, near Bellevue (69293, 69294). 
77. Lithasia stygia (Say). 

Big Harpeth River, near Bellevue (69333). 

These shells, while worthy of the Styx when unwashed and black 
with iron deposit, are of a beautiful green with darker bands when 
this incrustation is removed. 


78. Pleurocera undulatum (Say). 

Clinch River, above Patton’s Ferry (69313); Holston River, 1 
mile above French Broad (69312, 69314). 

Pleurocera undulatum is here understood to cover the following 
nominal species, all of which seem to be connected by inappreciable 
degrees when a large series is examined: Melania excurata Con., 


498 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


M. rorata Rve., Trypanostoma spillmani Lea, T. moniliferum, Io 
nodosa, Io variabilis, Io nobilis and Io robusta Lea. There are still 
other forms which will doubtless fall under uwndulatum as varieties 
or synonyms. 
79. Pleurocera undulatum nobile (Lea). 

Tennessee River, near Chattanooga (69317) ; Emory River, near 
Harriman (69316). 
80. Pleurocera undulatum moniliferum (Lea). 

Aboriginal shell heaps, Williams Island, Tennessee River 
(69315). 
81. Pleurocera canaliculatum (Say). 

Clinch River, below Patton’s Ferry (69368); Tennessee River, 
near Knoxville (69264). 
82. Pleurocera gradatum (Anth.). 

Tennessee River, near Knoxville (69310) ; Holston River, 1 mile 
above junction with French Broad (69309). 
83. Pleurocera filum (Lea). 

Tennessee River, near Chattanooga (69306); Emory River, near 
Harriman (69308) ; Tennessee River, near Knoxville (69305). 


84. Pleurocera filum var? 

South Harpeth River, 6 miles from Bellevue (69307). 
85. Pleurocera —— sp.? 

Patton’s Ferry, Clinch River (69324). 

A peculiar species, not corresponding with any described form, 
but it may be described in a much worn or truncated condition. 


86. Pleurocera cylindraceum (Lea), 

Emory River, near Harriman (69304.) 

It was described from Roane County. Trypanostoma roanense 
Lea is a synonym of cylindraceum. 
87. Pleurocera hastatum (Anth.). 

Watauga River, below Watauga Station (69318). 


88. Pleurocera alveare (Con.). 


Clinch River, above Patton’s Ferry (69311). 
89. Pleurocera unicale (Hald.). 

Nolachucky, four and a half miles south of Greeneville (69319). 
90. Strephobasis lyonii Lea. 


Tennessee River, near Knoxville (69335) ; Holston River, 1 mile 
above French Broad (69336). 


— ae 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 499 


91. Strephobasis plena (Anth.). 

Tennessee River, Chattanooga (69337); Clinch River, above 
Patton’s Ferry (69338). 

S. plena includes as synonyms S. spillmani, elarkii and cornea of 
Lea, all from the same region and in the same river system. 

Strephobasis is a mere section of Plewrocera, and is reducible to 
some two or three species. 


92. Goniobasis? proxima (Say). 

Watauga River, Watauga Station (69290). 
93. Goniobasis proxima symmetrica (Hald.). 

Doe River, Roan Mountain, 2800 to 4000 ft. (69292); Rock 
Creek, Roan Mountain 3500 ft. (69291). 


The same form occurs plentifully around Cranberry, Mitchell Co. 
N. C. (Dr. H. Skinner). 

94. Goniobasis laqueata (Say). 

Richland Creek, Belle Mead, near Nashville (69289); South 
Harpeth River, 6 miles from Bellevue (69348, 69286, 69347); Big 
Harpeth River, near Bellevue (69287, 69288). 

The specimens are not typical, being more like the synonym or vari- 
ety G. deshayesiana Lea; but there are at least ten other names, 
probably referable to the same species, leading terms being plicatule 
Lea, costulata Lea, cinerella Lea, sparus Lea, cerea Lea, rugosa Lea, 


corrugata Lea, circinata Lea, athleta Anth., glauca Anth., lyonit 
Lea, ete. 


95. Anculosa subglobosa Say. 
Nolachucky River, 6 miles southwest of Greeneville (69342) ; 


Watauga River, below Watauga Station (69343) ; Doe River, 2800 
4000 ft. (69344). 
96. Anculosa harpethensis Pils. Sp. nov. 

Mr. Pilsbry’s description is herewith given :—Shell globose, with 
very short spire and rounded periphery ; olivaceous brown or yel- 
lowish, the surface with slight growth lines. Whorls 5, the body 
whorl very convex, impressed in the umbilical region. Aperture 
livid purplish within the outer lip but slightly sinuous, parietal wall 
and columella heavily calloused, purple; face of columella con- 
cave, a projecting angle at union of columellar and basal lips. Alt. 


3 The familiar generic name is used here for convenience, but it must be re- 
placed eventually by Elimia H. & A. Adams. 


33 


500 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


93, diam. 19 mm.: alt. 12, diam. 11mm. The globular form and 
angulation at base of columella separate this form from A. subglo- 
bosa. 


Big Harpeth River, near Bellevue (69357). 


97. Anculosa prerosa Say. 

Holston River, 1 mile above French Broad (69244); Tennessee 
River, near Chattanooga (29246); Tennessee River, near Knox- 
ville (69245). Indian mound, Williams Island (69248). 

98. Anculosa ornata Anth. 

Tennessee River, near Knoxville (69340) ; Holston River, 1 mile 

above French Broad (69339). 


PELECYPODA. 
Family CYRENIDS Fischer. 


99. Spherium striatinum (Lam.). 
Big Harpeth River, near Bellevue (69325); Johnson City (69326). 


100. Spherium fabale Prime 
Belle Mead Farm, near Nashville (69328). 


101. Spherium transversum (Say). 
Samburg, Obion Co. (69327), 
102. Spherium partumeium (Say). 

Samburg, Reelfoot Lake, Obion Co. (69330). 
108. Pisidium abditum Hald. 

Knoxville (69331). 

Family UNIONIDZ. 
104. Unio acuens Lea. 

Tennessee River, Williams Island (67371); Tennessee River, 
near Knoxville (69372); Holston River, 1 mile above French 
Broad (69378). 

105. Unio alatus Say. 

Tennessee River, above Knoxville (68341). 
106. Unio anodontoides Lea. 

Big Harpeth River, near Bellevue, Davidson Co. (68327). Wolf 
River, below Shelby Co. (68701). 

107 Unio arceformis Lea. 
Holston River, 1 mile above junction with Tennessee River 


(68317). 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 501 


108. Unio asperrimus Lea. 
Reelfoot Lake, Obion Co. (68340). 
109. Unio biangulatus Lea. 


Tennessee River, above Knoxville (68361); Watauga River, 
below Watauga Station (69370). 
Described from Caney Fork. 


110. Unio caliginosus Conr. 

Clinch River, above Patton’s Ferry (69203). 

Described from the Red River at Alexandria, La. 
111. Unio capseformis Lea. 

Big Harpeth River, near Bellevue, Davidson Co. (68369). 
112 Unio circulus Lea. 


Big Harpeth River, near Bellevue (68381); Tennessee River, 
near Knoxville (68562). 


An Ohio drainage species. 

113. Unio conradianus Lea. (Conradicus Lea). 

Emory River, Harriman (69222); Watauga River, near John- 
son City (69226). 

The specimens are, for the greater part, only very slightly plicate 
on the posterior slope, far less so than Lea’s types. 

114. Unio cooperianus Lea. 

Tennessee River, near Williams Island, below Chattanooga 
(68375) ; 2 miles above Knoxville (69211); Clinch River, above 
Patton’s Ferry (68363). 

115. Unio cornutus Barnes. 

Clinch River, above Patton’s Ferry, Roane Co. (68330). 
116. Unio crassidens Lam. 

Holston River, 1 mile above junction with Tennessee River 
(68365); Tennessee River, near Knoxville (68327); Tennessee 
River, near Williams Island, Chattanooga (68347); Clinch River, 
above Patton’s Ferry (68337). 


117. Unio cuneolus Lea. 


Emory River, Harriman (69201). 
Described from the Holston. 
118 Unio cylindricus Say. 


Holston River, 1 mile above junction with Tennessee River 
(68342). 


502 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


119. Unio dromas Lea. 

Holston River, 1 mile above junction with Tennessee River 
(68313); Tennessee River, near Williams Island, Chattanooga 
(68323) ; Tennessee River, near Knoxville (68326). 

120. Unio edgarianus Lea. 

Clinch River, above Patton’s Ferry (69206). 

One of the specimens collected has the lateral teeth reversed. 
121. Unio elegans Lea. 

Reelfoot Lake (68376). 

The specimens have numerous greenish rays in place of the usual 
V-like maculation. 

122. Unio fascinans Lea ( fassinans). 

Watauga River, below Watauga Station (68387). 
123. Unio gibbosus Barnes. 

Tennessee River, near Williams Island, Chattanooga (68315) ; 
Tennessee River, above Knoxville (68324) ; Holston River, 1 mile 
above junction with Tennessee River (68370); Clinch River, above 
Patton’s Ferry, Roane Co. (68314) ; Emory River, near Harriman, 
Roane Co. (65339) ; Watauga River, near Johnson City, Washing- 
ton Co. (68325). 

Shells smaller than those of the northern Mississippi Valley, and 
often light salmon inside, especially in the Holston River speci- 
mens. 

124. Unio glans Lea. 
Emory River, near Harriman (69377). 
Two specimens of somewhat doubtful specific identity. 


125. Unio gracilis Barnes. 

Wolf River, below Raleigh, Shelby Co. (68700) ; Holston River, 
1 mile above junction with French Broad (69200). 
126. Unio haysianus Lea. 

Tennessee River, 2 miles above Knoxville (69199). 

Described from the Cumberland River. 
127. Unio irroratus Lea. 

Holston River, 1 mile above Junction with Tennessee River 
(68354). 
128. Unio kirtlandianus Lea. 

Watauga River, near Johnson City (69204). 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 503 


129. Unio lawi Lea. 

Emory River, Harriman (69223). 

Described from the Tennessee River, Tuscumbia, Ala., and the 
Holston. 

130. Unio ligamentinus Lam, 

Holston River, 1 mile above junction with Tennessee River 
(68335); Tennessee River, near Williams Island, Chattanooga, 
(68348); Tennessee River, above Knoxville (68368); Clinch 
River, above Patton’s Ferry, Roane Co. (68360); Harpeth River, 
6 miles south of Bellevue (68699). 

The shells are constantly smaller and rounder than in specimens 
of Illinois and Lowa. 

131. Unio muhlfeldtianus Lea. 


Watauga River, near Johnson City (69225). 
Described from the Cumberland River. 


132. Unio multiradiatus Lea. 

Emory River, near Harriman, Roane Co. (68318); Clinch 
River, above Patton’s Ferry, Roane Co. (68338) ; Watauga River, 
near Johnson City, Washington Co. (68336). 

133. Unio obliquus Lam. 

Holston River, 1 mile above junction with French Broad 
(69217) ; Tennessee River, near Chattanooga (69214). 

134. Unio ovatus Say. 

Tennessee River, 2 miles above Knoxville (69279); Holston 
River, 1 mile above junction with French Broad (69218). 


185. Unio parvus Say. 

Reelfoot Lake, Obion Co. (68359). 
136. Unio phaseolus Hild. 

Tennessee River, near Chattanooga (69202) ; Emory River, near 
Harriman (69369). 
137. Unio pictus Lea. 

South Harpeth River, 6 miles from Bellevue (68385). 

This was described from Harpeth River specimens. 
138, Unio pilaris Lea. 

Tennessee River, 2 miles above Knoxville (69213); Holston 
River, 1 mile above junction of French Broad (69219); Clinch 
River above Patton’s Ferry. 


504 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


139. Unio plicatus Lesueur. 

Reelfoot Lake, Samburg, Obion Co. (68377). 
140. Unio propinquus Lea. 

Tennessee River 2 miles above Knoxville (69212); Holston 
River, 1 mile above junction with French Broad (69220); Clinch 
River, above Patton’s Ferry (68353). 

This species was described from Florence and Tuscumbia, Ala- 
bama, localities far to the southwest of the above. 

141. Unio purpuratus Lam. 

Wolf River, near Raleigh (68702). 

Characteristic specimens of this southwestern form. 
142. Unio pustulosus Lea. 

Reelfoot Lake, Obion Co. (68366) ; Holston River, 1 mile above 
junction with Tennessee River (68367) ; Clinch River, above Pat- 
ton’s Ferry (68363). 

143. Unio pybasii Lea. 

Emory River, Harriman (69196) ; South Harpeth River, 6 miles 
from Bellevue (69195); Watauga River, near Johnson City (69193). 

Lea’s specimens were from Tuscumbia, Ala. 

144, Unio pyramidatus Lea. 

Holston River, 1 mile above junction with French Broad (68364) ; 
Tennessee River, 2 miles above Knoxville (69205) ; Clinch River, 
above Patton’s Ferry (69207). 

145. Unio rectus Lam. 

Holston River, 1 mile above junction with Tennessee River 
(68372). 

146. Unio rubiginosus Lea. 

Big Harpeth River, near Bellevue (68358); South Harpeth 
River, 6 miles south of Bellevue (68316). 

147. Unio securis Lea. 

Clinch River, above Patton’s Ferry (68331). 
148. Unio sphericus Lea (?). 

Tennessee River, near Williams Island, Chattanooga (68373). 
149. Unio subrostratus Say. 

Reelfoot Lake, Samburg, Obion Co. (69194). 

150. Unio subtentus Say. 

South Harpeth River, 6 miles from Bellevue (68704) ; Tennessee 

River, above Knoxville (68371). 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 505 


151. Unio texasensis Lea. 

Reelfoot Lake, Samburg (69215). 

Much larger than the typical form from central Texas, length 
56, breadth, 30 mm. 
152. Unio trapezoides Lea. 

Reelfoot Lake, Samburg (69216). 

Two young specimens. The species has not before been reported 
from so far north, east of the Mississippi, so far as I know. 


153. Unio triangularis Barnes. 
Tennessee River, above Knoxville (68378). 


154. Unio tuberculatus Barnes. 

Big Harpeth River, near Bellevue, Davidson Co. (68345) ; Wolf 
River, below Raleigh, Shelby Co. (68703). 

The specimens from the Big Harpeth belong to the large, densely 
pustulose, white nacred, northern race. 
155. Unio tumescens Lea. 

Tennessee River, near Knoxville (69374) ; Emory River, Harri- 
man (69375) ; Clinch River, above Patton’s Ferry (69376). 

Described by Lea from Alexandria, La. 
156. Unio turgidus Lea. ; 

Wolf River, near Raleigh (68384). 

Described from New Orleans. 


157. Unio undulatus Barnes. 

Clinch River, above Patton’s Ferry (69209) ; Big Harpeth River, 
near Bellevue (68344). 

On account of the prior Unio undulatus Say (now Alasmodonta 
undulata), the name of this well-known species must be changed. 
158. Unio ventricosus Barnes. 

Big Harpeth River, near Bellevue, Davidson Co. (68328). 

159. Unio verrucosus Barnes. 

Big Harpeth River, near Bellevue, (68343); Tennessee River, 
above Knoxville (68349); Holston River, 1 mile above junction 
with Tennessee River (68350). 


160. Alasmodonta complanata Barnes.® 


® The diverse origin of various elements of the so-called genus Margaritana 
has been demonstrated by Mr. C. T. Simpson. It is practically certain that 
the group of M. complanata, rugosa, etc., arose from a different stock of Unio 


506 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Big Harpeth River, near Bellevue (68346). 


161. Alasmodonta confragosa Say. 


Reelfoot Lake, Obion Co. (68356). 
162. Alasmodonta edentula Say. 

Big Harpeth River, near Bellevue (68380); Watauga River, 
near Johnson City (68379). 

Very large specimens, length 12.7 em., from the Big Harpeth. 
Probably not specifically distinct from <A. pennsylvanica Lam. of 
the Middle States. 

163. Alasmodonta marginata Say. 

Clinch River, above Patton’s Ferry (68332) ; Watauga River, 

near Johnson City (68321). 

164. Alasmodonta minor (Lea). 

~ South Harpeth River River, 6 miles from Bellevue (69228). 
165. Alasmodonta rugosa Bar. 

Tennessee River, 2 miles above Knoxville (69229); Big Harpeth 
River, near Bellevue (68333); Watauga River, near Johnson City 
(68320). 

166. Anodonta grandis Say. 
Reelfoot Lake, Obion Co. (68382). 
167. Anodonta harpethensis Lea. 

Harpeth River, near Bellevue (69230). 

168. Anodonta suborbiculata Say. 


Reelfoot Lake, Obion Co. (68351). 


169. Anodonta imbecilis Say. 


Reelfoot Lake, Obion Co. (68322). 


SumMARY: Pelecypoda, 71 species; aquatic Gastropoda, 41 spec- 
ies; terrestrial G'astropoda, 54 species. 


from the M. margaritifera and monodonta ; and Simpson finds numbers of 
other incongruous elements. 

We are hardly prepared, however, to merge the various groups of “ Mar- 
garitana”’ in Unio. Among other disadvantages, a great many specific names 
would require change, such as the first one of this list ; ; and then, there is a 
real difference (in the hinge teeth) which would be without recognition in 
nomenclature. It seems to us that although there are a few forms, such as 
Unio pressus, in which this distinction is obscure, still in the great majority it 
holds. The subject is a complex one, which should not be decided hastily, 
and we can well afford to postpone wholesale changes in specific nomenclature 
until Simpson, von Ihering and other specialists who are now working upon 
the Unionidx with such gratifying results, shall have arrived at a thoroughly 
mature classification. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 507 


FOSSIL BONES OF BIRDS AND MAMMALS FROM GROTTO PIETRO 
TAMPONI AND GRIVE-ST. ALBAN. 


BY R. W. SHUFELDT, M.D. 


For some time past the writer has had in his possession a small 
collection of fossil bones that were kindly submitted to him by Mr. 
Jno. Eyerman, of Easton, Pennsylvania, to whose cabinet they be- 
long. 

These fossil bones are from birds and mammals, and were ob- 
tained from two very different localities, the smaller lot of the two 
having been collected at the Grotto Pietro Tamponi, and the re- 
mainder of them at Grive-St. Alban, in France. In his letter of 
transmittal, Mr. Eyerman invites my attention to the fact that the 
celebrated locality, Grive-St. Alban, “ is situated in the department 
of Isére, France, the deposits belonging to the upper division of the 
Middle Miocene. European geologists have arranged the Middle 
Miocene into two divisions, of which the upper is distributed princi- 
pally in isolated patches throughout France, although these deposits 
are also found in Germany and in the Vienna Basin.” 

“ Grive-St. Alban is justly famous for the large number and great 
variety of mammalian remains found in its beds, of which we have 
Instriodon, Hyotherium, Paleomeryx, Micromeryx, Dicroceros of the 
Artiodactyla, as well as the earliest antelope, Protragoceros. Of the 
Perissodactyla there are the hornless rhinoceros, Aceratherium, 
Chalicotherium. Of the Proboscidea there is the Mastodon augusti- 
dens. The Rodentia is represented by Lagomys, Myoxus, Sciurus, 
Chalicomys and the large Dormouse, Cricetodon. The Carnivora 
by Viverra, Lutra, Dinocyon; the sabre-tooth tiger, Machaerodus ; 
the mongoose, Herpestes, and the disputed genus Haplogale of 
Sclosser. The Insectivores by Plesiosorex, Erinaceus and Talpa, 
and, finally, the fossil Gibbon, Hylobates.” 

In the second locality, or that of Tavolara, we find the “Grotto 
Pietro Tamponi, consisting of several chambers, and situated on 
the small Island of Tavolara, in the Gulf of Terranova, a few miles 
off the northeast coast of Sardinia. The upper chamber of this 
grotto contains. numerous remains of the rodent Lagomys sardus 
(Giebel’s variety corsicanus). The lower chamber has produced the 
avian remains.” 


508 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896.. 


Taking these specimens by their original numbers, I find them to. 


be as represented in the following list :— 


pe 


pa 


ae eee ee) BS 


The left carpo-metacarpus of a bird. 

The left radius of a bird. 

The right tibio-tarsus of a bird. 

The right ulna of a bird. 

Right and left femora; birds. 

Right and left humeri; birds. 

The right femur of a mammal. 

The right coracoid of a bird. 

The right tibio-tarsus of a bird. 

The right tarso-metatarsus of a bird; also the right ulna of a» 
mammal. 

The right tibio-tarsus of a bird. 

Portion of the upper third of the right tibio-tarsus of a bird. 

The distal moiety of the left tarso-metatarsus of a bird. 

The proximal moiety of the ungual phalanx of a small mam-- 
mal (carnivore). 

The proximal third of the left carpo-metacarpus of a bird. 

The distal extremity of the left tarso-metatarsus of a bird. 

The left humerus of a bird. 

The upper’two-thirds of the right tarso-metatarsus of a bird (im: 
two fragments). 

The right carpo-metacarpus of a bird (not perfect). 

Two carpo-metacarpi of birds, both from right side, perfect and. 
very sinall, 

The right humerus of a bird. 

The right humerus of a bird. 

The proximal moiety of the right humerus of a bird. 

The proximal moiety of the left tarso-metatarsus of a bird. 

The left humerus of a bird. 

The left wna of a bird. 

The distal extremity of the left (?) femur of a mammal. 

Not received. 

Not received. 

The distal extremity of the right tarso-metatarsus of a bird! 
(two fragments). 

The distal extremity of the left tarso-metatarsus of a bird (im 
two fragments). 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 509 


These specimens are all from adult individuals of the various spe- 
cies they represent; they are, furthermore, thoroughly fossilized ; 
free from any matrix, save in a few instances where a thin layer of 
a dark-colored incrustation spreads over the ends of some of the 
long and other bones. They are very light in color, and, upon the 
whole, quite perfect. Some are thoroughly so, as, for example, Nos. 
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 20, others exhibit a little chipping at 
the extremities, or have other slight imperfections, as, for example, 
Nos. 11, 17, 19, 21, 22, 25 and 26; while, finally, the balance are 
more or less fragmentary, as set forth in the above list. 

No. 7 is a femur that apparently belonged to a medium-sized 
rodent, but as I have not the proper material wherewith to compare 
it, it is impossible for me to identify the species. It has a total 
length of 4.9 centimeters, and presents the usual characters seen 
in a small rodent’s femur, as that, for example, of one of the 
Sciuridx, or some of their near allies. 

The wna in lot No. 10, and the end of the femur in No. 27, also 
belong to small mammals, but, from lack of material, I am unable 
to identify them. ‘The first-mentioned specimen has a length of 4 
centimeters, while the last is fragmentary, and I take it to bea 
mammal from the fact that no fibular notch exists in the posterior 
aspect of the external condyle—a common avian character. 

A study of specimens Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, the tarso-metatar- 
sus of lot No. 10 and No. 11, convinced me that they had one and 
all belonged to species of Shearwater (Puffinus). This conviction 
was arrived at after comparing the bones with those of a skeleton of 
Puffinus borealis,’ and with the figures and descriptions given us by 
Professor Alf. Milne-Edwards in his Recherches sur les Oiseaux Fos- 
siles de la France.” Furthermore, the tibio-tarsus No. 3 agreed ex- 
actly in length and in characters with the specimen No. 9, while in 
the case of the femora in lot No. 5, and the humeri in lot No. 6, 
although they agreed in characters, differed in either case, somewhat 
in length. This, however, amounted to but very little; for example, 
one of the femora measured 4.0 cms. in length, and the other 3.9 
ems. in length, whereas, in the case of the humeri, this difference is 
a little greater, one having a length of 7.9 cms. and the other only 
7.5 cms. 


1 Mounted Coll. U. S. Nat. Mus., No. 17,772. 


? Planches 49-53 incl. Atlas I, where the bones of Puffinus cinereus are 
figured. and in Texte I, p. 301, et seq. where they are, with others, described. 


510 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Disregarding the cnemial projection or process, and measuring 
the length of the bone from the summit to the lowermost point of the 
outer condyle, we found that the tibio-tarsus of No. 3 has a length 
of 6.7 ems., while a similar measurement of the tibio-tarsus No. 11 
is found to be 7.4 cms. In this latter specimen the cnemial process 
has been broken off and lost. So great a distance as this leads me 
to believe that this longer bone belonged to a different species of 
Puffinus, and that the tarso-metatarsus, marked No. 10, probably 
belonged to the same species. Indeed, I believe that the bones Nos. 
10 and 11 belonged to the same individual, inasmuch as they articu- 
late perfectly when brought together. 

So far as I have been able to discover, there have been but few 
remains of fossil bones of the genus Puffinus described. Two of these 
are to be found in M. Milne-Edwards’s work ( Oiseaua Fossiles de la 
France, T. 11), where, upon page 588, he says, “‘ Le Puffinus conradi 
provient du Miocéne du Maryland ; ses dimensions se rapprochaient 
de celles du Puffin cendré (Puffinus cinereus Gmelin), de la céte oc- 
cidentale d’Amérique;” and again, on page 572, in» speaking of 
Puffinus arvernensis ( rare 4 Langy), he says, “Cette espéce, ayant 
été découverte depuis la publication du chapitre relatif aux oiseaux 
fossiles de cette famille, sera décrite et figurée dans un travail sup- 
plémentaire.” Upon comparing the bones before me with the fig- 
ures of the corresponding ones of Puffinus cinereus as given us by 
Milne-Edwards, I find that the latter species is very considerably 
larger than were either of the former, so that bones Nos. 10 and 11 
did not belong to a specimen of Puffinus conradi. In order to make 
certain that M. Milne-Edwards had not described Puffinus arvern- 
ensis, I wrote him concerning that species, and received the follow- 
ing reply, accompanied by the drawings he mentions (Plate XXIV, 
figs. 1 and 2), for both of which distinguished favors my most sincere 
thanks are here tendered. 


/ 
Museum D’HIsToIRE NATURELLE. DIRECTION. 


9 Juillet 1896. 
Cher Monsieur: 


Je m’ empresse de vous envoyer un dessin du tarso-métatarsien du 
Puffinus arvernensis de St. Gerand le Puy. Je dois decrire cette 
espéce dans un supplément & mon Oiseaux fossiles mais vous pouvez 
faire tel usage qui vous conviendrai du dessin et le publier si vous le 
desirez ; il est fait de grandeur naturelle. 

Croyez, cher Monsieur, & mon sentiments tres distingués. 


A. Mitnre-EpWARDs. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 514 


Unfortunately, among the bones of the smaller species of Puffinus 
before me there occurred no specimen of a tarso-metatarsus, so that 
Iam unable to say whether they belong to the species described 
by Professor Milne-Edwards as Puffinus arvernensis, or not. Never- 
theless, upon measuring across the condyles at their lower aspects, 
and taking a similar transverse diameter of the summit of the tarso- 
metatarsus in Professor Milne-Edwards’ drawing, it becomes evident 
that Pufinus arvernensis must have had a tibio-tarsus quite like the 
one shown in figure 9 of the plate. In other words, I believe the 
fossil bones of the smaller species of Puffinus in Mr. Eyerman’s col- 
lection very probably belonged to one or two individuals of the 
type referred to by Professor Milne-Edwards as P. arvernensis, 
which species is based upon the tarso-metatarsus shown in figures 1 
and 2. In any event, there is so much likelihood of this being the 
case, that I do not, at present, feel justified in describing these bones 
as having belonged to a species unknown to science up to the pres- 
ent writing. These bones have all the characters of the correspond- 
ing ones as found in the skeleton of the Shearwater (P. borealis) be- 
fore me, with the exception of some differences in the tibio-tarsi and 
the humeri. In the former the cnemial crests are much produced 
upward, as in Puffinus cinereus, and call to mind this bone in 
the Grebes; while in the latter, there is a very remarkable flatten- 
ing of the bone in the same plane in which the radial crest lies. 
This flattening is well-shown in figure 7 of the plate. 

As has already been said above, the tarso-metatarsus in lot No. 
10 and the tibio-tarsus No. 11, undoubtedly belonged to a larger 
species of Puffinus, and one probably smaller than the P. conradi of 
Marsh: in fact, to a form having a size between P. urvernensis and 
P. conradi and hitherto undescribed. Therefore, I propose the fol- 
lowing for this species :— 

Puffinus eyermani n. sp. 

Based on a tibio-tarsus and a tarso-metatarsus, both of the right 
side. They belonged to adult individuals, or, what is more likely, 
to the one and same individual, as the bones articulate together 
perfectly. Disregarding the fractured remains of the cnemial crest 
of the tibio-tarsus, and measuring between summit and lowest point 
of condyle, this bone has a length of 7.4 cms, while the tarso-meta- 
tarsus is 5.2 ems. long. They both present characters agreeing in 
the main with the corresponding ones in Puffinus cinereus Gmel. 


512 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


The shaft of the tibio-tarsus is somewhat flattened or compressed in 
the antero-posterior direction, aud its distal third, to some degree, 
curves gently mesiad. The fibular ridge is well-marked, and occu- 
pies rather more than the upper third of the external border of the 
bone. Distally, we find the usual osseous bridgelet spanning the 
deep tendinal groove upon the anterior aspect. In the intercondy- 
lar space, posteriorly, there is a faint indication of a median longi- 
tudinal ridge, that is also visible in Puffinus borealis (fig. 8). The 
tarso-metatarsus (Plate X XIV, figs. 3 and 4) is straight, and is grooved 
for tendons the entire length of its anterior face, and faintly so upon 
its posterior aspect. Distally the mid-trochlear process is placed the 
lowest on the end of the shaft, while the internal one is the highest, 
and is directed backward and slightly inward. The hypotarsus is 
well-developed and is twice vertically pierced for the passage of 
tendons, while faint groovings also exist upon its postero-external 
surface. In the fossa at the proximal end of the bone, just below 
‘the summit, are two small foramina piercing the shaft from before 
backward. The sides of the shaft are flat. 

These bones were discovered in the Grotto Pietro Tamponi, Tavo- 
lara, an island in the Gulf of Terranova, a few miles off the north- 
east coast of Sardinia. 

The species is extinct, and it gives me pleasure to name it in 
honor of the well-known paleontologist, John Eyerman, Esq., of 
Easton, Pennsylvania, in whose collection the specimens, at the 
present writing, belong. 

The specimen marked No. 12, represents the upper part of the 
right tibio-tarsus of a bird of some considerable size (see fig. 1 of 
the text). Its procnemial process is slightly broken away above, 
and the free margin of the summit of the bone behind is also chipped 
away. 

We have in the National Museum a great number of specimens 
of the fossil bones of birds received several years ago from Professor 
Alf. Milne-Edwards, and among these, numerous examples of the 
long bones of Palcolodus erassipes, P. ambiguus and others of the 
genus, but this bone did not belong to a Palewolodus. Upon com- 
paring with such material as I had of Pelecanus gracilis, it was 
quickly seen that it never came from a Pelican, and the fact was 
further confirmed by carefully comparing it with the tibio-tarsi of 
numerous species of existing forms of that group. In short it has 
been compared by me with every figure of the larger birds where 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. = DIS 


ithe tibio tarsus has been figured, in all the works at hand, as 
well as with the tibio-tarsi of representative 
groups of existing types. 

By differential diagnosis, I am satisfied 
that its owner was a Tantalus, and that too, 
very near Tantalus loculator. Moreover it 
was a Tantalus of almost precisely the same 
size as 7’. loculator, and its tibio-tarsus pre- 
sents characters agreeing very closely with 
that species. The agreement is so close 
that it would appear unnecessary to remove 
it from that genus, I therefore propose the 
following : 

Tantalus milne-edwardsii n. sp. 

Based upon the upper part of the right 
tibio-tarsus (nearly complete). Characters 
as in Tantalus loculator, to which latter 
species, the present one must have been 
closely related. This species I name in 
honor of the very distinguished French 

aie savant Professor Alphonse Milne-Edwards, 
ph ne eure epee who not only has assisted me in the present 
talus milne-edwardsii, being paper, but to whom modern science owes so 
the upper part from the much in so many departments. 
right leg. Natural size; : 
drawn by the author.’ The specimen was collected at Grive- 
St. Afban (Isére), and it is at this writing in the collection of 
Mr. Jno. Eyerman, of Easton, Pennsylvania, U. 8. A. 

Specimen No. 13, (the lower half of a bird’s tarso-metatarsus, 
from the right pelvic limb), evidently belonged to some adult, me- 
dium sized species of a falconine form, probably now extinct. As I 
have not the proper material in sufficient quantity to compare this 
specimen with, I do not feel warranted in naming it. 


3 After this drawing was made, two other small fragments were found that, 
when placed in situ, simply completed the distal broken part of this fragment. 

*In comparing this bone, the following works and the plates and figures 
thereto were also examined. Cuvier: Recherches sur les ossements fossiles, 
t. III, p. 327, pl. LX XIII, fig. 14 (Jbis) ; P. Gervais: Oiseaux fossiles, thése, 
1844, p. 39; Jdem, Jour. 1. Institut., 1844, p. 293; Idem, Zoologie et Paleon- 
tologie francaises, 1st edit., p. 230, pl. XLIX, figs. 2, 3, p. L, fig. 1 ( Nume- 
nius gypsorum) ; 2d ed., 1859, p. 410; Giebel: Fauna der Vorwelt, 1847, t. 
U, p. 28 (Tantalus fossilis). 1 think the specimen here alluded to is either 
a Numenius or an Ibis, surely not a Tantalus. 


514 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


For specimen No. 14, see list above; too fragmentary for correct 
identification. To be named with certainty, No. 15 is also too frag- 
mentary; while the remarks about specimen No. 15, apply with 
equal truth to No. 16, though this last has hardly anything beyond 
the trochlear processes, the distal part of the shaft having been 
broken off, but a few millimeters above the usual foramen found in 
this locality. 

Specimen No. 17 is a very perfect one, being the left humerus of 
an adult Partridge, Palwortyx brevipes of Milne-Edwards.? It de- 
mands no special description. 

In specimen No. 18, we have the fragments of the upper two- 
thirds of the right tarso-metatarsus, (probably) of some small pas- 
serine bird, which my meagre material for comparison will not 
admit of my identifying. On this bone the hypotarsus is short, be- 
ing composed of two lateral portions enclosing a tendinal foraminal 
canal between them. Both of these lateral portions are distinctly 
grooved in the vertical direction, upon their posterior aspects, by 
tendinal channels. To identify such a minute, fragmentary speci- 
men as this, one should have before him for comparison the skele- 
tons of a representative series of the small birds of France in its 
existing avifauna, as well as access to such fossil forms as have been 
discovered or described up to date. To appreciate the difficulty of 
diagnosis of this nature one has but to make the trial to distinguish 
the complete skeleton of any one of our American Warblers from 
those of its near allies in other genera, and my meaning will be 
made clear. How much more difficult is it then to name, with any 
hope whatever of being near the truth, the bits of bones of birds of 
no greater size that existed in a former geologic age of the earth. 
With skulls, sterna, pelvis and perfect bones all absent this really be- 
comes impossible—absolutely so in the absence of the material above 
indicated. 

These remarks apply with equal truth to specimens Nos. 19-23 
inclusive; the small pair of carpo-metacarpi (No. 20) in this series 
are the smallest fossil bones of this part of the skeleton I have ever 
seen ; either one of them is as small as the unidentified specimen of 
this bone in Milne-Edwards’ great work, and figured on Plate 155, 
(Atlas 2, fig. 11); they are, however, from a different species. 


5 See Recherches sur les Oiseaux fossiles de la France, Atlas 2, Plate 130, fig. 
13. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 515 


The fragment of bone in specimen No. 24 is from an Owl—the 
extinct Bubo arvernensis of Milne-Edwards (see Oiseaux fossiles, At- 
las 2, Plate 192, figs. 11 and 15). 

No. 25 is the humerus of some medium-sized bird equal to about 
that of Tringa gracilis of Milne-Edwards, but it did not belong to 
that species. It is non-pneumatic, with characters in mauy re- 
spects agreeing with the humeri of small water birds, as plovers or 
sand pipers, but it lacks the epicondyloid process possessed by this 
bone in both Gulls and Tringe. It has a length of 3.5 centimeters. 
I do not care to pronounce upon it before comparing with fuller 
material. 

No. 26, a small bird’s ulna, but 2.1 centimeters long and with a 
very sharp olecranon process, comes in the same category as Nos. 
19-23, (see remarks above). Its shaft is distinctly marked by 6 
papille for the quill-butts of the secondary feathers, they being 
about 2 mm. apart. 

The bones in Nos. 30 and 31 are the distal ends of the tarso-meta- 
tarsi of small Gulls of the genus Larus. The first I take to have 
belonged to an individual of the extinct species Larus totanoides® 
aud the other to the somewhat smaller species Larus elegans both of 
Milne-Edwards.’. I am the more convinced of this, inasmuch as I 
have compared them, at least in the case of Larus elegans, with a 
number of the fossil tarso-metatarsi of that extinct form in the pal- 
ontological collections of the U. S. National Museum, and the 
agreement is altogether too close to admit of any doubt. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXIV. 


Fig. 1. Left tarso-metatarsus of Pufinus arvernensis, anterior aspect, 
natural size. From a drawing by Prof. Alphonse Milne- 
Edwards. 

Fig. 2. Left tarso-metatarsus of Puffinus arvernensis. Same bone as 
shown in figure 1. Natural size,and viewed upon its exter- 
no-lateral aspect. 

Fig. 3. Right tarso-metatarsus of Puffinus eyermant, anterior aspect, 
natural size. Drawn by the author. 

Fig. 4. Right tarso-metatarsus of Puffinus eyermani. Same bone as 
shown in figure 3. Natural size and viewed upon its exter- 
no-lateral aspect. Drawn by the author. 


6 Oiseaux fossiles, Atlas 1, Planche 57, fig. 12. 
7 Loc. cit., Planche 56, fig. 11. 
34 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


. Right coracoid of Puffinus arvernensis (?), anterior aspect, 


natural size. 


. Anconal aspect of the left humerus of Puffinus arvernensis 


(?), natural size. 


. Ulnar surface of the left humerus of Puffinus arvernensis (?), 


natural size. 


. Right tibio-tarsus of Puffinus eyermani, natural size and 


viewed upon its anterior aspect. Cnemial process restored 
in dotted line. 


. Right tibio-tarsus of Puffinus arvernensis (?), natural size, 


and viewed upon its anterior aspect. Figures 5-9 inclusive, 
drawn by the author. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 517 


MAMMALS COLLECTED BY DR. A. DONALDSON SMITH DURING HIS 
EXPEDITION TO LAKE RUDOLF, AFRICA.! 


By Samuet N. Rwoaps. 


In the following annotated list of the mammals collected by Dr. 
A. Donaldson Smith during his African expedition of 189495 
across Somaliland to Lake Rudolf, I have included all the species 
coming under my observation which were brought back by Dr. 
Smith to Philadelphia. 

The greater part of the collection was most generously given to 
the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, but a large part 
of the skulls, mounted heads and skins of the larger game have been 
reserved by Dr. Smith, and at present form an exhibition at the 
University of Pennsylvania. Those species in the list not repre- 
sented in the donation to the Academy are preceded by an aster- 
isk. 

The entire collection represents 50 genera and 77 species,” seven of 
which are here described as new. 

Dr. Smith is to be congratulated on having brought to Philadel- 
phia by far the largest, most comprehensive and best preserved 
faunal collection of African mammals ever acquired by an Ameri- 
can institution, and not only many species, but several genera are 
for the first time made accessible to students on this side of the 
Atlantic. 

Owing to the almost total lack of specimens in this country for 
comparison, and the widely scattered literature relating to African 
mammalogy, the author has been severely handicapped in his study 
of the collection, and it is hoped that the paper, as now presented, 
will be judged accordingly. 


1 At the request of Dr. Smith this paper was originally prepared for 
publication in his forthcoming book on the Lake Rudolf expedition. Less 
than three months were alloted the writer for its preparation. The mss. was 
subsequently returned, with other papers of scientific character intended for 
the work, on account, of lack of space and was then accepted for publication 
in the Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. 

? This includes four genera and five species of bats, which have been worked 
up by Dr. Harrison Allen in a separate paper, viz : Megaderma frons, Meg- 
derma cor, Nycteris capensis, Scotophilus minimus and Adelonycleris sp. ? 


518 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


*1, Hippopotamus amphibius L. Hippopotamus. 

A skull and several incisor teeth are in the University of Penn- 
sylvania series. 
*2. Phacochoerus africanus (Gmel.). Mlian’s Wart Hog. 

A skull and a mounted head are in the University of Pennsylva- 
nia exhibit. 


*3. Giraffa camelopardalis (L.). Ethiopian Giraffe. 

The skull of a female, with full head and neck skin to shoulders, 
was mounted at the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. 
It exhibits the peculiarities defined by Mr. Thomas’ for the northern 
form. The application to this form of the name ethiopica of Sun- 
devall‘ is, however, incorrect, as the camelopardalis of Linneus is 
assigned by that author to “ ASthiopia and Sennar.”® This makes 
Sundevall’s name asynonym, the southern race remaining, so far as 
I can ascertain, unnamed. I would propose for the latter the 
name Giraffa camelopardalis australis, Nom. nov. 


*4, Bubalis swaynei Scl. Swayne’s Hartebeest. 

Represented by five (?) skulls in the University of Pennsylvania 
series. 
5. Bubalis cokei (Giinth.). Coke’s Hartebeest. 

One pair of horns in the collection of the Academy of Natural 
Sciences of Philadelphia (No. 3,933), and four mounted heads in the 
University of Pennsylvania. 


*6, Damaliscus jimela (Mtsch.). Topi Antelope. 


One mounted head and one skull in the University of Pennsylva- 
nia represent this species. 

7. Madoqua guentheri Thos. Gunther’s Dik-dik. 

A mounted male specimen, entire, with skull separate, in the 
Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia series (No. 3,900), be- 
longs to this very distinct species. While the colors of the back 
and head closely resemble those of the following (Jf. phillipsi), the 
tawny ochraceus tints of the belly of phillipsi constantly distinguish 
it from the white bellied guentheri. In the Academy’s specimen 
of the latter, the back is quite as gray as in Thomas’ and Sclater’s 
figure of phillipsi,’ not rufous, as there figured. 
~ 8 Proe. Zool. Soc., 1894, p. 135. 

4K, Vet. Akad. Handl., 1844, p. 175. 


5Syst. Nat., 1758, p. 66 
6 Book of Antelopes, 1896, part V, pl. XXXI. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 519 


8. Madoqua phillipsi. Phillips’s Dik-dik. 

Six flat skins and four skulls (Nos. 3,901-3,904), the latter being 
in the collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadel- 
phia. 

*9. Oreotragus oreotragus (“ Forst.,” Schreb.). Klippspringer Antelope. 

A mounted head and an entire skin of this antelope are in the 

University of Pennsylvania series. 
*10. ? Kobus ellipsiprymnus (Ogilb.). Common Waterbuck. 
One mounted head in the University of Pennsylvania exhibit. 


*11. Kobus defassa (Rupp.). Defassa Waterbuck. 

A skull is in the University of Pennsylvania series. 
*12. Cervicapra sp. ? 

Two pairs of horns with portions of attached skulls indicate this 
genus too imperfectly to determine the species they represent. 


13. Gazella thomsoni’ Gunth. Thomson’s Gazelle. 

Two skulls of males and two skins (Nos. 3,898, 3,934, 3,935, 3,994) 
were given the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. The 
skull of a young male agrees exactly with Peters’ figure® of a young 
granti which Gunther made the type of G. petersi. A comparison 
with our series of granti and thomsoni convinces me that peterst is a 
young thomsoni. 

*14 Gazella soemmerringi berberana (Mtsch.). Soemmerring’s Gazelle. 

Several specimens which adorn the University of Pennsylvania 
collection belong to this race. 

15. Lithocranius walleri (Brooke). Waller’s Gazelle. 

Two skulls, male and female, (Nos. 3,896, 3,897), were presented 
to the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Three male 
heads are in the University of Pennsylvania series. 

*16. Oryx beisa (Rupp.). Beisa Antelope. 

Two mounted heads and four skulls in the University of Pennsyl- 
vania series. OQ. callotis Thos. does not seem to have been met 
with. 

*17. Strepsiceros strepsiceros (Pall.). Greater Kudu. 

The University of Pennsylvania contains one mounted head of 

this species. 


TSyn., Gazella petersi Gunth., Ann. Mag. N. H., 1884. p. 426. 
8 Monatsb. Akad. Wis. Berl., 1879, p. 832, Pl. V. 


520 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


*18. Strepsiceros imberbis Blyth. Lesser Kudu. 
A head of this animal was taken by Dr. Smith. It is now beauti- 
fully mounted. 


19. Equus grevyi M. Edw. Grevy’s Zebra. 

A remarkably large skull was added to the already fine collection 
of zebra crania in the collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences 
of Philadelphia. Its greatest length, from the anterior edge of the 
premaxillary to the superior rim of the occiput, measured in a straight 
line, is 633 mm. Its greatest zygomatic width is 220 mm. The 
alveolar length of the upper molar series is 170 mm., and the great- 
est length of mandible is 507 mm. The specimen is of an old male 
and, compared with a skull of E. burchelli of same age, is 100 mm. 
longer, and is nearly 50 mm. longer than the largest skull of E. 
caballus in the collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences of 
Philadelphia. Compared with that of burchelli the skull of grevyi is 
remarkably long for its width, due to the great relative prolongation 
of the rostral and occipital regions. In burchelli the length of 
skull is 2.63 times the width, in grevy? it is nearly three (2.88) times 
the width. The lower molar series differ markedly from burchelli 
in their uniformly massive size and great width, the same series in 
burchelli becoming much narrowed posteriorly. In the last named, 
the postpalatal fossa reaches opposite middle of m.2, in grevyi it 
barely reaches opposite the anterior alveolus of m. 3. 

*20. Rhinoceros bicornis L. Round-eared Rhinoceros. 

Of the smaller two-horned species there is a mounted head and 
six pairs of horns in the University of Pennsylvania collection. 
With the exception of one pair, the horns more closely resemble 
those figured by Smith’ in his plate of Rhinoceros simus than those of 
bicornis figured by the same author on plate 2. 

Dr. Smith informs me that while he encountered R. simus, no 
specimens were brought by him to this country. 


21. Procavia brucei somalica Thomas. Somali Tree Hyrax. 

An adult female (No. 3,818) taken at ‘“‘Shebeli” September 4, 
1894, and another female, two-thirds grown, taken March 3, 1894, 
fully confirm Dr, Thomas’ diagnosis” of this subspecies of brucei. 
Compared with an adult female specimen of brucei from the Kyahn 
Mountains, near Mount Kilima-Njaro, kindly loaned me by the 


9Tllust. Zool. S. Afr. 
OTP 2eSee LSO2; Ds Ts 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 521 


Smithsonian Institution, the paler sandy cast of the Somali speci- 
mens is very noticeable, and the dorsal spot is almost white instead 
of ochraceus. The difference in size of skulls, between the type and 
the subspecies, although the Shebeli specimen is the older, is very 
marked, but no specific distinctions are noticeable. 


=22. Elephas africanus Blbch. African Elephant. 


Ten small, and one large pair of tusks adorn the University of 
Pennsylvania collection. 

23. Sciurus sp.? 

An adult male specimen (No. 3,810) from Marsabit, taken Sep- 
tember 11, 1895, differs in many particulars from any African squir- 
rel which I can find described. It may be characterized as follows: 
Colors—Upper head, back and the slender tail, dull black, grizzled 
with tawny brown; half the hairs of back wholly black, the remain- 
der black-based with light brown ring and black tip. Brown-ringed 
hairs more numerous on sides, giving a lighter shade to those parts. 
Upper and lower sides of tail colored alike, blacker toward distal 
end ; hairs at base black with one to three light brown rings, termi- 
nal hairs longer and blacker with now and then a subterminal brown 
ring. Upper feet and scrotum rusty haired. Whisker patch, 
cheeks, line around eyes, chin, throat, breast, inside of legs, and a 
narrow abdominal line dirty tawny white or fawn. Lars sub-tri- 
angular, colored like back. Fur rather short and harsh. Whis- 
kers sparse, weak, black. Color of sides encroaching on abdomen. 

Measurements (from skin).—Total length 320 mm.; tail verte- 
bre 160; pencil 43; hind foot 40. Skull—Total length 40 mm. ; 
greatest breadth 24; length of nasals 11; length of mandible 23.5. 

This squirrel apparently comes nearest S. poensis A. Smith, but it 
lacks any trace of greenish color, is smaller and the tail and body 
are of equal lengths. Like poensis the five upper molars on each 
side are well developed and permanent. 

It appears too small and dark for S. cepapi A. Smith. With any 
of the recently described species it seems to have no close affinities- 
24. Sciurus sp. ? 

A young male squirrel in alcohol, from the Ganana River (Feb- 
ruary 18, 1895), is colored somewhat like S. annulatus Desm. and 
S. cepapi Smith. Like cepapi it has five upper molars, but unlike 
either of the above, its tail vertebree are more than 12 times the 
length of the body without the head. The specimen is about two 


522 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


thirds grown ; its total length is 269 mm., tail vertebre 150, hind 
foot 37, tail tuft 40. 
25. Sciurus ganana sp. nov. Ganana Jungle Squirrel. 

Type, ad. 9, No. 3,809; collection of Academy of Natural Sci- 
ences of Philadelphia, Dr. A. Donaldson Smith Collection; taken 
February 18, 1895, on the Ganana River at Bar Madu. 

Description—Size smallest (?) of the East African squirrels; tail 
1} times length of head and body ; head long and very slender; ears 
large, rounded and somewhat pointed, without tufts. Fur soft and 
rather short. Above, uniform tawny ochre, faintly grizzled with 
black ; below, tawny white. 

Upper tail colored like back, lower tail with broad mesial stripe 
of clear, rusty ochre. 

The dorsal hairs are black-based and black-tipped, with a sub- 
terminal ring of ochre, as are also those of the upper head. Onthe 
sides the hairs are black at base with long ochre tips, and on the 
limbs and feet and sides of neck the ochre almost obscures (exter- 
nally) the darker basal color. The tawny white hairs of lips, chin, 
throat, breast, abdomen and inner legs are unicolor to their bases. 
The region just above and below eyes is of the same color. The 
whiskers reach to tip of recumbent ears and are sparse and black. 

The hairs of upper tail are ochre and black, ringed by four to six 
alternating zones of equal width, the basal one being ochre, the 
minute terminal one black. The lower mesial tail hairs appear to 
be uniform rusty ochre, but a glass reveals a narrow, subterminal 
black ring. The outer border and tip of lower side of tail is like the 
upper side. 

The skull is remarkably narrow and deep for its length, the post- 
orbital process very short and blunt, the brain-case highly and nar- 
rowly arched and the audital bulls widely separated from the 
pterygoid processes, owing to the strong, indented constriction of 
the inner anterior border of the bulls. The auditory meatus is also 
compressed within the outer lateral plane of the overhanging squa- 
mosal. Upper molar series with permanent, cylindric pm. 2, 

Measurements (taken by collector, in the flesh)—Total length, 
820 mm.; tail vertebrae, 170; hind-foot, 38; height of ear (from 
crown, dry), 9; tail pencil, 40. 

Skull—Total length, 89 mm.; basilar length (of Hensel), 32; 
greatest breadth, 21:5; greatest depth (occiput to plane of bulle and 
incisors), 17; length of nasals, 11; post-orbital constriction (behind 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 523 


processes), 12; breadth between auditory meatus (lower border), 
15; greatest length of mandible, 22; greatest breadth of mandible, 
14. 

One specimen, a skin of an old female, with skull, in good condi- 
tion, represents this distinctly marked little squirrel. So far as I 
am able to distinguish, it differs in size, color and cranial characters 
from any described species. Its relationships are with S. cepapi, 
but its smaller size, light color and high, narrow, brain case, with 
long compressed zygome, separate them. 

On the accompanying label the specimen is stated to have been 
“shot in the thick jungle on River Ganana. Was accompanied by 
4 young ones.” ‘The well-developed teats, 2 pectoral, 2 abdominal, 
3 inguinal, show evidence of recent nursing. 

26. Xerus rutilus (Cretzsch.). Abyssinian Spiny Squirrel. 

Three adult skins, with skulls, from Hargesa, taken between the 
17th and 28th days of July, 1894, are very similar in their colors, 
being tawny ferruginous, lined with black on crown and along mid- 
dle back. The rostrum, sides of body and outer sides of limbs area 
peculiar fleshy cinnamon, each hair being white tipped. Underparts 
white, with tawny cast due to exposed skin. Hind feet whitish 
above. Tail, above faded rusty, below brownish black with faded 
border. Hairs worn and ragged, with new, brown-black, white- 
tipped hairs sprouting beneath the old, but no evidences of molt on 
body. 

In another specimen (Ad. 9, No. 3,806), taken August 29, 1894, 
at Shebeli, the cinnamon of sides is almost obscured by the white 
hair tips, the back is clear, black-grizzled fawn and the hind head and 
limbs like sides. The tail in this specimen has quite recently 
molted and is a beautiful black above, broadly margined and tipped 
with glistening white. Below there is a mesial stripe of fleshy 
brown bordered with black and the latter is fringed with white, as 
above. 

In a very old male, taken March 23,1895, the back and hind 
head are much blacker, and the forehead, sides and limbs nearly 
chestnut-red ; the whisker patch, throat and sides of head, neck and 
a narrow lateral marginal line, fulvous. The tail is in the molt to 
the black and white pelage and the old pelage is much darker 
(brown-black) than in the other specimens and lacks any sign of 
the mesial band. 


524 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Two, quarter-grown young, male and female, in alcohol, are colored 
like the adults on head and fore-limbs, the rest of the body above is 
sandy-brown, the outer tail hairs are dull white, the upper vertebral 
line of tail showing short black and rusty hairs. The tail (without 
hairs) is about the length of body without head. Its tip is blunt 
and the whole organ viewed from above is remarkably triangular, 
measuring across base, in the spirit specimen, about 10 mm. and 
tapering evenly to the point. The tail is much flattened and 
a strongly depressed vertebral line above and below separates the 
thickened, rounded fleshy sides. The external sexual organs of the 
young male are very strongly developed. 

In adult suckling females the teats are very long (8 to 12 mm.), 
2 abdominal, 2 inguinal. 

Specimens in the collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences. 
of Philadelphia. 


No. 3,804 3; El Dere;..”. » « . March, 235 986m5 
No. 3,805 & , Mili, . se iw - oda 2h aoe 
No. 3,806 9, Shebeli, . ... . . August, 29, 18940 
No. 3,807 Q',, Hlargeaay as. ce. dhol ii ae 
No. 8,808 2, dlargesa, ..: ~ « «duly is, 18se 
No. 3,859 Juv. 9, Hargesa, . . . . . July 18, 1894. 
No. 3,860 Juv. ¢, Hargesa, . . . . . July 18, 1894. 


27. Lophiomys smithi sp. noy. Smith’s Maned Rat. Plate XXV. 

Type, Ad. 3, No. 3,808, Museum Academy of Natural Sciences of 
Philadelphia. Collected at Sheikh Husein, West Somaliland (about 
lat. N. 8°, long. E. 41°), Africa, by Dr. A. Donaldson Smith, Sept. 
30, 1894. 

Description—Smaller than JL. imhausi; tail shorter than body 
without head, not tufted. White crown and ear patch separated by 
a black band. Nasals narrow at base; interorbital width of frontals 
less than half their postorbital width. Jugal and frontal processes. 
not separated by the squamosal. 

Color—above, from neck to base of tail and down to dividing 
lateral band of brown, iron-gray, the fur composed of two kinds: 
first, a very fine silken under fur about 20 mm. long, composed of 
white hairs, a few of which are wholly white but about 70 per cent. 
are brownish-black at the basal half. Among these are evenly in- 
terspersed, in the proportion of about one to eighty, slender bristling 
hairs, 60 to 65 mm. long. The basal fifth of these hairs is black, 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 525 


followed by a similar length of white, then a much longer subter- 
minal one of black, the tip being white. The same style of pelt and 
coloration is found on the sides, tail, belly and legs, except that the 
bristling hairs become fewer, almost disappearing on the shoulders 
and sides of neck and becoming obsolete on the underparts. The 
tail is unicolor, except a short white tip. There is a well-defined 
occipital band of black between the anterior bases of ears, forming 
a V-shaped extension into the middle of the white crown patch and 
connecting across the anterior base of ear with the black area of 
cheeks, nose, lower head and supraorbital stripe. There is a faint 
isolated patch of white half way up between the eye and the mouth, 
and a conspicuous patch of the same in front of and below each ear. 
The feet are sparsely clothed with coarse, black hair, becoming 
bristly on the toes and exceeding them in length. The whiskers 
reach almost to shoulders and are wholly jet-black. The backs of 
ears are very sparsely clothed with short brownish and white hairs, 
but their margins and inner surfaces are thickly set with bristly 
white hairs, 3 to 5 mm. long. The lateral band of short spinuous 
hairs, which divides the dorsal from the costal mane areas, begins 
broadly and sharply at the base of the neck on a line with the ear, 
and terminates indefinitely near the sacrum in aslender point of 
hairs. The larger of the hairs measure about 20 mm. long and are 
olivaceous brown, becoming rusty near the tips, with whitish sub- 
terminal ring and minute black tip. The median abdominal and 
pectoral areas are blacker than the sides. 

Measurements (of body, taken in flesh before skinning, by the 
collector) —Total length, 380 mm; tail vertebrze, 140 ; hind foot 40 ; 
ear (from crown, dry skin), 12.5. 

Skull—Total length, 52; basilar length (of Hensel), 46; greatest 
breadth, 31; interorbital constriction, 10; length of nasals, 16; 
greatest breadth (anterior) of nasals, 6.8; basal breadth of nasals, 
5; length of upper molar series (alveolar), 12.2; length of mandi- 
ble, 34; breadth of mandible, 15.2. 

A fine skin of a male, with perfect skull, forms one of the most 
valuable treasures in Dr. Smith’s collection. It was taken at Sheikh 
Husein, September 30, 1894, and is now mounted and deposited in 
the Museum of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. 
The skull forms a separate presentation (No. 3,803) in the Acad- 
emy’s collection. 


According to Giglioli," there were only four specimens of Lophio- 
mys known to have been taken, up to 1881: 

1. Skin, skeleton and viscera (Aden, 1866). Type in Paris Mu- 
seum. 

2. Skull (Maman, 1867). Type of Phractomys ethiopicus Peters, 
in Berlin Museum. 

3. Mounted skin and skeleton (Keren, Bogos 1870). In the Ge- 
noa Civic Museum. 

4. Skin and skull (Erkanid near Suakin, 1881). In the Flor- 
ence Zoological Museum. 

Dr. Smith’s specimen appears to be the fifth. It is certainly the 
first to reach an American museum. 

Compared with Milne-Edwards’ illustrations” of the type of im- 
hausi, the Smith specimen is somewhat younger and smaller, with 
much shorter tail, though fully adult. The pelage is more worn or 
naturally shorter than in the type, and consequently is appreciably 
lighter colored throughout, owing to the more exposed bases of the 
fur. The tail almost wholly lacks the white tip, and the head the 
small white patch under eye, of imhausi. 

The most marked color difference in the Sheikh Husein example 
is seen in the division of the white of upper head by a distinet black 
band joining the dark area of occiput with that of the side of head 


1 Zool. Anz., IV, p. 45. 
2 Archiv. du Mus., 1867, pl. VI and VII. 


+, Aven Semmes 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 527 


at the upper anterior base of ear. There is a large white spot 25 
mm. long and 10 mm. wide reaching around lower base of ear to 
angle of jaw, and the ears are broadly tipped and fringed with 
white; both these characters not being shown in Milne-Edwards 
plate of imhausi. 

Cranially, the Smith specimen differs specifically in its narrow 
interorbital width, the less produced expansion of the occipital re- 
gion beyond posterior line of the interparietal and the almost com- 
plete suppression of the forward extension of the squamosal. In the 
type of imhausi this bone forms an exterior rectangular keystone 
about 3 mm. square, at the junction of the frontal, parietal and 
jugal boues, distinctly separating the superior wing of the jugal 
from contact with the lateral wing (postorbital process) of the 
frontal; in the Smith example these bones touch each other, being 
only separated anteriorly by a slender, irregular extrusion of the 
squamosal + mm. wide and 2 mm. long. 

The dentition of smithi, making allowance for the difference in 
age, appears to be almost identical with Edwards’ figures" of imhaust, 
except that the posterior upper molar lies wholly outside the median 
longitudinal axis of the anterior molars. In the latter the nasals 
are broader posteriorly than anteriorly, these proportions being re- 
versed in smitht. In imhausi the postpalatal notch is opposite ante- 
rior base of posterior molar ; in smithi it only reaches the middle of 
that tooth. The paroccipital processes in smithi are directed forward 
against the audital bulle; in imhausi they are directed backward 
and separated from the bull by a distinct space. The mandible of 
smithi, while exactly the same length as that of imhausi, is very 
much more slender, the greatest breadth of the latter being 4 mm. 
greater. The three recorded specimens” all came from a tract on the 
Red Sea north of the 15th parallel; smithi was taken on a mount- 
ain 5,000 feet high, in the Indian Ocean-drainage about 700 miles 
southeast of the most southern recorded locality of an imhausi spe- 
cimen. 

For an account of the capture of the specimen and of the nature 
of its habitat, the reader is referred to Dr. Smith’s narrative. 


28. Acomys spinosissimus Peters. Peters’ Acomys. 


A series of Spiny mice, taken between the 12th of March and the 
17th of April, 1895, and preserved in alcohol, seem to correspond 


18 Milne Edwards’ type was purchased alive at Aden. Its locality was ap- 
parently near that of the others, as they are regarded as the same species. 


528 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


most closely to spinosissimus. One specimen (No. 3,872), a young 
adult male, resembles Peters’ figure,"* except that it wholly lacks 
any rufous tinge on the uniformly olive-black upper pelage. The 
skull of this specimen is so like that of several others taken about 
the same time that I am induced to consider them the same species. 
Two very old adults (Nos. 3,868, 3,873), ¢ and 9, are blackish- 
chestnut on back and upper head, and bright rusty cinnamon along 
the sides, the under parts and feet white. The total length of the 
old male is 195 mm.; length of the tail, 93; of hind foot, 17. The 
length of the skull is 29 mm., while that of the dark specimen ((. ¢.) 
is 2mm. shorter. Two other hardly adult specimens (Nos. 3,863, 
3,864) are somewhat intermediate in color between the dark and 
light examples, with which their cranial characters affiliate them. 
Their bellies and feet, however, are as white as in the old adults. 

Briefly stated, this series, if representing one species, as I am in- 
clined to think it may, indicates an animal, which in the old adult 
stage, is much redder above and whiter below than Peters’s descrip- 
tion of spinosissimus, which corresponds with the more immature 
forms. It is possible that the dark specimen only is referable to 
Peters’s species and the others to some undescribed form. 

The adult female contained three large embryos. As the animal 
grows older the tubercles on the feet become more prominent and 
interspersed with granulations. The two specimens from Finik 
near Webi Shebeli (Nos. 3,877, 3,878) are not different from the 
other rusty specimens. The young one is pale fawn and seems to 
show that the dark olive coloration is not a character of immatur- 
ity. 

Specimens in alcohol; collection of the Academy of Natural Sci- 
ences of Philadelphia: 


No. 8,863 3, Aimola,.. is 2s Marehp12;a6os: 
No. 3,864 @, Lake Abaya,. . . May 10, 1895. 

No. 8,865 9, Aimola, =<") 4) <oMarehy12; 2898; 
No. 3,866 6, BerMadu,... . . February 16, 1895. 
No. 3,867 $, Aimola,. . . . . March 14, 1895. 
No. 3,868 9, Almola,. . > 4 Miereh 4, 263m 
No. 3,869 Foetal, Aimola,. . . . . March 14, 1895. 


No. 3,870 Foetal, Aimola,. . . . . March 14, 1895. 
No. 3,871 Foetal, Aimola,. . . . . March 14, 1895. 


“ Reise n. Mossamb., 1852, pl. XXXIV, fig. 1. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 529 


No. 3,872 oy) Amoasay i. . 2 Agri, 1805. 
No. 3,873 6; Aimola,.. . . . March 14,1895. 
No. 3,877 Juv. Finik, . . . . . December 14, 1894. 
No. 3,878 9, Finik, . . . . . December 14, 1894. 


29. Acomys sp.? 

A male specimen, (No. 3,862), the only one of this genus from 
Sheikh Husein, is lighter colored than any of the foregoing listed 
under spinosissimus, and the tail is not longer than the body. The 
ears are much larger than in any Acomys I have examined. The 
skull differs in the great width of the audital bullz and the abrupt 
compression of the jugal at its squamosal insertion. 

The total length of this mouse is 150 mm.; the tail, 60; the hind 
foot, 16.5; the ear from crown, 1]. 

30. Acomys wilsoni Thos. Short-tailed Spiny Mouse. 

A spirit specimen of an old male, (No. 3,861), corresponds so ex- 
actly with Oldfield Thomas’s description’® of wilsoni as to leave no 
doubt of its identity. The tail is only 47 mm. long; the body, 182; 
the hind foot, 138. The skull is 24.5 mm. long by 11.2 in breadth. 
The coronoid process is well developed as compared with the other 
Acomys in the collection. 

This specimen was taken at Burga Camp, Amara. 


31 Steatomys parvus sp.nov. Lesser Fat Mouse. 

Type, No. 3,879, ad. 9 ; collection of the Academy of Natural 
Sciences of Philadelphia. Collected by Dr. A. Donaldson Smith, 
July 14, 1895, at Rusia, Lake Rudolf, Africa. 

Description—Size small, tail short and slender, less than one-third 
the length of head and body. Colors similar to Steatomys pratensis 
Peters (=S. edulis Ptrs.). 

Above, uniform tawny brown, lined with black, slightly darker 
on back and hind head ; sides more tawny. Underparts, including 
feet, uniform soiled white. Upper and lower tail, colored like cor- 
responding parts of body. A white spot at base of ear. 

Measurements—Total length, 107 mm.; tail vertebre, 33; hind 
foot, 13; ear, from crown, 8. 

Skull—Total length, 20 mm; basilar length (of Hensel) 17; 
greatest breadth, 11; interorbital constriction, 3.4; length of nasals, 
7.8; length of upper molar series, 3.2; length of mandible, 11.3 ; 
breadth of mandible, 6.6. 


% Ann. Mag. N. Hist., 1892, p. 22. 


530 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Only one specimen of this genus isin the collection. It is an 
adult female with teeth well worn and showing plainly three pairs 
of teats, pectoral, abdominal and inguinal. 

The specimen is in spirit. It differs decidedly from S. pratensis 
and S. krebsi, as figured and described in Peters’ work on the 
mammals of Mozambique, in its diminutive size. Its tail is also 
relatively much shorter and the ears smaller than in either of these 
species. Its colors resemble those given in Peters’ plate (J. ¢.) of 
“ edulis,” but lack the fawn tint of that species. 

32. Mus barbarus L. Greater Striped Mouse. 

Six specimens, all in alcohol, except an adult female, are in the 
collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. 
They may be tabulated as follows: 

No. 3,846 Ad. 9, Dumbola Kalta,. . April 20, 1895. 


No. 3,913 Juv. é, Lake Abaya, . . . May 10, 1898. 
No. 3,914 Juv. Higo, i. .°. 4... . Apel ayia 
No. 3,915 Juv. Higo;.. 4. « 3 > «) April eae 
No. 3,916 Juv. Hig6, os. Sn. 2 peel Se, fee 
No. 3,817 Juv. Bigos. 0) 2° Son. ts April, Stee 


33. Mus microdon Peters? 

One specimen, (No. 3,908), a female, taken April 24, 1895, agrees 
very well with the figures of Peters’ types, and the measurements 
also coincide very closely with his. The tail is unicolor, naked, 
shiny brown, tessellated with geometrically arranged scales. The 
belly and feet are whitish, the lateral stripe fulvous, the back dark, 
grizzled, brown-black. 

34. Mus sp.? 

Two immature males, (Nos. 3,884, 3,891), with plumbeous body, 
white feet and naked tail of the length of the body without head, 
comes from Sheikh Husein ; October 12,1894. They differ from any 
other species in the collection. 


35. Mus sp.? 

A series of four skins with skulls, and five specimens in alcohol, 
represent a pretty large rat which was only seen and taken on grassy 
hills at Sheikh Mahomet. 

They correspond closely to the Mus albipes of Riippell. 

No. 3,848 D0 US eae ee 
No. 3,849 QO,. s ow ¥ 9 oe) SNovenbera: sea 
No. 3,850 Sue Le wee . . « November 4, 1894. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 531 


No. 3,851 Siw inl ee eNovember 7, 1894: 
No. 3,883 Juv. °,. let. Yee 
Maw. co2 diveeG, 0...) 2-2 4 November 1, 1894. 
Moaxaegodive Oss 20:02 2.0. 2° November 1, 1894. 
No. 3,906 oat: 
No. 3,908 Ons. 

Pseudoconomys Subgen. nov. Type Mus proconodon (infra). 


Subgeneric characters. Alveolar length of anterior upper molar 
nearly thrice the greatest width of tooth. The two posterior sets of 
transverse tubercles of this tooth as in the genus Mus, but the ante- 
rior base of the median anterior cusp is remarkably produced for- 
ward one-third the whole length of the tooth, and terminates ante- 
riorly just above the descending tooth root in a false, rounded tuber- 
cular cone, which lies so far below the grinding plane of the molars 
as never (?) to become functional. 


36. Mus (Pseudoconomys) proconodon sp. noy. False-cusp Mouse. 


Type, No. 3,880, ad. 9, ; collection of the Academy of Natural 
Sciences of Philadelphia. Collected by Dr. A. Donaldson Smith at 
Sheikh Husein, Western Somaliland, Africa, October 13, 1894. 

Description—Size small, tail minutely and sparsely haired, as 
long as body without head, unicolor, very slender and finely annula- 
ted. Pelage fine, silky, tricolor, mouse brown above, ochraceous- 
fawn along sides, beneath white. Anterior soles of feet thickly set 
with granulated points, the hind foot with two anterior, two median 
and two posterior tubercles, the fore foot with three anterior and two 
posterior tubercles. Ears very small and rounded. 

Color above, including head and tail, almost exactly as in Mus 
musculus, the sides slightly tinged with fawn. A well defined red- 
dish-fawn stripe along sides, from shoulder to hip-joint, distinctly 
separates the color of back from the pure white of belly. Whole of 
under side, including upper lips, pure clear white to the bases of the 
hairs. Feet whitish-brown ; soles naked to heel. Mamme, 2 pec- 
toral, 2 axillary, 2 abdominal, 2 inguinal. Skull characters as 
above defined for the subgenus. 

Measurements—Total length, 128 mm.; tail vertebra, 56; hind 
foot, 16 ; ear, from crown, 6. 

Skull—Total length, 22; basilar length, 19; greatest width, 11 ; 
interorbital constriction, 4; nasal length, 8.8; alveolar length of 


upper molar series, 4.2 ; length of mandible, 13; greatest width of 
mandible, 6.4. 


35 


532 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


One specimen in alcohol represents this distinctly marked species. 
Should it prove that its peculiar tovth pattern is shared by some 
previously named but imperfectly described species, the propriety 
of its subgeneric (if not generic) value certainly justifies the possible 
synonym. ‘The specimen is an old adult with the teeth well worn, 
but not enough so to destroy the pattern of tuberculation exhibited 
by earlier maturity. 

37. Mus minutoides Smith. Smith’s Lesser Mouse. 

I follow Oldfield Thomas” in applying Smith’s earlier name to a 
small, fawn colored mouse which corresponds to Peters’ admirable 
figures of Mus minimus in his Mammalia of Mozambique. 

Specimens (in alcohol) : 

No. 3,910 Juv. 9, Sogida Voleano, . . April 7, 1895. 

No. 3,911 Juv. &, Sogida Volcano, . . April 7, 1895. 

No. 3,912 Ad. ¢, Jire, Sakuyu,. . . . March 20, 1893. 
38. Mus mahomet sp. nov. Sheik Mahomet Mouse. 

Type, No. 3,881, ad. ¢ ; collection of the Academy of Natural 
Sciences of Philadelphia. Collected by Dr. A. Donaldson Smith at 
Sheikh Mahomet, Western Somaliland, Africa, Nov. (?), 1895. 

Description—Size small, slightly larger than Mus minutoides (J. ¢.). 
Tail well haired, slender, nearly equal to length of head and hody. 
Ears small, rounded and thickly haired; pelage dense, slightly his- 
pid, tricolor. 

Color above, dark, black-brown, becoming dark fulvous brown on 
sides and lower cheeks. Lower parts grayish-white, tinged with 
fulvous on breast, neck and throat. A distinct lateral band of deep 
fulvous extends along sides from shoulder to hip and along ham al- 
most to heel, separating the colors of upper and lower body. Feet 
hoary brown; tail above, like back, below, like feet. Basal halves 
of body hairs everywhere bluish-black. Hind feet with three pairs 
of tubercles, fore feet each with three anterior and two posterior 
tubercles. Whiskers medium, black. 

Skull as in typical Mus museulus, except that the inner anterior 
face of upper incisors is flattened and the bases of nasals extend 
some distance beyond the upper posterior sutures of the premaxil- 
laries. Coronoid process of mandible strongly hooked. 

Measurements—Total length 103 mm.; tail vertebra, 49; hind 
foot, 14.5; ear, from crown, 6.5. 


16 P, Z.S., 1888, p. 13. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 533 


Skull—Total length, 19.3 mm. ; greatest breadth, 9.8 ; interorbital 
constriction, 3; length of nasals, 7.2; length of mandible, 11.5; 
width of mandible, 5.7. 

Two specimens of this minute mouse, both males, taken at Sheikh 
Mahomet, appear to be undescribed. In some respects they resem- 
ble the characters given by Rtppell for Mus imberbis, but they 
are much smaller with relatively longer tails and have well devel- 
oped whiskers. 

The so-called whiskerless character of Riippell’s animal appears 
to me to be an anomaly due to abnormal rather than natural cir- 
cumstances. In any event, this question in no wise affects the 
status of the mouse which owes to an accident of birth and locality, 
rather than to its possession of whiskers, the august specific name 
which I have imposed upon it. 


39. t*Mus arborarius Peters. Long-tailed Wood Mouse. 


Two specimens, both females, (No. 3,847, ad. skin and skull; No. 
3,890, juv. in alcohol), from River Darde, September 12, 1894, are 
of interest. 

Mr. Oldfield Thomas considers" M. arborarius of Peters synony- 
mous with WM. dolichurus. If this is the case, the River Darde mice are 
perhaps, a good subspecies characterized by the excessively long tail 
and smaller size. In our oldest specimen (No. 3,847), with molars 
more worn than in the adult type skull of arborarius figured by 
Peters,”* the skull is markedly smaller and shallower. 

After examining their descriptions it seems to me that Peters has 
plainly set forth good distinctions between his arborarius and 
Smuts’ dolichurus. The most marked character of arborarius is 
the pure white feet and belly, which in dolichurus are fulvous. The 
absence of a preocular spot in arborarius is also to be considered. 
In these respects the Smith specimens resemble arborarius. The 
feet and under parts are immaculate white to the roots of the hairs. 

In the adult, the total length is 100 mm., that of the tail vertebree 
being 150 mm. _ In the younger one, contrary to the general rule 
in young murines, the proportional size of tail to head and body is 
even greater than in the adult, the former being 122 mm. long and 
the latter 76 mm. 

In the type of dolichwrus the length of head and body is 125 mm. 
and the tail 145mm. In arborarius the head and body of the female 


WP: Z.S., 1891, p. 186. 
18 Reise n. Mossam., 1852, pl. XX XV, fig. 7. 


534 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF | [1896. 


is given by Peters as 120 mm., of the tail, 160mm. These figures, 
combined with the color differences, convince me of the propriety of 
separating arborarius from dolichurus, and at the same time class- 
jng the River Darde specimens with the former species. The char- 
acter of the tail in the alcoholic specimen seems to indicate clearly 
its use as a prehensile organ. 


40. Lophuromys sikapusi (Temm.). Sikapusi Rat. 

Making allowance for the change of color likely to occur in spirit 
specimens, there is no doubt that two hispid rats taken by Dr. 
Smith at Sheikh Mahomet are specifically the same as the animal 
minutely described by Peters” as Lasiomys afer. 

The upper pelage of No. 3,909, a very old female, is like that of 
the younger one (No. 3,894, 92), a grizzled, black, reddish-brown, 
the under parts light ochraceous sharply defined against dark color 
of sides. The tail of the older specimen is wanting ; in the other 
one it is deep black above and rusty below. The basal half of up- 
per pelage is colored like belly, the belly hairs being unicolor. The 
older specimen is very large, the head and body being 130 mm. long. 

The skull, compared with Peters’ illustration (/. c.), differs in the 
shape of the pterygoid fossa which, in our examples, is widest at the 
postpalatal notch and contracts at the pterygoid processes, widening 
again in a vase-shaped outline as viewed from above. 

The semi-spinous character of the pelage in this species is inter- 
mediate between that of Mus and Acomys. 


41. Golunda reichardi (Noack). Reichard’s Bush Rat. 

Six fine skins and one specimen in alcohol, of a “ grass or bush 
rat,” were taken at Sheikh Mahomet. They answer Noack’s deserip- 
tion of reichardi,” as contrasted with that of Peters for ‘‘ Pelomys 
fallax,” so well that I cannot hesitate to assign them to the former 
and confirm the correctness of Noack’s separation of the two. The 
entire absence of a sulcus from the incisors of any of our specimens 
instantly distinguishes them from fallax. The black dorsal streak 
is plain in some, in others nearly absent. 

The general body color may be said to be ochraceous to tawny 
brown, grizzled coarsely with black. Sides of nose and eye-ring 
pure ochraceous. 

A note on one of the labels states this rat “makes a prehensile 
[sic.] nest in bush ; habitat in thick grass.” 


19 Monatsb. Akad. Berl., 1866, p. 409. 
20 Zool. Jahrb., 1887, p. 235. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 535 


Specimens: Nos. 3,820, 3,821, 3,822, 3,823, 3,824, 3,825, 3,920: = 
53s, 29s. 

42. Dendromys mesomelas (Brants). Long-tailed Tree Mouse. 

Three Dendromys, all apparently taken at Sheikh Mahomet, were 
presented to the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia by 
Dr. Smith. Two of these, a half-grown young (No. 3,876) and 
an adult male (No. 3,874), are in spirits; the third, an adult 
male (No. 3,853), isa finely prepared skin with skull, and field meas- 
urements taken by the collector. The two adults correspond so ex- 
actly with Smith’s beautiful plate” of D. typieus, in both color 
and dimensions, I am unable to note any differences of even sub- 
specific value. The fact that typicus is a South African species 
would lead to the supposition that the Galla animal differed there- 
from. In the absence of specimens for comparison, these will be 
classed under mesomelas, Wagner, Heuglin and Trouessart agreeing 
that typicus is a synonym of that species. Matschie” names the 
long-tailed Dendromys of East Africa D. pumilio Wagner, quoting 
“ Munch. gel. Anz., XII, 1820, p. 437.” I am unable to find this 
publication, but would suppose some mistake, as Wagner states 
three times in his description of pumilio in Weigmann’s Archiv. fur 
Naturgeschichte, 1841, p. 135, that it is a “new species,” no refer- 
ence being made to a previous description. The chief distinction 
between pumilio and mesomelas (if any, Trouessart and Heuglin 
considering them the same) is the absence of the dark dorsal stripe 
in the former. 

From D. mystacalis Heugl.,” of Abyssinia, the Sheikh Mahomet 

‘specimens are distinguished by greater size, relatively longer and 
less hairy tail and the presence of the dark dorsal stripe. 

In No. 3,853 (/.¢.) the total length is 177 mm.; tail, 100; hind 
foot, 21. In No. 3,874 these measurements are respectively 163, 92 
and 22; the ear from crown is 11.5. 


43. Dendromys sp. 

- A young spirit specimen (No. 3,876), whose skull shows it to be 
about two-thirds grown, differs so markedly in the black color of 
the ears and orbital region and the white spot at the bases of ears 
and the tail being only equal to the head and body in length, that 
there is little doubt of its belonging to a different species from the 

21 Tlust. Zool. S. Afr., 1849, pl. 34, fig. 1. 


» Die Saug. Ost Afr., 1895, p. 49. 
*3 Nov. Act. Acad. Czs. Leop., 1863 (Sept. 1862), p. 5. 


536 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


foregoing. Its date, November 12, 1894, would show it to have 
been taken at Sheikh Mahomet. 


44. Gerbillus sp.? 

Two examples (No. 3,858, 3,929), both females of early maturity, 
the former taken on the route to, and the latter at, Lake Rudolf, 
come nearer G. schlegeli than to G. bihmi or G. leucogaster, with 
which they also seem closely allied. They are darker and smaller 
than Jeucogaster, and have much larger audital bull than béhmi. 

A. Smith considers G. afer of Gray a synonym of G. schlegeli. In 
this connection I may remark that the above specimens correspond 
almost exactly to Smith’s plate (pl. 35) of afer in the Illustrations 
of the Zoology of South Africa. 

45. Gerbillus (sp. nov ?). 

So desperately involved is the nomenclature and classification of 
the numerous African members of this genus, I hesitate to impose a 
name on what appears to me an undescribed form, No. 3,857, Ad. 
9, from Hargesa, taken July 18,1894. While resembling, in gen- 
eral characters of skull and skin, Peters’ /eucogaster, it is essentially 
different from any Gerbillus I have examined, in the entire absence 
of the posterior cusp of ™m. 3, that tooth consisting merely of the 
normal semicircular loop with anterior curve and single posterior 
crenation. The tooth is not much worn, so that any trace of the 
posterior cusp would be easily distinguished, neither is there the 
faintest indication of it at the base of the tooth, the posterior crena- 
tion nearly reaching the alveolus. 

The specimen is a dry skin; the upper body colors are a rich, 
dark fawn, becoming tawny along sides and lined along upper back 
and head with coarse black-tipped hairs. The ears and upper tail 
are blackish-fawn, the latter becoming nearly black toward tip and 
ochraceous white on the lower side. The feet and under side of 
body, including lower cheeks and upper lips, white to the bases of 
hairs. Shorter whiskers white, longer ones blackish. Bases of 
upper body hairs light slate. 

The measurement of the dry skin gives the total length 280 mm.; 
the tail, 155; the hind foot, 37; the ear from crown, 14. The 
skull is 60 mm. long and 20 wide, the nasals 16 long and very slen- 
der, the supraorbital bead very strong and with an anterior flange. 
The ascending ramus of the lower jaw is longer and more erect than 
in leucogaster and its allies. The audital bulls are large, as in Jeu- 
cogaster, but the auditory meatus is compressed. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 537 


46. Gerbillus sp.? 

Three young specimens (Nos. 3,854, 3,855, 3,928), two in skins and 
one in alcohol, all taken at Sheikh Husein, October 12, 1894. Iam 
unable to even conjecture about, except to say they differ specifically 
from any others in the collection. 

They are about two-thirds grown ; the tail is just equal to head 
and body in length, and the size of skull and hind foot would indi- 
cate a species smaller than Jeucogaster. This species is remarkable 
for the blackness of the ears, back, rump, upper tail and soles of the 
feet. The upper ground color is brownish-fawn fading to purer 
fawn on the sides. The underside and feet are clear white. 

No. 3,855 measures 180 mm. in length; tail, 90; hind foot, 30. 
The skull is 27 mm. long. 

47. Gerbillus pulvinatus sp.nov. Cushioned Gerbillus. 

Type, No. 3,930, ad. ¢ ; collection of the Academy of Natural Sci- 
ences of Philadelphia. Collected by Dr. A. Donaldson Smith at 
Rasia, Lake Rudolf, Africa, August 5, 1895. 

Description—Size medium, tail with pencil nearly 12 times 
length of head and body. Soles and toes of fore and hind feet cush- 
ioned throughout with hairs like those of the upper surfaces of the 
feet. 

Color (from type alcoholic specimen) above, from hind nose to 
tail, fawn, sparingly lined with black tipped hairs, much blacker 
across hind rump and thighs. Upper tail fawn, becoming blackish- 
brown toward penicillate tip, the underside white almost to tip. 
Hind feet, including lower portion of hind leg, white; forelegs and 
feet, lower parts, including sides, lower cheeks, upper lips, to eyes, 
nose, hinder bases of ears, superciliary stripes and spots between eyes 
and ears, white, the white greatly encroaching on the paler fawn of 
upper sides and lower outer half of hams. Lars fully and coarsely 
haired on outer surface with golden fawn anteriorly, becoming 
darker on the hinder parts. 

Skull (teeth worn, 3 anterior cusps of m. 1 yet distinct) ; first sec- 
tion of m. 1 consisting of a single rounded oval cusp, without fold or 
division and distinct from its neighbor ; second (median) transverse 
section of same tooth consisting of two distinet circular cusps of equal 
size; third (posterior) section of same is a single elliptic transverse 
cusp forming the widest portion of the tooth. Audital bulle large, 
tumid, widely separated from the slender basi-occipital. Incisive 
foramina not reaching anterior plane of molars. 


538 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Measurements—Total length, 234 mm.; tail vertebre, 135; hind 
foot, 26.5; ear, from crown, 10. 

Skull—Total length, 30.6 mm.; basilar length, 25; greatest 
width, 16 ; interorbital constriction, 6; length of nasals, 12; length 
length of upper molar series, 4; length of mandible, 16; width of 
mandible, 7.8. 

An old adult male, in spirit, which I have made the type, two 
immature specimens, male and. female (Nos. 3,926, 3,925) also in 
spirit, and another immature specimen, a skin with skull (No. 3,856) 
fully represent a species which was collected on the route to and 
from Lake Rudolf between June 2d and August 5,1895. The more 
pallid pelage of the dry skin would indicate it either to be a desert 
race of the type or that the specimens in alcohol of same age have 
become darkened by their immersion. In either case the species is 
lighter colored than any other in the collection. I have ventured 
its separation because of the remarkable and apparently unique 
character of the hairy-soled feet. This is quite as marked in the old 
asin the young. These sole hairs form a sort of cushion on and 
just behind the anterior tuberculated part of the hind and fore feet, 
and even the plantar excrescence of the heel is furnished with scat- 
tering bristling hairs. The toes are almost as fully haired beneath 
as above. The character of the tuberculation of m.1, as above 
given, is also strongly diagnostic. 

48. Gerbillus ruberrimus sp. nov. Little Red Gerbillus. 


Type, No. 3,927, ad. $ ; collection of the Academy of Natural Sci- 
ences of Philadelphia. Collected by Dr. A. Donaldson Smith at 
Finik near Webi Shebeli, Somaliland, Africa, December 14, 1894. 

Description—Size smallest (?) of the African species of the genus. 
Tail nearly 14 times the length of head and body; color above bril- 
liant red-brown to orange-yellow. Ears relatively very small and 
round, 

Color (of type) above, clear rich reddish-cinnamon with slight 
admixture of black tipped hairs. Sides scarcely paler, a strong line 
of demarkation between red of upper and white of lower parts. Base 
of ear, patch over eye, upper lips, feet and under parts pure white ; 
ears well haired and colored like upper head. Tail unicolor, red- 
dish-fawn throughout, becoming blackish on the distal, penicillate 
hairs and terminal tuft. 

Skull—Basi-occipital and audital bulle but slightly separated ; 
jucisive foramina not reaching the anterior plane of molar series. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 539 


Anterior cusp of ™. 1 strongly indented by an enamel fold on the 
anterior inner face and connected by a continuous enamel wall with 
inner median cusp of the same tooth. Outer median cusp of m. 1 
isolated. Inner and outer cusps of transverse sections of m. 2 and 
m. 3 coalescent. Single anterior and median pair of cusps of m. 1 
forming a coalescent trefoil. 

Measurements—Total length 160 mm.; tail vertebrae, 95; hind 
foot, 20; ear, from crown, 6. 

Skull— Total length, 24 mm.; greatest breadth, 12.5; interorbital 
constriction, 4.5; length of nasals, 9.8; length of mandible, 12; 
with of mandible, 5. 

The type above described, is in alcohol and is a well-aged individ- 
ual with teeth worn half way to the cusp bases. Another specimen 
(No. 3,852) a dried skin with skull, taken on the same day as type 
is an adult, but less aged, female. It differs only in being deep 
ochraceous instead of being reddish above. 

Compared with G. pusillus Peters,* to which it appears most 
nearly allied, the type of smithi is distinguished by its splendid red 
color, by the very small ear, relatively longer tail and smaller body. 
The skull is of the same length as that of the type of pusilus. 

49. Otomys irroratus Brants. Brants’ Otomys. 

A young specimen, labeled from Sheikh Mahomet, was brought 
back in alcohol. It is a female and apparently about two-thirds 
grown. It is light brown, darkly grizzled with black, the tail deep 
black above, its underside being grayish. The hind feet are black 
with brownish hairs along the outside near heel. The upper incis- 
ors have two distinct (median and inner) anterior grooves and a 
slightly concave flattening of the convex intervening space. The 
lower incisors present one deep groove dividing the face of the tooth 
into an outer third and an inner two-thirds; along the inner edge 
of the tooth face is a faint sulcus, and the intervening convexity is 
faintly flattened medially. Owing to the immaturity of the tooth 
these sulcations are less strongly developed than would ensue with 
greater age, the fainter grooves only appearing at the alveolar sur- 
face. 


50. Heterocephalus glaber Riipp. Hairless Mole Rat. 


An old adult female (No. 3,923) in perfect condition, preserved 
in alcohol, is included in the exceptionally fine collection of small 


4 Monatsb. Acad. Berl., 1878, p. 201. 


540 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


rodents brought back by Dr. Smith. It was taken at Milmil, Som- 
aliland, July 24, 1894. It appears to be the third recorded specimen 
in existence and the second belonging to the type species of this 
remarkable genus. Rtippell’s type of glaber came from Shoa and 
was described” in 1845. It now exists in the Senckenburg Museum 
in the form of a mounted skin with the skull separate, the mandi- 
bles missing. In 1885 E. Lort Phillips sent another specimen of 
Heterocephalus in spirits to the British Museum from Central Somali- 
land. This was made the subject of a communication by Mr. Oldfield 
Thomas before the London Zoological Society, and in the Proceed- 
ings of that Society” was described as new under the name phillipsi, 
after its discoverer. Subsequently Mr. Thomas published” a more 
complete account and description, with figures, of the new animal, 
and made detailed comparisons with glaber. 

It was with no small curiosity that, after having a photograph 
made of Dr. Smith’s specimen, I removed the skull and com- 
pared it with the figures of Riippell and Thomas. Except in its 
greater age and size there are no differences between the animal 
from Milmil and the Shoa type. 

The color of the skin is pale ochraceous with a fleshy tinge, be- 
coming pale livid on the upper sides of head, neck, belly, rump and 
tail. The scattered hairs are a silvery, transparent white. The 
underparts are somewhat lighter than the upper. The skin of head 
is very thick and tough, more so for example than that of the oldest 
and toughest Mus decumanus that I ever dissected. The inner 
finger of manus is much shorter relatively than figured by Thomas 
for phillipsi. Two mamme 15 mm. apart are faintly indicated at 
the sternum immediately between the fore legs when they are drawn 
down at right angles to the body. A series of seven pairs of teat- 
like excrescences, each bearing in its pitted center a bristling hair 
5 mm. long, extend along the sides to the groin in the position of 
the regular teat series. 

The “ wrinkled, warty” appearance of the skin, which Mr. Thomas 
thinks may be due to the action of spirits on the specimen of phil- 
lipsi, I am confident is perfectly normal, as our specimen plainly 
indicates in many ways, and it will be seen that these pits, warts 
and furrows are closely correlated with the anatomy of the animal 


9 Abhand. Mus. Senckenb., p. 99. 
7% Pp. Z. S., 1885, pp. 611, 612. 
27 Ibid, 1885, pp. 845-849, 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 541 


as it exists in life and with the skin coloration and the distribution 
of the pelage.”* 

The skull of the Milmil animal is from 12 to 2 mm. larger in its 
exterior dimensions than that of the type of glaber. It belongs toa 
much older animal, and on this account the differences in dimen- 
sions and formation of the teeth are, perhaps, largely attributable. 
Among these the most noticeable are found, 1st, in the upper incis- 
ors each bearing upon their inner anterior surfaces a distinct shal- 
low sulcus, bordered on the inner side by a sharp ridge and merging 
outwardly into the convexity of the lateral two-thirds of the face of 
tooth. Rtippell states clearly that his animal had unchanneled in- 
cisors; Thomas says the incisors of phillipsi are “somewhat flattened 
and bevelled on their interior halves,” but does not define a sulcus. 
The upper molars of the specimen in the Academy of Natural Sciences 
of Philadelphia number six, as in glaber. Unlike those figured for 
glaber their crown surfaces are of unequal dimensions, ™- 2 being 
one-third larger than m-1 and m.3 considerably smaller than m. 1. 
In the two first upper molars the crowns have worn down until the 
enamel folds are obliterated. In the last, which evidently erupted 
at a much later date than the anterior pair, the crown shows a tri- 
foliate surface, due to the impinging of the enamel walls of the lat- 
eral and posterior sides of the tooth nearly to its center. Of the 
three mandibular molars, m. 2 and m. 3 are about equal in size, m. 1 
being about half as large; the latter is circular in outline and shows 
no enamel folding ; in m. 2 there is a pretty deep indentation on the 
outer wall and a shallow curve of the inner; in m. 3 these indenta- 
tions are exaggerated, nearly equal, and nearly divide the tooth into 
two sections, the anterior section being rectangular, the posterior 
hemispherical in outline. If we were to apply the standard of specific 
separation generally recognized to-day as governing the classifica- 
tion of rodents, it would be consistent, perhaps, to make the third 
specimen of Heterocephalus a third species on the dental characters 
above defined, and on similar grounds establish a new genus for the 
light-molared H. phillipsi, but I fully agree with Mr. Thomas 
that the known individual variatious in other species of the Bath- 
yergine are quite as marked as any yet attributed to Heterocepha- 
lus. 


28 A plate of the specimen is being prepared for Dr. Smith’s book on the 
Expedition. 


542 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


The measurements of Dr. Smith’s specimen are as follows—Total 
length, 143 mm.; tail vertebree, 42; hind foot, 24°; fore foct, 16. 

Skull—Basilar length (of Hensel), 23.5 mm.; end of nasals to 
occipital ridge, 23; zygomatic width, 20.5; interorbital constriction, 
6.5; length of nasals, 9.8; base of upper incisors to m- 1, 9; length 
of mandible, 22.2; breadth of mandible, 15. 
52. Rhizomys splendens (Riipp.). Lesser African Mole Rat. 

A specimen (No. 3,924) of a male Mole Rat, from “ Gineer,” 
(Gineh ?) preserved in alcohol, is in the collection. Itssize and col- 


oration place it with the first species described by Riippel from 
Dembea. 
53. Pectinator spekei Blyth. Brush-tailed Rat. 

A pair of these interesting rodents, male and female, (Nos. 3,921, 
3,922) taken at Sheikh Mahomet, December 4, 1894. They corre- 
spond closely to Blyth’s original diagnosis of the type taken in east- 
ern Somaliland. 

The female, a full aged adult, measures (from spirit specimen) 190 
mm. in total length; the tail, 30; the hind foot, 36; the ear, from 
crown, 10. 

54. Lepus sp.? 

An apparently young hare (No. 3,811) without skull, and labeled 
“The Haud,” July 22, 1894, is the only representative of this genus. 
Its alliance seems to be with LL. ochropus Wagner, as quoted by 
Matschie in the Mammalogy of East Africa. 

*55. Felis leo somaliensis Noack. Somali Lion. 

Two very fine skins of male and female are in the University of 
Pennsylvania exhibit. 

* 56. Felis pardus nimr (Ehrenb.). Steepe Leopard. 

Five leopard skins in the University of Pennsylvania exhibit may 
be classed with the form designated by Ehrenberg and revived by 
Matschie. 

57. Felis caracal nubica (Fitz.). African Caracal. 
A half grown specimen (No. 3,931) of a male taken October 


2, 1895, is in the collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences of 
Philadelphia. 


*The hind foot of glaber is given as 21.2 mm., but the fact of its being 
taken from a dried specimen would largely account for the difference in size. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 543 


58. Felis maniculata Riipp. Manacled Cat. 

A flat skin, (No. 3,812) with accompanying skull, of a fully adult 
animal, corresponds exactly with Rtippel’s® figure of maniculata, of 
which name I consider caligata a synonym. It would appear that 
F. cafer (“ caffer” Auct.) of Desmarest is a distinct species. 

* 59. Cynailurus jubatus guttatus (Herm., Hamm.). African Cheetah. 

A flat skin is in the University of Pennsylvania library donation. 
60. Helogale undulata (Peters). Undulated Mongoose. 

An adult and a young female (Nos. 3,815, 3,816), the latter from 
Hargesa, July 21, 1894, the former taken March 3, 1895, are similar 
in their deep chocolate tints as compared with Peters’ plate and 
Thomas™ diagnosis of the typical form. The young animal is grayer 
and more tawny than the adult above, but the lower parts of the 
two are very similar. 


61. Herpestes gracilis ochraceus (Gray). Abyssinian Mongoose. 

The skin and skull of an old male Herpestes (No. 3,817), taken 
November 25, 1894, shortly after leaving Sheikh Mahomet, evidently 
belong to the Abyssinian animal, which Mr. Thomas considers a 
variety of gracilis. Compared with Gray’s plate of ochraceus, the 
Smith specimen is redder and more darkly annulated with black. 
The form and color pattern of the tail is very similar to Gray’s in 
our specimen, except that the slender portion adjoining the black 
tip is bright rusty. The black tip is about 35 mm. long. 

The following legend appears on the label attached to this skin: 
“Shot in amongst bushes. It eats insects, and had a dragon-fly in 
its mouth when shot. Ivrides yellow.” 

62. Genetta tigrina (Schreb.). Tiger Genette. 

Accepting Matschie’s identification” of Mr. True’s diagnosis® of 
a Genette from Kilima-Njaro to belong to tigrina instead of pardina, 
I am induced to place a skin and skull from Milmil under the 
former name. The black of posterior hind legs and feet and the 
bristling black dorsal mane and rufous-centered body-markings 
place it with tigrina. The specimen is an old female, No. 3,844. 
The skull is 86 mm. long and 40 broad. 


*63. Hyena crocuta Erxl. Spotted Hyaena. 
A mounted skull is among the University specimens. 


% Reis. N. Afr. Zool., 1826, p. 1, pl. 1. 
1p, ZS, 1882, p. 80. 

32 Saugeth. Ost Afr., 1895, p 74. 

33 Proc. Nat. Mus., 1892, p. 454. 


544 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


64. Canis mesomelas Schreb. Black-backed Jackal. 

A skin of this species in the University of Pennsylvania is repre- 
sented by a skull (No. 3,845) in the collection of the Academy of 
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Locality not given. 

65. Mellivora ratel (Sparrm.). Ratel. 

A skin with skeleton (No. 3,814) was received by the Academy of 
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Another skin was retained by 
Dr. Smith. They both came from Gebas near the Shebeli, and were 
taken January 6, 1895. 


66. Erinaceus albiventris atratus subsp. nov. Galla Hedgehog. 

Type—No. 3,831, Yg. Ad. 3; collection of the Academy of 
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Collected by Dr. A. Donaldson 
Smith at Ngare Nocbor, Lake Rudolf, Africa, August 26, 1895. 

Description—Similar to £. albiventris Wagner, as defined by 
Dobson,* but with hoary black limbs, feet, tail, ears and face-patch, 
the remaining pelage pure, clear white. Extreme tips of spines 
sooty black. 

Color—Spinous region covered evenly with spines 20 mm. long, 
whose extreme tips are dusky, followed by a subapical zone of dull 
white 5 mm. wide, then by a horn-black zone 8 mm. wide, fading 
into a lighter zone and darkening again into a black base. Facial 
area, bounded by edges of upper lips and lines drawn from corners 
of mouth to eyes and thence connecting across forehead, thinly- 
haired anteriorly by sooty black, more thickly and lengthily haired 
posteriorly, and with a decided moustache below eye across cheeks, 
of pure black. A triangular spot of black on lower lips and chin, 
to corners of mouth. Region between dark facial patch and spines 
of hind-head and ears, cheeks, throat, breast, belly and sides nearly 
to ventral region, pure silky white with an occasional black hair. 
Fore-legs from body to feet black, well intermixed with white, es- 
pecially on inner side of arm. Fore-feet and soles black with a few 
gray hairs. Hind-limbs and feet colored like fore-limbs, with a de- 
cided whitish patch on inner side of pes near heel. ‘Tail and vent 
hoary black. Formation of feet as is minutely described by Dobson 
for albiventris (l. ¢.). The rounded, thickly-haired ears, grayish, 
sooty black, inside and out. 

See eearemens (of type by collector in field)—Total length, 118 

; tail vertebrie, 10; us foot 23; ear from crown (dry) 13.5. 


th a Wranbe: Insectiv., 1882, pew: 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 545 


Skull: total length, 35; zygomatic breadth, 22; interorbital con- 
striction, 10.6; length of nasals, 11.8; length of mandible, 27; 
breadth of mandible, 12. 

The immaturity of the specimen which I have made to represent 
this newly-described race of a/biventris can in nowise account for its 
color characters as contrasted with the typical form, whose habitat 
Dobson places as “northern tropical Africa.’ In appearance, as 
well as in habitat, this race may be said to show some approach to 
the South African EF. diadematus Fitz., but closer examination 
shows its affinities to be with the northern animal. 

The single skin and skull brought back by Dr. Smith indicate an 
individual closely approaching maturity, the posterior molar and 
the canine just cutting through the gums. 

67. Macroscelides rufescens Peters. Rufescent Jumping Shrew. 

This shrew, whose cranial characters so closely ally it to M. in- 
tufi Smith, is represented by an adult female and an immature male 
(Nos. 3,829, 3,830), taken respectively at Ehrer and Lammo on the 
12th and 16th of August, 1894. The adult is somewhat blacker and 
less ruddy than Peters’ specimens, but the measurements and color 
pattern are identical. Both specimens are skins with skulls, full 
data and measurements. 


68. Macroscelides sp.? 

A half-grown individual (No. 3,828), labeled Walenso, October 
26, 1894, is so dark and has such a short tail compared with body 
that it is probably distinct. Its skull, however, shows near relation- 
ship to rufescens. It is preserved in alcohol. 

69. Crocidura doriana Dobson. Shoa Shrew. 

An alcoholic specimen of an adult shrew (No. 3,826) in the col- 
lection was taken at Sheikh Mahomet, October 28,1894. The skull 
and dentition are identical with Dobson’s Shoa species as figured in 
the Monograph. 

70. Crocidura sp. ? 

A rather young example (No. 3,827), in alcohol, from Lake Ru- 
dolf, the skull of which, unfortunately, was lost after being ex- 
tracted for examination, is of interest. The skin and sparse hairs 
of tail and feet are white. Tail about half the length of head and 
body. Color of body dark bluish-gray, lighter beneath. Total 
length about 100 mm., hind-foot, 12.5. Ears conspicuous. The 
small size of this specimen makes it improbable that it is C. Jeuewra 


546 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Matschie, its immaturity not being sufficient to account for the dif- 
ferent measurements. 


71. ? Cercopithecus rufoviridis Is. Geoff. Reddish-green Guenon. 

A skin with skull (No. 5,932) separate, of a not fully-mature 
monkey, agrees somewhat with the species above-named. Its re- 
semblance to C. flavidus Peters, from Mozambique, which Forbes® 
considers a synonym of rufoviridis, is quite close. On the label is 
written: “Skin, pale Prussian blue; face skin brown ; irides light 
brown.” 


72. Colobus guereza Riipp. Mop-tailed Guereza. 

Three skins and one skull (No. 3,899), taken at Lake Rudolf, 
were brought to America. One of these was subsequently mounted 
for the University of Pennsylvania. Another skin (No. 3,905) is 
in the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia series. They 
are all typical guereza, as described and figured by Riippell. 


3 Allen’s Nat. Lib., II, 1894, p. 65. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. DAT 


THE HYMENOPTERA COLLECTED BY DR. A. DONALDSON SMITH IN 
NORTHEAST AFRICA. 


BY WILLIAM J. FOX. 


The following list includes only the Aculeate Hymenoptera 
brought home by Dr. Smith. The collection includes, besides these, 
perhaps thirty species of ants and parasitic forms which I am obliged 
to pass unnoticed for the present. Inasmuch as I have had to rely 
entirely on descriptions in classifying the collection, I beg to offer 
that fact as an apology for any erroneous identifications that may 
have been made. 

The specimens were collected on a journey from Berbera through 
Somaliland to Lake Rudolf, thence to a point on the east coast,! and, 
with many other specimens, have been presented to the Academy 
of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia by Dr. Smith. 


MUTILLIDA. 

Apterogyna Latreillei Klug. 

One specimen (9). Berbera, July 6, 1894. 
Mutilla pedunculata Klug. 

Two male specimens. Berbera, July 4, 1894, and Shebeli, Sep- 
tember 1. 
Mutilla sinuata Oliv. (=villosa Klug.). 

One specimen (¢). Sheikh Husein, October 22, 1894. 
Mutilla tricolor Klug. 

One 2? specimen. Sheikh Husein, October 29, 1894. 
Mutilla guineensis Fabr. 

One ? specimen from Sheikh Husein, October 1, 1894. 
Mutilla mephitis Sm. 

One specimen (@). Laga, November 30, 1894. 
Mutilla leda n. sp. 


2 .—Head, legs and abdomen black, the latter velvety ; thorax 
obscure rufous; head, except a longitudinal medial streak and the 


1 See an article by Dr. Smith in The Geographical Journal for August and 
September, 1896. 


36 


548 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


cheeks, medially, sides of thorax, legs, transverse spot at apex of 
first dorsal, three spots on second dorsal (one anteriorly in the 
middle somewhat ovate, and two larger ones placed transversely 
near the apical margin of the segment), a medial spot on the third, 
fourth and fifth coalescing more or less, the second segment along 
the extreme sides, a small spot on the apical margins of the second, 
third and fourth at the sides and the apical margins of ventrals 2- 
4 entirely, of silvery pubescence; above the body is clothed with 
long, erect, sparse black hairs, which, on the ventral surface, are 
pale; head about as wide as the broadest part of the thorax, with 
deep, coarse punctures; eyes subovate; mandibles furrowed longi- 
tudinally and toothed within before the apex; flagellum strongly 
acuminate, the first and second joints about equal in length ; occi- 
put not cristate; thorax long, somewhat pyriform, broadest a little 
anterior to the middle, the lateral borders not dentate; the thorax 
above scabrous; evidently no scutellar scale present, or else it is 
indistinguishable from the coarse sculpture of the upper surface of 
thorax ; spines of the legs black, calcaria pale testaceous, those of 
the hind and medial tibize pectinate within; first segment of abdo- 
men constricted at apex, not continuous with the base of the follow- 
ing; in the middle transversely cristate, the portion before the crista 
very flat, ventrally with a short and strong carina, which is some- 
what emarginate medially ; second segment with very large punc- 
tures, ventrally shining with the punctures more distinct and at the 
base with a short, central, longitudinal carina; last dorsal smooth 
and shining, at least medially, without a pygidial area. Length, 
12 mm. 

One specimen. Near Gelani, October 27, 1894. 

This species is apparently close to M. dorie Magr., but differs in 
the non-cristate occiput and absence of scutellar scale. 

Mutilla somalica n. sp. 

2 —Head —?; thorax obscurely rufous; legs and abdomen 
black, the latter red beneath ; the second dorsal segment in greater 
part with reddish-orange pubescence forming a maculation as shown 
in the figure ; a spot in the center of dorsals 3-5, a narrow transverse 
one on the apical margins of dorsals 2-5 at the sides, and apical 
margins of ventrals 2-5 with silvery pubescence ; legs with pale pube- 
scence, the rest of the body clothed with long, erect hairs, those 
above dark, those below pale ; thorax robust, not twice as long as it 
is broad at base, coarsely cribrose above, the lateral margins irregu- 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 549 


lar; scutellar scale wanting; tibise and tarsi strongly spinose, the 
spines black; calcaria white, pectinated within; first segment of 
abdomen constricted at apex, beneath with a 
strong, bidentate or emarginate carina ; second 
ventral with a short, median, longitudinal 
carina basally and together with the sides of 
its dorsal moiety with large separated punc- 
tures, those of the remaining ventrals much 
finer and closer, pygidial area large, convex, 
longitudinally striato-punctate, the sculptures 
strongest basally and becoming obsolete at 
Fic. 1. apex. Length (without head) 10 mm. 

Abdominal markings, Qne specimen, from which the head is, un- 

Mutilla somalica. fortunately, missing. The maculation of the 
second dorsal segment is apparently so different from any of the 
African Mutillids that I have thought it well to describe the species, 
even though the specimen be in poor condition. 

From Finik, December 15, 1894. 


SCOLIIDZ. 


Scolia ruficornis Fabr. 
Two @ and two ¢ specimens. Hargesa and The Haud, July 21; 
Sheikh Husein, October 3, 1894. 


Elis aureola Klug. 


Two females from Sheikh Husein, collected on September 21 and 
27. ; 


Cosila Donaldsoni n. sp. 

2 .—Deep black, shining, the last two abdominal segments ru- 
fous; wings black, strongly violaceous; pubescence grayish ; head 
strongly punctured, closely so on the front, sparsely on the vertex 
and occiput; clypeus more finely punctured than the front, some- 
what carinate down the middle, its anterior margin tridentate ; man- 
dibles scarcely punctured, scape and pedicellum shining, sparsely 
punctured, the flagellum opaque, the joints slightly prominent at 
apex beneath ; ocelli deeply pitted, indistinct ; pronotum scabrous; 
dorsulum with irregular, coarse punctures, transversely smooth just 
behind the pronotum, and a little shorter than the scutellum ; scu- 
tellum scabrous, somewhat triangular, truncate posteriorly ; middle 
segment above very finely striato-punctate, becoming more coarsely 
so posteriorly ; posterior face with shallow punctures and indistinct 


550 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


striations, sides obliquely striated, the central longitudinal furrow of 
the middle segment is wider by far on the upper surface, fore tarsi 
distinctly combed ; tarsal claws cleft ; hind femora somewhat angu- 
lar beneath; third submarginal cell larger than the second, the 
third transverso-cubital nervure received by the marginal cell at its 
apex; abdomen with strong, sparse punctures, those at the apex of 
2, 5, and bases of 3, 5 closer; punctures of ventral segments larger: 
pygidial area striato-punctate; first dorsal truncate anteriorly, not 
carinate ; spines of the legs and calcaria whitish. Length, 18 mm. 

Sheikh Husein, October 8, 1894. Easily distinguished by the 
red tip of abdomen. In the cleft claws and pectinate fore tarsi this 
species appears more closely allied to the American than to the 
Australian species of Cosila. 


POMPILIDA. 


Pompilus dimidiatus Fabr. 
Berbera, June 5; Laga, November 30. Two specimens. 


Pompilus viaticus Fabr. 
One specimen. Daro Mountains, November 19. 


Pompilus pulcher Fabr. 
One specimen. Terfa, August 13. 


Pompilus umbrosus Klug. 
Berbera, July 4; Lafarug, December 7. Three specimens. 


Pompilus Tamisieri Guér. 

One specimen. Aimola, March 16, 1895. 
Pompilus (Pedinaspis ?) somalicus n. sp. 

9 .—Head, antennex, thorax and legs ferruginous; mandibles at 
tip and abdomen black ; wings yellow, a slender black fascia cross- 
ing the anteriors in the region of the basal vein and a very broad 
fascia just before the apex; the apex pale; head rather flat, the 
occiput bearing a sharp, transverse ridge; frontal impressed line 
feeble; clypeus flat, shining, its fore-margin slightly emarginate or 
incurved, as is likewise the labrum, which projects a little and is 
fringed sparsely with long hairs; antennz inserted at base of cly- 
peus, tolerably long and slender, much shorter than the thorax» 
however, the first joint nearly as long as the scape, which is com- 
pressed ; thorax elongate; pronotum a little longer than the dor- 
sulum, its hind margin arcuate; scutellum shorter than dorsulum, 
somewhat more than twice as long as the metanotum (postscutel- 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 551 


lum) ; middle segment subtruncate posteriorly, entire, above with a 
central longitudinal impressed line, posteriorly with rather coarse 
transverse strise, which extend partly on 
the sides; legs tolerably stout, scarcely 
spinose ; fore tarsi without comb ; claws 
with a large, sharp tooth within, almost 
cleft; longer spur of hind tarsi less than 
one-third as long as the first hind tarsal 
joint ; marginal cell pointed at tip; second 
and third submarginals about equal in 
size, both receiving their recurrent nerv- 
ure slightly before the middle; basal vein 
joining the submedian cell before its 
apex; submedian cell of hind wings terminating before the origin 
of the cubital vein; abdomen not compressed, obscurely testaceous 
beneath ; dorsals 1, 3 and 4 with a large lateral spot of pale pubes- 
cence, which is also indicated laterally on the ventral segments. 
Length, 17 mm. 

One specimen. Near Finik, December 6, 1894. Is apparently 
distinct from all the African species of Pompilus in the bifasciate 
fore-wings. I refer it to Kohl’s subgenus Pedinaspis with some 
doubt, inasmuch as the abdomen is not compressed, and the claws 
rather more cleft than dentate. 


Hicy 2; 
Head of Pompilius somalicus. 


Salius (Cyphonyx) flavicornis Fabr. 

One specimen. Sheikh Husein, October 5, 1894. In this speci- 
men, a Q, only the tibiz are reddish. 
Salius (Hemipepsis) atropos? Sm. 

I refer, with some doubt, two ¢ specimens taken at Sheikh Hu- 
sein, October 10, 1894. Smith only describes the female, his speci- 
mens having come from Sierra Leone. 

SPHECIDA. 
Sphex (Chlorion) xanthocerus var. maxillaris Pal. 

One @ specimen. The Haud, July 21, 1894. 
Sphex (Chlorion) regalis Sm. var. 

Two females. Ardeh, July 14; Hargesa, July 18,1894. In this 
form the thorax is entirely black; the wings black with violaceous 
reflections, the apex of the hind pair not pale; head, antenne, fore- 
legs entirely, and the femora and tibic of the medial pair, reddish ; 
abdomen metallic and purplish-blue. 


502 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Sphex (Parasphex) marginatus Sm. 


Sheikh Husein, October 1, 1894. One specimen. The petiole is 
black in this specimen. 


Sceliphron Spinole Lep. ; 
Two females. Sheikh Husein, October 15, 1894. 


Sceliphron spirifex Linné. 
Two females. Sheikh Husein, October 1 and 15, 1894. 
Sceliphron violaceum Fabr. 


One specimen. Sheikh Husein, October 15, 1894. 


Ammophila ferrugineipes Lep. 

One @ specimen. Sheikh Husein, October 8, 1894. 
Ammophila lugubris Gerst. 

Two females. Sheikh Husein, September 20 and 28, 1894. 
Ammophila holosericea Fabr. 

Dabulli, September 16, 1894. Two ¢ specimens. 

Ammophila insignis Sm. 

Turfer. One specimen, August 13, 1894. 
Ammophila beninensis? Pal.-Bve. 

I refer doubtfully to this species two specimens from Sheikh 
Husein, September 30 and October 5. They agree fairly well with 
Beauvois’ description and figure of beninensis, but the tibiz and tarsi 
and four anterior femora are reddish. 


Bembex Dahlbomi Hdl. 

Milmil, July 28, 1894. Four specimens. 
Sphecius Quartine Grib. 

Only the male of this species has been described, and it is not cer- 
tain that the female specimen before me from Berbera, July 4, 1894, 
is really Quartine. I venture to describe it as such, however. 

9 .—Short and stout, ferruginous, except the clypeus, labrum, 
mandibles, except apex (which is black), front beneath and scape and 
apical antennal joints beneath, which are yellow; apical margins of 
the dorsal abdominal segments narrowly fuscous ; wings testaceo-hya- 
line, nervures reddish, marginal cell lanceolate and narrow ; second 
submarginal greatly narrowed above, its width at this point slightly 
greater than that between the stigma and the first transverso-cubital 
nervure on the marginal nervure; third submarginal scarcely nar- 
rowed above ; clypeus convex, transverse, its fore-margin a little in- 


— 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 553 


curved ; antenne scarcely as long as thorax, thickened apically, the 
first joint of flagellum as long as the two following united ; the head, 
as a whole, is fairly well punctured; dorsulum and scutellum im- 
punctate or with exceedingly fine punctures, the middle segment 
with more distinct punctures; legs robust, strongly spinose ; abdo- 
men finely and rather closely punctured, the apical margins of the 
segments smooth in a transverse sense ; sixth dorsal strongly punc- 
tured, not very strongly ridged laterally, ventrals rather flat, the 
second feebly convex. Length, 22 mm. 


Liris haemorrhoidalis Fabr. 
Sheikh Husein, September 30, 1894. One male specimen. 
Notogonia apicalis n. sp. 
$ .—Black ; last three or four abdominal segments red ; mandi- 
bles and tegule, in part, obscurely rufotestaceous ; face, clypeus, 
cheeks, fore-femora and thorax beneath, and apex of middle seg- 
ment with dense silvery pubescence ; the sides of thorax, legs and 
abdomen with a sericeous pile, which, when the insect is held in cer- 
tain lights, appears on the abdomen to form apical bands on the 
segments ; head finely and closely punctured ; distance between the 
eyes above nearly as great as the length of the third and fourth 
antennal joints, much greater than the length of the second and 
third; flagellum acuminate apically, 
thickest toward base, the first joint a 
little longer than the second and some- 
what curved ; clypeus depressed trans- 
WA versely before the anterior margin, the 
x latter a little prominent in the middle; 
Fic. 3. dorsulum with tolerably strong and 
Venation (fore wing), Wo/- G1 go punctures, the scutellum with 
gonia apicalis. 

the punctures much finer and sparser, 
shining ; mesopleure with shallow, somewhat separated punctures, 
the episternal suture of the mesothorax distinct and strongly foveo- 
lated; middle segment truncate behind, above coarsely and trans- 
versely rugose, divided longitudinally by a strong medial carina, 
which terminates before the apex, sides coarsely and obliquely stri- 
ated; legs simple, not peculiarly modified; wings fusco-hyaline, 
nervures black; marginal cell obliquely truncate at tip; second 
submarginal almost triangular, much narrowed above, the width at 
the top equal to about one-half the distance between the recurrent 
nervures on the cubital nervure; abdomen impunctate, the second 


554 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


ventral segment with the transverse basal depression well marked. 
Length, 12 mm. 

One specimen. Sheikh Husein, September 30, 1894. Is appar- 
ently related to NV. radame Saussure, from Madagascar, and may be 
identical with the var. b., mentioned by that author. The radial 
(marginal) cell of radame is said to be perpendicularly truncate, 
whereas in apicalis it is obliquely so. It also agress fairly well with 
the description of Larra rubella Smith, of which only the female is 
described. 

Miscophus ctenopus Kohl. 

Berbera, July 4, 1894. One 9? specimem. 
Tachysphex fluctuatus Gerst. 

One male specimen. Same locality as the preceding species. 
Helioryctus melanopyrus Sm. : 

One specimen, a female. Near Lake Stephanie, June 20, 1895. 
It is somewhat larger than the specimen described by Smith, and 
measures 14 mm. in length. Helioryctus is, perhaps, synonymous 
with Sericophorus Sm. (non Shuck.) = Tachyrhostus Sauss. Seri- 
cophorus Sm. has priority over Tachyrhostus, having been described 
on p. 33, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., 1851, VII. 

Astatus boops Schr. 

One male specimen from Sheikh Husein, October 5, 1894. 

Oxybelus lamellatus Oliv. 


Berbera, July 4, 1894. One specimen. 


EUMENIDZ. 


Eumenes Lepeletierii Sauss. 

Three specimens. Sibbe, August 2; Terfa, August 15; River 
Darde, September 9, 1894. 
Eumenes maxillosa DeG. 

One large female. Berbera, July 3, 1894. 
Eumenes dimidatipennis Sauss. 

One ¢ specimen without precise locality or date of capture. 
Synagris calida Linné. 

Luku, September 17, 1894. Two specimens. 
Synagris tropidia Schlett. 

Sheikh Husein, October 8, 1894. One 9 specimen. 


Or 
o1 
on 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 


Rhynchium laterale Fabr. 
Sheikh Husein, October 7. One male. 
Odynerus metemmensis Magr, 


- One specimen, without date of capture or locality. 


VESPID HE. 
Polistes marginalis Fabr. 

Sheikh Husein, October 5 and 9. Two specimens. 
Belonogaster colonialis Kohl. 

One male specimen. Terfa, August 21. 

Belonogaster Meneleki Grib. 
Sheikh Husein, October 1 and 5; Laga, November 30, 1894. 
APIDA. 
Colletes sp. 

Two specimens of a species having the base, apex and sides of the 
first dorsal segment and the apex of the three following with pale 
ochraceous pubescence, beneath which the segments are brownish- 
testaceous. From Sheikh Husein, September 29, 1894. 

Nomia nulpina Gerst. 

A ¢ specimen which is probably this species. Sheikh Husein, 
October 7, 1894. Anoiher species, perhaps new and from the same 
locality, has the hind-legs almost simple and the apical margin of 
dorsal segments 1-5, whitish. 

Anthophora quadrifasciatus DeG. 

Sheikh Husein, September 29, 1894. A specimen of the variety 

alternans Klug. 
Anthophora concinnus Klug. 

One specimen ; no precise locality or date of capture. 
Anthophora albigenus Lep. 

One specimen, a variety, of this species. Daro Mountains. No- 
vember 19, 1894. 


Eucera ruficornis Fabr. 

Sheikh Husein, October 7, 1894. One male specimen. 
Crocisa abyssinica Rads. 

One female specimen. The Haud, July 21, 1894. 
Xylocopa oblonga Sm. 

One specimen. Sheikh Husein, October 3, 1894. 


506 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Xylocopa fulvohirta DeG. 
Two females. Meo, October 25, 1894. 
Xylocopa cafra Latr. ' 
One female specimen. Same locality and date as the preceding. 
Xylocopa inconstans Sm. 
One female specimen. Sheikh Husein, October 1, 1894. 
Xylocopa olivacea Fabr. 
One male. Near Lake Stephanie, June 20, 1895. 
Xylocopa aestuans Fabr. 
Berbera, July 4. One female specimen. 


Xylocopa Gribodoi Magr. 
Sheikh Husein, October 10; Meo, October 25, 1894. Three fe- 


male and one male specimens. The latter sex is apparently unde- 
scribed. 

$.—Black; head, thorax, anteriorly and beneath, dorsal seg- 
ments at the sides, particularly segments 1, 4, 5, 6, and ventrals 3— 
6, with pale pubescence, that on the clypeus white; the legs with 
black pubescence, the anterior pair in addition with a streak of 
white pubescence, which is more evident at first joint of tarsi; 
wings hyaline at base, the apical third fuscous with purplish irides- 
cence; nervures black throughout; antennz entirely black ; eyes 
large ; face narrow; the ocelli are an equilateral triangle ; dorsulum 
sparsely punctured medially, as are likewise dorsal segments 2-4, 
which at the sides are closely punctured ; dorsal 5 and 6 closely 
punctured throughout; the sixth segment medially, and the last at 
the sides with black pubescence, that on the fore-tarsi beneath 
slightly brownish. Length, 20 mm. 

With the exception of the wings and pale color of the pubescence 
on anterior part of thorax, the male is, superficially, similar to the 
female. 
Ceratina fastigiata n. sp. 

? .—Blue-green, the head and thorax slightly the darker; legs 
black ; the base of the hind tibis externally and a broad oblong 
spot on the clypeus yellowish; head with large, deep and more or 
less confluent punctures, which on the clypeus are separated and 
rather sparse; mandibles and labrum black, the latter convex and 
coarsely rugose; antenne black, the flagellum clavate and slightly 
testaceous beneath ; pronotum not dentate laterally, rather sharply 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 557 


margined ; dorsulum convex, its punctures larger than those of 
head and distinctly separated ; scutellum similarly punctured, the 
mesopleurz a little less strongly so; upper and posterior surfaces of 
middle segment separated by a ridge, above the ridge finely rugose, 
on the sides with large punctures, similar to those on the fourth dor- 
sal sezment, below the ridge, the punctures finer, closer and evener ; 
abdomen with the segments rather strongly constricted at the 
sutures, the apical segment suddenly constricted and drawn out into 
a point apically, the first, second and third segments punctured 
about like the dorsulum, the remaining dorsals decidedly more finely 
punctured; the ventrals are punctured like the first dorsal, the 
apical margin of the second, and the base and apex of the second to 
fifth, smooth and black; fore legs naked and shining, the others 
with pale pubescence, as are likewise the ventral abdominal seg- 
ments, but sparsely; wings hyaline, darker apically, nervures and 
stigma black; tegule and shoulder tubercules dark testaceous. 
Length, 8 mm. 
One specimen from Daro Mountains, November 20, 1894. 


Allodape canina Sm. 
Two specimens. Tulu, November 23, 1894. 


Megachile basalis Sm. 
One female specimen. Ile, April 9, 1895. 


Megachile colorata n. sp. 

9? .—Black ; scape of antenne, tegule, legs except coxee, and the 
first three segments of abdomen red; wing yellow at base and 
broadly along the costa, otherwise fuscous with purplish iridescence, 

the veins included in the yellow portion, red- 

dish, those in the fuscous portion dark; head 

with strong confluent punctures, posteriorly 

deeply incurved, the occiput margined; face 

between the antennze prominently convex, and 

meeting the clypeus so as to appear continuous 

with it; the clypeus slopes from its middle to 

apex, which is broadly truncate, the sloping por- 

Fic. 4. tion smooth (or nearly so) and shining, other- 
Some tieaearale <6 the clypeus is coarsely punctured ; man- 
ae dibles striato-punctate, furrowed from middle 

to apex, slightly broader at apex than at base, narrowest medially, 
bearing a tooth within and four at apex; dorsulum with strong 


558 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


punctures, which, when the insect is held in certain positions, give 
the dorsulum a transversely and irregularly striated appearance; 
punctures of the scutellum a little closer, those of the mesopleurz 
more distinct ; legs robust, the hind tibia much thickened toward 
apex ; abdomen sparsely punctured, the apical margins of dorsals 
1-4 transversely depressed at apex, at which place the punctures 
are closer; front, base of clypeus, a fringe on labrum, thorax above, 
on center of mesopleurz and base of middle segment, and a fringe 
at apex of dorsals 1-3, ochraceous; beneath the wings, extending 
to sides of middle segments, a spot on each side of the first three 
or four dorsals and the ventral scopa, whitish; on the cheeks and 
thorax beneath the pubescence is pale; legs and last two or three 
dorsals covered with a short ochraceous pubescence, that on the tarsi 
the longer. Length, 13-16 mm. 

Two specimens. One without precise locality or date of capture; 
the other, the larger specimen, is marked, “ From nest in insect tin, 
November 28, 1894,” and is from near Laga. The red color on abdo- 
men in the larger specimens is more distributed than in the smaller. 
Megachile crenulata n. sp. 

3 .—Black ; first joint of fore tarsi whitish; head strongly and 
closely punctured above, more finely so on the front; mandibles 
longitudinally striato-punctate, tridentate at apex; dorsulum and 
scutellum strongly, closely and evenly punctured ; mesopleurz per- 

haps a little more strongly punctured ; 
tibize cribrose externally; fore cox 
with a long, obtuse tooth ; fore tarsi 
with the first joint flattened and 


Fic, 5, broadened, its anterior margin sinu- 
Last dorsal abdominal segment, ated medially ; abdomen closely punc- 
Megachile crenulata, tured above, beneath more sparsely, the 


apical margin of all the segments (except the last) strongly depressed 
and testaceous; last dorsal strongly emarginate and strongly crenu- 
lated; at the base of the last ventral on each extreme side isa 
strong tooth; head in front, dorsulum, middle segment and base of 
first dorsal with long, brownish or ftilvous pubescence, which also 
appears to a certain extent on scutellum, apical segments and the 
legs, where it is more or less mixed with paler hairs ; cheeks, fore tarsi, 
thorax beneath, first dorsal laterally, and the ventrals more sparsely, 
with long, pale pubescence ; the first medial and hind tarsal joints 
have a fringe of this pubescence; apical margins of dorsals 2-5 with 


en 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 559 


obscurely fulvous pubescence, which above in the middle becomes 
paler; wings subhyaline, nervures and stigma black. Length, 13 
mm. 

Sheikh Husein, September 24,1894. The only specimen obtained 
is somewhat the worse for wear, thereby making an accurate descrip- 
tion of the pubescence rather difficult. 


Trigona Beccarii Grib. 
One specimen. Sheikh Husein, September 29, 1894. 


Apis mellifica Linné. 


Terfa, August 15, 16, 1894. Four specimens. 


560 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


NOVEMBER 3. 
The President, SAMUEL G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair. 


Twenty-three persons present. 


NoveMBER 10. 
The President, SamugeL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 
Twenty-six persons present. 


A paper entitled “The Bones, Muscles and Teeth of Tarsius 
fusco-manus,” by Harrison Allen, was presented for publication. 


NoveEMBER 17. 
The President, SamuEL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 
One hundred and nine persons present. 


Mr. Edwin 8. Balch read a paper entitled “ Ice Caves and the 
Causes of Subterranean Ice,” (No abstract.) 


NovEMBER 24. 
The President, SamurL G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 
Thirty-seven persons present. 


R. A. Philippi of Santiago, Chili, was elected a Correspondent. 
The following was ordered to be printed :— 


eT 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 561 


NEW SPECIES OF FRESH WATER MOLLUSKS FROM SOUTH AMERICA. 
BY HENRY A. PILSBRY. 


The forms described below were encountered in the course of 
identifying a series of mollusks collected by Dr. Wm. H. Rush, U. 
S. N., in Uruguay and Argentina, a list of which will be found in 
The Nautilus for November of this year. To the forms collected by 
Dr. Rush have been added several others, apparently undescribed, 
from the collection of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadel- 
phia. 

To the above-mentioned paper in The Nautilus the reader is re- 
ferred for some account of the localities represented by specimens 
here described, and for notes on the species associated with them. 


CHILINIDA. 

Chilina Rushiin.sp. Pl. XXVI, figs. 6, 7. 
' Shell oval, strong, yellowish-olivaceous with five girdles of dusky, 
narrow spots alternating with lighter ones. Spire produced, ter- 
raced, but flat-topped, the whorls strongly keeled around the shoul- 
der, flat above the keel. Aperture long-ovate, white with chestnut 
spots inside; outer lip thin; columellar lip white, callous, with a 
strong, acute entering fold at the root, and a very inconspicuous fold 
in the middle; the parietal wall with a strong entering fold which 
is abrupt below, and filled in above with a heavy callus. 

Alt. 16, diam. 103 mm.; alt. of aperture 12 mm. 

Uruguay River at Fray Bentos (Dr. Rush !). 

The conspicuously angular spire is a peculiar feature of this shell. 
The apex is considerably eroded, so that the number of whorls can- 
not be stated. 


LIMN HIDE. 
Planorbis castaneonitens Pilsbry & Vanatta, n. sp. Pl. XXVII, figs. 10, 11, 12. 
Shell thin, chestnut brown, very smooth and glossy ; growth-stric 
light; right and left sides showing 4 whorls, about equally and 
quite shallowly concave; spire on right side less than half the 
diameter of shell, inner 13 whorls more sunken ; spire on left side 
decidedly wider than on the right. Last whorl wide on the right, 


562 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


narrow on the left side, the periphery very obtusely angular near 
the left side. Aperture quite oblique, cordate, the peristome thin 
and fragile, produced forward on the right side. 

Alt. 1:7, diam. 7 mm. 

Ponds and small streams near Maldonado, Uruguay (Dr. Rush!), 

Compared with P. heloicus d’Orb., this species is flatter and more 
glossy, has the spire much narrower on the right side, the outer 
whorl wider and less cylindrical; the color is darker and the 
periphery rounded-angular. 

Planorbis heteropleurus Pilsbry & Vanatta, n. sp. Pl. XXVI, figs. 1, 2, 3. 

Shell moderately solid, corneous-white, rather opaque, the surface 
with fine, close growth-lines; earlier whorls rather deeply and 
about equally sunken on the two sides; convex, and strongly angu- 
lar or keeled in the middle, on the right side; periphery conspicu- 
ously carinated on the left side, which is shallowly vortex-shaped, 
the whorls nearly flat. Last whorl slightly wider on the right than 
on the left side. Whorls 33, all visible on both sides, the last wider 
than the spire. Aperture very oblique, rounded-pentagonal, the 
right margin produced forward. 

Alt. 43, greatest diam. 113, lesser 83 mm.; oblique alt. of aper- 
ture 52, diam. 4 mm. ; 

Lake Titicaca (A. Agassiz!). Types No. 69,645, collection of 
the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. 

This remarkable species is totally unlike P. titicacensis Cless.,’ P. 
montanus d’Orbigny*® and P. andicola d’Orbigny,’ species already 
known from this Andean lake. It is most like P. andicola, but 
much flatter with differently placed keels, and, in fact, so diverse in 
characters that no profitable comparison can be made. Described 
from eight specimens, which are alike in all essential characters. 


CYRENIDZ. 
Corbicula Coloniensis n. sp. Pl, XXVI, fig. 9. 

Shell subtriangular, rather ventricose, slightly inequilateral; an- 
terior and posterior margins obtusely angular, the slope above the 
rounded angles slightly convex; posterior slope decidedly longer; 
basal margin well curved, rounded; beaks moderately projecting. 
Hinge ligament very convex, short and yellowish. Surface nearly 


1 Conchylien Cabinet, Planorbis, p. 147, pl. 12, f. 23-25. Clessin locates 
Lake Titicaca in Ecuador! On p. 175 he calls the species P. titicacaensis. 

2 Voy. Am. Mérid., p. 345, pl. 44, f. 5-8. . 

3 Ibid., p. 346, f. 1-4. 


1896. | NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 563 


smooth in the middle, finely, irregularly striate at the ends and 
basal margin. Green, duskier above, with narrow, widely spaced 
and inconspicuous blackish rays, the eroded beaks deep purple. 
Interior deep purple, clouded with whitish purple within the pallial 
line, the teeth of the same light tint. Pallial line with a short triangu- 
lar sinus ; right valve with three divergent cardinal teeth, median and 
posterior teeth bifid at tip; median tooth wide, anterior and poste- 
rior teeth Jong and oblique; left valve with three cardinals, the 
median bifid at tip. Laterals crenulated, long, the anterior slightly 
curved, posterior straight ; double in right, single in left valve. 

Length 323, alt. 273, diam. 153 mm. 

Length 28, alt. 24, diam. 15 mm. 

La Plata River above Colonia, Uruguay (Dr. Rush). 

Larger and more triangular than C. limosa. The lateral teeth 
are unusually long, and the cardinals widely divergent. 


MUTELIDA. 


Glabaris latomarginatus Lea var. felixn.y. PI. XXVI, fig. 8. 

Similar in form to Anodonta latomarginata Lea, but epidermis 
light yellowish-green, closely painted with short radiating dichoto- 
mous or simple lines or narrow V’s of green, and two green rays on 
the posterior slope. Interior pale pink within pallial line, prismatic 
border faint olive buff. Some black zig-zags along pallial line or 
outlining muscle impressions. 

Length 53, alt. 38, diam. 203 mm. 

Length 49, alt. 35, diam. 18 mm. 

Colonia, Uruguay (Dr. Rush). 

Glabaris trapesialis var. cygneiformis n. vy. Pl. XXVI, figs. 4, 5. 

Shell similar to some forms of Anodonta cygnea, such as that fig- 
ured by Rossmissler, Iconogr., I, fig. 280, in the elongate form, long 
and up-curved posterior end, but hinge-line straight and produced in 
a small wing anteriorly, terminating angularly. Very thin and 
fragile, even in specimens 14 cm. long. Green and smooth in mid- 
dle, blackish and roughened at ends and basal margin ; nacre blue- 
white, iridescent, dark-stained in the cavity more or less, and often 
with some zig-zag blackish markings around the muscles. 

Length 142, alt. 75, diam. 36 em.; alt.52-53 %, diam. 26 % of 
length. 

More compressed than G. riograndensis Iher., with the hinge-line 
more angular at the ends and the posterior end peculiarly up- 

37 


564 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


curved, as in certain middle European forms of A. cygnea. The 
specimens are also even thinner than examples of riograndensis be- 
fore me, of equal size. 

Pond and a small creek near Maldonado, Uruguay (Dr. Rush). 

The differences between this form and typical trapesialis are mani- 
fest when we compare the typical figures of the latter in Encycl. 
Méth., pl. 205, which agree perfectly with specimens before me. The 
divergence between the several geographic races of G. trapesialis, 
such as riograndensis, exoticus and cygneiformis render it necessary, 
in my opinion, to recognize these as of subspecific rank. The ex- 
treme “lumpers” do not seem to understand that if evolution of 
species by divergence is granted, “subspecies” are a necessary con- 
sequence, whether we distinguish them by name or not. Every 
practical zoologist knows that they exist, and are neither more nor 
less artificial or subjective conceptions than “species;” and it 
seems a truer method to recognize certain races in which more or 
less definite characters are correlated with geographic range, than 
to lose sight of the differences induced by causes acting over whole 
districts or river-systems by lumping unlike forms under “species” 
which are equally with subspecies, arbitrary groupings. 

Glabaris Simpsonianus n. sp. Pl. XXVII, fig. 13. 

Shell oblong-oval, ventricose, very inequilateral, thick, solid and 
heavy; greatest diameter about in the middle; basal margin gaping 
from the anterior extremity nearly two-thirds the distance to poste- 
rior end; dorsal margin gaping slightly from the end of hinge to 
the posterior end of shell; externally green toward the beaks, the 
greater part of the surface olivaceous, blackish brown at the ends 
and basal margin, the posterior dorsal slopes biradiate with green ; 
the surface smooth and polished, with rather coarse, low wrinkles of 
growth, more crowded and somewhat lamellose at the ends and basal 
margin. Upper and basal outlines about equally curved; hinge 
margin long, wide, somewhat sloping, gently curved, rounded or 
hardly angular at the ends; posterior margin sloping above, 
rounded below; anterior end somewhat narrower, rounded; beaks 
wide and low. 

Interior silvery or salmon-tinted, very pearly, usually showing 
irregular black parallel lines in the neighborhood of the muscle im- 
pressions and pallial line. Cavity of valves deep, of beaks shallow 
and wide; muscle-scars well impressed, the foot protractor scar un- 
-usually long; posterior adductor scar situated very near to the sinus 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 565 


at end of hinge line, and connected therewith by a short impression ; 
prismatic layer at margins of valves narrow and bluish-green. 

Length 14, alt. 7:8, diam. 5:4 cm. 

Length 14°5, alt. 8-1, diam. 5°5 cm. 

Rio de la Plata. Described from seven specimens in the collection 
of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. 

This species is named in honor of Mr. Charles Torrey Simpson, 
whose valuable papers upon the Unionide have been of great ser- 
vice to students of this intricate and difficult group. 

G. Simpsonianus belongs to the group of G. trapesialis Lam. It 
differs from typical trapesialis (Encycl. Méth., pl. 205) in being oval 
rather than subtriangular; the beaks are far less inflated, low and 
wide ; the nacre is peculiarly pearly, having the luster of that of 
the pearl oyster; the hinge line is more nearly parallel with the 
basal margin and is far longer in proportion to the length of the 
shell; the posterior large muscle-scar is close to the sinus at end of 
hinge-line, not distant from it as in trapesialis ; the foot protractor 
scar is of a very different shape. Finally, the shell, while smaller, 
is much more ponderous and thick than trapesialis. Well-grown 
specimens of trapesialis measure 19 cm. long, and are thinner than 
Simpsonianus 14 cm. in length. 

Anodon penicillatus Gray* apparently resembles this species in 
the internal markings (which are common to many species of Gla- 
baris), but it is described as “Antice subcompressa, rotundata, sub- 
gracili,” terms applying well to some forms of G. trapesialis var. 
exoticus. 

The great solidity of the shell for a Glabaris will separate the 
species from G. trapesialis var. exoticus Lam. and var. riogranden- 
sis v. Iher. It resembles G. Forbesianus Lea in the thickness of the 
shell, but is more oblong, with longer hinge-line, wider beaks, 
differently shaped protractor pedis scar, and wider ventral gape. 


*Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1834, p. 57. 


566 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


DECEMBER 1. 


The President, SamuEeL G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair. 


Thirty-seven persons present. 


DECEMBER 8. 
The President, Samuet G. Drxon, M. D., in the Chair. 


Twenty-seven persons present. 


DECEMBER 15. 
Mr. Coarves Morris in the Chair. 


Twenty-five persons present. 


DECEMBER 22. 
The President, SAMUEL G. Dixon, M. D., in the Chair. 


Thirty-one persons present. 
The death of Auguste Louis Brot, a Correspondent, August 30, 
was announced. 


DECEMBER 29, 
Rev. Henry C. McCook, D. D., Vice-President, in the Chair. 


Forty-four persons present. 
The following papers were presented for publication :— 
“Certain Aboriginal Mounds of the Georgia Coast,” by Clarence 


B. Moore. (By title). 
“ Descriptions of New South American Bulimuli,” by Henry A. 


Pilsbry. 
The following was ordered to be printed :— 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 567 


GEOLOGY OF THE MUSSEL-BEARING CLAYS OF FISH-HOUSE, 
NEW JERSEY. 


BY HENRY A. PILSBRY. 


The deposit containing fresh-water mussels of the genera Unio 
and Anodonta, situated at Fish-house, Camden County, New Jersey, 
on the Delaware River, about 5 miles north of Camden, was first 
noticed, so far as we know, by Professor E. D. Cope, who placed a 
series of the fossil Unionide in the hands of Dr. Isaac Lea for de- 
scription’ in 1868. In Dr. Lea’s paper the bed containing these re- 
mains is said to be “subordinate to the Green Sand * * * * 
belonging to that portion of the cretaceous group which furnished 
* * # * Hadrosaurus Foulkii Leidy,” ete. 

The species of Unionide, twelve in number, were fully redescribed 
and illustrated in 1886 by Professor R. P. Whitfield,> who, relying 
upon the above statement in Dr. Lea’s paper, considers the deposit 
as “from near the base of the Cretaceous series of the State.” Pro- 
fessor E. D. Cope,‘ in a brief consideration of “The Fresh-water 
Clays of the Pea Shore,” in 1869, gave an excellent section of the 
beds, which may be consulted with advantage in connection with 
the present communication. He held that they were “ much later” 
than the Cretaceous, and, in fact, Pliocene; basing this conclusion 
largely upon the finding of a large part of the cranium of a horse 
believed to be Equus fraternus Leidy. The late H. Carvill Lewis, 
on the contrary, held the Fish-house clay to be “of interglacial 
age,” and this estimate of the age of the deposit is shared by Dr. 
C. A. White,° who considers the fossils as of post-Tertiary date. 
This is also, I believe, the opinion of most Philadelphia geologists 
who have recently examined the subject. 


1 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1868, p. 162. 

It is difficult to account for this statement, which finds no justification in 
the stratigraphy of the region in question, so far as I can see. 

3 Brachiopoda and Lamellibranchiata of the Raritan Clays and Green Sand 
Marls of New Jersey, pp. 243-252. 

‘Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc., XIV, N. Ser., pp. 249, 250. 

®° Professor Lewis did not, I believe, formally publish this view, but taught 
it in his lectures at the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, synop- 
ses of which were published in the “ Public Ledger,” April-June, 1884. The 
above quotation is from one of these newspaper reports. 

® A Review of the Non- Marine Fossil Mollusca of North America, 1883. 


568 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


The view that the Fish-house clay is of Pleistocene age is materially 
strengthened by the discovery therein of several horse teeth by Mr. 
Lewis Woolman, and by the recognition of the identity of at least a 
portion of the Unionide with living species, a subject referred to 
below. 

The fossils occur only in a layer of black clay, which is used for 
brick and tile making. This deposit is capped by a layer of coarse 
sand. Under the black clay is a much thinner stratum of yellow 
or reddish clay, containing considerable sand and deeply stained 
with iron oxide. Below this stratum, which is about two feet thick 
where observed, there is coarse gravelly sand, which forms the foun- 
dation of the superimposed clays. This sand deposit is of consider- 
able thickness, and the various sections exposed show it to be dis- 
~— tinetly stratified, the strata being obliquely 
=, laminated, as shown in the annexed dia- 

gram. The character of these strata is 
completely that of arenaceous deposits in 
=< yiver-beds. So far as I know, such a 
' disposition of the materials is not pro- 
duced by any other means. No such 
stratification and oblique lamination is 
to be seen in the coarse sand at the summit of the clays. This 
difference indicates a diverse origin for the two deposits. In the 
opinion of the writer, the peculiarities of the Fish-house clays may 
be explained by the supposition that the deposit has been purely a 
result of river-action. The phenomena are exactly paralleled by 
processes now in progress in the rivers of the Mississippi system, 
where similar deposits containing a similar fauna may be seen in 
every stage of formation. 

Upon this theory the sands underlying the red clay were de- 
posited in a former Delaware River bed, the river at that time flow- 
ing in a direction practically parallel to its present course, as shown 
by the direction of the oblique lamination of the strata. A change 
in the river’s course, such as cutting across the neck of an “ ox-bow,” 
or some similar shifting, left the former bed at this point a lagoon, 
similar to the so-called ‘“‘sloughs” of the Mississippi River. A la- 
goon of this nature, while it quickly becomes dammed at the up- 
stream end, for a time receives a portion of the current in time of 
high water. In the case under consideration, the layer of red, more 
or less arenaceous, clay was probably deposited during this period of 


Fie. 1. 
Obliquely laminated strata. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 569 


partial isolation. Further separation of the slough from the stream 
is effected by the growth of willows and other vegetation upon the 
alluvial ridge at its head, which rapidly gains in height by the debris 
collected thereby. The lagoon of quiet water thus formed is a very 
favorable station for molluscan and other aquatic life, sedentary 
animals, or those of weak locomotive powers becoming far more 
numerous than in the active current of the parent stream. Such a 
lagoon thus gradually fills up with fine mud partly composed of or- 
ganic material. In the case under consideration, the black clay 
represents this period. During this time the mussels flourished in 
the still water. Finally the lagoon or “slough” became dry land, 
this being the ordinary result of the process. 

The naiad fauna of the Fish-house deposit is precisely similar in 
general character to that of the “sloughs” of the Mississippi River 
to-day. 

The cap of sand upon the black clay may be regarded as a later 
deposition of more general geographic distribution, while the forma- 
tions it overlies in this place are believed to be the result of strictly 
local causes, and antedating by a lapse of time, greater or less in 
duration, the overlying gravels. 

As to the fossils themselves, it must be admitted that their diver- 
gence from living forms is very slight in most cases—a fact which 
Dr. Lea significantly indicated by his choice of specific names. 
Some of the species are really not distinguishable from modern shells. 
Thus Unio nasutoides has no characters which can not be readily 
paralleled in the living Unio nasutus or fisherianus. Anodonta cor- 
pulentoides is equally indistinguishable from A.corpulenta. The ab- 
solute counterpart of Unio radiatoides may be selected from any 
collection of U. radiatus, and so on. The remarkable feature of the 
series of fossil forms is that certain of them have no modern repre- 
sentatives in the Atlantic drainage south of the Great Lake and St. 
Lawrence system. The following “species” exemplify this state- 
ment: U. ligamentinoides, alatoides, preanodontoides, rectoides, Ano- 
donta grandioides and corpulentoides. Although the affinities of 
some of these may have been wrongly estimated, owing to imperfec- 
tion of the specimens, still a portion of them unquestionably bears 
out the relationships affirmed by Dr. Lea. The majority of these 
species foreign to the modern Atlantic drainage have their living 
allies in, or are identical with, species of the Great Lake system, ex- 
tending also into the northern Mississippi drainage in which, more- 


570 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


over, they are better developed. Still, the characteristic Mississippi 
River types of Unionide are not represented in the Fish-house fauna. 
None of the triangular or round Unios with heavy teeth are found ; 
no member of the great tuberculate or plicate groups occur. The 
Fish-house fauna is therefore to be assimilated rather with the Great 
Lake system than with the Mississippi or Ohio drainages. The spe- 
cies probably found their way into the Atlantic system in New 
York State, where the Lake and Atlantic waters are in close prox- 
imity. They may then have become extinct on the Atlantic slope 
during the glacial period when the rivers north of Delaware Bay 
were so profoundly affected.’ 

Summary.—The writer has attempted to show (1) that the Fish- 
house clay is a Pleistocene deposit, as held by Lewis, White and 
some others, not belonging to the Cretaceous or Tertiary as Lea, 
Whitfield and other geologists have claimed; (2) that it is either 
interglacial or preglacial, and probably the latter; (3) that it 
is purely local and fluviatile; and (4) that the structure of the 
sand underlying the clay, now first made known, gives a clue to the 
true explanation of the several geologic features of the deposit. 

The position of this deposit in the post-Pliocene series is one of 
some difficulty, but materials bearing upon the question are not 
wanting. We know that the immediately post-glacial mollusk fauna 
of New Jersey was similar to the modern, except that it contained 
forms of more northern distribution ; but there were no distinctively 
trans-Alleghenian types such as the Fish-house beds contain.* The 
very different character of the latter fauna would therefore indicate 
an earlier period. It was therefore either interglacial or preglacial, 
and the divergence of a part of the species from the most allied 
living forms, as well as the fact that the fauna was an abundant one, 
composed of large and well-developed individuals, point rather to 
preglacial than to interglacial conditions. 


’ Those interested in the former distribution eastward of the trans-Alle- 
ghenian Unionidx should consult Simpson, On some Fossil Unios from the 
Drift at Toronto, Canada. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XVI, p. 591. 

8 White Pond, in Sussex Co., N. J , a typically glacial lake, furnishes abund- 
ant evidence in support of the above statement, and also shows the changes 
which have taken place from post glacial to recent times in the mollusk fauna. 
This evidence the writer proposes to publish as soon as engagements permit. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 571 


The following annual reports were read and referred to the Pub- 
lication Committee :— 


REPORT OF THE RECORDING SECRETARY. 


The average attendance at the meetings of the Academy during 
the past year, from December 1, 1895, to November 30, 1896, was 
forty. Verbal communications were made by Messrs. Woolman, 
Goldsmith, Rand, Mercer, Brinton, Sharp, Vaux, Heilprin, Cope, 
Chapman, Allen, Pilsbry, Carter, Keeley, Lyman, Holman, Sangree, 
Egbert, Sommerville, Dixon, Leeds, Stokes, Campbell, Wistar, A. 
P. Brown, Willcox, Frazer, Morris, Skinner, A. E. Brown, Rother- 
mel, Henry, Leonard, Morsell, Dolley, A. D. Smith, Rhoads, Stone, 
Fox, Reese, Ball, Horn, McCook, Seiss, Calvert, Balch, Hamilton, 
Richardson and Miss Bascom. Those that were reported by their 
authors were published in the Proceedings. 

Six hundred and nine pages of the Proceedings, illustrated by 23 
plates, and 297 pages of the Journal, with 53 plates, forming Parts 
III and IV of the tenth volume, have been issued. We are indebted 
to Mr. Clarence B. Moore for the illustrations of both numbers. 

The publication of the Manual of Conchology has been continued 
by the Conchological Section. During the year Parts 63, 64 and 
64a of the Ist Series (Marine Univalves), and Parts 39 and 40 of 
the 2d Series (Pulmonata) have been issued. The former consists of 
157 pages illustrated by 44 plates, and the latter 121 pages illus- 
trated by 27 plates. The first parts of Vols. XVII and XI respect- 
ively of the two series are now in press. The expense of publication 
of the Manual, copiously illustrated as it is with colgred plates, is so 
great that the Section would be unable to continue it were it not for 
the support received from conchologists throughout the world. 

The Entomological Section and the American Entomological So- 
ciety have published, during the same period, 288 pages and 7 plates 
of the Entomological News and 386 pages and 11 plates of the 
Transactions. 

This makes a total of 1,858 pages and 165 plates issued under the 
auspices of the Academy since the first of last December. 

Forty papers have been presented for publication, as follows :— 
H. A. Pilsbry, 5; Harrison Allen, M. D.,3; Samuel N. Rhoads, 3; 
Edw. D. Cope, 3; Ida A. Keller,2; Wm. J. Fox, 2; R. W. Shu- 


572 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


feldt, M. D.,2; H. A. Pilsbry and E.G. Vanatta, 2; E. L. Green,1; 
Witmer Stone, 1; Theo. Holm,1; Thomas Meehan,1; Amos P. 
Brown, 1; O. F. Cook,1; J. C. Hartzell, Jr.,1; Fredk. P. Henry, 
M. D.,1; Chas. 8. Dolley, M. D.,1; Frank C. Baker, 1; Cloudesley 
Rutter, 1; D.S. Jordan and Cloudesley Rutter, 1; Wm. H. Dall,1; 
J. B. Ellis and B. M. Everhart, 1; Gilbert D. Harris, 1; S. N. 
Rhoads and H. A. Pilsbry, 1; Charles Morris, 1; Edw. S. Balch, 1. 
Four of these have been returned to the authors, two have been 
withdrawn, four are held for publication next year, and the others 
have been issued in the current volume of the Proceedings. In view 
of the occasional appearance in newspapers of communications 
offered to the Academy, on the recommendation of the Publication 
Committee a resolution was adopted declining to print papers of 
which more than a brief abstract had appeared elsewhere than in the 
publications of the society. 

Thirty-five members and two correspondents have been elected. 
The deaths of thirteen members and ten correspondents have been 
reported, and the resignations of ten members have been accepted, as 
follows : S. Emlen Meigs, Annesley R. Govett, Eugene Delano, John 
C. Sims, Jos. C. Harrison, Francis B. Reeves, Theo. Presser, James 
Y. McAllister, Frank T. Patterson and Adele M. Fielde, leaving a 
gain of twelve members during the year. 

The contributors to the Building Fund having made their final 
report setting forth the completion of the new lecture-hall and 
museum building, the expenditure of the fund and the discontinu- 
ance of the organization, the action was approved by the Academy 
and the Recording Secretary was authorized to receive all the books, 
papers and other assets of said contributors, and of the Board of 
Trustees established by them. 

The resignation of Dr, Dixon as Professor of Histology and Mi- 
croscopic Technology, presented in consequence of a press of official 
duties, was accepted January 28. 

Dr. Henry Skinner was elected Professor in the Department of 
Insecta, March 21. 

General Isaac J. Wistar was appointed the representative of the 
Academy at the celebration of the fiftieth anniversary of Lord Kel- 
vin’s tenure of office as Professor in the University of Glasgow. 

Prof. Angelo Heilprin represented the Society at the Mining and 
Geological Millenial Congress at Buda Pest. 

Dr. Persifor Frazer was appointed to represent the Academy at 
the Seventh Session of the International Geological Congress. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 573 


In response to an invitation, Dr. Charles S. Dolley was requested 
to contribute to the proceedings of the Congrés International de 
Péches Maritimes at Ville des Sables d’ Olonne. 

The report of the Committee on the Hayden Memorial Award 
conferring the recognition for 1896 on Prof. Giovanni Capellini, hav- 
ing been adopted, the medal and interest on the fund were forwarded 
to the distinguished geologist through the Italian Consul, and their 
receipt has been duly acknowledged. 

An important addition to the educational facilities of the Acad- 
emy was formally provided for by the adoption of the following 
resolution, June 30 :— 

Resolved, That the Committee on Instruction and Lectures of the 
Academy be authorized to codperate with the Ludwick Institute in 
the delivery of free courses of lectures on the natural sciences, pri- 
marily to the teachers in schools, and that the Academy expresses 
its satisfaction with the plan proposed by the Institute for the ad- 
vancement of public education. 

A resolution was adopted December 24, 1895, empowering the 
President to designate annually two members of the Academy to the 
electors of the Wistar Institute of Anatomy and Biology to serve as 
managers of the Institute under the deed of endowment until their 
successors shall have been appointed. 

A resolution urging the Commissioner of City Property to take 
timely measures for the extermination of the tussock moth from 
squares and city trees was adopted, and the subject referred to a 
committee of entomologists who drew up and submitted to the 
Commissioner a set of suggestions which, if carried out, would un- 
doubtedly effect the very desirable object contemplated. 

The Academy’s attention having been called to a bill before 
Congress for the prevention of vivisection, aseries of resolutions pre- 
pared by a Committee consisting of Messrs. Cope, Sharp and H. F. 
Moore, deprecating its adoption, was ordered to be sent to Washing- 
ton as an expression of the Academy’s views on the subject. 

The fourth Tuesday of each month has been assigned to the 
Anthropological Section for codperation with the meetings of the 
Academy. 

_ All of which is respectfully submitted. 
Epw. J. Nowan, 
Recording Secretary. 


574 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


REPORT OF THE CORRESPONDING SECRETARY. 


The Corresponding Secretary respectfully reports that during the 
past year, commencing December 1, 1895, there have been received 
from eighty-seven societies, museums, libraries, etc., one hundred 
and eighty-two acknowledgements of the receipt of the publications 
of the Academy ; and from forty-five societies, libraries, etc., fifty- 
seven notices that their publications have been forwarded to the 
Academy, together with eighteen applications to exchange publi- 
cations for Reports, Proceedings, ete., and asking for missing num- 
bers of the publications of the Academy. 

Twenty-five letters on various subjects have been received, and 
twenty-six written. Twenty-one circulars and invitations extended 
to the Academy to participate in Congresses or meetings, and an- 
nouncements of the deaths of scientific men have been received 
and, when necessary, acknowledged. 

During the year two correspondents have been elected and notified. 

The deaths of the following correspondents have been reported :— 

M.S. Bebb, of Rockford, Illinois, elected in 1881, died December 
5, 1895. 

Don Antonio del Castillo, of Mexico, elected 1874, died October 
97, 1895. 

Prof. Gabriel Auguste Daubrée, of Paris, France, elected 1884, 
died May 29, 1896. 

George Edward Dobson, of London, England, elected 1884, died 
November 26, 1895. 

Prof. Alexander Henry Green, of Oxford, England, elected 1877, 
died August 19, 1896. 

Dr. Juan Gundlach, of Havana, Cuba, elected 1867, died March, 
1896. 

Sir Ferdinand von Mueller, of Melbourne, Victoria, elected 1876, 
died October 9, 1896. 

Auguste Sallé, of Paris, France, elected 1888, died May 5, 1896. 

Charles Wachsmuth, of Burlington, Iowa, elected 1886, died Feb- 
ruary 7, 1896. 

Prof. Josiah Dwight Whitney, of Boston, Mass., elected 1852, 
died August 19, 1896. 

Seven hundred and fifty-eight acknowledgements for gifts to the 
library and eighty-three for gifts to the museum have been for- 
warded. 

Respectfully submitted, 


Bens. SHARP, 
Corresponding Secretary. 


1896.] 


NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 575 


REPORT OF THE LIBRARIAN. 


The additions to the library of the Academy since the last of Nov- 
ember, 1895, have numbered 5,372, of which 4,357 are pamphlets and 
parts of periodicals, 985 volumes, 22 maps and 8 photographs. 

They have been received from the following sources :— 


Societies, . : . 2,899 | Conchological Section of 
I. V. Williamsom Fund, . 1,140 the Academy,. . . . 3 
Editors, 1,084 | Chas. E. Smith,. .. . 2 
Authors, : 166 | Department of Agriculture, 
U.S. Dept. of eealnars, 112 Victoria; 7.4. 2 
J. A. Meigs Fund, 62 | Geological Comm. Nees ico, 2 
U. S. Dept. of the Interior, 45 | Geological Survey of Ala- 
PennsylvaniaState Library, 44 bama, 2 
Geological Surv. of Sweden, 85 | Geological Bares ey of New 
Charles P. Perot, 34 | Jersey, 2 
H. A. Pilsbry, 383 | Henry C. Chapman! 2 
Wilson Fund, 16 | Rev. Francis Barnum, 2 
Comité Geologique Russe, 15 | Secretary of State, Mexico, 2 
Ministry of Public Works, | Secretary of Works, Mex., 2 
France, . ; 14 | U.S. War Department, 2 
Thomas Meehan, 13 | William E. Meehan, 2 
U. S. Dept. of State, AZ Wi. J. Fox). 2 
East Indian Government, 11 | Messrs. Appleton & 6. i 
Geological Sury. of Canada, 10 | Messrs. C. E. Howe & Co., 1 
Trustees of British Museum 10 | Cochin Government, 1 
U.S. Dept. of Labor, . 7 | F. M. Comstock, ii 
General Appropriation, 7 | Department of Mines, 
Geological Survey of India, 7 Nova Scotia, 1 
Tennessee State Board of | Geological and Natural 
Health, 7 History Survey, Minn., 1 
BSpanmicat of Mines, New Geological Survey of Iowa, al 
South Wales, 7 | Geological Survey of Mis- 
Stewart Culin, 6 |  souri, i 
U. S. Treas. epacimont, 6 | Geological gees of Henit: 
Cal. State Mining Bureau, 4 sylvania, i 
Geological Survey of Mis- Geological Survey of Ria: 
souri, : 4 mania, 1 
U. S. Fish ee eeeion, 4 | Mrs. John Gilbert 1 
Benjamin Sharp, ; 3 | Guy Hinsdale, 1 
Bentham Trustees, Kew | Angelo Heilprin, 1 
Garden, 3 | Harold Wingate, 1 


576 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Illinois State Board of Ag- Minister of Education, On- 
riculture, ae 1 tATIO: 5 Gi )c gets GRA 1 
Ben). 8. Wyman, “6 «. a) Mw, Solan 2 eee 1 
Cyrus H. McCormack, 1 | South African Govern- 
Maryland State Weather THUG; cote? 1 
Service,. . . 1 | Geological aus of Por! 
Massachusetts State Board jural,. 24% 1 
of Agriculture, 1 | U. S. Coast aad Ganda 
J. C. Morgan, : sal. Survey, . 4. ie ch 
Metropolitan Park Geni: W. H. Fier A ee 1 
mission, Massachusetts, uf 


These accessions were distributed to the several departments of 
the library, as follows :— 


Journals, i dere tee Ag |) Oraithology,ns co, 7.0 26 
Geology; .  «. »s 40 12887) Mincralozy, ~~ hia ace ee 25 
Botany, . . “! ty 3. 0) 4165 | Physical Seienes,” ee 21 
General Natural Fisionae 127 | Geography, =... Gime. 13 
Acriculture;is, 20m 78 | Iehthyolosy, .- > nines 13 
Anthropology, . . . . 43 | Medicine, . 9 
Voyages and Travels, . . 38 | Helminthology, . 8 
Anatomy and Physiology, o” | Herpetology, . .°: %% 7 
Botomology, : % jain. 37 | Bibliography, 5 
Conchology, > 4) kuaataee 33 | Chemistry, ; + 
Encyclopedias, ). %..)." . 31 | Miscellaneous, . .. . 69 
Mammalogy,.:) i) ie til’. 28 


As heretofore, all additions have been promptly catalogued and 
placed for use, the geographical arrangement of periodicals being 
still retained, although the crowded condition of many of the cases 
makes it difficult to preserve the classification, and, for the conven- 
ience of the student, it is proposed to arrange the journals devoted 
to special subjects in connection with the special departments of the 
library. A number of new cases are being prepared which will 
partly occupy space gained by the removal of the stock of the 
Academy’s Proceedings and Journal to a storage-room in the base- 
ment of the new building, thus giving an opportunity for some con- 
templated improvements in classification. 

A shelf list of the general Meigs library is nearly completed, and 
a card catalogue of the portions arranged in connection with the 
special departments of the Academy’s library is proceeding as 
rapidly as our very scant clerical assistance will permit. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 577 


Six hundred and forty-nine volumes have been bound and sixty- 
nine are now in the hands of the binders. This does not half com- 
plete the work on the accumulation of unbound journals, and a 
much more liberal appropriation than the Academy is at present 
able to make is necessary to place the remainder of this most im- 
portant section of the library in good working condition. 

Renewed effort has been made, as the several sets of journals have 
been prepared for the bindery, to obtain asupply of deficiencies. In 
many cases the replies to applications have been gratifyingly liberal, 
special acknowledgment being due, in this connection, to the Im- 
perial Academy of Science of St. Petersburg, from which 170 vol- 
umes, extending back to 1726, and not heretofore in the library of 
the Academy, have been received. 

Important additions have been made to the collection of lantern 
slides, the formation of which was noted last year. Dr. Charles 
Schaeffer has given 163; Dr. Benjamin Sharp, 36; Wm. Stevenson, 
12; Silas L. Schumo, 3; while 26 were purchased, making the en- 
tire collection 566. 

We are indebted to Mr. William E. Haydock for a fine crayon 
portrait of Mr. John G. Meigs, whose legacy to the Academy was 
recorded in my last annual report. 

On retiring from the Presidency at the expiration of his four 
years of office, General Isaac J. Wistar contributed his portrait in 
oil, by Vonnah, to the gallery of Presidents, thus completing a col- 
lection of much value and interest. 

I am glad to again acknowledge the efficient services of my as- 
sistant, Mr. William J. Fox. 

Epw. J. Nowan, 
Librarian. 


REPORT OF THE CURATORS. 


The year just passed is especially noteworthy in the history of the 
Academy on acéount of the opening of the new museum building to 
the public. It has been impossible to prepare the entire building 
for exhibition this year; yet it was considered desirable to open a 
portion of it to the public without further delay, and, in accordance 
with this plan, the first and second floors, comprising the depart- 
ments of Mineralogy, Archeology and Mammalogy, were formally 
opened October 20th with appropriate ceremony. 


578 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Much time has necessarily been consumed in arranging and label- 
ling the collections in their new quarters. In addition to the Wm. 
S. Vaux Collections, representing Mineralogy and Archeology, and 
the Clarence B. Moore Archeological Collection, which were ar- 
ranged on the first floor of the new building during the present year, 
all the other archzological material has been arranged in new cases 
procured for its reception, the majority of them uniform with those 
containing the Moore Collection. Prof. F. W. Putnam, of Cam- 
bridge, devoted some days to helping us in the general arrangement 
and classification of the collections, after which they were finally 
placed and labelled. The Peruvian and Egyptian mummies were 
also arranged in new cases and displayed on this floor. 

The entire collection of mammals was transferred from the old 
building to the second floor of the new museum, the old cases being 
necessarily retained in use until new and more suitable ones can be 
substituted. 

The series of mounted mammals is now displayed in a thoroughly 
systematic manner and carefully labelled, with the families and 
orders indicated in each case, an arrangement that was quite im- 
possible in the former crowded galleries. Many recently mounted 
specimens have been exhibited for the first time, and a number of 
badly mounted duplicate specimens have been removed from the 
cases to the study-collection of skins. Other poorly mounted speci- 
mens are being removed as fast as new and better examples can 
be obtained. In this way the inferior work of the old time taxider- 
mists is being rapidly replaced by the life-like mounts that charac- 
terize the modern art. 

The large collection of mammalian osteological material, which 
was formerly so crowded as to render it inaccessible, has been care- 
fully arranged in storage-cases on the first floor of the new museum, 
where it can be consulted with great convenience, while an exhibi- 
tion series, comprising skulls or articulated skeletons of the princi- 
pal types, is exhibited on the mammalogical floor. The large Balen- 
optera skeleton has been placed along the eastern end of this floor 
and the smaller whale skeletons from the old building mounted and 
placed near by. 

Notwithstanding the time required to prepare the new building 
for exhibition, the work accomplished in other departments has been 
considerable. The removal of so much material from the old build- 
ing has made it possible to arrange the cases containing the paleon- 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 579 


tological collections to much better advantage, while the vacant 
space under the south gallery has been partitioned off uniform with 
the Entomological room, to furnish apartments for the Biological 
and Geological Sections. Two additional commodious rooms have 
been fitted up for the Botanical Section on the library floor. 

During the year the cataloguing of the mineral collection has 
been continued, and a series of minerals from Pennsylvania and 
New Jersey selected from the general exhibit, has been arranged in 
the department of local natural history. 

Work on the invertebrate fossils has been mainly confined to the 
Lea Eocene Collection. Through the liberality of the Rev. L. T. 
Chamberlain, D. D. a third fine case has been procured for 
the display of the collection, and Mr. C. W. Johnson has been 
enabled to spend much time in arranging and labelling the speci- 
mens and in carrying on valuable exchanges, besides making a short 
trip to the Potomac Valley, where a large collection was made. 

In the Department of Vertebrate Paleeontology a valuable addi- 
tion has been made to the museum by the final arrangement and 
labelling of the Port Kennedy Collection. Work at the cave has 
been actively and successfully pushed forward during the year by 
Dr. Dixon and Mr. H. C. Mercer. 

Great progress has also been made in cataloguing and renovating 
the collection of birds, so that this work is rapidly nearing comple- 
tion. Many valuable additions have also been received, especially 
to the Delaware Valley Ornithological Collection of local birds, the 
increase of which has necessitated the addition of a new plate-glass 
ease for its accommodation. Further particulars of work in this 
department will be found in the report of the Ornithological Section. 

In other departments the work has been mainly restricted to cata- 
loguing and arranging the large additions received during the year, 
and looking after the general condition of the specimens, which is 
now excellent. 

The additions to the museum during the year have been note- 
worthy. One of the most important of these is the archzolog- 
ical and zoological material obtained by Dr. Benjamin Sharp dur- 
ing a cruise along the coast and among the islands of Alaska and 
Siberia in the U. S. Revenue Cutter “ Bear,” during the year 
1895. Besides fine series of native implements, there are valuable col- 
lections of mollusks and birds, and a Pacific walrus; also three fur 
seals, which now make one of the most attractive groups in the mu- 


38 


580 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


seum. Another, and one of the most valuable accessions, is a series 
of mammals, birds, fishes and reptiles collected in Somali-land by 
Dr. A. Donaldson Smith on his expedition through that country. 

Valuable collections of birds, mollusks and plants were likewise 
obtained for the Academy by Mr. George Russell in British Guiana. 
Another important addition is the collection of marine invertebrates 
prepared in formaline by our preparateur, Mr. F. W. Walmsley. 
Many other donations have been received, special mention of which 
will be found in the appended list of accessions, including a number 
of rare specimens from the Zoological Society of Philadelphia. 

The various collections under the care of special conservators 
have received careful attention during the year, and to the gentle- 
men who have rendered this important service the Curators would 
express their indebtedness—to Messrs. Thomas Meehan and Steward- 
son Brown of the Botanical Section; Dr. Henry Skinner of the 
Entomological Section, and William W. Jefferis, Curator of the 
Wm.S. Vaux Collections. 

Valuable assistance has also been rendered in various departments 
of the museum by the students of the Jessup Fund: Miss Helen Hig- 
gins, Miss Jennie Letson, Messrs. H. W. Fowler, William J. Ger- 
hard, E. G. Vanatta and S. H. Hamilton. 

Henry C. CHAPMAN, 
Chairman of the Curators. 


REPORT OF THE BIOLOGICAL AND MICROSCOPICAL 
SECTION. 


The Section has held the usual number of meetings during the 
past year, and the attendance has been up to the average. 

Communications pertaining to the subject of the Section, have been 
made at each meeting and usually specimens have been exhibited 
under the microscope. The cabinet has been enriched by 158 botan- 
ical slides, principally fungi, belonging to the late Dr. Rex and pre- 
sented by his sister through Mr. Wingate. 

The microscope of the late Dr. Wm. Hunt, and forty slides, were 
given by his widow. 

A room on the second floor of the Academy has been fitted up 
by the Section and will soon be ready for occupancy. Aquariums 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 581 


and work tables will be at the disposal of the members, and it is 
hoped will be used for scientific investigation. 
The officers of the Section are as follows :— 


Director, : : F : . J. Cheston Morris, M. D. 
Vice-Director, : : ; . John C, Wilson. 
Treasurer, . ; . ; . - Chas, P: Perot. 
Conservator, . ‘ ‘ ; . F. J. Keely. 
Corresponding Secretary ‘ . John G. Rothermel. 
Recorder, . ; : $ . M. VeBallt 
Me VoBani, 
Recorder. 


REPORT OF THE CONCHOLOGICAL SECTION. 


The arrangement of the conchological collection remains substan- 
tially as reported last year, want of space preventing the progress 
of the systematic rearrangement in the exhibition cases of the families 
of mollusks studied and relabelled during the year, in connection 
with the monographic work in the Manual of Conchology. The 
remainder of the Tectibranch gastropods, including the Aplysiide, 
Pleurobranchide and Umbraculide, and of the land mollusks a 
considerable part of the Bulimulide, have been revised and prepared 
for arrangement in the cases. The genus Cerion has been studied 
by Mr. Vanatta and the Conservator, and the collection relabelled 
and arranged according to a complete catalogue of the species pub- 
lished in the Proceedings of the Academy. It is gratifying to state 
that out of seventy described species of Cerion we are in possession 
of all but seven, and have extensive series of most of the species. 

A portion: of the American Slugs have been studied, and large 
additions to the collection made; partial results being given in a 
paper published by the Academy, the greater part of this work be- 
ing due to Mr. Vanatta’s industry. 

A considerable collection of mollusks from Uruguay and adjacent 
regions has been received from Dr. Wm. H. Rush, U.S. N., com- 
prising many species new to the collection, and about twenty new to 
science. 

A valuable collection of Alaskan mollusks, made by Dr. Benj. 
Sharp, has been presented to the Academy, but not yet wholly de- 
termined. The remainder of Prof. Heilprin’s Bermuda collection 
has been placed in the cases, and with what we already had, forms 


582 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


probably the most extensive series of Bermuda mollusks in any 
museum. 

The additions to our series of American mollusks have been very 
numerous, the most extensive accessions being Mr. S. N. Rhoads, 
collection of Tennessee shells, the series collected by Mr. C. W. John- 
son and the Conservator in Florida in 1894, and a collection of marine 
forms from Puget Sound, which we owe to the Young Naturalist’s 
Society of Seattle, Washington ; also, a large series of the recent and 
post-tertiary mollusks of White Pond, New Jersey, collected by Mr. 
Rhoads and the Conservator. Eighty-three persons, a list of whom 
is given in the record of additions to the Museum, have contributed 
smaller numbers of mollusks to the collection. 

The Conchological Section and the Academy have purchased 291 
species new to the collection during the year. 

The Officers of the Section are as follows :— 


Director, . : 3 : : . Benjamin Sharp, M. D. 
Vice-Director, . : ; . . John Ford. 

Recorder and Librarian, . : . Edw. J. Nolan, M. D. 
Corresponding Secretary, . . . Chas. W. Johnson. 
Treasurer, : ; : , . §&. Raymond Roberts. 


Henry A. PILssBry, 
Conservator. 


REPORT OF THE ENTOMOLOGICAL SECTION. 


The Section moved into the apartments provided by the Acad- 
emy, which it now occupies, February 27, 1895, and immediately 
thereafter work was commenced on the rearrangement of the 
collections and library. Owing to the crowded condition of the old 
rooms, it was impossible to attempt any proper arrangement, but, at 
the present time, all our possessions are in a very satisfactory condi- 
tion, and can be properly studied and used to advantage. The 
members of the Section now feel that they are in a position to do 
good work, as they have the space for growth of the collections and 
library, and an incentive to advance. There has, undoubtedly, 
been a greatly increased interest in our study among the members 
of the Section which is likely to continue. During the past year 
important additions have been made to the cabinet. Many species 
have been presented to the display collection representing the fauna 
of Pennsylvania and southern New Jersey. The meetings have 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 583 


been well attended, the smallest number of persons present at any 
meeting being eleven, and the largest seventeen. The scientific 
communications have been of interest and of practical value in 
the advancement of entomology. 

At the annual meeting, held December 17th, the following were 
elected officers to serve during the coming year :— 


Director, : : ‘ George H. Horn. 
Vice-Director, j : ; : F C.S. Welles. 
Treasurer,  . ; i ; : : C. T. Cresson. 
Conservator and Recorder, . : Henry Skinner. 
Secretary, : : : : : : Wed. Fox: 


( C. W. Johnson. 
UJ. H. Ridings. 
HENRY SKINNER, 
Recorder. 


Publication Committee, 


REPORT OF THE BOTANICAL SECTION. 


The Director of the Botanical Section respectfully reports that this 
department of the Academy is in a prosperous condition. It is free 
from debt, and has a small surplus in its treasury. Meetings have 
been held regularly at stated times when many matters of importance 
to botanical science were brought forward and discussed. 

The progress and needs of the herbarium are well set forth in the 
statement of the Conservator, Mr. Stewardson Brown, which is sub- 
mitted as a part of this report. It is hoped that the Redfield Mem- 
orial Herbarium Fund, efforts to enlarge which from outside sources 
have been held in abeyance the past year, may soon be increased. 
The income from this should be immediately available to aid in 
securing additional collections, while the principal sum is growing 
so as to secure the essential services of a Curator. The voluntary 
labors of Messrs. Crawford, Beringer, Brown and Meehan, in arrang- 
ing the herbarium and preparing the specimens for fastening down, 
have been coutinuous the past two years. It will take some five or 
six years, at the same rate of proceeding, to complete the task, even 
if no additions were made to the collection. It is a question whether 
it is wise to depend greatly on this assistance, and it is earnestly 


584 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


hoped that the Redfield Herbarium Memorial Fund may secure the 
active interest of the Academy. 
The officers for the ensuing year are :— 


Director, 5 : : : F . Thomas Meehan. 
Vice-Director, : ; ! . Charles E. Smith. 
Conservator and ee ' } . Stewardson Brown. 
Recorder, . 5 : ; . Chas. Schaffer, M. D. 
Corresponding Serer : : Jos. Crawford. 
Poke MEEHAN, 
Director. 


In presenting this report for the year your Conservator is glad to be 
able to announce that the work of permanently mounting the general 
herbarium has been carried on steadily, and is completed nearly to 
the end of the Composite, which should be a matter of congratula- 
tion to all those interested in this very important work. 

Such an advance has been made possible through the untiring 
efforts of the Director of the Section, Mr. Thomas Meehan, who has 
devoted a large amount of his time to the work during the past 
year. 

In this connection the Conservator wishes to acknowledge the 
services of the Assistant in the herbarium, Mrs. E. F. Hochgesang, 
who has rendered most valuable aid in mounting and redistributing 
the plants, fully ten thousand sheets having been handled during 
the year. 

In additions this year has not been behind former ones, as 2,450 
species and varieties have been added to the herbarium, of which 
803 are lower Cryptogams and 1,647 Phanerogams and Ferns. They 
are distributed as follows: North America, 1,500 ; Tropical America, 
299; Asia, 241; Australia and Polynesia, 410—adding about 600 
species new to the collection. 

Among these may be specially mentioned the following: The 
unique collection of Myxomycetes, forming the herbarium of the 
late Dr. George A. Rex, comprising some 400 species, and presented 
to the Academy by his sister; 500 species of the North American 
Grasses from the United States Department of Agriculture, through 
Prof. F. Lamson Scribner; 150 species of Alaskan and Siberian 
Plants from Dr. Benj. Sharp; 90 species of Jamaica Ferns from U. 
C. Smith; Centuries 34 and 35 of North American Fungi from Dr. 
J. B. Ellis; 172 species and varieties of Sphagna Boreali-Americana 
Exsiccata from Mr. George F. Eaton; 375 species of Hawaiian 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 585 


Island plants, collected in 1895 by Mr. A. A. Heller, and purchased 
for the herbarium ; 209 species of Mexican Plants, collected by 
Prof. G. C. Pringle, and purchased for the herbarium; and 241 
species of Asia Minor Plants, collected by Prof. Bornmiller, and 
purchased for the herbarium. 

The attention of the Academy is respectfully called to the fact that 
the 825 species purchased during the past year, were paid for, not 
from the funds of the Section, but entirely by two of its members. 
Many very desirable collections were declined on account of the 
lack of funds; this is particularly to be regretted as regards the 
plants of our own country, in which we are in many cases very defi- 
cient. 

The creation of a fund for the purchase of such collections is im- 
mediately desirable. 

Since the last report the Academy has placed at the disposal of 
the Section two rooms formerly occupied by the Department of 
Entomology. The one on the gallery floor has been partially fitted 
up as a work-room. 

The room on the library floor, which it is designed to use for addi- 
tional herbarium space, has not as yet been occupied to any extent, 
owing to the lack of funds for furnishing. Additional cases for the 
accommodation of the herbarium are, however, an absolute neces- 
sity, as the present cases are crowded to an extent that is damaging 
to the specimens; it is therefore earnestly hoped, that before the 
close of the next year, this most pressing need will have been 
supplied. 

Respectfully submitted, 
STrEWARDSON Brown, 
Conservator. 


REPORT OF THE MINERALOGICAL AND GEOLOG- 
ICAL SECTION. 


Ten meetings of the Section have been held during the year, with 
an average attendance of ten members. A notable addition to the 
facilities of the Section has been the laboratory erected on the first 
floor of the Museum by contributions from the Section and its indi- 
vidual members and from the Academy. This removes a serious 
difficulty under which we have labored, and cannot fail to facilitate 
its work. 


586 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Few additions haye been made to the mineral collection of the 
Academy, except to the local collection, which has been arranged in 
part and displayed to advantage. It seems to have attracted the 
attention of visitors. It is hoped that this collection may be much 
increased in the near future, and that we may also have the means 
of displaying a representation of the rocks of the vicinity of Philadel- 
phia of which the Academy has a fair supply, while there has been 
promised to the Section oe the Academy a very large and nearly 
complete series. 

Although not in the care of the Section, it may not be inoppor- 
tune to call attention to the William S. Vaux Collection, which is 
now displayed to advantage in the new building. The Conservator 
of the Section holds the same relation to this collection, and to him 
is due much credit for its condition. As he accepts no salary the 
entire income of the fund has been applied to the improvement of 
the collection. During the year many valuable specimens have been 
added to it. The officers of the Section are :— 


Director, . : ; : f Theo. D. Rand. 
Vice-Director and (Cifaonatioe F . W. W. Jefferis. 
Recorder, . ; : ’ ; : , Chas. Schiffer. 
Treasurer, ; ; _ ‘ : ; John Ford. 


Respectfully submitted, 
TuHeEo. D. Rann, 
Director. 


REPORT OF THE ORNITHOLOGICAL SECTION. 


Owing to the opening of the new museum building and the work 
which it necessitated in other departments, the Conservator has been 
able to devote but little personal attention to the ornithological col- 
lections. Under his direction, however, Mr. Henry W. Fowler has 
carried on the work of cataloguing the collection with such success 
that quite as much progress has been made as in previous years, 
while Mr. McCadden, the taxidermist, has been enabled to proceed 
with the remounting of the exhibition series during several months 
of the year. 

Since the last report, 7,386 mounted specimens have been identi- 
fied and catalogued, and most of the specimens intended for the ex- 
hibition cases remounted, while the types and a part of the dupli- 
cate specimens have been unmounted and placed in the study series. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 587 


These specimens aggregated 3,192, and all of them have been care- 
fully labeled. Besides the 7,386 specimens entered on the rough 
catalogue, 1,980 entries have been copied into the permanent cata- 
logue. 

The groups catalogued during the year comprised all the remain- 
ing families of the Picon Passeres, except the Trochilide, together 
with the Picariz and Scansores. The exhibition series of all these 
families has been remounted except the Coccyges, Psittaci and 
Trochili, so that it will be an easy matter to complete the renova- 
tion of the ornithological collection during the ensuing year. 

Owing to the liberality of friends of the Academy, we have been 
enabled to procure nineteen air-tight cases for the reception of the 
study series of skins similar to those already in use. This has en- 
abled us to arrange almost all the unmounted specimens in syste- 
matic order in the Section-room where they are easily accessible to 
the student. 

The exhibition series of Passeres, Picarie, etc., has been arranged 
in order in the large casesin the middle of the ornithological gallery 
following the Rapacious birds, thus entirely clearing the wall cases, 
except a few duplicate specimens which are placed there temporarily 
until they can be unmounted. 

The additions to the collection during the year, while not as great 
numerically as those of the previous year, comprise some exceed- 
ingly valuable collections containing many species not before repre- 
sented. 

The most important of these are the Donaldson Smith Collection 
of African birds from Somali-land, containing duplicates of many of 
the new species discovered by Dr. Smith, and the collection of 
Alaskan and Siberian birds obtained by Dr. Benj. Sharp, which 
well supplements the five series of the Arctic birds from the north 
Atlantic already in the Academy’s collection. Other noteworthy 
accessions were a collection of British Guiana birds obtained through 
Mr. Russell, and a small collection from Nova Scotia presented by 
Mr. Robt. T. Young. 

The general condition of the collection is excellent, and the in- 
creased facilities for study offered by the new arrangement have been 
taken advantage of by a number of students, while specimens have 
been loaned to specialists in various other institutions. 

The Delaware Valley Ornithological Club has held its meetings 
regularly at the Academy, and aided materially in keeping up a 
lively interest in the Ornithological Department. The collection 


588 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


formed by the Club has steadily increased during the year, and now 
fills four large cases, one of them a handsome plate-glass case de- 
signed as a model for the cases needed for the display of the general 
ornithological collection in the new building. As soon as these 
can be procured, the entire collection of birds can be immediately 
transferred to its allotted position on the third floor of the new build- 
ing, as the work of renovation is now practically completed. 

At the annual meeting of the Section, held December 21, 1896, 
the old board of officers was reelected, as follows :— 


Dincctor, | aa : : , Spencer Trotter, M. D. 
Vice- Director, : : : ; Geo. S. Morris. 
Recorder, . f ‘ : ; Stewardson Brown. 
Secretary, . ; . Wm. A. Shyrock. 
Treasurer and Gilson ! Witmer Stone. 


Respectfully pienstned 
WITMER STONE, 
Conservator. 


REPORT OF THE ANTHROPOLOGICAL SECTION, 


The Anthropological Section has been fully organized during the 
present year by the adoption of By-Laws and the election of officers 
in accordance with the requirements of the By-Laws of the Academy. 
It has, at present, a membership of thirty-four, and during the year 
has held eight monthly sessions. The principal communications 
received have been from Dr. D. G. Brinton on “The Relations of 
Race and Culture to the Degeneration of the Reproductive Organs 
in Woman,” and on “ Hybridization ;” Dr. Harrison Allen on 
“The Prenasal Fosse ;” Prof. F.C. Kavanagh on “ Right Hand- 
edness ;” Prof. Lightner Witmer on “ Psycho-Physical Measure- 
ments ;” Dr. M. V. Ball on “Tattooing ;” Dr. Chas. K. Mills on 
“ Nerves of the Sense of Taste,” and by Stewart Culin on “ Divin- 
atory Diagrams.” In addition, minor communications were on 
various subjects. 

The officers of the section are as follows :— 


Director, : : > : : Harrison Allen, M. D. 
Vice- Director, f : Dr. Newlin Peirce. 
Treasurer and Garepadaew) Secretary, M. V. Ball, M. D. 
Recorder and Conservator, . : Chas. Morris. 


CHARLES MorRRIs, 
Recorder. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 589 


REPORT OF THE PROFESSOR OF GEOLOGY. 


The Professor of Geology respectfully reports that, as in former 
years, he has delivered the usual course of spring lectures, accom- 
panied by Saturday field excursions. It is gratifying to be again 
able to state that the interest in the study of geology, as evidenced 
by the attendance at the lectures and participation in the excur- 
sions, shows no diminution, but the reverse. In addition to the 
regular Academy course, a special course of six lectures, introduc- 
tory to the study of rocks and minerals, was delivered under the 
auspices of the Ludwick Institute, the attendance at which was sig- 
nificantly large. 

In his capacity of Professor of Geology, the undersigned was ap- 
pointed by the Council and Academy to represent the institution 
at the Millennial Mining and Geological Congress held at Budapest, 
Hungary, on September 25th and 26th. A report of this mission 
has been presented to the Council. The report makes reference to a 
special journey in the north of Africa, where a superficial study was 
made of the rock formations of the Atlas Mountains, with particular 
reference to the determination of the existence of glacial phenomena 
such as had been alleged to be found there. No evidences of past 
glaciation could be detected. Asa result of this journey, a fairly 
extensive and representative collection of fossils was obtained from 
the Atlas confines of the Sahara; these, when properly studied and 
determined, will be placed with the collections of the Academy. 

The additions to the Academy’s geological collection made dur- 
ing the year have been neither particularly large nor important, the 
most noteworthy, in the department of Paleontology, being the ani- 
mal remains obtained from Port Kennedy, Pa., by Mr. H. C. Mer- 
cer. 

Respectfully submitted, 
ANGELO HEILPRIN, 
Prof. of Geology. 


REPORT OF THE PROFESSOR OF ETHNOLOGY AND 
ARCH ZOOLOGY. 


I have the honor to report that, during the year 1896, I delivered 
a course of six lectures, public and gratuitous, on subjects connected 
with the study of anthropology. They were well attended and in- 
creased the general interest in this branch of science. 


590 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


The ethnological collections of the Academy have been rearranged 
and labeled through the attention of the Curator, whose report will 
supply the information required on that subject. 

I have the honor to remain, 
DanteL G. BRINTON, 
Professor of Ethnology and Archeology. 


REPORT OF THE PROFESSOR OF INVERTEBRATE 
ZOOLOGY. 


The Professor of Invertebrate Zoology respectfully reports that 
during the past year he has delivered eight lectures, six on “ The 
Action of the Environment Upon Animals,” under the auspices of 
the Ludwick Institute, and two: “A Summer in Alaska and Si- 
beria” and “Alaskan and Siberian Natives,” in the Popular Friday 
Evening Course. 

The additions to the Museum have been neither numerous nor 
important. 

A course of ten lectures on “Invertebrate Zoology ” will be de- 
livered in January, February and March, in the Ludwick Institute 
Course, and, during the spring, a lecture on “ The Sea and Its In- 
fluence on Animal Life,” in the Popular Friday Evening Course. 

Respectfully submitted, 
BENJ. SHARP, 
Professor of Invertebrate Zoology. 


REPORT OF THE PROFESSOR IN THE DEPARTMENT 
OF MOLLUSCA. 


The Professor in the Department of Mollusca respectfully reports 
that during the year he delivered a course of five lectures upon the 
morphology of Mollusca and two upon “ Economic Uses of Mol- 
lusca”’ and “ Mollusks of the Atlantic Coast.” 

In the Museum considerable progress has been made in the revis- 
ion of the land mollusks, and many additions to the collection have 
been received as noted in the report of the Conchological Section. 

Respectfully submitted, 
Henry A. PIissry, 
Prof. of Malacology. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 591 


REPORT OF THE PROFESSOR IN THE DEPARTMENT 
OF INSECTA. 


Having been elected to the Professorship of the Department of 
Insecta on the thirtieth day of March, 1895, I have the honor to 
submit this, my first report. Some idea of the field covered in this 
department may be derived from the fact that we have about 
126,000 specimens in the collection, divided as follows :— 


Lepidoptera, . ; , ; : 33,600 specimens. 
Coleoptera, . : ; s . 45,800 specimens. 
Hymenoptera, : ; ; 36,240 specimens. 
Neuroptera, . : : 2,400 specimens. 
Diptera, ) 

Hemiptera, > . 10,000 specimens. 
Orthoptera, ) 


These collections are believed to be in a better state of arrange- 
ment and preservation than ever before, and museum pests have been 
almost annihilated: The Conservator of the Entomological Sec- 
tion has been greatly aided by members interested in the several 
orders, and much yaluable work has been done by them in the de- 
partments in which they make special studies. It is hoped that the 
fine collection of local insects will soon be completed by the aid of 
the Feldman Collecting Social of Philadelphia and individual mem- 
bers. The department needs new cases to replace the older ones 
that are not absolutely safe, and, in the future, metal cases, which 
can be practically hermetically sealed against dust and pests, should 
be secured. 

A course of five lectures has been delivered covering the general 
subject, including the classification, anatomy, orders, technic, and 
economic or practical entomology. 

Respectfully submitted, 
Henry SKINNER. 


—_ — 


REPORT OF THE CURATOR OF THE WM. 8S. VAUX 
COLLECTIONS. 


The Curator of the William S. Vaux Collections reports that dur- 
ing the year there have been added to the mineralogical cabinet, by 
purchase, 185 specimens. A nugget of native gold from Alaska 
was presented by C. B. Moore, bringing the number of specimens 


592 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


in the collection, November 30, 1896, to 7,966. Several of the 
specimens thus added are new to the collection. Attention is espe- 
cially called to a superb crystal of green tourmaline with pink ter- 
minations. It is probably the finest specimen yet found at Haddam, 
Conn. The collection is in good order. No addition has been made 
to the archzological section. 
Respectfully submitted, 
Wm. W. JEFFERIS, 
Curator. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 593 


The election of Officers, Councillors and Members of the Finance 
Committee to serve during 1897, was held with the following re- 
sult :— 


President, 
Vice-Presidents, 


Recording Secretary, 
Corresponding Secretary, 
Treasurer, 

Librarian, 

Curators, 


Samuel G. Dixon, M. D. 
Thomas Meehan. 

Rev. Henry C. McCook, D. D. 
Edward J. Nolan, M. D. 
Benjamin Sharp, M. D. 
George Vaux, Jr. 

Edward J. Nolan, M. D. 
Henry A. Pilsbry. 


Henry C. Chapman, M. D. 
Arthur Erwin Brown. 
Samuel G. Dixon, M.D. 
Thomas A. Robinson. 
Harrison Allen, M. D. 
Chas. Morris. 

Isaac J. Wistar. 

Charles Morris. 

Chas. E. Smith. 

Uselma C. Smith. 
William Sellers. 
Charles P. Perot. 


Councillors to serve three years, 


Finance Committee, 


ELECTIONS DURING 1896. 
MEMBERS. 


January 28—James C. Corry, P. Calvin Mensch, M.D., Ph.D., 
J. Norris De Haven, Edw. Gideon, A. M., Geo. de Schweinitz, M. D., 
Ruth Clement, M. D., Chas. E. Hite, Henry Trimble, C. Howard 
Colket, Sarah Y. Stevenson. 

February 25.—Arthur N. Leeds, Morris Earle, H. W. Wenzel, 
George L. Farnum, J. Edward Farnum, Vickers Oberholtzer, Ph.D., 
Homer E. Hoopes, A. Feldpauch. 

Mareh 31—Jacob Reese, Louis S. Amonson, E. G. Conklin, 
Mary T. S. Schaeffer, Walter P. Stokes, Charles L. Phillips, 
A. Donaldson Smith, M. D. 

April 28—Wm. H. Roberts. 

August 25.—Thomas Chalkley Palmer. 


594 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


September 29.—J. Howard Breed, Mrs. F. G. Dixon, Effingham 
B. Morris, Curwin Stoddart, Jr. 

October 27.—Henry A. Laessle, George C. Harlan, M. D., 
William M. Singerly, Henry Beates, Jr., M. D. 


CORRESPONDENTS. 


October 27.—W. C. Roentgen of Wiirzburg, Germany. 
November 24.—R. A. Philippi of Santiago, Chili. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 595 


ADDITIONS TO THE MUSEUM. 
1896. 


ARCHEOLOGY, ETHNOLOGY, Erc. 


Alaskan Expedition (collected by Dr. Benjamin Sharp). Large collec- 
tion of native implements from Alaska and Siberia. 

Arthur Erwin Brown. Indian Tepee Door, Colorado. 

Clarence B. Moore. Large collection of implements, etc., from the 
Florida Indian mounds. 

Dr. W. H. McGrath. Arrow-head from the interior of Brazil. 

Dr. H. C. McCook. Several Indian mortars and pestles. 


MAMMALS. 


Alaskan Expedition (collected by Dr. Benj. Sharp). Eighteen skins 
and two alcoholic mammals, Alaska and Siberia, also three skins 
and skulls of fur seal, Callotaria ursina (mounted in group). 

Wm. L. Baily. Sciwrus carolinensis pennsylvanicus (mounted), Penn- 
sylvania. ' 

Geo. B. Benners. Five skulls of Texan mammals. 

Chas. Bradley. Putorius noveboracensis. 

M. Corley. Desiccated specimen of rat (Mus decumanus). 

Edmund Coxe. Mounted specimen of Ornithorhynchus anatinus. 

Dr. H. C. Chapman. Seven skulls of mammals, and vicera of Macro- 
rhinus. 

I. N. DeHaven. Alcoholic specimen of Blarina brevicauda floridana, 
Florida. 

Exchange. Two skins of Peromyscus niveiventris. 

J. Edward Farnum. Three skulls of African mammals. 

Fesquet Estate. Horns of chamois and whale’s tooth. 

Wm. J. Gerhard. Specimen of Scalops aquaticus, Pennsylvania. 

David McCadden. Sciurus niger cinereus (mounted), West Virginia. 

Purchased. Skin and skeleton of Anoa depressicornis Celebes, and 
Ovis cervina (mounted). 

Purchased through Mr. Russell in British Guiana. Four skulls and 
three skins of mammals. 

Saml. N. Rhoads. Eight rodents from Wisconsin (two mounted, six 
in alcohol) ; nine alcoholic mammals, Mammoth Cave, Kentucky ; 


39 


596 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


twenty-five mammals, Clinton Co., Pa. ; six mammals, Warren Co., 
N. J. ; skull of Putorius vison, Maine ; skull of Felis domestica. 

Dr. Benj. Sharp. Jaw of Dolphin, Nantucket, Mass. 

Dr. A. Donaldson Smith. One hundred and thirty-five mammals (al- 
coholic and skins) from N. E. Africa. 

Tennessee Expedition, 1895 (collected by S. N. Rhoads). One hun- 

_ dred and twenty mammals (skins and alcoholic). 

James Upton. Mounted specimen of Pithecus satanus. 

Zoological Society of Philadelphia. Mounted: Coelogenys paca, Tra- 
gulus meminna, Semnopithecus obscurus, Cercopithecus callitrichus, 
Macacus nemestrinus, Choloepus didactylus, Meles meles, Cephalophus 
coronatus, Belideus sciureus, Halmaturus dorsalis. Skins and skulls: 
Procyon cancrivorus, Petaurus sciureus, Macropus rufus bennetti, 
Sciurus badging (2), Dasyprocta prymnolopha, Trichosurus vulpinus, 
Capromys fournierit, Midas sp. Skeletons: Felis pardalis, Hyzxna 
striata, Hyxna crocuta. Viscera of Hyzna crocuta. 


Birps. 


Alaskan Expedition (collected by Dr. Benj. Sharp). One hundred and 
two bird skins and forty-eight eggs from Alaska and Siberia. 

E. A. Barbour. Skin of Trogon resplendens. 

G. B. Benners. Skin of Peucxa ruficeps eremoeca, Texas. 

Dr. H. C. Chapman. Penguin and Toucan in alcohol. 

Edmund Coxe. Mounted specimen of Apteryx oweni. 

Delaware Valley Ornithological Club. Twelve mounted birds, ten 
nests, nine sets of eggs. Pennsylvania and New Jersey. 

Mrs. B. W. Douglass. Skin of Paradisea apoda. 

Exchange. Nine skins of Liberian birds. 

Dr. Wm. E. Hughes. Seven skins of birds, Quebec. 

David McCadden. Corvus corax principalis, Virginia (skin). 

George 8. Morris. Passer domesticus albino (skin). 

Dr. Wm. Pepper. Two skins of Ptarmigan. 

Purchased. Aquila chrysetos (mounted), Virginia; three skins of 
Conurus carolinensis, Florida. 

Purchased through Mr. Russell in British Guiana. Forty-two skins of 
birds and skeleton of Opisthocomus. 

Saml. N. Rhoads. Skin of Ceophloeus pileatus, Clinton Co., Pa. 

Leander Rogers. Ardea herodias, New Jersey (skin). 

John Siner. Three mounted birds. 

Dr. A. Donaldson Smith. One hundred and thirty-eight skins of birds 
and twelve nests from north-eastern Africa. 

Uselma C. Smith. Nest of Trochilus colubris. 


1896. ] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 597 


Mrs. J. M. Thomas. Pair of mounted wood ducks. 

Visitor. Twelve skins of South American birds. 

R. T. Young. Sixty-two skins of birds from Nova Scotia. 

Archiclaus Willets. Tringa maritima for D. V. O. C. Collection 
(mounted). 

Zoological Society of Philadelphia. Mounted: Ibis stictipennis, Dro- 
mius nove-hollandix, Penelope superciliaris, Chrysolophus amherstiz, 
Phasianus reevesi, Penelope sp. Skins: Callenas nicobarica, Pterocles 
arenarius, Ocyphaps lophotes, Aramides mangle, Chenopsis abrata, 
Phlogenas lugonica, Caccabis sp., Gennxus swinhoei, Cereopsis nove 
hollandiz, Chrysolophus amhherstix, Turacus buffoni, Turtur turtur. 
Skeleton : Caswarius casuarius, Olor cygnus. Skulls and sterna: Olor 
cygnus, Anhinga anhinga, Dendrocygna sp., Dacelo gigas. Egg of 
Emu. 

REPTILES AND BATRACHIANS. 


H. C. Borden. Two specimens of Rana clamitans, Pennsylvania. 

Dr. S. G. Dixon. Specimens of Bufo lentiginosus and Liopeltis vernalis, 
Maine. 

Exchange. Ten jars of reptiles, Argentina, S. A. 

E. B. Hendricks. Toad with five legs, Philadelphia. 

Philip Laurent and Dr. Castle. Twelve reptiles and batrachians from 
Enterprise, Fla. 

H. A. Pilsbry and C. W. Johnson. Specimen of Rana pipiens and 
twenty-one eggs of gopher turtle, specimen Rana sp. 

Purchased (through Mr. Russell). Specimen of Elaps lemniscatus. 

Dr. Benj. Sharp. Gonatodes albogularis, Tobago. 

Fredk. Sterns. Two lizards, Japan. 

S. N. Rhoads. Sixty-four reptiles, Pennsylvania; three from British 
Columbia. 

Dr. A. Donaldson Smith. One hundred and forty-eight reptiles from 
north-eastern Africa. 

J.S. Wills. Amblystoma opacum, New Jersey. 

H. W. Wenzel. Seventeen reptiles and batrachians from Cranberry, 
aN. °C, 

E. G. Vanatta. Hyla sp., Aromochelys odoratus, Maryland. 

Zoological Society of Philadelphia. Python reticularis, Caimon sclerops, 
Vipera ammodytes. 

Lt. Hugh Willoughby. Eggs of Florida crocodile. 


FISHES. 


Dr. H. C. Chapman, Myzine glutinosa, Petromyzon marinus and Lepido- 
siren paradoxa. 


598 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


Seth E. Meek. Two hundred and sixty-two fresh-water fish from 
Iowa, Arkansas and Indian Territory. 

Dr. A. Donaldson Smith. Collection of fish from N. E. Africa. 

Edw. H. Williams. Dried fish from Japan. 

T. W. Walmsley. One flounder in formaline. 


LOWER INVERTEBRATES. 


Alaskan Expedition (collected by Dr. Benjamin Sharp). A large 
series of marine invertebrates from coasts of Alaska and Siberia. 

F. W. Walmsley. Thirty jars of specimens from the Atlantic coast 
preserved in formaline. 

Mrs. Corlies. Case of corals. 


CRUSTACEA. 
F. W. Walmsley. Very large specimen of lobster, Newport, R. I. 


INSECTA. 


C. W. Johnson. One case of Diptera, Pennsylvania and New Jersey. 

Philip Laurent. Five cases of Neuroptera, Pennsylvania and New 
Jersey. 

Feldman Collecting Social. One case of Coleoptera, Pennsylvania 
and New Jersey. 

Dr. William Pepper. Nest of trap-door spider. 


RECENT MOLLUSCA. 


Mrs. George Andrews. Twenty-two species from Tennessee and 
Florida. 

D. D. Baldwin. Ten species Hawaiian land shells; ten bottles al- 
coholic mollusks. 

F. C. Baker. Bythinella and Vertigo from Chicago, II. , 

W. T. Bednall. Ten species of S. Australian Polyplacophora. 

Wilfred Bendall. Cerion, ete., New Providence, Bahamas. 

Charles P. Berkley. Pleistocene (shell-marl) fossils from Minnesota. 

Wesley Browning (in exchange). Limnzidz from Utah. 

Fred L. Button. Collection of slugs from Oakland, Cal., including 
types of Aphallarion Buttoni (see Proceedings, p. 339). 

Dr. R. Ellsworth Call. Carychiwm and Unio from Kentucky. 

Mrs. Julia E. Campbell. Punctum pasadenx, types. 

John H. Campbell. Two species of mollusks. 

Mrs. G. W. Carpenter. Twenty-seven species marine shells. 

L. T. Chamberlain, D. D. Seventy-nine trays of land and fresh water 
shells from Mississippi and Louisiana, collected by C. W. Johnson. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 599 


Geo. H. Clapp. Omphalina inornata Say (Albino) and other shells 
from western Pennsylvania. 

T. D. A. Cockerell. Land shells from Colorado, New Mexico and 
Mexico (see Nautilus, X, p. 59). 

Dr. J. C. Cox. Ten species of Australian mollusks. 

Wm. H. Dall. Sixteen species Californian and Lower Californian 
land shells (alcoholic). 

O. Debeaux (in exchange). Collection of N. African Helices. 

W. H. DeCamp. Bythinella from Grand Rapids, Mich. 

John Ford. Thirteen species of shells new to the collection. 

Wm. J. Fox. Two species of mollusks. 

A. H. Gardner. Eight species of Canadian shells. 

Mrs. E. M. Gaylord. Living Helices and alcoholic slugs from Oregon. 

Langdon Gibson. Six species of marine shells from Greenland. 

G. K. Gude. Corilla fryx, n. sp. 

A. W. Hanham. Five species land and fresh water shells from Can- 
ada. 

Charles Hedley. Four species Australian mollusks. 

Angelo Heilprin. One hundred and fifty-seven species of shells from 
Morocco and Bermuda. 

A. U. Henn. Specimen of Pugnus parvus Hedley, n. sp. 

H. von Ihering. Ten species of S. American snails. 

Illinois State Laboratory of Natural History. Collection of aquatic 
Gastropods from Havana, Illinois. 

W. W. Jefferis. Campeloma, Unionide and Limnzxide from New York. 

C. W. Johnson. Corbula and eleven other species from Florida (see 
also Pilsbry and Johnson). 

F. R. Latchford. Nineteen species Canadian shells. 

Miss Jennie E. Letson. Two species. 

H. Loomis (in exchange). Japanese mollusks. 

J. G. Malone. Slugs from Oregon. 

Wm. B. Marshall. Succinea from Cape May, N. J. 

E. H. Matthews. Ephippodonta, Mylitta, etc., from S. Australia. 

D. N. McCadden. Two land shells from Virginia. 

Edmund 8. Meany. Specimens of Sazicava arctica and Littorina scu- 
tulata. 

Clarence B. Moore. Four species Georgia and Florida shells. 

Geo. H. Pepper. Limnzxa bulimoides Lea (through G. H. Clapp). See 
Nautilus, X, p. 96. 

Miss Caroline Pheebus. Mya arenaria from Maryland. 

H. A. Pilsbry. Seventy-eight species fresh water and marine shells 
from Pennsylvania and Texas. 


600 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


H. A. Pilsbry and C. W. Johnson. Two hundred and fifty-three trays 
land and aquatic mollusks from the St. John’s River, Fla. 

H. A. Pilsbry and 8. N. Rhoads. One hundred and sixty-eight trays 
fossil and recent shells from White Pond, N. J., and adjacent coun- 
try. 

John Ponsonby. Seven species of Helices new to the collection (in 
exchange). See Proceedings, p. 15, etc. 

E. J. Post (in exchange). Collection of Tampa Silex beds fossils. 

P. B. Randolph. Collection of slugs, etc., from Washington. 

W. J. Raymond. ‘Types of Ischnochiton aspidaulaz. 

S. Raymond Roberts. Sixteen species of land and marine shells. 

Edw. W. Roper. Sixteen species of land shells. 

Dr. Wm. H. Rush. One hundred and three species of mollusks from 
Cape Verde Is. and South America. 

H. E. Sargent. Fifteen species Alabama mollusks. 

Dr. Benj. Sharp. Thirteen species West Indian shells. 

Morris Shick. Sixteen species local mollusks. 

Miss C. A. Shepard. Goniobasis from Florida. 

Ida M. Shepard. Collection of West Coast American shells. 

Howard Shriver. Seven species land shells from Maryland. 

Edw. Simpson. Two species marine shells. 

Dr. Henry Skinner. Eight species of land shells from North Carolina. 

Dr. A. Donaldson Smith. Seven species African shells. 

U. C. Smith. Shells from Jamaica. 

Frederick Stearns. Twenty species Japanese mollusks. 

Dr. V. Sterki. Four species Ohio mollusks. 

C. P. Streator. Three species from Cayman Is. 

L. H. Streng. Bythinia, etc., from Michigan. 

KE. R. Sykes. Eight species of Chiton from Port Phillip, Australia. 

Rey. Geo. W. Taylor. Three species British Columbian shells. 

Tennessee Expedition, collected by 8. N. Rhoads. Five hundred and 
fourteen trays of mollusks, mainly from Tennessee. 

Lancaster Thomas. Five species land shells, North Carolina. 

E. G. Vanatta. Thirteen species shells from Maryland. 

H. D. Van Nostrand. Fifty-two species of West Indian land shells 
(through 8. Raymond Roberts). 

Dr. J. W. Velie. Thirteen species Florida shells with types of Mar- 
ginella Veliei (see Proceedings, p. 21). 

Bryant Walker. Forty-five species from Michigan. 

Robert Walton Collection, 176 species. 

A.G. Wetherby. Twenty-four species land shells from North Carolina. 

H. W. Wenzel. Six species land shells from Cranberry, N. C. 


1896.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 601 


J. J. White. Eight species Florida shells. 

Joseph Willcox. Thirty-five trays of Fulgur, etc. 

Mrs. M. Burton Williamson. Five species Californian mollusks. 

B. H. Wright. Four species Florida mollusks. 

Young Naturalists’ Society, Seattle, Wash. Collection of marine shells. 

Purchased by the Academy of Natural Sciences and the Conchological 
Section: Two hundred and ninety-one species new to the collection ; 
also a small collection made hy G. F. Russell in British Guiana. 


INVERTEBRATE FOossits. 


Uselma C. Smith. Thirty-nine trays of fossil mollusca from Jamaica. 
VERTEBRATE FOSSILS. 


Dr. 8S. G. Dixon and Henry C. Mercer. A large collection of mam- 
malian remains from the deposit at Port Kennedy, Pa. 


PLANTS. 


Dr. Aldridge. Seven species of North American plants. 

Lucien H. Alexander. Thirty-five species of Hawaiian Island ferns. 

George M. Beringer. Six species of North American plants. 

Stewardson Brown. Three hundred and seventy-five species of Ha- 
waiian Island plants and twenty species of Underwood and Cook’s 
Hepatice americane. 

George F. Eaton. One hundred and seventy-two species Sphagna 
Boreali-Americana Exsiccati. 

J. B. Ellis. Centuries 34 and 35 of North American fungi. 

Benjamin Heritage. Seven species of North American plants. 

W. W. Jefferis. Five species of North American plants. 

Charles Lippincott. Specimen of Grindelia squarrosa.. 

Thomas Meehan. Forty species of North American plants, two hun- 
dred and nine species of Mexican plants collected by Pringle, and 
two hundred and forty-one species of Asia Minor plants collected by 
Bornmiiller. 

Miss Rex. Five hundred species of Myxomycetes, Collection of Dr. 
G. A. Rex. 

Benjamin H. Smith. Specimen of Rhamnus smithii. 

Uselma C. Smith. Ninety species of Jamaica ferns. 

Baron Ferdinand Von Miiller (through Mr. Meehan). Thirty-five 
species of Australian plants. 


MINERALS, Etc. 


Alaska Expedition (collected by Dr. Benjamin Sharp). Five speci- 
mens of minerals, Alaska. 
Fesquet Estate. Fourteen boxes of minerals and ores. 


602 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1896. 


German Kali Works. Salts from Strassfurt Mine. 

L. A. Gettys. Monagite. 

Geographical Club. Twenty-three trays of rocks from Greenland. 

E. A. Groth. Two specimens of minerals. 

John C. Johnson. Kaolinite and limonite. 

Benj. Smith Lyman. Jade. 

Gibson H. Prindle. Meteorite and small collection of minerals. 

Theo. D. Rand. Singing sand, Massachusetts. 

J. E. Richardson. Thinolite, Nevada. 

Dr. H. A. Slocum. Small collection from Nova Scotia. 

Joseph Walton. Marcasite and galena, Kansas. 

Chas. J. Wister. Collection of minerals from various localities. 

Wm. S. Vaux Fund. One hundred and eighty-five specimens of min- 
erals for the William S. Vaux Collection. 


NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 


INDEX TO GENERA, ETC. 
1896. 


| Antrostomus 


Apella 
Aphallarion . 
Aphilanthops . 
Apidee 
Apis . 


| Apterogyna 
_ Arctomys 


Arctotherium . 
Ariolimax . 
Arion 
Arionids 


| Arisema . 
| Artiodactyla 


| Astatus . 
| Aster’ . 
| Aulacopoda 


Aspilota 
Astarte . 
32, 33, 87, 
Auricula 
Atalapha 
Ataxus . : 
Bactrodesmus . 
Balanus . 

Balea 

Barissia . 
Basilicus 


| Belonogaster 


Bembex . 
Berberis . 
Bidens 
Bigelovia 32, 33, 


Bison 
Blarina . 


| Boerhaayia 


1896.] 
Acanthocalcis 37 
Acanthodactylus . 466 
Acanthis 140 
Aceratherium . BPs OF 
Achatina 414, 416 
Achatinella 494, 429 
Acomayreees . 5 | (OAT, 529 
Adelonycteris . . 204, 291, 517 
Agama . : 311, 462 
Agapostemon. . . . 358-40 
Agelaius edge EF) 134 
Agnatha : . 488 
Alasmodonta . 505, 506 
Allodape 557 
Amauropsis Ba) ATA. 
Amiva ; 312, 465 
Ammodesmus . + 257 
Ammodramus 111, 114, 116, 139 
142, 143 
Ammophila . 902 
Amnicola 397 
Amnicolid 495 
Ampelis 3 154 
Amphisbeena . 313 
Amphisbeenide . 467 
Anadia . 312, 465 
Anaptogonia fe BOP S80 
Anculosa 496, 497, 499, 500 
Ancylus 494 | 
Andrena 33, 38, 40, Gil 81 
Angitrema . 496 
Anguis . Sage | 
Anisodesmus . 260, 263 | 
Anniella 466 
Anniellide . i 3) 46644 
Anodonta 506, 569 | 
Anolis . 309, 463 | 
Anthidium. . 34 | 
Anthophora 34, 37, “40, 97, 555 
Anthus . 163 | 


Bombus . 
Bovide . 
Boysidia 
Bruta 


: 398, 408, 452 


603 


130 
te eat 
. 339-349 

35, 37 
555 
559 
547 
193 
2 SISOS 
. 339-349 

340 


38, 497, 


38, 41, 60, 94 
488 


203 
426 
260 


86, 37, 4 
62, 78, 


40, 41, 
82-99 

176 
185, 202 


604 


| 
| 


Bubalis . 518 
Bubo 515 | 
Bulla 208 | 
Bulimulidee se 2498 
Bulimulus . 397-446, 493 
Bulimus ob ae os 
Calliopsis . 80, 34, 40 
Callisaurus . ; 463 
Callopistes . 312 
Calotes . 462 
Campeloma 495 
Campodesmus . 257 
Campolemus . = biewr ELS 
Cancellaria . 475, 476 
Canidee . 199 
Canis . "200, 544 | 
Cardinalis nee 117, 1338, 139, 146 | 
Cariacus 393 
Caricella 479 | 
Carnivora : _ 197, 883, 504 
Carpodacus i: "tut j ttre Bh ELOD 
Cassidaria . my te ATO 
Castor 192, 378 
Castoridee 2 ch lg 
Celastrus 214, 216, 217 
Celestus . il ei esl ne Oe 
Cenchrodesmus 5? a pe 
Centropyx . 812, 465 
Ceophleeus . 7 oe eLeD 
Ceratina 556 
Cercopithecus . 546 | 
Cereus 396 
Cerion "815-338 | 
Ceriphasia . ‘; «9 ASE 
Cervicapra . 519 
Cervidae 179 | 
Cervus te gs ALS 
Ceryle , ee ee 
Cheetura » 116, TAT aSe 
Chalicomys sinh Ladene te 
Chalicotherium =: poet ROO 
Chameeleon 309, 311 
Chameeleonidee . 461, 462 
Chameesaracha . 85, 65, 66 
Chauliougnathus . <a ee 
Chelidon 154, 155 
Cheirodesmus . 259 
Chilina . 561 
Chilinidee 561 
Chilonopsis 418 
Chiroptera . 203 
Chondrophora 33 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF 


[1896 

Chordeiles . 130 
Choridesmus . 261 
Chrysopsis . 87, 95, 96 
Circinaria . 488 
Circinariidee 488 
Cirrus 10; i 
Cistothorus . 164 
Cladothrix . 32, 33, 82 
Clemmys . 378 
Cleome . 34, 35, 39, 42, 69, 70 
Cleostyla : 418 
Clerus 37 
Clivicola ‘te ee 
Cnemidophorus 312, 465 
Coassus . 393, 294 
Coccyzus : cone 
Coelioxys ., Sen 
Colaptes . 115, 116, 130 
Colletes . 35, “40, 66, 97, 555 
Colobus . 546 
Comodesmus "258, 262 
Com psodesmus 261, 264 
Compsothlypis 158, 159 
Contopus . . 132 
Conulus 400, 403, 405, 495, 448 
Cophias 461, 466 
Corbicula ‘ 562 
Coreopsis 39, 60 
Corvus . 132, 133 
Coryth ophanes ol 
Cosila : 549, 550 
Covillea <) ee 
Cratsegus 214 
Cricetodon . 507 
Crocidura 545 
| Crocisa . 550 
Crocuta . 392 
Crossidius 37 
Crotaphytus . 465 
| Croton 34, 65 
Ctenosaura 463, 464 
Cyanocitta . < 116, 182 
Cyclura . : 311, 463, 464 
Cylichna 208 
Cylindrella . 412 
Cyllene . 479 
Cynailurus . 543 
Cynedesmus . pion aD 
Cypreea . 815 474, 477 
Cyprenide . «, wee kee 
Cyrenidse 562 


1896.] 


NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 


Damaliscus Lrelee,| 
Daucus . 1 BG 
Deilephila . reser 
Dendroica . _ 157-161 
Dendromys 535 
Diacerion 526 | 
Diabase . 219 
Diadasia 35, 53 
Dicrocerus . 507 
Didelphis 176 
Didelphyide 176 
Dinocyon 507 | 
Diplarthra . 393 
Diploglossa . 464 
Diploglossine . 461 | 
Dipsosaurus 463 
Discodesmus . . 4 258 
Dolichonyx 111, 115, “116, 133 
Dorcelaphus 179 | 
Doryphorus : ns pict 463 
Dracena : 309, 312, 465 
Dryobates . . 116, 128, 129 
Ecphopus : Hie: 9466 
Elasmognathea . 493 
Elephas . ah We xO 
Elgaria . 464, 467 
Elimia Miele. 496 
Elis . 801-807, 549 | 
Elodea : 212 
Empidonax 91382 
Endodonta . “416, 417 
Endodontide . 340, 489 
Enyalioides 463, 464 | 
Epeolus te 25, 39, 40 | 
Epomidiopteron . 298 
Erinaceus "507, 544 
Erithizon Wile, ols 
Equus . . 520, 567 
Eublepharis sage AGF 
Eucera . 55d 
Eumeces 466 
Euchirotes . 313 
Eumenes DA | 
Eucheilodon 471 
Eumenide . 554 
Euprepis 466 
Eurypaurus Slaw es (26 
Eyotomys 184, 186, 381 | 
Felidz 201 | 
Felis . 201, 378, 542, 548 
Fiber. 186 | 
Filaria 271-275 | 


605 

Fusus 472, 478, 479, 496 
Galeoscoptes 163 
Gastrodonta 489 
Gaultheria . 214 
Gazella . 2 Lo 
Gecconide . “464, 465 
Genetta . : erst | 45 
Geothlypis . ‘ 157, 158, 162 
Gerbillus 536-538 
Gerrhosauridse 466 
Gerrhosaurus . 466 
Gerrhonotine . 464 
Gerrhonotus 464, 467 
Giraffa Seely 
Glabaris . : 563-569 

| Glires:. geet aeee ss oe nae fee 
Glotella 496 
Golunda ‘ 534 
Goniobasis . : 496, 499 
Gutierrezia 32, 35, 36, 61, 83, 85 
86, 91, 92 

Gynnodactylus 464 
| Gypsodesmus . 261 
Gyrotoma : Dm seh BREE 
Habia . 124, 139, 147 
| Habrodesmus. . 261, 265 
| Halictus 33, 38, 40, 53, 66, 81, 91 
Haminea 208 
Haplogale . 507 
Harpa . 472 
Harporhynchus 163, 164 
Helenoconcha . (ALG 
Helicidse : "490 
Helicina 399-406, 451, 494 
Helicinide . . . . AQA 
Helianthus 88, 41, 48, 69, 104, 106 
Helioryctus. AP Diet 
Helix 23, 398, 414, 415, 420, 425 
448 

Helmintherus . 159 
Helminthophila 158 
Helmitherus ; Sealsyé 
Heloderma . 309, 811, 312 
Helodermatoidea . Sie kOe 
Helodesmus 262, 263 
Helogale 543 

_ Heriades 97 
Hercodesmus . Mere eos 
_ Herpestes : 507, 543 
Heterocephalus 539-541 
Heteroclonium 466 
| Hippopotamus 518 


606 


Holbrookia 
Holopoda 
Holospira 
Holstonia 
Homo 
Hyena . 
Hyalinia 
Hydrocotyle 
Hylobates 
Hyotherium 


Hypselostoma . 


Icteria 


Icterus 111, 116, 124, 133, 


Iguana . 
Iguanidee 
Tlex 
Insectivora . 
ome we 
Ischnochiton 
Tsodesmus . 
Juga . 
Junco 
Juncus 
Kobus 
Lacerta . 
Lacertilide . 
Lagomys 


Lampodesmus . 


Lanius 
Larrea 
Larus 
Lasionycteris 
Latastia . 
Latirus . 
Leda . : 
Lepachys °. 
Lepas : 
Lepidothyris 
Leporidee 
Leptinaria . 
Lepus 
Leucocheila 
Levifusus 
Limacidee 
Limax 
Limicolaria 
Limniea 
Limneide . 
Limneidse 
Limnophila 
Lindera . 


399-406, 425, 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF 


463 

490 

412 

497 

205 

548 
“495, 447 
35, 59 
507 
507 
418 
162 
136 
137 
464 
463 
214 
201 
497 
22 


463, 


_ 187, 496, 


260 | 


496 


145 | 
183 | 


519 
466 
466 
507 
261, 264 

~  s) AIGH 56 
. 30, 84, 62-64 
515 

205 


“461, 


466 | 


472, 476 
. 38, 106 
208 
466 
181 
451 
352-376, 378, 542 
478, 47¢ 
7) 86S 
420, 489 

418 


"408, 493 


493 
561 
493 
214 


470 | 


446 | 


[1896 
Liocephalus . . 463 
Liolepis . . 462 
Lioplax . 495 
Lipodesmus . 263 
Liris 553 
Listriodon . . 2 ae 
Lithasia . . 496, 497 
Lithocranius . sees 
Lophiomys 524 
Lophuromys. . 534 
Dosis: 2 2; 140 
Ineine ss SS 3 eee 
Lutra . . 197, 385, 391, 392, 504 
Lutreola - 2 4 €or 
Lyceena . en 
Lynx ae 201, 378 
Lyrodesmus . . 259 
Mabuia . 466 
Macacus 485 
Macheerodus. . 507 
Macroscelides 545 
| Mactra . a 
Madoqua . 518, 519 
Magnolia 2 
Margaritana . 505 
| Marginella 21 
Marsupialia . . 176 
Mastodon . 507 
Mazzalina . — 473 
Megachile 40, 557, 558 
Megaderma j 0 ee 
Megalochilus 311 
Megalonyx 7 
Megara . 496 
Molafusus . . . ¢ 0° oS ae 
Melampus . . 398, 403, 405, 452 
Melanatria 269 
Melanerpes 129 
Melania . 496 
Melasma 496 
Meleagris .. 88 
Melecta . . 34, 97 
Melissodes . 5, 38, 40 
Mellivora . . O44 
Melospiza 111, 116, 139, 141, 
145, 185 
Mentzelia . 32, 35, 61, 62 
Mephitis 199, 385-391 
Meretrix 470, 477 
Merula 165 
Microdactylus . 466 
Microlophus . 463 


1896.] 


39 | 


NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 


Micromeryx . . Tl hatien DANE 
Microtus 183-185, 379, 381-383 
Mimodesmus 264 
Mimus 163 
Miscophus ia Oe 
Mniotilta Bs om vee pups ene 
Molothrus. .. . 116,117, 134 
Molybdenite . . 210 
Monoceras 473 
Monopeltis S94 eae CAE 
Motacilla E Be 26 
Murex nes 473, 446 
Mus . 192, 580-533 
Musca : BP a DY: 
Mustela . . - 198, 199 
Mustelide . sg alee 
Mutelide . Ase) | OOo. 
Mutilla 547-549 
Mutillidee 547 
Miyaie. 2. Weer ss 
Myiarchus Feb lG, Lod 
Myoxus. . der, OOF 
Myxine .. . 294, 297 
Myxodesmus ea ts Or 
Neesiotus , . 426, 427 
Napodesmus . . . 265, 267 
Natica 480 
Neotoma 192 
Nesiotes . . . « 426 
Nomia 40, 555 
Notogonia . . 9d3 
Nycteris 517 
Nycticejus . stich). 204 
Nyctisaura . 462, 464 
Odynerus 97, 550 
Omphalina : 488 
Omphalostyla. 426, 427 | 
Onchidella . 398, 399, 405, 455 
Onchidium 403-405 
Opeas.. . ey ee as 
Ophidia . . . 461, 462 
Ophisaurus 465 | 
Opuntia . 396 | 
Orasema 37 
Oreosaurus 312 
Oreotragus 519 
Orgyia 12 
Orthotomium 428 
Oryx : 519 | 
Osmotherium 385 
Ostreea : cit 208 
Otocoris . SohGe 117, 132, 133 


607 
Otomys . . eel Oe 
Oxybelus . 97, 554 
Oxydesmus . 260, 263 
Pachnodus 418 
Pachycheilus 269 
Pachychilus . . Urey. AOI, 
Pachyglossa .. .. . 462, 464 
Pachyotus . . 416, 418--423 
Palzeolodus Ray cues’, FON. 
Paleomeryx . . 507 
Paleortyx .. . 514 
Palndima, 2. : 397 
Panopeawe eat + «= 12, «408 
Panurgus . . 88--40 
Papillina . 474, 475 
Partula . 415 
Parus . Se 7: 164 
Passerella ... . ea el 26 
Passerina : 116. 139, tol 
Patula . 416, 417 
Pecten rer 470 
Pectinator . . . 43,0 3042 
Pectis . . . 82, , 89, 82, 915,92 
Pedipes . .. 398, 403, 405, 452 
Pelecanus .. . 512 
Pelecostom: . . 426 
Pelecypoda 500 
|-Pelodesmus: .. ..,3iac 266 
Pelycictis . 390 
Perdita ; . 25--107 
| Perido-Steatite . 219 
Periploma. . . 471 
Perissodactyla 507 
Perisoreus . 5 182 
Peromyscus . 184, 187--191 
Petrochelidon 155 
Phacocherus .. . 518 
Binlanthus:, 25, 24 eae 
Philomycide 489 
Philomycus : 489 
Phrynosoma. . 311, 463 
Phyllodactylus.- <. 2 4.55 264 
Phymata 37, 38, 39, 43, 104 
Physa 494 
Physidee 494 
Physignathus D castes aon 
iphilinrsy;” = wks 6 ante yetemete 
Pinicola . <.. 140 
Pipilo 146 


Piranga 113, 115, 116, , 124, 152 
Pisidium ; Hie Rood 
Plagiodesmus 264 


608 
Planorbis . 498, 561, 562 
Platydactylus ... . 461, 464 
Plectrophenax 112, 115, 116, 

119, 141 
Plenoculus 30 
Plesiosorex reas. 
Pleurocera 496--498 
Pleuroceride . . . . A495 
Pleurotoma . 471, 475, 478, 480 
Pleurotomaria . OP tt 
Pleurotrema . is 
Plicatula 1i 
Polioptila . . 165 
Polistes . eae OOD 
Polychrus . - 309, 311, 463 
Polygyra . 15- 19, 490--493 
Polygyratia 415 
Pomatiopsis . 495 | 
Pompilidee 550 
Pompilus 550 
Pooczetes 141 
Potamotherium oe RRS 
Prepodesmus . 258, 268 
Primates 205 
Proboscidea . 507 
Procavia 520 
Procyon 197 
Procyonidee 197 
Progne er, 
Pronodesmus 266, 267 
Prophysaon 341 
Prosobranchiata ..... 494 
Prosopis . . . 38, 34, 40, 81, 97 
Protocardia 'AT75 
Protragoceros 507 
Pseudopis . 464 
Pseudopus 311 
Pseudoliva 478 
Pseudoconomys 531 
Pterodesmus . . . 52 Ge 
Puffinus 509--512 | 
Pugnus 208 
Pulmonata 2 S88 
Pupa . 399--406, » 415-418, 446 
Pupide . .. SRS 
Putorius AP? ES 
Pyramidula 489, 490 | 
Pyropsis . ihn oe 
Quiscalus . 114--117, 1389 
Ranularia . 479 
Regenia . 310 
Regulus . 165 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF 


Rhaphiellus . 426 
Rhineiira 313 
Rhinoceros 520 
Rhipidoglossa 494 
Rhiptoglossa . 462 
Rhizomys . . 542 
Rbynchium . 55d 
Ringicula . : iS ae 
Rodentia 181, 507 
Rostellaria 478 
Sagda. . 23, 24 
Salius . 551 
Salix . 33 
Sauria : oe 
Sauromalus . - » 4638, 464 
Saxifraga : 360 
Sayornis 131 
Scalops . 201 
Sceliphron 552 
Sceloporus 463 
Schizocheilus 497 
Schizostoma . / ae 
Scincidae . 462, 466 
Sciuridee 193 
Sciuropterus . 197 


Sciurus 116, 157, 161, 194. 


197, 507, 521, 522 

| Scolecophagus . : 117, 138 
Scolia. . 298-800, 549 

Scoliidae . 649 

Scolodesmus . . 261, 265 

Scolopendrella . 226 

| Scotophilus 517 
Scutalus 427 

Scytodesmus . 263 

Senecio . . 59, 94 

Sericophorus 554 

Setophaga . . 158, 163 

| Sialia. 165 
| Siaphus . 313 
Sipho . . 476 

Siphonalia_. . . 21, 473 

Siphonaria - 399, 403, 405, 453 

Sisymbrium . 39 

Sitta 164 

Solanum 214 

Solariella a 

Solarium 477, 480 


Solidago 82, 36, 39, 41, 60, 69- 
73, 92, 97 
495 
202 


Somatogyrus 
Sorex . 


1896.] 


Soricidee . 202 
Spheeralcea 85, 58, 67, 68 
Spheerium . ps 4500 
Sphzerophth alma . 28, 37 
Sphecidae . 551 
Sphecius 5d2 
Sphecodes . 41 
Sphex ee etre aan) OO 
Sphyrapicus . . abt. 129 
Spins: . 5. < eae 139--141 
Spizella . . _ 116, 139, 144, 145 
Steatomys . ay!) 
Stegodesmus. . . _ 266, 267 
Stelgidopteryx . . 154, 156 
Stenogyra . . 415, 416 
Stiodesmus 262 
Strephobasis . 496, 498 499 
Strepsiceros . 019,520 
-Streptanthus. . 39 
Strophia 315 
SEROMEeSe >... ..-. 318 | 
Sturnella . . 112, 115--117, 1385 | 
Stylodesmus . . 261 
Subulina . . 425 
Succinea 399, 400, 403, 405, 406 
416, 417, 448, 493 
Succineide . 493 
Sylvania 112, 157, 158, 162, 163 
Synagris : ” 564. 
Synaptomys . . E 183, 184 
Tachea .. .. 425 
Tachycineta 116, Anz, 133, 
154, 155 
Tachyrhostus 554 
Tachysphex . 554 
Taenioglossa . . 495 | 
Talpa . 507 
Talpide . 201 
Tamias . 193 
Tantalus : 513 
Tanydesmus. . 264 
Tapinoma . 36 
Tejus . ae 312 
Telescopella Pa pues, >. JAG 
Tellina . 471, 477 
Tetraclita . F 208 
Thaumastus . . 427 
Thecadactylus . 464 
Thecaglossa 462 
Thelydesmus_. 258 
Thryothorus. . 164 
Thysanophora . 24 


NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 


609 
Tiidae > ast 4G 
Tiliqua . . 808, 3138 
Tiphia 297, 298 
Tomigerus 415-417 
Trachysaurus . nee E466 
Tralia . _ 898, 403, 405, 452 
Tremarctus Ba. OO. 
Tribulus . 82,3 34, 83 
Trigona . 559 
Tringa 515 
| Triton : 479 
Trochilus . . ois % 117, 131 
Trochomorpha 397, 400, 408, 
405, 447 
Troglodytes 164 
Tropidesmus . . 257 
Trypanostoma ...... 496 
Tupinambis . . 309, 312, 465 
Turdus : 165 
Tylodesmus . . 259 
Tyrannus . Ley pee lon 
Udodesmus . 262, 265 
Uneray= =]. «2 9392 
Ungulata . . 176 
Unio 187, 488, 500-505, 569, 570 
Unionidae . . 500, 567 
Uraniscodon . ; 4638 
Urocyon tog 
Uromastix 462 
Ursidee hig OL cee ee OO) 
| Ursus . . 199, 378, 3838, 384 
Varanidae . 461 


Varanus. . _ 309, 310, 312, 461 
Verbesina 32, 33, 36, 44, 91, 
99-106 
Vespertilio . 203, 204, 291 
Vespertilionidee 208 
Vesperugo 204 
Vespidae - ; 555 
Vireo. . ia 156, 157 
Vitrea 400, 403, 405, 406, 
448, 488 
Vitrinizonites 489 
Viverra . 507 
Vivipara 495 
Viviparide . 495 
Volutilithes . 478 
Volvox 233 
Vulpes 200 
Wedelia 32, 33, 83 


Williamia 398, 399, tee 405, 453 
Xantusiidse 465 


610 


Xerus 


Xiphocercus . 


Xylocopa . 
Xyodesmus 
Zamenis 
Zanthopygia 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF 


523 | Zapus 
. 2 463°) Zonites 
. 555, 556 | Zonitide 
262 | Zonotrichia 
_. . 878 | Zonuridse 
. 124, 126 | Zonurus 


[1896. 


184 
447 


. , 840, 425, 488 


. 189, 148, 144 
464 
312 


1896.] 


NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 


611 


GENERAL INDEX. 


1896. 


Additions to Museum, 5995. 
Allen, Harrison, M. D. A note 


on a uniform plan of describing | 
A 
biographical sketch of John | 
The ulna | 


the human skull, 168, 170. 


Adam Ryder, 222. 
of the common brown bat, 291. 


The bones, muscles and teeth | 


of Tarsius fusco-manus, 560 (in 
next volume). 


Anthropological Section, report | 


of, 588. 

Balch, Edwin §S. 
the causes of subterranean ice 
(no abstract), 560. 

Ball, M. V., M.D. Report of Bio- 
logical and Microscopical Sec- 
tion, 580. 

Bascom, Florence. Perido-Stea- 
tite and Diabase, 219. 

Biological and Microscopical Sec- 
tion, report of, 580. 

Botanical Section, report of, 583. 

Brinton, Daniel G., M.D. Report 


Ice-Caves and | 


of the Professor of Ethnology | 


and Archeology, 589. 


Brot, Aug. L., announcement of | 


death of, 566. 


Brown, Amos P. The crystalliza- | 


tion of Molybdenite, 168, 210. 
Brown, Arthur Erwin. The oc- 


currence of Macacus leoninus | 


(Blyth) in Eastern Burmah, 485. 
Brown, Stewardson. Report of Bo- 
tanical Section, 583. 
Capellini, Giovanni, conferring of 
Hayden Memorial Award on, 
483. 
Castillo, Antonio del, announce- 
ment of death of, 12. 


40 


( 


| Dall, William 


Chapman, Henry C., M. D. Re- 
port of Curators, 577. 

Cockerell, T. D. A. The bees of 
genus Perdita F. Smith, 25. 

Committees, Standing, for 1896, 9. 

Concbological Section, report of, 
O81. 

Conarroe, George M., announce- 
ment of death of, 468. 


Cook, O. F. Summary of new 
Liberian Polydesmide, 206, 
257. 


Cope, Edw. D. The mesenteries 
of the Sauria, 290, 308. New 
and little known mammalia 
from the Port Kennedy bone 
deposit, 377, 378. The hemi- 
penes of the Sauria, 377, 461. 

Corresponding Secretary, report 
of, 574. 

Curators, report of, 577. 

Healey. Insular 

land-shell faunas, as illustrated 

especially by the data obtained 
by Dr. G. Baur in the Galapagos 


Islands, (Plates XV, XVI, 
XVII), 377, 395. 
Dobson, George Edward, an- 


nouncement of death of, 12. 

Dolley, Charles S., M. D. The 
Planktonokrit, a centrifugal ap- 
paratus for the volumetric esti- 
mation of the food supply of 
oysters and other aquatic ani- 
mals, 268, 276. , 

Elections during 1896, 593. 

Ellis, J. B., and B. M. Everhardt. 
New species of fungi from va- 
rious localities, 377 (in next 
volume). 


612 


Entomological Section, report of, 
582. 


Ford, Henry C., announcement of | 


death of, 468. 

Fox, William J. Contributions to 
a knowledge of the Hymenop- 
tera of Brazil, No. 1, Scoliide, 
290, 292. The Hymenoptera 


collected by Dr. A. Donaldson - 


Smith in Northeast Africa, 469, 
547. 

Frazer, Dr. Persifor. Two sup- 
posed new trap dykes in Chester 
Co., Penna. 206. Appoint- 
inent as delegate to the 7th 
International Congress of Geol- 
ogists, 220. 

General Index, 611. 

Gilbert, Samuel H., announce- 
ment of death of, 207. 

Goodman, H. Ernest, M. D., an- 
nouncement of death of, 168. 

Gorgas, A. C., M. D., announce- 
ment of death of, 9. 

Green, Alexander H., announce- 
ment of death of, 484. 


Gundlach, Juan, announcement | 


of death of, 207. 

Haines, R. B., announcement of 
death of, 9. 

Harris, Gilbert D. New and in- 


teresting Eocene mollusca from | 


the Gulf States (Plates X VIII, 
EX, SOR OT EL, anid: 
XXITD), 470. 

Hartzell, J. G., Jr. The minerals 
of South Carolina, 206 (not pub- 


lished). 

Hayden Geological Memorial 
Committee for 1896, 221. Re- 
port of, 483. 

Hazlehurst, Henry, announce- 


ment of death of, 168. 

Heilprin, Angelo, appointment as 
delegate to the Mining and Geo- 
logical Millennial Congress at 
Budapest, 220. Report of the 
Professor of Geology, 589. 

Henry, Fred. D., M. D., Remarks 
on Filaria, 268, 271. 

Hunt, Wm., M. D., announce- 
ment of death of, 220. 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF 


[1896. 
Index to Genera, 603. 


| Jefferis, Wm. W. Report of the 


the Curator of the William S. 
Vaux Collections, 591. 

Jordan, David Starr. A collection 
of fishes made by the Rey. 
Joseph Seed Roberts in Kings- 
ton, Jamaica, 290 (in next vol- 
ume). 

Kellar, Ida A. The coloring mat- 
ter of the aril of Celastrus scan- 
dens, 168, 212. 

Leeds, Morris E., and J.S. Stokes. 
Communication on Roentgen 
photography (no abstract), 206. 

Lewis, Samuel G., M. D., an- 
nouncement of death of, 10. 


| Librarian, report of, 575. 


Meehan, Thomas. Contributions 
to the life history of plants, No. 
XIT, 168 (withdrawn by author). 
Report of the Botanical Section, 
583. 

Mineralogical and Geological Sec- 
tion, report of, 585. 

Moore, Clarence B. Certain abo- 
riginal mounds of the Georgia 
coast, 566 (for the Journal). 

Morris, Charles. Report of the 
Anthropological Section, 588. 

Mueller, Ferdinand von, an- 
nouncement of death of, 486. 

Nolan, Edw. J., M. D. Report of 
Recording Secretary, 571. Re- 
port of Librarian, 575. 

Officers, etc., for 1897, 593. 

Orgyia leucostigma, extermina- 
tion of, 12. 

Ornithological Section, report of, 
586. 


| Pilsbry, H. A. New species of 


the Helicoid Genus Polygyra 
(Plates II and III), 10, 15. 
Pleurotomaria crotaloides Mor- 
ton in the New Jersey Creta- 
ceous (Plate I), 10. Descriptions 
of new species of Mollusks, 12, 
21. Onacollection of barnacles, 
208. Pugnus parvus, 208. A 
remarkable Central American 
Melanian, 220, 269. New spe- 
cies of fresh water mollusks 


1896.] 


from South America, 486, 561. 
Geology of the mussel-bearing 
clays of Fish House, N. J., 486, 
567. Description of new South 
American Bulimuli, 566. Re- 
port of the Conchological Sec- 
tion, 581. Report of the Pro- 
fessor in the Department of 
Mollusca, 590. 


Pilsbry, Henry A., and Samuel | 


N. Rhoads. Contributions to 
the Zoology of Tennessee, No. 4. 
Mollusks, 468, 561. 

Pilsbry, H. A., and E.G. Vanatta. 
Catalogue of the species of Cer- 


ion, with descriptions of new | 
forms (Plate XI), 268, 315. | 


Revision of the slugs of North 
America: Ariolimax and Aphal- 
larion (Plate XII), 290, 239. 

Professor in the Department of 
Insecta, report of, 591. 


Professor in the Department of | 


Mollusca, report of, 590. 


Professor of Ethnology and Arche- | 


ology, report of, 589. 

Professor of Geology, report of, 
589 

Professor of Invertebrate Zoology, 
report of, 590. 

Rand, Theo. D. The serpentines 
of Eastern Pennsylvania, 219. 
Mica schists of the Schuylkill 
River, 484. Report of the Min- 
eralogical and Geological Sec- 
tion, 586. 

Recording Secretary, report of, 
571. 

Report of the Anthropological 
Section, 588. 

Report of Biological and Micro- 
scopical Section, 580. 

Report of the Botanical Section, 
583. 

Report of the Conchological Sec- 
tion, 581. 

Report of Corresponding Secre- 
tary, 574. 

Report of the Curator of the Wil- 
liam S. Vaux Collections, 591. 

Report of Curators, 577. 


NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 


613 


Report of the Entomological Sec- 
tion, 582. 

Report of Librarian, 575. 

Report of the Mineralogical and 
Geological Section, 585. 

Report of Ornithological Section, 
586. 


Report of the Professor in the 
Department of Insecta, 591. 
Report of the Professor in the 
Department of Mollusca, 590. 
| Report of the Professor of Ethnol- 

| ogy and Archeology, 589. 

Report of the Professor of Geology, 
589. 

Report of the Professor of Inverte- 
brate Zoology, 590. 

Report of Recording Secretary, 
571. 

Rhoads, Samuel N. Contribu- 
tions to the Zoology of Tennes- 
see, No. 3, Mammals, 12, 175. 
A revision of the Polar Hares 
of North America (Plates VI, 
VIL, VII, [X and X), 220, 351. 
Mammals collected by Dr. A. 
Donaldson Smith during his 
expedition to Lake Rudolf, 
Africa (Plate XXV), 468, 517. 

| Rothermel, Peter F., announce- 

' ment of death of, 168. 

Rutter, Cloudesley. <A collection 
of fishes obtained at Swatow, 
China, by Miss Adele M. Fielde, 
290 (in next volume). 

Ryder, John Adam, biographical 
sketch of, 222. 

Sallé, Auguste, announcement of 
death of, 268. 

| Sharp, Benjamin, M. D. Second 

communication on Alaska and 

Siberia (no abstract), 10. Re- 

port of Corresponding Secre- 

tary, 574. Report of the Pro- 
fessor of Invertebrate Zoology, 

590. 

| Shufeldt, BR: W., M. D. Dr. 

Collett on the morphology of 

the cranium and the auricular 

openings in the north European 
species of the Family Strigide, 


614 


208 (not published). Fossil 
bones of birds and mammals 
from Grotto Pietro Tamponi and 
Grive-St. Alban (Plate XXIV), 
468, 507. 

Skinner, Henry, M. D. Report of 
the Entomological Section, 582. 
Report of the Professor in the 
Department of Insecta, 591. 

Skinner, Henry, M. D., and Wm. 
J. Fox. Report on extermina- 
tion of Tussock Moth, 12. 

Smith, A. Donaldson, Communi- 
cations on collections presented 
by, (no abstract), 268. 

Stone, Witmer. The molting of 
birds with special reference to 
the plumage of the smaller 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF 


(1896, 


birds of Eastern North America 
(Plates IV and V), 12,108. Re- 
port of the Ornithological Sec- 
tion, 586. 

Wachsmuth, Charles, announce- 
ment of death of, 168. 

Walton, Jesse 8., announcement 
of death of, 168. 

Whitney, Josiah Dwight, an- 
nouncement of death of, 484. 
William §S. Vaux Collections, re- 

port of the Curator, 591. 
Wistar, Isaac J., resolution of 
appreciation tendered to, 10. 
Appointment as delegate to Kel- 
vin Jubilee, 208. 
Wister, Owen Jones, M. D., an- 
nouncement of death of, 168. 


PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1896. PLA 


PILSBRY. PLEUROTOMARIA CROTALOIDES Mort. 


PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA., 1896. PLATE II. 


6 
“a . Zh 
—— 
f Fe 
é : an 
d = a, 
. 
i 
\ 
S if 4 
\ fo og 
X se 
X 
ee ————— 
8 


PILSBRY. NEW SPECIES OF POLYGYRA. 


PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA, 1896. 


PLATE III. 


PILSBRY. NEW SPECIES 


16 


OF POLYGYVRA. 


PLATE IV 


PROG. ACAD: NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1896. 


o 


<X\\\ 


loge 


IN 


Wy 


a \ 
Y IOI 


yy, Ik 
7 


Zi 
ii 


SEONE. MOLTING OF BIRDS: 


PLATE V. 


PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1896 


7, 


CLL 


< CEL, 


MOLTING OF BIRDS. 


SRONE: 


PROG. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1896. PEATE VL 


RHOADS ON AMERICAN POLAR HARES. 


PROG. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1896. 


PLATE 


VIL. 


RHOADS ON AMERICAN POLAR HARES. 


PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1896. 


RHOADS ON AMERICAN POLAR HARES. 


PROC. ACAD. NAT. SC 


RHOADS ON AMERICAN POLAR HARES. 


PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1896. PILATE kX: 


RHOADS ON AMERICAN POLAR HARES. 


PROG. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1896. PEATE x1: 


c— 


PILSBRY AND VANATTA ON CERION. 


PIA Ee 00. 


1896. 


NAT. SCI. PHILA. 


PROC. ACAD. 


a ll 


a aia 


PRESB RY AND VANATTA: ARIOLIMAX AND APHALLARION. 


PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1896 


B Lo — > 
ae a AG 
aN 
|. y Gen orifice 
. fords ~~ Vagina 


PILSBRY AND VANATTA: ARIOLIMAX AND APE 


TALLARION. 


PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1896. PLATE XIV. 


S oie 
So i? ua 


ag cretr actor 


| 


PILSBRY AND VANATTA: ARIOLIMAX AND APHALLARION. 


DALL. INSULAR LAND SHELL FAUNAS. 


rT 


PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1896. PLATE XVI. 


11 12 13 14 


DALE. INSULAR LAND SHELL FAUNAS 


bow 
re 
o 1 


DALL. INSULAR LAND SHELL FAUNAS. 


PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1896. PLATE XVIII. 


= 


HARRIS: EOCENE MOLLUSCA OF GULF STATES. 
(JACKSON @PECIES. ) 


4 
i 


PROG. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1896 


HARRIS. EOCENE MOLLUSCA OF GULF STATES. 


(JACKSON SPECIES 


PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1896. PLATE XX. 


\ 
SS SE Oy 


AT 


2 : 
TU a 


iINITIC 


PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1898. PLATE XXII. 


EPARRIS: EOCENE MOLLUSCA OF GULF STATES. 


(LOWER LIGNITIC SPECIES.) 


AD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1896. PLATE XXIII. 


PEAS. HOCENE MOLLUSCA OF GULF STATES. 
(LOWER LIGNITIC AND MIDWAY SPECIES.) 


PLATE XXIV. 


PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1896. 


R. W. Shufeldt, ad. Nat. Del. 


' SHUFELDT. FOSSIL MAMMALS AND BIRDS. 


PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1896. PLATE XXV. 


LOPETOMYs: sSiViTPEtitrrosme! 


PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI.-PHILA. 1896. PLATE XXVI. 


LE 


ye pea nee - 


PILSBRY DEL. 


PILSBRY. NEW SOUTH AMERICAN MOLLUSKS. 


PROG. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1896. PLATE XXVII. 


‘ “. ety Ee io . 
degre cor aha ALC . 


PILSBRY DEL. 


PILSBRY. NEW SOUTH AMERICAN MOLLUSKS. 


QH Academy of Natural Sciences 
1. of Philadelphia 
he Proceedings 


Biological 
& Medical 


Senals 


PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE 
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET 


Dos 2 
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY 


ne 


SILI DIE = 


Pig tea Fearn 
hess Te